c8000 Service Manual

ARCHITECT c8000 System Service and Support Manual
Manual Revision Number
96750-127
Front Matter Content Control Number
96662-127
© 2002, 2014 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL. All rights reserved.
Revision Log
Click to view Chapter 4 Removal and Replacement and Chapter 5 Verification Procedure Revision History
All other Revision History is located in the table below:
REVISION DATE SECTIONS REVISED/ADDED TSBs INCORPORATED ISAs INCORPORATED
96750-127 JAN/2014 c8000 Revision 96750-127 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-126 MAY/2013 c8000 Revision 96750-126 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-124 JUN/2012 c8000 Revision 96750-124 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-123 MAY/2011 c8000 Revision 96750-123 Change Listing N/A 126-104
96750-122 OCT/2010 c8000 Revision 96750-122 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-121 MAR/2010 c8000 Revision 96750-121 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-120 SEP/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-120 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-119 AUG/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-119 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-117 FEB/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-117 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-115 JULY/2007 c8000 Revision 96750-115 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-113 FEB/2007 c8000 Revision 96750-113 Change Listing N/A 126-071A
96750-112 MAY/2006 c8000 Revision 96750-112 Change Listing N/A 126-055
96750-111 MAR/2006 c8000 Revision 96750-111 Change Listing N/A 126-035

126-039
96750-109 AUG/2005 c8000 Revision 96750-109 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-106 FEB/2004 c8000 Revision 96750-106 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-104 APR/2003 c8000 Revision 96750-104 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-103 DEC/2002 c8000 Revision 96750-103 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-102 DEC/2002 c8000 Revision 96750-102 Change Listing N/A N/A
96750-101 SEP/2002 ALL (NEW PUBLICATION) N/A N/A
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-127) • © 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
• Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Proprietary Information
(Document Control Number 204670-102)
The information, documents and related graphics published herein (the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories.
Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that
the copyright notice appears on all copies;

use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by Abbott trained personnel or informational use only;
the Information is not modified in any way; and
no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and
may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or
modifications to the Information at any time without any prior notification.
Qualifications:
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for information and illustration purposes only and shall not be
used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts and screens do not reflect actual patient
names or test results.
The information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories-trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or
experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision and with cooperation from Abbott
Laboratories technical support or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or
arising from the use of the information by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to
those persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision
and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any user of the Information should make any oral, written
or electronic response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions, comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such
response and any information submitted therewith shall be considered non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to
reproduce, publish or otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever including, without limitation, the research,
development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such information. The sender of any information to
Abbott is fully responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and its non-infringement of any other
person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or services.
Updates to the information may be provided in either paper or electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the
most current information.
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates.
No use of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name may be made without the prior written authorization of
Abbott Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names,
and trade names are the property of their respective companies. All rights reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other
proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT
TO THE INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories
in various jurisdictions.
c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
c 8000 Revision 96750-102 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from version 96750-101 to 96750-102 of the ARCHITECT c 8000 Service and Support Manual.
Section Sections
Revision
Numbers Revised/Added
ALL GLOBAL Change "the one (1) screw" to "the screw"
ALL GLOBAL In "Remove Pump Door" Action, change "Remove the two (2) screws securing the pump center
(center front) door and remove the door." to "Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the pump
center (center front) door [2] and remove the door."
ALL GLOBAL In "Open Fluid Sense-AC/DC Panel" Action, change "Remove the one (1) screw securing the fluid
sense-AC/DC panel and swing the panel out." to "Remove the screw [1] securing the fluid sense-
AC/DC panel [2] and swing the panel out."
ALL GLOBAL In "Remove Front Middle Access Panel" Action, change "Remove the two (2) upper screws
securing the front middle access panel and loosen the two (2) bottom screws." to "Remove the two
(2) upper screws [1] securing the front middle access panel [3] and loosen the two (2) bottom
screws. [2]."
ALL GLOBAL Change "LN7D36-01" to "(2-94851-02)"
4 GLOBAL Change "Disconnect Main Transformer from Main Power Supply" Action to "Remove Main
Transformer Cover" and "Disconnect Main Transformer from Main Power Supply"
4 GLOBAL Change "Install Main Transformer" Action to "Install Main Transformer" and "Install Main
Transformer Cover"
Frnt Title Change to "Document Control Number 96750-102"
Frnt Title Change to "Document Control Number 96662-102"
1 Change to "Document Control Number 96663-102"
1 1.1 In "Introduction", change "...servicing of (specific instrument or instrument category, etc.) systems..."
to "...servicing of this system..."
1 1.1 In "Introduction", change "...harm to an (operator or service personnel). Warnings..." to "...harm to

service personnel. Warnings..."
1 1.1 In "Introduction", change "...throughout this (manual/guide) to alert (operators or service personnel)
to potential..." to "...throughout this manual to alert service personnel to potential..."
1 1.1 In "Introduction", change "...words (example, Danger) and..." to "...words (example, DANGER)
and..."
1 1.1 In "Handling Spills", change "...such as 0.5% sodium hypochlorite..." to "...such as 0.1% sodium
hypochlorite..."
1 1.1 Replace existing content with RSH 1.1 content

2 In "CPU Board Specifications", add Note "When installing a new style CPU Board (not shown) with
flash memory, verify that the AC/DC Controller Board is jumpered correctly. S2 switch one (1),
located on the AC/DC Controller Board, is in the ON position for a CPU with Flash Memory and
OFF for a CPU with Disk On Chip."
2 In "AC/DC Controller", add "S1 & S2 Switch Settings" table
2 In "SMC", add "S1 Switch Settings" table
4 C2 Change to "Document Control Number 96668-102"
4 D1 Change to "Document Control Number 96670-102"
4 E2 Change to "Document Control Number 96673-102"

4 F1 Change to "Document Control Number 96681-102"
4 G1 Change to "Document Control Number 96682-102"
4 G2 Change to "Document Control Number 96683-102"
4 L1 Change to "Document Control Number 96689-102"
4 L2 Change to "Document Control Number 96690-102"
4 M1 Change to "Document Control Number 96692-102"
4 M2.04 Split "Remove Electronics Drawer Fan" Action into "Remove Connector Panel" and "Remove
Electronics Drawer Fan"
4 M2.04 Split "Install Electronics Drawer Fan" Action into "Install Connector Panel" and "Install Electronics
Drawer Fan"
4 N1 Change to "Document Control Number 96697-102"
4 N1.06 Add callouts to "Remove/Install Float Switch, Water Bath"
4 R1 Change to "Document Control Number 96701-102"
4 R2.05 Add placeholder for R2.05 Joint, Tubing

4 R5.08 Add placeholder for R5.08 Slide Mechanism Pipettor Head
4 S1 Change to "Document Control Number 96709-102"
4 T9 Change to "Document Control Number 96719-102"
4 T9.05 Delete
4 T9.13 Delete
4 W1 Change to "Document Control Number 96720-102"
4 W1.17 "Remove Degasser Manifold" Action, change "...two (2) tubes [1] to the degasser" to "...two (2)
tubes [1] from the degasser"
5 5.1 Delete 1005, 1006, 1007, 1035, 1105, 1126, 1160, 2453, 3012, 3013m 3120, 3126, 3400, 3420,
3535, 3610, 3620, 3710, 4060, 4065, 4070, 5141, 5145, 5150, 6005, 6007, 6008, 6022, 6029, 6038,
6059, 6071, 6075, 6114, 6115, 6200, 9005
5 5.1 In 1008, add "1 Quick Test"
5 5.1 In 1008, delete "4 Optics drift"
5 5.1 In 6070, change "This procedure performs that following functions:" to "This procedure performs the
following functions:"
5 5.2 GLOBAL In "Determine Temperature of reagent grade type II water" Action, change "Fill a beaker with 50mL
of reagent grade type II water, which has been at room temperature for at least 1 hour." to "Fill a
beaker with 50mL of room temperature reagent grade type II water."
5 5.2 GLOBAL Change "2-89825-01" to "2-89825-02"
5 5.2 GLOBAL Change xrefs to M&D "1123" to "1101"
5 5.2 GLOBAL Change xrefs to M&D "1125" to "1101"
5 5.2 In P-103, "Install Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #2" Action, change "...sticking out
of the grommet approximately 2mm." to "...sticking out of the grommet approximately 5mm."
5 5.2 Add content for P-107
5 5.2 In P-115, "Adjust Weight Sensors" Action, delete Step 1 and Note
5 5.2 In P-128, "Adjust Mixer Height" Action, change "Adjust the brass colored shafts..." to "Adjust the
brass shafts..."
5 5.2 In P-131, "Verify Nozzle Gap" Action, change "mounting plate is 1.5mm...." to "mounting plate is
1.5mm. [2]..." and add A2_2002
5 5.2 In P-135, "Materials Required", add "Sample Tube with Blank Label"
5 5.2 In P-159, "Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required", update part nums and change "Wedge" to
"Cartridge"
5 5.2 In P-159, "Storage and Preparation of the Reagents/Calibrators/Controls", add content
5 5.2 In P-159, Preparation, delete Step 3
5 5.2 In P-159, "Scan Reagents" Action, change "Wedges" to "Cartridges"
5 5.2 In P-159, "Calibrate Na, Cl, K, AST, LD and TPScan Reagents" Action, replace existing content
with new content
5 5.2 In P-159, "Run Na, Cl, K, AST, LD and TP Samples" Action, major content changes
5 5.2 In P-64, in "Clean R1Carousel BCR Filter", "Clean R2Carousel BCR Filter", "Clean Sample
Carousel BCR Filter", add Class 2 Laser Radiation Caution
6 Change "This Chapter contains..." to "This chapter contains..."
6 Change "...time-based dependant on..." to "...time-based dependent on..."
6 Change "Lubricating Grease (LN 7D36-01)" to ""
6 In "Suggested PM Kit - PM #2", change "9D43-01" to "9D43-02"
6 In "Suggested PM Kit - PM #3", add "7-93426-01, Diaphragm" and "7-93427-01, Sheet Valve"
6 In "Suggested PM Kit - PM #3", change "2-89517-01" to "2-89517-02"
6 In "PM Procedure #3", "Clean fan filters." Action, change "Perform P-169 Clean Filter Sample
Handler Card Cage Filters." to "Perform P-169 Clean Filter Sample Handler Card Cage Filters (15
min)."
6 In "PM Procedure #3"add "Replace bellows and poppet valves on the three bellows pumps." after
"Replace H.C. waste tubing."
6 In "PM Procedure #3", "Lubricate pumps/pipettors." Action, replace "Perform P-142 Sample/Reagent
Syringe Drive Lubrication (20 min)." with "Perform P-168 Sample and Reagent Pipettor Lubrication
(20 min)."
6 In "PM Procedure #3", "Lubricate pumps/pipettors." Action, add "Perform P-137 Reaction Carousel
Lubrication (15 min)." after "Perform P-168 Sample and Reagent Pipettor Lubrication (20 min)."
6 In "PM #1 Checklist", add "(name printed)" and "(name signature)"
7 7.1 In "System Specifications", change "Identify Site Requirements for Operation Manual" to "Site
Requirements for Operation Manual Use"
7 7.1 In "System Specifications", change "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" to
"Water and Waste Specifications"
7 7.1 In "System Specifications", change "Noise and Seismic Anchoring Specifications" to "Seismic
Anchoring Specifications"
7 7.1 In "System Specifications", add "Environmental Specifications" and "Floor Loading Specifications"
7 7.1 In "Operations Manual Use", change "Windows® 95 or Windows NT® Operating System" to
"Windows® 2000 Operating System"; "Pentium® 166MHz Processor" to "Pentium® II Processor";
"32 Mb RAM" to "640 Mb RAM"; "4x CD-ROM Drive" to "24x CD-ROM Drive"; "15" Color Monitor
(800x600 resolution)" to "17" Color Monitor (800x600 resolution)"
7 7.1 In "Approximate Physical Measurements", change "1200 lbs. (545 kg)" to "1465 lbs. (646.4 kg)"
7 7.1 In "Approximate Physical Measurements", change "55 lbs. (24.9 kg)" to "55 lbs. (25 kg)"
7 7.1 In "Approximate Physical Measurements", change "17" (43.2 cm)" to "17.8" (45.2 cm)"
7 7.1 In "Approximate Physical Measurements", change "22.9" (58.1 cm)" to "22.9" (58.2 cm)"
7 7.1 In "Approximate Physical Measurements", change "71.2 lbs. (31.3 kg)" to "69 lbs. (31.3 kg)"
7 7.1 In "Approximate Physical Measurements", delete "Flat, level floor..."
7 7.1 In "Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service", add Note "See Dimensional Layout
Drawings."
7 7.1 In "Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service", change "Clearance in front of assay
modules (for safety, to open front doors, and access, remove and replace bulk liquids/waste)" to
"Clearance in front of assay modules (for safety and to allow access, and access, for removal and
replacement of bulk liquids/waste)"
7 7.1 In "Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service", change "...required an alternate method of
getting the system to the lab will need to be found." to "For door openings less than 31" (78.7 cm)
wide, an alternate method of getting the system to the lab will need to be found."
7 7.1 In "Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service", delete "Power Cord Length - SCC"
7 7.1 In "Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service", delete "Printer Power Cord Length"
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (i 2000 SR), change "30 Amp" to "20 Amp";
"30R" to "20R"; "30A" to "20A"; "32A" to "16A"
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (SCC), add "Power Cord Length"; "6' (1.8 m)"
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (SCC), add "EUR", change "180 - 264" to
"180 - 284", add "US" for 220/110
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (Modem), change "110V - NEMA 5-15 3-
prong
220V - IEC 320 M grounded" to "US only - 110V - NEMA 5-15 3-prong"
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (Printer), add "Power Cord Length"; "6' (1.8
m)"
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (UPS (110) (SCC Only)), add "N/A"; "110
VAC, 14 Amp Circuit (90 - 132 VAC @ 47 - 63 HZ) Resettable Circuit Breaker "
7 7.1 In "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications" (Waste Pump Switch must be manually set.),
change "220 VAC, 0.8 Amp 230 Circuit" to "220 VAC, 0.8 Amp Circuit"
7 7.1 Change "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" to "Water and Waste
Specifications"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), replace "Gravity flow,
barb fitting, waste tubing exits instrument approximately 8" (20.3 cm) above floor- level." with
"Instrument drains are gravity flow, with barb fittings at approximately 8 inches (20.3 cm) above the
floor."
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), move "c 8000
Maximum Flow Capacity = 300 L/hour"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), delete "c 8000 Liquid
Waste"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), split "Liquid Waste" into
"Liquid Waste" and "c 8000 Liquid Waste"
7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (c 8000 Liquid Waste), add "(High
concentration waste collection/handling as per local requirements/regulations.)"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), move "If floor drain is
not available and elevated drain (sink) is used, external Waste Pump is required." to "Waste Pump
Required"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), move "Maximum Flow
Capacity with ARCHITECT ARM"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), move "132 L/hour
(2.2L/minute)"
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Waste Pump Required), add "A waste
pump is required for each module."
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Waste Pump Required), change "10
feet ..." to "Length of 10 feet..."
7 7.1 In "Water, Waste, Temperature and Humidity Specifications" (Liquid Waste), delete "Temperature
and Humidity"
7 7.1 Change "Noise and Seismic Anchoring Specifications" to "Seismic Anchoring Specifications"
7 7.1 In "Seismic Anchoring Specifications", delete "Noise"

7 7.1 In "Seismic Anchoring Specifications", change "...business computers." to "...business equipment."
7 7.1 In "Seismic Anchoring Specifications", add "To secure the c8000, site personnel should follow
internal procedures for securing business equipment."
7 7.1 In "Seismic Anchoring Specifications", add "Enviromental Specifications"
7 7.1 In "Seismic Anchoring Specifications", add "Floor Loading Specifications"
7 7.2 Add degree (º) character for temperatures
7 7.2 In "Primary Contact Name", add "E-mail Address"
7 7.2 In "Second Contact Name", add "E-mail Address"
7 7.2 In "Hospital Maintenance Contact Name", add "E-mail Address"
7 7.2 Change "Door and Entry Requirements" to "c 8000 Door and Entry Requirements"
7 7.2 In "c 8000 Door and Entry Requirements", change "System requires 31" (78.7 cm) wide..." to "The c
8000 requires 31" (78.7 cm) wide..."
7 7.2 In "c 8000 Door and Entry Requirements", change "For doors less than 31" (78.7 cm), removal of
door & hinges may be required, or an alternate method of getting the system to the lab will need to
be found." to "For doors less than 31" (78.7 cm), an alternate method of getting the c 8000 to the
lab will have to be found."
7 7.2 Add "i 2000 SR Door and Entry Requirements"
7 7.2 In "Optional Equipment Requirements", add "SCC Weight = 55 lbs. (25 kg) SCC UPS Weight = 43
lbs (19.5 kg)"
7 7.2 In "Optional Equipment Requirements", add printer models
7 7.2 In "Optional Equipment Requirements", change "Printer will be available..." to "If printer is supplied
by customer, will printer will be available..."
7 7.2 In "Modem", add "Modem Phone Line Number"
7 7.2 In "c 8000® Module Electrical Supply Requirements", add "(name printed)"; "(name signature)";
"(date)"
7 7.2 In "c 8000® Module Electrical Supply Requirements", change "Requires NEMA L6-20R, 250V, Twist
Lock Receptacle" to "US - Requires NEMA L6-20R, 250V, Twist Lock Receptacle"
7 7.2 In "c 8000® Module Electrical Supply Requirements", add "EUR - Requires IEC 309 (220V - 16A
250V)"
7 7.2 In "i 2000 SR Module Electrical Supply Requirements", change "Dedicated/Isolated 30 Amp Line for
each assay module. 30 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse for each module (contact site electrician)." to
"Dedicated/Isolated 20 Amp Line for each assay module. 20 Amp Circuit Breaker or Fuse for each
module (contact site electrician)."
7 7.2 In "i 2000 SR Module Electrical Supply Requirements", add "(name printed)"; "(name signature)";
"(date)"
7 7.2 In "i 2000 SR Module Electrical Supply Requirements", change "Requires NEMA L6-30P, 250V,
Twist Lock Receptacle" to "US - Requires NEMA L6-20P, 250V, Twist Lock Receptacle"
7 7.2 In "i 2000 SR Module Electrical Supply Requirements", delete "(15' (4.2m) power cord)"
7 7.2 In "Lab Operating Temperature", add "c 8000 = 2,200 watts; i 2000 SR = 2500 watts; ci8200 = 4700
watts"
7 7.2 In "Lab Operating Temperature", add "(name printed)"; "(name signature)"; "(date)"
7 7.2 In "Water Quality for c 8000", add "Maximum Flow capacity for c 8000 = 300 L/hour."
7 7.2 In "Water Quality for ARCHITECT ARM", replace "1 MegOhm-cm @ 25º C (77º F)"; and Note
"NCCLS Type II Reagent Grade water is acceptable." with "Water supply must have..." and
checklist from "Water Quality for c 8000"
7 7.2 In "Water Quality for c 8000", add "(High concentration waste collection/handling as per local
requirements/regulations.)"
7 7.2 In "Primary LIS Contact Name", add "E-mail Address"
7 7.2 In "Second LIS Contact Name", add "E-mail Address"
7 7.2 In "Customer Signature and Date" and "Abbott Signature and Date", add "(name printed)"; "(name
signature)"; "(date)"
8 8.1 Add "(name printed)"; "(name signature)"; "(date)"
8 8.2 In "SCC Hardware and Cable Installation", add "Install SCC System Software"
8 8.2 In "SCC Hardware and Cable Installation", "Install Sample Probe" Action, replace Step "Remove the
probe screw [4] from..." with "Secure the probe ground wire (not shown) to the mounting plate."
8 8.2 In "SCC Hardware and Cable Installation", "Install Sample Probe" Action, change "Stabilize the
pipettor and tighten the screw..." to "Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw [4] ..."
8 8.2 In "SCC Hardware and Cable Installation", "Install Sample Probe" Action, replace Step "Remove the
probe screw [4] from..." with "Secure the probe ground wire (not shown) to the mounting plate."
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Module - Install Accessories", delete "Access ICT Module" Action
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Module - Install Accessories", change "black seals" and "seals" to "O-ring"
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Attach External Plumbing and Fill Water Bath", add "Electrical Shock Hazard"
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Attach External Plumbing and Fill Water Bath", "Prerequisite" Action, delete Note "Attach
the high concentration waste line..."
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Attach External Plumbing and Fill Water Bath", add "Connect AC Power Cord and
Voltage Selection Plug" Action
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Attach External Plumbing and Fill Water Bath", "Prerequisite" Action, delete Step "Install
sample carriers as needed."
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Robotic Positions Setup", "R1 Pipettor Calibration" Action, add Step "Perform 1101
Robotics Test Tool and align positions E1 and E2."
8 8.2 In "c 8000 Robotic Positions Setup", "R2 Pipettor Calibration" Action, add Step "Perform 1101
Robotics Test Tool and align positions E1 and E2."
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-106) • Copyright 2002, 2004 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added Revision
4 ALL Change "TBD" in "Time Required" and "Tools/Materials" to "Not Assessed"
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change "Manual Revision Number 96750-103" to "Manual Revision Number 96750-104"
Frnt Title Change "Front Matter Content Control Number 96662-103" to "Front Matter Content
Control Number 96662-104"
Frnt Prop Info Change "...WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BYLAW, CONTRACT OR
OTHERWISE..." to "...WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW,
CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE..."
Frnt Prop Info Change "ABBOTT ARCHITECT, i 2000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories."
to "ABBOTT ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories."
Frnt Prop Info Change "i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, i 2000 SR and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories." to "i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories."
Frnt Prop Info Change "© 2002 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL. All rights reserved." to "© 2002,
2003 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL. All rights reserved."
Frnt Rev Log Add 96750-104 info to Revision Log
7 Change "(Document Control Number 96723-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96723-

103)"
7 7.1 System Description column of Processing Module; added "module covers"; "between rear module
Specifications covers and wall"; "behind the system"; "modules." Deleted "of cable tray"; "behind the
system"; "system"; "assay."
7 7.1 System Description column of Door and Entry Requirements (c 8000); added "The c8000 module"
Specifications deleted "System" replaced "system" with "module" in Note
7 7.1 System Description column of Door and Entry Requirements (i 2000 SR); added "The i 2000 SR
Specifications module" deleted "System" replaced "system" with "module" in Note
7 7.1 System System c 8000; Note--deleted 20 Amp

Specifications
7 7.1 System System i 2000 SR; Note--deleted 20 Amp; replaced "32" with "16" Amp circuit
Specifications
7 7.1 System Water (ARCHITECT ARM Installed) row: Added "Minimum"; "(1.7 L/minute)"; "(2.2
Specifications L/minute)"
7 7.1 System c 8000 Liquid Waste row: Added "optional"

Specifications
7 7.1 System Instrument column i 2000: Added "SR"

Specifications
7 7.1 System Force at each Foot column: Added metric measurements; deleted "in Pounds /in2"
Specifications
7 7.1 System Inserted revised graphic A2_6004
Specifications
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist Specification / Criteria column: Added (US) or 16 Amp Line (EUR)
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist i 2000 SR Module Electrical Supply Requirements column: Added "(US) or 16 Amp Line
(EUR)"; deleted "/Isolated"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist 60 Hz Power Measurements: Add col. "Breaker Open" and "<0.5 VAC" for all entries
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist 50 Hz Power Measurements: Add col. "Breaker Open" and "<0.5 VAC" for all entries
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist Water Quality for ARCHITECT ARM row: Added "Minimum of 1.7 L/minute"; deleted "1.4
to 3 L/minute 1400 to 3000 mL/minute"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist Liquid Waste - c 8000 row: Added "the optional"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist Liquid Waste - i 2000 SR row: Added "(17cm)"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist Sample Barcode Labels row: change "barcode" to "bar code"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist LIS Interface Data column: Added "Has the ARCHITECT System ABBOTT Standard
Interface RS-232 Manual been supplied to the LIS company? INSERT LINK TO
92613.htm"; deleted "Has an LIS Interface Specification (LN06F71-01) been supplied to
LIS company?"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist Change "Sample Barcode Labels" Action to "Sample Bar Code Labels"
8 Change "(Document Control Number 96724-102)" to "(Document Control Number 96724-

103)"
8 GLOBAL Change "barcode" to "bar code"
8 8.1 c 8000 Installation New content: revised 8.1

Checklist
8 8.2 ci82000 Installation New content: new file created (8.2)

Checklist
8 c 8000 Module - Unpack Remove Center Boards, move "[1]" callout to "bolts"
(2811.fm)
8 SCC Hardware and Unpack System Control Center (SCC), delete "Unpack the SCC..."
Cable Installation
(2811.fm)
8 SCC Hardware and Unpack System Control Center (SCC), delete "If you have a UPS..." and Lifting Hazard
Cable Installation Note.
(2811.fm)
8 SCC Hardware and Unpack UPS (Optional), delete "This procedure constitutes..." Note.
Cable Installation
(2811.fm)
8 SCC Hardware and Connect SCC CPU Peripherals, change "Connect the monitor signal cable to the rear..."
Cable Installation to "Connect the monitor signal cable to the video connection at the rear..."
(2811.fm)
8 SCC Hardware and Install SCC System Software, replace Step with modified content and add Note "Due to
Cable Installation the rate of system software releases, instructions..."
(2811.fm)
8 c 8000 Module - Install Install Pipettor Cover, delete callout "[7]"

Accessories (2811.fm)
8 c 8000 Module - Install Install ICT Probe and Module, change "...to reattach the top port [7] " to "...to attach the
Accessories (2811.fm) top port "
8 c 8000 Attach External Add Chemical Hazard

Plumbing and Fill Water
Bath (2811.fm)
8 c 8000 Installation of Delete "Install Accessories"

Pressure Monitoring/Clot
Detection Subsystem
(2811.fm)
8 c 8000 Installation of Add "Continue Installation" Action

Pressure Monitoring/Clot
Detection Subsystem
(2811.fm)
8 c 8000 Robotic Positions Deleted "RSH Calibration" Action

Setup (2811.fm)
Graphics A2_6004 Changed dimensions
Graphics A2_6004 Correct instrument names

A2_6005
A2_6006
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change "Manual Revision Number 96750-104" to "Manual Revision Number 96750-105"
Frnt Title Change "Front Matter Content Control Number 96662-104" to "Front Matter Content Control
Number 96662-105"
1 1.1 Incorporate current safety template
1 1.2 Rewrite all
7 7.1 Water and Waste Specifications; c 8000 Water; add Note "The fitting on the back of the c
8000 is not brass, it is a different alloy."
7 7.1 Water and Waste Specifications; c 8000 Water; Water Connection - reformat to standard
7 7.1 Water and Waste Specifications; c 8000 Water; add "Flow Rate" and content
7 7.1 Water and Waste Specifications; c 8000 Water; add "Average Consumption" and content
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist; Water Quality for c 8000; add Note "The fitting on the back of the c 8000
is not brass, it is a different alloy."
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist; Water Quality for c 8000; change "Water Connection." to "Water
Connection:"
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist; Water Quality for c 8000; add "Flow Rate" and content
7 7.2 Pre-Site Checklist; Water Quality for c 8000; add "Average Consumption" and content
Section Sections
Revision
GLOBAL ALL Deleted prefix and suffix from part numbers
GLOBAL ALL Changed "The processing module must be in Stopped, or Offline status" to "The processing module
must be in Stopped or Offline status."
GLOBAL ALL Change "screw (1)" to "screw"
GLOBAL ALL Change "one (1)" to "one"
GLOBAL ALL Change "Power OFF the instrument (use the main circuit breaker located at the rear of the
instrument)" to "Power OFF the c 8000 processing module (use the main circuit breaker located at
the rear of the instrument)"
GLOBAL ALL Change "Optics/Temperature" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Solenoid/Sensors" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "BarCode Readers" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Fluidics/Wash" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Modules" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Daily" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Reaction Mechanisms" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Pipettors" to Bold font
GLOBAL ALL Change "Category" to "category"

GLOBAL ALL Change"rear of the module" to "rear of the processing module"
GLOBAL ALL Remove "R&R" from links to Removal and Replacement
Frnt Title Change Manual Revision Number to "96750-105"
Frnt Title Change Front Matter Content Control Number to "96662-106"
2 2.1 CPU; change "CPU Board" to "CPU Board (old style)"

2 2.1 CPU; add "CPU Board (new style)" and A2_2839
2 2.1 CPU; CPU Board Specifications; change content
2 2.1 DAQ; change "Photometric Signals" to "ICT Signals"
2 2.1 SMC; S1 Switch Settings; S1-1; change to "Exhibition Mode (see P-155 Demonstration Mode for
more information)"
2 2.1 DAQ Block Diagram: Change "This circuit includes and EPLD" to "This circuit includes an EPLD"
2 2.1 MECH LED: Change "R1 CCAROUSEL" to "R1 CAROUSEL"
2 2.1 MECH LED: Change "LEVEL HIGHT FLOAT" to "LEVEL HIGH FLOAT"
2 2.2 Mixer Driver; add "Mixer Driver (old style)", "Mixer Driver (new style)", and A2_2512
2 2.2 Five-Phase Motor Driver; add SPMD# descriptions
2 2.3 LLS Board; add "Sample Pipettor Liquid Level Sense", A2_9052 and "Reagent Pipettor Level
Sense", A2_9053
2 2.3 AC/DC Driver; add A2_2052
2 2.4 Add "IREF Level Detect Board" and content
2 2.5 Main PS; add "Main Power Supply Compatibility" and content
2 2.5 Main PS; add "Power Supply (93161) + Processing Module (SN C800224)" and content
2 2.5 SMD/SH PS; change "SMD/SH PS (front view)" to "SMD/SH PS (SN C800223 - front view)"
2 2.5 SMD/SH PS; add "SMD/SH PS (SN C800224 - front view)" and content
4 Locator Change Document Control Number to "96666-104"
4 ALL GLOBAL: Change all part numbers to base 5
4 ALL GLOBAL: Change "Warning: Chemical Hazard" and "Warning: Hot Surfaces to Cautions"
4 C1 Change Document Control Number to "96667-103"
4 C1.01 Preparation; change content
4 C1.01 Remove Optics Assembly; change content
4 C1.01 Install Optics Assembly; change content
4 C1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 C1.02 Change "Perform Optics Test" Action to "Verification
4 C1.02 Verification; delete "Select the Optics/temperature..."
4 C1.04 Part number; change from "83101" to "93101"
4 C1.05 Part Name; change to "Plate, mount, heat filter"

4 C1.05 Perform Optics Test; change content
C1.06 Install Heat Absorbing Filter Holder; change content
C1.06 Remove Heat Absorbing Filter; change content
4 C1.07 Add content
4 C1.08 Change "Spacer, optics, guides" to "Spacer, optics, guide"
4 C2.01 Install Reaction Carousel Main Gear; change content
4 C2.01 Perform Optics Trigger Sensor Check; change content
4 C2.01 Perform Optics Test; change content
4 C2.01 Perform Pipettor Calibration; change content
4 C2.02 Remove Sensor, Photo, Multiple Use (Pitch)
4 C2.03 Install Reaction Carousel Motor Assembly; change content
4 C2.03 Perform Optics Trigger Sensor Check; change content
4 C2.03 Add Verification Actions: Perform Optics Test; Verify Mixer Alignment, Verify Cuvette Washer
Alignment, Verify ICT Alignment
4 C2.05 Verification; change content

4 C2.07 Add Verification Actions: Verify Mixer Alignment, Verify Cuvette Washer Alignment, Verify ICT
Alignment
4 C2.07 Install Guide Roller Assembly; change content
4 C3 Change "(c8-c3)" to "(c8-C3)"
4 D1 Change Document Control Number to "96670-103"
4 D1.01 Preparation; change content
4 D1.01 Add "Remove Pump Door" Action and content
4 D1.01 Remove Reagent Supply Center #1; change content
4 D1.01 Install Reagent Supply Center #1; change content
4 D1.01 Add "Install Pump Door" Action and content
4 D1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content

4 D1.01 Verification; change content
4 D1.02 Add "Remove Pump Door" Action and content
4 D1.02 Add "Install Pump Door" Action and content
4 D1.03 Remove Cover Detector; change content
4 D1.04 Install Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #1; change content
4 D1.09 Change part name to "Barcode Reader, 2D Reagent I400A"
4 D2.01 Preparation
4 D2.01 Remove Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 D2.01 Install Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 D2.02 Remove Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 D2.02 Install Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 D2.03 Preparation
4 D2.03 Remove Cover Detector; change content
4 D2.04 Add Action "Remove Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump" and content
4 D2.04 Remove Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #2; replace Action with new content
4 D2.04 Connect TEMP Connector; delete Action
4 D2.04 Install Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #2; replace Action with new content
4 D2.04 Add Action "Install Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump" and content
4 D2.04 Power ON Module; delete Action
4 D2.04 Verify Detector; delete Action
4 D2.04 Prepare for Operation; delete Action
4 D2.05 Change part name to "BCR Assy, 2D, R2"
4 D2.05 Remove 2D BCR; change content
4 D2.05 Install 2D BCR; change content
4 D2.06 Change part name to "Barcode Reader, 2D Reagent I400A"
4 D2.06 Remove 2D BCR; change content
4 D2.06 Install 2D BCR; change content
4 D2.08 Change part name to "Hinge, Cover latch"
4 D2.17 Insulation, R2, sheet 3; add procedure
4 D2.17 Part Number; change "93430" to "93431"
4 D3.01 Perform Temp Checks; change content

4 E2 Change Document Control Number to "96673-103"
4 E2.01 Preparation; change content
4 E2.01 Install Sample Wash Cup; change content
4 E2.01 Verification; change content
4 E2.02 Remove Reagent Wash Cup R1; change content
4 E2.02 Remove Reagent Wash Cup R2; change content
4 E2.02 Install Reagent Wash Cup R1; change content
4 E2.02 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 E2.03 Change part name to "Cup, Mixer Wash"
4 E2.03 Access Mixer Wash Cup; change content
4 E2.03 Install Mixer Wash Cup (#1 and #2); change content
4 E3.01 Remove Manifold, Cuvette Wash to Vacuum; change content
4 E3.04 Remove Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 E3.04 Install Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 E3.05 Disconnect Cuvette Wash Pump Tubing"
4 E3.05 Replace the Valve and Manifold Assembly; change content

4 E3.05 Install Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; remove " [1]"
4 E3.07 Change part number to "89187" and change part name to "Fitting, T. conc. waste"
4 E4.01 Remove Pump, Wash Solution; change content
4 E4.01 Install Pump, Wash Solution; change content
4 E4.02 Remove Pump, Wash Solution; change content
4 E4.02 Install Pump, Wash Solution; change content
4 E5.01 Remove Pump, ICT Reference; change content
4 E5.01 Install Pump, ICT Reference; change content
4 E5.02 Remove Pump, ICT Reference; change content
4 E5.02 Install Pump, ICT Reference; change content
4 E6.01 Remove Pump, ICT Aspiration; change content

4 E6.01 Install Pump, ICT Aspiration; change content
4 E7.01 Remove Inner Probe Wash Pump; change content
4 E7.01 Install Inner Probe Wash Pump; change content
4 E7.02 Remove Inner Probe Wash Pump; change content
4 E7.02 Install Inner Probe Wash Pump; change content
4 E8 Change "H.C. Waste Pump (c8-E8), Bellows" to "H.C. Waste Pump Bellows, (c8-E8)"
4 E8.01 Remove H.C. Waste Pump; change content
4 E8.01 Install H.C. Waste Pump; change content
4 E8.02 Remove H.C. Waste Pump; change content
4 E8.02 Install H.C. Waste Pump; change content

4 E9.01 Remove Cuvette Wash Pump; change content
4 E9.01 Install Cuvette Wash Pump; change content
4 E9.02 Remove Cuvette Wash Pump; change content
4 E9.02 Install Cuvette Wash Pump; change content
4 F1 Change Document Control Number to "96681-103"
4 F1.01 Preparation; change content
4 F1.01 Remove Wash Solution Valve; change content
4 F1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 F1.02 Preparation; change content
4 F1.02 Remove Photo Sensor; change content
4 F1.02 Install Photo Sensor; change content
4 F1.02 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 F1.03 Replace all content
4 F1.04 Delete
4 F1.05 Delete
4 F1.06 Delete
4 F1.07 Delete
4 F1.08 Delete
4 F1.09 Delete
4 F1.10 Move to F1.04
4 G1 Change Document Control Number to "96682-104"
4 G1.01 Preparation; change content
4 G1.01 Remove Sample Syringe Drive; change content
4 G1.01 Install Sample Syringe Drive; change content
4 G1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 G1.02 Remove Sample Syringe Drive; change content
4 G1.02 Install Sample Syringe Drive; change content
4 G1.03 Part name; change to "Cover, syringe, samp/reag"

4 G2.01 Remove Reagent Syringe Drive; change content
4 G2.01 Install Reagent Syringe Drive; change content
4 G2.02 Remove Reagent Syringe Drive; change content
4 G2.02 Install Reagent Syringe Drive; change content
4 G2.03 Part name; change to "Cover, syringe, samp/reag"
4 G3.01 Remove Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve; change content
4 G3.04 Remove All Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valves; change content
4 G3.04 Remove Reagent 2 Syringe Drive; change content
4 G3.04 Remove Manifold; change content
4 G3.04 Install Reagent 2 Syringe Drive; change content
4 G3.08 Replace with new content
4 K1 Change Document Control Number to "96685-102"
4 K1.01 Preparation; change content
4 K1.01 Remove Vacuum Pump; change content
4 K1.01 Install Vacuum Pump; change content
4 K1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 K1.02 Remove Vacuum Pump Diaphragm; change content
4 K1.02 Install Vacuum Pump Diaphragm; change content

4 K2.01 Remove Degasser; change content
4 K2.01 Install Degasser; change content
4 K3.02 Part number; change to "3E50-31"; change content
4 K3.02 Verification; change content
4 K3.03 Part name; change to "Switch, Float, High Conc. Wast"; change content
4 K3.03 Verification; change content
4 K3.04 Delete
4 K4.01 Remove Vacuum Pump; change content
4 K4.01 Install Vacuum Pump; change content
4 L1 Change Document Control Number to "96689-103"
4 L1.01 Prerequisite; change content
4 L1.01 Preparation; change content
4 L1.01 Remove PS Securing Screws (Front); change content
4 L1.01 Remove Power Cord, Voltage Selector and Ground; change content
4 L1.01 Remove PS Securing Screws (Rear); change content
4 L1.01 Remove Main Power Supply; change content
4 L1.01 Install Main Power Supply; change content
4 L1.01 Install Connector Panel; change content
4 L1.01 Install PS Securing Screws (Front); change content
4 L1.01 Install Front Right Access Panel; change content
4 L1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 L1.01 Verification; change content
4 L1.02 Part name; change to "Power Supply, 5V, 20A, PS1"

4 L1.03 Parts; change part number to "93443" and part name to "Power Supply,12V. PS2, c8"
4 L1.03 Connect the instrument to Supply Power; change Action to "Connect Processing Module to Supply
Power"
4 L1.05 Power ON Processing Module; change content
4 L1.08 Connect CNN1 and Power ON Processing Module; change content
4 L1.09 Remove PS Securing Screws (Front); change content
4 L1.09 Remove Power Cord, Voltage Selector and Ground; change content
4 L1.09 Remove PS Securing Screws (Rear); change content
4 L1.09 Remove Main Power Supply; change content
4 L1.09 Install Main Power Supply; change content
4 L1.09 Install PS Securing Screws (Rear); change content
4 L1.09 Install Connector Panel; change content
4 L1.09 Install PS Securing Screws (Front); change content
L1.10 Remove PS Securing Screws (Front); change content
L1.10 Remove Power Cord, Voltage Selector and Ground; change content
L1.10 Remove PS Securing Screws (Rear); change content
L1.10 Remove Main Power Supply; change content
L1.10 Install Main Power Supply; change content
L1.10 Install PS Securing Screws (Rear); change content
L1.10 Install Connector Panel; change content
L1.10 Install PS Securing Screws (Front); change content
L1.10 Install Front Right Access Panel; change content



4 L2.01 Remove Rear Frame Brace; change content
4 L2.01 Remove SMD/SH Power Supply; change content
4 L2.01 Install SMD/SH Power Supply; change content
4 L2.01 Secure Power Supply; change content

4 L2.03 Parts; add "93528" and "Circuit Breaker, 8A"

4 L2.05 Secure Power Supply and Power ON Processing Module; split into two Actions "Secure Power
Supply" and "Power ON Processing Module" - move appropriate Reference material
4 L2.06 Parts; change part name to "Power Supply, 36V"
4 L2.06 Secure Power Supply and Power ON Processing Module; split into two Actions "Secure Power
Supply" and "Power ON Processing Module" - move appropriate Reference material
4 L2.07 Parts; change part name to "Power Supply, 5V/12V"
4 L2.07 Remove PS6 5V/12V Power Supply; change content
4 L2.08 Parts; change part name to "Power Supply, 24V Switching"

4 L2.09 Add "Power Supply, 24/36V C8B (PS5)" and content
4 L2.09 Install SMD/SH Power Supply (24/46) Cover; remove " [1]"
4 L3.01 Remove Voltage Selector and Ground; change content
4 L3.01 Remove Main Transformer; change content
4 L3.01 Install Main Transformer; change content
4 L3.01 Install Voltage Selector and Ground; change content
4 M1 Change Document Control Number to "96692-104"
4 M1.01 Change procedure title to "Card Cage w/o bds"
4 M1.01 Parts; change part number to "93536" and part name to "Card Cage, W/0 Bds"
4 M1.01 Preparation; change content
4 M1.01 Disconnect CPU Cables; change content
4 M1.01 Remove Boards and Cables; change content
4 M1.01 Install Boards and Cables; change content
4 M1.01 Install Main Card Cage; change content
4 M1.01 Install Front Right Access Panel; change content
4 M1.01 Connect CPU Cables; change content
4 M1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 M1.01 Verification; change content

4 M1.09 Parts; change part name to "Fan assy, main card cage"
4 M1.11 Parts; change part name to "Bd., Upper backplane"
4 M1.09 Parts; change part name to "Bd., Lower backplane"
4 M1.12 Remove/Install Boards; replace graphic A2_1825a with A2_1818c
4 M2.01 Disconnect Plugs; change content
4 M2.01 Remove Electronics Drawer; change content
4 M2.01 Install Electronics Drawer; change content
4 M2.01 Connect Plugs; change content

4 M2.03 Remove 5-phase Motor Driver Board; change content
4 M2.04 Install Connector Panel; change content
4 M3.01 Disconnect IREF Level Detector Board; add Action and content
4 M3.02 Add procedure and content
4 M3.02 Install IREF Level Detector Board; change content
4 M4.01 Remove LLS Board; change content
4 M4.01 Install LLS Board; change content

4 M4.02 Remove AC/DC Driver Board
4 M4.02 Install AC/DC Driver Board; change content
4 M5.01 Remove CNN Board; change content
4 M5.01 Install CNN Board; change content
4 N1 Change Document Control Number to "96697-104"
4 N1.01 Preparation; change content
4 N1.01 Remove Reaction Carousel Main Gear; change content
4 N1.01 Remove Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change "reference" to "aspiration"
4 N1.01 Install Water Bath Assembly; change content
4 N1.01 Install Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change "reference" to "aspiration"
4 N1.01 Install Front Middle Access Panels; delete
4 N1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 N1.01 Verification; change content
4 N1.02 Parts; change name to "Sensor, trigger, Reaction Crsl"
4 N1.02 Install Sensor Trigger; change content
4 N1.03 Remove Cuvette Wipers; change "instrument" to "water bath"
4 N1.03 Remove ICT Ref Cup; change content
4 N1.03 Install ICT Ref Cup; change content
4 N1.03 Connect CNN2 from ICT IREF Level Detect Board; change content
4 N1.04 Proc Title; change to "Cup, ICT-Ref with Probes"
4 N1.04 Parts; change part number to "93508" and change part name to "Cup, ICT-Ref with Probes"
4 N1.04 Disconnect CNN2 from ICT IREF Level Detect Board; add Action and A2_1195
4 N1.04 Remove ICT Ref Cup; change content
4 N1.04 Connect CNN2 from ICT IREF Level Detect Board; add Action
4 N1.05 Prepare for Operation; add A2_1554
4 N1.06 Prepare for Operation; add A2_1545
4 N1.08 Parts; change part name to "Lens, Water Bath"
4 N1.08 Remove Source Lamp; change content
4 N1.08 Remove Optics Assembly; change content
4 N1.08 Remove Water Bath Lens; change content
4 N1.08 Install Water Bath Lens; change content
4 N1.08 Install Optics Assembly; change content
4 N1.08 Connect CNN2 from ICT IREF Level Detect Board; add Action
4 N1.13 Install ICT Ref Cup; replace graphic A2_1193 with A2_1453c
4 N1.13 Prepare for Operation; change content and insert graphic A2_1583
4 N2.01 Remove Heater Assembly; change content
4 N2.01 Install Heater Assembly; change content
4 N2.03 Parts; change part name to "Heater, Element, Water Bath"
4 N2.03 Remove Heater Element; change content
4 N2.03 Install Heater Element; change content
4 N2.04 Parts; change part name to "Seal, heater element"
4 N2.04 Remove Heater Element Packing; change to "Remove Heater Element Seal"
4 N2.05 Parts; change part name to "Seal, thermistor, heater unit"

4 N2.05 Remove Thermistor Heater Packing; change to "Remove Thermistor Heater Seal"
4 N2.06 Remove Heater Thermistor; change content
4 N2.08 Parts; change part name to "Fitting, Elbow Heater"
4 N2.12 Remove Pump, Heater Water Bath; change content
4 N2.12 Install Pump, Heater Water Bath; change content
4 N3.02 Parts; change part name to "Detector, Inside temp, heater."
4 P1 Change Document Control Number to "96700-103"
4 P1.11 Parts; change part name to "Cover, Carousel Sample"
4 P1.12 Parts; change part name to "Cover, Reagent Supply Cntr. #2"
4 P1.13 Parts; change part name to "Cover, Reagent Supply Cntr. #1"
4 P1.17 Change title to "Closeout, Rear (c 8000)"
4 P1.17 Parts; change part number to "94145" and part name to "Closeout, Rear c8000"
4 R1 Change Document Control Number to "96701-104"
4 R1.01 Parts; change part name to "Mixer Assy, complete"
4 R1.01 Preparation; change content
4 R1.01 Remove Mixer Assembly; change content
4 R1.01 Install Mixer Assembly; change content
4 R1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 R1.01 Verification; change content
4 R1.02 Remove Sensor, Photo Multiple Use (Elevator); change content

4 R1.02 Install Sensor, Photo Multiple Use (Elevator); change content
4 R1.03 Parts; change part name to "Mixer Head Assy"
4 R1.03 Remove Mixer Head Assembly; change content
4 R1.04 Parts; change part name to "Mixer Elevator Assy"
4 R1.04 Remove Mixer Head Assembly; change content
4 R1.04 Remove Mixer Elevator Assembly; change content
4 R1.04 Install Mixer Elevator Assembly; change content
4 R1.07 Parts; change part name to "Spring, Mixer, Cam Following"
4 R2.01 Parts; change part name to "Pipettor, Sample Assembly"
4 R2.01 Remove Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 R2.01 Remove Pipettor, Sample Assembly; change content
4 R2.01 Install Pipettor, Sample Assembly; change content
4 R2.01 Connect Lower Sample Pipettor Cable; change content
4 R2.01 Install Panel Above ICT Reference Pump; change to "Reference" to "Aspiration"
4 R2.03 Parts; change part name to "Tubing, Sample Pipettor, inner"

4 R2.04 Remove Sensor, Pitch, Pipettor; change content
4 R3.01 Change Part number to "02J51-01"
4 R3.03 Change Part name to "Spring, crash detect, all arms"
4 R3.03 Replace graphic with "A2_1631c"
4 R3.04 Change Part name to "Bd., LLS Pre-Amp Samp"
4 R3.05 Change Part name to "Cover, Sample pipettor"
4 R3.07 Change Part name to "Holder, tbg. Pipettor head"
4 R3.08 New Procedure
4 R3.08 Install Probe Slide Mechanism; change content
4 R4.01 Changed "Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 Complete" to "Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 Assembly"
4 R4.01 Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 Assembly; change content
4 R4.01 Replace graphic with "A2_1661e"
4 R4.01 Changed "Install Reagent Pipettor #1 Complete" to "Install Reagent Pipettor #1 Assembly"
4 R4.01 Install Reagent Pipettor #1 Assembly; change content

4 R4.03 Changed "Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Complete" to "Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2

Assembly"
4 R4.03 Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Assembly; change content
4 R4.03 Replace graphic with "A2_1661e"; "A2_1662e"
4 R4.03 Changed "Install Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Complete" to "Install Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2

Assembly"
4 R4.03 Install Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Assembly; change content
4 R4.04 Changed Part Name to "Tbg, R1 pipettor inner"
4 R4.05 Changed Part Name to "Tbg, R2 pipettor inner"

4 R4.06 Changed Part Name "Solenoid, Reag pipettor elev"
4 R4.06 Changed "Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Complete" to "Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2

Assembly"
4 R4.06 Remove Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Assembly; change content
4 R4.06 Changed "Install Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Complete" to "Install Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2

Assembly"
4 R4.06 Install Reagent Pipettor #1 or #2 Assembly; change content
4 R4.07 Change Part Name to "Spring, Reag elev sol lock"
4 R5.01 Change Part Number to "02J51-01"
4 R5.03 Change Part Name to "Spring, crash detect, all arms"
4 R5.04 Change Part Name to "Bd., crash sensor reag pipet"
4 R5.04 Remove Bd. Reagent Pipettor Crash Detect; change content
4 R5.04 Install Bd. Reagent Pipettor Crash Detect; change content
4 R5.07 Change Part name to "Holder, tbg., Pipettor head
4 R5.08 Slide Mechanism Pipettor Head: New procedure
4 R6.01 Add graphics "A2_1551" & "A1_1668"

4 R6.01 Remove Cuvette Washer Assembly; change content
4 R6.02 Add graphics "A2_1551" & "A1_1668"
4 R6.04 Change Part Name to "Spring, Cuvette Wash, cam following"
4 R6.04 Remove Cuvette Wash Spring; change content
4 R6.05 Change Part Number to "93380"
4 R6.13 Change Part Number to "09D51-02"
4 R6.13 Change Part Name to "Cuvette Drying Tip"
4 R6.13 Replace graphic with "A2_3079b"
4 R7.01 Remove ICT Module; change content
4 R7.01 Remove ICT Water Jacket; New Action
4 R7.01 Remove ICT Water Jacket; change content
4 R7.01 Replace graphic with "A2_1190"
4 R7.01 Remove ICT Assembly; change content
4 R7.01 Replace graphic with "A2_1847d"
4 R7.01 Install ICT Water Jacket; New Action
4 R7.01 Install ICT Water Jacket; change content
4 R7.01 Install ICT Assembly; change content

4 R7.02 Remove ICT Module; change content
4 R7.02 Remove ICT Water Jacket; New Action
4 R7.02 Remove ICT Assembly; change content
4 R7.02 Replace graphic with "A2_1847d"
4 R7.02 Install ICT Water Jacket; New Action
4 R7.02 Install ICT Assembly; change content
4 R7.05 Change Part Name to "Stop, Mechanical, Rotational"
4 R7.05 Remove Rotational Stop; change content
4 R7.13 Remove Pre-amp Cable; change content
4 R7.13 Install ICT Module; change content
4 S1 Change Document Control Number to "96709-104"
4 S1.01 Prerequisite; change content
4 S1.01 Preparation; change content
4 S1.01 Prepare for Operation; change content
4 S1.01 Verification; change content

4 S1.06 Change Part Name to "TED, Crsl Sampler, includes fan"
4 S1.07 Change Part Name to "Latch, Cover"
4 S1.10 Change Part Name to "Detector, temp, CC crsl"
4 T0 Change Document Control Number to "96710-102"
4 T0.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT valve NC- ICT Module"
4 T0.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT Syr-ICT Syr Vlv"
4 T0.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT valve NO waste"
4 T0.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT waste 1ml syr"
4 T0.05 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT 1ml syr-HC T fitting"
4 T0.06 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Iref bottle-1ml syr"
4 T0.07 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Iref pmp-warming tube"

4 T0.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Iref cup-Iref pmp"
4 T0.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Iref pmp-waste cup"
4 T0.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT MCC pot-warming tube"
4 T1.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI manifold 1ml ACD syr"
4 T1.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI manifold 1ml ALK syr"
4 T1.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, 1ml ACD syr-small syr"
4 T1.04 Change part number to "93280"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, 1ml ALK syr-small syr"
4 T1.05 Change part number to "93281"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD bottle valve ACD1"
4 T1.06 Change Part Name to "Tbg, small syr- valve ACD1, ALK1"
4 T1.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ALK bottle to valve"
4 T1.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD1 vlv NO-ACD2 vlv COM"
4 T1.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD2 vlv NC-ACD/ALK man"
4 T1.11 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ALK 1 vlv NO-ALK2 vlv COM"
4 T1.12 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ALK2 vlv NC-ACD/ALK man"
4 T1.13 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ALK2 vlv NO-LC waste tnk"
4 T1.14 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD2 vlv NO-LC waste tnk"
4 T1.15 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD/ALK man-ALK noz"
4 T1.16 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD/ALK man -ACD noz"
4 T2.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI tnk-Cuv wash pump"
4 T2.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Cuv wash pump-vlv COM"
4 T2.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash vlv NC-wash man"
4 T2.04 Change part number to "93296"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash man-HC noz"
4 T2.05 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash man-water noz, 4"
4 T2.06 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash man-water noz, 5"
4 T2.07 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash man-water blk noz"
4 T2.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash vlv NO-Y fitting"
4 T2.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Y fitting-R1 supply"
4 T2.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Y fitting-R2 supply"
4 T2.11 Change Part Name to "Fitting, Y, Vac pmp&cuv wsh pmp"
4 T2.12 Change Part Name to "Tbg, water tank to Lbow cuv wat lin"
4 T2.13 Change Part Name to "Fitting, Lbow, DI cuv wash line"
4 T3.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI water man-degasser"
4 T3.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, degasser to DI water man"
4 T3.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI water man-prob was pmp"

4 T3.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, probe wash pmp-vlv man"
4 T3.05 Change Part Name to "Tbg, smpl vlv-smpl pmp"
4 T3.06 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag 1 vlv-reag 1 pmp"
4 T3.07 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag 2 vlv-reag 2 pmp"
4 T3.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, smpl pmp to pipet jnt, NS"
4 T3.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag1 pmp to pipet joint"
4 T3.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag2 pmp to pipet joint"
4 T3.11 Change Part Name to "Tbg, smpl vlv to waste cup"
4 T3.12 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag1 vlv to waste cup"
4 T3.13 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag2 vlv to waste cup"
4 T4.01 Change part number to "93318"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, s-washcup man-smplcup1"
4 T4.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, s-washcup man-smplcup2"
4 T4.02 Change Part Number from "93320" to "93319"
4 T4.03 Change part number to "93320"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, R-washcup man-reagcup1"
4 T4.04 Change part number to "93321"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, R-washcup man-reagcup2"
4 T4.05 Change part number to "93322"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, M-washcup man-mixcup1"
4 T4.06 Change part number to "93323"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, M-washcup man-mixcup2"
4 T5.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, heater-waterbath manifold"
4 T5.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, waterbath manifold-ICT"
4 T5.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ICT-waterbath"
4 T5.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, R1center drain-Lwr wst Man"
4 T5.05 Change Part Name to "Tbg, R Wsh Cup 2A-Lwr Wste Man"
4 T5.06 Change Part Name to "Tbg, waterbath man-heater pmp"
4 T5.07 Change Part Name to "Tbg, w.bath fill-vlv,vp2-Lcwas"
4 T5.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Wtr bath out B to manifold"
4 T5.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wtr bath out A-manifo"
4 T6.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, HC noz-HC pmp"
4 T6.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash cup valves to manifid"
4 T6.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, open tank to drain plug"
4 T6.04 Change Heading to "Tbg. High Conc. Waste Manifold to Joint"
4 T7.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, overflow cup-Lower Wst Man"
4 T7.05 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI tank-wat bath fill -pmp"
4 T7.06 Change Part Name to "Fitting, T, LG & wste tank oflow"

4 T7.07 Change Part Name to "Tbg, T fitting to oflow drain"
4 T7.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, HC pumps-T,W Cup Vlv-Manif"
4 T7.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wash cup valves to manifld"
4 T7.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI tank ovflow-Tfitting"
4 T7.11 Change Part Name to "Tbg, LC tank ovflow-Tfitting"
4 T7.13 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ovflow out-Tfittting"
4 T7.14 Change Part Name to "Tbg, LC waste tank to panel"
4 T7.15 Change Part Name to "Tbg, RECIRC, MANIFOLD to Elbow"
4 T7.16 Change Part Name to "Tbg, wcup ret man-DI tank"
4 T7.18 Change Part Name to "Fitting, L.probe rtn to lg tank"
4 T7.19 Change Part Name to "Fitting, refrig drain T"
4 T7.20 Change Part Name to "Tbg, DI tank maint to plug"
4 T7.21 Change Part Name to "Plug, tbg, DI tank maint"
4 T8 Change Document Control Number "96718-103"
4 T8.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ALK noz to vac man"
4 T8.02 Change Part Name to "Tbg, ACD noz to vac man"
4 T8.03 Change Part Name to "Tbg, water noz 4-vac man"
4 T8.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, water noz 5-vac man"
4 T8.05 Change Part Name to "Tbg, water blk noz-vac man"
4 T8.07 Change Part Name to "Tbg, asp noz to vac vlv"
4 T8.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, dry noz#8 to vac vlv"
4 T8.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, vac valve to vac pmp 1"
4 T8.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg, vac manifold to vac pmp 2"
4 T8.11 Change Part Name to "Tbg, vac pmp 1 to LC wast tank"
4 T8.12 Change Part Name to "Tbg, w.bath fill-vlv,vp2-Lcwas"
4 T9 Change Document Control Number "96719-103"
4 T9.01 Change Part Name to "Tbg, reag sup 1-LC wast man"
4 T9.04 Change Part Name to "Tbg, waste cup-LC wast man"
4 T9.06 Change part number to "89459"; Change Part Name to "Tbg, S WSH Pool B to Up Wst Man"
4 T9.08 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Mix Y fit to LC wast man"
4 T9.09 Change Part Name to "Tbg, LC upper waste man"
4 T9.09 Preparation: change content
4 T9.09 Remove Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump: changed "reference" to "aspiration"
4 T9.09 Remove Reagent Supply Center #2: change content
4 T9.09 Replace graphic with A2_1031
4 T9.09 Replace graphic with A2_2500
4 T9.09 Install Reagent Supply Center #2: change content

4 T9.09 Install Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump: changed "reference" to "aspiration"
4 T9.09 Prepare for Operation: change content
4 T9.09 Verification: change content
4 T9.10 Change Part Name to "Tbg. LC lower waste man"
4 T9.10 Preparation: change content
4 T9.10 Remove Water Management Unit Cover: change content
4 T9.10 Remove Tubing, Low Conc. Lower Waste: change content
4 T9.10 Install Tubing, Low Conc. Lower Waste: change content
4 T9.10 Install Water Management Unit Cover: change content
4 T9.10 Prepare for Operation: change content
4 T9.11 Change Part Name to "Tbg, degasser to DI water man"
4 T9.12 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Opn Tnk, S Csl, Mix Cup 1, 2A"
4 T9.14 Change Part Name to "Fitting, Y, reag sup 2"
4 T9.15 Change Part Name to "Tbg, Sealed tank to drain plug"
4 T9.16 Change Part Name to "Tbg, degasser-degasser Man"
4 W1 Change Document Control Number to "96720-104"
4 W1.01 Added part number "93529" and part name "Water Management Unit, C8B"
4 W1.01 Prerequisite: change content
4 W1.01 Preparation: change content
4 W1.01 Delete graphic A2_1579
4 W1.01 Remove Water Management Unit Cover: change content
4 W1.01 Drain Water Management Unit: change content
4 W1.01 Remove Tubing from Low Concentration Waste Tank: change content
4 W1.01 Disconnect Tubing from Degasser Manifold: change content
4 W1.01 Remove Water Management Unit: change content
4 W1.01 Install Water Management Unit: change content
4 W1.01 Connect Tubing to Degasser Manifold: change content
4 W1.01 Install Tubing to Low Concentration Waste Tank: change content
4 W1.01 Install Water Management Unit Cover: change content
4 W1.01 Prepare for Operation: change content
4 W1.01 Verification: change content
4 W1.02 Change Part Name to "Switch, Float Low Conc. Was Tank"

4 W1.03 Added part number "93532" and part name "Low Conc. Cap Assy., C8B"
4 W1.03 Remove Low Concentration Waste Tank Cover: change content
4 W1.03 Install Low Concentration Waste Tank Cover: change content
4 W1.04 Change Part Name to "Tank, low conc waste, WMU, No Lid"
4 W1.04 Remove Low Concentration Waste Tank: change content
4 W1.04 Install Low Concentration Waste Tank: change content
4 W1.05 Change Part Name to "Switch, float, up limit water t"
4 W1.05 Remove Upper Limit Water Tank Float Switch: change content
4 W1.06 Remove Level High Float Switch: change content

4 W1.07 Remove Level Low Float Switch: change content
4 W1.07 Install Level Low Float Switch: change content
4 W1.09 Remove Wash Cup Valve Common Manifold: change content
4 W1.09 Install Wash Cup Valve Common Manifold: change content
4 W1.10 Change Part Name to "Valve, cuv wash pmp-MANIF,WMU(5)"
4 W1.10 Remove Wash Cup Valve: change content

4 W1.11 Change Part Name to "Valve, needle, wash pool C8"
4 W1.11 Remove Needle Valve, Wash Cup Adjust: change content
4 W1.12 Change Part Name to "Manifold, Wash Cup Valve NO"

4 W1.17 Change Part Name to "Manifold, degasser-wash sol.pu"
4 W1.17 Remove Degasser Manifold: change content
4 W1.17 Install Degasser Manifold: change content
4 W1.18 Change Part Name to "Ftg,exterior drain hose to WMU"
4 W1.19 Delete graphic A2_1579
4 W1.21 Change Part Name to "Fitting, wash cup needle valve NS"
4 W1.24 Change part num to "93463"; Change Part Name to "Fitting, Incoming Water"
4 W1.26 New content: "Float Switch Assembly"
4 W1.27 New content: "Valve Assembly, C8B"

5 5.1 Global change "Diagnostic" to "Diagnostics"
5 5.1 Global change "as" to "As"
5 5.1 Global change "Optics and/ Temperature" to "Optics / Temperature"
5 5.1 Global change "modules" to "Modules"
5 5.1 Global change "sh" to "RSH"
5 5.1 Global change "pipettors" to "Pipettors"
5 5.1 Global change "fluidics_washzones" to "Fluidics / Wash"
5 5.1 Global change "fluidics//precision" to "Precision"
5 5.1 Global change "Bar Code Readers Test" to "Bar Code Test"
5 5.1 Global change "bar code readers" to "Bar Code Readers"
5 5.1 Global change "fuses/motors" to "Fuses/Motors"
5 5.1 Global change Set "quarterley, monthly, weekly, daily" to Initial Caps
5 5.1 1002 Photometer and ICT DAQ Data: change content
5 5.1 1010 Cuvette Integrity Test: change content
5 5.1 1101 Robotics Test Tool: change content
5 5.1 3400 Interlock Sensor Test: New content
5 5.1 3525 Temperature Status: change content
5 5.1 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test: New content
5 5.1 4080 Module Initialization: New content
5 5.1 Pumps/Valves Test: change content
5 5.1 Clean Reagent Supply Centers: change content
5 5.1 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles: change content
5 5.1 Sub-option Chart: New Content
5 P-101 Materials Required, Time: change content
5 P-101 Prerequisite, Preparation, Reaction Carousel Alignment: new content
5 P-101 Change Action name "Verify Carousel Alignment" to "Align Reaction Carousel"
5 P-101 Align Reaction Carousel; change content
5 P-102 Prerequisite: change content
5 P-102 Remove Reagent Supply Center #1 Temperature Detector: change content
5 P-102 Determine Temperature of reagent grade type II water: change content
5 P-102 Determine Temperature of Reagent Supply Center #1: change content
5 P-102 Install Front Right Access Panel: change content
5 P-102 Prepare for Operation: change content
5 P-103 Removed Warning: Chemical Hazard

5 P-103 Preparation: change content
5 P-103 Access Temperature Detector for Reagent Supply Center #2: delete Action
5 P-103 Remove Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump: new Action
5 P-103 Remove Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #2: new Action
5 P-103 Determine Temperature of Reagent Grade Type II Water: change content
5 P-103 Determine Temperature of Reagent Supply Center #2: change content
5 P-103 Compare Temperature Readings: change content
5 P-103 Install Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #2: delete Action
5 P-103 Install Temperature Detector Reagent Supply Center #2: new Action
5 P-103 Install Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump: new Action
5 P-104 Determine Temperature of reagent grade type II water: change content
5 P-104 Change Action "Determine Temperature of reagent grade type II water" to "Determine Temperature
of Water"
5 P-104 Determine Temperature of Sample Carousel: change content
5 P-104 Install Sample Carousel Temperature Detector: change content
5 P-104 Insert graphic A2_1760
5 P-105 Materials Required, Purpose: change content
5 P-105 Remove Temperature Detector for Water Bath Heater Assembly: change content
5 P-105 Determine Temperature of Reagent Grade Type II Water: change content
5 P-105 Change Action "Determine Temperature of reagent grade type II water" to "Determine Temperature
of Water"
5 P-105 Determine Internal c8000 processing module Temperature: change content
5 P-106 Materials Required: change content
5 P-106 Perform 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature: change content

5 P-107 Place 2D bar code reader in blink mode: change content
5 P-107 A1 Alignment: change content
5 P-108 Remove 2D BCR: change content
5 P-108 Place 2D bar code reader in blink mode: change content
5 P-108 Install 2D reader: change content
5 P-108 Replace graphic with A2_1040c
5 P-108 Segment read: change content
5 P-108 Prepare for operation: change content
5 P-109 Perform 1124 Wash Cup Alignment: change content
5 P-109 Perform 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration: change content
5 P-111 Perform 1124 Wash Cup Alignment: change content
5 P-111 Calibrate Pipettor: change content
5 P-113 Perform 1123 Mixer Alignment: change content
5 P-113 Adjust Mixer Cup: change content
5 P-115 Fill Bulk Solution Bottles: change content
5 P-115 Access MECH LED Board: change content
5 P-115 Place bottles on platform and verify LEDs are ON: change content
5 P-115 Verify Weight Sensor Specification: change content
5 P-115 Adjust Weight Sensors: change content
5 P-115 Replace graphic with A2_2008a
5 P-117 Adjust PS1 +5VDC: change content
5 P-117 Verification: change content
5 P-118 Adjust PS2 +12VDC

5 P-119 Measure +12VDC (PS3) at Unit Cooler: change content
5 P-119 Adjust PS3 +12VDC: change content
5 P-119 Close Covers: change content
5 P-120 Install and Secure DC Power Supply: change content
5 P-120 Close Covers: change content
5 P-124 Perform 3625 Pipettors LLS Test: change content
5 P-126 Verify ICT probe is centered over cuvette: new Action
5 P-126 Adjust ICT Head: change content
5 P-126 Replace graphic with A2_2035
5 P-126 Prepare Reaction Carousel: change content
5 P-126 Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool: delete Action
5 P-126 Install Alignment Tool: change content
5 P-126 Check and correct ICT cuvette down position: change content
5 P-126 Verify Probe Over Reference Solution Cup: change content
5 P-126 Adjust Probe Over Reference Solution Cup: new Action
5 P-126 Insert graphic A2_2513
5 P-126 Verify Probe Down Position: change content
5 P-126 Adjust Probe Down Position: new Action
5 P-126 Exit 1101 Robotics Test Tool Procedure: new Action
5 P-126 Close Cover/Doors
5 P-127 Place Temperature Probe: change content
5 P-127 Remove Cover: change content

5 P-128 Verify Mixer Height: change content
5 P-128 Adjust Mixer Height: change content
5 P-131 Replace graphic with A2_3079b
5 P-131 Install Nozzle Assembly: change content
5 P-131 Verify Tip Rectangular Orientation: change content
5 P-131 Adjust Tip Rectangular Orientation: change content
5 P-131 Verify Nozzle Gap: change content
5 P-131 Verify Nozzle Centering Over Cuvette: change content
5 P-131 Adjust Nozzle Centering Over Cuvette: change content
5 P-131 Verify Nozzle Centering Entering Cuvette: change content
5 P-131 Adjust Nozzle Centering Entering Cuvette: change content
5 P-131 Verify Nozzle Entry: change content
5 P-131 Adjust Nozzle Entry: change content
5 P-131 Verify Final Alignment: change content
5 P-131 Adjust Nozzle Level and Height: change content
5 P-132 Verify Front/Back Centering: change content
5 P-132 Adjust Front/Back Centering: change content
5 P-132 Exit 1101 Robotics Test Tool: new Action
5 P-133 Verify Front/Back Centering: change content
5 P-133 Adjust Front/Back Centering: change content
5 P-133 Exit 1101 Robotics Test Tool: new Action

5 P-135 Align Sample Bar Code Reader: change content
5 P-136 Materials Required, Purpose: change content
5 P-136 Remove Sample: change content
5 P-136 Decontaminate c8000 system: change content
5 P-151 Purpose: change content
5 P-151 Change Water Bath: change content
5 P-152 Replace graphic with A2_1567
5 P-154 Remove Degasser: change content
5 P-154 Install Degasser: change content
5 P-155 Demonstration Mode: New procedure
5 P-157 Top Cover Counterbalance Adjustment: New procedure
5 P-159 Scan Reagents: change content
5 P-159 Calibrate Na, Cl, K, AST, LD and TP: change content
5 P-159 Results and Conclusions: change content
5 P-161 Install Front Right Access Panel
5 P-162 Perform Temp Checks: remove Action

5 Clean R2 Prerequisite: change content
Carousel BCR
Filter
5 Clean Sample Prerequisite: change content
Carousel BCR
Filter
5 Clean Sample Preparation: change content

Carousel BCR
Filter
5 Clean Sample Prepare for Operation: change content

Carousel BCR
Filter
5 P-168 Lubricate Sample and Reagent Pipettors
5 P-169 Change name of Procedure from "Clean Filter Sample Handler Card Cage Filters" to "Clean Filter
RSH Card Cage Filters"

5 P-169 Remove Cover: change content
5 P-169 Remove Air Filter: change content
5 P-169 Clean RSH Card Cage Filter: change content
5 P-169 Install Air Filter: change content
5 P-169 Install Cover: change content
6 Changed "Document Control Number 96722-102" to "Document Control Number 96722-103)."
6 Changed "Document Control Number 96722-102" to "Document Control Number 96722-103)."
6 Inspect wash head tubing: New Action
6 PM #1 Checklist, Inspect wash head tubing: New Action
8 c 8000 Module - Unpack; change content
8 c 8000 Module - Install Accessories; change content
8 c 8000 Attach External Plumbing and Fill Water Bath; change content
8 c 8000 Robotic Positions Setup; change content

Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change title to reflect registered trademark status of c 8000
Frnt Prop Info Move c 8000 to registered tm line of trademark statements
Frnt Prop Info Change latest copyright date to "2005"
7 7.2 Add "This checklist is used for the i 2000 series systems, the i 2000 SR, the c 8000, and
the ci8200 systems."
7 7.2 Add biohazard symbol
7 7.2 i 2000 SR Door and Entry Requirements; add "i 2000 and" to Descriptiion
7 7.2 i 2000 and i 2000 SR Door and Entry Requirements; add "i 2000 or"
7 7.2 Add "i 2000 Module Electrical Supply Requirements (per i 2000)" and content
7 7.2 Lab Operating Temperature; add "i 2000 = 2500 watts"
7 7.2 Water Quality ARCHITECT ARM Installed; change to "Water Quality (with or without
ARCHITECT ARM installed)"
7 7.2 Liquid Waste - i 2000 SR (Options); change "17 cm" to "10 cm"
7 7.2 Waste Pump (if required); add "Required Capacity" and "Maximum Flow Capacity with
ARCHITECT ARM"
7 7.2 Add LAS checklist content after LIS checklist content
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-107) • Copyright 2002, 2005 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000 SR, and c 8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, ci 8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Prop Info Qualifications; update content
Frnt Prop Info Move ci 8200 to registered trademarks line
7 Section Title Change to "Document Control Number 96723-106"
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; System; c 8000; 50/60Hz; change content
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; System; c 8000; Outlet Type; change content
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; System; i 2000 SR; 50/60Hz; change content
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; System; i 2000 SR; Outlet Type; change content
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; System; ci 8200; new content
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; SCC; change to "SCC Switch must be manually
set. The D platform has an auto-sensing power supply and needs no switching."
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; Options; Printer 110/220 Switchable; change to
"Printer 110/220 Switchable (Do not plug the printer into the UPS.)"
7 7.1 Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications; Options; Waste Pump Switch must be manually
set.; change to "Waste Pump Switch must be manually set. (Plug the waste pump into the UPS, if
one is provided.)"
7 7.2 Optional Equipment Requirements; add "Printers should not be plugged into the UPS."
7 7.2 SCC Electrical Supply Requirements; add "(For U.S. only - SCC should be plugged into the stand
alone UPS receptacles.)"
7 7.2 c 8000 Module Electrical Supply Requirements; change content

7 7.2 i 2000 SR Module Electrical Supply Requirements; change content
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-108) • Copyright 2002, 2005 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000 SR, c 8000, and ci 8200 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
1 Fluidics; change "...pump which delivers a 1% alkaline and 0.5% acid solution..." to "...pump which
delivers a 1.3% alkaline and 0.9% acid solution..."
1 Fluidics; change "...alkaline solution to 1% and the acid solution to 0.5% and then..." to "...alkaline
solution to 1.3% and the acid solution to 0.9% and then..."
1 Robotics; Cuvette Washer Nozzles; change "...Nozzle 2 provides a 1% mixture..." to "...Nozzle 2

provides a 1.3% mixture..."
1 Robotics; Cuvette Washer Nozzles; change "...Nozzle 3 provides a 0.5% mixture..." to "...Nozzle 3
provides a 0.9% mixture..."
1 Robotics; Wash Solution, ICT Aspiration and ICT Reference Solution Pumps; change "...syringes
create the 1% alkaline and 0.5% acid solutions..." to "...syringes create the 1.3% alkaline and 0.9%
acid solutions..."
6 Change "Suggested PM Kit - PM #1 and PM #2 (part # 7-93388-01)" to "Suggested PM Parts - PM

#1 and PM #2"
6 Suggested PM Parts - PM #1 and PM #2; delete table entries 7-93426-01, 7-93427-01, 2-94796-
02, 2-94797-02, 2-94798-02.
6 Suggested PM Parts - PM #1 and PM #2; change "7-93428-01" (Cuvette Dry Tip) to "9D51-02"
6 Change "Suggested PM Kit - PM #3 (part # 7-93389-01)" to "Suggested PM Kit - PM #3 (part # 7-

93389-02)"
6 Suggested PM Kit - PM #3 (part # 7-93389-02); add "2-89561-03" and content
6 Change "PM Procedure #1 (approximate time 5 hours)" to "PM Procedure #1 (approximate time 4.5
hours)"
6 PM Procedure #1 (approximate time 4.5 hours); del "Replace diaphragm and sheet valve in both
vacuum pumps."
6 PM Procedure #1 (approximate time 4.5 hours); del "Replace O-rings in new style vacuum pump."
6 PM Procedure #1 (approximate time 4.5 hours); del "Run optics test."

6 PM Procedure #1 (approximate time 4.5 hours); del "Run cuvette integrity test."
6 Change "PM Procedure #2 (approximate time 5 hours)" to "PM Procedure #2 (approximate time 4.5
hours)"
6 PM Procedure #2 (approximate time 4.5 hours); del "Replace diaphragm and sheet valve in both
vacuum pumps."
6 PM Procedure #2 (approximate time 4.5 hours); del "Replace O-rings in new style vacuum pump."
6 PM Procedure #2 (approximate time 4.5 hours); Lubricate elevators/pumps; replace "Reaction

Carousel Lubrication (15 min)." with "Perform P-137 Reaction Carousel Lubrication (15 min)."
6 PM Procedure #3 (approximate time 8.5 hours); add "Replace acid wash valves." after "Replace
bellows and poppet valves on the three bellows pumps."
6 PM Procedure #3 (approximate time 8.5 hours); Lubricate pumps/pipettors; del "Perform P-137
Reaction Carousel Lubrication (10 min)."
6 PM #1 Checklist; del Sequence #4, #9, #10
6 PM #2 Checklist; del Sequence #4, #9, #10
6 PM #2 Checklist; add "Performed by" row and content
6 PM #3 Checklist; move sequence #9 to #6
6 PM #3 Checklist; add sequence #7 (Replace acid wash valves)
6 PM #3 Checklist; add sequence #10 (Replace cuvette wiper)
6 PM #3 Checklist; change "Replace ICT reference solution check valves." to "Replace ICT reference
solution and wash solution check valves."
6 PM #3 Checklist; del "Perform optics test."
6 PM #3 Checklist; del "Perform cuvette Integrity Test."
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change Manual Revision Number to "96750-110."
Frnt Title Change Front Matter Content Control Number to "96662-110."
Frnt Rev Log Add 96750-110 info to Revision Log.
6 Section Title Changed to "Document Control Number 96722-105."
6 Suggested PM Parts: Changed part number for Lubricating Grease from "2-94851-02"
to "94851."
6 Suggested PM Parts: Added "includes qty of 3" under Item column in the table.
6 Suggested PM Parts: Changed Qty of P/N 9D43-02 from "3" to "1."
6 Suggested PM Kit: Changed P/N from "7-93389-02" to "93389."
6 Suggested PM Kit: Changed P/N from "2-94851-02" to "94851."
6 Suggested PM Kit: Deleted table containing part numbers.
7 Section Title Changed to “Document Control Number 96723-107.”
7 Added Electrical Warning Hazard symbol to "60 Hz Power Measurements" description.
7 Added Electrical Warning Hazard symbol to "50 Hz Power Measurements" description.
7 Added AbbottLink description and Specification/Criteria to the Pre-Site Checklist table.
c8000 Revision 96750-111 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from version 96750-110 to 96750-111 of the ARCHITECT c8000 Service and Support Manual.
Section Sections
Revision
Global All Removed spaces in instrument names
Frnt Rev Log Added 96750-111 info to Revision Log
1 Section Title Changed to "Document Control Number 96663-105"
1 1.2 Power Distribution (serial numbers < c800224): Line voltage to Main Power Supply: change "The
main switch (on the instrument) is a 20 Amp circuit breaker." to "The main switch (on the
instrument) is a 15 Amp circuit breaker."
4 D3 Changed to "Document Control Number 96672-104"
4 D3.11 Add "Refrigerator Upper Fan" procedure from ISA 126-035
4 N2 Changed to "Document Control Number 96698-104"
4 N2.01 Changed part number for Heater, Water Bath from 93202 to 200034
4 N2.01 Changed Parts description from Heater, Water Bath to Water Bath Heater Assy, NS c8
4 R7.01 Changed to "Document Control Number 96708-105"
4 R7.01 Replaced Action "Install ICT Assembly" with "Install ICT Assembly (Old Style)" and "Install ICT
Assembly (New Style)" (ISA 126-039)
4 R7.02 Replaced Action "Install ICT Assembly" with "Install ICT Assembly (Old Style)" and "Install ICT
Assembly (New Style)" (ISA 126-039)
5 P-156 Measure +15/-15VDC on DAQ Board: Corrected voltage leads between TP 49 ( changed from " -"
to "+") and TP 50 ( changed from "+" to "-"). Updated A2_1832 to reflect the change
7 7.1 Added i2000 to "Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications"
7 7.1 Updated to graphic A2_6005c
7 7.1 Updated to graphic A2_6004d
7 7.1 Updated to graphic A2_6006c
7 7.2 Added two check boxes to "Water Quality ( with or Without Architect Arm installed)" section
7 7.2 Added new paragraph to Flow Rate specification of "Water Quality ( with or Without Architect Arm
installed)" section
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-111) • Copyright 2002, 2006 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
Global All Removed spaces in instrument names
Frnt Prop Info Update content
4 K2 Changed to "Document Control Number 96686-103"
4 K2.03 Add "Degasser Canister" from ISA 126-055 Degasser Canister Draining Procedure
content
5 P-110 Add "Degasser Cannister Draining" from ISA 126-055 Degasser Canister R&R
Procedure content
6 PM Procedure #1; add Action "Drain degasser canister."
6 PM Checklist #1; add Action "Drain degasser canister."
Section Sections
Revision
1 Power Distribution (serial numbers < c800224); update schematic 2a_9003

4 F1 Changed to "Document Control Number 96681-104"
4 F1.01 Change "Remove Wash Solution Valve" to "Remove Wash Solution Valve (for serial numbers
c800244 and below)"
4 F1.01 Add Action "Remove Wash Solution Valve (for serial numbers c800245 and above)" and content
(graphic 2a_8093)
4 F1.01 Change "Install Wash Solution Valve" to "Install Wash Solution Valve (for serial numbers c800244
and below)"
4 F1.01 Add Action "Install Wash Solution Valve (for serial numbers c800245 and above)" and content
(graphic 2a_8093)
5 P-108 Segment read; change "If it is not aligned correctly small corrections can be made to the bar code
home position or small manual adjustments can be made to the reader assembly." to "If it is not
aligned correctly small corrections can be made to the bar code home position."
5 P-112 Add procedure "Serial Number Correction for c8000 with QC Preservation"
5 P-114 Add procedure "Optics Check"
5 P-126 ICT Reference Solution Cup Alignment; Verify Probe Over Reference Solution Cup; change content,
update graphic A2_2513
5 P-159 Replace content with content from ISA 126-071A

8 Section Title Delete Links table
8 c8000 Attach External Plumbing and Fill Water Bath; change to "c8000 Processing Module
Preparation"
8 c8000 Processing Module Preparation; delete "Preparation"
8 c8000 Processing Module Preparation; delete "Restore Robotics Alignment Data To DAQ Board"
8 c8000 Processing Module Preparation; replace "Verify c8000 Processing Module is Level" content
8 c8000 Processing Module Preparation; delete "Power off c8000 Module"
8 c8000 Processing Module Preparation; delete "Install Cuvettes"
8 c8000 Robotic Positions Setup; add "Clean and Install Cuvettes" and content after "Counterbalance
Adjustment"
8 c8000 Robotic Positions Setup; add "Perform Internal Decontamination" and content after "Check
Wash Cup Flow"
8 c8000 Robotic Positions Setup; add "Decontaminate the wash cups and waste cup/ water bath
overflow area with 0.5% sodium hypochlorite" and content after "Perform Internal Decontamination"
Section Sections
Revision
4 G3 Changed to "Document Control Number 96684-104"
4 G3.01 Parts; add 202518; Valve, Reagent / Sample, CKD

4 G3.01 Change Action "Remove Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve" content
4 G3.01 Add Action "Remove Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve (89557)" and original "Remove
Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve" content
4 G3.01 Add Action "Remove Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve (202518)" and graphic 2a_1200
4 G3.01 Add Action "Install Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve (89557)" and original "Install
Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve" content
4 G3.01 Add Action "Install Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense Valve (202518)" and graphic 2a_1200
Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections
Revision
5 P-124 Remove hazard warnings
5 P-124 Measure and Correct Voltage; change "...from TP0 (ground) to..." to "...from TP2
(ground) to..."
5 P-124 Measure and Correct Voltage; add Note "The ground test point for instruments..."
5 P-124 Measure and Correct Voltage; update graphic 2a_2010
6 PM Procedure #1; updated content
6 PM #1 Checklist; updated content
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.

Frnt Prop Info Updated content
6 Planned Maintenance Updated Document Control Number to 96722-108
6 Planned Maintenance Updated content
6 PM #2 Checklist Updated content
6 PM #3 Checklist Updated content

6 Planned Maintenance Updated Document Control Number to 96722-109
6 PM #3 Checklist Added table to Other Material Required under Suggested PM Kits - PM #3
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Prop Info Document Control Number 204670-101
Chap 4 R&R Changed Document Control Number 96666-109
Chap 4 Locator table Parts and RR names will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU.
Chap 4 All RR Parts and verification information will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU. A note
procedures dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and
replace if necessary.", has been added at the beginning of the RR. An additional verification
procedure, G110, has been added as the final verification of each RR.
Chap 4 Functional Area Deleted Document Control Number 96667-103.

Headers
Chap 5 Procedures Changed Document Control Number 96721-108
Chap 5 All VPs Two notes dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not
expired and replace if necessary." and "At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify
per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.", have been
added at the beginning of the procedure.
Section Sections
Revision
Chap 1 General Data Change Document Control Number to 96663-107
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in c8000 Processing Module
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Sample Progression.
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Optics Assembly

Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Sample Progression for an ICT Protocol
Chap 1 General Data Updated graphic A2_9020C
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Total Wiring – Printed Circuit Boards table
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Total Wiring – Printed Circuit Boards General Theory
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Water Management Unit (WMU)
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Cuvette Washing – Water Wash
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Reaction Carousel, Water Bath and Cuvettes
Chap 1 General Data Updated text in Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring (Clot Detection)
Chap 1 General Data Added text to Bar Code Readers
Chap 1 General Data Added text to Wash Solution Pump
Chap 4 C1.12 Added new RR Optics Shutter added 2A_8096a, 2A_8097a, 2A_8098a, 2A_8096a, 2A_8099a,
2A_8100a, 2A_8101a, 2A_8102a, 2A_8103a
Chap 5 P-120 Updated text in Preparation, Measure DC Lamp Volts, and Close Covers, deleted graphic
A2_1398 added graphic A2_2841a
Chap 6 Planned Change Document Control Number to 96722-110

Maintenance
Chap 6 Planned Update PM Procedure #1 table

Maintenance
Maintenance

Maintenance
Chap 8 Installation Change Document Control Number to 96724-106
Chap 8 Installation Updated c8000 Robotic Positions Setup table
Chap 8 Installation Added new procedure c8000 System Packing and Relocation
Section
Sections Revised/Added Revision
Numbers
Frnt Title Changed front matter doc control number from "96662-119" to "96662-
120"

Chap 7 Pre-Site Interview and Inspection Changed manual revision number from "96723-108” to “96723-109”
Chap 7 Pre-Site Interview and Inspection Updated text in Pre-Site Checklist.
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Changed front matter doc control number from "96662-120" to "96662-121"
Frnt Proprietary Changed Manual Revision Number to 204670-102

Information
Updated trademark information.

Chap 1 General Data Document Control Number, change to 96663-108
Updated Biological Hazard area, Precaution with new text references about reporting
incidents.
Updated Sodium Azide information in Chemical Hazards.

Chap 8 Installation & Setup Document Control Number, change to 96724-107
Updated Title in c8000 Installation Checklist.
Updated some LN numbers in Materials Required area.
Moved Install Left and Right Counter Balances and graphic to different location.
Updated text in Install Card Cage (Old Style).
Added new task Install New Style RSH Card Cage and Plate and graphics 6a_9209a,
6a_9202a, & 6a_9208a.
Added LN number in Assemble Sample Handler Cable Harness.
Deleted steps in Attach Cables to RSH Card Cage.
Added text and graphics 6a_9204a, 6a_9205a, to Check Card Cage Cable Connections.
Deleted steps in Attach Cables to RSH Card Cage.
Added text and graphics 3a_9360a & 6a_9206a, to Reposition Right Side Cover Front
Latch.
Added text and graphics 6a_9207a to Install Right and Left Side Cover.
Section
Sections Revised/Added Revision
Numbers

Chap 1 General Data Document Control Number, change to 96663-109
Added Caution and remove autoclave statement from Sodium Azide information in
Chemical Hazards.

Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Document Control Number, change to 96722-111
Updated PM Procedure #1 table to “To check degasser output for bubbles”.
Updated PM #1 Checklist table to “Check for bubbles in degasser output”.

Chap 7 Pre-Site Specification and Document Control Number, change to 96723-110

Checklist
Added ‘Sodium Azide Awareness” statement to Pre-Site Checklist table.

Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Change document control number from "96722-111" to "96722-112".
Removed Planned Maintenance Procedures. Updated with ISA 126-104
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change Manual Revision Number from "96750-123" to "96750-124"

Chapter 1 General Data Change document control number from "96663-109" to "96663-110".
Chapter 1 General Data Added Attention Activator symbol.

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Changed Document Control number from "96664-103" to "96664-104".
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Card cage to contain information for newer DAQ board.

Chapter 8 Installation & Setup Change document control number from "96759-116" to "96759-117".
Chapter 8 Installation & Setup Updates to installation procedures per ER 283046 to add attention activators and
verification statements.
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change Manual Revision Number from "96750-124" to "96750-125".
Frnt Title Changed front matter doc control number from "96662-124" to "96662-125".

Chapter 8 Installation & Change document control number from "96724-107" to 96724-108".
Setup
Update installation checklist and procedure "c8000 Module Install Accessories" to include
additional step to Verify ICT pinch valve tubing is installed.
Frnt Title Change Manual Revision Number from "96750-125" to "96750-126".
Frnt Title Changed front matter doc control number from "96662-125" to "96662-126".
Chapter 8 Installation & Setup Changed Document Control Number from "96724-108" to "96724-109".
Add M&D 3526 Update Check Water Bath Temperature
Section Sections
Revision
Frnt Title Change Manual Revision Number from "96750-126" to "96750-127."
Frnt Title Changed front matter doc control number from "96662-126" to "96662-127."
Chapter 8 Installation & Setup Changed Document Control Number from "96724-109" to "96724-110."
Update instructions for verifying the correct switch settings before installation of new
board.
General Data
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-124 • © 2002, 2012 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
1.1 How to Use This Manual
Links
Overview
Hazard Signal Words
Safety Icons and Hazard Symbols
Electrical Hazards
Laser Light
Biological Hazards
Chemical Hazards
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide information useful for servicing the ARCHITECT system and is composed of the following
sections:
Section Topic
General Data This section contains a product overview, information on manual usage, accident prevention symbols, and
system specifications.
Troubleshooting This section contains reference and normal operation information for the system. The information includes
block and functional diagrams, mechanism and motor listings, and LED operating conditions.
Parts Lists This section provides lists of Supplemental Tools and Supplies, Customer and Field Service replaceable parts
which are indexed by item number and description.
Removal & This section contains Removal & Replacement procedures which are indexed by number to the Parts Lists.
Replacement
Procedures This section contains configuration, adjustment, calibration, checks, and test procedures used to setup or
verify instrument operation. Procedures are also used to assist in troubleshooting.
Planned This section contains preventative maintenance (PM) recommendation checklists. These recommendations
Maintenance may be subject to change due to local business or regulatory needs.
Pre-Site This section includes the site specifications and a checklist that outlines the activities of the Field Service
Specification & Engineer/ Representative (FSE/FSR). An open action item summary is included in the checklist.
Checklist
Installation This section outlines the activities required to install or relocate a system.
Hazards
Introduction
The c8000 is designed for optimal operator safety. However, this does not reduce the importance of safety awareness where
hazards exist. This section describes the types and locations of potential hazards that could cause physical harm or damage to the
laboratory environment or where failure to follow instructions may result in instrument failure or generation of erroneous patient
results.
This section describes the types and locations of potential hazards that could cause physical harm. Warnings are inserted
throughout this manual to alert Field Service Representatives (FSRs) to potential hazards.
Hazard Signal Words
Standard warning conventions, including hazard signal words and symbols, are described below.
Signal
Definition
Word
DANGER Denotes an immediate hazard which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. This signal word
represents the highest level of any hazardous situation.
WARNING Denotes a physical, mechanical, or procedural condition that could result in moderate to serious personal injury.
Caution Denotes a condition or activities that could result in minor injury or interfere with proper functioning of the system.
Note Denotes operator or service information.
Safety Icons and Hazard Symbols
Safety icons in this manual and on the c8000 identify potentially dangerous conditions. Field Service Representatives must
recognize the icons and understand the type and degree of potential hazard. The following icons may be used with text or in lieu of
text. If text accompanies the icon, it describes the nature of the hazard and is labeled with DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION. In
some situations, instrument labels refer Field Service Representatives to the manual for specific information.
Symbol Hazard Description
DANGER Identifies high voltage areas. Alerts the user to the possibility of electrical
High shock in noted activity or at posted location in the power supply. Follow
precautionary measures as outlined below in "Electrical Safety" Section.
Voltage
WARNING Identifies the possibility of electrical shock if procedural or engineering controls

Electrical are not observed.
Shock
Hazard
WARNING Identifies an activity or area where potentially infectious materials may be

Potential present. Follow procedures as outlined below in Biological Hazards Section.
Biohazard
WARNING Identifies an activity or area where probes may be present.
Probe
Stick
Hazard
WARNING Identifies an area where fluids may be under pressure.

Splash /
Spray
Hazard
Caution Identifies an activity or area where hazardous chemicals are present. Refer to
Chemical the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package insert for specific safety
Hazard information.
Caution Warns against direct viewing into the bar code laser beam or reflections from
Class 2 the beam.
Laser
Product
Caution Identifies an area where a hot surface is present.

Hot Surface
Caution Identifies an activity where one may be required to lift or move a heavy object.
Lifting Obtain assistance when moving and/or use appropriate lifting devices.
Hazard
Caution Identifies an activity or area where moving parts are present.

Moving
Parts
Caution Identifies an area where electrostatic discharge may be present. A ground

Possible strap must be worn while servicing the system.
Electrostatic
Discharge
Shock
Note Identifies the location on the card cage where the ground strap is clipped.
Card Cage
Ground
The labeling of c8000 reagents/calibrators/controls or liquid consumables may include one or more of the following hazard symbols.
The symbols and/or other country specific warnings are used to convey properties of the chemical or chemical mixture, and to
notify the user that precautions should be taken when handling the material. Always consult the specific package insert or Material
Safety Data Sheet for further information.
Hazard Symbol Definition / Description (with Standard Abbreviation)
Indicates that the material is Oxidizing (O).
Indicates that the material is Highly Flammable (F) or Extremely Flammable (F +).
Indicates that the material is Toxic (T) or Very Toxic (T +).
Indicates that the material is Harmful (Xn) or Irritant (Xi).
Indicates that the material is Corrosive (C).
Indicates that the material is Dangerous for the environment (N).
Electrical Hazards
The c8000 does not pose uncommon electrical hazards if it is installed properly and operated without alteration, and is connected
to a power source that meets required specifications. Refer to Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications in System
Specifications for details.
Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of any system. It is recommended that a ground fault circuit
interrupter be used when working in a wet environment. Only qualified personnel should perform electrical servicing. Elements of
electrical safety include, but are not limited to the following:
Inspect electrical cabling into and on the c8000 periodically for signs of wear and damage.
Turn the instrument OFF before disconnecting the power cord and before servicing any electrical or internal components.
Determine the cause of a blown fuse or thrown circuit breaker and correct the problem before attempting to resume
operation of the equipment. Only use replacement fuses of the specified type and electrical rating.
Assure the power to the instrument is turned OFF. Be aware that a high voltage charge may remain on the power supply
with the power OFF.
Use an electrically insulated tool to disconnect the power supply and short both male pins to the instrument chassis.
Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or communication components. Unplug the instrument before clean-up of
major liquid spills.
Make sure hands are dry prior to touching any switches or outlets.
Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the c8000.
Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as those supplied with the instrument, to protect against
electric shock.
Connect power cords only to properly grounded outlets.
Mechanical Hazards
The c8000 is an automated system that operates under computer control. As with most automated equipment, there is potential for
injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical components whenever the instrument is in operation. The c8000 minimizes
mechanical hazards by providing guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components.
The c8000 requires accurate positioning of all samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and consumables before executing any
program. If safeguards must be removed or disconnected during setup and testing procedures, use caution. Stay a safe distance
away from the moving components; fast moving parts many cause injury. Always replace the safeguards upon completion of setup
and testing procedures, it is never acceptable for instrument operators to reach into the instrument when it is in an operating mode.
Should intervention be necessary during a run, the run should be interrupted according to instructions defined in the operations
manual.
Field Service Representatives of the c8000 may be potentially exposed to the following functional groups or subsystems:
C2 Reaction Carousel
D1 Reagent Supply Center
D2 Reagent Supply Center 2
E4 Wash Solution Pump
E5 ICT Reference Pump
E6 ICT Aspiration Pump
E7 Inner Probe Wash Pump
E8 H.C. Waste Pump Bellows
E9 Cuvette Wash Pump, Bellows
G1 Sample Syringe Drive
G2 Reagent Syringe Drive
R1 Mixer Assembly
R3 Sample Pipettor Head
R4 Reagent Pipettor Elevator
R5 Reagent Pipettor Head
R6 Cuvette Washer Assembly
R7 ICT Assembly
S1 Sample Carousel
W2 Electromechanical
W3-A Belts/Skins/Cables
Injury may result in the event of an instrument malfunction or an unexpected sequence of mechanical component movements.
Basic elements of mechanical equipment safety include but are not limited to:
Never bypass or override a safety device unless during setup or testing activities.
Never operate the instrument without protective covers and barriers in place unless during setup or testing activities.
Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the c8000.
Never allow any part of body to enter a range of mechanical movement during system operation.
Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch on the c8000.
Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the c8000.
Be especially cautious when performing adjustment, maintenance, cleaning, or repair procedures.
Use caution when loading sample carriers and reagents.
Laser Light
The c8000 is a Class 2 laser product.
When this product is used according to its operating instructions, the laser does not present a hazard to the eyes. Never stare
directly into the beam, look into the aperture, place any optics into the beam or bypass interlocks. Failure to follow proper
procedures may result in an eye injury.
Only Abbott trained Field Service Representatives should remove the inner protective covers that enclose the embedded laser.
Do not remove, damage or obliterate any of the laser warning labels. If any label becomes illegible, replace it.
Laser Caution Labels
On the c System, this label is affixed to the covers for the reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) and the sample carousel.
On the i System, this label is affixed to the cover for the reagent carousel.
On the RSH (retest sample handler), this label is affixed above the sample bar code reader under the priority bay cover.
On the c System, this label is affixed to the sidewall of the processing module, to the right of R1 (reagent supply center 1).
On the i System, this label is affixed to the underside of the rear processing center cover.
Biological Hazards
The following activities may involve the presence of potentially infectious materials:
Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls

Cleaning spills
Handling and disposing of waste
Moving the System
Performing maintenance procedures
Performing decontamination procedures
Performing component replacement procedures
Precautions
All instruments that have been used to process clinical specimens, reagents, controls, calibrators, etc., that contain human sourced
material must be treated as potentially infectious. Follow ADD's Biosafety procedures, which include, but are not limited to the
following precautions:
Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eye wear when handling human sourced material or contaminated instrument
components.
Do not pipet by mouth.
Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses when handling human sourced material or contaminated
instrument components.
Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated instrument components with a detergent followed by an
appropriate disinfectant, such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectant.
Decontaminate and dispose of all potentially contaminated materials into the appropriate biohazard waste system in the
facility. Probes and other sharp objects should be placed in puncture resistant sharps containers for disposal.
Note
Refer to EHS Policies/Guidance BioSafety.
If exposed to infectious or potentially infectious materials, immediately cleanse the affected area, then seek medical attention as
soon as possible:
Eyes - rinse with water for 15 minutes.

Mouth - rinse with water.
Skin - wash the affected area with soap and water.
Puncture wound - allow to bleed freely. Wash the affected area with soap and water.
Note
Report all accidents to your Manager and Workers' Compensation Administrator. For additional information see:
GCO EHS Incident Reporting and
Incident Investigation Report Instructions & Form.
Spill Clean-up
Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices and follow instructions provided in the MSDS. In general, safe work
practices for cleaning spills include:
1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment such as gloves, lab coat, and protective eye wear.
2. Absorb the spill with absorbent material.
3. Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.
4. Wipe the area with an appropriate disinfectant such as a 0.1% sodium hypochlorite (10% solution of chlorine bleach
containing at least 5% sodium hypochlorite).
5. Dispose of spilled and contaminated material in accordance with the facilities waste disposal procedures.
Instrument or Part Decontamination
Any part subject to user handling (for instance, keyboards, printers, monitors, disk drives, front panels, etc.) requires
decontamination prior to servicing or shipment. When handling or decontaminating spare parts for shipping or repair, use safety
precautions as listed below.
Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (protective eye wear, gloves, lab coat) while performing decontamination
activities.
1. Remove all specimens, reagents, controls, calibrators, etc., from the instrument.
2. Cycle sodium hypochlorite solution (chlorine bleach) through the fluid pathway (including probes, if applicable) that contacted
the human sourced material or products containing potentially infectious material. Allow the solution to stand for a minimum
of 10 minutes. If a chlorine bleach solution cannot be used, cycle buffer or water through the fluid pathway to thoroughly
flush the fluid pathway.
3. Remove all waste materials from the instrument, if present.
4. Rinse waste containers with 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectants prior to shipping or disposal.
5. Wipe down the surface of each instrument and component with a detergent solution followed by an appropriate disinfectant
such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite.
Note
Under normal circumstances, printed circuit boards do not require decontamination. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
enclosed inside the skins of computer and peripheral equipment are not considered contaminated. Decontamination
may affect the performance of a printed circuit board or internal computer component.
Waste Handling and Disposal
It is the responsibility of each facility to label all waste containers and to characterize its waste stream to ensure the waste is
disposed of in accordance with the appropriate waste disposal regulations.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately labeled, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container.
Chemical Hazards
Field Service Representatives may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, or liquid
consumables. Exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following instructions provided in the assay Package Inserts and
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Exposure levels are further reduced by the design features of the instrument when it is used
properly.
Precautions
In general, observe the following precautions when handling chemicals:
Consult Material Safety Data Sheets for safe use instructions and precautions.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious gloves and protective eye wear and
clothing.
Always maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.
If irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure, seek medical attention.
Hazard symbols that appear on c8000 product labeling are accompanied by Risk (R) and Safety (S) numbers and represent
specific risk and safety phrases as defined by applicable European Community Directives. The risk and safety phrases describe
precautions used when working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture. For all (R) and (S) numbers that appear on product
labeling, refer to the corresponding phrases indicated in the Package Insert or similar document. Other country specific warning
and precautions may be included on the labeling.
Sodium Azide
Some products may contain sodium azide. Observe the following precautions when using products that contain sodium azide:
Do not mix any chemical or product with a pH below 6 with solutions or residues that contain sodium azide (such as wash
buffer). Sodium azide releases hydrazoic acid, a very toxic and pungent-smelling gas when the pH is lower than 6.
Caution
The pre-trigger solution has a pH lower than 6. Allowing the pre-trigger solution to contact wash buffer or dried wash
buffer residue may result in the release of hydrazoic acid, a very toxic and pungent-smelling gas. Care must be taken
to clean up any spills or residue that may have occurred due to leaking components (ex. pumps in the pump bay)
identified during servicing of the instrument.
Flush drains thoroughly with water several times a day to prevent potentially explosive metal azides from forming on lead,
copper or brass components or on solder in laboratory plumbing if product and/or instrument waste is released to a drain.
Detailed information about azides in laboratory drains is available in Current Intelligence Bulletin No. 13 Explosive Azide
Hazard (August 16, 1976), a publication issued by the U.S. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), at
cdc.gov/niosh.
A copy of the bulletin is also available on the Abbott Diagnostics Global internet site at abbottdiagnostics.com (select the
International region), under Support - Technical Library - Other Reference Documents, or by contacting your Abbott
representative.
Physical Hazards
Safe practices should be observed while working with the following physical hazards to avoid potential injuries.
Sharps and Probes
In general, the use of sharps and glassware should be minimized.
The probes are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious materials. Avoid contact with these components and handle them
cautiously in order to prevent injury. Use mechanical means to remove contaminated broken glassware.
When handling the external waste pump (c8000 optional accessory), use proper personal protective equipment. Avoid contact with
the sharp metal edge of the pump.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately marked, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container before treatment and disposal.
Heavy Objects
The system is heavy and sections of the shell are unsupported. Ensure that you have adequate help before attempting to move the
system.
Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on unsupported sections of the shell.
The c System high-concentration waste container is heavy when full. The i System wash buffer reservoir is heavy and bulky when
full. Use care when handling the container to reduce the risk of injury.
When moving or lifting heavy objects, obtain assistance and always use proper lifting techniques.
Hot Objects
The buffer heaters and lamp and lamp housing may be hot. Allow the surface to cool before touching and handling. Use
temperature-resistant gloves, if necessary.
Trip Hazard
The c8000 is equipped with a power cord and various computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure cords in high traffic
areas are properly stowed.
Many of the electronic components on the c8000 circuit boards are susceptible to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Static discharge of
as little as 100 - 200 volts can damage or destroy a component. Always wear a wrist ground strap and discharge static electricity
from your body prior to touching and working on the instrument.
Note
All card cage boards are shipped with a ground strap and graphical instructions for use. This symbol is placed on the card
cage to identify the appropriate ground location.
Static Hazard
Static protective procedures are used during the manufacture of PC boards. Replacement PC board assemblies are also protected
by use of static protective packaging as well as boxed to prevent physical damage. Assemblies that have failed and are returned
for repair are also handled at the repair shop under static protection procedures.
Handling Guidelines - PC Subassemblies
These guidelines assure protection against failures created by static.
Retain spare PC board subassemblies in the static-protective bags.

Use an approved static-protective field service kit, or the ground strap shipped with the board, whenever a board is removed
from an instrument or protective bag.
Replace the defective PC board in the same protective bag to return for repair.
Continued use of the protective shipping boxes, both during shipping and storage, eliminates most failures caused by physical
damage.
Static Protective Service Kit
The static protective service kit is designed to keep the FSE/FSR, replacement part, work surface, and instrument at the same
ground level. Generally, an instruction set accompanies the kit, however, in the absence of specific instructions, follow ESD
Procedure.
ESD Procedure
Note
Use where ESD symbol is present and static protective equipment is not shipped with replacement part.
1. Place the work mat on a solid surface close to the instrument. Allow the ground strap to reach the instrument.
2. Attach the ground clip to the instrument chassis.
3. Attach the other end of the ground clip cable and the connector from the wrist strap to the work mat. (Exception: Some wrist
strap cables provide a clip to connect to the same ground source as the mat cable).
4. Attach wrist strap to your wrist, make sure the metallic button on the inside of the wrist strap is in direct contact with skin.
5. Place PC boards, removed from the instrument, on the work mat.
6. Replacement PC boards should be placed on the work mat before removing from the protective bag and remain on the mat
until installation.
7. Defective PC boards should be placed in the static-protective bag before removal from the work mat area.
Kit Parts
Static protective work surface
Wrist strap and attaching cable
Grounding clip or cable
Miscellaneous Symbols
The Attention Activator is a symbol representing an alert to the user of key tasks requiring specific action.
c8000 Functional Description
c8000 Processing Module
The ARCHITECT c8000 is a high performance clinical chemistry diagnostic system capable of quantifying selected analytes in
biological fluids. The system consists of the c8000 module, the Robotic Sample Handler (RSH), and a separate System Control
Center (SCC) for initiating and monitoring operations. The system can be configured with up to 220 different assays including Ion
Selective Electrode (ISE) analysis of sodium, potassium, and chloride with up to 65 different reagents onboard. It can process
samples with a maximum throughput of 1200 tests/hour when running both photometric and ISE tests (800 tests/hour with only
photometric tests and 600 tests/hour when running ISE only). Individual assay time is a maximum of 10 minutes.
Quality control using Levy-Jennings and Westgard rules used and on-board data storage is on the hard drive of the SCC.
Operational modes include random, continuous access and priority processing. Endpoint and rate reactions are calculated using
absorbance measurements that are converted into concentration units. Absorbance measurements are made using a diode array
detection system.
Integrated Chip Technology (ICT) for electrolyte determinations consists of an integrated module using ion selective electrode
technology.
The c8000 uses permanent, rectangular glass cuvettes in a temperature controlled water bath containing 1.5 liters of water. The
instrument holds 11 cuvette segments. Each segment contains 15 individual cuvettes. The light path length for the cuvettes is
5 mm. A water distribution system is also used for cuvette, sample/reagent probe and mixer blade washing. A cuvette washer is
used to distribute diluted alkaline and acid solutions during the cuvette wash process. Dual mixers are used to mix the sample and
reagent in preparation for final analysis.
Two refrigerated reagent supply centers are incorporated for on-board storage of reagents.
A 32 position sample carousel is used to process priority patients, calibrators and controls. The carousel is cooled to provide
additional calibrator and control stability.
Sample carriers are used to transport patient samples throughout the system. Each carrier has a capacity of five samples. The
RSH is used to move the carriers to the proper position for sampling.
Sample pressure monitoring circuitry is incorporated for clot and bubble detection on the sample pipettor. An alert is issued when a
clot or bubble is detected providing the operator the opportunity to rerun or check the quality of the sample. The reagent pipettors
do not have pressure monitoring.
Sample Progression
The reaction carousel contains 165 cuvettes in a water bath that is maintained at 37°C. During a run, the carousel rotates
counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn (41 cuvette positions) turn every 4.5 seconds to position the cuvettes for sample and
reagent aspiration, mixing, photometry, ICT analysis, and cuvette washing. The following steps occur for each cuvette as it is
processed.
Reaction Carousel Sample Progression

Position 1 - When the cuvette has moved to the sample dispense position, the sample pipettor moves to the sample carousel or
RSH and aspirates the sample. The sample is then dispensed into the cuvette.
Position 2 - The reaction carousel rotates one cycle, and the cuvette, containing sample, is at the first reagent dispense position.
The reagent 1 pipettor aspirates reagent from the reagent supply center 1 and dispenses it into the cuvette.
Position 3 - The reaction carousel rotates one cycle to this position at which no activity takes place.
Position 4 - The reaction carousel rotates one cycle to the first mixing position, where the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample
and reagent 1 by the piezoelectric action (vibration) of the mixer unit.
Movement from Position 4 to position 5 - As the reaction carousel rotates from position 4 to position 5, it passes through the
optics unit and the absorbance of the reaction mixture is measured.
Position 5 - The reaction carousel has nearly made an entire rotation. Each cycle rotates 41 cuvette positions, so the carousel has
rotated 164 cuvette positions. Since there are a total of 165 cuvette positions, the cuvette is now one position behind were it
started.
Positions 6 - 135 - The reaction carousel continues to rotate and the reaction mixture incubates. The optics takes absorbance
readings every time the cuvette passes the light path for a total of 33 read times.
Position 136 - 164 - The cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid
Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette
integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette.
Position 165 - The clean cuvette waits at this position for one cycle before it begins again at position 1 with a new reaction.
Additional Reaction Timing Details
Position 5 - If on board dilution is required, the sample pipettor aspirates the diluted sample and dispenses the sample into the
new cuvette that is currently at position 1.
Position 31- For an ICT sample, the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample into the ICT unit.
Position 67 - If the reaction requires a second reagent, reagent pipettor 2 dispenses reagent 2 into the cuvette.
Position 68 - The mixer unit (mixer2) mixes the second reagent with the sample and reagent mixture.
Photometric Technology
Photometry is defined as the measurement of light which travels in waves. The color of light is a function of its wavelength which is
the distance between the peaks of a light wave. As the wavelength of light is varied, a visible change in color is detected. Material
that appears to have color absorbs light at specific wavelengths and reflects others producing different shades of color. For
example, a substance that absorbs blue light at 475 nm reflects all other wavelengths and is seen as yellow which is the sum of all
other reflected light.
In a laboratory setting, an assay specific reagent solution is mixed with a patient sample causing a chemical reaction and color
change to take place over time. Photometric technology uses a light source and optics unit to measure the kind and the amount of
light absorbed or transmitted by the solution. This technology follows Beer's Law which states that the absorbance of a solution is
directly related to its concentration. The relationship between transmittance and absorbance as a function of concentration is
explained as follows:
Transmittance is the amount of light that passes through a solution and is measured photometrically. The amount of light reaching
the optics is expressed as the percent transmittance. As the concentration of the color in the sample is increased, the percent
transmittance is decreased although the relationship is not linear. A more linear relationship is established by plotting the logarithm
of the %T.
Absorbance measures the amount of light that is absorbed by a solution. Absorbance describes the percentage of light
transmission and is directly proportional to concentration.
Transmittance and Absorbance as a Function of Concentration
Standards or calibrators with known concentration values are measured in a photometric system. The measured absorbance values
are plotted against the known concentrations of the calibrators and a calibration curve is drawn. The absorbance of the patient
sample is measured and compared to the calibration curve and the concentration value of the patient result is calculated.
End-Point Assay
End-point assays are reactions that reach an equilibrium and at that time there is little or no further change to the absorbance
readings. During this equilibrium time, the system measures the absorbance readings used for calibration and calculating results.
For end-point assays, the system calculates the concentration using the absorbance data obtained in the Main Read Time
specified on the Configure assay parameters window - General Reaction Definition view.
End-Point Assay Reaction Example illustrates a typical end-point assay reaction curve.
End-Point Assay Reaction Example

Rate Assay
Rate assays are reactions that measure the constant change in absorbance over time. The system performs readings several times
during this reaction, calculates absorbance change (activity), and then uses the readings to calculate results.
For rate assays, the system calculates the activity using the change of absorbance per minute in the Main Read Time specified on
the Configure assay parameters window - General Reaction Definition View.
Down Rate Assay Reaction Curve Example illustrates a typical rate assay reaction curve.
Down Rate Assay Reaction Curve Example
Optics Assembly
The optical system of the c8000 is a reaction cuvette direct photometry system that serves to direct and align the light from the
source lamp, through the water bath and cuvette, and then into the optics unit. The system focuses only light that originates at the
source lamp. The analyzer uses a concave diffraction grating and is capable of taking monochromatic and bi-chromatic
measurements at 16 different wavelengths. Monochromatic measurements compare the absorbance of a chromogen in a sample
solution against a water or reagent blank. Bi-chromatic analysis uses the absorbance difference of a chromogen between two pre-
selected wavelengths.
c8000 Optics Assembly
Light from the tungsten halogen source lamp passes through the heat absorbing filter, convex focusing lens, water bath lenses and
cuvette. The heat absorbing filter protects the first convex lens.
The light passes into the optics assembly then through another convex focusing lens and is reflected off of a mirror 90 degrees
through a slit to a diffraction grating. The slit controls the size of the light beam onto the grating assembly. The grating breaks up
the focused light beam into the 16 component wavelengths (340nm to 804nm) and reflects the light spectrum to the diode array.
The photo diode detects and measures changes in light intensity.
The current signal from the photo diode array is changed to a voltage and is amplified by the pre-amp board. In the DAQ board
circuitry, the signal is inverted and selected from 16 channels by a multiplexer. The Trigger Sensor signals the DAQ board that the
cuvette is in the light path and is in position for the readings to take place. A gain control circuit (on the DAQ board) changes the
signal to an optimum level, converts from analog to digital, and passes the reading to the CPU board. Final result calculations are
performed by the system control center. There are no field adjustable or cleanable parts inside the optics assembly.
DAQ Board Block Diagram

Integrated Chip Technology (ICT) - Ion Selective Electrode Principle
The ICT module is an integrated subsystem for determining sodium, potassium and chloride in fluid samples. The ICT module
contains a solid state ion selective electrode for each analyte. Each electrode is based on the unique properties of ion specific
membranes that develop an electrical potential or voltage when exposed to a solution containing the analyte it is designed to
measure. The voltage developed varies in response to concentration changes -- the higher the sample concentration, the larger the
voltage output. The voltage on the ion selective electrode is compared to a reference electrode that is an integral part of the ICT
module.
ICT Module and Flow

Electrode Description
Sodium A Crown Ether ionophore incorporated into an ion-selective plastic membrane.

(Na+) (It is NOT a glass electrode, and therefore is less affected by pH changes)
Potassium Valinomycin incorporated into an ion-selective plastic membrane.

(K+)
Chloride (Cl- A solid silver chloride (AgCl) disk.

)
Reference A silver/silver chloride electrode in a potassium chloride (KCl) gel inner solution, separated from the sample by a
porous ceramic tube.
The c8000 uses an on-board bulk solution known as ICT reference solution. Reference solution is used in the ICT fluidic system in
the determination of electrolyte values. The solution serves to stabilize the temperature of the electrodes, provide a known
concentration or standard for calculating the concentration of the sample and to rinse out the sample at the end of the
measurement process. Proper fluidic operation is critical for accurate and precise results. The fluidic operation is monitored by a
capacitive sensor located in the reference solution cup. If the cup does not fill or if the reference solution is not aspirated an error
is generated.
Sample Progression for an ICT Protocol
The following information describes the sample progression for ICT assays.
In position 1, the sample pipettor (either from the RSH or the sample carousel) aspirates, and then dispenses the sample
into a cuvette.
In position 2, reagent pipettor 1 aspirates, and then dispenses ICT sample diluent into the cuvette.
In position 4, the mixer unit (mixer1) mixes the sample and ICT sample diluent.
In position 31, the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample, and then the ICT module analyzes the sample.
Note
The ICT module analyzes the ICT reference solution once before and after each serum sample and twice before and
after each urine sample to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results. The reference concentration
calculation is the average of the before and after aspiration.
In positions 136 - 164, the cuvette washer washes and dries the cuvette in preparation for the next sample.
Power Distribution (serial numbers < c800224)
System power is provided by a Main Power Supply and a Stepper Motor Driver/Sample Handler (SMD/SH) Power Supply that
provides power to both the c8000 and the RSH.
Line voltage to Main Power Supply
Line voltage to the c8000 can be anywhere from 180-264VAC, and 50/60 Hz.
The main switch (on the instrument) is a 15 Amp circuit breaker.
The main power supply contains the following power supplies:
Supply Voltage
PS1 +5VDC to the c8000 master card cage
PS2 +12VDC to the valves used in the fluidics system
PS3 +12VDC to the Sample Carousel Peltier units

DC Lamp +11.45VDC to the optics lamp and ±15VDC to the mixer driver board and master card cage
The SMD/SH Power Supply contains the following power supplies:
Supply Voltage
PS4 +24VDC to the c8000 stepper motors
PS5 +36VDC and RSH Stepper Motor Driver
PS6 +5 and ±12VDC to the RSH card cage
Power Supplies Block Diagram (serial numbers < c800224)

Power On Sequence
When the main switch is turned on, external power is supplied to the main transformer through the breaker and line filter. At this
time, power is applied to the reagent refrigerator and PS3, which provides 12VDC to the sample carousel Peltier units.
When the preliminary switch is turned on, 100VAC is supplied through terminal block 1 to transformer #2, PS1, PS2 and PS6
power supplies allowing the c8000 to execute the system boot-up routine. At this time, 100VAC is also applied to the c8000
module cooling fans, heater assembly and the AC/DC driver circuit board. Transformer #2 also supplies +24VAC to the mixer driver
board and +18.3VAC to the DC lamp power supply.
After a pre-determined time, the AC/DC driver circuit board sends a signal to the main power supply relay that closes supply
200VAC to the PS4 and PS5 power supplies.
Power Distribution (serial numbers > c800223)
System power is provided by a Main Power Supply and a Stepper Motor Driver/ Sample Handler (SMD/SH) Power Supply that
provides power to both the c8000 and the RSH.
Line voltage to Main Power Supply
Line voltage to the c8000 can be anywhere from 180-264VAC, and 50/60 Hz.
The main switch (on the instrument) is a 20 Amp circuit breaker.
The main power supply contains the following power supplies:
Supply Voltage
PS1 +5VDC to the c8000 master card cage
PS2 +12VDC to the Sample Carousel Peltier units
DC Lamp +11.45VDC to the optics lamp and ±15VDC to the mixer driver board and master card cage
The SMD/SH Power Supply contains the following power supplies:
Supply Voltage
PS5 +36VDC and RSH Stepper Motor Driver and +24VDC to the c8000 stepper motors
PS6 +5 and ±12VDC to the RSH card cage
Power Supplies Block Diagram (serial numbers > c800223)
Power On Sequence (serial numbers > c800223)
When the main switch is turned on, external power is supplied to the main transformer through the breaker and line filter. At this
time, power is applied to the reagent refrigerator.
When the preliminary switch is turned on, 100VAC is supplied through terminal block 1 to transformer #2, PS1, PS2 and PS6
power supplies allowing the c8000 to execute the system boot-up routine. At this time, 100VAC is also applied to the c8000
module cooling fans, heater assembly and the AC/DC driver circuit board. Transformer #2 also supplies +24VAC to the mixer driver
board and +18.3VAC to the DC lamp power supply. At the same time 200VAC is supplied to the PS5 power supply for c8000 and
RSH stepper motors.
Circuit Breakers
Voltages are protected by individual circuit breakers located on the front of the main power supply and the front of the SMD/SH
Power Supply.
The main power supply has six circuit breakers for the following devices:
Circuit Breaker Device or voltage
CP1 Reagent refrigerator (100VAC)
CP2 +5VDC to the CNN circuit board
CP3 100VAC to the heater assembly
CP4 100VAC SMD/SH Power Supply to the c8000 module cooling fans
CP5 100VAC to the AC/DC Driver circuit board
CP6 +24VAC to the heater assembly
The SMD/SH Power Supply has circuit breakers that provide protection for the +24VAC to the Stepper Motor Driver circuit board
which drives the c8000 stepper motors.
Voltage Monitoring
To monitor the various voltages in the c8000 module, the main power supply incorporates a power indicator LED circuit board
located in the front of the supply.
Green LED's indicate the absence or presence of the following voltages:
+11.45VDC for the optics lamp

±15VDC for the Mixer Driver circuit board
+12VDC for sample carousel Peltier units
+24VDC for the stepper motors
+12VDC for the valves and solenoids
+5VDC for the master card cage
The following schematics provides greater detail for the Main and SMD/SH power supplies:
Schematic Diagram File
Main Power Supply Schematic (< c800224) A2_9001.PDF

SMD/SH Power Supply Schematic (< c800224) A2_9009.PDF
Main Power Supply Schematic (> c800223) A2_9003.PDF
SMD/SH Power Supply Schematic (> c800223) A2_9004.PDF
Total Wiring - Printed Circuit Boards

The master card cage contains five circuit boards that provide the following functions:
Circuit
Function
Board
CPU Handles communication with the SCC and the c8000 module. A backup of the robotics information is stored in the
flash memory on the board.
AC/DC Provides AC motor and fluidic valve control to the AC/DC Driver board and A/D conversion for temperature and
Controller voltage monitoring.
Stepper The Stepper Motor Controller board controls the +24VDC stepper motors by sending signals to the Stepper Motor
Motor Driver board to control the various stepper motors in the c8000 module.
Controller
DAQ The DAQ board serves to quantify and convert the optical and ICT analog signals to a digital format to be sent to
the SCC. This board also controls the operation of the c8000 module and stores the robotics information in
memory.
Pressure The Pressure Monitor board has a digital processor which monitors the electrical output signals from the pressure
Monitor sensor during the sample aspiration and dispense process.
The remaining circuit boards are mounted within the instrument frame and provide the following functions:
Circuit Board Function
Liquid Level Sense Fluid sense and air detection is based on capacitance for the sample and reagent probes. Thresholds for
liquid detection are preset and adjustable with potentiometers located on the board.
Mixer Driver Provides signals to drive the piezoelectric mixers used for mixing sample and reagent in the cuvettes.
Signal feedback is received to check mixer vibration.
ICT Preamp The preamp board receives and amplifies the signals from the ICT module and transmits them to the DAQ
board in the master card cage for processing.
CNN Provides interface between the master card cage and the sensors in the c8000 module.
Two-Phase Drives the two-phase motors in the c8000 module. Those motors include the syringe drives, ICT unit,
Stepper Motor sample carousel, mix motor arms and reagent pipettors.
Driver
Five-Phase Six Five-Phase Stepper Motor boards provide finer motor movement for the reagent supply centers, sample
Stepper Motor pipettor and reaction carousel.
Driver(s)
AC/DC Driver Provides signals and drive to the 100VAC motors and +12VDC valves in the c8000 module.
MECH LED Displays the state of the sensors used by the AD/DC Controller board and the Stepper Motor Controller
board for monitoring movement in the robotic devices and for c8000 module status.
LED PCB LEDs display the status of the boot-up sequence and state of the c8000 module.
ICT IREF Cup Fluid and air detection based on capacitance for the ICT reference solution cup.
Sensor
Total Wiring - Printed Circuit Boards

Total Wiring - Printed Circuit Boards General Theory
The printed circuit boards in the master card cage are interfaced with the optical and temperature sensors, switches, bar code
readers and other circuit boards in the c8000 module through the CNN board. Power to each subassembly is provided by the main
and SMD/SH power supplies either by direct connection or through the CNN board.
The Stepper Motor Controller board provides control signals to the Two-Phase Stepper Motor Driver board which drives all of the
two-phase stepper motors in the c8000 module. The Two-Phase Motor Driver also provides an interface for the Five-Phase Motor
Drivers which are connected to those subassemblies requiring precise motor movement. Power is provided to the Two-Phase Motor
Drive board by the +24VDC power supply in the SMD/SH Power Supply.
The five-phase motors are:
Reaction Carousel - Rotational movement

Sample Pipettor - Horizontal movement
Sample Pipettor - Vertical movement
R1 Reagent Supply Center - Inner segment rotational movement
R1 Reagent Supply Center - Outer segment rotational movement
R2 Reagent Supply Center - Rotational movement
The AC/DC Controller board provides control signals to the AC/DC Driver board which then provides 100VAC for those devices
operated by AC motors and +12VDC to the various solenoids and valves in the c8000 module.
The Pressure Monitor board provides clot and bubble detection in samples to ensure accurate pipetting and results. A pressure
sensor located in series with the sample line tubing provides an electrical output signal that is representative of the fluid pressure in
the sample probe and tubing. The signal is supplied to the Pressure Monitor board in the master card cage through the CNN
board.
The DAQ board interfaces with the optics assembly and ICT Preamp board through the backplane of the master card cage. The
DAQ board also handles the c8000 module operations and stores robotics information in memory.
The CPU board handles c8000 module communication with the System Control Center. The CPU board has a Flash memory chip
for use in data storage and back up robotics step table information.
The main power supply provides 100VAC to the degasser, heater assembly, AC/DC Driver circuit board and sample carousel.
Optical Home and Pitch sensors are used in each stepper motor robotic assembly in the instrument. The home sensors are used
to determine the home or starting position for each device. In some devices the home sensor is used in conjunction with a pitch
sensor so that when they are in the home position, both sensors are interrupted. The reagent supply centers and the sample
carousel also use a Position sensor to determine reagent cartridge and sample tube positions. Pumps driven by AC motors contain
sensors labeled Up and Down to provide feedback on the position of the pump in the up or down position.
Temperature sensitive diodes (temperature detectors) located in the heater assembly, water bath, reagent supply centers, and
sample carousel provide temperature feedback to the AC/DC Controller board in the master card cage.
The following block diagram provides greater detail for the total wiring of the instrument:
Total Wiring Diagram A2_9008.PDF
Fluidics
Water movement throughout the c8000 module is handled by a Water Management Unit (WMU) located on the left rear side of the
instrument. The unit consists of a number of valves, pumps and tubing that direct clean Reagent Grade Type II water used for the
water bath, probe, mixer and cuvette washing. On board the WMU is a 6.5 liter internal water supply tank which fills automatically
to maintain water availability and enables water to be distributed throughout the c8000 module when needed. Float switches in the
WMU tell the c8000 module if there is adequate water available and if the waste water drain system is working properly.
A water degasser is incorporated in the system to reduce bubbles in the DI water for the sample and reagent probes along with the
wash solution pump for cuvette washing.
Two magnetic pumps (mag pump), located in the WMU, pump water to the probe wash cups for external probe washing and to the
water bath.
Clean Reagent Grade Type II water for rinsing of cuvettes is delivered to the cuvette washer by a bellows style pump. The pump
delivers water through a manifold and to the various wash nozzles on the washer head. The alkaline and acid solutions used by
the cuvette washer are created by a wash solution pump which delivers a 1.3% alkaline and 0.9% acid solution to the wash
nozzles.
Internal probe washing is achieved by another bellows pump which directs degassed water through the inside of the sample and
reagent probes to wash the inside of each probe and to enhance dispense.
Waste from the cuvette washer is directed to manifolds and out the system drain hoses through vacuum pumps and a bellows
pump. Waste water from the probe wash cups exits the system through a low concentration waste tank and is gravity fed to an
external drain hose.
Water Management Unit (WMU)
The water input fitting is at the rear of the system and directs water through an on/off valve and flow restrictor that is preset from
the factory. During the boot-up process the valve is opened and the open water tank fills with water. Float switches inside the open
tank tell the c8000 module when water is needed, when water is too low and when an overflow situation exists. Once the tank is
filled, the remainder of the fluidic c8000 module can be supplied with water.
A large mag pump draws water from the open water tank for use in external probe and mixer washing. Water is then directed to
the wash cup adjustment valves and solenoids. Each valve can be manually adjusted for the correct volume of water distributed to
the sample, reagent and mixer wash cups. When water is not needed for probe washing, the valves remain closed and water is
recirculated back into the supply tank by the mag pump and a second manifold. The mag pump is constantly running to maintain
circulation.
Water is distributed from the open water tank to the water bath through a small mag pump and valve assembly. When the water
bath is full, the valve above the mag pump remains closed and water is recirculated back into the open tank in a closed loop.
Water from the open water tank is also distributed to the wash solution pump and degasser through a manifold located on the base
of the WMU.
The WMU also includes a low concentration waste tank that collects low concentration waste from the cuvette washer, the wash
solution pump, the probe wash cups, the sample carousel, the reagent supply centers, and the water bath overflow area.
Water Bath Fill and Water Heater

Water is pumped up from the WMU through the small mag pump and valve into the water bath. A float switch tells the c8000
module when the water bath is full. Once the bath is full, a heater assembly that contains a mag pump, heater and radiator unit
turns on and begins to recirculate water through the heater, water bath and a manifold in a closed loop. Water temperature is held
to a constant 37° C ±0.2° C. The heater also supplies recirculated water through the same manifold to the ICT water jacket that
warms the ICT module.
Sample & Reagent Lines - Internal Probe Wash
To wash the inside of the sample and reagent probes, the WMU supplies water through a manifold to the degasser unit which
removes air bubbles from the DI water. On the down stroke of the internal probe wash pump, water flows from the degasser into
the pump. On the upstroke of the pump, water is forced out the top of the pump to another manifold that splits the water flow into
the sample and reagent valves. When it is necessary to wash the probes internally, the sample and reagent valves allow water to
pass to the sample and reagent syringes and to the probes. As the pump cycles, water is flushed through the probes and into the
probe wash cups.
Upon completion of a wash cycle, the valves turn off water flow to the syringes and probes creating a slight pressure in the tubing
between the pump and the valves. The pressure in the three lines forces the water to the water bath with the sample and R2 lines
going to water bath overflow area and the R1 line inserted directly over the water bath. The small amount of water supplied to the
bath by R1 during each probe wash cycle compensates for loss of water in the bath water during normal running.
Cuvette Washing - Water Wash
The cuvette washer employs an eight step process for washing cuvettes. Eight nozzles on the cuvette washer head wash, aspirate
liquid, and dry the cuvettes. Reagent Grade Type II water is supplied to four of the nozzles that provide a water wash or rinse
function through a cuvette wash pump. During the wash process, water is directed from the open water tank in the WMU on the
down stroke of the pump. On the up stroke of the pump, the cuvette wash valve opens and allows water to be supplied to the
nozzles through a manifold enabling a rinse of the cuvettes. During normal running, cuvette washing is a continuous process. At
specific times the cuvette wash valve diverts water to the bottom of the reagent supply centers to keep humidity levels high and to
provide an air flow seal enhancing reagent stability.
Cuvette Washing - Alkaline and Acid Wash Solutions

As part of the cuvette wash process, alkaline and acid solutions are introduced into the cuvette then aspirated. The wash solution
pump dilutes the alkaline solution to 1.3% and the acid solution to 0.9% and then the pump & valves distribute the diluted solutions.
Degassed water from the degasser is supplied to 1mL syringes located on the front of the pump through check valves mounted at
the top of each syringe on the down stroke of the pump. At the same time, the ALK1 and ACD1 valves turn on allowing aspiration
of straight alkaline and acid solution from the bulk solution bottles into lines 2 and 3 through micro syringes mounted within the
pump. The presence of the 1mL syringes filled with water and small, measured amounts of alkaline and acid solutions in the tubing
lines creates the proper dilutions to be delivered to the cuvette washer nozzles. On the up stroke of the pump, valves ALK1 and
ACD 1 turn off and valves ACD2 and ALK2 turn on, allowing the solutions to be pumped into the nozzles 2 and 3 of the cuvette
washer. At the completion of the cycle, valves ALK2 and ACD2 turn off, allowing any remaining solution to be directed to the low
concentration waste tank through the valves normally open port.
Cuvette Washing - Water & Wash Solution Aspiration and Drying

After the cuvettes have had alkaline, acid or water introduced during the wash process, they must be emptied and dried prior to the
next sample dispense. To achieve this, two vacuum pumps are used to remove the contents of the cuvettes and provide a final
drying before the cuvettes are used again. Vacuum pump #2 aspirates wash solutions and water out of the cuvettes through a
manifold and sends the waste to the low concentration waste tank in the WMU.
Vacuum pump #1 is connected through a valve to the aspiration and dry nozzles and provides final aspiration of any water present
in the cuvette. A final drying occurs through the cuvette drying tip attached to the dry nozzle. This remaining water is also directed
to the low concentration waste tank.
Low Concentration Waste and Drain Lines

Low concentration waste from the sample carousel, reagent supply centers, wash cups, and the low concentration portion of the
water bath overflow area is directed to the low concentration waste tank through waste manifolds. The low concentration waste
portion of the water bath overflow area collects waste from the ICT reference solution cup, the sample and reagent valves, and the
water bath overflow. Water from the water bath is also drained to the low concentrated waste tank through the waste manifolds.
Low concentration waste from the cuvette washer and the wash solution pump is also directed to the low concentration waste tank.
Waste from the tank is directed out of the back of the c8000 module. A float switch is located inside the tank to alert the operator
of an overflow situation. The tank also has a separate overflow port to an external fitting should it overflow. The overflow line also
handles condensation created by the reagent refrigerator and overflow from the open water tank.
High Concentration Waste
Upon completion of a sample run, the patient sample and reagent are first aspirated from the cuvette through nozzle #1 on the
cuvette washer. On the down stroke of the high concentration waste pump, the cuvette contents are pulled into the pump. On the
up stroke of the pump, the waste is directed out of the analyzer to the external high concentration waste container or drain.
ICT waste is drawn from the water bath waste area through a check valve and into the #14 syringe on the ICT aspiration pump
during the down stroke of the pump. On the subsequent up stroke of the pump, the waste is then pushed through the other side of
the check valve to the external high concentration waste container or drain.
ICT Fluidics
The ICT fluidics consists of the following components:
ICT Provides a reference concentration used to calculate results. You place reference solution on a weight platform
reference behind the supply center door. The ICT module measures the solution before and after each sample to create a
solution baseline for checking electrode drift and calculating the sample result.
ICT Uses two 1 mL syringe and check valve assemblies. The syringe on the right side (12) delivers reference solution
reference through the ICT reference solution warming ring and into the ICT reference solution cup. Once measurement is
solution complete, the syringe on the left side (13) aspirates the remaining solution from the cup and moves it into the water
pump bath/waste overflow area. This syringe-drive pump is located behind the supply center door.
ICT Uses two 1 mL syringes. The syringe on the right side (11) connects to the ICT aspiration valve and aspirates
aspiration samples or ICT reference solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once measurement is complete, the
pump syringe aspirates waste from the ICT unit and moves it into the ICT waste cup located in the water bath/waste
overflow area. The syringe and check vale on the left side (14) aspirates waste from the ICT waste cup and pumps it
out the high concentration waste line. This syringe-drive pump is located behind the pump center door.
ICT Used to dilute samples for electrolyte analysis. You must place a supply of ICT sample diluent in the R1 reagent
sample supply center. The R1 reagent pipettor aspirates ICT sample diluent and adds it to the sample in the cuvette in
diluent preparation for ICT measurement.
ICT Warms the ICT reference solution to 37° C before the ICT reference fills the ICT reference solution cup. The
reference warming ring is a small diameter stainless steel tube located in the water bath.
solution
warming
ring
Water Receives the liquid waste from the ICT unit and the reference solution cup. The ICT aspiration pump removes the
bath/waste ICT unit liquid waste and directs the waste to the high concentration waste tubing. Additionally, the ICT reference
overflow solution pump removes the liquid waste from the ICT reference solution cup through the low concentration waste
area tubing. The water bath/waste overflow area is located to the right front corner of the water bath.
ICT Contains preheated reference solution that is aspirated by the probe and measured by the ICT module. The ICT
reference reference solution is monitored by a capacitive sensor located in the reference solution cup. If the cup does not fill or
solution if the reference solution is not aspirated an error is generated. The cup is located beneath the ICT probe when the
cup ICT unit is in the home position.
ICT probe Aspirates diluted sample from the cuvette or aspirates reference solution from the cup into the ICT module for
processing. The probe is connected to the ICT module in the ICT unit.
ICT Measures Na+, K+, Cl- using solid stat ion-selective electrodes contained in a singe chip. This integrated chip,
module which is contained in the ICT unit, reduces the maintenance required. The ICT unit can move into position over the
ICT reference solution cup or the cuvette for aspiration.
The following schematic provides greater detail for the overall fluidics operation of the instrument
Main Fluidics A2_9000.PDF
Robotics
Reagent Supply Centers
The c8000 has two reagent supply centers that are cooled to a range of 2-10° C by forced air from the refrigerator. The refrigerator
circulates cold air into the underside of each unit to indirectly cool the reagents. Reagent supply center #1 consists of two sections,
one outer supply area (segments A through C) and one inner supply area (segment D). This allows for a total of 56-65 positions
depending upon cartridge size. Reagent supply center #2 has a total of 32-56 positions available. Supply center #2 is used to store
reagent for assays using dual reagents. A 2D bar code reader is used by each reagent supply center to scan and identify the
reagent type and position of each reagent cartridge. The drive unit, which supplies rotation of the reagent supply centers, consists
of a +24VDC five-phase stepper motor(s), gear and sensor assembly.
Sample Carousel
The sample carousel consists of a rotating plate with 32 sample positions. Carousel positions 1-30 can be used for patient,
calibrator and control samples. Positions 31-32 are used for onboard solutions that are used in maintenance procedures. The
carousel is cooled by two or three Peltier units or Thermal Electric Devices (TEDs). These devices are located underneath the base
of the sample carousel assembly. TEDs solid state units that have a voltage applied in a specific direction to create cooling or
heating. The carousel uses a bar code reader to identify each sample. The drive mechanism that rotates the carousel is provided
by a +24VDC two-phase stepper motor, gear and sensor assembly located underneath the carousel.
Note
Serial number c800224 and above only have two Peltier units. It also does not have a thermostat installed.
Reaction Carousel, Water Bath and Cuvettes
The reaction carousel contains 165 cuvettes in a water bath maintained at 37° C. The cuvettes are divided into 11 segments of 15
cuvettes each and have a 5mm light path length. Each segment is mounted on the main gear of the carousel (two screws). If
necessary, all segments and individual cuvettes can be removed by the operator for cleaning or replacement. The carousel rotates
counterclockwise approximately a 1/4 turn (41 cuvette positions) every 4.5 seconds during processing. This rotation positions the
cuvettes for sample and reagent dispensing, mixing, photometry and cuvette washing.
The carousel is gear driven by a +24VDC five-phase stepper motor and sensor assembly located at the rear of the instrument. A
separate home sensor indicates when the carousel is in the home position (cuvette number one under the sample pipettor
dispense position). Adjustable and fixed guide rollers provide proper tension and positioning of the carousel. A float switch located
in the front of the water bath tells the c8000 module when the bath is full. A cuvette wiper cleans the side of the cuvettes prior to
them passing through the optical light path. The cuvette wipers are located at the rear of the water bath.
The water bath has seven (7) water input/output ports located on the underside. These ports provide water input, heated water
exchange with the heater assembly and ICT module holder, and for a service drain. Adjacent to the water bath are two separate
waste areas (chambers) with three drain ports. These provide for removal of ICT sample, excess water (from sample and R2
reagent valves), and ICT reference solution used in sampling. Excess water from the R1 reagent valve is routed and dispensed
(through tubing) into the water bath to compensate for loss of water during normal running.
Reaction Carousel and Processing Path

Each cuvette segment has a row of flags indicating a relative position with an associated cuvette within the segment. During the
rotation of the carousel, these flags interrupt an optical "trigger" sensor which sends a signal indicating when a cuvette is in the
proper read position.
Cuvette Segment Assembly
Cuvette Washer
An eight step cuvette washing process is used to clean the cuvettes on the c8000 module. The cuvette washer aspirates sample
and reagent from previous reactions to a high concentrate waste container or drain. It then washes the cuvettes with alkaline and
acid wash solutions and then provides two water rinses. After the water rinses, it dispenses water for a water blank reading and
then drys the cuvette prior to the next sample. The upper section of the washer uses eight nozzles mounted on a platform. The
lower mechanical section raises and lowers the nozzles into the cuvettes as the reaction carousel rotates. The lower mechanical
section consists of a linear slide and 100VAC motor with three optical sensors to tell the c8000 module when the nozzles are in the
correct up or down position.
Cuvette Washer
Cuvette Washer Nozzles
Nozzle 1 aspirates the high concentration waste through a high concentration waste bellows pump located in the front of the
instrument. The nozzle dispenses Reagent Grade Type II water into the cuvette from the cuvette wash bellows pump during the
aspiration. Water is dispensed through small holes in the welded area in the mid-section of the nozzle.
Nozzle 2 provides a 1.3% mixture of alkaline solution and Reagent Grade Type II water that is created and provided by a wash
solution pump using a micro syringe block and 1 mL syringes. After the alkaline solution is dispensed into the cuvette, it is
aspirated through a vacuum pump.
Nozzle 3 provides a 0.9% mixture of acid solution and Reagent Grade Type II water that is also created by the wash solution
pump. The alkaline and acid solutions are located on the weighted platform scales in the front of the analyzer.
Nozzles 4/5 dispense Reagent Grade Type II water into the cuvettes and aspirate the water through a vacuum pump. These two
nozzles are the same as nozzle 1.
Nozzle 6 has two nozzles, one providing Reagent Grade Type II water that fills the cuvette to a certain level and the other to
aspirate part of the water out of the cuvette. The amount of water left in the cuvette is used by the system for a water blank which
is measured as the cuvette passes through the optics unit. The transmission or intensity of the light measured in the water blank is
used as the reference value for the subsequent measurement of the sample in this cuvette. It is also used as a cuvette integrity
check.
Nozzle 7 performs an aspiration of the water blank.
Nozzle 8 has a porous cuvette drying tip installed on the nozzle that removes all remaining water in the cuvette prior to introduction
of the next sample. The nozzle is spring loaded which allows the nozzle to move up when the drying tip is driven into the physical
bottom of the cuvette. This ensures the cuvette drying tip is touching the bottom of the cuvette. Water in the bottom or on the side
walls of the cuvette is aspirated by a vacuum pump through small holes on the side and bottom of the nozzle shaft.
Cuvette Washer Nozzles

Reagent Refrigerator
The reagent refrigerator is a self contained freon based unit that provides cooled air to the reagent supply centers. Fans (inside the
refrigerator) force cooled air (created by the freon and compressor unit) into foam construction ducts. The ducts are connected to
the underside of each supply center. The air is recirculated (closed loop) in the ducts, refrigerator, and supply centers, providing
cooling for the reagents.
Power to run the refrigerator is provided from the main power supply at 100VAC. A rotary dial, set to a predetermined factory
position, regulates and controls the temperature of the air being distributed to the supply centers within a 2-10° C window.
Reagent Refrigerator
Water Bath Heater and Temperature Monitoring
The water bath heater assembly heats and circulates 37° C water in the water bath. Circulation is provided by a mag pump and is
constant as long as the water bath is full. 100VAC is supplied to the temperature bath controller (TBC) circuit board inside the
assembly which drives a heater element located inside a foam jacketed water bottle and controls water bath temperature. The
element is fused and also has a control thermistor installed for feedback. The fuse blows at 70° C. Two LEDs on the board indicate
the status of the heater. CPU CMD (LED 2) displays the on/off signal status from the card cage. HEATER (LED 1) indicates when
the heater is on/off. When the temperature controls are stabilized, HEATER turns dim. The heater assembly also has a fan/radiator
section. The fan for the radiator turns on when the water bath temperature reaches 37.2° C and the ambient temperature reaches
28° C. An error is generated if the water temperature is outside of the 36.7° C to 37.3° C range. Water bath temperature is
adjusted by rotating VR1 on the temperature bath controller circuit board. By turning clockwise, the actual temperature is increased
-- by turning counter clockwise, the temperature is lowered. A jumper is included on the TBC circuit board for 30° C or 37° C water
bath operation (c8000 uses 37° C only).
A temperature detector, mounted on the base of the heater assembly, provides ambient temperature (inside the c8000) feedback to
the SCC. The system generates an error if the ambient temperature is below 15° C or above 30° C. Temperatures in the water
bath, reagent supply centers and sample carousel are monitored (and displayed on the system screen) with a temperature detector
located in each device. These detectors provide feedback to the AC/DC Controller board located in the master card cage that
converts the signal to a readable format for display. The displayed temperature is adjustable to match the actual temperature of the
particular subassembly. Temperature measurements are taken in the water bath five times every two seconds. Ambient
temperature is read five times every one minute. R1 & R2 reagent supply centers and the sample carousel reads are taken five
times every five minutes. An error is generated if a temperature for a particular device is out of range. The potentiometers on the
AC/DC Controller circuit board are located toward the edge of the board in the following order from the top:
VR1 - R1 Reagent Supply Center

VR2 - R2 Reagent Supply Center
VR3 - Sample Carousel
VR4 - Ambient Temperature
VR5 - Water Bath
The potentiometers change only the displayed temperature on the CRT. They do not impact the actual measured temperature for
each device.
Mixer Assembly
The mixer assembly consists of two main sections. A lower mechanical section, consisting of a 100VAC motor and linear slide,
provides vertical drive to raise and lower the upper assembly. Three optical sensors in the lower section tell the c8000 module
when the assembly is in the correct up or down position. The upper section consists of the mixers and two +24VDC stepper
motors used to rotate the mixers horizontally over the reaction carousel. Optical sensors in the upper section provide feedback
when the mixers are in the home position.
The mixers are designed using piezoelectric effect. Piezoelectric effect is the characteristic of certain crystals to produce electricity
when under strain or to produce vibration when a voltage at a specific frequency is applied. The mixers consist of a crystal
attached to a thin mixer blade contained in a plastic enclosure. A voltage is applied to the mixers at two different frequencies
depending on the desired mixer movement over the reaction carousel or wash cup. When in the cuvette or washing, a faster
movement/shorter travel is required and the mixers are driven at 120Hz. When washing is complete, the mixers are driven at a
lower frequency of 70Hz producing a slower movement/wider travel to remove water from the mixer blades.
Mixer Assembly
ICT Assembly
The ICT assembly consists of a lower mechanical drive section and an upper section containing the ICT module. The lower
mechanical section has two +24VDC stepper motors used to move the module in the horizontal and vertical directions along with
optical sensors to tell the c8000 module when the unit is in the up/down or rotational home position. The upper section of the
assembly contains the ICT module, holder and cover. The module holder has two ports that allow 37° C water to recirculate in a
closed loop, indirectly stabilizing the temperature of the ICT module.
ICT Assembly
Pipettors
The sample and reagent pipettors are used to aspirate and dispense sample, reagent and solutions. In the upper section of each
pipettor, a liquid level sense (LLS) pre-amplifier circuit board is used to amplify and transmit the LLS signal from the probe to the
LLS board in the c8000 module. Tubing from the probe and wires from the pre-amp board run down the center shaft of the
pipettor, then into a coiled spring enclosure (to avoid damage during movement).
The pipettors are belt driven in the horizontal and vertical direction by +24VDC stepper motors. The sample pipettor uses five
phase motors and the reagent pipettors use two phase stepper motors. The motor and belt assembly uses optical home and pitch
sensors to tell the c8000 module when the pipettor is in the home position. Pipettor positions for the sample carousel, reaction
carousel, wash cups and reagent supply centers are software trained from the home position and rotation is limited by mechanical
stops. All pipettors incorporate a crash or guard sensor to tell the c8000 module when an obstacle has been detected during
downward travel.
Pipettors
Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring (Clot Detection)
The liquid level sense circuitry is based on capacitance, coupled with a 32kHz frequency signal applied to the probes. A voltage or
LLS signal is created when the sample or a reagent probe enters liquid. In all the pipettors, a small pre-amplifier board passes the
amplified LLS signal to the LLS circuit board mounted in the front of the instrument. The signal, coupled back to the LLS circuit
board out of phase, is taken through a circuit which converts the frequency to a DC signal that is compared to a preset threshold
for the particular pipettor. After fluid detection, the sample pipettor continues down an additional 3mm and the reagent pipetters an
additional 5mm to ensure proper aspiration. During this travel and when in fluid, the LLS signal is monitored for any change. If the
signal changes due to the detection of air or the fluid volume is too low, an error is generated to alert the operator.
Patient samples of whole blood, serum, plasma, and cerebral spinal fluid often contain fibrin which can form clots. Clots can create
an obstruction in the fluidic lines and may cause problems during the aspiration of the sample during automated clinical testing. To
improve the accuracy of the system, a clot detection circuitry has been incorporated.
The clot detection circuitry monitors the fluid pressure in the sample aspiration tubing. A piezoelectric pressure sensor and pre-
amplifier circuit is in series with the sample fluid path between the sample syringe and sample probe. This sensor detects the
pressure gradient formed when a clot occurs in the aspiration of the sample. The sample does not come in contact with the
pressure sensor, however a pressure gradient is created in the fluid path during the aspiration. By constantly monitoring the output
of the sensor during the aspiration process, the circuitry can determine when a clot or bubble occurs in a sample tube or cup and
alert the operator. The signal from the pressure sensor is transmitted to the Pressure Monitor circuit board in the master card cage
for processing and error generation when a clot or bubble occurs. Pressure monitoring is also used during internal sample probe
washing to check for high or low wash pressure. The following diagram provides an overview of the fluidics and electronics of the
pressure monitor circuitry:
Pressure Monitoring (Clot Detection)

Bar Code Readers
Both reagent supply centers use a 2D bar code reader. This allows for reading of the PDF417 (2D or two dimensional) bar code
labels used for identification of the reagent cartridges. The readers provide a raster scanning pattern specifically designed to scan
two dimensional bar codes as well as patterns for scanning standard 1D bar codes. The readers are based on a visible laser diode
with a photo-detector to capture the reflected light from the bar code label. The photo detector and associated electronics produce
a string of voltage outputs that are processed by the reader so they can be converted to useful information by the c8000. The 2D
bar code readers in the reagent supply centers are classified as class 2 laser devices.
Starting with serial number c801579 the reagent bar code readers are JADAK bar code readers. These readers are small 2-
dimensional decoded output engines with image capture capabilities. The reader is comprised of an image engine and a decoder
board. The engine functions much like a digital camera. The interface appears as a laser scanner to the decoder. The interface
translates the decoded data into laser style data and controls the signal sequence. When the reader scans a bar code, the data is
translated and transmitted in a laser compatible serial data stream to the decoder. The bar code reader has light emmitting diodes
(LEDs) that make the aimed line and the illumination. These LEDs are bright but the device is certified to Class 1. A beeper
provides a PWM output for generating audible feedback to the user. This signal is used to indicate the status of the device using a
variety of patterns and frequencies.
The sample carousel bar code reader uses a visible red laser to scan the patient sample tubes placed on the inner and outer rings
of the sample carousel. This decoded information is transferred to the SCC. The sample carousel bar code reader is classified as a
class 2 laser device. The sample bar code reader can read the following symbologies with and without checksums up to a
maximum character length of 20 characters:
Codabar
Code 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 128 subset A, B and C
All sample bar code labels must comply with ASTM E1466-92 Standards.
Automated Pipettor Calibration

The c8000 features automated probe calibration to achieve alignment of the sample and reagent probes. The operator can check
and adjust the alignment of the sample and reagent probes by initiating a command from the SCC. Upon entry of the appropriate
commands, the system automatically aligns the sample and reagent probes to their various targets to ensure accurate pipetting of
sample and reagents.
Syringe Drives
The syringe drives provide aspiration and dispense of sample and reagent. Each has a +24VDC two phase stepper motor. The
motor rotates a ball screw mechanism to raise and lower the plunger located inside the attached syringe. Optical pitch and home
sensors are used to tell the c8000 module when the drive is in the home position. The sensors are also used to detect a single
rotation of the motor. The amount of up and down travel the plunger moves determines the volume of sample or reagent dispensed
or aspirated.
Syringe Drives
Vacuum and Bellows Pumps
Two 100VAC vacuum pumps are used in the aspiration of fluids by the cuvette washer. Both use a diaphragm mounted on a shaft
to move fluid in and out of the pump, but each has a slightly different valve configuration to direct the fluid flow. As the pump motor
rotates, the diaphragm moves up and down (creating a vacuum in the fluidic lines) to aspirate fluid from the cuvettes. Pump
number one has a sheet valve and is connected to nozzles 7 and 8 of the washer (provides a final aspiration and drying of the
cuvette prior to the next sample). Pump number two has dual o-rings and valves and is connected with a manifold to washer
nozzles 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 (provides aspiration of water and acid and alkaline solutions).
Vacuum Pump - Old Style

Vacuum Pump - New Style
Bellows Pumps
There are three bellows style pumps used in the c8000 module. The three pumps are internal probe wash, cuvette wash pump,
and high concentration waste pump. These three pumps function in a similar manner but are not interchangeable. A 100VAC
motor drives each pump and moves a bellows assembly up and down to provide aspiration and dispense of fluid. On the down
stroke of the pump, fluid is drawn in on the side port and on the up stroke of the pump, fluid is directed out of the top port. This is
accomplished by the use of directional poppet valves that permit fluid flow in only one direction. Optical sensors mounted inside the
pump tell the c8000 module when the pump is in the up or down position.
Bellows Pump
Wash Solution, ICT Aspiration and ICT Reference Solution Pumps
The wash solution pump uses an AC motor, gear head assembly, cam and lifter to move the two 1mL syringes and the two micro
syringes. The syringes create the 1.3% alkaline and 0.9% acid solutions used by the cuvette washer. The plunger of each syringe
is attached to the lifter assembly that is driven by the cam located inside the lifter. As the cam rotates, the lifter and syringes are
moved up and down to provide the proper dilutions. The micro syringes are contained in a syringe block and use the same tip
seals and o-rings as the sample syringe. Optical sensors mounted inside the pump tell the c8000 module when the pump is in the
up or down position.
Wash Solution Pump
The ICT aspiration and ICT reference solution pumps are similar in design but are not interchangeable. Both pumps use an AC
motor, gear head assembly, cam and lifter to move the two attached 1mL syringes. These syringes are used in the transport of
sample, ICT reference solution and waste. The plunger of each syringe is attached to the lifter assembly that is driven by the cam
located inside a cut out slot in the middle of the lifter. As the cam rotates, the lifter and syringes are moved up and down. The
aspiration pump has an electronic valve attached to the frame of the pump. It also has two optical sensors to tell the c8000 module
when the pump is in the up or down position. The ICT reference solution pump does not have an electronic valve and has only one
sensor to detect full rotation of the motor.
Starting with c802401 the electronic valve on the ICT aspiration pump is being changed to an electronic pinch valve.
ICT Aspiration Pump
Cover/Lid Sensors
The covers to the reagent supply centers and sample carousel contain magnetic switches to detect the presence or absence of a
cover. If a cover to a reagent supply center or sample carousel is opened, a scan automatically occurs. For the reagent supply
centers the reagent scan occurs prior to the next sample run and the reagent inventory screen is updated. For the sample carousel
the sample ID is scanned and the sample is scheduled.
Troubleshooting
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
2.1 Card Cage
Links
Main Card Cage

CPU
AC/DC Controller
SMC
DAQ
PM
MECH LED
Main Card Cage
Main Card Cage (access)
Card Cage (upper back plane board)

Card Cage (lower back plane board)
Main Card Cage Block Diagram

Distribution Board (CN1-CN4) to Backplane Signals
Connection Signal/Function
Pipettor position sensors
Carousel position sensors
Isothermal water drain valve, fan, pump ON, and heater ON signals
Buzzer ON signal
Solenoid valve ON signals
Solenoid valve ON signals

Reagent syringes 1 & 2 valves
Sample syringe valve
Aspiration/Dry tip valve
Acid & Alkaline detergent pump valves (4)
Cuvette wash valve
DI water flow switching valves 1-5
CN1 Distribution Bd. to CN2 Backplane ICT aspiration pump valve
DI water supply Pumps 1 & 2 ON signals
Power saving relays 1 & 2 ON signals
Rotation and Brake signals

ICT suction and MCC pumps
HC waste pump
Cuvette wash pump
Wash pump
Probe wash pump
Mixer UP/DOWN motor
Cuvette washer motor
Mixer control signals
Mixer UP/DOWN/DOWNOK sensors
Cuv. Washer UP/DOWN/DOWNOK sensors
All Wash Pump UP/DOWN sensors, Cuvette, Probe, HC Wash, ICT suction & MCC
Status Display LEDs 1-16 (Boot Sequence)
Sample Carousel LEDs 1 & 2
IS-LUI LEDs 1 & 2 and push-button switch
Carousel and Bath TEMP sensors

CN2 Distribution Bd. to CN1 Backplane
Bath water level sensor
Cover sensors (3)
Water tank float switches (4)
LC waste (drain) tank float switch
Degasser vacuum tank abnormal
IREF empty sensor
Acid and alkaline empty sensors
Shutter ON signal
Trigger signal output
Sample BCR
Reagent BCRs (2)

CN3 Distribution Bd. to CN4 Backplane
LUI - TXD, RXD, RTS, CTS
CLI - TXD, RXD, RTS, CTS, CD, DTR, CI, DSR
VCC and GND for LED
Sample Pipettor LLS signals
VCC for LL sensor

LL detection signal
VCC for LL status
LL status signal
VCC for AUTOZERO and AUTOZERO signal
CN4 Distribution Bd. to CN5 Backplane Reagent Pipettor LLS signals
VCC for LL sensor

LL detection signal
VCC for LL status signal
LL status
VCC for AUTOZERO and AUTOZERO signal
CPU
CPU Board (old style)
CPU Board (new style)

CPU Board Specifications
Note
When installing a new style CPU Board with flash memory [1], verify that the AC/DC Controller Board is jumpered correctly.
S2 switch one (1), located on the AC/DC Controller Board, is in the ON position for a CPU with Flash Memory and OFF for
a CPU with Disk On Chip.
CPU [2] MMX Pentium 200/233 MHz or Geode GX1 300 MHz

Processor CHIPSET SIS5582 Pentium PCI/ICA Chipset
Secondary cache Pipeline burst SRAM 256 KB (512 MB maximum)
System memory 3.3 V SDRAM DIMM 32 MB (128 MB maximum)

Memory
BIOS ROM AWARD Plug and Play FLASH BIOS with battery support [3]
IDE interface Equipped with PCI ICE (1 channel), PIO modes 0 to 4 supported. Capable of
supporting Ultra DMA mode.
Floppy interface Equipped with a 3.5" FDD port (1 channel)
Serial Port (COM 1 & Equipped with 16550 compatible port (2 channels, RS-232C compliant.
COM 2)
Parallel Port (LPT) Equipped with a standard parallel port (1 channel) two way data transfer supported.
Keyboard interface Equipped with a PS/2 keyboard

Interface
Ethernet interface Equipped with 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX
Compact PCI bus Address/data bus: 32bit

interface Bus clock: 33 MHz
V (I/O): +5 VDC
Video interface Video RAM 2 MB

(optional) Display mode640 x 480, 16 colors/ 256 colors
1024 x 768, 256 colors/ 64 K colors
Switch Generates NMI or reset signals
LED PWR (green) ON = +5 VDC

Front Panel HDD (green) ON = HDD is accessed
LINK (green) ON = Ethernet link is enabled
ACT (yellow) ON = Ethernet transmit or receive
Line voltage +5 VDC +/- 5%
Current consumption 9 amps maximum (5 VDC)
Ambient temperature During operation = 0°C to 50° (forced air cooling with an air velocity of 3 m/s must be
Environment provided)
During non-operation = -20°C to 70°C
Ambient humidity During operation = 20% to 80% (no condensing)

During non-operation = 10% to 90% (no condensing)
CPU Front Connectors
CPU Block Diagram

CPU Front Connectors
Pin
Connector Signal Name Reference
#
1 DATA
2 RESERVED
3 GND
4 +5VDC
5 CLOCK
KB (Keyboard connector (PS/2 style keyboard) 6 RESERVED
1 Data Carrier
Detect
2 Receive Data
3 Transmit Data
4 Data Terminal
Ready
COM1 & COM2 (RS-232C compliant serial ports) 5 GND
6 Data Set Ready
7 Request to Send
8 Clear to Send
9 Ring Indicate
1 STROBE
2 DATA BIT 0
3 DATA BIT 1
4 DATA BIT 2
5 DATA BIT 3
6 DATA BIT 4
7 DATA BIT 5
8 DATA BIT 6
9 DATA BIT 7
10 ACK
11 BUSY
12 PE
13 SLCT
LPT (Standard parallel port connector)
14 AUTO FD TX
15 ERROR
16 INIT
17 SLCT IN
18 GND
19 GND
20 GND
21 GND
22 GND
23 GND
24 GND
25 GND
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NOT
CONNECTED
5 AGND
6 AGND
7 AGND
8 AGND
Video (optional - Video connector supporting VGA or SVGA when
video card present) 9 NOT
CONNECTED
10 AGND
11 NOT
CONNECTED
12 DDC_SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 DDC_SCL
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 RESERVED
5 RESERVED
ETHERNET (Ethernet connector supporting category 5 100 BASE- 6 RD-
TX/10BASE-T)
7 RESERVED
8 RESERVED
NMI RESET (This switch generates a NMI to restart the system)
PWR (This LED is on when the power is ON)
LINK (This LED is on when the system is linked to a Ethernet)
HDD (This LED is on when the optional hard drive is accessed)
ACT (This LED is on during Ethernet transmissions or receptions)
AC/DC Controller
AC/DC Controller Board (side view)
S1 & S2 Switch Settings
Switch Function Setting
S1-1 UNUSED OFF
S1-2 UNUSED OFF
S1-3 UNUSED OFF
S1-4 UNUSED OFF
S1-5 UNUSED OFF
S1-6 UNUSED OFF
S1-7 UNUSED OFF
S1-8 UNUSED OFF

S2-1 New Style CPU with Flash Memory ON
Old Style CPU with Disk On Chip OFF
S2-2 UNUSED OFF
S2-3 UNUSED OFF
S2-4 UNUSED OFF
S2-5 UNUSED OFF
S2-6 UNUSED OFF
S2-7 UNUSED OFF
S2-8 UNUSED OFF
AC/DC Controller Board (end view)
AC/DC Block Diagram

1 Control EPLD The control EPLD (Electrically Programmable Logic Device) includes the drive circuits for the AC motors and
DC valves; contains a majority logic circuit for the sensor input, a sensor and status input register; and
interfaces these circuits to the bus.
2 Temperature Temperature information form the temperature sensors is input to this circuit (8-bit A/D converter. This circuit
measurement supports five temperature sensors: for the water bath, for the reagent supply center 1, for the reagent supply
circuit center 2, for the sample carousel, and the internal temperature sensor. (See Temperature Sensor Adjustment.)
3 Power This circuit monitors six voltage levels to allow the host CPU to determine whether each power supply has
Supply reached the minimum specified voltage. (See Detection Voltages.)
Voltage
Monitoring
Circuit
4 Other Output In addition to the circuits mentioned above, the AC/DC Controller board includes the mixer driver interface
Circuits circuit, LED drive circuit, and buzzer.
5 General This is a general purpose DIPSW input port that can be used during development. (all switches should be in
Purpose the down position)
DIPSW
6 General This is a general purpose LED display port that can be used during development.
Purpose LED
7 Reset Circuit The reset circuit outputs the reset signal to each circuit when the power is turned ON or the reset SW is
activated.
8 PCI Interface This circuit controls the interface bus with the host CPU. This circuit uses an EPLD.
Circuit
9 Power ON This green LED lights when the+5VDC power is supplied.

LED
Temperature Sensor Adjustment

VR No. Temperature Sensor Code
VR1 Reagent Supply Center No. 1 R1CTEMP
VR2 Reagent Supply Center No. 2 R2CTEMP
VR3 Sample Carousel ISTEMP
VR4 Internal Temperature IVRSTR
VR5 Water Bath BATHTEMP
Detection Voltages
Monitoring voltage Detection voltage
+5 VDC +4.75 to +4.85 (V)
+15 VDC +13.58 to +14.42 (V)
-15 VDC -13.58 to -14.42 (V)
+12 VDC +10.77 to +11.43 (V)
+11.5 VDC +10.49 to +11.12 (V)
+24 VDC +21.84 to +23.18 (V)
AC/DC CN1 Connector (True Value = Low)
Pin Pin
Signal Name Code Signal Name Code
No. No.
1 Cuvette washer UP sensor WSUP 26 Reagent supply center 1 cover sensor R1CCVROK
2 Cuvette washer DOWN sensor WSDOWN 27 Reagent supply center 2 cover sensor R2CCVROK
3 Cuvette washer DOWN OK sensor WSDOWNOK 28
4 Mixer elevator UP sensor STEUP 29 Water tank upper limit float switch FFS2
5 Mixer elevator DOWN sensor STEDOWN 30 Water tank level high float switch FFS3
6 Mixer elevator DOWN OK sensor STEDOK 31 Water tank level low float switch FFS$
7 Wash solution pump UP sensor DPUP 32
8 Wash solution pump DOWN DPDOWN 33 Sample carousel cover switch ISCVROK
sensor
9 Cuvette wash pump UP sensor CWPUP 34 Low Concentration waste tank level high float DTF
switch
10 Cuvette wash pump DOWN sensor CWPDOWN 35 Degasser vacuum tank abnormal sensor DALARM
11 Inner probe wash pump UP sensor PWPUP 36
12 Inner probe wash pump DOWN PWPDOWN 37 ICT reference solution empty sensor ESMCC
sensor
13 H.C. waste pump UP sensor TWPUP 38 Alkaline bulk solution empty sensor ESB14
14 H.C. waste pump DOWN sensor TWPDOWN 39 Acid bulk solution empty sensor ESB3
15 ICT aspiration pump UP sensor ISPUP 40
16 ICT aspiration pump DOWN ISPDOWN 41

sensor
17 ICT reference solution pump UP IMPUP 42 Sample carousel pause switch AUXSW1
sensor
18 43 Sample carousel scan switch AUXSW2
19 44
20 45
21 46
22 47 Power supply +5VDC
25 Water bath level sensor BATHLVL 50 Power supply +5VDC
SMC
SMC Board
Side View End View
S1 Switch Settings
Setting
Switch Function
(*Default)
Exhibition Mode (see P-155 Demonstration Mode for more information) ON

S1-1 Normal Run Mode OFF*
S1-2 UNUSED OFF*
S1-3 Factory Use Only OFF*
Do not initialize 2D BCR at Power On ON

S1-4 Initialize 2D BCR at Power On OFF*
One ACD/ALK Valve ON
S1-5 Two ACD/ALK Valves OFF*
S1-6 Instrument Type (Factory use only) OFF*
S1-7 Software Install Mode (Factory use only) OFF*
S1-8 Software Boot Up Mode (Factory use only) OFF*
SMC Monitoring LEDs
LED # Motor Name/Code LED # Motor Name/Code
LED 1 Reaction Carousel Motor (RUM) LED Reagent Syringe1 Drive Motor (R1PM)
11
LED 2 ICT Rotation Motor (IAAM) LED12 Reagent Syringe 2 Drive Motor (R2PM)
LED 3 ICT Elevator Motor (IAEM) LED Reagent 1 Pipettor Rotation Motor
13 (R1AAM)
LED 4 Mixer 1 Rotation Motor (STAM1) LED Reagent 2 Pipettor Rotation Motor
14 (R2AAM)
LED 5 Mixer 2 Rotation Motor (STAM2) LED Sample Carousel Rotation Motor (ISIM)
15
LED 6 Reagent Supply Center 1 Inner Carousel Rotation Motor LED Not used on c 8000
((R1CIM) 16
LED 7 Reagent Supply Center 1 Outer Carousel Rotation Motor LED Sample Pipettor Elevator Motor (SAEM)
(R1COM) 17
LED 8 Reagent Supply Center 2 Carousel Rotation Motor (S2CM) LED Reagent 1 Pipettor Elevator Motor
18 (R1AEM)
LED 9 Sample Pipettor Rotation Motor (SAAM) LED Reagent 2 Pipettor Elevator Motor
19 (R2AEM)
LED Sample Syringe Drive Motor (SPM) LED Not used on c 8000
10 20
SMC Block Diagram

1 PMC (Pulse There are a total of 20 LSI (two types) pulse motor controllers mounted on the SMC Board.
Motor
Controller)
2 Control EPLD The control ELPD (Electrically Programmable Logic Device) includes a majority logic circuit for sensor input,
a sensor, a status read register, and the counter circuit for the pitch sensor. This circuit uses a PLD.
3 PMC These LED's monitor the operating status of the PMC's. The color is red.
monitoring LED
4 Debugging 8-bit LED and 8-bit DIPSW used during development. The color is red.
LED's and
Switches
5 Power ON LED LED is ON when +5 volts DC is supplied. The color is green.
6 PCI Interface This interface controls the interface bus with the host CPU. This circuit uses a PLD.
List of SMC Stepper Motor Controls (SMC)
Stepper Motor Sensor
No. Name Code Phase Signal Name Signal Name Description
RUM 5f RUCW RUHOME Detects the home position

1 Reaction Carousel Motor RUCCW RUM1R Detects a single motor rotation
IAAM 2f IAAINA
IAATDA
2 ICT Rotation Motor IAAINB IAAHOME Detects the home position
IAAHOLD
IAEM 2f IAEINA
IAETDA
IAEINB IAEHOME Detects the home position

3 ICT Elevator Motor
IAEM1R Detects a single motor rotation
IAETDB
IAEHOLD
STAM1 2f STA1NA
STA1TDA
STA1NB
4 Mixer 1 Rotation Motor STA1HOME Detects the home position
STA1TDB
STA1HOLD
STAM2 2f STA2INA
STA2TDA
STA2INB
5 Mixer 2 Rotation Motor STA2HOME Detects the home position
STA2TDB
STA2HOLD
R1CIM 5f R1CICW R1CIHOME Detects the home position

6 R-1 Supply C. Inter Motor R1CICCW R1CIPITCH Detects a single motor rotation
R1COM 5f R1COCW R1COHOME Detects the home position

7 R-1 Supply C. Outer Motor R1COCCW R1COPITCH Detects a single motor rotation
R2CM 5f R2CCW R2CHOME Detects the home position

8 R-2 Supply C. Motor R2CCW R2CPITCH Detects a single motor rotation
SAAM 5f SAACW SAAHOME Detects the home position

9 Sample Pipettor Rotation Motor SAACCW SAAM1R Detects a single motor rotation
SAEM 5f SAECW SAEHOME Detects the home position
SAECCW SAEM1R Detects a single motor rotation
10 Sample Pipettor Elevator Motor SACLASH Detects an obstacle
SALVL Detects the liquid surface
SPM 2f SPINA SPHOME Detects the home position
SPTDA SPM1R Detects a single motor rotation
SPINB SPDLMT Detects the DOWN limit

11 Sample Syringe Drive Motor
SPTDB
SPHOLD
R1PM 2f R1PINA R1PHOME Detects the home position
R1PTDA R1PM1R Detects a single motor rotation
R1PINB R1PDLMT Detects the DOWN limit

12 Reagent 1 Syringe Drive Motor
R1PTDB
R1PHOLD
R2PM 2f R2PINA R2PHOME Detects the home position
R2PTDA R2PM1R Detects a single motor rotation
R2PINB R2PDLMT Detects the DOWN limit

13 Reagent 2 Syringe Drive Motor
R2TDB
R2PHOLD
R1AAM 2f R1AAINA R1AAHOME Detects the home position
R1AATDA R1AAM1R Detects a single motor rotation
R1AAINB
14 Reagent 1 Pipettor rotation motor
R1AATDB
R1AAHOLD
R1AEM 2f R1AEINA R1AEHOME Detects the home position
R1AETDA R1AEM1R Detects a single motor rotation
R1AEINB R1ACLASH Detects an obstacle

15 Reagent 1 Pipettor Elevator Motor
R1AETDB R1ALVL Detects the liquid surface
R1AEHOLD
R2AAM 2f R2AAINA R2AAHOME Detects the home position
R2AATDA R2AAM1R Detects a single motor rotation
R2AAINB
16 Reagent 2 Pipettor rotation motor
R2AATDB
R2AAHOLD
R2AEM 2f R2AEINA R2AEHOME Detects the home position
R2AETDA R2AEM1R Detects a single motor rotation
R2AEINB R2ACLASH Detects an obstacle

17 Reagent 2 Pipettor Elevator Motor
R2AETDB R2LVL Detects the liquid surface
R2AEHOLD
ISIM 2f ISIINA ISIHOME Detects the home position
ISITDA ISIPITCH Detects a single motor rotation
ISIINB
18 Sample Carousel Rotation Motor
ISITDB
ISIHOLD
19 Not used c 8000
20 Not used c 8000
SMC Front Panel Connector CN1 (True value = Low)
Pin No. Signal Name Code
1 Home position sensor for the reaction carousel motor RUHOME
2 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reaction carousel motor RUM1R
3 Home position sensor the ICT rotation motor IAAHOME
4 Home position sensor for the ICT elevator motor IAEHOME
5 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the ICT elevator motor IAEM1R
6 Home position sensor for Mixer 1 rotation motor STA1HOME
7 Home position sensor for Mixer 2 rotation motor STA2HOME
8 Home position sensor for reagent supply center 1 inner carousel motor R1CIHOME
9 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for reagent supply center 1 inner carousel motor R1CIPITCH
10 Home position sensor for the reagent supply center 1 outer carousel motor R1COHOME
11 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for reagent supply center 1 outer carousel motor R1COPITCH
12 Home position sensor for reagent supply center 2 carousel motor R2HOME
13 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for reagent supply center 2 carousel R2PITCH
14 Home position sensor for the sample pipettor rotation motor SAAHOME
15 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the sample pipettor rotation motor SAAM1R
16 Home position sensor for the sample pipettor elevator motor SAEHOME
17 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the sample pipettor elevator motor SAEM1R
18 Crash sensor for the sample pipettor SACLASH
19 Home position sensor for the sample syringe drive motor SPHOME
20 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the sample syringe drive motor SPM1R
21 DOWN limit sensor for the sample syringe drive motor SPDLMT
22 Home position sensor for the reagent 1 syringe drive motor R1PHOME
23 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reagent 1 syringe drive motor R1PM1R
24 DOWN limit sensor for the reagent 1 syringe drive motor R1PDLMT
25 Home position sensor for the reagent 2 syringe drive motor R2PHOME
26 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reagent 2 syringe drive motor R2PM1R
27 DOWN limit sensor for the reagent 2 syringe drive motor R2PDLMT
28 Home position sensor for the reagent 1 pipettor rotation motor R1AAHOME
29 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reagent 1 pipettor rotation motor R1AAM1R
30 Home position sensor for the reagent pipettor elevator motor R1AEHOME
31 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reagent 1 pipettor elevator motor R1AEM1R
32 Crash sensor for the reagent 1 pipettor R1ACLASH
33 Home position sensor for the reagent 2 pipettor rotation motor R2AAHOME
34 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reagent 2 pipettor rotation motor R2AAM1R
35 Home position sensor for the reagent 2 pipettor elevator motor R2AEHOME
36 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the reagent 2 pipettor elevator motor R2AEM1R
37 Crash sensor for the reagent 2 pipettor R2ACLASH
38 Home position sensor for the sample carousel rotation motor ISIHOME
39 Single motor rotation sensor (pitch) for the sample carousel rotation motor ISIPITCH
40 Not used c 8000 ISOHOME
41 Not used c 8000 ISOPITCH
42 Not used c 8000 AHOME
43 Not used c 8000 AM1R
44 LLS for the sample pipettor SALVL
45 LLS for the reagent 1 pipettor R1ALVL
46 LLS for the reagent 2 pipettor R2ALVL
47 Sample probe liquid surface non-contact status
48 blank
49 Power supply +5 VDC
DAQ
DAQ Board
DAQ Board (jumpers)

DAQ Board Front Panel
Connector for the recorder signals for the electrodes (Na, K, and Cl).
Signal Assignment on CN1
CN1
S3, S4, & Rotary switches used for channel selection, must be enabled by W2, W3 & W4. The
S5 switches should be set to 0.
DS2 This is the power LED and is on when +5 VDC is supplied to this board.
PJ2 This connector is used for programming IC79 (EPLD). For factor use only.
CN2 Debugging serial interface connector. The SIO built in the 386EX is connected to this
connector.
DS1 Debugging LED. The PIOs (0 to 3 of port 1) built in the 386EX are connected to these
LEDs.
S2 Debugging/boot selection switch. Refer to table below for S2 switch default settings.
S6 The status of this switch can be read by the register on the PCI bus. The rotary switch
should be set to 1.
S1 Reset switch for the 386EX on this board.
DAQ Bd S2 Switch Settings for P/N 7-93181-04 and lower versions
Switch Setting
S2-1 OFF
S2-2 OFF
S2-3 OFF
S2-4 OFF
S2-5 ON
S2-6 ON

DAQ Bd S2 Switch Settings for P/N 7-93181-05 and higher versions
Switch Setting
S2-1 OFF
S2-2 OFF
S2-3 OFF
S2-4 OFF
S2-5 OFF
S2-6 OFF
DAQ Block Diagram

1 386EX The 386EX CPU transfers the A/D converted data from the analog circuit section to the host
CPU via the DP RAM.
2 Voltage Monitoring Circuit This circuit monitors the +5 volts DC and outputs reset signals to each circuit.
3 Control Circuit (EPLD) This circuit includes an EPLD (Electrically Programmable Logic Device) and controls the
386EX CPU.
4 Flash Memory 1 This memory is for the application programs and data for the 386EX CPU. Memory size is
256 KB.
5 Flash Memory 2 This memory is for the boot programs and test programs for the 386EX CPU. Memory size
is 256 KB.
6 6.S-RAM This RAM is used by the 386EX CPU. Memory size is 256 KB.
7 16-bit A/D Conversion Analog The 16 channel analog input is converted from analog to digital in this section.
Section
8 PCI Target Interface Circuit. Slave interface circuit for the PCI bus.
9 Arbitration Control (EPLD) This circuit includes an EPLD and arbitrates access conflicts between the 386EX CPU and
the host CPU.
10 S-RAM The S_RAM is used for data exchange between the 386EX CPU and the host CPU. The
memory size is 256 KB.
11 Backup Circuit This is the backup circuit for the C_RAM (10). The backup period is two weeks.
12 SIO This is the serial port accessed by the host CPU via the PCI bus. This port has six channels.
13 LED and DIP Switch The DIP switch and LED display are for use in development.
14 Power ON LED This green LED lights when the +5 Volts DC power is supplied.
ICT Signals
Optics
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
PM
PM Board
PM Board (side view)
PM Board (end view)

PM Block Diagram
MECH LED
MECH LED Board Reference
LED LED
Board Artwork Function Board Artwork Function
No. No.
1-1 WASH STATION UP Cuvette Wash Station UP 6-1 REACTION UNIT HOME Reaction Carousel HOME
sensor sensor
1-2 WASH STATION DOWN Cuvette Wash Station 6-2 REACTION UNIT MOTOR Reaction Carousel PITCH
DOWN sensor 1 ROUND sensor
1-3 WASH STATION DOWN- Cuvette Wash Station 6-3 ISE ARM HOME ICT rotational HOME
OK DOWN-OK sensor
1-4 STIRRER UP/DOWN UP Mixer Elevator UP sensor 6-4 ISE ARM UP/DOWN ICT Elevator HOME sensor
HOME
1-5 STIRRER UP/DOWN Mixer Elevator DOWN 6-5 ISE ARM UP/DOWN ICT Elevator PITCH sensor
DOWN sensor MOTOR 1 ROUND
1-6 STIRRER UP/DOWN Mixer Elevator DOWN-OK 6-6 STIRROR ARM 1 HOME Mixer 1 rotational HOME
DOWN-OK sensor sensor
1-7 DATERGENT PUMP UP Wash Solution Pump UP 6-7 STIRROR ARM 2 HOME Mixer 2 rotational HOME
sensor sensor
1-8 DATERGENT PUMP Wash Solution Pump 6-8 R1 CAROUSEL (INNER) Reagent Supply Center 1
DOWN DOWN sensor HOME Inner Carousel HOME
1-9 CELL WASH PUMP UP Cuvette Wash Pump UP 6-9 R1 CAROUSEL (INNER) 1 Reagent Supply Center 1
sensor PITCH Inner Carousel PITCH
1- CELL WASH PUMP DOWN Cuvette Wash Pump 6- R1 CAROUSEL (OUTER) Reagent Supply Center 1
10 DOWN sensor 10 HOME Outer Carousel HOME
2-1 PROBE WASH PUMP UP Inner Probe Wash Pump 7-1 R1 CAROUSEL (OUTER) Reagent Supply Center 1
UP Sensor PITCH Outer Carousel PITCH
sensor
2-2 PROBE WASH PUMP Inner Probe Wash Pump 7-2 R2 CAROUSEL 1 PITCH Reagent Supply Center 2
DOWN DOWN sensor Carousel PITCH sensor
2-3 THICK WASTE PUMP UP H.C. Waste Pump UP 7-3 R2 CAROUSEL HOME Reagent Supply Center 2
sensor HOME sensor
2-4 THICK WASTE PUMP H.C. Waste Pump DOWN 7-4 SAMPLING ARM HOME Sample Pipettor rotational
DOWN sensor HOME sensor
2-5 ISE SUCTION PUMP UP ICT Aspiration Pump UP 7-5 SAMPLING ARM MOTOR Sample Pipettor rotational
sensor 1 ROUND PITCH sensor
2-6 ISE SUCTION PUMP ICT Aspiration Pump 7-6 SAMPLING ARM Sample Pipettor Elevator
DOWN DOWN sensor (UP/DOWN) HOME HOME sensor
2-7 ISE MCC PUMP UP ICT Reference Solution 7-7 SAMPLING ARM Sample Pipettor Elevator
Pump UP sensor (UP/DOWN) MOTOR 1 PITCH sensor
ROUND
2-8 AUXILIARY UP Not used c 8000 7-8 SAMPLING ARM Sample Pipettor CRASH
(UP/DOWN) CLASH sensor
2-9 AUXILIARY DOWN Not used c 8000 7-9 SAMPLING PUMP HOME Sample Syringe Drive Home
sensor
2- AUXILIARY OK Not used c 8000 7- SAMPLING PUMP Sample Syringe Drive PITCH
10 10 MOTOR 1 ROUND sensor
3-1 AUXILIARY AC MOTOR 2 Not used c 8000 8-1 SAMPLING PUMP DOWN Sample Syringe Drive
UP LIMIT DOWN LIMIT sensor
3-2 AUXILIARY AC MOTOR 2 Not used c 8000 8-2 R1 PUMP HOME Reagent 1 Syringe Drive
DOWN HOME sensor
3-3 AUXILIARY DC MOTOR Not used c 8000 8-3 R1 PUMP MOTOR 1 Reagent 1 Syringe Drive
UP ROUND PITCH sensor
3-4 AUXILIARY DC MOTOR Not used c 8000 8-4 R1 PUMP DOWN LIMIT Reagent 1 Syringe Drive
DOWN DOWN LIMIT sensor
3-5 BATH LEVEL OK Water Bath Float Switch 8-5 R2 PUMP HOME Reagent 2 Syringe Drive
OK HOME sensor
3-6 R1 CAROUSEL COVER Reagent Supply Center 1 8-6 R2 PUMP MOTOR 1 Reagent 2 Syringe Drive
OK Cover sensor ROUND PITCH sensor
3-7 R2 CAROUSEL COVER Reagent Supply Center 2 8-7 R2 PUMP DOWN LIMIT Reagent 2 Syringe Drive
OK Cover sensor DOWN LIMIT sensor
3-8 DRAIN TANK-L FLOAT Not used c 8000 8-8 R1 ARM HOME Reagent Pipettor 1 rotational
SW. HOME sensor
3-9 UPPER LIMIT FLOAT SW. Open Water Tank Upper 8-9 R1 ARM MOTOR 1 Reagent Pipettor 1 rotational
Limit Float switch ROUND PITCH sensor
3- LEVEL HIGH FLOAT SW. Open Water Tank Level 8- R1 ARM UP/DOWN HOME Reagent Pipettor 1 Elevator
10 HIGH Float switch 10 HOME sensor
4-1 LEVEL LOW FLOAT SW. Open Water Tank Level 9-1 R1 ARM UP/DOWN Reagent Pipettor 1 Elevator
LOW float switch MOTOR 1 ROUND PITCH sensor
4-2 AUXILIARY FLOAT SW. Not used c 8000 9-2 R1 ARM UP/DOWN Reagent Pipettor 1 CRASH
CLASH sensor
4-3 SAMPLE CAROUSEL Sample Carousel Cover 9-3 R2 ARM HOME Reagent Pipettor 2 rotational
ACCESS INDICATOR sensor HOME sensor
SWITCH
4-4 DRAIN TANK-H FLOAT SW L.C. Waste Tank HIGH 9-4 R2 ARM MOTOR 1 Reagent Pipettor 2 rotational
ON float switch ROUND PITCH sensor
4-5 DEGASSER ALARM Degasser Alarm 9-5 R2 ARM UP/DOWN HOME Reagent Pipettor 2 Elevator
HOME sensor
4-6 INNER SAMPLER SWITCH Not used c 8000 9-6 R2 ARM UP/DOWN Reagent Pipettor 2 Elevator
ON MOTOR 1 ROUND PITCH sensor
4-7 EMPTY SENSOR MCC Bulk Solution LOW 9-7 R2 ARM UP/DOWN Reagent Pipettor 2 CRASH
WARNING sensor, ICT Reference CLASH sensor
Solution
4-8 EMPTY SENSOR B14 Bulk Solution LOW 9-8 INNER SAMPLER Sample Carousel HOME
WARNING sensor, Alkaline (INNER) HOME sensor
4-9 EMPTY SENSOR B3 Bulk Solution LOW 9-9 INNER SAMPLER Sample Carousel PITCH
WARNING sensor, Acid (INNER) 1 PITCH sensor
4- INNER SAMPLER CUP Not used c 8000 9- INNER SAMPLER Not used c 8000
10 SENSOR (IN) ON 10 (OUTER) HOME
5-1 INNER SAMPLER CUP Not used c 8000 10- INNER SAMPLER Not used c 8000
SENSOR (OUT) ON 1 (OUTER) 1 PITCH
5-2 AUXILIARY SWITCH 1 ON Sample Carousel Access 10- AUXILIARY STEPPING Not used c 8000
Indicator switch 2 MOTOR HOME
5-3 AUXILIARY SWITCH 2 ON Sample Carousel Advance 10- AUXILIARY STEPPING Not used c 8000
Indicator switch 3 MOTOR, MOTOR 1
ROUND
5-4 (EMPTY SENSOR MCC Not used c 8000 10- SAMPLE LEVEL SENSOR Sample Pipettor Liquid Level
S.S.) 4 OK Sensor
5-5 (EMPTY SENSOR B14 Not used c 8000 10- REAGENT 1 LEVEL Reagent Pipettor 1 Liquid
S.S.) 5 SENSOR OK Level Sensor
5-6 (EMPTY SENSOR B3 S.S.) Not used c 8000 10- REAGENT 2 LEVEL Reagent Pipettor 2 Liquid
6 SENSOR OK Level Sensor
6-7 LAND1 Not used c 8000 10- SAMPLE LEVEL SENSOR Sample Pipettor Air
7 OK FF Aspiration
5-8 LAND2 Not used c 8000 10- AUX48 Not used c 8000
8
5-9 LAND3 Not used c 8000 10- LAND5 Not used c 8000
9
5- LAND4 Not used c 8000 10- LAND6 Not used c 8000

10 10
2.2 Electronics Drawer
Links
Mixer Driver
SMD Board
Five-Phase Motor Driver
Mixer Driver
Mixer Driver (old style)
Mixer Driver (new style)

SMD Board
Five-Phase Motor Driver
5PMD1 Reaction Carousel 5PMD4 R1 Supply Center inner
5PMD2 Sample Pipettor up/down 5PMD5 R1 Supply Center outer
5PMD3 Sample Pipettor Horiz. 5PMD6 R2 Supply Center
2.3 Front Center Panel
Links
LLS Board
AC/DC Driver
LLS Board
Sample Pipettor Liquid Level Sense

Reagent Pipettor Level Sense
AC/DC Driver
2.4 Miscellaneous Boards
Links
CNN Board
ICT Pre Amp Board
IREF Level Detect Board
LED Boards
Thermal Bath Controller Board
ICT Pre Amp Board
Note
The gain of the ICT Pre-Amp Board is factory set and does not require adjustment.
CNN Board
IREF Level Detect Board
Correct Status of LED 1 and LED 2.
Immediately before the ICT assembly drives down and aspirates ICT reference solution from the cup, LED 1 Read Status turns ON
and LED 2 ICT Reference Cup Full should also turn ON.
Immediately after the ICT aspirates the ICT reference solution from the cup, LED 1 Read Status should turn ON and LED 2 ICT
Reference Cup Full should stay OFF.
LED Boards
Status LED Board
LED Status During Module Startup
Note
Each of the LED lighting patterns indicates that the corresponding operation is complete.
Thermal Bath Controller Board
Thermal Bath Controller Board (side view)
Thermal Bath Controller Board (connectors)

Thermal Bath Control
2.5 Power Supplies
Links
Main PS
SMD/SH PS
Main PS
Main PS (front view)
Main Power Supply Circuit Breakers
CP No. Amperage Voltage Function
1 15 amps. 100 VAC Reagent Refrigerator
2 10 amps. +5 VDC Bar Code Readers and CNN Bd.
3 6 amps. 100 VAC Water Bath Heater
4 3 amps. 100 VAC Electronic Drawer and Optic Housing Fans
5 5 amps. 100 VAC AC Robotics Motors
6 3 amps. 24 VAC Water Bath Drain Valve and Mixer Driver Board
Main PS (Side Connector Plate)

Main Power Supply Compatibility
Power Supply (93161) + Processing Module (SN C800223)

Note
To use the sample carousel with the three TED modules (SN c800223) with Power supply (93527), remove TED UCl 3
from the sample carousel and install insulator 93535. The thermostat does not have to be removed. Failure to remove the
TED module UCl3 causes PS2 to overload and possibly fail.
SMD/SH PS
SMD/SH PS (rear view)
SMD/SH PS (SN C800223 - front view)
Circuit protector SMD POWER/BOX SMD CN 2 5 Current

Unit name
number CONNECTOR NO/PIN (A/coil)
REAGENT 1 PIPETTOR 12-pin connector: PIN1-4 CN2/PIN1-2 2 2.00

(ELEVATOR)
CP7 REAGENT 1 PIPETTOR 12-pin connector: PIN1-4 CN2/PIN1-2 2 0.85
(ROTATE)
(ELEVATOR)
(ROTATE)
MIXER 1 ARM (ROTATE) 12-pin connector: PIN3-6 CN3/PIN1-2 2 0.80
CP9 MIXER 2 ARM (ROTATE) 12-pin connector: PIN3-6 CN3/PIN1-2 2 0.80
ISE ARM (ELEVATOR) 12-pin connector: PIN7-10 CN3/PIN3-4 2 0.80

CP10 ISE ARM (ROTATE) 12-pin connector: PIN7-10 CN3/PIN3-4 2 0.60
SAMPLE SYRINGE DRIVE 12-pin connector: PIN8-11 CN4/PIN1-2 2 1.20

CP11 REAGENT 1 SYRINGE DRIVE 12-pin connector: PIN8-11 CN4/PIN1-2 2 1.20
REAGENT 2 SYRINGE DRIVE 15-pin connector: PIN1-4 CN4/PIN3-4 2 1.20

CP12 SAMPLE CAROUSEL 15-pin connector: PIN1-4 CN4/PIN3-4 2 1.00
REACTION CAROUSEL 15-pin connector: PIN2-5 CN5/PIN1-2 5 1.40
CP13 REAGENT 1 CAROUSEL 15-pin connector: PIN2-5 CN5/PIN1-2 5 1.40

(INNER)
REAGENT 1 CAROUSEL 15-pin connector: PIN3-6 CN5/PIN3-4 5 1.40
(OUTER)
CP14 SAMPLE PIPETTOR 15-pin connector: PIN3-6 CN5/PIN3-4 5 1.40
(ELEVATOR)
SAMPLE PIPETTOR (ROTATE) 15-pin connector: PIN7-10 CN6/PIN1-2 5 1.40
CP16 AC-DC CONVERTER(+5V) in 15-pin connector: 8-11 CN6/PIN3-4 - -

SMD-NR
SMD/SH PS (SN C800224 - front view)
Circuit protector SMD POWER/BOX SMD CN 2 5 Current

Unit name
number CONNECTOR NO/PIN (A/coil)

(ELEVATOR)

(ROTATE)
(ELEVATOR)

(ROTATE)

CP8 ISE ARM (ELEVATOR) 12-pin connector: PIN7-10 CN3/PIN3-4 2 0.80
ISE ARM (ROTATE) 12-pin connector: PIN7-10 CN3/PIN3-4 2 0.60
SAMPLE SYRINGE DRIVE 12-pin connector: PIN8-11 CN4/PIN1-2 2 1.20
REAGENT 1 SYRINGE DRIVE 12-pin connector: PIN8-11 CN4/PIN1-2 2 1.20

CP9 REAGENT 2 SYRINGE DRIVE 15-pin connector: PIN1-4 CN4/PIN3-4 2 1.20
SAMPLE CAROUSEL 15-pin connector: PIN1-4 CN4/PIN3-4 2 1.00
REACTION CAROUSEL 15-pin connector: PIN2-5 CN5/PIN1-2 5 1.40

(INNER)

(OUTER)
SAMPLE PIPETTOR 15-pin connector: PIN3-6 CN5/PIN3-4 5 1.40
(ELEVATOR)
SAMPLE PIPETTOR (ROTATE) 15-pin connector: PIN7-10 CN6/PIN1-2 5 1.40

CP11
AC-DC CONVERTER(+5V) in 15-pin connector: 8-11 CN6/PIN3-4 - -
SMD-NR
Main Transformer T1
a b
T1 T.F. 200V Power Supply 1 Unit
Main Switch (rear of P/S) Line 240 VAC Cooler
Power 1 1 2
Filter +12
Inlet Plug L 1
Power Cable LN L L
230 VAC
0 3 to Peltiers
0V 12 VDC (TEDs) on
I O 220 VAC 2 2 0 7 Sample
15A PS3
LN N A
E D 208 VAC T.F. 100V Peltier 4 Carousel
NV Note:
Plug 3 3 A 5 7 & 10 do
200 VAC
4 4 C GND
6 not go to
5 5 the Sample
10 Carousel
1 to Emergency 6 6 11
Refrigerator OFF Button CP1 15A
4 Emergency 7 7 Refrig. 12
in front 0V
8 8
N
100 VAC
N
200 VAC 3 100 VAC
6 N
TB1 SH Power– S1P DISTRIBUTION
Relay 1 +5
200 VAC Power Supply to CNN PCB Refrigerator
1 1 1 1 1 4 +5 to
T1 T1 Emergency
200 VAC L 1 +5 7 +5 CPU Master Card 1 +5
2 2 3 to
2 2 T2 T2 0 5 VDC Cage
N 2 GND 2 GND Refrigerator
3 3 4 0 PS1 TBC
3 3 N 5 GND
4 4 6 Master 3 +12 to Heater Assy STRDRIVER
A2 A2 V Card
4 4 100 VAC 100 VAC N 8 GND 4 GND
5 5 2 A Cage +5
N C GND 3 +15 1 1 24 VAC
Preliminary 6 6 5 GND
Power Switch 6 GND 4 2 24 VAC RTN
7 7
–front of Power Supply 24 VAC
1 2 9 –15 3 3 +15
P/S 8 8
CP2 10A +5 24VAC RTN
Power Save 9 9 L 1 +12 ISH
6 4 GND
0 12 VDC GND
from AC/DC +5 2 5 –15
10 10 0 PS2
Driver PCB N GND 5
11 11 Fluidic
V CP6 3A
N N Valves 24 VAC
12 12 A AC 24V
C GND +12
13 13 +15 1 AC/DC
GND GND Driver
Connectors on side P/S 14 14 –15 2
Unit Cooler 15 15 to AC/DC
3
DISTRIBUTION Driver PCB
CPU 16 16
TBC 1 +24 +24DC
+24 DC Terminal Transformer T2
LAMP Block +15 G –15 2 from Sample
POWER SAVE 3 2 1 Handler P/S
3.15 A 24 VAC D1 3 GND
100V~ 100 VAC +15
CNN3
CPU 12 ~1 2 + 3 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5
CP 5 5A 6.3 A 18.3 V GND
100 V~ 12 ~1 2 - 6 CNN2 2
GND
+11.5 Lamp
+12 Pelt
+12
+24
–15
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Motor
+5
+15
Connectors on front of P/S RECTIFIER –15 to Master
1 3 CPU
AC/DC Driver Card Cage
100 VAC AC100V
STR Driver 1 3.15A 18 V 4
AC/DC 1 +24
Refrigerator/Emergency N
2 Driver N 2 1 1 CNN1 Power Indicator LED PCB CNN2 4 GND
CP3 6A 100 VAC LM
Heater 3 AC100V 3.15A 18 V 5 2 2 IC1
350T 2 +12
Power Indicator LEDs N TBC
4 CNN1 3 3
+11.5 Lamp 100 VAC 5 GND
CP4 3A 5 OV
-15 Fan 4 1 3 11.45
+15 N Degasser and LM
6 5 2 IC2
+12 Peltier Drawer Fans DC Power 350T 6 GND
+24 a 7 Sample Supply 6 3
+12 b Carousel 100 VAC 100 VAC 1 1
8 7 LAMP +11.45 VDC
+5 Thermostat 1 1 OPTICS 2 2
c 8000™ (<C800224)
N N
2 2 FAN 8 MAIN POWER SUPPLY
A2_9001j
AC IN c 8000™ (<C800224) STEPPER MOTOR / SAMPLE HANDLER POWER SUPPLY
1
200 VAC IN
4
3
200 VAC IN
6
2
100 VAC IN
5 1 1
2 2
6 pin
(L) (N) (L) (N) (L) (N)
FG FG FG
IN IN IN
+24 VDC +36 VDC +5 VDC ±12 VDC
Green – Connector on rear of P/S PS4 PS5 PS6
Orange – Connector on front of P/S (V1) (G1) (G2) (V2) (V3) Fan
+24(+V) GND(–V) 3 pin
+36 GND +5 GND GND +12 –12
+24V–3
(Monitor)
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TB1 TB2
C C C C C C C C C C
P P P P P P P P P P
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 2

A A A A A A A A A A
1 2 3 7 8 4 5 6 10 11 1 2 3 7 8 4 5 6 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
+24 VDC +24 VDC +36 VDC to Sample Handler +36 VDC to Sample Handler +5 VDC +5 VDC ±12 VDC ±12 VDC
to c8000 SMD PCB to c8000 SMD PCB Stepper Motors Stepper Motors to Sample Handler to Sample Handler to Sample Handler to Sample Handler
+24V–2 +24V–1 J1 J2 J5 J6 J3 J4
12 pin 15 pin 6 pin 6 pin (Not Used) 4 pin (Not Used) 9 pin 4 pin (Not Used) 6 pin A2_9009g
M a in T r a n s fo r m e r T 1
T 1 T .F . 2 0 0 V 1 U n it
M a in S w itc h ( r e a r o f P /S ) L in e 2 4 0 V A C C o o le r
P o w e r 1 1 2
F ilte r
In le t P lu g 2 3 0 V A C to P e ltie r s
P o w e r C a b le L N L L 3
0 V (T E D s ) o n
I O 2 2 0 V A C 2 2 7 S a m p le
1 5 A
L N N A C a ro u s e l
2 0 8 V A C T .F . 1 0 0 V 4
E D N o te :
P lu g 3 3 5
2 0 0 V A C 7 & 1 0 d o
4 4 C P 1 1 5 A 3 1 0 0 V A C
R e fr ig . 6 n o t g o to
5 5 6 N th e S a m p le
1 0 C a ro u s e l
1 to E m e rg e n c y 6 6 1 1
R e fr ig e r a to r O F F B u tto n R e fr ig e r a to r
4 E m e rg e n c y 7 7 1 2
in fr o n t 0 V E m e rg e n c y
8 8 to
R e fr ig e r a to r
N
1 0 0 V A C
N
2 0 0 V A C
T B 1 S H P o w e r S 1 P D IS T R IB U T IO N
1 + 5
2 0 0 V A C P o w e r S u p p ly to C N N P C B
1 1 1 1 1 4 + 5 to
2 0 0 V A C L 1 + 5 7 + 5 C P U M a s te r C a rd 1 + 5
2 2 2 2 3 5 V D C C a g e
0
N 2 G N D 2 G N D
3 3 4 0 P S 1 T B C
3 3 N 5 G N D
4 4 6 M a s te r 3 + 1 2 to H e a te r A s s y S T R D R IV E R
V C a rd
4 4 1 0 0 V A C 1 0 0 V A C N 8 G N D 4 G N D
5 5 2 A C a g e + 5
N C G N D 3 + 1 5 1 1 2 4 V A C
P r e lim in a r y 6 6 5 G N D
P o w e r S w itc h 6 G N D 4 2 2 4 V A C R T N
7 7
fro n t o f P o w e r S u p p ly 2 4 V A C
9 1 5 3 3 + 1 5
P /S 8 8
C P 2 1 0 A 2 4 V A C R T N
L 1 + 1 2 + 5 6 4 G N D
9 9 1 2 V D C IS H
0 G N D
0 + 5 2 5 1 5
1 0 1 0 P S 2
N G N D 5
1 1 1 1 F lu id ic
V C P 6 3 A
N N V a lv e s 2 4 V A C
1 2 1 2 A A C 2 4 V
C G N D + 1 2
1 3 1 3 + 1 5 1 A C /D C
G N D G N D D r iv e r
C o n n e c to r s o n s id e P /S 1 4 1 4 1 5 2
U n it C o o le r 1 5 1 5 to A C /D C
3
D IS T R IB U T IO N D r iv e r P C B
C P U 1 6 1 6
T B C T ra n s fo rm e r T 2 1 + 2 4 + 2 4 D C
+ 2 4 D C T e r m in a l
L A M P B lo c k + 1 5 G 1 5 2 fr o m S a m p le
P O W E R S A V E 3 .1 5 A 2 4 V A C 3 2 1 H a n d le r P /S
D 1 3 G N D
1 0 0 V ~ 1 0 0 V A C + 1 5
1 2 ~ + 1 2 3 C N N 3 1
C P U
C P 5 5 A 6 .3 A 1 8 .3 V G N D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 ~ - 1 2 6 C N N 2 2
M o to r 1 0 0 V ~ to M a s te r
+ 1 2 P e lt
C o n n e c to rs o n fro n t o f P /S R E C T IF IE R 1 5
+ 1 2
+ 2 4
1 5
+ 1 1 .5 L a m p
+ 1 5
+ 5
C P U
G N D
G N D
G N D
G N D
G N D
G N D
1 3 C a rd C a g e
A C /D C D r iv e r 1 0 0 V A C A C 1 0 0 V 3 .1 5 A 1 8 V
S T R D r iv e r 1 4
A C /D C 1 + 2 4
R e fr ig e r a to r/E m e rg e n c y N N
2 D r iv e r 2 1 1 C N N 1 P o w e r In d ic a to r L E D P C B C N N 2 4 G N D
C P 3 8 A 1 0 0 V A C 3 .1 5 A 1 8 V L M
H e a te r 3 A C 1 0 0 V 5 2 2 IC 1
3 5 0 T 2 + 1 2
P o w e r In d ic a to r L E D s N T B C
4 C N N 1 3 3
+ 1 1 .5 L a m p 1 0 0 V A C O V 5 G N D
C P 4 3 A 5
-1 5 F a n 4 1 3 1 1 .4 5
+ 1 5 N D e g a s s e r a n d L M
6 5 2 IC 2
+ 1 2 P e ltie r D ra w e r F a n s D C P o w e r 3 5 0 T 6 G N D
+ 2 4 7 S u p p ly 6 3
+ 1 2 1 0 0 V A C 1 0 0 V A C 1 1 c 8 0 0 0 (> C 8 0 0 2 2 3 )
8 1 1 7 L A M P + 1 1 .4 5 V D C
+ 5 O P T IC S
N N F A N 8
2 2 M A IN P O W E R S U P P L Y
2 2
A 2 _ 9 0 0 3 a
AC IN c 8000™ (>C800223) STEPPER MOTOR / SAMPLE HANDLER POWER SUPPLY
1
200 VAC IN
4
3
200 VAC IN
6
2
100 VAC IN
5 1 1
2 2
6 pin
(L) (N) (L) (N)
FG FG
IN
IN
+5 VDC ±12 VDC
+24 VDC, 36 VDC
Green – Connector on rear of P/S PS6
PS5
Orange – Connector on front of P/S +24 V +24G (GND) +36 V +36G (GND) (V1) (G1) (G2) (V2) (V3) Fan
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 +5 GND GND +12 –12
3 pin
+24V–3
C C C C C (Monitor) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
P P P P P TB2
7 8 9 10 11
3 2 1
8 8 8 8 8
A A A A A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TB1
1 2 3 7 8 4 5 6 10 11 1 2 3 7 8 4 5 6 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
+24 VDC +24 VDC +36 VDC to Sample Handler +36 VDC to Sample Handler +5 VDC +5 VDC ±12 VDC ±12 VDC
to c8000 SMD PCB to c8000 SMD PCB Stepper Motors Stepper Motors to Sample Handler to Sample Handler to Sample Handler to Sample Handler
+24V–2 +24V–1 J1 J2 J5 J6 J3 J4
12 pin 15 pin 6 pin 6 pin (Not Used) 4 pin (Not Used) 9 pin 4 pin (Not Used) 6 pin A2_9004
High Concentration Waste Line
Red – High Concentration Waste Acid Solution Line
Green – IREF Solution Alkaline Solution Line
Blue – DI Water Manifold
Low Concentration Waste Lines
Orange – Low Concentration Waste
Magenta – ACD Solution Manifold
Gray – ALK Solution
Manifold
Cuvette Washer
Wash & Blank

Water Waste
Water Waste
Pressure Nozzles
HC Waste
Aspiration
Monitor
Probe and Mixer Wash Cups
Dry Tip
ACD
ALK
Mix 1 Mix 2 ICT™
S R1 R2
IREF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Cup
ICT™ Warming Ring
Water Bath
Motor Drain Valve NO

NC NC CO
CO NO
Reagent Reagent
Supply Supply VP Vacuum
Manifold (1) Pump
S R1 R2 Center #2 Center #1
Syringe Syringe Syringe
VP Vacuum
Heater Assy (2) Pump
Cuvette Heater
Wash Pump
Sample Air Ducts (4) MP Radiator
NO NO NO
Sample/Reagent Carousel Reagent
NC CO NC NC Valves Maintenance
CO CO Refrigerator
Opening
Valve Unit
ACD2
Low Concentration NO ALK2
NO NC NO
Waste Manifolds Maintenance CO NC
CO CO NC
Opening
Small
Low NO ACD1
Concentration MP Mag NO ALK1
Pump CO NC
Waste Tank CO NC
Internal Probe Upper

Full 2 3
Wash Pump Limit
LEGEND Open NO
CO NC
Water Tank
Low Concentration Waste Low 13 12 14 11
Bellows Pump Service ALK ACD IREF ALK ACD IREF
3-Way Valve Overflow Large
Drain Pump ICT™ Aspiration
Mag Wash High
Plumbed Reagent Grade MP Solution Pump Concentration
Type II Water (15PSI (0.103hPa) Pump
Float Switch Pump Waste Pump
MP Mag Pump To Sample ~25PSI (0.172hPa) ON/OFF Flow Restrictor
Probe Wash Cup S Valve
NC CO
Wash cup
Check Valve To Reagent
Wash Cup Adjustment Valves NO
Probe Wash Cups R1, R2
Degasser Unit
NC CO
To Mixer Manifold
Syringe NO VP
Cuvette Washer Wash Cups Mixer 1, Mixer 2
Nozzle High Concentration
NC CO
R Waste Container
NO Vacuum
Cuvette Wash Chamber
L c 8000™ FLUIDICS
A2_9000m
Home
Master Card Pitch Reaction Cuvette Washer V ICT Aspiration Valve
Mecha-LED PCB Up/Down AC
Cage CN4 Waterbath Float Switch Carousel CN11 CN21 V Sample Probe Wash cup Valve
Bath Temp Detector Mixer AC
CN2 CN1 CN5 Up/Down V Reagent Probe Wash cup Valve
Home ICT Arm (Arm)
CN3 Home Internal Probe
ICT Arm (Elevator) AC CN12
Pitch Wash Pump V Mixer Wash cup Valve
Home R2 Pipettor
Wash Solution CN22 V Waterbath Supply Valve
Pitch (Horiz)
CN2 Pump AC
Home V Input Water Supply Control Valve
Pressure Monitor
Fan R2 Pipettor CN13
Controller PCB
Controller PCB
Stepper Motor
Pitch Cuvette Wash AC
(UP/DN)
DAQ PCB
CPU PCB
Guard Pump
AC/DC
PCB
CN1 Home R1 Pipettor H.C. Waste Pump AC CN23 V Aspiration/Dry Tip Valve
Pitch (Horiz) CN14
Fan Home ICT Aspiration Pump AC
R1 Pipettor V Acid Valve 1
Pitch
CN6 (UP/DN)
Guard V Alkaline Valve 1
Back Plane C PCI IREF Pump AC CN15
CNN Home Sample Pipettor
Cuvette Wash V Acid Valve 2
Pitch (Horiz)
Back Plane C T PCB Vacuum Pump AC CN24
Home V Alkaline Valve 2
B Up Sample Pipettor Cuvette Dry CN16
CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7 Mixer Pitch AC
2 Down CN7 (UP/DN) Vacuum Pump V Cuvette Wash Valve
Elevator Guard AC/DC
Down OK Trigger Sensor
Ethernet CN12 Waterbath Driver PCB
Mixer 1 Home SW Pause Sample Carousel Supply, Recirc V Sample Syringe Valve
Mixer 2 Home SW Rotate Switches SM MAG Pump AC
CN17 CN25 V Reagent 1 Syringe Valve
Shutter Home LG MAG AC
Pitch Sample Syringe Drive Pump–Wash V Reagent 2 Syringe Valve
Sample Carousel Limit Cups
Pause and Advance Pressure Monitor CN13 CN18
CN2 CN1 Home Waterbath
Indicator Switches Heater Motor Drain
Pitch R1 Syringe Drive CN5 CN10 MV Valve
LED PCB Ethernet GP-IB HC Waste Thermistor
Limit Open CN19
LLS Pre-Amp
Level
Keypad CN14 IRef
Temperature Bath
Home
Liquid Level Back Panel Sensor Controller PCB
PCB Pitch R2 Syringe Drive Cup Internal Air
CN1 CN1 Sense PCB Buzzer Radiator
CN8 Limit CN3 Temperature CN4 CN9
Fan
CN5 CN15 Up Wash Solution Detector
S–Probe CN2 Down Pump CN26
Home CN1 CN2 Circulation
Pitch Up Cuvette Wash
LLS Pre-Amp CN3 CN4 IRef Cup CN1 CN2 CN7 AC MAG
POS Down Pump Pump
PCB CN2 R2 Reag
Cover Up Internal Wash Sensor Bd
Supply CN16 Down Pump
CN1
Center Temp Up H.C. Waste
R1 Probe Optics CN3 CN6 Heater
CN1 ICT BCR
Down Pump
Unit Pre-AMP CN1 CN2
LLS Pre-Amp Optics Pre-Amp Fan Up ICT Aspiration
PCB CN3 PCB
Down Pump
Photo–Diode Cuvette Up Up IREF Pump
Array ICT Module Wash Down CN17 CN9
R2 Probe Elevator Down OK Sample Carousel Optics
L.C. Waste High
2-Phase Home WMU–Upper Limit Float Switches
Fan
Stepper Motors Pitch CN10 WMU–Full
CN1 POS WMU–Lower Limit Thermostat
R1 Pipettor (UP/DN) SM 2
CN7
S Cover Alarm Degasser
Sample CN18 Drawer
R1 Pipettor (Horiz) SM M Temp
D
Carousel Fans
CN2 + Home R1 Reagent Supply Center
R2 Pipettor (UP/DN) SM 1 BCR
CN8 2-Phase 2 Pitch Inner Sample UC1
4
R2 Pipettor (Horiz) SM 2 Stepper V
Fan Home R1 Reagent Supply Center Carousel R2 R1
S
CN3
Motor –
Bulk Pitch Outer BCR BCR BCR Peltiers
ICT (UP/DN) SM M 1 CN11 Cover
D CN10 Driver Solution ESIREF (TEDs) UC2 Degasser
CN4 CN19 Temp
ICT (Horiz) SM 2 PCB + Empty ESALK
2 Sensors ESACD BCR R1 Reagent Supply Center
Mix 1 Horiz SM 2
CN5 4 CN20 ISBCRP BCRP2 BCRP1
S CN9 V Fan
Mix 2 Horiz SM M UC5
– CN21 CN25
D CN6 Removed >c800223
Samp Crsl SM 3 2 Front Emergency
CN12 Power OFF Switch
Sample Syringe Drive SM 2 Optics
S Refrigerator
R1 Syringe Drive SM M lamp
D CN11
CN17
CN16
CN14
CN15
CN18
R2 Syringe Drive SM 4
CN13
STRD1 S S
Drawer
+36VDC J1 +24V–2 +24V–1 R1A R2A
50 50 50 50 50 50 Assy
SMD1 SMD3 SMD2 SMD4 SMD5 SMD6 CN1 S
12 pin 15 pin Solenoid
Mixer– CN3 T +36VDC J2 Open
5SMD1 5SMD2 STR AC/DC Power Lamp Unit 100V~ TBC Refrigerator/
Driver R
INPUT SH Power CPU CPU Distribution
CN4 D Driver Driver Save 11.5 VDC Cooler Emergency
PCB R ±12VDC J3 Open
50 50 50 50 50 50 CN2 Power
RSH Cord
SM SM SM SM SM SM
±12VDC J4 +24V–3 +24VDC
STRD2 Main Power Supply
r H ple
P/D le
pp g
rou n
Ctr Supp
Ou p
Su ea
etto Sa z
Ca actio
N
r U mp
Ctr Sup
sel
Ctr
Re nner
R2 r
ori
tte
etto Sam
+5VDC J5 Open Main

R
SMD / SH
Re
Transformer
I
ag
ag
Mixer 1
Re
5-Phase +5VDC J6 Power Supply

c 8000™ TOTAL WIRING
R1
R1
Pip
Mixer 2
Pip
Stepper Motors A2_9008s

A1.11 SHIELD, RV TRANSPORT Version - 96728-111_317_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number Description
7-78417-01 Shield, RV Transport
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.11 SHIELD, RV TRANSPORT
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal
Action Steps Reference
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations

Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. The processing module must be in
Stopped, or Offline status.
Preparation
1. Lift the appropriate processing center
cover(s) to access the RV loader
assembly.
Note
Refer to the processing center
map for the RV loader location
(RVL).
2. Locate the RV transport shield [1] on

the RV loader.
Remove RV
Transport
1. Loosen the thumbscrew securing the
Shield
shield to the RV loader bracket. [2]
2. Remove the shield from the module.
Replacement
Install RV
Transport Shield
1. Insert the tabs on the shield into the slots in
the RV loader transport assembly. [1]
2. Slide the shield toward the RV loader.
3. Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the shield
to the RV loader bracket. [2]
Note
The thumbscrew should be hand
tightened only.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close the processing center cover(s).
Verification Procedures
Order VP Description VP Detail / Note Expected Results
1 P-248 Startup and Shutdown Verify and document the following:
Verify processing modules and sample

handler come to a Stopped status without
errors.
handler come to Ready status without errors
when Startup is selected.
N/A G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
C1.01 Optics Assy, NS Version - 96666-109_930_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93100-02 Optics, Assy, NS
C1.01 Optics Assy, NS
Time Required 35 min

Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit
While performing this procedure, if you are exposed to reagents, calibrators or controls, the following
statements may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
1. The processing module must be in Stopped or
Subsection: System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the c 8000 processing module (use the
main circuit breaker located at the rear of the
processing module).
2. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the left rear
cover and remove the cover.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the left rear
deck and remove the deck.
4. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing the
reaction carousel rear cover and remove the cover.
Remove
Source
1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] (toward the front of the
Lamp
processing module) securing the source lamp
holder and remove the lamp holder.
2. Lay the holder out of the way.
Note
There is no need to disconnect lamp from
terminal block.
Remove
Optics
1. Unplug the shutter cable (SHUT to SHA) and fan
Assembly
(P-FAN to FAN) cable.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pre-amp
cable cover and remove the cover from the side of
optics housing. [2]
Note
The pre-amp cable cover slides into the
guides in the bottom of the optics housing
and is a tight fit.
3. Disconnect the pre-amp cable.

4. Remove the screw securing the optics housing to
the support bracket at the back of the optics
assembly.
5. While supporting the optics assembly from the
bottom, remove the three (3) screws securing the
optics. [3]
Note
The two (2) guide post spacers [4] can fall
into the processing module. Ensure that you
retain both spacers with the optics assembly.
Replacement
Install
Optics
1. Ensure the two (2) black guide post spacers [4] are in
Assembly
place on the optics assembly.
2. While supporting the optics assembly from the bottom,
secure it to the processing module frame with three
(3) screws. [3]
Note
The 3mm screw spacers [5] go on the top of
the processing module frame and the 1 mm
black screw spacers [6] go between the frame
and the optics assembly.
3. Install the optics housing to the support bracket with

the one screw.
4. Connect the pre-amp cable, and install the pre-amp
cable cover [2] and ground wire with two (2) screws.
Route the cables between the gasket material (of the
cover) and the housing.
Note
Ensure that the cover slides into the guides in
the bottom of the optics housing. The fit
between the guides in the optic housing and
the pre-amp cable cover is tight.
Note
The ground wire is installed with the screw that
is placed in the pre-amp cable cover paint-
masked screw hole.
5. Connect the shutter cable (SHUT to SHA) and fan (P-

FAN to FAN) cable.
Install
Source
1. Install source lamp holder in optics assembly and
Lamp
tighten the front thumbscrew. [1]
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. Secure the reaction carousel rear cover with two (2)
Operation Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
thumbscrews.
and shutdown.
2. Secure the left rear deck with two (2) screws.
3. Install left rear cover and secure with four (4) screws.
4. Power ON the processing module.
Note
The system control center power must be ON
prior to turning on the processing module to
ensure proper initialization.
5. To change the status of the processing module and

sample handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the
Startup procedure.
2 1008 - Optics Total Test
1 P-249 c8000 Reaction Carousel Home and
Trigger Sensor Alignment
C1.02 Fan, Optics Assembly Version - 96666-109_1041_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89176-03 Fan,optics&left side of inst
C1.02 Fan, Optics Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the c 8000 processing module (use
the main circuit breaker located at the rear of the
processing module).
Remove
Optics Fan
1. Unplug the fan (P-FAN to FAN) cable. [1]
2. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the fan
to the optics assembly.
Note
The screw hardware is not captured and
there is a flat washer and a split washer on
each screw.
3. Remove the Optics Fan. [3]
Replacement
Install
Optics
1. Secure the fan [3] to the optics assembly
Fan
with four (4) screws [2], each with a flat
washer, and a split washer.
Note
Air flow direction is out of the
housing.
2. Connect the fan (P-FAN to FAN) cable. [1]
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT

for System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Operation Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Note
The system control center power
must be ON prior to turning on the
processing module to ensure proper
initialization.
2. To change the status of the processing

module and sample handler from Stopped
to Ready, perform the Startup procedure.
3. Verify that the fan is rotating and that the
air flow exits the housing.
4. Secure the left rear deck with two (2)
screws.
5. Install left rear cover and secure with four
(4) screws.
1 G14 - Fan Verify that the fan is rotating and that the air
flows in the correct direction.
C1.03 Lamp Version - 96666-109_1152_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
C1.03 Lamp
Note
For further information on removal and replacement of this Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU), refer to the ARCHITECT
Systems Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
1 G4 - Control Run Verify controls are within specifications for Controls within specifications = Pass
assay(s)/ parameter(s).
C1.04 Plate,Lamp mount, optics Version - 96666-109_1263_1
C1.04 Plate, lamp mount, optics
Time Required Not Assessed

Parts
Tools/Materials Not Assessed 93101 Plate, lamp mount, optics
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Remove Optics Lamp Mount

Plate
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of the Abbott trained
repair person.
Replacement
1.
Verification
1.
C1.05 Plate, mount heat filter Version - 96666-109_1365_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93102-01 Plate, mount, heat filter
C1.05 Plate, mount heat filter

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Note
The heat absorbing filter should never be
removed with the processing module
powered on.

reaction carousel rear cover and remove the
cover.
Remove
Heat Note
Absorbing Do not handle the heat absorbing filter with bare
Filter fingers, the oil from your hands can damage the
filter.
1. Pull the heat filter mount plate [1] out of the

optics assembly.
2. Remove the screw securing each filter holder [2]
and remove the holder.
3. Remove the heat filter from the mount. [3]
Replacement
Install
Heat Note
Absorbing Do not handle the heat absorbing filter
Filter with bare fingers, the oil from your hands
can damage the filter.
1. Install the heat filter [3] on the mount. [1]

2. Secure each filter holder [2] with one
screw.
3. Install the filter mount plate [1] in the optics
assembly with the heat filter holders
toward the optics housing.

1. Install the reaction carousel rear cover with
two (2) thumbscrews.
Note
must be on prior to turning on the
initialization.

C1.06 Holder, Heat filter Version - 96666-109_1376_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93103-01 Holder, Heat filter
C1.06 Holder, Heat filter

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
the main circuit breaker located at the rear of
the processing module).
Note
powered on.

cover.
Remove Heat
Absorbing Filter Note
Holder Do not handle the heat absorbing filter with
bare fingers, the oil from your hands can
damage the filter.

optics assembly.
2. Remove the screw securing each filter
holder [2] and remove the holder.
Replacement
Install Heat
Absorbing Note
Filter Holder Do not handle the heat absorbing filter
with bare fingers, the oil from your hands

screw.
2. Install the filter mount plate [1] in the
optics assembly with the heat filter
holders toward the optic housing.
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
Operation System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the reaction carousel rear cover
Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
with two (2) thumbscrews.
Note
processing module to ensure
proper initialization.

C1.07 Filter, heat absorbing Version - 96666-109_1387_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89182-02 Filter, heat absorber, optics
C1.07 Filter, heat absorbing

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Note
powered on.

cover.
Remove
Heat Note
Absorbing Do not handle the heat absorbing filter with bare
Filter fingers, the oil from your hands can damage the
filter.

optics assembly.
2. Remove the screw securing each filter holder [2]
and remove the holder.
3. Remove the heat filter [3] from the mount.
Replacement
Install
Heat Note
Absorbing Do not handle the heat absorbing filter
Filter with bare fingers, the oil from your hands
1. Install the heat filter [3] on the mount. [1]

screw.
3. Install the filter mount plate [1] in the optics
assembly with the heat filter holders
toward the optics housing.

Note
initialization.

C1.11 Spring, leaf, lamp Version - 96666-109_942_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89236-02 Leaf Spring, lamp
C1.11 Spring, leaf, lamp

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Lamp Leaf
1. Loosen the thumbscrew (toward the front of the
Spring
holder [1] and remove the lamp holder.
2. Lay holder out of the way,
Note
terminal block.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the lamp leaf

spring [2] to the optics assembly and remove the
spring.
Replacement
Install
Heat
1. Install the lamp leaf spring [2] in the optics
Absorbing
assembly with the leafs toward the base of
Filter
the lamp and secure with two (2) screws.
2. Install the source lamp holder [1] in the
optics assembly and tighten the front
thumbscrew.

Note
initialization.
module and sample handler from Stopped to
Ready, perform the Startup procedure.
1 G17 - Lamp Verify lamp / light turns on.
C1.12 Optics Shutter Version - 96666-109_4702_3
List/Part Numbers
7-204228-01 Optics Shutter
7-35005695-01 Shutter, Universal
C1.12 Optics Shutter

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Caution
Possible Electrostatic Discharge Shock
Removal

System status.
Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the c 8000 processing module
(use the main circuit breaker located at
the rear of the processing module).
2. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the
left rear cover and remove the cover.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the

left rear deck and remove the deck.
4. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing

the reaction carousel rear cover and
remove the cover.
Remove Source
Lamp
1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] (toward the
front of the processing module) securing
the source lamp holder and remove the
lamp holder.
Note
There is no need to disconnect
lamp from terminal block.
Remove Optics
Assembly
1. Unplug the shutter cable (SHUT to SHA)
and fan (P-FAN to FAN) cable.

pre-amp cable cover and remove the
cover from the side of optics housing. [2]
Note
The pre-amp cable cover slides
into the guides in the bottom of the
optics housing and is a tight fit.
4. Remove the screw securing the optics

housing to the support bracket at the back
of the optics assembly.
5. While supporting the optics assembly from

the bottom, remove the three (3) screws
securing the optics. [3]
Note
The two (2) guide post spacers [4]
can fall into the processing module.
Ensure that you retain both spacers
with the optics assembly.
Remove Optics VID-126-001 Shutter Replacement

Housing Top
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the
Cover
optics top cover to the optics and remove
cover.
Caution
Do not try and clean any
components inside of the optics
assembly. Damage can occur by
touching the lens, the grating, or
the diode array.
Caution
Do not try to adjust or unscrew any
screw with red screw lock on them.
Remove Optics
Housing Bottom
Cover
bottom cover to the optics housing and
remove cover.
Remove Shutter
1. Cut the cable tie that is holding shutter
cable to the pre-amp board standoff. [1]
2. Pull the shutter cable up through slot next
to the wires coming from the diode array.
3. Remove the two (2) hex screws [2]
holding the shutter mounting bracket [3]
and remove the shutter and bracket from
optics.
Remove Universal
Shutter from Older Style Shutter
1. If you are removing an older style shutter
Mount
(not a Universal Shutter), proceed to
action step: Remove Shutter from Mount.
2. If you are removing a Universal Shutter,

locate the Toshiba part number located on
the Optics Housing Cover.
If the part number is PM10-50080

Rev C, proceed to action step:
Remove Universal Shutter on
Revision C Optics Assembly.
If the part number is PM10-50080

Rev D proceed to action step:
Remove Universal Shutter on
Revision D Optics Assembly.
Shutter for Optics P/N PM10-50080 Rev C

Shutter for Optics P/N PM10-50080 Rev D
Remove Universal Optics Assembly P/N PM10-50080 Rev C

Shutter on
1. Remove the (2) screws [1] holding the
Revision C Optics
shutter to the shutter mount.
Assembly
2. Remove shutter [2] from the mounting
plate [3].
3. Proceed to action step: Determine Optics

Version for Universal Shutter Installation.
Remove Universal Optics Assembly P/N PM10-50080 Rev D
Shutter On 1. Remove the (2) screws [1] holding the
Revision D Optics shutter to the shutter mount.
Assembly
2. Remove shutter [2] from the mounting
plate [3].
3. Proceed to action step: Determine Optics

Version for Universal Shutter Installation.
Remove Shutter
from Mount
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1] holding
the shutter to the shutter mount.
2. Remove shutter from mount.
Replacement
Determine
Optics 1. These instructions are for the new 7-
Version for 35005695-01 Universal Shutter. If you
Universal are not installing the Universal Shutter,
Shutter proceed to action step:
Installation Install Shutter on Mount.
2. If you are installing a Universal Shutter,
locate the Toshiba part number located
on the Optics Housing Cover.
If the part number is PM10-50080 Rev

C, proceed to action step: Install
Universal Shutter on Revision C Optics
Assembly.
If the part number is PM10-50080 Rev

D proceed to action step: Install
Universal Shutter on Revision D Optics
Assembly.
Note
The Universal Shutter Kit contains the
mount plates needed to install the
shutter on the c4000, c16000 and c8000
(two different versions) Optics
Assemblies. The unused mount plates
are discarded.
Install Optics Assembly P/N PM10-50080 Rev C

Universal
1. Place the new universal shutter [1] on
Shutter On
the new mount plate [2] and secure with
Revision C
the (2) two screws [3].
Optics
Assembly
2. Place the shutter, with shutter mount, on
the mounting post and secure with the
two (2) screws [4].
3. Proceed to action step: Install Cable Tie.

Install Optics Assembly P/N PM10-50080 Rev D
Universal
1. Place the new universal shutter [1] on
Shutter On
the new mount plate [2] and secure with
Revision D
the (2) two screws [3].
Optics
Assembly
2. Place the shutter, with shutter mount, on
the mounting post and secure with the
two (2) screws [4].
3. Proceed to action step: Install Cable Tie.

Install Shutter
On Mount Note
The shutter will only fit on the
shutter mount in one position.
1. Place the shutter on the shutter mount

and secure with the three (3) screws
removed in previous step.
Install Shutter
1. Place the shutter with shutter mount on
the mounting post [3] and attach with
the two (2) hex screws [2].
Install Cable
Tie
1. Route the shutter cable next to the
wires coming from the diode array.
2. Secure the cable with a cable tie [1] to
the pre-amp support.
Install Optics
Covers
1. Install the optics bottom cover to the
optics housing and secure with the four
(4) screws removed earlier.
Note
Ensure that the shutter cable is
routed through the opening in the
bottom cover.
2. Install the optics top cover to the optics

housing and secure with the four (4)
screws removed earlier.
Install Optics
Assembly
1. Ensure the two (2) black guide post
spacers [4] are in place on the optics
assembly.
2. While supporting the optics assembly
from the bottom, secure it to the
processing module frame with three (3)
screws. [3]
Note
The 3mm screw spacers [5] go
on the top of the processing
module frame and the 1 mm
black screw spacers [6] go
between the frame and the optics
assembly.
3. Install the optics housing to the support

bracket with the one screw.
4. Connect the pre-amp cable, and install

the pre-amp cable cover [2] and ground
wire with two (2) screws. Route the
cables between the gasket material (of
the cover) and the housing.
Note
Ensure that the cover slides into
the guides in the bottom of the
optics housing. The fit between
the guides in the optic housing
and the pre-amp cable cover is
tight.
Note
The ground wire is installed with
the screw that is placed in the
pre-amp cable cover paint-
masked screw hole.
5. Connect the shutter cable (SHUT to

SHA) and fan (P-FAN to FAN) cable.
Install Source
Lamp
1. Install source lamp holder in optics
assembly and tighten the front
thumbscrew. [1]
1. Secure the reaction carousel rear cover

screws.
3. Install left rear cover and secure with

four (4) screws.
Note
must be ON prior to turning on
the processing module to ensure

module and sample handler from
Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.
1 1001 - Optics Trigger Sensor Check
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-119) • © 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
C2.01 Gear, main, reaction crsl. Version - 96666-109_953_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93106-01 Gear, main, reaction crsl.
C2.01 Gear, main, reaction crsl.

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
cover.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the reaction
carousel front cover and remove the cover.
4. Remove the cuvette segments from the reaction
carousel and store in a safe place.
Remove
Decks
1. Loosen the two (2) screws securing the right
center front deck and remove the deck.
2. Loosen the three (3) screws securing the center
front deck and remove the deck.
Remove
Reaction
1. Mark the reaction carousel drive gear in
Carousel
relationship to the main gear.
Main Gear
Caution
Ensure the home position flag is not in the
home sensor. If the flag is in the sensor,
manually rotate the gear until the flag is
clear of the sensor.
2. Loosen the three (3) screws securing the upper

guide rollers (1 screw per guide roller) and
remove the rollers. [2]
3. Disconnect the spring from the floating guide
roller assembly [3] and move the floating guide
roller away from the reaction carousel.
4. Lift the reaction carousel [1] main gear out of the
processing module.
Caution
When removing the main gear, avoid
damage to the reaction carousel home
sensor and the cuvette washer nozzles.
Replacement
Install
Reaction Note
Carousel If installing a new reaction carousel main gear, use
Main the main gear removed and count the number of teeth
Gear on the gear from the home sensor flag to the mark
made during removal. Place a mark on the new main
gear in the same place.
1. Place the reaction carousel [1] on the lower guide

rollers while aligning the marks on the drive gear
made during removal.
2. Install the three (3) upper guide rollers. [2]
3. Move the floating guide roller against the reaction
carousel and attach the spring on the floating guide
roller assembly. [3]
4. Verify the main gear and carousel drive gear marks
are correctly aligned and that it rotates smoothly.
Install
Decks
1. Secure the center front deck with three (3) screws.
2. Secure the right center front deck with two (2)
screws.

Note and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
3. Perform P-101 Reaction Carousel Alignment.
4. Install the cuvette segments.
5. Secure the reaction carousel front cover with two (2)
screws.
thumbscrews.
8 P-126 ICT Alignment
7 P-131 Cuvette Washer Alignment
6 P-128 Mixer Alignment
3 1120 - Sample Pipettor Calibration
4 1121 - R1 Pipettor Calibration
C2.02 Photo Sensors Reaction Carousel (Home & Pitch) Version - 96666-109_964_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89348-02 Sensor, photo, multiple use
C2.02 Photo Sensors Reaction Carousel (Home & Pitch)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Note Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
This procedure is for both the Home and Pitch Subsection: System status.
sensors on the reaction carousel.

Offline status.
Preparation
Access Multiple
Use Photo
1. Remove the sensor:
Sensor
If removing the Home sensor, continue
with Remove Sensor, Photo, Multiple Use
(Home).
If removing the Pitch sensor, continue
with Remove Sensor, Photo, Multiple Use
(Pitch).
Remove
Sensor, Photo,
Multiple Use
(Home)
cover.
2. Mark the sensor mounting bracket position on
the upper frame.
3. Disconnect the HOME plug [1] from the sensor.
4. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the
sensor mounting bracket to the upper frame and
lift the sensor out of the processing module.
5. Remove the screw securing the sensor [3] to the
mounting bracket.
Remove
Sensor, Photo,
1. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the right
Multiple Use
rear cover and remove the cover.
(Pitch)
2. Disconnect the PICH plug [1] from the sensor.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the sensor
mounting bracket [2] to the frame of the reaction
carousel drive motor and remove the sensor
mounting bracket.
mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install Multiple
Use Photo
1. Install the sensor:
Sensor
If installing the Home sensor,
continue with Install Sensor,
Photo, Multiple Use (Home).
If installing the Pitch sensor,
continue with Install Sensor,
Photo, Multiple Use (Pitch).
Install Sensor, For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
Photo, Multiple System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the sensor [3] to the mounting
Use (Home) Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
bracket with one (1) screw.
2. Install the mounting bracket to the upper
frame with two (2) screws. [2]
Note
Ensure that the bracket is aligned
with the marks made during
removal.
3. Connect the HOME plug [1] to the

sensor.
4. Continue with Prepare for Operation.
Install Sensor, For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
Photo, Multiple System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the sensor [3] to the mounting
Use (Pitch) Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
bracket [2] with one (1) screw.
2. Attach the mounting bracket [2] to the
frame of the reaction carousel drive
motor with two (2) screws.
3. Connect the PICH plug [1] to the sensor.
Note

procedure.
3. Perform P-101 Reaction Carousel
Alignment.
4. Secure covers/decks.
If the Home sensor was replaced,

secure the reaction carousel rear
cover with two (2) thumbscrews.
If the Pitch sensor was replaced,
secure the right rear cover.
C2.03 Motor Assy, Reaction Carousel Version - 96666-109_975_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93107-01 Motor Assy, Reaction Carousel
C2.03 Motor Assy, Reaction Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped
or Offline status.
Preparation
(use the main circuit breaker located at the
rear of the processing module).
2. Remove the cuvette segments from the
reaction carousel and store in a safe place.
cover.
center rear deck and remove the deck.
5. Remove the screw securing the right rear
6. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the left
Remove Reaction
Carousel Motor
1. Mark the reaction carousel drive gear [1] in
Assembly
relationship to the main gear.
2. Cut the wire ties on the cable from the motor
to the RDM connector. [2]
3. Disconnect the RDM plug from the
connector. [2]
4. Disconnect the PICH plug [3] from the Pitch
sensor on the motor frame.
5. While holding motor (so that it does not fall),
remove the three (3) screws [4] securing the
motor assembly.
Replacement
Install
Reaction Note
Carousel If installing a new motor assembly place a
Motor mark on the new motor assembly gear in
Assembly the same place as the one removed.
1. Secure the motor assembly to upper frame

with three (3) screws [4] while aligning
marks on the drive gear [1] made during
removal.
2. Connect the PICH plug [3] to the sensor.
3. Connect the RDM plug to the
connector. [2]
4. Secure the cable from the motor with wire
ties.
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the
Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Note
initialization.

Alignment.
6. Secure the center rear deck with two (2)
screws.
7. Secure the right rear deck with one (1)
screw.
8. Replace the left and right rear covers and
secure with four (4) screws in each cover.
C2.04 Guide Assy, floating Version - 96666-109_986_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93108-01 Guide Assy, floating
C2.04 Guide Assy, floating

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
cover.
reaction carousel front cover and remove the
cover.
Remove
Floating Guide
1. Mark the position of the floating guide assembly
Assembly
in relationship to the upper the processing
module frame.
assembly to the frame and remove from the
processing module.
Replacement
Install
Floating
1. Position the guide assembly on the frame
Guide
using marks made during the removal.
Assembly
2. Secure the assembly to the frame with two
(2) screws.
Note
initialization.

Alignment.
5. Secure the reaction carousel front cover
with two (2) screws.
C2.05 Roller, floating guide Version - 96666-109_997_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89315-02 Roller , floating guide
C2.05 Roller, floating guide

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Floating
1. Unhook the end of the spring attached to the roller
Guide
bracket. [1]
Roller
Note
Performing Step 2 can result in the hinge pin
falling into the processing module. Take care
that the pin is supported before removing the
securing clip.
2. Remove the clip [2] on the upper end of the hinge

pin and lower the hinge pin down and out of the
floating guide assembly.
3. Remove the roller bracket. [3]
4. Remove the clip [4] from the bottom end of the
roller shaft.
5. Remove the clip (securing the roller) [5] from under
the roller and slide the shaft from the bracket. [3]
6. Remove the roller. [6]
Replacement
Install
Floating
1. Place the roller in the bracket and slide the
Guide
shaft through the roller and bracket.
Roller
2. Secure the roller with a clip. [5]
3. Secure the shaft with a clip. [4]
4. Place the bracket [3] in the floating guide
assembly.
5. Slide the hinge pin from underneath and
secure with a clip. [2]
6. Hook the end of the spring [1] to the roller
bracket.
Note
initialization.

C2.06 Spring, floating guide Version - 96666-109_1008_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93110-01 Spring, floating guide
C2.06 Spring, floating guide

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
cover.
Remove
Floating
1. Unhook both ends of the floating guide spring
Guide Spring
and remove spring.
Replacement
Install
Floating
1. Hook both ends of the floating guide spring
Guide
and install the spring.
Spring

Note
initialization.

1 G2 - Verify that the hardware is installed, part
is in position and securely fastened.
2 G23 - Initialization/ Startup Verify instrument initializes and/or starts up.
C2.07 Roller, guide assembly, NS Version - 96666-109_1019_1
List/Part Numbers
7-202487-02 Roller Assembly, NS
7-202490-01 Wheel & bearing, com guide
7-93111-02 Roller, guide assembly, NS
7-93111-03 Roller, guide assembly, Improved
C2.07 Roller, guide assembly, NS

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
cover.
Remove
Guide Roller
1. Mark the position of the base of the roller
Assembly
assembly in relationship to the upper the
processing module frame.
assembly to the upper frame.
3. Lift the roller assembly from the processing
module.
Replacement
Install
Guide
1. Position the roller assembly on the upper
Roller
the processing module frame and align
Assembly
with marks made during removal.
2. Secure the roller assembly to the
processing module frame with two (2)
screws.

Note
initialization.

Alignment.
C2.08 Motor Coupling, Reaction Carousel Version - 96666-109_5037_1
C2.08 Motor Coupling, Reaction Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Remove Reaction Carousel Motor Assembly.
(C2.03 Motor Assy, Reaction Carousel)
Remove
Motor
1. Loosen the two (2) upper set screws [1]
Coupling
securing the coupling to the drive gear shaft.

motor to the motor frame.
3. Loosen the lower two (2) set screws [2]

securing the coupling to the motor shaft and
remove coupling.
Replacement
Install Motor
Coupling
1. Install coupling onto the gear drive
shaft.
2. Align set screws with the flat sides

of the shaft.
3. Tighten the set screws to the gear

drive shaft.
4. Install the motor and insert shaft into
the coupling.
5. Secure the motor to the motor
frame using the four (4) screws.
6. Align the set screws on the coupling
with the flat sides of the motor shaft
and tighten set screws.
Install Reaction
Carousel Motor
1. Install Reaction Carousel Motor
Assembly
Assembly. (C2.03 Motor Assy,
Reaction Carousel)
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
C3.01 Segment, cuvette assy, complete Version - 96666-109_1030_1
C3.01 Segment, cuvette assy, complete
Note
1 3010 - Reaction Carousel Home/Move
C3.02 Cuvette Version - 96666-109_1042_1
C3.02 Cuvette
Note
1 3010 - Reaction Carousel Home/Move
D1.01 Reagent Supply Center #1 Version - 96666-109_1086_1
List/Part Numbers
7-202248-01 Reagent Supply Center #1
7-204564-01 Reagent Supply Center #1, O.W.
D1.01 Reagent Supply Center #1

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Remove reagent supply center #1 cover.
2. Remove and store the reagent trays in an
appropriate place.
4. Remove the top front cover, the top rear cover,
and the bridge.
6. Remove the Reagent Probes #1 and #2.
7. Remove the screw securing the right front deck
and remove the deck.
8. Remove the two (2) screws securing the right
9. Remove the screw securing the right rear deck
Remove Pump
Door
1. Open the card cage (right front) and pump
center (center front) doors.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pump
center (center front) door and remove the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from the top of
Panel
the front right access panel. [2]
2. Loosen the two (2) screws [3] at the bottom of
the panel, and remove the access panel. [2]
Remove
Reagent
1. Disconnect the R1CS, R1COM, R1CIM, and
Supply Center
BCRP1 plugs from the front of the reagent
#1
supply center #1.
2. Clamp and disconnect the inlet water tubing [1]
from the front of the supply center.
3. Remove the two (2) mounting screws [4] from
the front base of the supply center.
4. From the rear of the processing module,
disconnect the plug from the 2D BCR for the
reagent supply center #1.
5. Disconnect the inlet and outlet cold air ducts [2]
from the bottom of the supply center.
6. Disconnect the drain tubing [3] from the bottom
of the supply center.
7. Remove the two (2) mounting screw from the
base at the rear of the supply center.
8. Lift the supply center [5] out of the processing
module.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Place the reagent supply center [5] in the
Supply
processing module, ensuring that the base of
Center #1
the supply center aligns with the guide pins on
the frame.
2. Secure the supply center in place with four (4)
screws. (2 screws in front, 2 screws at the rear
of the supply center). [4]
3. Connect the drain tubing [3] and the cold air
ducts [2] to bottom of the supply center.
4. Connect the cable to the 2D BCR for the
5. Connect the inlet tubing [1] to the front of the
supply center and remove the clamp.
6. Connect the R1CS, T1COM, R1CIM, and
BCRP1 plugs to the connectors on the front of
the supply center.
Install
Front Right
1. Secure the front right access panel [2] to the
Access
processing module with four (4) screws. [1] [3]
Panel
Install
Pump
1. Install the pump center (center front) door with
Door
two (2) screws.
for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
1. Close the door(s).
Operation instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
2. Install the right rear cover and secure with four
(4) screws.
3. Secure the right front deck with one (1) screw.
4. Secure the right front center deck with (2)
screws.
5. Secure the right rear deck with one (1) screw.
6. Secure the center rear deck with (2) screws.
7. Install the reagent probes.
8. Install the top front and top rear covers.
Note
The system control center power must
be on prior to turning on the processing
module to ensure proper initialization.
10. Place the reagent trays in the reagent supply

center and install the supply center cover.
11. To change the status of the processing module
and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
perform the Startup procedure.
1 3525 - Temperature Status
3 G30 - Reagent Bar Code Label Scan Perform a SCAN F4 under the REAGENT
Icon.
Verify all reagent bar code labels are read.
D1.02 Photo Sensors, Reagent Supply Center #1 Version - 96666-109_1097_1
List/Part Numbers
D1.02 Photo Sensors, Reagent Supply Center #1

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard
Removal

This procedure is for the four (4) sensors located Subsection: System status.
on Reagent Supply Center #1.

Offline status.
Preparation
1.
Remove reagent supply center #1 cover.
appropriate place.
and the bridge.
9. Remove the screw securing the right rear deck
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove
Reagent
1. Disconnect the R1CS, R1COM, R1CIM, and
Supply Center
BCRP1 plugs from the front of the reagent
#1
supply center #1.
2. Clamp and disconnect the inlet water tubing [1]
from the front of the supply center.
3. Remove the two (2) mounting screws [4] from
the front base of the supply center.
disconnect the plug from the 2D BCR for the
5. Disconnect the inlet and outlet cold air ducts [2]
7. Remove the two (2) mounting screw from the
base at the rear of the supply center.
8. Lift the supply center [5] out of the processing
module.
Remove
Sensor, Photo,
1. Place the supply center on its side, ensuring that
Multiple Use
the connectors or other components are not
damaged.
2. Disconnect the plug [1] from the appropriate
sensor.
3. Remove the screws (one or two, as necessary)
securing the sensor mounting bracket [2, 3 or 4]
for the appropriate sensor.
4. Remove the screw securing the sensor to the
mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install
Sensor,
1. Install the sensor to the mounting bracket with
Photo,
one (1) screw.
Multiple
2. Attach the mounting bracket [2, 3 or 4] to the
Use
frame of the carousel drive motor with one or
two (2) screws.
3. Connect the plug [1] to the sensor.
Install
Reagent
1. Place the reagent supply center [5] in the
Supply
Center #1
the supply center aligns with the guide pins on
the frame.
2. Secure the supply center in place with four (4)
screws. (2 screws in front, 2 screws at the rear
of the supply center). [4]
3. Connect the drain tubing [3] and the cold air
ducts [2] to bottom of the supply center.
4. Connect the cable to the 2D BCR for the
5. Connect the inlet tubing [1] to the front of the
supply center and remove the clamp.
6. Connect the R1CS, T1COM, R1CIM, and
BCRP1 plugs to the connectors on the front of
the supply center.
Install
Front Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump Door
two (2) screws.
(4) screws.
3. Secure the right front deck with one (1) screw.
4. Secure the right front center deck with (2)
screws.
5. Secure the right rear deck with one (1) screw.
6. Secure the center rear deck with (2) screws.
Note

Icon.
D1.03 Detector, Cover Version - 96666-109_1108_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93118-01 Detector, Cover
D1.03 Detector, Cover

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Cover
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the mounting
Detector
bracket [1] for the sensor to the supply center
base.
2. Lift the bracket from the frame and disconnect the
plug to the sensor. [2]
sensor to the mounting bracket and remove the
sensor.
Replacement
Install
Cover
1. Place the sensor on the mounting bracket
Detector
and secure with two (2) screws. [3]
2. Connect the plug to the sensor [2] and
place the mounting bracket in position on
the supply center base.
3. Secure the mounting bracket [1] with two
(2) screws.

1. Secure the right front deck with one (1)
screw.
Note
initialization.

1 3400 - Interlock Sensor Test
D1.04 Temp. Detector Reagent Supply Center #1 Version - 96666-109_1119_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89164-02 Detector,temp,reagent supp ctr
D1.04 Temp. Detector Reagent Supply Center #1

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Power OFF the c 8000 processing
module (use the main circuit breaker
located at the rear of the processing
module).
2. Remove the screw securing the right
Remove Temperature
Detector Reagent
1. Gently pull the sensor from the front of
Supply Center #1
the reagent supply center housing.
2. Disconnect the plug (TEMP) to the
sensor.
Replacement
Install Temperature
Detector Reagent
1. Connect the sensor plug.
Supply Center #1
Note
The system control center
power must be on prior to
turning on the processing
module to ensure proper
initialization.

procedure.
4. Gently insert the sensor in the front of
the reagent supply center housing.
5. Perform P-102 Reagent Center #1
Temperature Detector Adjustment.

screw.
1 P-102 Reagent Center #1 Temperature Verify and document that the reagent supply
Detector Adjustment center #1 temperature is within ± 0.2°C of the
reading for the external thermometer in the
water.
D1.05 Fan, Mini, R1,R2, BCRs Version - 96666-109_1130_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89174-03 Fan,Mini,R1,R2,BCRS
7-202550-01 Fan, Mini, R1, R2, BCRs, 16
D1.05 Fan, Mini, R1,R2, BCRs

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Class 2 Laser Product
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the screw securing the right rear deck and
remove the deck.
3. Observe fan orientation and air flow direction.
Note
Direction of air flow should be toward the bar
code reader window on the reagent supply
center.
Remove
Mini BCR
1. Disconnect the plug to the fan. [1]
Fan
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the fan
mounting bracket to the supply center base and lift
out of the processing module.
3. Remove the mini fan filter [3] by pulling the filter out
of filter bracket.
4. Remove the two (2) screws [4] securing the filter
bracket to the fan mounting bracket and remove the
filter bracket.
5. Remove the four (4) screws/nuts [5] securing the
fan to the mounting bracket.
6. Remove the fan. [6]
Replacement
Install
Mini BCR
1. Mount the fan [6] on the fan mounting
Fan
bracket with four (4) screws/nuts. [5]
2. Mount the filter bracket to the fan mounting
bracket with two (2) screws [4] and insert
the filter. [3]
3. Secure the fan mounting bracket to the
supply center base with two (2) screws. [2]
4. Connect the fan plug. [1]
Note
initialization.

3. Verify fan is turning and air flow is toward
the reagent bar code reader window.
screw.
D1.06 Filter, R1,R2, BCRs Version - 96666-109_1141_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89218-02 Filter, Mini Fan, 2D BCR
D1.06 Filter, R1,R2, BCRs

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Preparation
1. Remove the screw securing the
right rear deck and remove the
deck.
Remove Mini
BCR Fan Filter
1. Remove the mini fan filter by
pulling the filter out of the filter
bracket.
Replacement
Install
Mini BCR
1. Insert the filter in the filter bracket on the
Fan Filter
fan mounting bracket.
screw.
D1.07 Cover Latch, Reagent Supply Center #1 Version - 96666-109_1153_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204939-01 Latch, R.Cover, OW
7-93119-01 Latch, Cover
D1.07 Cover Latch, Reagent Supply Center #1

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
Remove
Cover
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing
Latch
the cover latch to the latch hinge.
2. Remove the cover latch.
Replacement
Install
Cover
1. Secure the cover latch to the latch hinge
Latch

screw.
D1.08 Hinge, cover latch Version - 96666-109_1164_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93120-01 Hinge, Cover latch
D1.08 Hinge, cover latch

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
Remove
Hinge, Cover
Latch
the hinge to side of the supply
center.
the cover latch to the latch hinge.
3. Remove the latch hinge.
Replacement
Install
Cover
Latch
2. Secure the hinge to the side of the supply
center with two (2) screws.

screw.
D1.09 2D Reagent Barcode Reader #1 Version - 96666-109_1175_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89023-02 Barcode Reader, 2D Reagent, I400A
D1.09 2D Reagent Barcode Reader #1

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the screw securing the right rear deck and
remove the deck.
3. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the right rear
Remove 2D
BCR
1. Disconnect the plug from the 2D BCR. [1]
2. Remove the three (3) screws [2] securing the BCR
mounting bracket to the frame mounting bracket.
3. Slide the BCR to your left to remove from the
processing module.
4. With the BCR mounting bracket in the up position,
remove the four (4) screws [3] securing the 2D BCR
to the bracket and remove the BCR.
Replacement
Install 2D
BCR
1. Secure the 2D BCR to the mounting
bracket with four (4) screws, [3] ensuring
the replacement of any spacers if removed.
2. Insert the BCR and the mounting bracket
in the frame mounting bracket and secure
with three (3) screws. [2]
3. Connect the 2D BCR plug. [1]
Note
initialization.

3. Perform P-107 Reagent Supply Center #1
Bar Code Reader Alignment.
screw.
5. Install the right rear cover and secure with
four (4) screws.
1 3206 - Reagent Bar Code Readers Test
Icon.
D2.01 Reagent Supply Center #2 Version - 96666-109_1186_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204565-01 Reagent Supply Center #2, O.W.
D2.01 Reagent Supply Center #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The Reagent Supply Center #2 weighs 28.65 lbs (13kg).
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
appropriate place.
and the bridge.
8. Remove the front and rear reaction carousel
covers.
9. Open the supply center (front left) door and the
pump center (front center) door.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
1. Remove the five (5) screws securing the
Aspiration
access panel [1] located above the ICT
Pump
aspiration pump and remove the panel.
Remove
Reagent Supply
1. Remove two (2) mounting screws [3] located
Center #2
next to the cover sensor bracket.
disconnect the inlet and outlet cold air ducts [4]
of the reagent supply center.
4. Clamp the inlet tubing [2] and remove from
bottom of the supply center.
5. Disconnect the plugs R2CS, R2CM, and
BCRP2 from the connector plate on the supply
center.
Note
Access to the plugs can be reached from
the rear of the processing module by the
optics.
6. Remove the two (2) mounting screws from the

base of the reagent supply center.
7. Lift the supply center out of the processing
module.
Note
When setting the supply center on a
bench, place it on the side. Setting the
supply center on the bottom damages
the photo sensor.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Place the reagent supply center in the
Supply
processing module, ensuring that the base
Center #2
of the supply center aligns with guide pins
on the frame.
2. Secure the supply center in place with four
(4) screws (2 screws [3] in front, 2 screws at
the rear of supply center).
3. Connect the cold air ducts [4] to the bottom
of supply center.
4. Connect the R2CS, R2CM, and BCRP2
plugs to the connectors on the side of the
supply center.
5. Connect the drain tubing [1] to bottom of the
supply center.
6. Connect the inlet tubing [2] to the fitting
closest to the front of the supply center and
unclamp tubing.
Install Panel
Above ICT
1. Secure the access panel located above the
Aspiration
ICT aspiration pump with five (5) screws.
Pump

2. Install the left and right rear covers and
3. Install the reaction carousel covers.
5. Install the top front and top rear covers, and
the bridge.
Note
initialization.
7. Place the reagent trays in the reagent

supply center and install the supply center
cover.
Icon.
D2.02 Photo Sensors, Reagent Supply Center #2 Version - 96666-109_1197_1
List/Part Numbers
D2.02 Photo Sensors, Reagent Supply Center #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Removal

The only sensor that can be replaced is the POS Subsection: System status.
sensor.

Offline status.
Preparation
1.
Remove reagent supply center #2 cover.
appropriate place.
processing module).
and the bridge.
covers.
Remove
Panel Above
1. Remove the five (5) screws securing the access
ICT
panel [1] located above the ICT aspiration pump
Aspiration
and remove the panel.
Pump
Remove
Reagent
1. Remove the two (2) mounting screw [3] located
Supply
Center #2
3. Disconnect the drain tubing [1] from the bottom of
the reagent supply center.
4. Clamp the inlet tubing [2] and remove from bottom
5. Disconnect the plugs R2CS, R2CM, and BCRP2
from the connector plate on the supply center.
Access to the plugs can be reached from the rear
of the processing module by the optics.
module.
Note
bench, place it on the side. Setting the
supply center on the bottom damages the
photo sensor.
Remove
Sensor,
1. With the supply center on its side loosen the two
Photo,
(2) screws securing the flag cover [1] and remove
Multiple Use
the cover.
(POS)
2. Remove the screw [2] securing the sensor to the
mounting bracket and remove the sensor.
Note
If the space between the mounting bracket
and the flag is too close to allow removal
of the sensor, mark the bracket in
relationship to base, then loosen the
screws securing bracket
3. Remove the POSI plug [3] from the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Sensor,
1. Secure the sensor to the mounting bracket
Photo,
with one (1) screw. [2]
Multiple Use
2. Connect the plug [3] POSI to the sensor.
3. Install the flag cover [1] and secure with two
(2) screws.
Install
Reagent
Supply
processing module, ensuring that the base
Center #2
of the supply center aligns with guide pins
on the frame.
2. Secure the supply center in place with four
(4) screws (2 screws [3] in front, 2 screws at
the rear of supply center).
3. Connect the cold air ducts [4] to the bottom
of supply center.
plugs to the connectors on the side of the
supply center.
supply center.
unclamp tubing.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
Note
initialization.

supply center and install the supply center
cover.
Icon.
D2.03 Cover Detector, Reagent Supply Center #2 Version - 96666-109_1208_1
List/Part Numbers
D2.03 Cover Detector, Reagent Supply Center #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Cover
Detector
mounting bracket for the sensor to the supply
center base.
2. Lift the bracket from the frame and disconnect the
plug (CVR) to the sensor. [2]
sensor [3] to the mounting bracket and remove
the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Cover
1. Place the sensor [3] on the mounting
Detector
bracket and secure with two (2) screws.
2. Connect the plug [2] to the sensor and
place the mounting bracket in position on
the supply center base.
3. Secure the mounting bracket with two (2)
screws. [1]

Note
initialization.

D2.04 Detector, temp, reag supp ctr #2 Version - 96666-109_1219_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93122-01 Detector,temp,reag supp ctr #2
D2.04 Detector, temp, reag supp ctr #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Remove the reagent supply center #2
cover.
appropriate place.
(use the main circuit breaker located at
the rear of the processing module).
Remove Panel Above

ICT Aspiration Pump
Remove Temperature
Detector Reagent
1. Locate the temperature detector through
Supply Center #2
the access panel removed in Remove
Panel Above ICT Aspiration Pump.
Note
It is located on the front right side
2. Gently pull the sensor from the front right

side of the reagent supply center housing.
3. Disconnect the plug (TEMP) to the
sensor.
Replacement
Install Temperature
Detector Reagent
1. Connect the sensor plug.
Supply Center #2
Note
initialization.

4. Gently insert the sensor in the right front
of the reagent supply center housing.
5. Perform P-103 Reagent Center #2
Install Panel Above

ICT Aspiration Pump
1. Secure the access panel located above
the ICT aspiration pump with five (5)
screws.
1 P-103 Reagent Center #2 Temperature Verify and document that the reagent supply
Detector Adjustment center #2 temperatrue is ± 0.2°C of the
reading for the external thermometer in the
water.
D2.05 Barcode Reader Assy, 2D, R2 Version - 96666-109_1230_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93123-01 BCR Assy, 2D, R2
7-93123-02 BCR Assy, 2D, R2
7-93123-03 BCR Assy, 2D, R2
D2.05 Barcode Reader Assy, 2D, R2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Remove the reagent supply center #2 cover.
appropriate place.
processing module).
Remove 2D
BCR
1. Remove the screw [3] securing the lamp terminal
block from the top of the BCR mounting bracket [2].
Lay terminal block with wires attached to the side.
2. Remove the three (3) screws securing the BCR
mounting bracket [2] to the standoffs.
3. Lift the BCR assembly off the standoffs and
disconnect the BCR plug [1] from the BCR.
Replacement
Install 2D
BCR
1. Connect the BCR plug [1] to the BCR.
Note
initialization.

4. Place the assembly on the standoffs and
secure the BCR assembly [2] with three (3)
screws.
5. Secure lamp terminal block to top of
mounting plate with screw [3].
supply center.
4. Install the supply center cover.
Icon.
D2.06 Reagent Barcode Reader #2 Version - 96666-109_1241_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89023-02 Barcode Reader, 2D Reagent, I400A
D2.06 Reagent Barcode Reader #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Remove the reagent supply center #2 cover.
appropriate place.
processing module).
cover.
Remove 2D
BCR
1. Remove the screw [4] securing the lamp terminal
block from the top of the BCR mounting
bracket [1].
2. Lay the terminal block, with wires attached, to the
side.
3. Remove the three (3) screws securing the BCR
mounting bracket [1] to the standoffs.
4. Lift the BCR assembly off the standoffs and
disconnect the BCR plug [2] from the BCR.
5. Remove the four (4) screws [3] securing the 2D
BCR to the mounting bracket and remove the
BCR.
Replacement
Install 2D
BCR
1. Secure the 2D BCR to the mounting
bracket with four (4) screws. [3]
2. Connect the BCR plug [2] to the BCR.
Note
initialization.

5. Place the assembly on the standoffs and
secure the BCR assembly [1] with three (3)
screws.
6. Secure lamp terminal block to top of
mounting plate with screw [4].

supply center.
4. Install the supply center cover.
Icon.
D2.07 Cover Latch, Reagent Supply Center #2 Version - 96666-109_1252_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204939-01 Latch, R.Cover, OW
7-93119-01 Latch, Cover
D2.07 Cover Latch, Reagent Supply Center #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
reaction carousel front cover and remove
the cover.
Remove
Cover
Latch
cover latch to the latch hinge.
2. Remove the cover latch.
Replacement
Install
Cover
Latch

D2.08 Cover Latch Hinge, Reagent Supply Center #2 Version - 96666-109_1264_1
List/Part Numbers
D2.08 Cover Latch Hinge, Reagent Supply Center #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
reaction carousel front cover and remove
the cover.
Remove
Hinge, Cover
Latch
hinge to the side of the supply center.
cover latch to the latch hinge.
3.
Remove the latch hinge.
Replacement
Install
Cover
Latch
2. Secure the hinge to the side of the supply
center with two (2) screws.

D2.09 Fan, Mini R1,R2, BCRs Version - 96666-109_1275_1
List/Part Numbers
7-202550-01 Fan, Mini, R1, R2, BCRs, 16
D2.09 Fan, Mini R1,R2, BCRs

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Mini BCR
1. Disconnect the plug [1] to the fan.
Fan
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the fan
mounting bracket [2] to the supply center base and
lift out of the processing module.
3. Remove the mini fan filter [3] by pulling the filter out
of filter bracket.
bracket to the fan mounting bracket and remove the
filter bracket.
5. Remove the four (4) screws/nuts securing the
fan [5] to the mounting bracket. [2]
6. Remove the fan. [5]
Replacement
Install
Mini BCR
1. Mount the fan [5] on the fan mounting
Fan
bracket [2] with four (4) screws/nuts.
2. Mount the filter bracket to the fan mounting
bracket with two (2) screws [4] and insert
the filter. [3]
3. Secure the fan mounting bracket [2] to the
supply center base with two (2) screws.
4. Connect the fan plug. [1]
Note
initialization.

3. Verify fan blade is turning and air flow is
toward the reagent bar code reader
window.
D2.10 Filter, mini fan, 2D BCR Version - 96666-109_1286_1
List/Part Numbers
D2.10 Filter, mini fan, 2D BCR

Tools/Materials None
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
the reaction carousel rear cover and remove
the cover.
Remove Mini
BCR Fan
1. Remove the mini fan filter by pulling the
Filter
filter out of the filter bracket.
Replacement
Install
Mini BCR
Fan Filter
window.

D3.01 Refrigerator, NS, c8 Version - 96666-109_1360_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93124-02 Refrigerator, NS, c8
D3.01 Refrigerator, NS, c8

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The refrigerator weighs 55.51 lbs (25.2 kg).
Removal

Preparation
module).
2. Loosen the four (4) screws securing

the right rear cover and remove the
cover.
3. Loosen the four (4) screws securing

the left rear cover and remove the
cover.
4. Open the pump center (center front)

door.
Remove
Front Middle
1. Remove the two (2) upper screws [1]
Access
securing the front middle access
Panel
panel [3] and loosen the two (2)
bottom screws. [2]
2. Remove the front middle access

panel.
Open Fluid
Sense-
1. Remove the screw [1] securing the
AC/DC
fluid sense-AC/DC panel [2] and
Panel
swing the panel out.
Remove
Refrigerator
1. Disconnect the plug REF from the
refrigerator connector INPUT AC100V
and then remove two (2) screws from
the bottom front of the refrigerator.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing

the frame brace from behind
refrigerator and remove the brace.

the two (2) exhaust ducts [3] and
remove the ducts.
4. Disconnect the four (4) cold air

ducts[1] from the top of refrigerator
and the drain tubing [2] from the (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
bottom rear.
5. Remove the two (2) screws from the Note

bottom rear of the refrigerator and Video contains no audio sound.
slide the refrigerator to the rear of the
processing module.
Note
SMD/SH Power Supply cables
may need to be disconnected
to allow removal of
refrigerator.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Note
Video contains no audio sound.
Replacement
Install
Refrigerator
1. Slide the refrigerator to the front of the
processing module from the rear.
2. Install the two (2) screws in the

bottom rear of the refrigerator and
connect the four cold air (4) ducts [1]
and the drain tubing. [2]
3. Install the two (2) exhaust ducts [3] at

the rear of the refrigerator and secure
with four (4) screws.
Note
Reconnect SMD/SH Power
Supply cables if disconnected
in prior steps to allow removal
of refrigerator.
4. Secure the frame brace behind the

refrigerator with four (4) screws.
5. Install the two (2) screws in the

bottom front of the refrigerator and
connect the REF plug to the INPUT
AC100V connector.
Note
Note
Close Fluid
Sense-
1. Close the fluid sense-AC/DC panel
AC/DC
and secure with one (1) screw.
Panel
Install Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access
Access
panel [3] with four (4) screws. [1] [2]
Panels
1. Close the pump center (center front)
door.
2. Install the left and right rear covers

and secure with four (4) screws in
each cover.
Note
be on prior to turning on the
initialization.
4. To change the status of the

processing module and sample
handler from Stopped to Ready,
D3.02 Duct, ref to front of R1, NS Version - 96666-109_1366_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93125-02 Duct, ref to front of R1, NS
D3.02 Duct, ref to front of R1, NS

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Duct
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the
discretion of the Abbott trained repair person.
Replacement

Note
initialization.

D3.03 Duct, ref to front of R2, NS Version - 96666-109_1367_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93126-02 Duct, Ref to front or R2, NS
D3.03 Duct, ref to front of R2, NS

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Duct
Replacement

Note
initialization.

D3.04 Duct, ref to rear of R1, NS Version - 96666-109_1368_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93127-02 Duct, ref to rear of R1, NS
D3.04 Duct, ref to rear of R1, NS

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Duct
Replacement

Note
initialization.

D3.05 Duct, ref to rear of R2, NS Version - 96666-109_1369_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89559-02 Valve,cuv wash pmp-MANIF,WMU(5)
7-93128-02 Duct, ref to rear of R2, NS
D3.05 Duct, ref to rear of R2, NS

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Duct
Replacement

Note
initialization.

D3.06 Filter, air, refrigerator Version - 96666-109_1370_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93129-01 Filter, air, refrigerator
D3.06 Filter, air, refrigerator

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Open the pump center (center front) door.
Remove Front
Middle Access
1. Remove the two (2) upper screws [1] securing
Panel
the front middle access panel [3] and loosen the
two (2) bottom screws. [2]
2. Remove the front middle access panel.
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Remove the screw [1] securing the fluid sense-
Panel
AC/DC panel [2] and swing the panel out.
Remove
Refrigerator Air
1. Loosen the two (2) wing nuts [1] above the filter
Filter
and slide the filter grating up and out of the
bracket.
2. Remove the filter [2] from the grating.
Replacement
Install
Refrigerator
1. Place the filter [2] in place, move the
Air Filter
bracket over the grating and tighten the
wing nuts [1].
Close Fluid
Sense-
1. Close the fluid sense-AC/DC panel and
AC/DC
secure with one (1) screw.
Panel
Install Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access panel [3]
Access
with four (4) screws. [1] [2]
Panels
1. Close the pump center (center front) door.
D3.07 Tubing, drain, refrigerator Version - 96666-109_1371_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93130-01 Tubing, drain, refrigerator
D3.07 Tubing, drain, refrigerator

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System
status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
right rear cover and remove the cover.
Remove
Duct
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to
the discretion of the Abbott trained repair
person.
Replacement

2 G63 - Tubing / Fitting / Filter Verify tubing / fitting / filter is securely installed
and does not obstruct instrument components.
Ensure no leaks and/or bubbles are in the
tubing / fitting / filter.
D3.11 Refrigerator Upper Fan Version - 96666-109_915_1
List/Part Numbers
2-95123-02 Fan, refrigerator, upper, new style
D3.11 Refrigerator Upper Fan

While performing this procedure, if you are exposed to reagents, calibrators or controls, the following statements
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Remove
Refrigerator
1. Remove the refrigerator. (D3.01 Refrigerator, NS,
c8)
Access
Control Unit
1. Remove the five (5) screws [1] securing the
condenser side top panel.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the duct
panel.
3. Remove the condenser side top panel.
4. Open the duct panel.
Remove
AC100V Input
1. Squeeze the two (2) tabs [1] on the AC100V input
Connector
connector (located on the refrigerator front panel)
and push inward to remove it from the refrigerator
casing.
Remove
Cables
1. Disconnect the two (2) upper fans (CN1 and
CN4 [1]) at the top of the control unit.
2. Remove the fan cables from the cable access
hole.
3. Disconnect the six (6) connectors [2] located on
the side of the control unit.
Remove
Control Unit
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1] securing the
control unit to the refrigerator.
2. Remove the control unit.
Remove
Upper Fan
1. Remove the four (4) screws [1] securing the
Assembly
upper fan assembly to the refrigerator.
2. Lift the upper fan assembly out of the refrigerator.
defective fan motor to the fan casing and remove
the fan casing.
Remove
Upper Fan
1. Turn the fan motor over and remove the center
Motor
nut [1].
2. Separate the fan from the motor shaft.
3. Remove the three (3) screws [2] that secure the
defective fan motor to the motor base.
4. Remove the fan motor.
5. Disconnect the fan motor cable from the defective
motor.
Replacement

Install Upper
Fan Motor
1. Connect the fan motor cable connector to the
new fan motor.
2. Orient the motor as shown, and install the three
(3) screws [1] that secure the upper fan motor
to the motor base.
3. Turn the fan motor over and install the fan on
the motor shaft.
Note
The fan has a cut out [2] that aligns the
fan to the flat side of the fan motor
shaft [3].
4. Secure the motor with the center nut [4].
Note
Ensure that the spacers (on each side of
the fan) are installed with the rubber side
toward the fan.
Install Upper
Fan Assembly
1. Install the three (3) screws [2] that secure the
fan to the fan casing.
2. Verify that the fan spins freely without noise or
binding.
3. Place the upper fan assembly in the refrigerator.
4. Install the four (4) screws [1] that secure the
upper fan assembly to the refrigerator.
Install Control
Unit
1. Install the three (3) screws [1] that secure the
control unit to the refrigerator.
Connect Cables
1. Feed the fan cables through the control unit
cable access hole and connect the two (2)
upper fans [1].
2. Connect the six (6) connectors [2] to the side of
the control unit.
Attach AC100V
Input Connector
1. Attach the AC100V input connector [1] to the
refrigerator casing.
Install Access
Panels
1. Install the condenser side top panel and close
the duct panel.
2. Install the five (5) screws [1] that secure the
condenser side top panel.
3. Install the two (2) screws [2] that secure the
duct panel.
Install
Refrigerator
1. Install the refrigerator. (D3.01 Refrigerator, NS,
c8)
E1.01 PROBE Version - 96728-111_392_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-42 Probe
E1.01 PROBE
20 min.
Time Required
#2 Phillips screw driver (optional)

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Warming, or Ready status.
Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to

the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
cover(s) to access the probe(s).
2. Locate the probe to be replaced on the
For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
appropriate pipettor.
System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Note Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Refer to the processing center map
for pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or
ST).
3. Verify the probe is over the wash station.

To move the reagent probe over
the wash station, perform a Startup
on the appropriate module, and go
to Remove Probe.
To move the sample probe over
the wash station, go to Step4.
4. Select the Pipettors category from the

diagnostic screen under the system icon.
5. Initiate diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor
Move to move the sample probe over the
wash station.
Remove
Probe
1. Place an absorbent towel under the probe
tubing connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and
remove the probe tubing from the
probe. [1]
3. Carefully loosen the screw (captive) on
top of the probe clamp until resistance is
felt. [2]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver can be
used to loosen the screw.
Note
Loosening the captive screw
beyond the point of resistance can
cause the clip to fall apart.
4. Push up on the blue button located under

the boom arm. [3]
5. Swing the probe free of the clip, lift the
probe and remove it from the boom
arm. [4]
Replacement
Install
Probe
1. Slide the probe into the boom
arm. [1]
2. Swing the probe to the probe clip
and snap it in place under the
clip. [2]
3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top
of the probe clamp. [3]
Note
A #2 Phillips screwdriver may
be used to tighten the screw.
Do not overtighten as
stripping may result.
4. Connect the probe tubing to the

probe and finger tighten the probe
fitting. [4]
5. To return the sample pipettor to the
home position, complete diagnostic
procedure 1160 Pipettor Move.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to the

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Select As Needed category from the
Operation Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
maintenance screen under the
system icon.
2. Perform maintenance procedure
2130 Flush Fluids, to remove any air
that may be present.
3. Visually check for leaks while
performing the flush.
Note
If leaks are seen, repeat the
installation procedure.
4. Remove the absorbent towel.

5. Close the processing center
cover(s).
4 1117 - STAT Pipettor Calibration
E2.01 Wash Cup, Sample Version - 96666-109_1372_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93131-02 Wash Cup, Sample
7-93131-03 Wash Cup, Sample (RoHS)
E2.01 Wash Cup, Sample

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Remove the sample pipettor head cover.
2. Loosen the screw for the probe ground
wire and disconnect the tubing from the
probe.
3. Loosen the screw securing the sample
probe while removing the probe.
4. Remove the three (3) screws securing
the center front deck and remove the
deck.
Remove
Sample
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the sides
Wash Cup
of the sample wash cup. [2]
sample wash cup to the mounting
bracket.
3. Lift up the wash cup and remove the
drain tubing [3] from the bottom of the
cup.
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Connect the drain tubing [3] to the bottom
Wash
of the sample wash cup.
Cup
2. Secure the wash cup to the mounting
bracket with two (2) screws.
3. Connect the two (2) incoming tubes [1] to
the sides of the sample wash cup. [2]
4. Install the sample probe on the sample
pipettor and secure with a screw.
5. Connect the tubing and secure the ground
wire.
6. Install the sample pipettor head cover.
7. Perform P-109 Sample Wash Cup Position
Alignment.

1. Secure the center front deck with three (3)
screws.
1 1175 - Wash Cup Test
2 1124 - Wash Cup Alignment
E2.02A R1 Wash Cup, Reagent Version - 96666-109_1373_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93132-02 Wash Cup, Reagent
E2.02A R1 Wash Cup, Reagent

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Remove
Reagent
1. Remove the reagent pipettor #1 head cover.
Wash Cup
2. Loosen the screw for the probe ground wire and
R1
disconnect the tubing from the probe.
3. Loosen the screw securing the reagent probe
while removing the probe.
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the reagent
wash cup [1] to the upper frame.
6. Lift up the wash cup and remove the drain
tubing [2] from the bottom of cup.
7. Disconnect the tubing from the side of the reagent
wash cup [3] and pull the tubing through the hole
in the base of the wash cup.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Feed the incoming water tubing [3]
Wash Cup
through the hole in base of the wash cup
R1
and connect to the side of the wash cup.
of the reagent wash cup.
3. Secure the wash cup [1] to the upper
frame with two (2) screws.
4. Install the reagent probe on the reagent
5. Connect tubing and secure ground wire.
6. Perform P-111 Reagent Wash Cup
Alignment.
7. Secure the right center front deck with two
(2) screws.
1. Install reagent pipettor head cover.
E2.02B R2 Wash Cup, Reagent Version - 96666-109_4828_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93132-02 Wash Cup, Reagent
E2.02B R2 Wash Cup, Reagent

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Remove
Reagent
1. Select the Pipettors category from the Diagnostics
Wash Cup
screen under the system icon.
R2
2. Perform 1161 Probe Move to remove the reagent
pipettor #2 head cover.
disconnect the tubing from the probe.
4. Loosen the screw securing the reagent probe while
removing probe.
carousel front cover and remove the cover. Loosen
the two (2) thumbscrews securing the reaction
carousel cover rear and remove the cover.
6. Remove the three (3) screws securing the reagent
wash cup [4] mounting bracket to the upper frame.
7. Lift up the wash cup and remove the drain
tubing [5] from the bottom of cup.
8. Disconnect the tubing [6] from the side of the
reagent wash cup and pull the tubing through the
hole in the base of the wash cup.
9. Remove the two (2) screws securing the wash cup
to the mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Secure the wash cup to the mounting
Wash Cup
R2
2. Feed the incoming water tubing [6]
through the hole in base of the wash cup
and connect to the side of the wash cup.
of the reagent wash cup.
4. Secure the wash cup [4] mounting bracket
to the upper frame with three (3) screws.
5. Install the reagent probe on the reagent
6. Connect tubing and secure ground wire.
7. Perform P-111 Reagent Wash Cup
Alignment.
8. Secure the front and rear reaction
carousel covers with two (2) thumbscrews
and two (2) screws.
1. Install reagent pipettor head cover. Use
Diagnostics procedure 1161 Probe Move
for R2.
E2.03 Wash Cup, Mixer Version - 96666-109_1374_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93133-01 Cup, Mixer Wash
7-93133-02 Cup, Mixer Wash (RoHS)
E2.03 Wash Cup, Mixer

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Note Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
This procedure is for Mixer Wash System status.
Cup #1 and #2.

Access Mixer
Wash Cup
1. Remove the mixers from the mixer
assembly.
the left rear deck and remove the
deck.
the center rear deck and remove the
deck.
mixer deck and remove the deck.
Remove Mixer
Wash Cup (#1 and
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the
#2)
side of the mixer wash cup.
the wash cup [2] to the upper frame.
3. Lift up the wash cup and remove the
drain tubing [3] from the bottom of
the cup.
Replacement
Install Mixer
Wash Cup
(#1 and #2)
of the mixer wash cup.
2. Secure the wash cup [2] to the upper
3. Connect the incoming water tubing [1] to
the side of the mixer wash cup.
4. Install mixers.
5. Perform P-113 Mixer (1 and 2) Wash Cup
Position Alignment.
Install
Covers
1. Install cover(s).
screws.
screws.
4. Secure the mixer deck with one (1)
screw.
1 1123 - Mixer Alignment
E3.01 Manifold, cuv wash to vac Version - 96666-109_1375_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93134-01 Manifold, cuv wash to vac
7-93134-02 Manifold, Cuv Wash to Vac (RoHS)
E3.01 Manifold, cuv wash to vac

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Manifold,
Cuvette Wash to
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] labeled 2 through 6
Vacuum
from the top of the manifold.
2. Disconnect the outlet tubing from the side of
the manifold. [2]
manifold to the frame and remove
manifold. [3]
Replacement
Install
Manifold,
1. Install the manifold [3] on the frame with
Cuvette Wash
two (2) screws.
to Vacuum
2. Connect the outlet tubing [2] to the side
of the manifold.
3. Connect the tubing [1] labeled 2 through
6 to the top of the manifold.
Note

procedure.
3. Select the As Needed category from the
Maintenance screen under the system
icon.
4. Perform 6052 Wash Cuvettes.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Install the right rear cover and secure
1 6052 - Wash Cuvettes Check for leaks
E3.02 Manifold, wash solution Version - 96666-109_1377_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93135-01 Manifold, wash solution
7-93135-02 Manifold, Wash Solution (RoHS)
E3.02 Manifold, wash solution

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Manifold,
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] labeled 2 and 3 from
Wash Solution
the top of the manifold.
Note
This tubing is going to the acid wash and
alkaline wash nozzles.
2. Disconnect the inlet tubing [2] labeled 2 and 3

from the side of the manifold.
manifold to the frame and remove the
manifold. [3]
Replacement
Install
Manifold,
1. Install the manifold [3] on the frame with
Wash
two (2) screws.
Solution
2. Connect the inlet tubing [2] labeled 2 and
3 to the side of the manifold.
3. Connect the tubing [1] labeled 2 and 3 to
Note
This tubing is going to the acid
wash and alkaline wash nozzles.
Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
four (4) screws.
E3.03 Valve, Cuvette Dryer(8) & Suction(7) Nozzles Version - 96666-109_1378_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89561-02 Valve,wash sol pumps & DI fill
2-89561-03 Valve,wash sol pumps and DI fill
E3.03 Valve, Cuvette Dryer(8) & Suction(7) Nozzles

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Manifold,
Cuvette Wash to
1. Disconnect the tubing NC, COM, and NO
Vacuum
from the top of the valve.
2. Disconnect the valve plug [1] from connector
CWV.
valve to the frame and remove the valve.
Replacement
Install
Manifold,
1. Secure the valve to the frame with two
Cuvette Wash
(2) screws.
to Vacuum
2. Connect the valve plug [1] to the
connector CWV.
3. Connect the tubing NC, COM, and NO to
the top of the valve.
Note

procedure.
icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Secure the right rear cover and secure
E3.04 Manifold, DI to cuv wash Version - 96666-109_1379_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93136-01 Manifold, DI to cuv wash
7-93136-02 Manifold, DI to Cuv Wash (RoHS)
E3.04 Manifold, DI to cuv wash

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
2. Open the supply center (left front) and pump
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
the front middle access panel [3] and loosen
the two (2) bottom screws. [2]
Remove DI to
Cuvette Wash
1. Disconnect the tubing labeled 1, 4, 5, & 6 from
Manifold
2. Loosen the hose band [2] at the manifold
inlet.
manifold to the manifold mounting bracket.
4. Disconnect the tubing from the manifold inlet.
5. Remove the manifold.
Replacement
Install DI to
Cuvette Wash
1. Connect the tubing from the valve to the
Manifold
manifold inlet.
2. Attach the manifold to the manifold
mounting bracket with two (2) screws. [3]
3. Tighten the hose band [2] on the
manifold inlet.
4. Connect the tubing [1, 4, 5, 6] to the top
of the manifold.
Note

procedure.
icon.
5. Check for leaks.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
screws.
Install Front
Middle Access
Panels
Close Doors
1. Close the front doors.
E3.05 Valve, DI Water Cuvette Wash Version - 96666-109_1380_1
List/Part Numbers
E3.05 Valve, DI Water Cuvette Wash

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Disconnect
Cuvette Wash Note
Pump Tubing Use absorbent towel to protect pump against
spills.
1. Clamp the outlet tubing [1] (top of cuvette

wash pump).
2. Disconnect the outlet tubing by unscrewing the
elbow fitting. [2]
Disconnect
Tubing from
1. Disconnect the tubing [1, 4, 5, 6] from the top
Assembly
of the manifold.
2. Disconnect the tubing from the elbow on the
top of the valve.
Remove
Assembly
1. Disconnect the valve electrical plug from the
connector 1AESOL. [1]
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] from the front
of the mounting bracket and remove the
assembly from the processing module.
Remove DI
Wash Valve
1. Loosen the hose bands [3] on the NC and
COM fittings.
valve bracket to the valve and manifold
assembly.
3. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the NC and
COM fittings.
valve mounting bracket and remove the
bracket from the valve.
5. Remove the fittings from the NC and COM
ports of the valve. [5]
6. Remove the elbow fitting [6] from the NO port
of the valve.
Replacement
Install DI
Wash Valve
1. Place pipe sealant tape on the threads of
the fittings and install the three (3)
fittings [5] [6] in the valve.
2. Attach the valve to the valve mounting
bracket with two (2) screws. [4]
3. Connect the tubing [1] to the NC and
COM fittings.
4. Attach the valve with the bracket to the
valve and manifold assembly with two (2)
screws. [2]
5. Tighten the hose bands [3] on the NC
and COM fittings.
Replace the
Valve and
1. Secure the valve and the manifold
Manifold
assembly to the frame with two (2)
Assembly
screws. [2]
2. Connect the valve electrical plug [1] to
connector 1AESOL.
Connect
Tubing
1. Connect the tubing from the "Y" fitting to
the elbow on the top of the valve.
2. Connect the tubing labeled 1, 4, 5, & 6 to
3. Connect the tubing to the top of the
cuvette wash pump and remove the
clamp.
Note

procedure.
icon.
5. Check for leaks.
Install Panel
Above ICT
1. Secure the access panel [1] located
Aspiration
above the ICT aspiration pump with five
Pump
(5) screws.
Install Front
Middle Access
Panels
Close Doors
E3.06 Motor, valve, bath drain Version - 96666-109_1381_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89558-02 Motor, valve, heater, bath drain
E3.06 Motor, valve, bath drain
Time Required 39
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Drain the water bath (1101 Robotics Test
Tool - Option 11).
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Remove Motor
Valve, Bath Drain
1. Loosen the hose band [1] on the motor valve
top fitting.
2. Disconnect the tubing [2] from the top and
bottom of the valve.
3. Disconnect the valve electrical plug [3] from
the connector MTRV.
4. Remove the two (2) screws from the upper
clamp [4] and remove the clamp.
5. Remove the two (2) screws from the lower
clamp [5] and remove the clamp and valve.
6. Remove the valve. [7]
7. Remove the fittings [6] from the top and
Replacement
Install Motor
Valve, Bath
1. Place the pipe sealant tape on the
Drain
threads of the fittings and install the two
(2) fittings [6] in the valve.
2. Install the valve [7] in the processing
module and secure with upper [4] and
lower [5] clamps (two (2) screws per
clamp).
3. Connect the tubing [2] to the top and
4. Tighten the hose band [1] on fitting on
the top of the motor valve.
5. Connect the valve electrical plug [3] to
connector MTRV.
Note

procedure.
icon.
4. Perform 2134 Change Water Bath.
5. Check for leaks.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
screws.
Install Front
Middle Access
Panels
Close Doors
1 2134 - Change Water Bath Check for leaks
E3.07 Manifold, hi cont waste Version - 96666-109_1382_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204749-01 Manifold, High Conc Waste
E3.07 Manifold, hi cont waste

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Hi
Concentration
1. Loosen the hose band [1] on the tubing [4]
Waste Manifold
coming from the Hi concentration waste pump.
bottom of the manifold.
manifold [3] to the frame.
4. Disconnect the tubing [4] from the side of the
manifold.
5. Remove the manifold.
Replacement
Install Hi
Concentration
1. Connect the tubing [4] from the waste
Waste
pump to the side of the manifold.
Manifold
2. Secure the manifold [3] to the frame with
two (2) screws.
3. Connect the tubing [2] to the top and
bottom of the manifold.
4. Tighten the hose band [1] on the side
fitting of the manifold.
Note
procedure.
icon.
5. Check for leaks.
E3.12 Manifold, water bath Version - 96666-109_1388_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93140-01 Manifold, water bath
7-93140-02 Manifold, Water Bath (RoHS)
E3.12 Manifold, water bath

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
Tool - Option 11).
Remove Vacuum
Pumps and Brackets
1. Disconnect the power cable CWVP to the
vacuum pumps.
2. Mark the tubing for the in port [1] and the
out port. [2]
3. Remove the tubing from the vacuum
pumps.
4. Remove the three (3) screws [3] securing
each vacuum pump mounting bracket to
the processing module.
Remove Rear Air

Duct to Reagent
1. Remove the right rear duct from the
Supply Center #2
refrigerator.
2. Remove the duct from the R2 Reagent
Supply Center.
Remove Water Bath

Manifold
1. Mark all inlet and outlet tubing [2] as to the
position on the manifold.
2. Loosen the hose band [1] on the tubing
and remove the tubing (7 places).
manifold [3] to the frame and remove
manifold from the processing module.
Replacement
Install Water
Bath Manifold
1. Secure the manifold [3] to the frame
2. Connect the tubing [2] to the manifold.
3. Tighten the hose bands. [1]
Install Rear Air
Duct to Reagent
1. Align the ends of the duct with the R2
Supply Center #2
reagent supply center and the
refrigerator.
2. Push the duct into place.
Install Vacuum
Pumps and
1. Place each vacuum pump, with the
Mounting
mounting bracket, in the processing
Brackets
module and secure with three (3)
screws. [3]
2. Connect the tubing [1] [2] to the
vacuum pumps and connect the power
cable CWVP.

Note
must be on prior to turning on
procedure.
3. Select the As Needed category from
the Maintenance screen under the
system icon.
5. Check for leaks.
7. Install the rear covers.
1 3526 - Check Water Bath Temperature
E3.13 Band, Hose, Large Version - 96666-109_1389_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89018-02 Band, Hose, Small
2-89019-02 Band, hose, Large
E3.13 Band, Hose, Large
Time Required 5 min

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Remove Large Hose

Band
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of the Abbott trained repair
person.
Replacement
Prepare for Operation

1. Check for leaks.
1 G62 - Hardware Installation Verify hardware is securely installed.
Check for leaks as appropriate.
E3.14 Band, Hose, Metal Version - 96666-109_1390_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89020-02 Band, Hose, Metal
E3.14 Band, Hose, Metal
Time Required 5 min

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Remove Large Hose

Band
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of the Abbott trained repair
person.
Replacement

1. Check for leaks.
E4.01 Pump, wash solution Version - 96666-109_1391_1
List/Part Numbers
7-206731-01 Pump, Wash Solution
7-93141-01 Pump, wash solution
7-93141-02 Pump, Wash Solution (RoHS)
E4.01 Pump, wash solution

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Open the supply center (left front) door.
Remove
Pump, Note
Wash Use absorbent material to protect pump against
Solution spills.
1. Clamp the tubing [1] marked L and R going to the

side ports of the check valves on the 1mL syringes.
2. Unscrew this tubing from the side ports of the

check valves.
3. Unscrew the tubing [2] from the top of the small
syringe unit.
4. Remove the two (2) screws [3] securing the pump
to the plate.
5. Slide the pump out until the connectors (DTPM and
DTPS) are accessible.
Note
These cables tend to be short and there is
not a service loop. Wires in plug DTPS are
small and can be damaged easily.
6. Unplug plugs DTPM and DTPS from the

connectors.
7. Remove the pump from the processing module.
Replacement
Install
Pump,
1. Slide the pump in the processing module far
Wash
enough to allow access to the plugs.
Solution
2. Connect the plugs DTPS and DTPM to the
connectors on the connector plate.
3. Secure the pump to the frame with two (2)
screws. [3]
4. Connect the tubing [2] labeled 2 to the left top
of the small syringe and connect the tubing [2]
labeled 3 to the right top of the small syringe.
5. Connect the tubing [1] marked L and R to the
side ports of the check valves on the 1mL
syringes and remove the clamps.
Note

Maintenance screen under the system icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close supply center (left front) door.
E4.02 Photo Sensors, Wash Solution Pump Version - 96666-109_1392_1
List/Part Numbers
E4.02 Photo Sensors, Wash Solution Pump

Tools/Materials Not Assessed
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This procedure is for both sensors on the Wash Subsection: System status.
Solution Pump.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Pump, Wash Note
Solution Use absorbent material to protect pump against
spills.
1. Clamp the tubing marked L and R [1] going to

the side ports of the check valves on the 1mL
syringes.
2. Unscrew this tubing from the side ports of the
check valves.
3. Unscrew the tubing [2] from the top of the small
syringe unit.
pump to the plate.
5. Slide the pump out until the connectors (DTPM
and DTPS) are accessible.
Note
not a service loop. Wires in plug DTPS
are small and can be damaged easily.
6. Unplug plugs DTPM and DTPS from the

connectors.
Remove
Sensor, Photo,
Multiple Use
syringe cover [1] and remove the cover.
2. Remove both 1mL syringes. [2]
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the metal
cover [3] over the drive area of the assembly
and remove the cover.
Note
There are spacers behind the cover.
4. Disconnect the sensor (up or down) cable.

bracket [4] and remove the bracket with the
sensor.
6. Remove the screw [5] securing the sensor and
remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Sensor,
1. Secure the sensor to the sensor bracket with
Photo,
one (1) screw. [5]
Multiple
2. Install the sensor bracket [4] on the pump
Use
assembly and secure with two (2) screws.
3. Connect the sensor (up or down) cable to the
sensor.
4. Install the metal cover [3] with spacers
between the cover and the pump assembly
and secure with two (2) screws.
5. Install both of the 1mL syringes [2] and
secure the syringe cover [1] with two (2)
thumbscrews.
Install
Pump,
1. Slide the pump in the processing module far
Wash
enough to allow access to the plugs.
Solution
2. Connect the plugs DTPS and DTPM to the
connectors on the connector plate.
screws. [3]
4. Connect the tubing [2] labeled 2 to the left
top of the small syringe and connect the
tubing [2] labeled 3 to the right top of the
small syringe.
5. Connect the tubing marked L and R [1] to the
side ports of the check valves on the 1mL
syringes and remove the clamps.

Note
be on prior to turning on the
initialization.

5. Check for leaks.
E4.03 1ml Syringe Version - 96666-109_1393_1
E4.03 1mL Syringe
Note
1 G1 - Verify the Repair according to released
Operation and Service Procedures.
E4.04 Check Valve, wash solution Version - 96666-109_1394_1
E4.04 Check Valve, wash solution
Note
E4.07 Seal, water line syringe Version - 96666-109_1397_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89347-02 Seal, water line syringe
E4.07 Seal, water line syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
Preparation
1. Open supply center (left front) door.
Remove
Small Note
Syringe Unit Use absorbent material to protect the
wash solution pump against spills.
1. Disconnect tubing [1] labeled 2 and 3

from the top and the front of the small
syringe unit.
2. Loosen the thumbscrew [2] securing the
small syringe unit to the wash solution
pump.
3. While removing the small syringe unit [3],
pull the unit forward and lift up.
Remove
Seals
1. Remove seal [1] from syringe.
Replacement
Install
Seals
1. Place seal [1] in syringe.
Install the
Small
1. While installing the small syringe unit [3] use
Syringe
a down and to the rear movement to
Unit
engage syringe plungers into drive
mechanism.
2. Secure the small syringe unit [3] to the
wash solution pump with the
thumbscrew. [2]
3. Connect the tubing [1] to the front of the
small syringe.
4. Connect the tubing [1] to the top of the
small syringe.
Note
Tubing labeled 2 is to the left and
tubing labeled 3 is to the right.

4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the door.
E4.08 Syringe Assy, wash solution Version - 96666-109_1399_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93143-01 Syringe Assy, wash solution
E4.08 Syringe Assy, wash solution

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
Preparation
1. Open supply center (left front) door.
Remove
Small Note
Syringe Unit Use absorbent material to protect the
wash solution pump against spills.
1. Disconnect tubing [1] labeled 2 and 3

from the top and the front of the small
syringe unit.
2. Loosen the thumbscrew [2] securing the
small syringe unit to the wash solution
pump.
3. While removing the small syringe unit [3],
pull the unit forward and lift up.
Replacement
Install the
Small
1. While installing the small syringe unit [3] use
Syringe
a down and to the rear movement to
Unit
engage syringe plungers into drive
mechanism.
2. Secure the small syringe unit [3] to the
wash solution pump with the
thumbscrew. [2]
3. Connect the tubing [1] to the front of the
small syringe.
4. Connect the tubing [1] to the top of the
small syringe.
Note
Tubing labeled 2 is to the left and
tubing labeled 3 is to the right.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the door.
E4.09 O-ring, sample/wash syringe Version - 96666-109_1400_1
E4.09 O-ring, sample/wash syringe
Note
E4.10 Seal, sample/washsyr seal tip # 2 Version - 96666-109_1401_1
E4.10 Seal, sample/wash syr seal tip#2
Note
E4.11 Seal, sample/washsyr seal tip # 1 Version - 96666-109_1402_1
E4.11 Seal, sample/wash syr seal tip#1
Note
E5.01 Pump, ICT Reference Version - 96666-109_1405_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89294-02 Pump, ICT ref solution
7-204101-01 Pump, ICT ref solution (RoHS)
7-206732-01 Pump, ICT Ref Solution
E5.01 Pump, ICT Reference

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Pump, ICT Note
Reference Use absorbent material to protect pump against
spills.
1. Unscrew the check valves [1] from the top of the

1 mL syringes (tubing labeled 13-left, 12-right).
to the plate.
3. Slide the pump [3] out of the processing module
until the connectors (ISEMM and ISEMS) are
accessible.
Note
not a service loop. Wires to plug ISEMS are
small and can be damaged easily.
4. Unplug plugs ISEMM and ISEMS from the

connectors.
5. Remove the pump [3] from the processing module.
Replacement
Install
Pump,
1. Slide the pump [3] in the processing
ICT
module far enough to allow access to the
Reference
plugs.
2. Connect the plugs ISEMM and ISEMS to
the connectors on the connector plate.
screws. [2]
4. Connect the check valves [1] (tubing
labeled 13-left, 12-right) to top of the 1 mL
syringes.

Note
initialization.

icon.
4. Perform 2131 Flush ICT Cup.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the supply center (left front) door.
1 2131 - Flush ICT Cup Check for leaks
E5.02 Photo Sensor, ICT Reference Pump Version - 96666-109_1406_1
List/Part Numbers
E5.02 Photo Sensor, ICT Reference Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Pump, ICT Note
Reference Use absorbent material to protect pump against
spills.
1. Unscrew the check valves [1] from the top of the

1 mL syringes (tubing labeled 13-left, 12-right).
pump to the plate.
until the connectors (ISEMM and ISEMS) are
accessible.
Note
not a service loop. Wires to plug ISEMS
are small and can be damaged easily.
4. Unplug plugs ISEMM and ISEMS from the

connectors.
5. Remove the pump [3] from the processing
module.
Remove
Sensor, Photo,
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the syringe
Multiple Use
cover and remove the cover. [1]
2. Remove both of the1 mL syringes. [2]
syringe block and remove the block.
4. Disconnect the sensor cable DOWN.
5. Remove the screw securing the sensor and
remove the sensor. [4]
Replacement
Install
Sensor,
1. Secure the sensor [4] to the pump frame
Photo,
with one (1) screw.
Multiple Use
2. Connect the sensor cable DOWN to the
sensor.
3. Install the syringe block and secure with
four (4) screws. [3]
4. Install both of the1 mL syringes [2] and
secure the syringe cover with two (2)
screws. [1]
Install
Pump, ICT
Reference
plugs.
2. Connect the plugs ISEMM and ISEMS to
the connectors on the connector plate.
3. Secure the pump to the frame with two
(2) screws. [2]
4. Connect the check valves [1] (tubing
labeled 13-left, 12-right) to top of the
1 mL syringes.
Note

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close supply center (left front) door.
E5.06 1 mL Syringe Version - 96666-109_1411_1
E5.06 1 mL Syringe
Note
E6.01 Pump, ICT Aspiration Version - 96666-109_1412_1
List/Part Numbers
7-206733-01 Pump, ICT Aspiration w Pinch Valve
7-93145-01 Pump, ICT Aspiration
7-93145-02 Pump, ICT Aspiration w Pinch Valve
7-93145-03 Pump, ICT Aspiration w Pinch Valve (RoHS)
E6.01 Pump, ICT Aspiration

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Pump, ICT Note
Aspiration Use absorbent material to protect pump against
spills.
1. Unscrew the check valve [1] from the 1 mL

syringe on the left.
2. Remove the tubing [2] from the NC and NO ports
of the ICT Aspiration Pump valve.
pump [4] to the plate.
until the connectors are accessible.
5. Unplug plugs ISEV, IESS, and IESM from the
connectors.
module.
Replacement
Install
Pump,
ICT
Aspiration
plugs.
2. Connect the plugs ISEV, IESS and IESM
to the connectors on the connector plate.
3. Secure the aspiration pump to the frame
with two (2) screws. [3]
4. Connect the tubing [2] to NC and NO ports
of the ICT valve.
5. Connect the check valve [1] with tubing 14
to the top of the 1 mL syringe on the left.

Note
initialization.

icon.
4. Perform 6063 Flush ICT Module.
5. Check for leaks.
1 6063 - Flush ICT Module Check for leaks.
E6.02 Photo Sensors, ICT Aspiration Pump Version - 96666-109_1413_1
List/Part Numbers
E6.02 Photo Sensors, ICT Aspiration Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump,
ICT Aspiration Note
Use absorbent material to protect pump against
spills.

2. Remove the tubing [2] from the NC and NO
ports of the ICT Aspiration Pump valve.
connectors.
module.
Remove
Sensor, Photo,
Multiple Use
bracket [1] for the sensor being removed.
2. Disconnect the sensor cable. (up, down)
3. Remove the screw [2] securing the sensor and
remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Sensor,
1. Secure the sensor to the sensor bracket
Photo,
with one (1) screw. [2]
Multiple Use
2. Connect the sensor cable to the sensor.
(up, down)
3. Secure the sensor bracket [1] to the
pump with two (2) screws.
Install
Pump, ICT
Aspiration
plugs.
4. Connect the tubing [2] to NC and NO
ports of the ICT valve.
5. Connect the check valve [1] with tubing
14 to the top of the 1 mL syringe on the
left.
Note

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
E6.03 Valve, ICT Aspiration Pump Version - 96666-109_1414_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89556-02 Valve, ICT aspiration pump
E6.03 Valve, ICT Aspiration Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump,
ICT Aspiration Note
Use absorbent material to protect pump against
spills.

2. Remove the tubing [2] from the NC and NO
ports of the ICT Aspiration Pump valve.
connectors.
module.
Remove Valve,
ICT Aspiration
1. Remove the tubing [1] from the COM port of the
Pump
valve.
2. Disconnect the ISEV connector from the
connector plate.
3. Remove the retaining nut [2] on the valve and
remove the valve [3] from the pump assembly.
Replacement
Install
Valve, ICT
1. Place the valve [3] in the hole for the
Aspiration
valve on the ICT aspiration pump
Pump
assembly and secure with the retaining
nut. [2]
2. Insert the connector ISEV in the
connector plate.
3. Connect the tubing [1] from the 1 mL
aspiration syringe to the COM port of the
valve.
Install
Pump, ICT
Aspiration
plugs.
4. Connect the tubing [2] to NC and NO
ports of the ICT valve.
5. Connect the check valve [1] with tubing
14 to the top of the 1 mL syringe on the
left.
Note
icon.
5. Check for leaks.
E7.01 Pump, probe wash, bellows type Version - 96666-109_1419_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89304-02 Pump,probe wash,bellows type
2-89304-03 Pump, probe wash, bellows type
7-204102-01 Pump, Probe Wash, Bellows Type (RoHS)
E7.01 Pump, probe wash, bellows type

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove Inner
Probe Wash Note
Pump Use absorbent material to protect the pump
against spills.
1. Clamp the inlet and outlet tubing. [1]

2. Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubing by
unscrewing the elbow fittings. [2]
pump to the processing module base.
4. Pull the pump [4] forward until the connectors
are accessible.
5. Disconnect the cables PRWPM and PRWS.
module.
Replacement
Install
Inner
1. Connect the cables PRWPM and PRWS.
Probe
2. Install the pump [4] in the processing module and
Wash
secure with two (2) screws. [3]
Pump
3. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing to the pump by
reconnecting the elbow fittings. [2]
Note
Ensure poppet valves and o-rings are properly
oriented. The upper poppet points toward the
bellows; the lower poppet points away from the
bellows; the o-ring is placed between the
poppet and the elbow fittings.
4. Remove clamps from the inlet and outlet tubing. [1]

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
4. Perform 6053 Probe Water Wash.
5. Check for leaks.
1 6053 - Probe Water Wash Check for leaks
E7.02 Photo Sensors, Probe Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_932_1
List/Part Numbers
E7.02 Photo Sensors, Probe Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove Inner
Probe Wash Note
against spills.

pump to the processing module base.
4. Pull the pump [4] forward until the connectors
are accessible.
5. Disconnect the cables PRWPM and PRWS.
Remove
Photo Sensor
bracket [1] to the pump and remove the bracket.
2. Disconnect the sensor cable UP, DOWN.
3. Remove the screws [2,3] securing the sensor to
the bracket and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Install the sensor on the sensor bracket with one (1)
Sensor
screw [2,3] each.
2. Connect the sensor cable UP, DOWN.
3. Attach the sensor bracket [1] to the pump with two (2)
screws.
Install
Inner
1. Connect the cables PRWPM and PRWS.
Probe
Wash
Pump
3. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing to the pump by
reconnecting the elbow fittings. [2]
Note

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
5. Check for leaks.
E7.03 Cover Probe Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_933_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89142-02 Cover,Bellows pump probe wash
E7.03 Cover Probe Wash Pump
Time Required 5 min

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Open the supply center (left front)
and pump center (center front)
doors.
Remove
Bellows Pump
1. Remove the two (2) screws from
Cover
the front of the cover.
2. Lift the cover from the bellows
pump.
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Install the cover on the bellows pump and
Pump
secure with two (2) screws.
Cover

E7.04 Complete Bellows Set, Probe Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_934_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89055-02 Bellows set,incl rod & fitting
E7.04 Complete Bellows Set, Probe Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be
in Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation
doors.
VIDEO
Remove Bellows Note
Pump Cover & Video contains no audio sound.
bellow set Note
Pump does not have to be
removed from instrument to
remove complete bellows set;
Pump shown removed for
demonstration purposes only.
Remove Bellows
Pump Cover
and Remove
Bellows Set
pump.
Note
Use absorbent materials to
protect the pump from
spills.
3. Clamp the inlet and outlet tubing.

[1]
4. Disconnect the inlet and outlet

tubing by unscrewing the elbows.
[2]
5. Remove the two (2) screws

securing the gear guard [3] and
remove guard.
6. Remove the screw [4] from the

end of the bellows rod and
remove the insert and the thrust
washer. [5]
7. Remove the two (2) screws [6]

from the top of the bellows set [7]
and remove the bellows set from
the pump.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Bellows Video contains no audio sound.
Set
Install
Bellows Note
Set and A thrust washer is also present and
Cover installed between pump and bellows set.
If removed during procedure, ensure to
reinstall prior to installing the bellows
set.
1. Place the bellows set [7] in the pump by

placing the rod in the mounting position
and securing the top of the bellows set
to the top of pump with two (2)
screws. [6]
2. Place the thrust washer and the

insert [5] in the end of the bellows rod
and secure with one (1) screw. [4]
3. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing to the
pump by reconnecting the elbow
fittings. [2]
4. Remove the clamps from the inlet and

outlet tubing. [1]
5. Secure gear guard [3] to pump with four

(4) screws.
6. Install the cover on the bellows pump


procedure.

icon.
4. Check for leaks.
E7.05 Valve, Poppet set Version - 96666-109_935_1
E7.05 Valve, Poppet set
Note
E7.06 Bellow, Probe Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_936_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89054-02 Bellows, bellows only
E7.06 Bellow, Probe Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
>
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Install the new O-ring [5] inside of the
bellows assembly [4].
2. Screw the bellows [3] in the top of the

bellows assembly. [4]
3. Attach the bellows assembly to the

pump with two (2) screws. [2]
4. Attach the bellows to the rod with the

retaining ring. [1]

outlet tubing.
Install
Bellows
Pump
Cover
Prepare
for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
1. To change the status of the processing System Operations Manual,
Operation
module and sample handler from Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup and shutdown.
procedure.

system icon.
4. Check for leaks.

E7.07 L-bow fitting, Probe Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_937_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89191-02 Fitting, elbow, bellows pump, in/out
E7.07 L-bow fitting, Probe Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
doors.
Remove
Bellows L-Bow Note
Fitting Use absorbent towel to protect the
pump from spills.
1. Clamp the inlet and outlet

tubing. [1]
2. Remove the tubing from the
elbow. [2]
3. Unscrew the elbow fittings from the
bellows. [3]
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Screw the elbow fittings to the bellows. [3]
L-Bow
Fitting Note
2. Attach the tubing [1] to the elbow.[2]

and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
4. Check for leaks.
E8.01 Pump, bellows, high conc. waste Version - 96666-109_938_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89301-02 Pump,bellows,high conc waste
7-204103-01 Pump, Bellows, High Conc Waste (RoHS)
E8.01 Pump, bellows, high conc. waste

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
H.C. Waste Note
against spills.

to the processing module base.
4. Pull the pump [4] forward until the connectors are
accessible.
5. Disconnect the cables HCWPM and HCWPS.
module.
Replacement
Install H.C.
Waste Pump
1. Connect the cables HCWPM and HCWPS.
Connect H.C.
Waste Pump
1. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing [1] to the
Tubing and
pump by reconnecting the elbow fittings. [2]
Remove
Clamps Note
Ensure poppet valves and o-rings are
properly oriented. The upper poppet points
toward the bellows; the lower poppet
points away from the bellows; the o-ring is
placed between the poppet and the elbow
fittings.
2. Remove clamps from the inlet and outlet

tubing. [1]

Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
Note and shutdown.
The system control center power must be
ON prior to turning on the processing
4. Perform 6052 Wash Cuvettes Test.
5. Perform Check for leaks.
E8.02 Photo Sensors, High Conc. Waste Pump Version - 96666-109_939_1
List/Part Numbers
E8.02 Photo Sensors, High Conc. Waste Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
H.C. Waste Note
against spills.

to the processing module base.
4. Pull the pump [4] forward until the connectors are
accessible.
5. Disconnect the cables HCWPM and HCWPS.
module.
Remove
Photo
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the H.C.
Sensor
pump cover [1] and remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable. [up/down]
bracket and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install Photo
Sensor
1. Secure the sensor to the sensor bracket with one
(1) screw. [3]
2. Connect the sensor cable. [up/down]
3. Secure the sensor bracket [2] to the pump with
two (2) screws.
4. Secure the H.C. pump cover [1] with two (2)
screws.
Install H.C.
Waste Pump
1. Connect the cables HCWPM and HCWPS.
Connect H.C.
Waste Pump
Tubing and
Remove
Clamps Note
fittings.

tubing. [1]

Note and shutdown.

4. Perform 6052 Wash Cuvettes Test.
5. Check for leaks.
E8.03 Cover, High Conc. Waste Pump Version - 96666-109_940_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89141-02 Cover,Bell pump HC & cuv wash
E8.03 Cover, High Conc. Waste Pump
Time Required 5 min

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
doors.
Remove
Bellows Pump
Cover
pump.
Replacement
Install
Bellows
Pump
Cover

1 G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
E8.04 Complete Bellows Set, High Conc. Waste Pump Version - 96666-109_941_1
List/Part Numbers
E8.04 Complete Bellows Set, High Conc. Waste Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Bellows
1. Remove the two (2) screws from the front of
Pump Cover
the cover.
2. Remove the cover from the bellows pump.
Remove
Inlet/Outlet Note
Tubing Use absorbent materials to protect the pump
from spills.

2. Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubing from
the elbows.
Remove
Bellows Set
1. Remove the boss [1] by loosing the two (2)
set screws.
2. Remove the thrust washer. [2]
3. Remove the two (2) screws [3] from the top
of bellows set and remove the bellows set [4]
from pump.
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Place the bellows set [4] in the pump by placing
Set
the rod on motor shaft and securing the top of
the bellows set to the top of pump with two (2)
screws. [3]
2. Place the thrust washer [2] on the shaft, install
the boss [1], and tighten two (2) set screws.
3. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing to the elbows.
4. Remove the clamps from the inlet and outlet
tubing.
Install
Bellows
1. Install the cover on the bellows pump and secure
Pump
Cover

4. Check for leaks.
Note
E8.06 Bellow, High Conc. Waste Pump Version - 96666-109_944_2
List/Part Numbers
E8.06 Bellow, High Conc. Waste Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
and pump center (center front) doors.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Pump Cover Video contains no audio sound.
and Bellows Note
Do Not Remove Pump Assembly.
Pump shown removed from
instrument for ease of demonstrating
bellows removal and replacement
steps.
Remove
Pump Cover Note
and Bellows Use absorbent materials to protect
the pump from spills.
2. Remove the two (2) screws from the

front of the cover and remove cover.
3. Unscrew the retaining ring [1] from

the bottom of the bellows.
4. Remove the two (2) screws [2] from

the top of the bellows assembly.
5. Remove the bellows assembly and

unscrew the bellows [4] from the top
of the bellows assembly. [3]
6. Remove the O-ring [5] from the

inside of the bellows assembly.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
and Pump
Cover
Install
Bellows
1. Install the O-ring [5] inside the top of
and Pump
the bellows assembly.[3]
Cover
Note
Ensure cap [5] (bottom picture)
is inserted in bellows prior to
screwing bellows in top of
bellows assembly.
2. Screw the bellows in top of the

bellows [4] assembly. [3]


retaining ring. [1]

outlet tubing.


procedure.

system icon.
4. Check for leaks.
E8.07 L-bow Fitting, High Conc. Waste Pump Version - 96666-109_945_1
List/Part Numbers
E8.07 L-bow Fitting, High Conc. Waste Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
doors.
Remove
Bellows L-Bow Note
pump from spills.

tubing. [1]
elbow. [2]
bellows. [3]
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Screw the elbow fittings [2] to the bellows. [3]
L-Bow
Fitting Note
2. Attach the tubing [1] to the elbow


and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
4. Check for leaks.
E9.01 Pump, Cuvette Wash, bellows Version - 96666-109_946_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93146-01 Pump, Cuvette Wash, bellows
7-93146-02 Pump, Cuvette Wash, Bellows (RoHS)
E9.01 Pump, Cuvette Wash, bellows

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Cuvette Note
Wash Pump Use absorbent material to protect the pump
against spills.

pump [4] to the processing module base.
4. Pull the pump forward until the connectors are
accessible.
5. Disconnect the cables WSPM and WSPS.
Replacement
Install Cuvette
Wash Pump
1. Connect the cables WSPM and WSPS.
Connect
Cuvette Wash
Pump Tubing
and Remove
Clamps Note
fittings.

tubing. [1]

Note and shutdown.

5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
E9.02 Photo Sensors, Cuvette Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_947_1
List/Part Numbers
E9.02 Photo Sensors, Cuvette Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Cuvette Note
Wash Pump Use absorbent material to protect the pump
against spills.

pump [4] to the processing module base.
4. Pull the pump forward until the connectors are
accessible.
5. Disconnect the cables WSPM and WSPS.
Remove
Photo
Sensor
3. Disconnect the sensor cable(s) (DOWN, UP).
bracket and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install Photo
Sensor
1. Install the sensor on the sensor bracket with one
(1) screw.[3]
2. Connect the sensor cable(s) (DOWN, UP).
3. Attach the sensor bracket to the pump with two
(2) screws.
4. Secure the pump cover with two (2) screws.
Install Cuvette
Wash Pump
1. Connect the cables WSPM and WSPS.
Connect
Cuvette Wash
Pump Tubing
and Remove
Clamps Note
fittings.
2. Remove clamps from the inlet and outlet tubing.

Note and shutdown.

5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
E9.03 Cover, Bellows Pump Version - 96666-109_948_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89141-02 Cover,Bell pump HC & cuv wash
2-89142-02 Cover,Bellows pump probe wash
E9.03 Cover, Bellows Pump
Time Required 5 min

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
doors.
Remove
Bellows Pump
Cover
pump.
Replacement
Install
Bellows
Pump
Cover
open/close freely.
E9.04 Complete Bellows Set, Cuvette Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_949_1
List/Part Numbers
E9.04 Complete Bellows Set, Cuvette Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Bellows
Pump Cover
the cover.
2. Remove the cover from the bellows pump.
Remove
Inlet/Outlet Note
Tubing Use absorbent materials to protect the pump
from spills.

2. Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubing from
the elbows.
Remove
Bellows Set
1. Remove the boss [1] by loosing the two (2)
set screws.
2. Remove the thrust washer. [2]
of bellows set and remove the bellows set [4]
from pump.
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Place the bellows set [4] in the pump by placing
Set
the rod on motor shaft and securing the top of
the bellows set to the top of pump with two (2)
screws. [3]
2. Place the thrust washer [2] on the shaft, install
the boss [1], and tighten two (2) set screws.
3. Connect the inlet and outlet tubing to the elbows.
4. Remove the clamps from the inlet and outlet
tubing.
Install
Bellows
1. Install the cover on the bellows pump and secure
Pump
Cover
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
Note
E9.06 Bellow, Cuvette Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_951_2
List/Part Numbers
E9.06 Bellow, Cuvette Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
and pump center (center front) doors.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Pump Cover Video contains no audio sound.
and Bellows Note
Do Not Remove Pump Assembly.
Pump shown removed from
instrument for ease of demonstrating
bellows removal and replacement
steps.
Remove
Pump Cover Note
and Bellows Use absorbent materials to protect
the pump from spills.
2. Remove the two (2) screws from the

front of the cover and remove cover.
3. Unscrew the retaining ring [1] from

the bottom of the bellows.
4. Remove the two (2) screws [2] from

the top of the bellows.
5. Remove the bellows assembly and

unscrew the bellows [4] from the top
of the bellows assembly. [3]
6. Remove the O-ring [5] from the

inside of the bellows assembly.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
and Pump
Cover
Install
Bellows
1. Install the O-ring [5] inside the top of
and Pump
the bellows assembly. [3]
Cover
Note
Ensure cap [5] (bottom picture)
is inserted in bellows prior to
screwing bellows in top of
bellows assembly.
2. Screw the bellows [4] in top of the

bellows assembly. [3]


retaining ring. [1]

outlet tubing.


procedure.

system icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
E9.07 L-Bow Fitting, Cuvette Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_952_1
List/Part Numbers
E9.07 L-Bow Fitting, Cuvette Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
doors.
Remove
Bellows L-Bow Note
pump from spills.

tubing. [1]
2. Loosen the hose bands. [4]
elbow. [2]
bellows. [3]
Replacement
Install
Bellows
1. Screw the elbow fittings [2] to the bellows. [3]
L-Bow
Fitting Note
2. Attach the tubing [1] to the elbow.[2]

and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
4. Check for leaks.
F1.01 Acid, Alkaline, & ICT™ Reference Valves Version - 96666-109_954_3
List/Part Numbers
2-89561-02 Valve,wash sol pumps & DI fill
2-89561-03 Valve,wash sol pumps and DI fill
F1.01 Acid, Alkaline, & ICT Reference Valves
25 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials Absorbent towels
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Note Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
This procedure is for the four (4)
valves in the bulk solution
assembly

Preparation
1. Power OFF the c8000 processing
module (use the main circuit
breaker located at the rear of the
processing module).
door.
3. Remove the tubing from the ICT

reference bottle, alkaline wash
bottle, and acid wash bottle. Wrap
each tube with an absorbent towel.
4. Remove the ICT reference bottle,
alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash
bottle from the weight sensor
platforms.
Remove Wash
Solution Valve
(for serial
appropriate valve (the valve being
numbers
removed).
c800245 and
above) 2. Release the wires from the cable
clamp. Gently pull on the
appropriate wires until the
connector[1] is accessible.
Note
If the connector is jammed and
cannot be pulled through the
opening, remove the Sample
Syringe Drive to gain access to the (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
connector. Refer to R&R G1.01 in
the Service Manual for the removal
and installation of the Sample
Note
Syringe Drive.
3. Disconnect the appropriate

connector[1] for the valve that is
being removed.
4. Remove the left screw from the

mounting plate for the valve and
loosen the right screw.
5. Slide the valve down and remove

from the processing module.
Remove Wash
Solution Valve
(for serial
appropriate valve (the valve being
numbers
removed). [1]
c800244 and
below) 2. Unplug the appropriate plug [3]
(ALK1, ACD2, ALK2, or ACD1) for
the valve that is being removed.
3. Remove the connector [2] for the

valve from the connector plate.
4. Remove the left screw [4] from the

mounting plate for the valve and
loosen the right screw.
5. Slide the valve [5] down and

remove from the processing
module.
Replacement
Install Wash
Solution
1. Slide the valve in position and secure
Valve (for
with two (2) screws (right and left).
serial
numbers 2. Connect the appropriate connector.
c800245 and
above) 3. Slide the connector [1] back through
the hole and route the wires through
the cable clamp.
4. Install the tubing for the appropriate

valve.
Note
Use caution when replacing tubing,
valve ports can be easily damaged.
Note
Install Wash
Solution
1. Slide the valve [5] in position and
Valve (for
secure with two (2) screws [4] (right
serial
and left).
numbers
c800244 and 2. Connect the appropriate connector
below) [2] (ALK1, ACD2, ALK2, or ACD1) .
3. Install the tubing for the appropriate

valve. [1]
Note
Use caution when replacing tubing,
valve ports can be easily damaged.
1. Place the ICT reference bottle,
alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash
bottle on the weight sensor
platforms.
2. Install the tubing in the ICT reference

bottle, alkaline wash bottle, and acid
wash bottle.
Note
initialization.

handler from Stopped to Ready,
system icon.
6. Perform 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions.
8. Check for leaks.
1 2155 - Flush Bulk Solutions
F1.02 Photo Sensors, Weight Platforms Version - 96666-109_955_1
List/Part Numbers
F1.02 Photo Sensors, Weight Platforms

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This procedure is for the three (3) sensors on the Subsection: System status.
weight sensor platforms in the bulk solution
assembly.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
3. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference bottle,
alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash bottle. Wrap
4. Remove the ICT reference bottle, alkaline wash
bottle, and acid wash bottle from the weight sensor
platforms.
Remove
Photo
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] (far left and far right
Sensor
-- located toward the front of the bulk solution
assembly base) holding the base to the processing
module frame.
Note
Do not remove the two (2) nuts/bolts [3]
securing the weight platform assembly to the
bulk solution assembly base. Removing these
at this time results in the nuts falling into the
frame; they are difficult to retrieve.
2. Move the bulk solutions assembly base [2] up and

slightly toward the front of the processing module to
gain access to the nuts [3] securing the weight
platform assembly to the bulk solutions assembly.
3. Remove the two (2) nuts/bolts [3] securing the
weight platform to the base.
Note
Two washers (flat and split washer) are on
each screw next to the nut (not captured).
4. Slide the platform [4] forward and invert to gain

access to the sensors.
5. Disconnect the plug [5] from the sensor being
removed (ALK, alkaline; ACD, acid; MCC, ICT
reference).
6. Remove the sensor [6] from the weight sensor
platform by removing the screw.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Install the sensor [6] onto the weight
Sensor
sensor platform and secure with one (1)
screw.
3. Move the weight platform [4] back into
position on the base and secure with two
(2) nuts/bolts [3].
4. Move the base [2] back into the processing
module frame.
5. Secure the base to the frame with two (2)
screws. [1]
1. Place the ICT reference bottle, alkaline
wash bottle, and acid wash bottle on the
weight sensor platforms.
2. Install tubing in the ICT reference bottle,
alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash bottle.
Note
initialization.
1 P-115 Bulk Solution Weight Sensor
Adjustment
F1.03 Weight sensor, N/S, c8 Version - 96666-109_956_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93485-01 Weight sensor, N/S, C8
F1.03 Weight sensor, N/S, c8

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
4. Wrap each tube with an absorbent towel.
bottle, and acid wash bottle from the weight sensor
platforms.
Remove
Weight
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] (far left and far right
sensor
-- located toward the front of the bulk solution
platform
assembly base) securing the base to the processing
module frame.
Note
Do not remove the two (2) nuts/bolts [3]
securing the weight platform assembly to the
bulk solution assembly base. Removing these
at this time results in the nuts falling into the
frame; they are difficult to retrieve.
2. Move the bulk solutions assembly base [2] up and

slightly toward the front of the processing module to
gain access to the nuts [3] securing the weight
sensor platform assembly to the bulk solutions
assembly.
weight sensor platform to the base.
Note
4. Slide the platform [4] forward and invert to gain

access to the sensor plugs [5].
5. Disconnect the plug [5] from the sensors (ALK,
alkaline; ACD, acid; MCC, ICT reference).
6. Remove the weight sensor platform [4] from weight
platform assembly [2]
Replacement
Install
Weight
1. Connect the plugs [5] to the sensors (ALK,
sensor
alkaline; ACD, acid; MCC, ICT reference).
platform
2. Move the weight sensor platform [4] back
into position on the base and secure with
two (2) nuts/bolts [3].
3. Move the base [2] back into the processing
module frame.
4. Secure the base to the frame with two (2)
screws. [1]
1. Place the ICT reference bottle, alkaline
wash bottle, and acid wash bottle on the
2. Install tubing in the ICT reference bottle,
Note
initialization.
1 P-115 Bulk Solution Weight Sensor
Adjustment
F1.04 Shaft, acid/alk platforms Version - 96666-109_957_1
F1.04 Reference/Wash Solution Line Filter
Note
F1.05 Shaft, I ref platform Version - 96666-109_958_1
F1.05 Shaft, I ref platform

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 7-93149-01 Shaft, I ref platform
Absorbent towels
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be in stopped, or
offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the instrument (use the main circuit
breaker located at the rear of the instrument).
2. Open the supply center (left front) doors.
alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash bottle. Wrap
bottle, and acid wash bottle from the weight
sensor platforms.
Remove
Weight
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] (located toward
Platform
the front, far left and far right) securing the bulk
Assembly
solutions assembly base.
Note
Do not remove the two (2) nuts/bolts
securing the weight platform assembly to
the bulk solution assembly base. Removing
these at this time results in the nuts falling
into the instrument; they are difficult to
retrieve.
2. Move the bulk solutions assembly base [2] up

and slightly toward the front of the instrument to
gain access to the nuts securing the weight
platform assembly [5] to the bulk solutions
assembly.
weight platform assembly to the bulk solutions
assembly.
Note
4. Slide the weight platform assembly forward and

disconnect the plugs [4] from the sensors for
each platform (MCC - Iref; ALK - alkaline; ACD -
acid).
5. Slide the weight platform assembly from the
instrument.
Remove ICT
Reference
1. Disconnect the spring [1] at the rear of the ICT
Solution
reference solution platform.
Platform
2. Remove the two (2) clips [2] from each end of the
Shafts
shaft for the weight platform.
3. Remove the two (2) screws [3] from underneath
the weight platform assembly that are securing
the shaft mount for the shaft being removed.
Raise platform up and slide shaft out of the shaft
mount and platform.
Replacement

Install ICT
Reference
1. Slide the shaft through the platform and the shaft
Solution
mount, ensure that the shaft bushings are in the
Platform
correct position.
Shafts
2. Secure the shaft with two (2) clips. [2]
3. Secure the shaft mount to the weight platform
assembly with two (2) screws. [3]
4. Connect the spring [1] at the rear of the weight
platform and ensure the platform moves up and
down freely.
Install
Weight
1. Slide the weight platform [5] in the bulk solutions
Platform
assembly [2] and connect the plugs [4] to the
Assembly
plugs to the sensors for each platform (MCC - ICT
reference solution; ALK - alkaline; ACD - acid).
2. Secure the weight platform assembly to the bulk
solution assembly with two (2) screws/nuts. [3]
Note
There should be a flat and split washer
between nut and bulk solutions assembly
base.
3. Slide the bulk solutions assembly [2] in the

instrument and secure with two (2) screws. [1]

1. Place the ICT reference bottle, alkaline wash
Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
bottle, and acid wash bottle on the weight sensor
pause, and shutdown.
platforms.
2. Install tubing in the ICT reference bottle, alkaline
wash bottle, and acid wash bottle.
Note

Verification
Verification
1. Perform P-115 Bulk Solution Weight Sensor Adjustment.
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-103) • Copyright 2002 • ARCHITECT and i 2000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000,
i 8000, c 8000, i 2000 SR, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.06 Platform, weight, I ref sol Version - 96666-109_959_1
F1.06 Platform, weight, I ref sol

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 7-93150-01 Platform, weight, I ref sol
Absorbent towels
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be in stopped,
or offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the instrument (use the main
circuit breaker located at the rear of the
instrument).
3. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference
bottle. Wrap the tube with an absorbent
towel.
4. Remove the ICT reference bottle from the
Remove Internal
Reference
1. Disconnect the spring [1] at the rear of the
Solution Weight
weight platform.
Platform
2. Remove the two (2) clips [2] from each end
of the shaft [3] for the weight platform.
3. Slide the shaft [3] right to release the left
side of platform, then slide the shaft to the
left while holding the left side of platform up
to release the right side.
4. Lift the platform out of the instrument.
5. Remove the spring [4] from the weight
platform.
6. Mark the sensor flag [5] in relationship to the
weight platform and remove the two (2)
screws securing the flag.
7. Remove the flag.
Replacement
Install Internal
Reference
1. Secure the sensor flag [5] with two (2) screws
Solution
onto the weight platform and align with the
Weight
marks made during removal.
Platform
2. Attach the spring [4] to the weight platform.
3. Place the platform in position and while holding
up the left side, slide the shaft [3] in the right
side of the platform. Then, lower the left side
and slide the shaft in the left side.
down freely.

1. Place the ICT reference bottle on the weight
sensor platforms.
and shutdown.
2. Install the tubing in the ICT reference bottle.
Note
be ON prior to turning on the processing
Verification
Verification
F1.07 Platform, weight, Acid/Alk Version - 96666-109_960_1
F1.07 Platform, weight, Acid/Alk

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 7-93151-01 Platform, weight, Acid/Alk
Absorbent Towel
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This procedure is for either the Acid or the Subsection: System status.
Alkaline shafts.

offline status.
Preparation
3. Remove the tubing from the alkaline wash bottle,
and acid wash bottle. Wrap each tube with an
absorbent towel.
4. Remove the alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash
bottle from the weight sensor platforms.
Remove
Acid/Alk
1. Disconnect the spring [1] at the rear of the weight
Weight
platform being removed.
Platform
2. Remove the two (2) clips [3] from each end of the
shaft [2] for the weight platform being removed.
3. Slide the shaft [2] right to release the left side of
the platform, then slide the shaft to the left while
holding the left side of the platform up to release
the right side.
4. Lift the platform out of the instrument.
5. Remove the spring from the weight platform.
6. Mark the sensor flag in relationship to the weight
platform and remove the two (2) screws securing
the flag.
7. Remove the flag.
Replacement
Install the
Acid/Alk
1. Secure the sensor flag with two (2) screws onto
Weight
the weight platform and align with marks made
Platform
during removal.
2. Attach the spring to the weight platform.
3. Place the platform in position and while holding up
the left side, slide the shaft [2] in the right side of
the platform. Then lower the left side and slide the
shaft in left side.
down freely.

1. Place the alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash
bottle on the weight sensor platforms.
and shutdown.
2. Install the tubing in the alkaline wash bottle, and
acid wash bottle.
Note

Verification
Verification
F1.09 Spring, acid/alk platform Version - 96666-109_962_1
F1.09 Spring, acid/alk platform

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 7-93153-01 Spring, acid/alk platform
Removal
Remove Spring
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of the Abbott trained repair person.
Replacement
1.
Verification
Verification
G1.01 PROBE,WZ Version - 96728-111_150_2
List/Part Numbers
08C94-35 Probe, WZ
G1.01 PROBE,WZ
45 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Warming, or Ready status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
cover(s) to access the wash zone
probe.
Note
The rear processing center
access panel must be opened
to access the wash zone 2
probes.
2. Locate the wash zone probe to be

replaced on the appropriate wash
zone. [1]
Note
Refer to the processing center
map on the i System
processing module for wash
zone locations (WZ1 or WZ2).
3. Remove the appropriate internal

components cover(s), if present.
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash
Probe
zone clip located at the front of the
wash zone mechanism assembly.
2. Rotate the clip counterclockwise [2],

so the notch in the clip moves away
from the wash zone probe. [1]
3. Slide the tubing off the probe then lift

the probe from the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
4. Remove the tubing from the probe by

gently pulling the tubing and sliding it
from the probe.
Note
Replacement
Install
Wash
1. Push the wash zone tubing onto the
Zone
wash zone probe until it passes the
Probe
ridge on the probe. [1]
Note
The tubing should be half way
between the bend in the probe
and the ridge. [2]
2. Slide the probe in the wash zone

mechanism assembly until it is fully
seated.
Note
Pull up on the wash zone
mechanism to raise it if the
probes do not fit into the
openings on the wash zone Note
mechanism assembly. Video contains no audio sound.
3. Check to ensure the tubing is placed

into the tubing guides on the wash
zone mechanism assembly.
4. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and

rotate the clip clockwise toward the
probes [3].
Note
If the clips do not rotate to their
locked position, ensure the
probes are completely seated in
the wash zone mechanism
assembly.
Prepare
for
1. Install the appropriate internal
Operation
components cover(s).
2. Close the rear processing center cover.
1 2050 - WZ Aspiration Test
G1.01 Drive, Sample Syringe Version - 96666-109_963_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93154-01 Drive, Sample Syringe
G1.01 Drive, Sample Syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Open the supply center (left front) and pump center
(center front) doors.
Remove
Sample Note
Syringe Use absorbent material to protect sample syringe
Drive drive against spills.
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the top and side of the

sample syringe.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] from mount at the
bottom of the assembly.
3. Slide syringe drive assembly out of the processing
module for access to the cables and disconnect
plugs SP-M and SP-S from syringe drive
assembly. [3]
4. Remove the syringe drive assembly from the
processing module.
Remove
Sample
Syringe
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the sample
syringe plunger clamp and remove the clamp. [3]
3. Remove the screw securing the syringe and remove
the syringe. [4]
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Secure the syringe [4] with one (1) screw.
Syringe
2. Secure the plunger clamp [3] with (2)
screws.
3. Secure the syringe cover [2] with two (2)
screws.
Install
Sample
1. Connect plugs SP-M and SP-S to the
Syringe
syringe drive assembly.
Drive
2. Slide the syringe drive assembly [3] in the
processing module and secure with the two
(2) screws [2] at the base of the assembly.
3. Connect the tubing [1] from the probe to the
top of the sample syringe and from the valve
to the side of the sample syringe.

Note
initialization.

5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
G1.02 Photo Sensors, Sample Syringe Drive Version - 96666-109_965_1
List/Part Numbers
G1.02 Photo Sensors, Sample Syringe Drive

Absorbent towels
Note
This procedure is for the three (3) sensors on the sample syringe drive.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Open the supply center (left front) and pump center
Remove
Sample Note
Drive drive against spills.
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the top and side of the

sample syringe.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] from mount at the
bottom of the assembly.
3. Slide syringe drive assembly out of the processing
module for access to the cables and disconnect
plugs SP-M and SP-S from syringe drive
assembly. [3]
4. Remove the syringe drive assembly from the
processing module.
Remove
Photo
1. Remove the four (4) screws [1] securing the back
Sensor
plate to the syringe drive assembly and swing away
from the assembly.
removed.
back plate and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Secure the sensor [3] to the back plate with
Sensor
one (1) screw.
Top sensor - PITCH

Middle sensor - Up
Bottom sensor - DOWN)
3. Secure the back plate to the syringe drive

assembly with four (4) screws. [1]
Install
Sample
1. Connect plugs SP-M and SP-S to the
Syringe
syringe drive assembly.
Drive
2. Slide the syringe drive assembly [3] in the
3. Connect the tubing [1] from the probe to the
top of the sample syringe and from the valve
to the side of the sample syringe.

Note
initialization.

5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
G1.08 Spring, sample syringe Version - 96666-109_968_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89381-02 Spring,Sample Syringe Shaft
G1.08 Spring, sample syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Sample Note
drive against spills.
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the top and side of

the sample syringe.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the sample
syringe plunger clamp and remove the clamp. [3]
4. Remove the screw securing the syringe and
remove the syringe. [4]
Remove
Sample
1. Unscrew the nut [5] on the bottom of the syringe
Syringe
block and slide the syringe plunger [6] and
Spring
seals [2, 3] out of the syringe.
2. Remove the o-ring [1] from seal tip #2.
3. Remove seal tip #2 [2], the spacer [7] and seal
tip #1 [3] from the plunger.
4. Pull the nut [5] down on the plunger to reveal the
spring. [4]
5. Remove the spring from the plunger. [6]
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Install the spring [4] on the plunger. [6]
Syringe
2. Install seal tip #1 [3], the spacer and seal
Spring
tip #2 [2] on the plunger.
3. Install the o-ring [1] on seal tip #2.
4. Insert the plunger with the seals in the
syringe block and secure with the nut [5]
on the bottom.
Install
Sample
Syringe
screws.
screws.

icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
G1.09 Seal, water line, syringe Version - 96666-109_969_2
List/Part Numbers
G1.09 Seal, water line, syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
doors.
Remove
Sample Note
Syringe and Use absorbent material to protect
Seals sample syringe drive against spills.
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the

side and top of the sample syringe.
securing the syringe cover [2] and
remove the cover.
securing the sample syringe
plunger clamp [3] and remove the
clamp./li>
syringe and remove the syringe. [4]
5. Remove the seals from the sample (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
syringe.
Note
Replacement
Install
Seals and
1. Install the seals in the sample syringe.
Sample
2. Secure the syringe [4] with one (1)
Syringe
screw.
3. Secure the sample syringe plunger
clam [3] with two (2) screws.
4. Secure the syringe cover [2] with two
(2) screws.
5. Connect the tubing [1] from the probe
to the top of the sample syringe and
from the valve to the side of the
sample syringe.
Note
procedure.
system icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
G1.10 Syringe, sample Version - 96666-109_970_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89399-02 Syringe, sample, complete
G1.10 Syringe, sample

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Sample Note
Syringe Use absorbent material to protect sample
syringe drive against spills.
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the side and top

of the sample syringe.
sample syringe plunger clamp [3] and
remove the clamp.
Replacement
Install
Sample
Syringe
clamp [3] with two (2) screws.
screws.
4. Connect the tubing [1] from the probe to
the top of the sample syringe and from the
valve to the side of the sample syringe.

icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
G1.11 Clamp, samp/reag syringe Version - 96666-109_971_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89111-02 Clamp,Syringe,SAMP/REAG Pump
G1.11 Clamp, samp/reag syringe

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
1. Open the supply center (left front) and
pump center (center front) doors.
Remove
Sample
Syringe Clamp
sample syringe plunger clamp [2] and
remove the clamp.
Replacement
Install
Sample
Syringe
Clamp
screws.

2. Close the doors.
G1.12 Block, samp/reag syringe Version - 96666-109_972_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89580-02 BLOCK,SAMP/REAG SYR MOUNTING
G1.12 Block, samp/reag syringe

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Sample
Syringe Block
sample syringe plunger clamp and remove the
clamp. [2]
3. Remove the sample syringe block [3] by
removing the one (1) hex head screw from the
bottom of the block.
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Secure the sample syringe block [3] with
Syringe
the hex head screw in the bottom of the
Block
block.
2. Secure the sample syringe clamp [2] with
two (2) screws.
screws.

2. Close the doors.
G2.01 Drive, Reagent Syringe Version - 96666-109_973_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93156-01 Drive, Reagent Syringe
G2.01 Drive, Reagent Syringe

Absorbent towels
Note
This procedure is for both the R1 and R2 reagent syringe drives.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent Syringe Note
Drive Use absorbent material to protect reagent

the reagent syringe.
mount at the bottom of the assembly.
3. Slide the syringe drive assembly out of the
processing module to access the following
cables:
Disconnect plugs R1 P-M and R1 P-S

from the R1 drive assembly.
Disconnect R2 P-M and R2 P-S from
the R2 drive assembly.
4. Remove the syringe drive assembly [3] from

Remove
Reagent Syringe
Drive Syringe
reagent syringe plunger clamp [3] and remove
the clamp.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
Syringe
Drive
screws.
Syringe
3. Use two (2) screws and install the syringe
cover. [2]
Install
Reagent
1. Connect plugs R1P-M/R2P-M and R1P-
Syringe
S/R2P-S and to the syringe drive
Drive
assembly. [3]
2. Slide the syringe drive assembly in the
processing module and secure with the
two (2) screws [2] at the base of the
assembly.
the top of the reagent syringe and from
the valve to the side of the reagent
syringe.
Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
G2.02 Photo Sensors, Reagent Syringe Drive Version - 96666-109_974_1
List/Part Numbers
G2.02 Photo Sensors, Reagent Syringe Drive

Absorbent towels
Note
This procedure is for the three (3) sensors on the syringe drive assembly.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Reagent Note
Syringe Drive Use absorbent material to protect reagent syringe

3. Slide the syringe drive assembly out of the
processing module to access the following cables:
Disconnect plugs R1 P-M and R1 P-S from

the R1 drive assembly.
Disconnect R2 P-M and R2 P-S from the
R2 drive assembly.
4. Remove the syringe drive assembly [3] from the

processing module.
Remove
Photo Sensor
1. Remove the four (4) screws holding the back
plate [1] on the syringe drive assembly and swing
away from the assembly.
removed.
3. Remove the sensor [3] from the back plate by
removing one (1) screw.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Install the sensor [3] onto the back plate
Sensor
2. Connect the plug [2] to the sensor. (top
sensor - pitch, middle sensor - up, bottom
sensor - down)
3. Secure the back plate [1] to the syringe
drive assembly with four (4) screws.
Install
Reagent
1. Connect plugs R1P-M/R2P-M and R1P-
Syringe
S/R2P-S and to the syringe drive
Drive
assembly. [3]
2. Slide the syringe drive assembly in the
the top of the reagent syringe and from the
valve to the side of the reagent syringe.

Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
G2.08 Spring, reagent syringe Version - 96666-109_978_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89382-02 Spring,Reagent Syringe Shaft
G2.08 Spring, reagent syringe

Absorbent towel
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent Note
Syringe Spring Use absorbent towel to protect reagent syringe
1. Unscrew the tubing from the top and side of

syringe cover then remove the cover.
reagent syringe clamp then remove the clamp.
4. Remove the screw securing the syringe then
remove the syringe.
5. Unscrew the nut on the bottom of the syringe
block and slide the syringe plunger and seals
out of the syringe.
6. Remove the o-ring [6] from seal tip #2.
7. Remove seal tip #2 [7], spacer [9] and seal
tip #1 [7] from the plunger.
8. Pull the nut [5] down on the plunger to reveal
the spring. [8]
9. Remove the spring from the plunger.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Install the spring on the plunger.
Syringe
2. Install seal tip #1, spacer and seal tip #2
Spring
on the plunger.
3. Install the o-ring on seal tip #2.
4. Insert the plunger with the seals in the
syringe block and tighten the nut on the
bottom.
5. Secure the syringe with one (1) screw.
6. Secure the plunger clamp with two (2)
screws.
7. Use the two (2) screws to install the
syringe cover.
8. Connect the tubing from the probe to the
top of the reagent syringe and from the

icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
G2.09 Seal, water line, syringe Version - 96666-109_979_2
List/Part Numbers
G2.09 Seal, water line, syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
Remove
Reagent Note
Syringe Use absorbent material to protect
reagent syringe drive against spills.
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the side

and top of the reagent syringe.
the syringe cover then remove the
cover. [2]
the reagent syringe plunger clamp [3]
then remove the clamp.
syringe [4] then remove the syringe.
Note
Video Note
Video shows removal of Sample Syringe Seals. However, steps
are identical to the Removal and Replacement of Reagent
Syringe Seals.
Remove
Seals
1. Remove the seals from the syringe.
Replacement
Install
Seals
1. Install the seals on the syringe.
Note
Video Note
Video shows removal of Sample Syringe Seals. However, steps
are identical to the Removal and Replacement of Reagent
Syringe Seals.
Install
Reagent
1. Secure the syringe [4] with the
Syringe
thumbscrew.
2. Secure the reagent syringe plunger
screws.
the top of the reagent syringe and from
the valve to the side of the reagent
syringe.
procedure.
icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
G2.10 Syringe, reagent Version - 96666-109_980_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89398-01 Syringe, reagent, complete
2-89398-02 Syringe, reagent, complete
2-89399-01 Syringe, sample, complete
G2.10 Syringe, reagent

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent Note
Syringe Use absorbent material to protect reagent
1. Unscrew the tubing [1] from the side and top

of the reagent syringe.
syringe cover then remove the cover. [2]
reagent syringe plunger clamp [3] then
remove the clamp.
syringe [4] then remove the syringe.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Secure the syringe [4] with the
Syringe
thumbscrew.
2. Secure the reagent syringe plunger
screws.
the top of the reagent syringe and from the

icon.
4. Check for leaks.
5. Close the doors.
G2.11 Clamp, samp/reag syringe Version - 96666-109_981_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89111-02 Clamp,Syringe,SAMP/REAG Pump
G2.11 Clamp, samp/reag syringe

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent
Syringe Clamp
syringe cover [1] then remove the cover.
reagent syringe plunger clamp [2] then
remove the clamp.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Use two (2) screws and install the reagent
Syringe
syringe plunger clamp. [2]
Clamp
2. Use two (2) screws and install the syringe
cover. [1]

2. Close the doors.
G2.12 Block, samp/reag syringe Version - 96666-109_982_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89580-02 BLOCK,SAMP/REAG SYR MOUNTING
G2.12 Block, samp/reag syringe

Phillips Screwdriver
3 mm Hex Wrench
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Reagent
Syringe Block
syringe cover [1] then remove the cover.
reagent syringe plunger clamp [2] then remove
the clamp
3. Remove the reagent syringe block by
removing the one (1) hex head screw from the
bottom of the block. [3]
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Install the reagent syringe block with one
Syringe
(1) hex head screw in the bottom of the
Block
block. [3]
2. Secure the reagent syringe clamp [2] with
two (2) screws.
screws.

2. Close the doors.
G3.01 Valve, reag/samp syr dispense Version - 96666-109_983_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89557-02 Valve, samp&reag syr. dispense
7-202518-01 Valve, Reagent / Sample, CKD
G3.01 Valve, reag/samp syr dispense
20 min
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Absorbent towels
Note
This procedure is for three valves; sample valve, reagent 1 valve, and reagent 2 valve.
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT

System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
function, Subsection: System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the c8000 processing module
Remove
Reagent/Sample
1. Determine which reagent/sample syringe
Syringe Dispense Valve
dispense valve part is used.
If 89557, go to Remove
Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense
Valve (89557).
If 202518, go to Remove
Reagent/Sample Syringe Dispense
Valve (202518).
Remove
Reagent/Sample Note
Syringe Dispense Valve Place an absorbent towel under valve
(89557) during removal to catch any water that
maybe still in the tubing.
1. Disconnect the tubing from the NO [1] and

NC [2] fittings (on the valve being removed).
2. Unscrew the compression nut [3] from the
elbow on the IN port of the valve.
3. Disconnect the appropriate plug:
SWV (sample)
R1WV (reagent 1)
R2WV (reagent 2)

valve mounting bracket [4] to the metal
brace.
5. Lift the valve assembly up and out of the
processing module.
6. Remove the fittings from the NO [6] and
NC [7] ports of the valve.
7. Remove the elbow [8] from the IN port.
valve [5] to the mounting bracket [4] and
remove the valve.
Remove
Reagent/Sample Note
Syringe Dispense Valve Place an absorbent towel under valve
(202518) during removal to catch any water that
maybe still in the tubing.
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the NO port

fitting (on the valve being removed).
2. Unscrew the fitting [2] (from the valve being
removed) and remove the tubing from the
clamp. [7]
3. Unscrew the compression nut [3] from the
elbow on the IN port of the valve.
4. Disconnect the appropriate plug:
SWV (sample)
R1WV (reagent 1)
R2WV (reagent 2)

valve mounting bracket [4] to the metal
brace.
6. Lift the valve assembly up and out of the
processing module.
7. Remove the fitting [6] from the NO port of
the valve.
8. Remove the elbow [8] from the IN port.
9. Remove the screw securing the valve [5] to
the mounting bracket [4] and remove the
valve.
Replacement
Install
Reagent/Sample
1. Determine which reagent/sample
Syringe Dispense
syringe dispense valve part is used.
Valve
If 89557, go to Install
Reagent/Sample Syringe
Dispense Valve (89557).
If 202518, go to Install
Reagent/Sample Syringe
Dispense Valve (202518).
Install
Reagent/Sample
1. Install the mounting bracket [4] onto the
Syringe Dispense
valve. [5]
Valve (89557)
Note
Proper orientation of valve is
with the NC port up.
2. Place pipe sealant tape on the threads

of the elbow [8] that screws in the valve
and screw the elbow in the IN port of
the valve.
of the fittings for the NO [6] and NC [7]
ports and screw in the ports of the
valve.
Note
The fitting for the NO port of the
sample valve has a smaller
tubing fitting than the reagent
valve fitting.
4. Place the valve in position and verify

that the tubing from the manifold is
inserted in the elbow [8] on the valve.
5. Secure the valve mounting bracket [4]
to the metal brace with two (2) screws.
6. Connect the appropriate plug:
SWV (sample)
R1WV (reagent 1)
R2WV (reagent 2)
7. Tighten the compression nut [3] onto

the elbow [8] of the IN port of the valve.
8. Connect the tubing [2] from the syringe
to the NC port and tubing [1] from the
waste cup to the NO port.
Install
Reagent/Sample
1. Install the mounting bracket [4] onto the
Syringe Dispense
valve. [5]
Valve (202518)
of the valve elbow fitting [8] and screw
the elbow into the valve.
of the NO port fitting [6] and screw it
into the port of the valve.
Note
The fitting for the NO port of the
sample valve has a smaller
tubing fitting than the reagent
valve fitting.
4. Place the valve in position and verify

that the tubing from the manifold is
inserted in the elbow [8] on the valve.
5. Secure the valve mounting bracket [4]
to the metal brace with two (2) screws.
6. Connect the appropriate plug:
SWV (sample)
R1WV (reagent 1)
R2WV (reagent 2)
7. Tighten the compression nut [3] onto

the elbow [8] of the IN port of the valve.
8. Connect the tubing [1] to the NO port
fitting of the valve.
9. Install a new seal [9] into the front port
of the valve.
10. Screw the fitting [2] into the valve and
route the tubing through the clamp. [7]

Note

procedure.
system icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
G3.04 Manifold, Dispense Valves Version - 96666-109_987_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93157-01 Manifold, Dispense Valves
7-93157-02 Manifold, Dispense Valves (RoHS)
G3.04 Manifold, Dispense Valves

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
Remove All
Reagent/Sample Note
Syringe Dispense Place an absorbent towel under valves
Valves during removal to catch any water that
may be in the tubing.
1. Disconnect the tubing from the NO [1] and

NC [2] fittings on all of the valves being
removed.
2.
Unscrew the compression nut [3] from the
elbow on the IN port of the valves.
3. Disconnect plug SWV for sample, R1WV
for reagent 1, and R2WV for reagent 2.
4. Remove the two (2) screws [4] securing
the valve mounting bracket [5] to the metal
brace for all valves.
5. Lift each valve assembly up and out of the
processing module.
Remove Reagent 2
Syringe Drive Note
Use absorbent material to protect reagent

side of the reagent syringe.
2. Remove the two (2) screw [2] from the
3. Slide the drive assembly out of the
processing module for access to the
cables.
4. Disconnect the cables R2P-M and R2P-S
from the syringe drive. [3]
5. Remove the drive assembly from the
processing module.
Remove Manifold
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the input
port of the manifold.
Note
Access the tubing through the
reagent 2 syringe pump position.

the manifold to the metal brace and lift the
manifold from the processing module.
3. Remove the fitting [3] from the output
ports of the manifold.
4. Remove the bleed tubing [4] from the top
of the manifold.
Replacement
Install Manifold
1. Connect the bleed tubing [4] to the top of the
manifold.
2. Place the pipe sealant tape on the threads of
the output port fittings [3] and screw the
fittings in the ports.
3. Secure the manifold to the metal brace with
two (2) screws. [2]
4. Connect the tubing [1] from the probe wash
pump to the manifold and tighten the tubing
clamp. Access is through the reagent 2
syringe pump position.
Install Reagent
2 Syringe Drive
1. Connect cables R2P-M to R2P-S to the
syringe drive. [3]
2. Slide the pump in the processing module and
secure with two (2) screws [2] at the bottom
of the assembly.
3. Connect the tubing [1] to the top and side of
Install All
Reagent/Sample
1. Place all of the valves in position, ensuring
Syringe
that the tubing from the manifold is inserted
Dispense Valves
in the elbow [3] on the valve.
2. Secure the valve mounting brackets to the
metal brace with two (2) screws. [4]
3. Connect plug SWV for sample, R1WV for
reagent 1 and R2WV for reagent 2.
4. Tighten the compression nut [3] onto the
elbow [7] of the IN port of the valves.
5. Connect the tubing from the syringes to the
NC [2] ports and the tubing from the waste
cup to the NO [1] ports.

Note and shutdown.
be ON prior to turning on the
initialization.

5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
G3.08 P.M. Sensor Assy (c8000) Version - 96666-109_991_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86320-01 PM Sensor Assy
G3.08 P.M. Sensor Assy (c 8000)

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

stopped, or offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF
the c8000 processing module. (Use
the main circuit breaker located at the
rear of the processing module.)
Remove
P.M. Note
Sensor Use absorbent material to protect the
sample syringe drive and the P.M.
Sensor against spills.
1. Disconnect the tubing from the top

and bottom of the P.M. Sensor.
2. Disconnect connector PM from the

P.M. Sensor.
3. Remove the hex head screw.
4. Loosen the two (2) screws at the rear

of the sensor and slide the sensor off
of the bracket
Note
Replacement
Install
P.M.
1. Slide the P.M. Sensor on to the bracket
Sensor
and secure the sensor by tightening two
(2) screws
2. Install the hex head screw in the
bracket.
3. Connect the connector PM to the P.M.

Sensor.
4. Connect the tubing to the top and

bottom of the P.M. Sensor.
Note

Note
procedure.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Close the doors.
1 3805 - Pressure Monitor Test
K1.01 Pump, vacuum pump, wash/dry Version - 96666-109_992_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89305-02 Pump,vacuum pump,wash/dry
K1.01 Pump, vacuum pump, wash/dry

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Vacuum
1. Disconnect the power cable CDVP to the vacuum
Pump
pump.
2. Mark the tubing for the in port [1] and the out
port. [2]
3. Remove the tubing from the vacuum pump.
vacuum pump mounting bracket to the processing
module.
vacuum pump to the mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Attach the vacuum pump to the mounting
Pump
bracket with three (3) screws. [4]
2. Place the vacuum pump, with the mounting
bracket, in the processing module and
secure with three (3) screws. [3]
3. Connect the tubing [1] [2] to the vacuum
pump and connect the power cable CDVP.

Note
initialization.
icon.
5. Check for Leaks.
6. Install the left rear cover and secure with
four (4) screws.
K1.02 Diaphragm, vac. pump Version - 96666-109_993_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89165-02 Diaphragms for vacuum pumps
7-93426-01 Diaphragm, Vacuum 1
K1.02 Diaphragm, vac. pump

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Vacuum Pump
Diaphragm
diaphragm housing cover [1] and remove the
cover.
2. Lift the edge of the diaphragm enough to reach
the nut with the pump diaphragm wrench. [2]
Note
Wrap the wrench handle with vinyl tape to
protect the pump housing.
Note
Cutting the diaphragm away from the nut
can aid in removal of the nut.
3. Unscrew the diaphragm to remove it from the
vacuum pump.
Note
Improper use of the wrench can result in
damage to the perimeter of the pump
opening beneath the diaphragm.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. While holding the diaphragm rod with the
Pump
wrench [2], screw the diaphragm on to the
Diaphragm
rod.
Note
The diaphragm should only be
hand tightened.
Note
Improper use of the wrench can
result in damage to the perimeter of
the pump opening beneath the
diaphragm.
2. Secure the diaphragm housing cover [1]
icon.
4. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
K1.03 Sheet Valve, vac. pump Version - 96666-109_994_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89359-02 Sheet valve for vacuum pump
7-93427-01 Sheet Valve, Vacuum 1
K1.03 Sheet Valve, vac. pump

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove Vacuum
Pump Sheet
Valve
diaphragm housing cover [1] and remove
the cover.
2. Remove the sheet valve. [2]
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Place the sheet valve [2] in the vacuum
Pump Sheet
pump. Ensure correct orientation of the
Valve
sheet valve to the pump.
2. Secure the diaphragm housing cover [1]
icon.
4. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
K2.01 Degasser Version - 96666-109_995_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89161-03 Degasser unit
2-89161-04 New Style Degasser Unit
2-89161-05 New Style Degasser Unit (RoHS)
2-89161-06 Degasser, with improvements
K2.01 Degasser

may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the c8000 processing module (use
processing module).
Remove
Degasser
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the frame
brace located behind degasser assembly and
remove the brace.
2. Disconnect the drain tubing [1] from the
refrigerator.
3. Cut the tie-wrap securing the refrigerator drain to
the degasser frame and lay the tubing out of the
way.
4. Clamp the tubing [2] to the degasser and remove
the tubing from the degasser.
5. Disconnect the cables DGS and DEG from the
degasser.
degasser assembly to the processing module
frame.
7. Remove the degasser by sliding it out of the rear
of the processing module.
Replacement
Install
Degasser
1. Slide the degasser in the processing
module from the rear and secure with two
(2) screws.
2. Connect the DEGA and DEG cables to the
degasser.
3. Connect the tubing [2] to the degasser and
remove the clamps.
4. Reconnect the drain tubing [1] to the
refrigerator.
5. Secure the frame brace with four (4)
screws.
6. Secure the refrigerator tubing to the
degasser frame with one tie-wrap.
Note
initialization.

icon.
4. Perform 2132 Flush Water Lines.
5. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
1 2132 - Flush Water Lines Check for leaks
K2.02 Fuse, 500ma 250V, degasser Version - 96666-109_996_2
List/Part Numbers
2-94828-01 Fuse, 1A, 250V, Degasser
K2.02 Fuse, 500ma 250V, degasser

may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Degasser
1. Unscrew the fuse holder and remove the fuse.
Fuse
Replacement
Install
Degasser
1. Place the fuse in the fuse holder and
Fuse
secure the cap on to the fuse holder.

Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Verify that the degasser cycles.
four (4) screws.
K2.03 Degasser Canister Version - 96666-109_1364_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93668-01 Canister, degasser
K2.03 Degasser Canister
1.0 hr
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit.

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite
For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System
1. The processing module must be in Stopped or Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
Offline status. System status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the left and right rear covers.
Remove
Degasser
remove the brace.
2. Disconnect the drain tubing [1] from the
refrigerator.
way.
5. Disconnect the cables DEGA and DEG from the
degasser.
degasser assembly to the processing module
frame.
7. Remove the degasser by sliding it out of the rear
Remove
Canister
canister to the rear of the degasser unit.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing [2] from the front of
the canister.
canister to the canister bracket.
canister bracket to the degasser unit base plate.
5. Slide the canister out of the degasser unit.
Replacement
Install
Canister
1. Slide the canister into the degasser unit.
2. Install the two (2) screws [1] that secure the canister
to the rear of the degasser unit.
3. Connect the vacuum tubing [2] to the front of the
canister.
to the canister bracket.
bracket to the degasser unit base plate.
Install
Degasser
1. Slide the degasser in the processing module from
the rear and secure with two (2) screws.
degasser.
3. Connect the tubing [2] to the degasser and remove
the clamps
4. Connect the drain tubing [1] to the refrigerator.
5. Secure the frame brace with four (4) screws.
6. Secure the refrigerator tubing to the degasser frame
with one tie-wrap.
Prepare for
Operation
Note
ON prior to turning on the processing module
to ensure proper initialization.

Startup procedure.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Install the left and right rear covers.
K3.02 High Conc. Waste Float Cable Version - 96666-109_998_1
List/Part Numbers
03E50-31 High Conc. Waste Float Cable
K3.02 High Conc. Waste Float Cable

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Disconnect
Cable
1. Disconnect the cable from the High Concentration
Waste Container cap by unscrewing the locking
ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch cable [2].
2. Disconnect the other end of the float switch cable
from the back of the module using the information
in the previous step.
Replacement
Connect
Cable
1. Connect one end of the replacement cable to
the back of the module by inserting the cable
and tightening the locking ring.
Note
Both ends of the cable are identical.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the

High Concentration Waste Container by
inserting the cable and tightening the locking
ring.

K3.03 Switch, Float, High Conc. Waste Version - 96666-109_999_1
K3.03 Switch, Float, High Conc. Waste

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 93160 Switch, Float, High Conc. Wast
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.

person.
Replacement
1.
Verification
Verification
1. Select the As Needed category from the Maintenance screen under the system icon.
K3.04 Connector High Conc. Waste Bottle Version - 96666-109_1000_1
K3.04 Connector High Conc. Waste Bottle

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 2-89102-02 Connector High Conc. Waste Bottle
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
stopped, or offline status.

person.
Replacement
1.
Verification
Verification
c 8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-104) • Copyright 2002 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i 4000,
i 6000, i 8000, c 8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
K4.01 Pump, Vacuum Pump New Style Version - 96666-109_1001_1
List/Part Numbers
2-94799-02 Pump, Vacuum Pump New Style
K4.01 Pump, Vacuum Pump New Style

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Vacuum
1. Disconnect the power cable CWVP to the vacuum
Pump
pump.
2. Mark the tubing for the in port [1] and the out
port. [2]
3. Remove the tubing from the vacuum pump.
vacuum pump mounting bracket to the processing
module.
vacuum pump to the mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Attach the vacuum pump to the mounting
Pump
bracket with three (3) screws. [4]
2. Place the vacuum pump, with the mounting
bracket, in the processing module and
3. Connect the tubing [1] [2] to the vacuum
pump and connect the power cable CWVP.

Note
initialization.
icon.
5. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
K4.02 Diaphragm, Vacuum Pump New Style Version - 96666-109_1002_1
List/Part Numbers
2-94796-02 Diaphragm, Vacuum Pump New Style
K4.02 Diaphragm, Vacuum Pump New Style

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Vacuum Pump
Diaphragm
diaphragm housing cover and remove
the cover.
2. Unscrew the diaphragm [1] (counter-
clockwise) to remove it from the vacuum
pump.
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Screw the diaphragm [1] (clockwise) on to
Pump
the rod.
Diaphragm
2. Secure the diaphragm housing cover with
four (4) screws.
icon.
4. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
K4.03 Sheet Valve for Vacuum Pump New Style Version - 96666-109_1003_1
List/Part Numbers
2-94797-02 Sheet Valve for Vacuum Pump New Style
K4.03 Sheet Valve for Vacuum Pump New Style

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove Vacuum
Pump Sheet
Valve
the diaphragm housing cover and
remove the cover.
2. Remove the sheet valve. [2]
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Place the sheet valve [2] in the vacuum
Pump Sheet
pump.
Valve
four (4) screws.
icon.
4. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
K4.04 O-Ring for Vacuum Pump New Style Version - 96666-109_1004_1
List/Part Numbers
2-94798-02 O-Ring for Vacuum Pump New Style
K4.04 O-Ring for Vacuum Pump New Style

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Vacuum Pump
O-Rings
diaphragm housing cover and remove
the cover.
2. Remove the o-rings. [1]
Replacement
Install
Vacuum
1. Place the o-rings. [1] in the vacuum pump.
Pump O-
Rings
four (4) screws.

icon.
4. Check for Leaks.
four (4) screws.
L1.11 Breaker, 3A Version - 96666-109_1016_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89060-02 Breaker, 3A Main P/S
L1.11 Breaker, 3A

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The main power supply weighs 57.3 lbs (26 kg).
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
3. Unplug the processing module from the AC
supply power.
4. Open the card cage (right front) door and pump
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
1. Disconnect the AC/DC Driver, STR Driver, and
Screws (Front)
Refrigerator/Emergency connectors from the
front of the main power supply.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the power
supply (front) to the processing module frame.
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
remove the two (2) screws securing the power
Ground
cord retainer on the rear of the power supply
and unplug the power cord. [1]
2. Unplug the voltage selection plug [2] from the
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
connector panel, remove the panel and place
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
supply (rear) to the processing module frame.
2. Remove the nut, lock washer, and flat washer,
and disconnect the chassis ground from the lug
located by the base of the power supply.
3. Disconnect the SH power input connector from
the SMD/SH power supply.
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
1. Disconnect the following plugs/wires from the
right side of the power supply:
Remove Main
Transformer
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the main
transformer cover.
2. Remove the main transformer cover.
terminal strip cover.
4. Remove the terminal strip cover and wires T1-
1 through T1-8 from the terminal strip on the
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
1. Slide the power supply to the rear of the
processing module and remove it from the
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
1. Remove the nine (9) screws securing the main
power supply right side cover.
Access Breaker
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the front
panel of the main power supply.
2. Pull the front panel forward enough to access
the breaker.
Remove
Breaker, 3A,
1. Push in on the tabs on the side of the breaker
(CP6 & CP4)
to release it from the front panel.
2. Remove the connectors from the lugs on the
breaker and remove the breaker to the front of
the front panel.
Replacement
Install Breaker,
3A, (CP6 &
1. Secure the connectors to the lugs on the
CP4)
breaker and push the breaker in the
front panel until the tabs snap in place.
Install Front
Panel
1. Secure the front panel to the main power
supply with four (4) screws.
Install Right
Side Cover
1. Install the right side cover on the main
power supply with nine (9) screws.
Install Main
Power Supply
slide the power supply to the front of the
module.
Install Main
Transformer
1. Secure wires T1-1 through T1-8 to the
terminal strip on the transformer and
secure the terminal strip cover with two
(2) screws.
2. Replace the main transformer cover and
secure with three (3) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
1. Connect the following plugs/wires to the
Install PS
Securing Screws
1. Connect the SH power input connector
(Rear)
to the SMD/SH power supply.
2. Secure the chassis ground to the lug
located by base of power supply with a
nut, lock washer, and flat washer.
3. Secure the power supply to the
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
1. Secure the connector panel to the
processing module with two (2) screws.
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
1. Plug the voltage selection plug [2] in the
Selector and
transformer (verify correct voltage).
Ground
2. Secure the power cord and the
retainer [1] on the rear of the power
supply with two (2) screws.
Install PS
Securing Screws
1. From the front of the processing module,
(Front)
connect the AC/DC Driver, STR Driver,
and Refrigerator/Emergency connectors.
screws.
Note
Ensure that the emergency power
switch is in the ON position.
Install Front
Right Access
1. Secure the front right access panel [2] to
Panel
the processing module with four (4)
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
1. Install the pump center (center front)
door with two (2) screws.

2. Connect the processing module to the
AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
1 5712 - Voltages Test
L1.01 Power Supply, Main Version - 96666-109_1005_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93161-01 Power Supply, Main
7-93527-01 Main Power Supply, C8B
7-93527-02 Main Power Supply, C8B
L1.01 Power Supply, Main
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Power supply 93161 is used in c 8000 Subsection: System status.
processing modules with a serial number of
c800223 and below. Power supply 93527 is
used in c 8000 processing modules with a serial
number of c800224 and above.
Note
See Main Power Supply Compatibility.

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
1. from the rear of the processing module, remove
Selector and
the two (2) screws securing the power cord
Ground
retainer on the rear of the power supply and
unplug the power cord. [1]
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
connector panel, remove the panel and place on
the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
Cover
main transformer cover.
2. Remove the main transformer cover. [2]
Disconnect
Main
Transformer
from Main
2. Remove the terminal strip cover [1] and wires
Power Supply
T1-1 through T1-8 [2] from the terminal strip on
the transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Replacement
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
1. Secure wires T1-1 through T1-8 [2] to the
secure the terminal strip cover [1] with two
(2) screws.
Install Main
Transformer
1. Replace the main transformer cover [2]
Cover
and secure with three (3) screws. [1]
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing
1. Connect the SH power input connector to
Screws (Rear)
3. Secure the power supply to the processing
module frame with two (2) screws.
Install
Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
2. Secure the power cord and the retainer [1]
on the rear of the power supply with two
(2) screws.
Install PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Note
3. Connect the processing module to the AC

supply power.
Note
initialization.
5. Perform voltage checks:
P-117 +5VDC (PS1) Adjustment

P-119 +12VDC (PS3) Adjustment (if
installed)
P-120 DC, Lamp Power Supply
Adjustment
P-156 DAQ +15/-15VDC Check
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
1. Install the pump center (center front) door

four (4) screws.
L1.02 Power Supply, 5V 20A, PS1 Version - 96666-109_1006_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93162-01 Power Supply, 5V, 20A PS1
L1.02 Power Supply, 5V 20A, PS1

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
4. Open the card cage (right front) door and
Remove Pump
Door
pump center (center front) door and remove
the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Disconnect Plugs
1. Disconnect the plugs (+24V-2, +24-1, STR
driver) from the front of the electronics drawer.
Remove Filter
Plate
filter plate [2] to the front of the main power
supply and remove the filter plate.
Remove PS1
Terminal Block
1. Remove the cover [1] from terminal block on
Cover and Wires
PS1 and remove the wires from the terminal
block.
Remove PS1 5V
Power Supply
supply mounting plate to the main power
supply and slide PS1 out of the main power
supply.
2. Remove the tree (3) screws securing the
mounting plate and remove it from the PS1
power supply.
Replacement
Install PS1 5V
Power Supply
1. Secure the mounting plate to the PS1
power supply with three (3) screws.
2. Slide PS1 in the main power supply and
Install PS1
Terminal Block
1. Connect wires to terminal block and
Cover and Wires
install the terminal cover. [1]
Note
Verify the jumper bracket is in
the proper position.
Connect the
processing
1. Connect plugs +24V-2, +24V-1, STR
module to
drive to the electronics drawer.
Supply Power
AC supply power.
Power ON
Processing
Module.
Note
Adjust Voltage -
PS1
1. Perform P-117 +5VDC (PS1)
Adjustment.
Install Filter
Plate
1. Secure the filter plate [2] to the front of
the main power supply with three (3)
screws. [1]
Install Front
Right Access
1. Secure the front right access panel [2]
Panel
to the processing module with four (4)
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
procedure.
L1.03 Power Supply, 12V, 13A, PS2 Version - 96666-109_1007_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93443-01 Power supply, 12V, PS2, c8
L1.03 Power Supply, 12V, 13A, PS2

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Disconnect
Plugs
1. Disconnect the plugs (+24V-2, +24-1, STR
driver) from the front of the electronics drawer.
Remove Filter
Plate
filter plate to the front of the main power supply
and remove the filter plate. [2]
Remove
Terminal Block
1. Remove the cover [1] from terminal block on
Cover and
PS1 and remove the wires from the terminal
Wires
block.
Remove PS1
5VPower
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the supply
Supply
mounting plate to the main power supply and
slide PS1 out of the main power supply.
Remove PS2
Terminal Cover
1. Remove the terminal cover [1] from PS2 and
and Wires
remove the wires from the terminal block.
Remove PS2
Power Supply
mounting plate and the ground wires to the
main power supply.
2. Slide PS2 from the main power supply.
Remove PS2
Mounting Plate
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the
mounting plate.
Replacement
Install PS2
Mounting Plate
1. Secure the mounting plate on PS2 with
three (3) screws.
Install PS2
Securing
1. Slide PS2 in the main power supply.
Screws and
2. Secure PS2 and the ground wires to the
Ground Wires
main power supply with two (2) screws.
Install PS2
Terminal Cover
and Wires
Note
Install PS1
Power Supply
1. Slide PS1 in the main power supply and
Install PS1
Terminal Block
Cover and
Wires
Note
Connect
Processing
1. Connect plugs +24V-2, +24V-1, STR
Module to
drive to the electronics drawer.
Supply Power
AC supply power.
Power ON
Processing
Module.
Note
Adjust Voltage -
PS2
Adjustment.
Adjust Voltage -
PS1
Adjustment.
Install Filter
Plate
screws. [1]
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

procedure.
L1.04 Filter, Air, Main Power Supply Version - 96666-109_1009_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89179-02 Filter, air, main power supply
L1.04 Filter, Air, Main Power Supply

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
the pump center (center front) door.
Remove Pump
Door
pump center (center front) door and
remove the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from the
Panel
top of the front right access panel. [2]
2. Loosen the two (2) screws [3] at the
bottom of the panel, and remove the
access panel. [2]
Remove Air
Filter, Main
1. Remove the filter cover and the filter. [1]
Power Supply
Replacement
Install Air
Filter, Main
1. Install the filter and the filter cover.
Power
Supply
Install Front
Right
Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
L1.05 Power Supply, 12V 100W, PS3 Version - 96666-109_1010_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93163-01 Power Supply, 12V, 100W, PS3
L1.05 Power Supply, 12V 100W, PS3

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Serial number c800224 and above do not have System status.
this power supply installed in the main power
supply.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Remove Main
Power Supply
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the main
Fan
power supply fan mounting plate to the power
supply. [1]
2. Pull the fan out to access the fan power
connector and disconnect the fan power
connector. [2]
3. Remove the fan and mounting plate. [3]
Remove
Terminal Strip
1. Remove the terminal strip cover and remove the
wires from terminal strip on PS3. [1]
Remove PS3
Securing
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the PS3
Screws
mounting plate to the main power supply.
Remove PS3
12V Power
1. Slide PS3 from the main power supply and
Supply
remove the three (3) screws securing the
mounting plate to PS3.
Replacement
Install PS3
12V Power
1. Secure the mounting plate to PS3 with
Supply
three (3) screws and place the supply in
the main power supply.
Install PS3
Securing
1. Secure the PS3 mounting plate to the
Screws
main power supply with two (2) screws.
Install
Terminal
1. Secure the wires to the terminal strip and
Strip
install the terminal strip cover. [1]
Note
Verify the jumper bracket is in the
proper position.
Power ON
Processing
Module
supply power.
Note
initialization.
Adjust
Voltage -
1. Perform P-119 +12VDC (PS3) Adjustment.
PS2
Install
Main
1. Connect the fan power connector. [2]
Power
2. Place the fan in power supply [3], and
Supply
secure the mounting plate to the power
Fan
supply with four (4) screws. [1]
four (4) screws.
L1.06 Fan Version - 96666-109_1011_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89175-02 Fan,P/S,C Cage,Heater,RT Rear
L1.06 Fan

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
module).
3. Unplug the processing module from the
AC supply power.
Remove Main
Power Supply Note
Fan Fan airflow direction is OUT of
the power supply.
1. Remove the four (4) screws [1] securing
the main power supply fan mounting
plate to the power supply.
connector [2] and disconnect the fan
power connector.
Remove Fan
from
1. Remove the four (4) bolts/nuts securing
Mounting
the fan to the mounting plate.
Plate
Replacement
Install
Fan on Note
Mounting Fan rotation is clockwise when viewed from
Plate the rear of the power supply; air flow is to
the rear of the power supply.
1. Secure the fan to the fan mounting plate
with four (4) bolts/nuts.
Install
Main
Note
Power
Verify fan airflow direction is OUT of
Supply
the power supply.
Fan
1. Connect the fan power connector [2], place
the fan [3] in the power supply, and secure
the mounting plate to the power supply with

supply power.
Note
initialization.
3. Verify the fan blade is turning and the
direction of the air flow is out of the power
supply.
four (4) screws.
L1.07 Breaker, Circuit Main Version - 96666-109_1012_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93164-01 Breaker, Circuit Main
L1.07 Breaker, Circuit Main

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Remove
Main Circuit
Breaker
breaker mounting plate to the main power
supply. [2]
2. Pull the breaker from the rear of the power
supply far enough to access the wires. [3]
3. Remove the wires from the breaker.
4. Remove the mounting plate from the breaker. (4
screws) [4]
Replacement
Install
Main
1. Secure the mounting plate to the breaker
Circuit
with four (4) screws. [4]
Breaker
2. Secure the wires [3] to the breaker and
place in the power supply.
3. Secure the breaker [2] mounting plate to
the main power supply with four (4)
screws. [1]

supply power.
four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

L1.08 Power Supply, DC, Lamp Version - 96666-109_1013_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89291-02 Power supply, DC, lamp
2-89291-03 Power Supply, DC, Lamp
L1.08 Power Supply, DC, Lamp

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Disconnect CNN1
1. Remove the three (3) screws securing the DC
supply [1] to the main power supply.
2. Slide the DC power supply [1] to the rear of
the main power supply far enough to
disconnect CNN1. [2]
Remove Lamp
DC Power Supply
1. Continue sliding the DC power supply out of
the main power supply and remove the wires
from the terminal strip.
2. Disconnect the CNN-3 and CNN-2
connectors from the DC power supply and
slide the DC power supply out of the main
power supply.
Remove Lamp
DC Power Supply
1. Remove the DC power supply board from the
Mounting Plate
mounting plate (4 standoffs).
Replacement
Install Lamp DC
Power Supply
1. Place the DC power supply board on
Mounting Plate
the four (4) standoffs on the mounting
plate.
Connect CNN-3,
CNN-2, and
1. Connect CNN-3 and CNN-2.
Terminal Strip
2. Slide the DC power supply in the main
Wires
power supply far enough to allow
connection of the wires to the terminal
strip.
Connect CNN1
and Power ON
1. Connect CNN1. [2]
Processing
2. Slide the DC power supply [1] in the
Module
processing module.
Note
Do not secure the power supply
to the processing module at this
time.

AC supply power.
4. Power ON the processing module (use
the main circuit breaker located at the
Note
Adjust Lamp
Supply Voltage
1. Perform P-120 DC, Lamp Power Supply
Adjustment.
Secure DC
Power Supply
1. Secure the DC supply in the main
power supply with three (3) screws.

procedure.
L1.09 LED Bd., Main Power Supply Version - 96666-109_1014_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93165-01 LED Bd., Main Power Supply
7-93165-02 LED Bd., Main Power Supply
L1.09 LED Bd., Main Power Supply

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Remove LED
Mounting
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the LED
Bracket
mounting bracket.
Remove LED
Board (Main
1. Pull the mounting bracket from the inside of the
Power Supply)
main power supply and disconnect P.l2 and
P.l1 from LED board connections CNN2 and
CNN1.
2. Remove the LED board [2] from the mounting
bracket. [1]
Replacement
Install LED
Board
1. Mount the LED board [2] to the mounting
bracket. [1]
2. Connect P.l2 and P.l1 to the LED board
and place in the main power supply.
Install LED
Mounting
1. Install the two (2) screws to hold the LED
Bracket
mounting bracket in place.
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note

AC supply power.
Note
5. Ensure LEDs are illuminated.
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

procedure.
L1.10 Relay, Main Power Supply Version - 96666-109_1015_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93166-01 Relay, Main Power Supply
L1.10 Relay, Main Power Supply
Time Required 1 hr 15 min

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Serial number c800224 and above do not have Subsection: System status.
supply.

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Remove Main
Power Supply
1. Remove the wires from the relay (these relay
Relay
screws are non-captive).
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the relay
to the side of the main power supply.
Replacement
Install Main
Power Supply
1. Secure the relay to the side of the main
Relay
power supply with two (2) screws.
2. Attach the wires to the relay.
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
1. Plug the voltage selection plug in the
Selector and
Ground
2. Secure the power cord and the retainer
(2) screws.
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
List/Part Numbers
2-89061-02 Breaker, 5A main P/S
L1.12 Breaker, 5A

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Access Breaker
the breaker.
Remove
Breaker, 5A,
(CP5)
the front panel.
Replacement
Install Breaker,
5A, (CP5)
1. Secure connectors to lugs on breaker
and push breaker in front panel till tabs
snap in place.
Install Front
Panel
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
List/Part Numbers
2-89062-02 Breaker, 6A, main P/S
7-93528-01 Circuit Breaker, 8A
L1.13 Breaker, 6A
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

The 6A breaker is used only with power supply Subsection: System status.
93161 (c 8000 serial number c800223 and
below). The 8A breaker is used only with power
supply 93527 (c 8000 serial number c800224
and above).

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Refrigerator/Emergency connectors from the front
of the main power supply.
Remove
Power Cord,
1. From the rear of the processing module, remove
Voltage
the two (2) screws securing the power cord
Selector and
retainer on the rear of the power supply and
Ground
unplug the power cord. [1]
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
connector panel, remove the panel and place on
the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the terminal
strip cover.
4. Remove the terminal strip cover and wires T1-1
through T1-8 from the terminal strip on the
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Access
Breaker
the breaker.
Remove
Breaker, 6A,
1. Push in on the tabs on the side of the breaker to
(CP3)
release it from the front panel.
the front panel.
Replacement
Install Breaker,
6A, (CP3)
snap in place.
Install Front
Panel
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
List/Part Numbers
7-93167-01 Breaker, 10A
L1.14 Breaker, 10A

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Access Breaker
the breaker.
Remove
Breaker, 10A,
(CP2)
the front panel.
Replacement
Install Breaker,
10A, (CP2)
snap in place.
Install Front
Panel
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
List/Part Numbers
2-89059-02 Breaker, 15A main P/S
L1.15 Breaker, 15A

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Access Breaker
the breaker.
Remove
Breaker, 15A,
(CP1)
the front panel.
Replacement
Install Breaker,
15A, (CP1)
snap in place.
Install Front
Panel
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
L1.16 Breaker, preliminary power Version - 96666-109_1022_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93168-01 Breaker, preliminary power
L1.16 Breaker, preliminary power

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Remove
Preliminary
1. Remove the refrigerator/emergency plug from
Power Breaker)
the front panel of the main power supply.
2. Remove the eight (8) screws securing the
breaker to the mounting plate.
3. Move the breaker toward the inside of the main
power supply and remove the wires attached to
the breaker.
4. Remove the breaker from the main power
supply.
Replacement
Install
Preliminary
1. Secure the wires to the contacts on the
Power Breaker)
switch.
2. Place the switch in the cutout in the
mounting plate and secure it with eight
(8) screws.
3. Install the refrigerator/emergency plug in
the front panel of the main power supply.
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
L1.17 Regulator, LM350, TC1 Version - 96666-109_1023_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93169-01 Regulator, LM350, TC1
L1.17 Regulator, LM350, TC1

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Disconnect
CNN1
2. Slide the DC power supply to the rear of the
main power supply far enough to disconnect
CNN1. [2]
3. Disconnect CNN1.
Disconnect
DPS1, DPS2,
DPS3
the main power supply and remove DPS1
(brown), DPS2 (red), DPS3 (orange) from the
terminal strip.
Remove
Regulator,
1. Lay the main power supply on its left side to
LM350, TC1
allow access to the regulators mounted on the
heat sink.
2. Remove the screw securing the regulator [2] to
the heat sink.
3. Cut the wire ties that hold the wires to the
regulator from the power supply wire harness
and remove the regulator from the power
supply.
Replacement
Install
Regulator,
1. With insulating pad and spacer [1] in
LM350, TC1
place, secure the regulator [2] to the heat
sink with one (1) screw.
2. Using wire ties, secure wires from
regulator in power supply wire harness.
Connect DPS1,
DPS2, DPS3
1. Place main power supply in upright
position and attach DPS1 (brown), DPS2
(red), and DPS3 (orange) to the DC
supply terminal strip.
Connect CNN1
and Secure DC
1. Connect CNN1 [2] and slide the DC power
Power Supply
supply [1] in the main power supply.
2. Secure the DC supply in the main power
supply with three (3) screws.
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
secure the terminal strip cover with two (2)
screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Install
Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
2. Secure the power cord and the retainer on
the rear of the power supply with two (2)
screws.
Install PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Note

supply power.
Note
initialization.

Adjustment.
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

four (4) screws.
L1.18 Regulator, LM350, TC2 Version - 96666-109_1024_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93170-01 Regulator, LM350, TC2
L1.18 Regulator, LM350, TC2

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Disconnect
CNN1
2. Slide the DC power supply to the rear of the
main power supply far enough to disconnect
CNN1. [2]
3. Disconnect CNN1.
Disconnect
DPS4, DPS5,
DPS6
the main power supply and remove DPS4
(yellow), DPS5 (blue), and DPS6 (violet) from
the terminal strip.
Remove,
Regulator,
LM350, TC2
allow access to the regulators mounted on the
heat sink.
2. Remove the screw securing the regulator [2] to
the heat sink.
3. Cut the wire ties that hold the wires to the
regulator from the power supply wire harness
and remove the regulator from the power
supply.
Replacement
Install
Regulator,
1. With insulating pad and spacer [1] in
LM350, TC2
place, secure the regulator [2] to the heat
sink with one (1) screw.
2. Using wire ties, secure wires from
regulator in power supply wire harness.
Connect DPS4,
DPS5, DPS6
1. Place main power supply in upright
position and attach DPS4 (yellow), DPS5
(blue), and DPS6 (violet) to the DC supply
terminal strip.
Connect CNN1
and Secure DC
1. Connect CNN1 [2] and slide the DC power
Power Supply
supply [1] in the main power supply.
2. Secure the DC supply in the main power
supply with three (3) screws.
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
secure the terminal strip cover with two (2)
screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Install
Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
2. Secure the power cord and the retainer on
the rear of the power supply with two (2)
screws.
Install PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Note

supply power.
Note
initialization.

Adjustment.
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

four (4) screws.
L1.19 Rectifier, lamp supply Version - 96666-109_1025_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93171-01 Rectifier, lamp supply
L1.19 Rectifier, lamp supply

Multimeter
Heat Sink Compound
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Front)
Remove Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
transformer.
Remove
Connector
Panel
on the upper shelf.
Remove PS
Securing
Screws (Rear)
Disconnect
Plugs/Wires
Remove Main
Transformer
transformer cover.
transformer.
Remove Main
Power Supply
module.
Remove Right
Side Cover
Remove Lamp
Supply Rectifier
allow access to the rectifier.
2. Disconnect CN1 and CN2.
3. Remove one (1) screw securing the rectifier [1]
to the heat sink and remove the rectifier.
Replacement
Install Lamp
Supply Rectifier
1. Place a small film of heat sink compound
on the bottom side of the rectifier. [1]
2. Secure the rectifier to the bottom of the
heat sink with one (1) screw.
3. Connect CN1 and CN2.
Install Right
Side Cover
Install Main
Power Supply
module.
Install Main
Transformer
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs/Wires
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Rear)
screws.
Install Connector
Panel
Install Power
Cord, Voltage
Selector and
Ground
2. Secure the power cord and the retainer
(2) screws.
Install PS
Securing Screws
(Front)
screws.
Note

AC supply power.
Note

Adjustment.
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door

procedure.
L2.01 Power Supply, SMD/SH Version - 96666-109_1026_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93172-01 Power Supply, SMD/SH
7-93172-02 SMD/SH Power Supply, C8B
L2.01 Power Supply, SMD/SH

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The SMD/SH power supply weighs 29.3 lbs (13.3kg).
Removal

The SMD/SH Power supply, with consolidated Subsection: System status.
+24/+36VDC supplies, is used in c 8000 modules
with serial number c800224 and higher. Removal
and replacement procedures are the same for
this part.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Remove
Connectors
1. Disconnect the +24V-1, +24-2, and +24V-3
and Front
connectors.
Securing
2. Remove the two (2) screws from the front of the
Screws
power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
the four (4) screws securing the frame brace
(blocking the SMD/SH power supply).
Remove
SMD/SH
1. Disconnect connectors J1 through J6 and
Power Supply
INPUT.
2. Remove the bottom two (2) screws securing the
power supply to the processing module.
3. Slide the power supply out of the rear of the
processing module.
Replacement

Install
SMD/SH
Power
slide the power supply to front of the
Supply
module.
2. Install and tighten the two (2) screws
(bottom) securing the power supply to the
processing module.
3. Connect connectors J1 through J6 and
INPUT.
Install Rear
Frame
1. Secure the frame brace (in front of the
Brace
SMD/SH power supply) with four (4)
screws.
Secure
Power
Supply
secure the power supply with two (2)
screws (front bottom of the power supply).
2. Connect connectors +24V-1, +24-2, and
+24V-3.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
secure it with one (1) screw.
Panel
Close Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access panel with
Access
four (4) screws.
Panel
supply power.
four (4) screws.
Note

List/Part Numbers
7-93173-01 Breaker, 2A
L2.02 Breaker, 2A

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
securing the front middle access panel [3]
and loosen the two (2) bottom screws. [2]
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Remove the screw [1] securing the fluid
Panel
sense-AC/DC panel [2] and swing the panel
out.
Remove
Connectors and
Front Securing
connectors.
Screws
the power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
remove the four (4) screws securing the
frame brace (blocking the SMD/SH power
supply).
Remove SMD/SH
Power Supply
INPUT.
2. Remove the bottom two (2) screws securing
the power supply to the processing module.
processing module.
Remove SMD/SH
Power Supply
Cover
SMD/SH power supply cover and remove the
cover.
Remove Circuit
Breaker
(CP16/2amp)
front panel [5] to front of SMD/SH power
supply and remove the panel.
2. Remove the +24-3, +24-2, and +24-3
jacks [2] from the front panel.
3. Access the CP16 locking tabs (back of
panel). [3]
4. Press on the CP16 locking tabs to release
the circuit breaker [4] from the front panel
and slide it out of the panel.
5. Remove CP16 LN (top) and CP16 LD
(bottom).
Replacement
Install Circuit
Breaker
1. Route CP16 LN (top) and CP16 LD
(CP16/2amp)
(bottom) through the front panel and
connect to circuit breaker. [4]
2. Press circuit breaker in cutout in front
panel for CP16 until it locks in place.
Install Front
Panel
1. Install the +24-3, +24-2, & +24-3
jacks [2] in the front panel.
2. Secure the front panel [5] to the SMD/SH
power supply with four (4) screws. [1]
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the SMD/SH power supply cover
Power
Supply
Cover
Install
SMD/SH
Power
Supply
module.
processing module.
INPUT.
Install Rear
Frame Brace
screws.
Secure
Power
Supply
screws (front bottom of the power
supply).
+24V-3.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
Close Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access panel
Access
Panel
Prepare for
Operation For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
supply power.
Note

L2.03 Circuit Breaker 7.5A Version - 96666-109_1028_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93174-01 Breaker, 7.5A
L2.03 Circuit Breaker 7.5A
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Part number 93528 (8A breaker) is used on the Subsection: System status.
SMD/SH power supply with combined
+24/+35VDC power supply. Removal and
replacement procedures are the same for both
parts.

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Remove
Connectors and
Front Securing
connectors.
Screws
power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
remove the four (4) screws securing the frame
brace (blocking the SMD/SH power supply).
Remove
SMD/SH Power
Supply
INPUT.
processing module.
Remove
SMD/SH Power
Supply Cover
cover.
Remove Circuit
Breaker (CP7-
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the circuit
CP15/7.5amp)
breaker to the front panel.
2. Lift the circuit breaker out and to the rear.
3. Remove the two (2) wires attached to the
connectors (Line = CP7LN; Load = CP7LD).
Replacement
Install Circuit
Breaker (CP7-
1. Connect the load/line wires to the circuit
CP15/7.5amp)
breaker.
2. Slide the circuit breaker toggle switch
through the front panel and secure with
two (2) screws.
Install
SMD/SH
Power Supply
Cover
Install
SMD/SH
Power Supply
module.
(bottom) securing the power supply to
INPUT.
Install Rear
Frame Brace
screws.
Secure Power
Supply
screws (front bottom of the power
supply).
+24V-3.
Close Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Close Front
Middle Access
Panel
AC supply power.
Note

procedure.
L2.04 Filter, Air, SMD/SH P.S. Version - 96666-109_1029_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93175-01 Filter, Air, SMD/SH P.S.
L2.04 Filter, Air, SMD/SH P.S.

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Remove Air
Filter
1. Pull the filter guard off of the front of the
SMD/SH power supply and remove the filter.
Replacement
Install Air
Filter
1. Place the filter in the filter guard and push
the filter guard on the front of the
SMD/SH power supply.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
Close Front
Middle
Access
four (4) screws.
Panel
1. Close door(s).
L2.05 Fan, SMD/SH P.S. Version - 96666-109_1031_1
List/Part Numbers
L2.05 Fan, SMD/SH P.S.

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
out.
Remove
Connectors and
Front Securing
connectors.
Screws
the power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
remove the four (4) screws securing the
frame brace (blocking the SMD/SH power
supply).
Remove SMD/SH
Power Supply
INPUT.
processing module.
Remove SMD/SH
Power Supply
Cover
cover.
Remove Jacks
1. Remove jacks J1 through J6, and the jack
labeled INPUT from the SMD/SH rear panel.
2. Disconnect the fan plug.
Remove SMD/SH
Rear Panel
1. Remove four (4) screws securing the rear
panel to the SMD/SH power supply and
remove the rear panel from the power supply.
Remove SMD/SH
Power Supply Fan
1. Remove the four (4) bolts and nuts securing
the fan and fan guard to the rear panel, and
remove the fan.
Replacement
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the fan and fan guard to the rear
Power
panel with four (4) bolts & nuts.
Supply Fan
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the rear panel to the power
Rear Panel
Install Jacks
1. Install jacks J1 through J6, and the jack
labeled INPUT in the SMD/SH rear panel.
2. Connect fan plug.
Install
SMD/SH
Power
Supply
Cover
Install
SMD/SH
Power
Supply
module.
processing module.
INPUT.
Install Rear
Frame Brace
screws.
Secure
Power
Supply
screws (front bottom of the power supply).
+24V-3.
Power ON For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT

Processing System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Module Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
supply power.
Note

4. Verify the fan blade is turning and the
direction of the air flow is out of the
power supply.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
Install Front
Middle
Access
four (4) screws.
Panel
Prepare for
Operation
L2.06 Power Supply, 36V, (PS5) Version - 96666-109_1032_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93176-01 Power Supply, 36V
L2.06 Power Supply, 36V, (PS5)

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

This supply is only used on SMD/SH power Subsection: System status.
supplies with individual +24VDC and +36VDC
supplies (c 8000 serial number c800223 and
below).

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Remove
Connectors and
Front Securing
connectors.
Screws
the power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
Remove
SMD/SH Power
Supply
INPUT.
processing module.
Remove
SMD/SH Power
Supply Cover
cover.
Remove
Mounting
1. Remove three (3) screws securing the PS5
Screws and
mounting plate [2] to the frame of the SMD/SH
+36V Wiring
power supply. (Note the location of the ground
connection.) [1]
2. Lift up supply to disconnect the following +36V
connectors from the large terminal lugs.:
Two (2) brown wires to +36V (power) [3]

Two (2) black wires to +36V (ground) [4]
Disconnect AC
Wiring
1. Disconnect AC line from terminal block.
Gray wire (ps5n) to (N)

White wire (ps5L) to (L)
Green/yellow (PSE) to (FG)
Note
Red is connected to (+S), black to
(-S), and a jumper is located
between R.C. and G.
Remove PS5
36V Power
1. Lift the PS5 36V power supply out of the
Supply
PS5 36V power supply [3] to the mounting
plate. [2]
3. Remove the PS5 36V power supply.
Replacement
Install
Mounting
1. Secure the mounting plate [2] to the PS5 36V
Plate
power supply [3] with four (4) screws. [1]
Connect
AC Wiring
1. Place the PS5 power supply in the SMD/SH
power supply.
Connect AC line to terminal block.

Gray wire (ps5n) to (N)
White wire (ps5L) to (L)
Green/yellow (PSE) to (FG)
Note
Verify red is connected to (+S),
black to (-S), and the jumper located
between R.C. and G.
Install PS5
36V Power
1. Connect the following +36V wires to the large
Supply
terminal lugs.
Two (2) brown wires to +36V lug [3]

Two (2) black wires to +36 V ground lug [4]
2. Connect the ground [1] to the original location,

and secure the PS5 36V power supply mounting
plate [2] to the SMD/SH power supply frame with
three (3) screws.
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the SMD/SH power supply cover with four
Power
(4) screws.
Supply
Cover
Install
SMD/SH
1. From the rear of the processing module, slide the
Power
power supply to front of the module.
Supply
2. Install and tighten the two (2) screws (bottom)
securing the power supply to the processing
module.
3. Connect connectors J1 through J6 and INPUT.
Install Rear
Frame
1. Secure the frame brace (in front of the SMD/SH
Brace
power supply) with four (4) screws.
Secure
Power
1. From the front of the processing module, secure
Supply
the power supply with two (2) screws (front
bottom of the power supply).
2. Connect connectors +24V-1, +24-2, and +24V-3.
Power ON For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

Processing ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. Connect the processing module to the AC supply
Module Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
power.
and shutdown.
Note
on prior to turning on the processing

4. Verify the fan blade is turning and the direction of
the air flow is out of the power supply.
Measure
36V Output
1. Measure the +36 VDC at J1 pins 1 and 6.
2. Verify the voltage is +36VDC ±0.72VDC.
If specification is met, go to Close Fluid

Sense-AC/DC Panel.
If specification is not met, the power supply
is defective. Install a different power supply.
Close Fluid
Sense-
1. Close the fluid sense-AC/DC panel and secure it
AC/DC
with one (1) screw.
Panel
Close
Front
1. Secure the front middle access panel with four (4)
Middle
screws.
Access
Panel
Prepare for
Operation
2. Install the right rear cover and secure with four (4)
screws.
L2.07 Power Supply, 5V/12V (PS6) Version - 96666-109_1033_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93177-01 Power Supply, 5V12V
L2.07 Power Supply, 5V/12V (PS6)

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

There are two styles of this power supply. The older Subsection: System status.
version has a metal cover over it. The newer
version does not have a cover. Either type of supply
can be used and removal and replacement
procedures are the same.The new style was
incorporated into c 8000 serial number c800224 and
higher.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
3. Unplug the processing module from the AC supply
power.
Remove
Front
1. Remove the two (2) upper screws [1] securing the
Middle
front middle access panel [3] and loosen the two (2)
Access
bottom screws. [2]
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
Remove
Connectors
and Front
connectors.
Securing
Screws
power supply.
Remove
Rear Frame
Brace
Remove
SMD/SH
1. Disconnect connectors J1 through J6 and INPUT.
Power
Supply
processing module.
Remove
SMD/SH
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the SMD/SH
Power
power supply cover and remove the cover.
Supply
Cover
Remove
Jacks
1. Remove jacks J1 through J6, and the jack labeled
INPUT from the SMD/SH rear panel.
2. Disconnect the fan plug.
Remove
SMD/SH
1. Remove four (4) screws securing the rear panel to
Rear Panel
the SMD/SH power supply and remove the rear
panel from the power supply.
Remove
Terminal
1. Remove terminal block cover [1] and the following
Block Cover
wires from terminal block on PS6:
and Wires
+5V-1 = red
+5G = black
V2 = orange
G2 = black
V3 = blue
PSE = green/yellow
PS6L = white
PS6N = gray
Remove
PS6
1. Remove three (3) screws holding the PS6 mounting
5V/12V
plate to the frame of the SMD/SH power supply.
Power
(Note the location of the ground connection.) [1]
Supply
Note
The new style 5V/12V supply is mounted
directly to the SMD/SH supply and the
screws are accessed from the bottom of the
SMD/SH supply.
2. Lift the PS6 power supply [2] out of the SMD/SH

power supply.
3. Remove the three (3) screws [3] securing the PS6
5V/12V power supply to the mounting plate. [4]
Replacement
Install PS6
5V/12V
1. Secure the mounting plate [4] to the PS6 5V/12V
Power
power supply [2] with three (3) screws. [3]
Supply
2. Connect the ground to the original location, and
secure the PS6 5V/12V power supply mounting
plate to the SMD/SH power supply frame with
three (3) screws. [1]
Install
Terminal
1. Connect the following wires to the terminal block
Block Cover
on PS6:
and Wires
+5V-1 = red
+5G = black
V2 = orange
G2 = black
V3 = blue
PSE = green/yellow
PS6L = white
PS6N = gray
2. Install the terminal block cover. [1]
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the rear panel to the power supply with
Rear Panel
four (4) screws.
Install Jacks
1. Install jacks J1 through J6, and the jack labeled
INPUT in the SMD/SH rear panel.
2. Connect fan plug.
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the SMD/SH power supply cover with four
Power
(4) screws.
Supply
Cover
Install
SMD/SH
Power
Supply
module.
Install Rear
Frame Brace
Secure
Power
Supply
power.
and shutdown.
Note

Measure 5
volt and 12
1. Measure the 5 VDC at J5 pins 1 and 4.
Volt Power
Output
If specification is met, go to Step 3.
If specification is not met, the power
supply is defective. Install a different power
supply.
3. Measure the 12 VDC at J3 pins 1 and 4.

4. Verify the voltage is 12VDC ±0.6VDC.

Sense-AC/DC Panel.
If specification is not met, the power
supply is defective. Install a different power
supply.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
with one (1) screw.
Panel
Close Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access panel with four
Access
(4) screws.
Panel
Prepare for
Operation
(4) screws.
L2.08 Power Supply, 24V Switching (PS4) Version - 96666-109_1034_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93178-01 Power Supply, 24V Switching
L2.08 Power Supply, 24V Switching (PS4)

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

below).

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Remove
Connectors and
Front Securing
connectors.
Screws
the power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
Remove
SMD/SH Power
Supply
INPUT.
processing module.
Remove
SMD/SH Power
Supply Cover
cover.
Remove
Terminal Strip
1. Remove the terminal strip cover [1] and the
Cover and
following wires from the PS4 24V power supply
Wires
terminal strip:
Remove PS4
24V Power
1. Remove four (4) screws [1] holding the PS4
Supply
mounting plate to the frame of the SMD/SH
power supply. (Note location of the ground
connection.)
2. Lift the PS4 24V power supply [2] out of the
PS4 24V power supply to the mounting plate.
Replacement
Install PS4
24V Power
1. Secure the mounting plate to PS5 [2] with four
Supply
(4) screws. [3]
2. Connect the ground to the original location, and
secure the PS4 24V power supply mounting
plate to the SMD/SH power supply frame with
Install
Terminal
1. Connect the following wires to the terminal strip
Strip Wires
on PS4.
and Cover
2. Install the terminal strip cover.
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the SMD/SH power supply cover with
Power
four (4) screws.
Supply
Cover
Install
SMD/SH
1. From the rear of the processing module, slide
Power
the power supply to front of the module.
Supply
module.
Install Rear
Frame
Brace
Secure
Power
Supply

power.
and shutdown.
Note

4. Verify the fan blade is turning and the direction
of the air flow is out of the power supply.
Measure
+24 Volt
1. Measure the +24 VDC at J24-3 pins 1 and 3.
Power
Output
Sense-AC/DC Panel.
If specification is not met, perform.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
with one (1) screw.
Panel
Close Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access panel with four
Access
(4) screws.
Panel
Prepare for
Operation
(4) screws.
L2.09 Power Supply, 24/36V C8B (PS5) Version - 96666-109_922_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93543-01 24/36 Power Supply, C8B
L2.09 Power Supply, 24/36V C8B (PS5)

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

below).

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Remove
Connectors
and Front
connectors.
Securing
Screws
power supply.
Remove Rear
Frame Brace
Remove
SMD/SH
Power Supply
INPUT.
processing module.
Remove
SMD/SH
Power Supply
SMD/SH power supply cover [1] and remove the
(24/36) Cover
cover.
Remove
Screws
1. Remove four (4) screws [1] securing the PS5 to
Securing PS5
the frame of the SMD/SH power supply.
2. Access to the screws is on the underside of the
3. Lift the PS5 24/36V power supply [2] up to gain
access to the terminal strip.
Remove Wires
from Terminal
1. Rotate the terminal strip cover [1] for AC line
Strip and
connections out of the way.
Remove PS5
2. Remove the wires and bus bars [2] from the
PS5 24/36V power supply terminal strip [3]:
Remove PS5
1. Remove PS5 from the SMD/SH power supply.
2. Remove the four (4) screws [1] from the support
bracket [2] and remove bracket from the bottom
of the PS5 24/36 power supply.
Replacement
Install PS5 in
SMD/SH
1. Secure the mounting plate [1] to PS5 [2] with four
Power Supply
(4) screws.
2. Place PS5 into the SMD/SH power supply and
secure the PS5 24/36V power supply to the
SMD/SH power supply with four (4) screws
through the bottom of the frame.
Connect
Terminal
1. Connect wires and bus bars [2] to terminal
Strip Wires
strip [3].
2. Close cover [1] on AC line terminal strip.
Install
SMD/SH
1. Secure the SMD/SH power supply cover [1] with
Power Supply
four (4) screws.
(24/36) Cover
Install
SMD/SH
Power Supply
module.
Install Rear
Frame Brace
Secure
Power Supply
(24/36)

power.
and shutdown.
Note

Measure +24
Volt Power
1. Measure the +24 VDC at J24-3 pins 1 and 3.
Output

Sense-AC/DC Panel.
If specification is not met, perform.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC Panel
with one (1) screw.
Close Front
Middle
1. Secure the front middle access panel with four (4)
Access Panel
screws.
Prepare for
Operation
screws.
L3.01 Transformer Version - 96666-109_1035_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93179-01 Transformer
L3.01 Transformer

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard - For further information, see Safety Icons and Hazard Symbols. The transformer weighs 66.7 lbs
(30.3 kg).
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
power.
Remove
Voltage
Selector and
transformer.
Ground
2. Remove the nut, lock washer, and flat washer, and
disconnect the chassis ground from the lug located
between the transformer and the right side of the
processing module.
Remove
Main
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1] securing the main
Transformer
transformer cover. [2]
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the terminal
strip cover.
4. Remove the terminal strip cover and wires T1-1
through T1-8 from the terminal strip on the
transformer.
5. Remove the four (4) bolts [3] securing the
transformer to the frame.
6. Slide the transformer out of the processing module
toward the back.
Replacement
Install Main
Transformer
1. From the rear of the processing module, slide
the transformer into the processing module.
2. Secure the transformer to the processing
module frame with four (4) bolts. [3]
3. Secure wires T1-1 through T1-8 to the terminal
strip on the transformer and secure the
terminal strip cover with two (2) screws.
4. Replace the main transformer cover [2] and
Install
Voltage
1. Secure the chassis ground to the lug (located
Selector
by the transformer on the right side of the
and Ground
processing module) with a nut, lock washer,
and flat washer.

supply power.
(4) screws.
Note

M1.01 Card Cage w/o bds Version - 96666-109_1036_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93180-03 Card Cage w/bds.
7-93536-01 Card Cage, W/O Bds
7-93536-02 Card Cage, Without Bds (RoHS)
M1.01 Card Cage w/o bds

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Open the card cage (right front) door.
3. Disconnect the processing module from the AC
supply power.
Disconnect
CPU Cables
disconnect the two cables labeled CPU from the
main power supply.
2. Disconnect cables labeled CPU1 through CPU8
from the rear of the card cage.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove Main
Card Cage
1. Remove the two (2) screws located at the front
of the card cage and pull the card cage straight
out of the system.
Remove
Boards and
1. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews securing the
Cables
card cage front cover.
2. Disconnect the MECH LED cables from the
SMC board and the AC/DC Controller board.
3. Remove the card cage front cover.
4. Loosen the screws on the boards located above
the upper ejector and below the lower ejector.
5. Unplug the cable from the front of the CPU
board.
6. Press up on the upper ejectors and down on the
lower ejectors and remove all of the boards from
the card cage.
7. Remove the MECH LED board from the plastic
standoffs on the card cage front cover.
Replacement
Install
Boards
1. Install all the boards into the card cage and
and
secure with the screws above and below the
Cables
ejectors.
2. Connect the MECH LED cables to the SMC
board, and the AC/DC controller board.
3. Secure the card cage front cover using four (4)
thumbscrews.
Install
Main Card
1. From the front of the processing module, slide
Cage
the card cage in the processing module and
secure with (2) screws at the bottom front of the
card cage.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
two (2) screws.
Connect
CPU
1. From the rear of the processing module, connect
Cables
cables CPU1 through CPU8 to the rear of the
card cage.
2. Connect the two (2) power cables labeled CPU
to the main power supply.
(4) screws.
2. Close all doors.
supply power.
Note

1 6070 - Daily Maintenance
M1.02 Bd., DAQ Version - 96666-109_1037_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93181-03 Bd., DAQ
7-93181-04 DAQ board, RoHS compliant
7-93181-05 DAQ board NS, RoHS compliant
M1.02 Bd., DAQ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove DAQ
Board
card cage front cover and remove the card cage
front cover.
SMC board and the AC/DC controller board.
3. Loosen the two (2) screws on the board located
above the upper ejector and below the lower
ejector.
4. Press up on the upper ejector and down on the
lower ejector and remove the board [1] from the
card cage.
Replacement
Install
DAQ
1. With the upper ejector in the up position and the
Board
lower ejector in the down position, slide the board in
the correct position until the ejectors engage in upper
and lower supports.
2. Press down gently on the upper and up on the lower
ejectors to insert the board in the back plane. [1]
3. Connect the MECH LED cables to the SMC board
and the AC/DC controller board.
4. Secure the card cage front cover with four (4)
thumbscrews.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
1. Install the pump center (center front) door with two
Door
(2) screws.

1. Close all doors.
and shutdown.
Note
Startup procedure.
1 6001 - Save/Restore DAQ Data
M1.03 Bd., SMC Version - 96666-109_1038_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93182-02 Bd., SMC
7-93182-03 Bd., SMC (RoHS)
M1.03 Bd., SMC

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove SMC
Board
front cover.
ejector.
card cage.
Replacement
Install
SMC
Board
and lower supports.
ejectors to insert the board [1] in the back plane.
thumbscrews.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
(2) screws.

1. Close all doors.
and shutdown.
Note
Startup procedure.
M1.04 Bd., AC/DC Controller Version - 96666-109_1039_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93183-02 Bd., AC/DC Controller
7-93183-03 Bd., ACDC Controller (RoHS)
M1.04 Bd., AC/DC Controller

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove
AC/DC
Controller
Board
front cover.
ejector.
card cage.
Replacement
Install
AC/DC
Controller
lower ejector in the down position, slide the board
Board
in the correct position [1] until the ejectors engage
in upper and lower supports.
2. Press down gently on the upper and up on the
lower ejectors to insert the board in the back plane.
Note

Startup procedure.
6. Perform P-102 Reagent Center #1 Temperature
Detector Adjustment.
7. Perform P-103 Reagent Center #2 Temperature
8. Perform P-104 Sample Carousel Temperature
9. Perform P-105 Internal Instrument Temperature
10. Perform P-106 Water Bath Temperature Detector
Adjustment.
thumbscrews.
Install Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install Pump
Door
(2) screws.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close all doors.
M1.05 Bd., CPU Version - 96666-109_1040_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93184-03 Bd., CPU
7-93184-04 ROHS Compliant CPU Board
7-93184-07 CPU Bd, c8000 (RoHS)
M1.05 Bd., CPU

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove CPU
Board
front cover.
3. Loosen the four (4) screws on the board located
ejector.
4. Disconnect the Ethernet cable [1] from the front
of the CPU board. [2]
lower ejector and remove the board from the
card cage.
Replacement
Install
CPU
Board
and lower supports.
ejectors to insert the board in the back plane.
3. Secure the board in the card cage with the screws
located above the upper ejector and below the lower
ejector.
4. Connect the Ethernet cable to the front of the CPU
board.
thumbscrews.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
(2) screws.

1. Close all doors.
and shutdown.
Note
Startup procedure.
M1.06 Cable, CPU Ethernet Version - 96666-109_1043_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93185-01 Cable, CPU Ethernet
M1.06 Cable, CPU Ethernet

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Unplug the processing module from the main AC
supply power.
4. Open the right front door.
Disconnect
CPU Cables
main power supply.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove Main
Card Cage
out of the system.
Remove CPU
Board
front cover.
ejector.
4. Unplug the cable from the front of the CPU
board.
card cage.
Remove CPU
Ethernet Cable
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the cover
plate on the right side of card cage next to the
CPU slots.
2. Remove the cover plate.
3. Cut the wire tie securing the Ethernet cable.
4. Remove the six (6) screws securing the back
plane cover and remove the cover.
5. Remove the Ethernet cable attached to the back
plane cover.
Replacement
Install
CPU
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the back plane cover.
Ethernet
2. Secure the back plane cover with six (6) screws.
Cable
3. Route the Ethernet cable with a wire tie.
4. Secure the cover plate (on right side of the card cage
next to the CPU slots) with two (2) screws.
Install
CPU
Board
and lower supports.
ejector.
board.
thumbscrews.
Install
Main
1. From the front of the processing module, slide the
Card
card cage in the processing module and secure with
Cage
(2) screws at the bottom front of the card cage.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
(2) screws.
Connect
CPU
Cables
cables CPU1 through CPU8 to the rear of the card
cage.
2. Connect the two (2) power cables labeled CPU to the
main power supply.
screws.
and shutdown.
2. Close all doors.
power.
Note

Startup procedure.
M1.08 Bd., MECH LED Version - 96666-109_1045_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93187-01 Bd., Mech LED
7-93187-02 Bd., Mech LED
M1.08 Bd., MECH LED

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove
MECH LED
Board
card cage front cover and remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the MECH LED cables LED1 and
LED2 from the MECH LED board.
3. Remove the MECH LED board from the plastic
standoffs on the card cage cover.
Replacement
Install MECH
LED Board
1. Install the MECH LED board on the plastic
standoffs on the card cage cover.
2. Connect the MECH LED cables to CN1 and CN3
on the MECH LED board.
Note

5. Verify correct LED operation.
thumbscrews.
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
Install Pump
Door
two (2) screws.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close all doors.
1 G31 - Boards/Cables Verify board/cable is installed, correctly
positioned and cable/connector is securely
fastened.
2 G61 - LED Operation Verify correct LED operation.
M1.09 Fan assy., main card cage Version - 96666-109_1046_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93188-01 Fan assy, main card cage
M1.09 Fan assy., main card cage

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove Card
Cage Fan
Assembly
card cage front cover [1] and remove the card
cage front cover.
2. Disconnect the MECH LED cables [2] from the
3. Disconnect the power cable [3] to fan assembly
(red and blue wires).
4. Remove the two (2) screws on front of fan
assembly [4] and pull the assembly straight out
of the card cage.
Replacement
Install Card
Cage Fan
1. Slide the fan assembly [4] straight in the card
Assembly
cage and secure with two (2) screws.
2. Connect the power cable [3] to fan assembly
(red and blue wires).
3. Connect the MECH LED cables [2] to the SMC
board and the AC/DC controller board.
Note

6. Verify that the fan blades are turning.
thumbscrews. [1]
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
Install Pump
Door
two (2) screws.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close all doors.
M1.10 Bd., Pressure Monitor Version - 96666-109_1047_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86305-01 BD, Pressure Monitor
7-86305-02 BD, Pressure Monitor
M1.10 Bd., Pressure Monitor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove
Pressure
Monitor Board
front cover.
3. Loosen the two (2) screws on the board [1]
located above the upper ejector and below the
lower ejector.
card cage.
Replacement
Install
Pressure 1. Ensure that switch bank one is set correctly with only
Monitor switch 7 turned on.
Board 2. With the upper ejector in the up position and the
and lower supports.

thumbscrews.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
(2) screws.

for 1. Close all doors. ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Operation 2. Power ON the processing module. Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
Note and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
1 3805 - Pressure Monitor Test
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT • i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.•
M1.11 Bd., Upper Back Plane Version - 96666-109_1048_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93190-01 Bd., Upper backplane
7-93190-02 Bd., Upper Backplane (RoHS Compliant)
M1.11 Bd., Upper Back Plane

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Disconnect
CPU Cables
main power supply.
Remove
Pump Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove Main
Card Cage
1. Remove the two (2) screws located at the front of
the card cage and pull the card cage straight out
of the system.
Remove
Boards
2. Disconnect the MECH LED cables from the SMC
board, disconnect the AC/DC controller board
and remove the front cover.
3. Remove the five (5) boards in the card cage.
Remove
Cables
1. Remove the six (6) screws securing the back
plane cover and remove the cover.
2. Remove the Ethernet cable attached to the back
plane cover.
3. Remove the wires from terminals TB1 through
TB14.
Remove
Upper Back
1. Remove the fifteen (15) screws securing the
Plane Board
upper back plane to the card cage frame.
2. Remove the upper back plane board.
Replacement
Install
Upper
1. Install the upper back plane board.
Back
2. Secure the upper back plane to the card cage
Plane
frame with fifteen (15) screws.
Board
Install
Cables
1. Connect wires from terminals TB1 through
TB14.
2. Connect the Ethernet plug to the back plane
cover.
3. Secure the back plane cover with six (6) screws.
Install
Boards
1. Install the five (5) boards in the card cage.
Install
Main Card
Cage
card cage.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
two (2) screws.
Connect
CPU
Cables
card cage.
(4) screws.
2. Close all doors.
supply power.
Note

M1.12 Bd., Lower Back Plane Version - 96666-109_1049_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93191-01 Bd., Lower backplane
7-93191-02 Bd., Lower backplane (RoHS)
M1.12 Bd., Lower Back Plane

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Disconnect
CPU Cables
main power supply.
Remove
Pump Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove Main
Card Cage
1. Remove the two (2) screws located at the front of
the card cage and pull the card cage straight out
of the system.
Remove
Boards
2. Disconnect the MECH LED cables from the SMC
board, disconnect the AC/DC controller board
and remove the front cover.
3. Remove the five boards in the card cage.
Replacement
Remove
Lower
1. Remove the six (6) screws [1] securing the back
Back Plane
plane cover [2] and remove the cover.
Boards
2. Remove the Ethernet cable [3] attached to the
back plane cover.
3. Remove the +5V and ground wires from the
terminal blocks. [4]
4. Remove the ten (10) screws [5] securing the
lower back plane to the card cage frame.
5. Remove the lower back plane board. [6]
Install
Lower
1. Install the lower back plane board. [6]
Back Plane
2. Secure the lower back plane to the card cage
Board
frame with the ten (10) screws. [5]
3. Install the +5V and ground wires to the terminal
blocks. [4]
Note
Ensure jumpers are installed on +5V and
GND terminals.
4. Connect the Ethernet plug [3] to the back plane

cover. [2]
5. Secure the back plane cover with six (6)
screws. [1]
Install
Boards
1. Install the five boards in the card cage.
screws.
Install Main
Card Cage
card cage.
Install
Front Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump Door
two (2) screws.
Connect
CPU
Cables
connect cables CPU1 through CPU8 to the rear
of the card cage.
instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and
four (4) screws.
shutdown.
2. Close all doors.
supply power.
Note

M1.13 Flash Memory, CPU Version - 96666-109_923_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93065-01 Flash Memory, CPU
7-93065-02 Flash Memory, CPU c8000
M1.13 Flash Memory, CPU

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove CPU
Board
front cover.
ejector.
4. Disconnect the Ethernet cable [1] from the front
of the CPU board. [2]
card cage.
Remove Flash
Memory
1. Slide the ejector tab [1] on the side of the flash
memory socket.
Note
This ejects the flash memory for removal.
Replacement
Install
Flash
1. Slide the flash memory into the socket until it latches
Memory
in place.
Install
CPU
Board
and lower supports.
ejector.
board.
thumbscrews.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
(2) screws.
1. Close all doors.
and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
M1.14 Card Cage w/ bds Version - 96666-109_924_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93180-03 Card Cage w/bds.
M1.14 Card Cage w/ bds

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Disconnect
CPU Cables
main power supply.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove Main
Card Cage
out of the system.
Remove
Boards and
Cables
SMC board and the AC/DC Controller board.
3. Remove the card cage front cover.
4. Remove the pressure monitor board from the
card cage.
Replacement
Install
Boards
1. Install all the pressure monitor boards into the
and
card cage and secure with the screws above
Cables
and below the ejectors.
board, and the AC/DC controller board.
3. Secure the card cage front cover using four (4)
thumbscrews.
Install
Main Card
Cage
card cage.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
two (2) screws.
Connect
CPU
Cables
card cage.
(4) screws.
2. Close all doors.
supply power.
Note

M2.01 Bd., Mixer Driver Version - 96666-109_1050_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89035-04 BD, Mixer Driver
2-89035-05 BD, Mixer Driver (RoHS)
M2.01 Bd., Mixer Driver

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
power.
4. Open the card cage (right front) and pump center
Disconnect
Plugs
1. From the rear of the processing module, disconnect
the following plugs from the rear of the electronic
drawer; STRD1, STRD2, 5SMD1, 5SMD2, 2SMD1,
2SMD2, 2SMD3, and 2SMD4.
2. Disconnect plug CPU3 from the rear of the master
card cage.
3. Disconnect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN (coming
from the rear of the electronics drawer).
Remove
Pump Door
Remove
Front Right
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from the top of the
Access
front right access panel. [2]
Panel
2. Loosen the two (2) screws [3] at the bottom of the
panel, and remove the access panel. [2]
Remove
Electronics
1. Disconnect plugs from the front of the electronics
Drawer
drawer, +24V-2, +24V-1, STR DRIVER.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from the front of the
electronics drawer [2] which secure it in the
processing module.
3. Pull the electronics drawer as far out of the
processing module as the drawer slide allows.
Remove
Mixer
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the top plate
Driver
on the electronics drawer.
Board
2. Lift the top plate up carefully and remove from the
drawer.
Note
All the components in the electronic drawer
are mounted to the top plate.
3. With the top plate of the electronics drawer laying

with the components up, disconnect the following
plugs from the mixer driver board; STRD1, STRD2,
STRD3, and STRD4.
4. Lift the mixer driver board off of the four (4)
mounting standoffs to remove from the top plate.
Replacement
Install
Mixer
1. Place the mixer driver board onto the four (4)
Driver
mounting standoffs. Ensure that the board is locked
Board
in place.
2. Connect plugs STRD1, STRD2, STRD3, and
STRD4.
Install
Electronics
1. Place the top plate carefully back on the electronics
Drawer
drawer and secure with two (2) screws.
drawer all of the way in the processing module and
secure in place with two (2) screws on the front of
the electronics drawer.
3. Connect plugs to the front of the electronics drawer,
+24V-2, +24V-1, STR DRIVER.
Install
Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs
1. From the rear of the processing module, connect the
following plugs to the rear of the electronic drawer;
STRD1, STRD2, 5SMD1, 5SMD2, 2SMD1, 2SMD2,
2SMD3, and 2SMD4.
2. Connect plug CPU3 to the rear of the master card
cage.
3. Connect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN coming from
the rear of the electronics drawer.

1. Close the card cage (right front) and pump center
and shutdown.
2. Connect the processing module AC supply power.
screws.
Note

Startup procedure.
1 3126 - Mixer Vibration Test
M2.02 Bd., SMD Version - 96666-109_1051_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203882-01 BD, SMD, New Style, (RoHS)
7-93193-01 Bd., SMD
M2.02 Bd., SMD

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Preparation
module).
3. Unplug the processing module from the
AC supply power.
4. Open the card cage (right front) and
Disconnect
Plugs (For
1. From the rear of the processing
S/N c802506
module, disconnect the following plugs
and below)
from the rear of the electronics drawer;
STRD1, STRD2, 5SMD1, 5SMD2,
2SMD1, 2SMD2, 2SMD3, and 2SMD4.
2. Disconnect plug CPU3 from the rear of

the master card cage.
3. Disconnect the two (2) plugs labeled

FAN coming from the rear of the
electronics drawer.
Disconnect
Plugs (For
1. From the rear of the processing
S/N c802507
module, disconnect the following plugs
and above)
from the rear of the electronics drawer;
STRD1, STRD2, 5SMD1,5SMD2,
2SMD1, 2SMD2,2SMD3, 2SMD4, and
2SMD5.
Note
Plug 2SMD5 is for a system that
is equipped with peristaltic high
concentration waste pump.
2. Disconnect plug CPU3 from the rear of

the master card cage.
3. Disconnect the two (2) plugs labeled

FAN coming from the rear of the
electronics drawer.
Remove
Pump Door
the pump center (center front) door and
remove the door.
Remove
Front Right
Access Panel
access panel. [2]
Remove
Electronics
1. Disconnect plugs from the front of the
Drawer
electronics drawer, +24V-2, +24V-1,
STR DRIVER.
front of the electronics drawer [2] which
secure it in the processing module.
3. Pull the electronics drawer as far out of
the processing module as the drawer
slide allows.
Remove
SMD Board
93193
the top plate on the electronics drawer.
(For S/N
c802506 and 2. Lift the top plate up carefully and
below) remove from the drawer.
Note
All the components in the
electronics drawer are mounted
to the top plate.
3. With the top plate of the electronics

drawer laying with the components up,
disconnect the following plugs from the
SMD board; SMD1 through SMD18.
4. Lift the SMD board off of the six (6)

mounting standoffs to remove from the
top plate.
Remove
RoHS SMD
Board
the top plate on the electronics drawer.
203882
(For S/N 2. Lift the top plate up carefully and
c802507 and remove from the drawer.
above)
Note
All the components in the
electronics drawer are mounted
to the top plate.
3. With the top plate of the electronics

drawer laying with the components up,
disconnect the following plugs from the
SMD board; SMD1 through SMD20.
Note
There is no SMD5 on this board.
4. Lift the SMD board off of the six (6)

mounting standoffs to remove from the
top plate.
Replacement
Install
SMD
1. Place the SMD board onto the six (6)
Board
mounting standoffs. Ensure that the board
93193
is locked into place.
(For S/N
c802506 2. Connect plugs SMD1 through SMD18.
and
below)
Install
RoHS
1. Place the SMD board onto the six (6)
SMD
mounting standoffs. Ensure that the board
Board
is locked into place.
203882
(For S/N 2. Connect plugs SMD1 through SMD20.
c802507
and Note
above) There is no SMD5 on this board.
Install
Electronics
1. Place the top plate carefully back on the
Drawer
electronics drawer and secure with two (2)
screws.
slide the drawer [2] all of the way in the
processing module and secure in place
with two (2) screws [1] on the front of the
electronics drawer.
3. Connect plugs to the front of the
electronics drawer, +24V-2, +24V-1, STR
DRIVER.
Install
Front
Right
Access
screws. [1] [3]
Panel
Install
Pump
Door
Connect
Plugs
(For S/N
connect the following plugs to the rear of
c802506
the electronics drawer; STRD1, STRD2,
and
5SMD1, 5SMD2, 2SMD1, 2SMD2, 2SMD3,
below)
and 2SMD4.
2. Connect plug CPU3 to the rear of the

master card cage.
3. Connect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN
coming from the rear of the electronics
drawer.
Connect
Plugs
(For S/N
connect the following plugs to the rear of
c802507
and
5SMD1, 5SMD2, 2SMD1, 2SMD2, 2SMD3,
above)
2SMD4, and 2SMD5.
Note
Plug 2SMD5 is for a system that is
equipped with peristaltic high
2. Connect plug CPU3 to the rear of the
master card cage
3. Connect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN

coming from the rear of the electronics
drawer.

1. Close the card cage (right front) and pump
2. Connect the processing module AC supply
power.
four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

M2.03 Bd., 5 phase Motor Driver Version - 96666-109_1052_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89042-02 BD,5 Phase motor driver
7-203881-01 BD, 5 Phase Motor Driver, New Style (RoHS)
M2.03 Bd., 5 phase Motor Driver

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
supply power.
Disconnect
Plugs
(For S/N
disconnect the following plugs from the rear of
c802506 and
the electronics drawer; STRD1, STRD2, 5SMD1,
below)
5SMD2, 2SMD1, 2SMD2, 2SMD3, and 2SMD4.
2. Disconnect plug CPU3 from the rear of the

master card cage.
3. Disconnect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN

coming from the rear of the electronics drawer.
Disconnect
Plugs
(For S/N
disconnect the following plugs from the rear of
c802507 and
above)
5SMD1,5SMD2, 2SMD1, 2SMD2,2SMD3,
2SMD4, and 2SMD5.
Note
equipped with peristaltic high
2. Disconnect plug CPU3 from the rear of the

master card cage.
3. Disconnect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN

coming from the rear of the electronics drawer.
Remove Pump
Door
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
Remove
Electronics
1. Disconnect plugs from the front of the
Drawer
electronics drawer, +24V-2, +24V-1, STR
DRIVER.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from the front of
the electronics drawer [2] which secure it in the
processing module.
3. Pull the electronics drawer as far out of the
processing module as the drawer slide allows.
Remove 5-
phase Motor
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the top
Driver Board
plate on the electronics drawer.
89042
(For S/N 2. Lift the top plate up carefully and remove from
c802506 and the drawer.
below)
Note
All the components in the electronics
drawer are mounted to the top plate.
3. With the top plate of the electronics drawer

laying with the components up, disconnect the
top and bottom of the 5-phase motor driver
board.
5PMD1 = Reaction Carousel
5PMD2 = Sample Pipettor up/down
5PMD3 = Sample Pipettor Horiz.
5PMD4 = R1 Supply Center inner
5PMD5 = R1 Supply Center outer
5PMD6 = R2 Supply Center

Note
The plugs are both labeled
5PMD#, with # being the 5-phase
motor driver number.
4. Remove the four (4) screws securing the 5-

phase motor driver to the mounting plate and lift
from the plate to remove.
Remove RoHS
5-phase Motor
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the top
Driver Board
plate on the electronics drawer.
203881
(For S/N 2. Lift the top plate up carefully and remove from
c802507 and the drawer.
above)
Note
All the components in the electronics
drawer are mounted to the top plate.
3. With the top plate of the electronics drawer

laying with the components up, disconnect the
three plugs from the 5-phase motor driver board.
5PMD1 = Reaction Carousel
5PMD2 = Sample Pipettor up/down
5PMD3 = Sample Pipettor Horiz.
5PMD4 = R1 Supply Center inner
5PMD5 = R1 Supply Center outer

5PMD6 = R2 Supply Center
Note
The three plugs are labeled
5PMD#, with # being the 5-phase
motor driver number.
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the 5-

phase motor driver to the mounting plate and lift
from the plate to remove.
Replacement
Install 5-
phase Motor
1. Place the 5-phase motor driver board onto the four
Driver Board
(4) spacers on the top plate and secure with four
89042
(4) screws.
(For S/N
c802506 2. Connect the two plugs for the 5-phase motor
and below) driver board to the top and bottom of the board.
Install RoHS
5-phase
1. Place the RoHS 5-phase motor driver board onto
Motor Driver
the top plate and secure with two (2) screws.
Board
203881 Note
(For S/N An adapter plate [1] is required when
c802507 installing a newer version of RoHS 5- phase
and above) Motor Driver Board [2] onto an older version
of mounting plate. This adapter plate is
shipped with the RoHS 5-phase Motor
Driver Board.
2. Connect the three plugs for the 5-phase motor

driver board to the board.
Install
Electronics
1. Place the top plate carefully back on the
Drawer
electronics drawer and secure with two (2) screws.
drawer [2] all of the way in the processing module
and secure in place with two (2) screws [1] on the
front of the electronics drawer.
3. Connect plugs to the front of the electronics
drawer, +24V-2, +24V-1, STR DRIVER.
Install Front
Right
Access
Panel
Install Pump
Door
(2) screws.
Connect
Plugs
(For S/N
the following plugs to the rear of the electronics
c802506
and below)
2SMD2, 2SMD3, and 2SMD4.

cage.
3. Connect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN coming

from the rear of the electronics drawer.
Connect
Plugs
(For S/N
the following plugs to the rear of the electronics
c802507
and above)
2SMD2, 2SMD3, 2SMD4, and 2SMD5.
Note
equipped with peristaltic high concentration
waste pump.

cage.
3. Connect the two (2) plugs labeled FAN coming

from the rear of the electronics drawer.

1. Close the card cage (right front) and pump center
and shutdown.
2. Connect the processing module AC supply power.
screws.
Note

sample handler from Stopped to Ready, perform
the Startup procedure.
M2.04 Fan, Electronics Drawer Version - 96666-109_1054_1
List/Part Numbers
M2.04 Fan, Electronics Drawer

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
supply power.
Remove
Connector
Panel
connector panel and place the panel on the
upper shelf.
Remove
Electronics
1. Cut the wire ties for the two (2) fan cables.
Drawer Fan
2. Disconnect the FAN plug [1] for the fan being
removed.
3. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the fan
guard [4] and the fan [3] to the electronics
drawer and remove.
Replacement
Install
Electronics
1. Attach the fan [3] and the fan guard [4] to
Drawer
the electronics drawer with four (4)
Fan
screws. [2]
2. Connect the FAN plug(s). [1]
3. Secure the fan cables with wire ties.
Install
Connector
1. Attach the connector panel to the
Panel

1. Connect the processing module AC supply
power.
Note
initialization.
3. Verify the fan blades are turning and that

the air flow is toward the rear of the
processing module.
four (4) screws.
M3.01 Bd., ICT Preamp Version - 96666-109_1055_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89032-01 BD, ICT preamp
2-89032-02 BD, ICT preamp
2-89032-04 BD, ICT Preamp (RoHS)
M3.01 Bd., ICT Preamp

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Disconnect
IREF Level
1. Remove the screw from the detector board
Detector Board
2. Disconnect CN1 and CN2 [1] from the IREF
level detector board.
Remove ICT
Pre-Amp Board
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pre-
amp enclosure door and remove the door.
2. Disconnect the ICT pre-amp cable [1] from the
top of the pre-amp enclosure.
3. Disconnect the signal cable [3] from the bottom
of the pre-amp.
4. Loosen the retaining nut on the pre-amp
cable [2] connector at the top of the enclosure.
5. Remove the cable connector from the case.
6. Remove the screw securing the ground wires.
7. Remove the pre-amp board from the standoffs.
Replacement
Install ICT
Pre-Amp
1. Place the pre-amp board onto the
Board
standoffs in the pre-amp enclosure.
2. Attach the grounding wires.
3. Place the pre-amp cable [2] connector
into the top of the enclosure and secure
with the retaining nut.
4. Connect the signal cable [3] and the pre-
amp cable. [1]
5. Secure the pre-amp enclosure door with
(2) screws.
Connect
IREF Level
1. Connect CN1 and CN2 [1] to the IREF
Detector
level detect board.
Board
2. Install the detector board cover and
secure with a screw.
four (4) screws.
Note

1 G6 - Calibration Verify calibration per operator's manual.
M3.02 Bd., IREF Level Detector Version - 201984-103_925_1
List/Part Numbers
2-93509-01 BD., IREF LVL Detect
2-93509-02 BD., IREF LVL Detect
M3.02 Bd., IREF Level Detector

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove IREF
Level Detector
1. Remove the screw from the detector board
Board
2. Disconnect CN1 and CN2 [1] from the IREF
level detector board.
3. Remove the detector board from the four
standoffs.
Replacement
Install
IREF
1. Install the IREF Level detector board on the four
Level
standoffs.
Detector
2. Connect CN1 and CN2 [1] to the detector board.
Board

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
5. Confirm the LEDs on the detector board function as
indicated during ICT reference solution aspiration.
Immediately before the ICT assembly drives

down and aspirates ICT reference solution out
of the ICT reference solution cup, LED1 flashes
ON (read status) and LED2 flashes ON (ICT
reference cup is filled).
Immediately after the ICT aspirates ICT
reference solution from the ICT reference
solution cup and the assembly drives up out of
the cup, LED1 flashes ON and LED2 stays
OFF.
6. Install detector cover and secure with screw.

screws.
M4.01 Bd., LLS c8 Version - 96666-109_1056_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93195-02 Bd., LLS
7-93195-03 Bd., LLS
7-93195-04 Bd., LLS
M4.01 Bd., LLS c8

Tools/Materials Standard Tool KIt
Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
out.
Remove Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Loosen the three (3) screws securing the fluid
Panel Cover
sense-AC/DC panel cover and remove the
cover.
Remove LLS
Board
1. Remove the screw and disconnect ground wire
from the processing module frame.
2. Disconnect TLLS1 through TLLS5 from the
LLS board.
3. Remove the LLS board from the standoffs.
Replacement
Install LLS
Board
1. Install the LLS Board onto the standoffs.
2. Connect the ground wire to the
processing module frame with one (1)
screw.
3. Connect TLLS1 through TLLS5 to the
LLS board.
Note
Perform
Voltage
1. Perform P-124 LLS Voltage Adjustment.
Adjustments on
LLS Board
Install Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Install the cover onto the fluid sense-
Panel Cover
AC/DC panel and secure with three (3)
screws.
Install Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Install Front
Middle Access
Panels
door.
procedure.
1 3625 - Pipettors LLS Test
M4.02 Bd., AD/DC driver Version - 96666-109_1057_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93196-01 Bd., AC/DC Driver
7-93196-02 Bd., AC DC Driver
M4.02 Bd., AD/DC driver

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Front
Middle Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
out.
Remove Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Loosen the three (3) screws securing the fluid
Panel Cover
sense-AC/DC panel cover and remove the
cover.
Remove AC/DC
Driver Board
1. Disconnect plugs AC/DC 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15,16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25 and 26.
2. Remove the AC/DC driver board from the
standoffs.
Replacement
Install AC/DC
Driver Board
1. Install the AC/DC driver board onto the
standoffs.
2. Connect plugs AC/DC 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15,16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25 and
26.
Install Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC Panel
Cover
screws.
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC Panel
Install Front
Middle
Access
Panels
door.
Note

M5.01 Bd., CNN Version - 96666-109_1058_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93197-02 Bd., CNN
7-93197-03 Bd., CNN
M5.01 Bd., CNN

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
CNN Board
1. Disconnect the plugs from connectors CN1 through
CN21 and CN25.
2. Disconnect all ground wires.
Note
There is a small release tab on the ground
wire connector. Press the tab to remove the
connector.
3. Remove the CNN board [1] from the six (6)

standoffs.
Note
The standoffs have locking tabs and require
that you press on the locking tab while lifting
the board from the standoff.
Replacement
Install
CNN
1. Place the CNN board [1] onto the six (6)
Board
standoffs and ensure that the locking tabs
engage.
2. Plug DB1 Through DB21 and CN25 onto
CNN board.
3. Connect the ground wires onto the CNN
board.

four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

N1.01 Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1059_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93198-01 Water Bath
N1.01 Water Bath

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Drain the water bath (1101 Robotics Test Tool -
Option 11).
and the bridge.
4. Remove the sample and reagent probes from
the pipettors.
5. Remove the ICT probe from the ICT assembly.
6. Remove the mixers from the mixer assembly.
cover.
cover.
12. Remove the two (2) screws securing the center
rear deck and remove the deck.
13. Remove the two (2) screws securing the left
14. Remove the screw securing the mixer deck and
remove the deck.
carousel and place in a safe location.
Remove
Reaction
1. Mark the reaction carousel drive gear in
Carousel Main
relationship to the main gear. [1]
Gear
2. Remove the three (3) screws (1 screw per guide
roller) securing the three (3) upper guide
rollers. [2]
3. Disconnect the spring from the floating guide
roller assembly [3] and move the floating guide
roller away from the reaction carousel.
4. Remove the cuvette wash head from the wash
elevator.
Caution
When removing the reaction carousel
main gear (Step 5), avoid damaging the
reaction carousel home sensor.
5. Lift the reaction carousel main gear out of the

processing module.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
Remove Water
Bath Assembly
1. Disconnect the trigger plug [1] from TRIG
connector.
2. Disconnect the float switch connector. [2]
3. Remove tubing R1, R2, 13, 11, & S from the
waste cup tubing mount. [4]
4. Disconnect the BTEMP plug [3] (for the water
bath temperature feedback diode) from the
connector plate and remove the connector from
the plate.
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the ICT
reference cup assembly to the water bath.
6. Disconnect tubing 12 and 13 from the ICT
reference cup.
7. Gently lift the ICT reference cup assembly and
disconnect the ICT reference cup from the ICT
warming ring.
8. Lay the ICT reference cup out of the way.
9. Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubing [5] from
the bottom rear of the water bath.
10. Disconnect the fill [6] and ICT warming return [7]
tubing from the right bottom of the water bath.
11. Disconnect the tubing [8] from the six (6) fittings
on the front bottom of the water bath.
12. Remove the nine (9) screws [9] securing the
water bath to the upper frame and remove the
water bath assembly.
Replacement
Install Water
Bath
1. Place the water bath on the upper frame and
Assembly
secure with nine (9) screws. [9]
Caution
Ensure that the guide pins for the
water bath are fully engaged and that
the surrounding tubing and cables are
not under the water bath.
2. Connect the tubing [8] to the six (6) places on

the bottom front of the water bath. (inlet,
outlet, three (3) waste)
3. Connect the fill [6] and ICT warming return [7]
tubing to the right bottom of the water bath.
bottom rear of the water bath.
5. Connect the output side of the ICT warming
ring to the ICT reference cup.
6. Secure ICT reference cup to the water bath
7. Connect the tubing 12 and 13 to ICT
reference cup.
8. Install the BTEMP connector into the
connector plate and plug in the BTEMP
plug. [3]
9. Insert tubing R1, R2, 13, 11, & S into the
waste cup tubing mount. [4]
10. Connect the float switch. [2]
11. Connect the trigger plug [1] to the TRIG
connector.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
Install
Reaction
1. Place the main gear on the lower guide
Carousel
rollers while aligning marks on the drive gear
Main Gear
made during removal.
2. Install the three (3) upper guide rollers. [2]
3. Move the floating guide roller against the
reaction carousel and attach the spring [3] on
the floating guide roller assembly.

Note
initialization.

3. Perform P-101 Reaction Carousel Alignment.
4. Perform P-126 ICT Alignment.
5. Perform P-106 Water Bath Temperature
6. Checks for leaks.
8. Secure the reaction carousel rear cover with
(2) thumbscrews.
9. Secure the reaction carousel front cover with
two (2) screws.
screws.
(2) screws.
12. Secure the right center rear deck with two (2)
screws.
screws.
15. Secure the mixer deck with one (1) screw.
four (4) screws.
17. Install the left rear cover and secure with four
(4) screws.
N1.02 Sensor, Trigger, Reaction Carousel Version - 96666-109_1060_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89356-02 Sensor, trigger, Reaction Crsl
N1.02 Sensor, Trigger, Reaction Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Sensor
1. Disconnect the trigger plug [1] from the TRIG
Trigger
connector.
2. Remove the screw securing the trigger sensor
mounting bracket [2] to the water bath and
remove the bracket.
3. Cut the wire tie [3] on the mounting bracket.
4. Remove the screw securing the trigger sensor [4]
to the mounting bracket and remove the trigger.
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Secure the trigger sensor [4] on the
Trigger
mounting bracket with one (1) screw.
2. Secure the trigger sensor cable to the
trigger sensor mounting bracket with the
wire tie. [3]
3. Secure the trigger sensor mounting
bracket [2] on the water bath with one (1)
screw.
4. Connect the trigger plug [1] to the TRIG
connector.
Note
initialization.
6. Select the Optics/Temperature category

from the Diagnostics screen under the
system icon.
7. Perform 1001 Optics Trigger Sensor
Check.

screws.
N1.03 Cuvette Wiper Version - 96666-109_1061_2
List/Part Numbers
09D42-02 Cuvette Wiper
N1.03 Cuvette Wiper

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
module. (Use the main circuit breaker
module).
2. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews

securing the center rear deck cover
Remove
Cuvette
1. Remove a cuvette segment at the
Wipers
front of the reaction carousel (where
no covers interfere).
2. Rotate the carousel manually until the
empty position exposes the cuvette
wiper assembly at the rear of the
water bath.

securing the cuvette wiper
assembly [1].
4. Move the mounting plate [1] to the left

and lift the plate out of the water bath.
5. Remove the cuvette wiper mounting
clip [3] and the cuvette wipers [2].
Note
Note
Replacement
Install
Cuvette
1. Insert the new cuvette wipers [2] into
Wipers and
the plate [1].
Wiper Plate
2. Snap the cuvette wiper mounting
clip [3] into place on the mounting
plate [1].
3. Reinstall the new wiper assembly [1]

into the analyzer and secure with
two (2) screws. [2]
4. Manually rotate the carousel and

verify that a cuvette segment passes
between the wipers while the wipers
contact both sides of the cuvette.
5. Reinstall the cuvette segment.

Note
Prepare for
Operation
1. Replace the reaction carousel rear
cover.
N1.04 Cup, ICT-Ref with Probes Version - 96666-109_1062_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93199-01 Cup, ICT Ref
7-93508-01 Cup, ICT-Ref with Probes
7-93508-02 Cup, ICT-Ref with Probes, RoHS
N1.04 Cup, ICT-Ref with Probes

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
remove the cover.
5. Remove the cuvette segment located
directly in front of the ICT reference
solution cup.
Disconnect CNN2
from ICT IREF Level
1. Remove the ICT IREF level detect board
Detect Board
cover [3] from the ICT preamp cover.
2. Disconnect CNN2 [1] from the ICT IREF
level detect board.
3. Remove wire ties [2] from harness for
removal of ICT reference solution cup
wires.
Remove ICT Ref

Cup
the ICT reference solution cup.
2. Disconnect tubing number 12 [2] from the
warming ring and tubing number 13 [3]
from the ICT reference solution cup.
3. Lift the ICT reference solution cup up to
gain access to the tubing connection [5]
between the warming ring and the cup.
4. Disconnect the warming ring from the cup.
5. Ensure that all wire ties [4] are removed to
allow removal of the wires for the ICT
reference solution cup.
6. Remove the ICT reference solution cup
Replacement
Install ICT Ref

Cup
1. Connect the output side of the ICT
warming ring [1] to the side of the ICT
reference solution cup with the small
tubing.
2. Connect tubing number 12 to the warming
ring inlet. [2]
3. Connect tubing number 13 [3] to the
flexible tubing coming out of the top of the
ICT reference solution cup.
Note
Ensure that tubing number 13 is
inserted 5 to 10mm into the flexible
tubing coming out of the top of the
ICT reference solution cup.
4. Place the ICT reference solution cup into

position and secure with two (2) screws. [4]
5. Secure cable from ICT reference solution
cup with cable ties. [5]
Connect CNN2
from ICT IREF
1. Connect CNN2 [1] to the ICT IREF level
Level Detect
detect board.
Board
2. Install the ICT IREF level detect board
cover [3] on the ICT preamp cover.
3. Secure the cable with wire ties [2].

instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and
Note shutdown.
initialization.

4. Check for leaks.
5. Install the cuvette segment removed from
in front of the ICT reference solution cup.
with (2) thumbscrews.
screws.
four (4) screws.
N1.05 Detector, Temp., Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1063_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93200-01 Detector, Temp., Water Bath
N1.05 Detector, Temp., Water Bath

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
Tool - Option 11).
cover.
cover.
7. Remove the cuvette segments from the
reaction carousel and place in a safe location.
Remove
Temperature
1. Disconnect the BTEMP plug [1] from the
Detector, Water
connector plate and remove the connector
Bath
from the plate.
detector to the inside of water bath. [2]
water fill inlet cover [3] and remove detector.
Replacement
Install
Temperature
1. Place the detector into the water bath
Detector,
Water Bath
2. Secure the water fill inlet cover with two
(2) screws. [3]
3. Insert the connector BTEMP into the
connector plate and plug in plug
BTEMP. [1]
4. Secure the right center rear deck with
two (2) screws.
5. Secure the right rear deck with two (2)
screws.
Note

procedure.
1 P-106 Water Bath Temperature Detector Verify and document that the reading is within
Adjustment ± 0.1°C of the reading on the external
thermometer.
N1.06 Switch, Float, Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1065_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89389-02 Switch, float, water bath
N1.06 Switch, Float, Water Bath

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the three (3) screws securing the center
Remove
Float Switch,
1. Disconnect the float switch connector. [1]
Water Bath
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the float
switch mounting bracket to the water bath and lift
the mounting bracket out of the water bath.
3. Unscrew the nut [3] securing the float switch to the
mounting bracket and thread nut off of the wires to
the float switch.
Replacement
Install
Float
1. Thread the float switch wires through the
Switch,
mounting nut.
Water Bath
2. Insert the float switch into the mounting
bracket and secure with the nut. [3]
3. Place the float switch mounting bracket
into position on the water bath and secure
4. Connect the float switch connector. [1]

screws.
Note
initialization.

N1.08 Lens, water bath c8000 Version - 96666-109_1067_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89244-02 Lens, Water Bath
N1.08 Lens, water bath c 8000

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
Source
1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] (toward the front of the
Lamp
holder and remove the lamp holder.
Note
terminal block.
Remove
Optics
1. Unplug the shutter cable (SHUT to SHA) and fan
Assembly
(P-FAN to FAN) cable.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pre-amp
cable cover and remove the cover from the side of
optics housing. [2]
Note
The pre-amp cable cover slides into the
guides in the bottom of the optics housing
and is a tight fit.

4. Remove the screw securing the optics housing to
the support bracket at the back of the optics
assembly.
5. While supporting the optics assembly from the
bottom, remove the three (3) screws securing the
optics. [3]
Note
The two (2) guide post spacers [4] can fall
into the processing module. Ensure that you
retain both spacers with the optics assembly.
Remove
Water Bath
1. Unscrew the lens holder. [1]
Lens
2. Remove the outer gasket [2], lens [3], and inner
gasket. [4]
Replacement
Install
Water
1. Place the inner gasket [4] on the inner side of the lens
Bath
and the outer gasket [2] on the outside of the lens.
Lens
2. Secure the lens [3] and gaskets in place with the lens
screw. [1]
Install
Optics
1. Ensure the two (2) black guide post spacers [4] are in
Assembly
place on the optics assembly.
2. While supporting the optics assembly from the bottom,
secure it to the processing module frame with three
(3) screws. [3]
Note
The 3mm screw spacers [5] go on the top of
the processing module frame and the 1 mm
black screw spacers [6] go between the frame
and the optics assembly.
3. Install the optics housing to the support bracket with

one screw.
4. Connect the pre-amp cable, and install the pre-amp
cable cover [2] and ground wire with two (2) screws.
Route the cables between the gasket material (of the
cover) and the housing.
Note
Ensure that the cover slides into the guides in
the bottom of the optics housing. The fit
between the guides in the optic housing and
the pre-amp cable cover is tight.
Note
The ground wire is installed with the screw that
is placed in the pre-amp cable cover paint-
masked screw hole.
5. Connect the shutter cable (SHUT to SHA) and fan (P-

FAN to FAN) cable.
6. Install source lamp holder in optics assembly and
tighten the front thumbscrew.
Install
Source
1. Install the source lamp holder into the optics assembly
Lamp
and tighten the front thumbscrew. [1]
Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
5. Check for leaks.
7. Secure the reaction carousel rear cover with (2)
thumbscrews.
8. Secure the reaction carousel front cover with two (2)
screws.
10. Install the left rear cover and secure with four (4)
screws.
N1.13 Warming Ring Version - 96666-109_926_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93482-01 Warming Ring
N1.13 Warming Ring

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
cover.
Access
Warming
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the ICT
Ring
2. Disconnect tubing number 12 [2] from the warming
ring and tubing number 13 [3] from the ICT
3. Gently lift the ICT reference cup assembly and
disconnect the ICT reference cup from the ICT
warming ring.
4. Lay ICT reference cup [1] out of the way.
Remove
Warming
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the cuvette
Ring
wiper assembly [3] and remove the assembly.
temperature sensor [4] to the inside of the water
bath and remove the sensor.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the inlet
water cover plate to the front of the water bath
and remove the plate. [5]
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the inlet
water cover plate to the rear of the water bath and
remove the plate. [6]
5. Lift the warming ring [7] out of the water bath.
Replacement
Install
Warming
1. Place the warming ring [7] into the water
Ring
bath.
2. Install the inlet water cover plates front [5]
and rear [6] inside the water bath over the
inlet port and secure with two (2) screws.
3. Secure the temperature sensor [4] in the
water bath with two (2) screws.
4. Install the cuvette wiper assembly [3] in the
water bath and secure with two (2) screws.
Install
ICT Ref
1. Connect the ICT warming ring [7] to the ICT
Cup
reference solution cup [1].
2. Secure the ICT reference cup to the water
bath with two (2) screws.
3. Connect the tubing 12 and 13 to the ICT
reference cup.

Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
screws.
(2) screws.
11. Secure the right center rear deck with two
(2) screws.
screws.
N2.01 Heater, Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1072_1
List/Part Numbers
7-200030-01 Heater, c8000, NS
7-200034-01 Water Bath Heater Assy, NS c8
7-93202-01 Heater, Water Bath
N2.01 Heater, Water Bath

Absorbent towels
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
2. Power OFF the c8000 processing module (use the
processing module).
Remove
Heater
1. Access the service drain [1], located in the heater
Assembly
assembly, and clamp the tubing.
2. Loosen the plastic clamp [3] around the tubing
plug [2] and remove the plug [2].
3. Place the tubing in a container, and remove the
clamp placed on the tubing in Step1.
4. When all of the water has been drained from the
heater assembly replace the plug [2] in the service
drain. [1] and tighten tubing clamp [3].
Note
If an unpainted frame brace is present,
remove and discard the brace.
5. Locate and disconnect the drain tubing [9] from the

refrigerator and lay out of the way.
6. From the heater bottle [4], disconnect the tubing [5]
closest to the rear of the module.
7. Remove the two (2) screws securing the heater
control cover [6] and disconnect cables TBC1,
TBC2, TBC3, and TBC10 from the controller board.
8. Remove the two (2) screws [7] from the base of the
heater assembly and slide the assembly toward the
rear of the processing module to allow access to
the tubing at the elbow at the water pump.
9. Loosen the tubing clamp and disconnect the
tubing [8] from the elbow at the water pump.
10. Remove the heater assembly from the processing
module.
Replacement
Install
Heater
1. Place the heater assembly into the
Assembly
processing module and connect the
tubing [8] to the elbow at the water pump.
2. Ensure the tubing clamp is tight.
3. Slide the heater assembly into the
processing module and secure it to the
screws. [7]
4. Connect cables TBC1, TBC2, TBC3, and
TBC10 to the controller board.
Note
Do not install the heater control
cover at this time. Access is required
during the temperature adjustment
procedure.
5. Connect the tubing [5] from the water bath

to the heater bottle. [4]
6. Reconnect the refrigerator drain tubing [9]
to the refrigerator.
Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
6. Perform P-127 Water Bath Heater
Adjustment.
7. Secure the heater control cover with two
(2) screws.
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
thermometer.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2008• ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
N2.02 Fuse, Thermal, Heater Unit Version - 96666-109_1073_1
List/Part Numbers
2-200027-01 Fuse, Thermal, NS
2-89214-02 Fuse, thermal, heater unit
N2.02 Fuse, Thermal, Heater Unit

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Thermal Fuse,
1. Disconnect the thermal fuse connector.
Heater Unit
2. Pull the thermal fuse from the heater unit.
Replacement
Install
Thermal
1. Insert the thermal fuse into the heater unit.
Fuse,
2. Connect thermal fuse connector.
Heater Unit
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

N2.03 Heater Element, Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1074_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93203-01 Heater, Element, Water Bath
N2.03 Heater Element, Water Bath

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
Heater
Element
2. Loosen the plastic clamp [7] around the tubing plug
and remove the plug. Place the tubing in a
container and remove the clamp placed on the
tubing in Step 1.
3. When all of the water is drained from the heater
assembly, replace the plug in the service drain. [1]
4. Pull the thermal fuse [2] from the heater unit.
control cover [3] and disconnect cable CNN6 from
the controller board.
Note
Cut any cables ties required for the removal
of the heater cable.
6. Remove the four (4) screws [4] securing the heater

element [5] and remove the heater element and
heater element packing [6] from the heater
chamber.
Replacement
Install
Heater
1. Insert the heater element [5] into the heater
Element
chamber with packing [6] between the element
and chamber, and secure it with four (4)
screws. [4]
2. Connect cable CNN6 to the controller board
and secure the cable to the wire harness.
3. Secure the heater control cover [3] with two (2)
screws.
4. Insert the thermal fuse [2] into the heater unit.

Note

5. Check for leaks.
6. Perform P-127 Water Bath Heater Adjustment.
7. Secure the heater control cover with two (2)
screws.
(4) screws.
9. Install the left rear cover and secure with four
(4) screws.
thermometer.
N2.04 Seal, Heater Element Version - 96666-109_1076_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89273-02 Seal, heater element
N2.04 Seal, Heater Element

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Note
This packing is only removed or replaced when performing N2.03 Heater Element, Water Bath.
Removal

System status.
Remove
Heater
Element Seal
person.
Replacement

N2.05 Seal, Thermistor, Heater Version - 96666-109_1077_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89275-02 Seal, thermistor,heater unit
N2.05 Seal, Thermistor, Heater

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Note
This packing is only removed or replaced when performing N2.03 Heater Element, Water Bath.
Removal

System status.
Remove
Thermistor
1. Removal and replacement steps are left
Heater Seal
to the discretion of the Abbott trained
repair person.
Replacement

N2.06 Thermistor, heater unit c-8 Version - 96666-109_1078_1
List/Part Numbers
2-200028-01 Thermistor, NS
7-93376-01 Thermistor, heater unit, c-8
N2.06 Thermistor, heater unit c-8

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
Heater
Thermistor
plug [2] and remove the plug.
3. Place the tubing in a container and remove the
clamp placed on the tubing in Step 1.
drain [1] and tighten clamp [6] around plug.
control cover [3] and disconnect cable CNN5 on
controller board.
Note
Cut any cables ties required for the removal
of the thermistor.

thermistor retainer [5] and remove the thermistor
from the heater chamber, by carefully pulling on the
thermistor packing.
7. Remove the retainer and packing from the
thermistor
Replacement
Install
Heater
1. Slide the retainer [5] over the thermistor
Thermistor
cable and place the packing over the
thermistor, with the large end toward the
cable.
Note
The thermistor should extend 5mm
past the end of the packing.
2. Place the thermistor into the thermistor

socket in the heater chamber.
3. With the retainer in place, start both
screws [4], do not tighten.
4. Alternately tighten screws until the
thermistor packing begins to bulge slightly
past the edge of the retainer.
5. Connect the thermistor cable to connector
TBC5 on the controller board.

Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
Adjustment.
(2) screws.
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
thermometer.
N2.12 Pump, Heater Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1084_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93209-01 Pump, Heater Water Bath
N2.12 Pump, Heater Water Bath

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
Heater
Assembly
Note

closest to the rear of the processing module.
rear of the processing module to allow access to the
tubing at the elbow at the water pump.
module.
Remove
Pump,
1. Disconnect connector CNN7 [1] from the controller
Heater
board and cut the wire ties from the wire harness to
Water Bath
allow the removal of the pump cable.
2. Loosen the tubing clamps and disconnect the
tubing [2] from the pump.
pump [4] to the heater assembly frame and slide the
pump out.
Replacement

Install
Pump,
1. Slide the pump [4] into the heater
Heater
assembly frame and secure with four (4)
Water Bath
screws. [3]
2. Connect the tubing [2] to the pump and
tighten the tubing clamps.
3. Connect CNN7 [1] to the controller board
and secure the pump cable to the wire
harness with the wire ties.
Install
Heater
Assembly
screws. [7]
Note
cover at this time. Access is
required during the temperature
adjustment procedure.

Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
Adjustment.
(2) screws.
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
thermometer.
N2.13 Fan Heater Version - 96666-109_1085_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93210-01 Fan, Heater
N2.13 Fan Heater

Absorbent Towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
Heater
Assembly
Note

closest to the rear of the processing module.
rear of the processing module to allow access to the
tubing at the elbow at the water pump.
module.
Remove
Fan Heater
1. Disconnect TBC9 [1] from the controller board.
Note
Remove any wire ties required for removal of
fan cable.
2. Remove the four (4) screws from the fan shroud [2]

and remove the shroud.
Note
The fan is loose at this time.
3. Lift fan [3] off of the radiator.
Replacement
Install
Fan
1. Place the fan [3] on the radiator.
Heater
Note
Ensure the correct orientation or fan
on the radiator, with the air flow
down through the radiator.
2. Place the fan shroud [2] on the fan and

secure with four (4) screws.
3. Connect TBC9 [1] on the controller board
and secure the wires.
Install
Heater
Assembly
screws. [7]
Note
cover at this time. Access is required
during the temperature adjustment
procedure.


Note
initialization.

icon.
5. Check for leaks.
Adjustment.
(2) screws.
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
thermometer.
N3.01 Bd., Temp. Bath Control, Heater Version - 96666-109_1087_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89043-02 BD,Temp bath control,heater
2-89043-03 BD,Temp bath control,heater (RoHS)
7-205360-02 Bd, TBC New Style
N3.01 Bd., Temp. Bath Control, Heater

External Thermometer (77997)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove Temp
Bath Control
Board
heater control cover and remove the cover. [2]
2. Disconnect TBC1 through TBC10 from the
controller board.
Note
Labeling on board is CNN1 through
CNN10. Plugs are labeled TBC1 through
TBC10.
3. Remove the controller board [3] from the

standoffs.
Replacement
Install
Temp Bath
1. Place the controller board [2] onto the
Control
standoffs.
Board
2. Ensure that jumper J-1 is set for 37° C.
3. Connect the connectors TBC1 through
Note
cover at this time. Access is
required during the temperature
adjustment procedure.
Note
initialization.

icon.
Adjustment.
(2) screws).
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
N3.02 Detector, Inside Temp. Version - 96666-109_1088_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89162-02 Detector,inside temp,heater
N3.02 Detector, Inside Temp.

External Thermometer (77997)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Detector,
Inside Temp
control cover [1] and remove the cover.
2. Disconnect TBC4 [2] from the controller board.
Note
Remove any wire ties required for the
removal of the detector cable.
3. Loosen the screw on the clamp securing the
detector at the base of the heater assembly and
slide the detector to the left to remove. [3]
Replacement
Install
Detector,
1. Slide the detector in the clamp on the base
Inside
of the heater assembly and tighten the
Temp
screw on the clamp to secure the
detector. [3]
2. Connect TBC4 [2] to the controller board
and secure the cable.
3. Secure the control cover with two (2)
screws. [1]

Note
initialization.

3. Perform P-105 Internal Instrument
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
1 P-105 Internal Instrument Temperature Verify and document internal instrument
Detector Adjustment temperature is within ± 0.2°C of the external
thermometer.
P1.01 Deck, Left Rear Version - 96666-109_1094_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203410-01 Deck, Left Rear O.W.
7-203410-02 Deck, Left Rear O.W.
7-93215-01 Deck, Left Rear
7-93215-02 Deck, Left Rear
P1.01 Deck, Left Rear

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.02 Deck, Mixer Version - 96666-109_1095_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203411-01 Deck, Mixer O.W.
7-93216-01 Deck, Mixer
P1.02 Deck, Mixer

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.03 Deck, Right Rear Version - 96666-109_1096_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203412-01 Deck, Right Rear O.W.
7-93217-01 Deck, Right Rear
P1.03 Deck, Right Rear

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.04 Deck, Right Front Version - 96666-109_1098_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93218-01 Deck, Right Front
P1.04 Deck, Right Front

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.05 Deck, Center Front Version - 96666-109_1099_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203446-01 Deck, Right Front O.W.
7-203447-01 Deck, Center Front O.W.
7-93219-01 Deck, Center Front
P1.05 Deck, Center Front

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.06 Deck, Left Front Version - 96666-109_1100_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203448-01 Deck, Left Front O.W.
7-93220-01 Deck, Left Front
P1.06 Deck, Left Front

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.07 Deck, Right Center Front Version - 96666-109_1101_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203449-01 Deck, Right Center Front O.W.
7-93221-01 Deck, Right Center Front
P1.07 Deck, Right Center Front

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.08 Deck, Right Center Rear Version - 96666-109_1102_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203450-01 Deck, Right Center Rear O.W.
7-93222-01 Deck, Right Center Rear
P1.08 Deck, Right Center Rear

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.09 Cover, Reaction Carousel Rear Version - 96666-109_1103_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203451-01 Cover, Reaction Carousel Rear O.W.
7-203452-01 Cover, Reaction Carousel Front O.W.
7-93223-01 Cover, Reaction Carousel Rear
P1.09 Cover, Reaction Carousel Rear

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cover
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.10 Cover, Reaction Carousel Front Version - 96666-109_1104_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93224-01 Cover, Reaction Carousel Front
P1.10 Cover, Reaction Carousel Front

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cover
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.11 Cover, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1105_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203453-01 Cover, Carousel Sampler O.W.
7-203453-02 Cover, Carousel Sampler O.W.
7-93225-01 Cover, Carousel Sampler
7-93225-02 Cover, Sample Carousel
P1.11 Cover, Sample Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cover
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.12 Cover, Reagent Supply Center #2 Version - 96666-109_1106_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203454-01 Cover, Reagent Supply Cntr. #2, O.W.
7-93226-01 Cover, Reagent Supply Cntr. #2
P1.12 Cover, Reagent Supply Center #2

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cover
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.13 Cover, Reagent Supply Center #1 Version - 96666-109_1107_1
List/Part Numbers
P1.13 Cover, Reagent Supply Center #1

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cover
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.14 On Board Solution Cups Version - 96666-109_1109_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93228-01 On Board Solution Cups
P1.14 On Board Solution Cups

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cups
person.
Replacement

P1.15 Deck, Center Rear Version - 96666-109_1110_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93229-01 Deck, Center Rear
P1.15 Deck, Center Rear

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Deck
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
P1.16 Caps, Screw Version - 96666-109_1111_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203458-01 Caps, Screw O.W.
7-93230-01 Caps, Screw
P1.16 Caps, Screw

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cups
person.
Replacement

P1.17 Closeout, Rear (c8000) Version - 96666-109_1112_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93231-01 Holder, On Board sol. Cup
7-94145-01 Closeout, Rear c8000
P1.17 Closeout, Rear (c 8000)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Cups
person.
Replacement

open/close freely.
Q1.04 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform C) Version - 96728-111_214_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78800-02 10 Gig Hard Drive SCC
7-78800-03 Hard Drive, CPU
Q1.04 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or
Offline status.
Preparation
Note Primary Drive (SYSTEM)
Depending on the SCC CPU configuration, the hard
drive with the system software is typically located in
the following location:
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - mounted on a bracket

under the CD Rom drive and is next to the D: drive.
Its ribbon cable is connected to the Primary IDE.
Platform C (P4) - mounted in a bracket next to the Secondary Drive (BACKUP)
floppy drive. Its ribbon cable is connected to the
Primary IDE.
1. Observe ESD precautions.

2. Identify the correct drive by the jumpering for the
primary (SYSTEM) and secondary (BACKUP) drives.
Note
Graphics are only examples. Refer to information
shipped with the new hard drive.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the

SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview,
Shutdown Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Snapshot.
2. Select F3 (Shutdown).
3. Select OK to confirm the Shutdown request.
Note
A message displays informing you that
Shutdown is complete and you can turn off
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by flipping the rear power

enable switch down to the O position.
5. Turn off all peripherals connected to the computer.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect
cables connected to the rear of the computer.
7. Power OFF the processing module.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must
be off prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing
module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
1. At the back of the CPU chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Two (2)

screws
Platform C (P4) - Three (3) screws
2. Lift up the back of the cover to a 45 degree angle

(approximately), then pull it out from the CPU
chassis while maintaining the same angle.
Access
Drive
1. Access the hard drive carrier.
Carrier
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove RAM
(Platform C (P4)).
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove CD-ROM
Drive (Platform A and B).
Remove
RAM
1. Disconnect and remove any expansion boards
(Platform C
restricting access to the RAM slots.
(P4))
2. Press back the retaining clips [2] holding the RAM
board [1] into the socket and tilt the top of the RAM
board away from the clips.
3. Remove the RAM board.
4. Locate and unplug the multicolored power and
ribbon cables to the floppy drive [3].
5. Go to Disconnect Drive Cables.
Remove
CD-ROM
1. Disconnect the multicolor power, ribbon and audio
Drive
cables at the rear of the CD-ROM.
(Platform A
2. Remove the CD-ROM by pushing the two (2) side
and B)
tabs toward the center and pulling the drive forward.
Disconnect
Drive Note
Cables To prevent bent pins, pull ribbon cables off carefully.

ribbon cables to the hard drive(s) [1].
Remove
Drive Note
Carrier If an expansion board restricts the clearance of the
carrier, remove the expansion cover retaining
bracket and the expansion board.
1. Loosen securing screw(s).
Platform C (P4) - Loosen the three (3) screws

holding the carrier to the CPU chassis. [2]
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Loosen the
screw holding the carrier to the CPU
chassis. [1]
2. Remove the drive carrier.

Platform C (P4) - Slide the carrier to the rear
as far as it will go, then lift up the back of the
carrier and pull it out at about a 45 degree
angle. Take care that all cabling is clear when
removing the carrier.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lift the carrier
out of the CPU chassis.
Remove
System SYSTEM Drive
1. Observe the jumpers on the back of the drive and
Hard Drive
locate the system drive.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the hard drive
to the carrier.
3. Slide the drive out of either end of the carrier.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Replacement
Preparation
SYSTEM Drive
2. Remove the hard drive from its wrapper, and
place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Install System
Hard Drive SYSTEM Drive
1. If required, refer to the hard disk drive
manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers
or switches and termination resistors.
2. With the connectors toward the rear of the
drive carrier, slide the disk drive into the
carrier until the screw holes are aligned.
3. Secure the hard disk drive to the drive carrier
BACKUP Drive
Note
Install Drive
Carrier
1. Position the carrier above the CPU chassis in
the same approximate position as when it was
removed.
2. Lower the carrier into the CPU chassis at an
approximate 45 degree angle.
Platform C - Move the carrier forward

until the floppy disk drive clears the
slot in the CPU chassis and aligns with
the front.
Platforms A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lower
the back of the carrier until it rests on
the 5.25-inch drive bay and the CPU
chassis transverse brace.
3. Fasten the carrier to the CPU chassis.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - one (1)

screw
Platform C (P4) - three (3) screws
4. Connect the cables to devices in the drive

carrier.
Install RAM
(Platform C (P4))
1. Holding the RAM board [1] at an angle, align
the notch in the board with the alignment tab
in the socket.
2. Press down and tilt the board up until it snaps
into the retaining clips. [2]
3. Install and reconnect any expansion boards
removed to access the RAM.
Install CD ROM
Drive (Platform A
1. From the front, align the rails on the CD ROM
(PII) and B (PIII))
drive with the tracks in the bay.
2. Slide the drive back until rails latch.
3. Connect the multicolor Power, ribbon and
audio cables to the drive.
Install Cover
1. Verify that no tools or loose parts are in the
computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees
with the front end pointing at the insertion
point on the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the
way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
4. Reinstall the screws at the back panel.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - four (4)

screws
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and turn
on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear
power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1. Power ON the CPU assembly.
1 P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC
Platform C)
3 P-206 Printer Configuration
2 P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
4 P-24 Precision Run Confirm the precision results are acceptable
using the Total %CV value listed in the
appropriate assay package insert.
Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C) Version - 96728-111_215_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99024-02 CD-RW Drive (RHOS)
Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note Primary Drive (SYSTEM)
Depending on the SCC CPU configuration, the hard
drive with the system software is typically located in
the following location:
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - mounted on a bracket

under the CD.
drive and is next to the D: drive. Its ribbon cable is
connected to the Primary IDE. Secondary Drive (BACKUP)
Platform C (P4) - mounted in a bracket next tot the
floppy drive. Its ribbon cable is connected to the
Primary IDE.

2. Identify the correct drive by the jumpering for the
primary (SYSTEM) and secondary (BACKUP) drives.
Note
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the
SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Shutdown Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Snapshot.
Note
Shutdown is complete and you can turn off
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC.

6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect
cables connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must
be off prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing
module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
1. At the back of the CPU chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.

screws
2. Lift up the back of the cover to a 45 degree angle

(approximately), then pull it out from the CPU
chassis while maintaining the same angle.
Access
Drive
1. Access the hard drive carrier.
Carrier
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove RAM
(Platform C (P4)).
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove CD-ROM
drive (Platform A and B).
Remove
RAM
1. Disconnect and remove any expansion boards
(Platform C
restricting access to the RAM slots.
(P4))
2. Press back the retaining clips [2] holding the RAM
board [1] into the socket and tilt the top of the RAM
board away from the clips.
3. Remove the RAM board.
ribbon cables to the floppy drive [3].
5. Go to Disconnect Drive Cables.
Remove
CD-ROM
1. Disconnect the multicolor power, ribbon and audio
drive
cables at the rear of the CD-ROM.
(Platform A
2. Remove the CD-ROM by pushing the two (2) side
and B)
tabs toward the center and pulling the drive forward.
Disconnect
Drive Note
Cables To prevent bent pins, pull ribbon cables off carefully.

ribbon cables to the hard drive(s) [1].
Remove
Drive Note
Carrier If an expansion board restricts the clearance of the
carrier, remove the expansion cover retaining
bracket and the expansion board.
1. Loosen securing screw(s).
Platform C (P4) - Loosen the three (3) screws

holding the carrier to the CPU chassis. [2]
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Loosen the
screw holding the carrier to the CPU
chassis. [1]
2. Remove the drive carrier.

Platform C (P4) - Slide the carrier to the rear
as far as it will go, then lift up the back of the
carrier and pull it out at about a 45 degree
angle. Take care that all cabling is clear when
removing the carrier.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lift the carrier
out of the CPU chassis.
Remove
Backup SYSTEM Drive
1. Observe the jumpers on the back of the drive and
Hard Drive
locate the backup drive.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the hard drive
to the carrier.
3. Slide the drive out of either end of the carrier.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the hard drive from its wrapper, and
place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
Install Backup
Hard Drive
1. If required, refer to the hard disk drive
manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers
or switches and termination resistors.
2. With the connectors toward the rear of the
drive carrier, slide the disk drive into the
5.25-inch drive bay until the screw holes are
aligned.
3. Secure the hard disk drive to the drive carrier
with three (3) screws.
Install Drive
Carrier
1. Position the carrier above the CPU chassis in
the same approximate position as when it
was removed.
2. Lower the carrier into the CPU chassis at an
approximate 45 degree angle.
Platform C - Move the carrier forward

until the floppy disk drive clears the
slot in the CPU chassis and aligns with
the front.
Platforms A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lower
the back of the carrier until it rests on
the 5.25-inch drive bay and the CPU
chassis transverse brace.
3. Fasten the carrier to the CPU chassis.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - one (1)

screw
4. Connect the cables to devices in the drive

carrier.
Install RAM
(Platform C (P4))
1. Holding the RAM board [1] at an angle, align
the notch in the board with the alignment tab
in the socket.
2. Press down and tilt the board up until it snaps
into the retaining clips. [2]
3. Install and reconnect any expansion boards
removed to access the RAM.
Install CD ROM
Drive (Platform A
1. From the front, align the rails on the CD ROM
(PII) and B (PIII))
drive with the tracks in the bay.
2. Slide the drive back until rails latch.
3. Connect the multicolor Power, ribbon and
audio cables to the drive.
Install Cover
1. Verify that no tools or loose parts are in the
computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees
with the front end pointing at the insertion
point on the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the
way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
4. Reinstall the screws at the back panel.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - four (4)

screws
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and
turn on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear
power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1. Power ON the CPU assembly.

errors.
2 P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC
Platform C)
4 P-206 Printer Configuration
3 P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
5 P-24 Precision Run Confirm the precision results are acceptable
using the Total %CV value listed in the
appropriate assay package insert.
Q1.09 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform D) Version - 96728-111_130_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99022-01 Hard Drive w/ Cable, SCC-D
Q1.09 Hard Drive, System, CPU (Platform D and E)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Caution
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped,
System status.
or Offline status.
Perform
SCC
Shutdown
Snapshot.
Note
Shutdown is complete and you can
turn off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by pressing the

ON/OFF [1] button.
5. Turn OFF the process module(s).
6. Turn off all peripherals connected to the
computer.
7. Mark all cables connected to the CPU and
disconnect them from the rear of the SCC.
Remove
SCC Cover
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1]securing the
cover to the case.
2. Pull the cover straight back, approximately 1"
(2 cm), then lift and remove the cover.
Access
Hard Drive
1. Remove the screw [1] that secures the
hard/floppy drive bracket to the chassis.
2. Disconnect all cabling from the rear of the
Hard Drive [3]
3. Pull the lever firmly toward the back of the

chassis. [2]
Note
This action releases the assembly and
moves it out of the computer face
plate.
4. Lift the hard/floppy drive bracket out of the
computer chassis.
Remove
Hard Drive
1. Remove the four (4) screws [2] (two on each
side), that secure the hard drive to the
bracket.
2. Slide the hard drive out of the bracket.
Replacement
Install
Hard
1. Slide the new hard drive into the bracket.
Drive
Note
Before installing the new hard drive check the
jumpering [1].
2. Replace the four (4) screws that secure the hard drive to the
bracket.
3. With the bracket lever pulled back, slide the hard/floppy
drive bracket into position.
Note
Verify that no cabling is pinched under the hard/floppy
drive bracket. If better access is required, remove the
CD-RW drive for improved cable visibility.
4. Replace the screw that secures the bracket to the chassis.
5. Re-attach all cabling. [2]
1 P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform
C and D)
Q2.01 Keyboard Skin Version - 96728-111_219_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78822-01 Keyboard Skin, SCC
Q2.01 Keyboard Skin
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or Offline
status.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer

SCC to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview, Snapshot.
Shutdown Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Note
A message displays informing you that Shutdown is
complete and you can turn off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by flipping the rear power enable

switch down to the "O" position.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables
connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must be off
prior to turning on the power to the system control
center. If the processing module(s) power is ON,
communication is not properly initialized between the
system components.
Replacement
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of

the Abbott trained repair person.
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. Power OFF the processing module(s).
Operation Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Note System startup, pause, and shutdown.
The power to the processing module(s) must be OFF
prior to turning on the power to the system control
center. If the processing module(s) power is ON,
communication is not properly initialized between the
system components.
2. Power ON the system control center.

3. Power ON the monitor.
4. Power ON the processing module(s).
5. To change the status of the processing module and sample
handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.
Q2.06 Printer Version - 96728-111_224_1
List/Part Numbers
07D08-11 Printer 110V
07D08-22 Printer 220V
Q2.06 Printer
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Remove
Printer
1. Power OFF the printer.
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the
wall outlet.
3. Disconnect the printer from the port
marked PARALLEL on the back of the
CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Printer
1. Connect the printer cable to printer.
2. Connect the printer power cord to the printer.
3. Connect the printer cable to the port marked
PARALLEL on the back of the CPU. [1]
4. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet.
Note
If your System Control Center is connected to a
UPS, the printer should not be plugged into the
UPS.
1 G12 - Printer Verify printer prints reports and/or performs a
screen print.
R1.01 Mixer Assembly Version - 96666-109_1113_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204940-01 Mixer Assy, Complete, O.W.
7-93232-01 Mixer Assy, complete
R1.01 Mixer Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the mixer
5. Remove the mixers.
Remove
Mixer
Assembly
2. Disconnect the following cables from the mixer
assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STRE
SE-S
STR-S
3. Remove the three (3) hex head bolts from the

base of the mixer assembly.
4. Lift the mixer assembly from the processing
module frame.
Note
Do not lift with up/down mechanism, this
can damage the cam follower spring.
Replacement
Install
Mixer
1. Place the mixer assembly onto the guide
Assembly
pins on the processing module frame and
secure with three (3) hex head bolts.
2. Connect the following cables to the mixer
assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STRE
SE-S
STR-S
3. Secure the mixer cover with two (2)

screws.

1. Install mixers.
Note
initialization.

4. Perform P-128 Mixer Alignment.
5. Secure the mixer deck with two (2) screws.
screws.
four (4) screws.
R1.02 Photo Sensors, Mixer Assembly Version - 96666-109_1114_1
List/Part Numbers
R1.02 Photo Sensors, Mixer Assembly

Note
This procedure includes all the photo sensors on the mixer assembly.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Sensor,
Photo
head cover and remove the cover.
Multiple Use
2. Disconnect the sensor cable(s).
(Mixer
3. Remove the screw securing the sensor(s) and
Head)
remove the sensor(s).
Remove
Sensor,
Photo
Multiple Use
2. Disconnect the sensor cable(s).
(Elevator)
3. Remove the screw securing the sensor(s) and
remove the sensor(s).
Note
The UP and the D-OK sensors can be seen
from the rear of the processing module. The
DOWN sensor is located on the internal
side of the mixer elevator, the screw can be
reached from the back of the processing
module without removal of the elevator.
Replacement
Install Sensor,
Photo Multiple
1. Secure the sensor(s) in place with one
Use (Elevator)
(1) screw and connect the sensor
cable(s).
2. Install the left rear cover and secure
Install Sensor,
Photo Multiple
1. Secure the sensor(s) in place with one
Use (Mixer
(1) screw and connect the sensor
Head)
cable(s)
2. Secure the mixer head cover with two
(2) screws.

Note

procedure.
R1.03 Mixer Head Assembly Version - 96666-109_1115_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204941-01 Mixer Head Assy, OW
7-93233-01 Mixer Head Assy
R1.03 Mixer Head Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Mixer Head
Assembly
cover [1] and remove the cover.
assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S
3. Remove the jacks from the connector mount [2]

on the mixer assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S
4. Cut the wire ties securing the wire cables to the

mixer assembly.
5. Remove the two (2) screws [3] from the center of
the mounting plate on the mixer head assembly.
Note
The screw to the front of the processing
module is a countersunk X-point screw.
6. Lift the mixer head [4] straight up off of the mixer

elevator.
Replacement
Install
Mixer
1. Place the mixer head [4] onto the guide
Head
pins on the mixer elevator and secure with
Assembly
two (2) screws [3].
2. Install the jacks to the connector mount [2]
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S

assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S
4. Secure the mixer wire cables to the mixer

assembly with wire ties.
5. Secure the mixer cover [1] with two (2)
screws.
1. Install mixers.
Note
initialization.

screws.
four (4) screws.
R1.04 Mixer Elevator Assembly Version - 96666-109_1116_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93234-01 Mixer Elevator Assy
R1.04 Mixer Elevator Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove Mixer
Head
Assembly
cover [1] and remove the cover.
assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S
3. Remove the jacks from the connector mount [2]

STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S
4. Cut the wire ties securing the wire cables to the

mixer assembly.
5. Remove the two (2) screws [3] from the center
of the mounting plate on the mixer head
assembly.
Note
The screw to the front of the processing
module is a countersunk X-point screw.
6. Lift the mixer head [4] straight up off of the mixer

elevator.
Remove Mixer
Elevator
1. Disconnect cables STRE and SE-S from the
Assembly
mixer elevator.
2. Remove the three (3) hex head bolts from the
base of the mixer assembly.
3. Lift the mixer elevator assembly from the
Note
Do not lift with up/down mechanism, this
can damage the cam follower spring.
Replacement
Install
Mixer
1. Place the mixer elevator onto the guide
Elevator
pins on the processing module frame and
Assembly
secure with three (3) hex head bolts.
2. Connect cables STRE and SE-S to mixer
elevator.
Install
Mixer
1. Place the mixer head [4] onto the guide
Head
pins on the mixer elevator and secure with
Assembly
two (2) screws [3].
2. Install the jacks to the connector mount [2]
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S

assembly:
STRA
STRB
STRD
STR-S
4. Secure the mixer wire cables to the mixer

assembly with wire ties.
5. Secure the mixer cover [1] with two (2)
screws.

1. Install mixers.
Note
initialization.

5. Secure the mixer deck with two (2)
screws.
screws.
four (4) screws.
R1.05 Bolt, Mixer Version - 96666-109_1117_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89058-02 Bolt, mixer
R1.05 Bolt, Mixer

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Bolt
person.
Replacement

R1.07 Spring, Mixer, Cam Follower Version - 96666-109_1118_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89373-02 Spring, Mixer, cam following
R1.07 Spring, Mixer, Cam Follower

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Remove
Mixer
1. Remove the screw [1] securing the spring
Spring
mounting disk and remove the disk.
2. Unhook the spring [2] from the attachment points
and remove.
Replacement
Install
Mixer
1. Hook the spring [2] to the attachment
Spring
points and secure the mounting disk with
one (1) screw [1].

1. Install the mixers.
four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

1 1123 - Mixer Alignment
R2.01 Pipettor, Sample Complete Version - 96666-109_1121_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204132-01 Pipettor, Sample, Complete, O.W.
7-204949-01 Tubing, Protective, Sample
7-204950-01 Clamp, Spring, Sample
7-204951-01 Bracket, L Shaped, Sample
7-93237-03 Pipettor, Sample Complete
R2.01 Pipettor, Sample Complete

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
3. Loosen the screw for the probe ground wire
and remove the probe ground wire from under
the screw.
4. Disconnect the tubing from the sample probe.
5. Remove the probe screw and the probe from
the pipettor.
8. Remove the screw securing the left front deck
Note
It is not necessary to disconnect the
cables on the left front deck. There is
enough service loop to set the cover
aside.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Disconnect
Lower Sample
1. Disconnect SCRUSH and STLLS plugs from
Pipettor Cable
the lower sample pipettor cable connector
plate.
2. Remove the screw securing the ground wires
on the connector plate.
3. Disconnect the S tubing at the joint by the
connector plate.
4. Remove the screw and clamp on the flexible
black cable sleeve.
Remove
Pipettor, Sample
1. Disconnect the following plugs from the
Assembly
connectors on the upper connector plate: [1]
SAS
SAEM
SAAM

sample pipettor to the processing module
upper mounting plate.
3. Lift the sample pipettor straight up and out of
Replacement
Install
Pipettor,
1. Place the sample pipettor into the processing
Sample
module, ensuring that the wires and tubing are not
Assembly
crushed or crimped.
2. Secure the pipettor to the upper mounting plate
3. Connect the following plugs to the connectors on
the upper connector plate: [1]
SAS
SAEM
SAAM
Connect
Lower
1. Connect the S tubing to the joint by the connector
Sample
plate.
Pipettor
2. Secure the grounding wires to the connector plate
Cable
with one (1) screw.
3. Connect SCRUSH and STLLS plugs to the lower
sample pipettor cable connector plate.
4. Secure the flexible black cable sleeve with the
clamp and screw.
Install Panel
Above ICT
1. Secure the access panel located above the ICT
Aspiration
aspiration pump with five (5) screws.
Pump

1. Close the doors.
and shutdown.
3. Secure the left front deck with one (1) screw.
Note
Ensure that the cables to the switches are
placed behind the sample carousel bar code
reader. If the cables are placed in front of
the bar code reader, read errors occur.
4. Secure the sample probe with the probe screw.

5. Place the probe ground wire under the ground
screw and tighten the screw.
6. Connect the sample probe tubing.
Note

Startup procedure.
1 1101 - Robotics Test Tool
3 5405 - Crash Sensor Test
R2.02 Photo Sensors, Sample Pipettor Assembly Version - 96666-109_1122_2
List/Part Numbers
R2.02 Photo Sensors, Sample Pipettor Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
remove the probe ground wire from under the
screw.
5. Remove the probe screw and the probe from
the pipettor.
Note
enough service loop to set the deck
aside.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
Disconnect
Lower Sample
1. Disconnect SCRUSH and STLLS plugs from the
Pipettor Cable
lower sample pipettor cable connector plate.
2. Remove the screw securing the ground wires
on the connector plate.
connector plate.
black cable sleeve.
Remove
Pipettor,
Sample
Assembly
SAS
SAEM
SAAM

sample pipettor to the processing module upper
mounting plate.
3. Lift the sample pipettor straight up and out of
Remove Photo
Sensor
1. Mark the sensor mounting plate [1] location on
the pipettor frame and then remove the two (2)
screws securing the mounting plate to the
frame.
2. Disconnect plug ROT-H or U/D-H [2] from the
appropriate sensor.
3. Remove the screw securing the sensor [3] to
the mounting plate and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install Photo
Sensor
1. Secure the sensor [3] to the mounting plate with
one (1) screw.
2. Connect plug ROT-H or U/D-H [2] to the
appropriate sensor.
3. Secure the sensor mounting plate [1] to the pipettor
Note
Ensure that the mounting plate aligns with
markings made on the frame during removal.
Install
Pipettor,
Sample
Assembly
crushed or crimped.
2. Secure the pipettor to the upper mounting plate
the upper connector plate: [1]
SAS
SAEM
SAAM
Connect
Lower
Sample
plate.
Pipettor
Cable
with one (1) screw.
clamp and screw.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump

1. Close the doors.
and shutdown.
Note

6.
Connect the sample probe tubing.
Note

Startup procedure.
R2.03 Tubing, sample pipettor, inner Version - 96666-109_1123_2
List/Part Numbers
7-202578-01 Tubing, Samp Pippetor, inner
7-93238-01 Tubing, Sample Pipettor, Inner
R2.03 Tubing, sample pipettor, inner

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
screw.
5. Remove the probe screw and the probe from the
pipettor.
Note
enough service loop to set the deck aside.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
Disconnect
Lower Sample
1. Disconnect SCRUSH and STLLS plugs from the
Pipettor Cable
lower sample pipettor cable connector plate.
2. Remove the screw securing the ground wires on
the connector plate.
connector plate.
black cable sleeve.
Remove
Pipettor,
Sample
Assembly
SAS
SAEM
SAAM

sample pipettor to the processing module upper
mounting plate.
3. Lift the sample pipettor straight up and out of the
processing module.
Remove
Tubing,
Sample Arm,
cable/tubing spring guard [1] and remove the
Inner
guard.
2. Mark the cable/tubing spring on each side of the
three (3) clamps [3] for future reference.
3. Remove the sleeving and tubing identification
clamp from the bottom end of the inner
tubing. [7]
clamps for the cable/tubing spring.
5. Release the two cable tie locking tabs on the
cable tie mount and remove the two (2) cable
ties (including sleeving) from the cable/tubing
spring mounting plate. [5]
6. Pull the black cable sleeving [6] from the
mounting plate.
7. Lay the cable/tubing spring out straight and pull
the inner tubing out of the top of the sample
pipettor head.
Replacement
Install
Tubing,
Sample
clamps from the bottom end of the replacement
Arm, Inner
tubing. [7]
2. Feed the end of the replacement tubing (without the
sleeving or clamp) down (from the top) the shaft of
the sample pipettor elevator, until the tubing extends
past the end of the cable/tubing spring.
3. Install the sleeving and the tubing identification
clamps on the bottom end of the inner tubing. [7]
4. Install the two (2) cable ties that are still attached to
the black cable sleeving and, at the same time,
insert the sleeving into the mounting plate. [5]
5. Secure the cable/tubing spring in place with the
three (3) clamps and screws. [3] Use the reference
marks on the spring that were made during the
removal process.
6. Secure the cable/tubing spring guard [1] with two (2)
screws. [2]
Install
Pipettor,
Sample
Assembly
crushed or crimped.
2. Secure the pipettor to the upper mounting plate with
four (4) screws.
the upper connector plate:
SAS
SAEM
SAAM
Connect
Lower
Sample
plate.
Pipettor
Cable
with one (1) screw.
clamp and screw.
Install
Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump

1. Close the doors.
and shutdown.
Note
reader. If the cables are placed in front of the
bar code reader, read errors occur.

6.
Connect the sample probe tubing.
Note

Startup procedure.
R2.04 Photo Sensor, Pitch, Sample Pipettor Version - 96666-109_1124_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93239-01 Sensor, pitch, pipettor
R2.04 Photo Sensor, Pitch, Sample Pipettor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
screw.
5. Remove the probe screw and the probe from the
pipettor.
7. Remove the screw securing the left front deck and
remove the deck.
Note
It is not necessary to disconnect the cables
on the left front deck. There is enough
service loop to set the deck aside.
Remove
Sensor,
Pitch,
mounting plate [1] to the frame.
Pipettor
2. Disconnect plug ROT-P [2] from the sensor.
mounting plate and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Sensor,
1. Secure the sensor [3] to the mounting plate [1] with
Pitch,
one (1) screw.
Pipettor
2. Connect plug ROT-P [2] at the sensor.
3. Secure the sensor mounting plate [1] to the pipettor

and shutdown.
Note

4. Place the probe ground wire under the ground screw
and tighten the screw.
Note

Startup procedure.
R3.03 Spring, Crash Detect, Sample Pipettor Version - 96666-109_1126_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89380-02 Spring,crash detect, all arms
R3.03 Spring, Crash Detect, Sample Pipettor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
and remove the probe ground wire from
under the screw.
4. Remove probe screw and probe from
pipettor.
Remove
Crash Detect
1. Loosen the two (2) small screws [1] on each
Spring
end of the spring [2].
2. Remove the spring [2] by lifting the ends of
the spring over the small screws
Replacement
Install
Spring,
1. Using caution not to over stretch the
Crash
spring, place the ends of the spring [2]
Detect
over the two (2) small screws [1].
2. Secure the ends of the spring by tightening
the two (2) small screws [1].

1. Secure the sample probe with the probe
screw.
2. Place the probe ground wire under the
ground screw and tighten the screw.
Note
initialization.

R3.04 Bd., LLS Pre-Amp, Sample Pipettor Version - 96666-109_1127_2
List/Part Numbers
7-202579-01 Bd., LLS Pre-Amp, S Pipettor 16
7-93241-03 Bd., LLS Pre-Amp Samp
R3.04 Bd., LLS Pre-Amp, Sample Pipettor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
screw.
4. Remove probe screw and probe from pipettor.
processing module).
Remove
Bd., LLS
1. Remove the tubing holder [1] by lifting up and to
Pre-Amp
the back of the pipettor.
2. Disconnect the SLVL plug [2] from the LLS pre-
amp Board.
3. Remove the screw securing the ground wire [3] to
the probe mount.
4. Remove the screw [4] securing the board to the
pipettor head and lift the board out of the pipettor
head.
Replacement
Install
Bd., LLS
1. Place the board into the pipettor head and
Pre-Amp
secure with one (1) screw [4].
2. Secure the ground wire with one (1) screw
to the probe mount [3].
3. Connect the SLVL plug [2] to the LLS pre-
amp board.
4. Place the tubing holder [1] into position.
Note
initialization.

screw.
R3.08 Probe Slide Mechanism Version - 96666-109_927_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93438-02 Slide mechanism, pipettor head
R3.08 Probe Slide Mechanism

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
offline status.
Preparation
screw.
processing module).
Remove
Probe Slide
Mechanism
2. Disconnect the SLVL plug [2] from the LLS pre-
amp Board.
3. Remove the screw securing the ground wire [3]
to the probe mount.
head.
5. Remove the two [2] hex head screws holding the
probe slide mechanism to the probe head.
Note
There is a "T" shaped shim between the
pipettor head and the slide mechanism at
the top screw.
Replacement
Install
Probe
1. Secure the probe slide mechanism to the pipettor
Slide
head with two (2) hex head screws. Ensure that the
Mechanism
"T" shaped shim is located at the top screw between
the slide and the pipettor head.
2. Place the board into the pipettor head and secure
with one (1) screw [4].
3. Secure the ground wire with one (1) screw to the
probe mount [3].
4. Connect the SLVL plug [2] to the LLS pre-amp
board.
Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
R4.01 Pipettor, Reagent #1, Assembly Version - 96666-109_1131_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204133-01 Pipettor, Reagent #1, Assembly, O.W.
7-93244-03 Pipettor, Reagent #1, Assembly
R4.01 Pipettor, Reagent #1, Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the reagent pipettor head cover.
screw.
5. Disconnect the reagent probe tubing at the metal
joint.
Note
The end of the reagent probe tubing
attached to the probe has been tapered
and removal from the probe could damage
the fit between the probe and tubing.
6. Remove the following decks for reagent pipettor
#1:
Remove the screw securing the right front

Remove the three (3) screws securing the
Remove the two (2) screws securing the
right center front deck and remove the
deck.
Remove
Reagent
1. Disconnect the following connectors [2] from the
Pipettor #1
connectors on the connector plate: [1]
Assembly
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL
2. Disconnect the R1 tubing at the joint. [3]

reagent pipettor to the processing module upper
mounting plate.
4. Lift the reagent pipettor [5] straight up and out of
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Place the reagent pipettor [5] into the
Pipettor #1
processing module, ensuring that the
Assembly
wires and tubing are not crushed or
crimped.
2. Secure the reagent pipettor to the upper
mounting plate with three (3) screws. [4]
3. Connect the R1 tubing at the joint. [3]
4. Connect the following connectors [2] to
the connectors on the connector plate: [1]
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL
Install
Pipettor #1
1. Secure the following decks for reagent
Decks
pipettor #1:
Secure the right front deck with

one (1) screw.
Secure the center front deck with
three (3) screws.
Secure the right center front deck
1. Secure the reagent probe with the probe
screw.
3. Connect the probe tubing to the metal
fitting.
4. Install the reagent pipettor head cover.
Note

R4.02 Pipettor, Reagent #2, Assembly Version - 96666-109_1132_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204134-01 Pipettor, Reagent #2, Assembly, O.W.
7-93245-03 Pipettor, Reagent #2, Assembly
R4.02 Pipettor, Reagent #2, Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
and the bridge.
screw.
joint.
Note

#2:

deck.
right center rear deck and remove the
deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor #2
Assembly
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL

mounting plate.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
Pipettor #2
Assembly
crimped.
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL
Install
Pipettor #2
1. Secure the following deck decks for
Decks
Reagent Pipettor #2:

Secure the right center rear deck
screw.
fitting.
5. Install the top front and top rear covers,
and the bridge.
Note

R4.03A Photo Sensor, R1 Pipettor Version - 96666-109_1133_2
List/Part Numbers
R4.03A R1 Pipettor Photo Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
and the bridge.
screw.
joint.
7. Remove the following decks:
deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor
Assembly
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL

reagent pipettor [5] to the processing module
4. Lift the reagent pipettor straight up and out of the
processing module.
Remove
Photo Sensor
1. Mark the sensor mounting plate [1] location on
the pipettor frame and then remove the two (2)
screws securing the mounting plate to the frame.
2. Disconnect connector [2] ROT-H or U/D-H from
the appropriate sensor.
Replacement

Install
Photo
1. Secure the sensor [3] to the mounting
Sensor
plate with one (1) screw.
2. Connect ROT-H or U/D-H [2] to the
appropriate sensor.
3. Secure the sensor mounting plate [1] to
the pipettor frame with two (2) screws.
Note
Ensure that the mounting plate
aligns with markings made on the
frame during removal.
Install
Reagent
Pipettor
Assembly
crimped.
3. Connect the R1 or R2 tubing at the
joint. [3]
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL
Install
Decks
1. Secure the following decks:

one (1) screw.
three (3) screws.
screw.
fitting.
and the bridge.
Note
initialization.

R4.03B Photo Sensor, R2 Pipettor Version - 96666-109_4845_1
List/Part Numbers
R4.03B R2 Pipettor Photo Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
and the bridge.
screw.
joint.
deck.
deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor
Assembly
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL
2. Disconnect the R1 or R2 tubing at the joint. [3]

4. Lift the reagent pipettor straight up and out of the
processing module.
Remove
Photo Sensor
1. Mark the sensor mounting plate [1] location on the
pipettor frame and then remove the two (2)
screws securing the mounting plate to the frame.
2. Disconnect connector [2] ROT-H or U/D-H from
the appropriate sensor.
Replacement

Install
Photo
1. Secure the sensor [3] to the mounting
Sensor
plate with one (1) screw.
2. Connect ROT-H or U/D-H [2] to the
appropriate sensor.
3. Secure the sensor mounting plate [1] to
the pipettor frame with two (2) screws.
Note
Ensure that the mounting plate
aligns with markings made on the
frame during removal.
Install
Reagent
Pipettor
Assembly
crimped.
3. Connect the R1 or R2 tubing at the
joint. [3]
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL
Install
Decks

screw.
fitting.
and the bridge.
Note
initialization.

R4.04 Tubing, R1 pipettor inner Version - 96666-109_1134_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93246-01 Tbg, R1 pipettor inne
R4.04 Tubing, R1 pipettor inner

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
screw.
joint.
Note

#1:

deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor #1
Assembly
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL

mounting plate.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor #1
Inner Tubing
guard.
to the connector plate and disconnect the wire.
3. Mark the cable/tubing spring [5] on each side of
the four (4) clamps for future reference.
clamps from the bottom end of the inner
tubing. [3]
clamps for the cable/tubing spring. [5]
the inner tubing out the top of the reagent
pipettor head.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Remove the sleeving and tubing identification clamps
Pipettor
from one end of the replacement tubing. [3]
#1 Inner
2. Feed the end of the replacement tubing with out the
Tubing
sleeving down the shaft of the reagent pipettor
elevator from the top until approximately seven inches
or eighteen centimeters extends past the end of the
cable/tubing spring. [5]
clamps to the bottom end of the inner tubing. [3]
four (4) clamps and screws. [4] Use reference marks
on the spring that were made during the removal
process.
5. Connect the ground wire [3] to connector plate and
6. Install the cable/tubing spring guard [1] and secure
Install
Reagent
1. Place the reagent pipettor [5] into the processing
Pipettor
#1
crushed or crimped.
Assembly
2. Secure the reagent pipettor to the upper mounting
plate with three (3) screws. [4]
4. Connect the following connectors [2] to the
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL
Install
Pipettor
1. Secure the following decks for Reagent Pipettor #1:
#1 Decks
Secure the right front deck with one (1) screw.
Secure the center front deck with three (3)
screws.
Secure the right center front deck with two (2)
screws.

1. Secure the reagent probe with the probe screw.
and shutdown.
3. Connect the probe tubing to the metal fitting.
Note

Startup procedure.
1 1101 - Robotics Test Tool Perform Horizontal Alignment Check.
Select the following:

3. R1 pipettor
2. Position
7. Horizontal Alignment Check
3 5405 - Crash Sensor Test Perform R1 Pipettor only.
R4.05 Tubing, R2 pipettor inner Version - 96666-109_1135_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93247-01 Tbg, R2 pipettor inner
R4.05 Tubing, R2 pipettor inner

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
and the bridge.
screw.
joint.
Note
#2:

deck.
deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor #2
Assembly
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL

mounting plate.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor #2
Inner Tubing
guard.
to the connector plate and disconnect the wire.
3. Mark the cable/tubing spring [5] on each side of
the four (4) clamps for future reference.
clamps from the bottom end of the inner
tubing. [3]
clamps for the cable/tubing spring. [5]
the inner tubing out the top of the reagent
pipettor head.
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Remove the sleeving and tubing identification clamps
Pipettor
from one end of the replacement tubing. [3]
#2 Inner
2. Feed the end of the replacement tubing with out the
Tubing
sleeving down the shaft of the reagent pipettor
elevator from the top until approximately seven inches
or eighteen centimeters extends past the end of the
cable/tubing spring. [5]
clamps to the bottom end of the inner tubing. [3]
four (4) clamps and screws. [4] Use reference marks
on the spring that were made during the removal
process.
5. Connect the ground wire [2] to connector plate and
6. Install the cable/tubing spring guard [1] and secure
Install
Reagent
1. Place the reagent pipettor [5] into the processing
Pipettor
#2
crushed or crimped.
Assembly
2. Secure the reagent pipettor to the upper mounting
plate with three (3) screws. [4]
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL
Install
Pipettor
1. Secure the following deck decks for Reagent Pipettor
#2 Decks
#2:
Secure the right center front deck with two (2)

screws.
Secure the right center rear deck with two (2)
screws.

and shutdown.
5. Install the top front and top rear covers, and the
bridge.
Note

Startup procedure.
R4.06A Solenoid, R1 Reagent Elevator Stop Version - 96666-109_1136_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93248-01 Solenoid, Reag pipettor elev
R4.06A Solenoid, R1 Reagent Elevator Stop

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation

and the bridge.

screw.
6. Disconnect the reagent probe tubing at the

metal joint.
Remove the screw securing the right

Remove the three (3) screws securing

the center front deck and remove the
deck.

deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor
Assembly
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL.

4. Lift the reagent pipettor straight up and out of
Remove
Reagent
1. Cut the wire ties in the wiring harness on the
Elevator
reagent pipettor to allow removal of the solenoid
Solenoid
cable. [1]
solenoid mounting bracket [2] to the pipettor
frame.
3. Remove the solenoid plunger and the spring [3]
from the solenoid.
solenoid [4] to the mounting bracket. [2]
Replacement
Install
Reagent
1. Secure the solenoid [4] to the mounting
Elevator
bracket [2] with four (4) screws.
Solenoid
2. Install the spring and plunger [3] into the
solenoid.
3. Secure the solenoid mounting bracket [2] to
the pipettor frame with two (2) screws. Ensure
that the plunger moves freely in the pipettor
frame.
4. Secure the solenoid cable [1] to the pipettor
wiring harness with cable ties.
Install
Reagent
Pipettor
assembly, ensuring that the wires and tubing
Assembly
are not crushed or crimped.
R1AS
R1AE
R1AA
R1AG
R1LLS
R1ASOL
Install
Decks
Secure the right front deck with one (1)

screw.
three (3) screws.
Secure the right center front deck with
two (2) screws.

screw.
the bridge.
Note
initialization.

R4.06B Solenoid, R2 Reagent Elevator Stop Version - 96666-109_4829_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93248-01 Solenoid, Reag pipettor elev
R4.06B Solenoid, R2 Reagent elevator stop

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
and the bridge.
screw.
metal joint.

deck.
deck.
Remove
Reagent
Pipettor
Assembly
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL.

4. Lift the reagent pipettor straight up and out of
Remove
Reagent
1. Cut the wire ties in the wiring harness on the
Elevator
reagent pipettor to allow removal of the solenoid
Solenoid
cable. [1]
solenoid mounting bracket [2] to the pipettor
frame.
3. Remove the solenoid plunger and the spring [3]
from the solenoid.
solenoid [4] to the mounting bracket. [2]
Replacement

Install
Reagent
1. Secure the solenoid [4] to the mounting
Elevator
bracket [2] with four (4) screws.
Solenoid
2. Install the spring and plunger [3] into the
solenoid.
3. Secure the solenoid mounting bracket [2] to
the pipettor frame with two (2) screws. Ensure
that the plunger moves freely in the pipettor
frame.
4. Secure the solenoid cable [1] to the pipettor
wiring harness with cable ties.
Install
Reagent
Pipettor
assembly, ensuring that the wires and tubing
Assembly
are not crushed or crimped.
R2AS
R2AE
R2AA
R2AG
R2LLS
R2ASOL
Install
Decks
1. Secure the following deck:
Secure the right center front deck with

two (2) screws.
Secure the right center rear deck with
two (2) screws.
screw.
the bridge.
Note
initialization.

R4.08A Photo Sensor, Pitch, R1 Reagent Pipettors Version - 96666-109_1138_3
List/Part Numbers
R4.08A Photo Sensor, Pitch, R1 Reagent Pipettors

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
screw.
joint.
6. Remove the following decks for reagent:

deck.
Remove Photo
Sensor, Rotate
Pitch
mounting bracket [1] to the top of the reagent
pipettor and lift bracket up.
mounting bracket.
3. Disconnect connector ROT-P [3] from the
sensor.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Connect ROT-P [3] to the sensor.
Sensor,
2. Mount the sensor [2] on the mounting
Rotate
Pitch
3. Secure the sensor mounting bracket [1] to
the top of the reagent pipettor with two (2)
screws.
Install
Decks

one (1) screw.
three (3) screws.
screw.
fitting.
Note
initialization.

R4.08B Photo Sensor, Pitch, R2 Reagent Pipettors Version - 96666-109_4830_1
List/Part Numbers
R4.08B Photo Sensor, Pitch, R2 Reagent Pipettors

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
screw.
joint.

deck.
deck.
Remove Photo
Sensor, Rotate
Pitch
mounting bracket [1] to the top of the reagent
pipettor and lift bracket up.
mounting bracket.
3. Disconnect connector ROT-P [3] from the
sensor.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Connect ROT-P [3] to the sensor.
Sensor,
2. Mount the sensor [2] on the mounting
Rotate
Pitch
3. Secure the sensor mounting bracket [1] to
the top of the reagent pipettor with two (2)
screws.
Install
Decks
1. Secure the following deck:

screw.
fitting.
Note
initialization.

R5.03 Spring, Crash Detect, Reagent Pipettors Version - 96666-109_1140_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89380-02 Spring,crash detect, all arms
R5.03 Spring, Crash Detect, Reagent Pipettors

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
joint.
Note
The end of the reagent probe tubing attached
to the probe has been tapered and removal
from the probe could damage the fit between
the probe and tubing.

screw.
4. Remove probe screw and probe from the pipettor.
Remove
Spring,
1. Loosen the two (2) small screws [1] on each end of
Crash
the spring [2].
Detect
2. Remove the spring [2] from the screws by lifting the
ends of the spring over the small screws
Replacement
Install Spring,
Crash Detect
1. Place the ends of the spring [2] over the two (2)
small screws.
Note
Use caution, the spring can lose its shape if
stretched too far.
2. Secure the ends of the spring by tightening the

two (2) small screws [1].
Prepare for
Operation
R5.04A Bd., R1 Reagent Crash Sensor Version - 96666-109_1142_3
List/Part Numbers
7-93251-03 Bd., crash sensor reag pipet
7-93251-04 Bd., crash sensor reag pipet (RoHS)
R5.04A Bd., R1Reagent Crash Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
metal joint.
under the screw.
5. Remove probe screw and probe from the
pipettor.
Remove Bd.
Reagent Pipettor
1. Remove the tubing holder [1] by lifting up and
Crash Detect
to the back of the pipettor.
2. Disconnect the RCRUSH plug [2] from the
crash detect board.
3. Remove the screw [4] securing the ground
wire to the probe mount.
4. Remove the screw [3] securing the board to
the pipettor head and lift the board out of the
pipettor head.
Replacement
Install Bd.
Reagent
1. Place the board into the pipettor head
Pipettor Crash
and secure with one (1) screw [3].
Detect
2. Secure the ground wire with a screw [4]
to the probe mount.
3. Connect the RCRUSH plug [2] to the
crash detect board.
screw.
fitting.
5. Replace any top covers removed.
Note

procedure.
R5.04B Bd., R2 Reagent Crash Sensor Version - 96666-109_4831_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93251-03 Bd., crash sensor reag pipet
7-93251-04 Bd., crash sensor reag pipet (RoHS)
R5.04B Bd., R2 Reagent Crash Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

or Offline status.
Preparation
Note
Removal of the pipettor head cover on
R2 pipettor may require the removal of
the rear top cover.

metal joint.
under the screw.
pipettor.
Remove Bd.
Reagent Pipettor
1. Remove the tubing holder [1] by lifting up and
Crash Detect
to the back of the pipettor.
2. Disconnect the RCRUSH plug [2] from the
crash detect board.
3. Remove the screw [4] securing the ground
wire to the probe mount.
4. Remove the screw [3] securing the board to
the pipettor head and lift the board out of the
pipettor head.
Replacement
Install Bd.
Reagent
1. Place the board into the pipettor head
Pipettor Crash
and secure with one (1) screw [3].
Detect
2. Secure the ground wire with a screw [4]
to the probe mount.
3. Connect the RCRUSH plug [2] to the
crash detect board.
screw.
fitting.
Note

procedure.
R5.08A Slide Mechanism R1 Pipettor Head Version - 96666-109_928_4
List/Part Numbers
R5.08A Slide Mechanism R1 Pipettor Head

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
joint.
screw.
pipettor.
Remove
Probe Slide
Mechanism
2. Disconnect the RCRUSH plug [2] from the crash
detect board.
3. Remove the screw [4] securing the ground wire
to the probe mount.
head.
Note
the top screw.
Replacement
Install
Probe Slide
Mechanism.
head with two ]2] hex head screws. Ensure that the
"T" shaped shim is located at the top screw
between the slide and the pipettor head.
3. Connect the RCRUSH plug [2] to the crash detect
board.
4. Secure the ground wire with a screw [4] to the
probe mount.
and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
R5.08B Slide Mechanism R2 Pipettor Head Version - 96666-109_4832_1
List/Part Numbers
R5.08B Slide Mechanism R2 Pipettor Head

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Note
Removal of the pipettor head cover on R2
pipettor may require the removal of the
rear top cover.

joint.
screw.
pipettor.
Remove
Probe Slide
Mechanism
2. Disconnect the RCRUSH plug [2] from the crash
detect board.
3. Remove the screw [4] securing the ground wire
to the probe mount.
head.
Note
the top screw.
Replacement
Install
Probe Slide
Mechanism.
head with two ]2] hex head screws. Ensure that the
"T" shaped shim is located at the top screw
between the slide and the pipettor head.
3. Connect the RCRUSH plug [2] to the crash detect
board.
4. Secure the ground wire with a screw [4] to the
probe mount.
and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
R6.01 Washer, Cuvette Version - 96666-109_1145_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93254-01 Washer, Cuvette
7-93254-02 Washer, Cuvette (RoHS)
7-93254-03 Washer, Cuvette (RoHS)
R6.01 Washer, Cuvette

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
rear deck and remove deck.
cover and remove the cover
5. Remove two (2) lower screws from the rear
closeout and loosen the top two (2) screws [3]
securing the rear closeout [2] and remove the
closeout.
Remove
Cuvette
1. Remove the cuvette wash head cover. [1]
Washer
2. Remove all tubing from nozzles #1 through #8.
Assembly
Note
It is not necessary to remove tubing from
the nozzles unless the cuvette wash head
is being replaced with the elevator.
3. Loosen the one (1) thumbscrew [2] securing the

cuvette wash head to the cuvette wash elevator
and remove the wash head.
4. Disconnect cables WE-S and WE-M from the
cuvette wash elevator.
5. Support the elevator while removing the four (4)
hex screws [3] that secure the elevator to the
processing module upper mounting plate.
6. Lower the elevator and remove to the rear of the
module.
Replacement

Install
Cuvette
1. Place the elevator into position on the
Washer
underside of the mounting plate and
Assembly
secure four (4) hex screws. [3]
2. Connect cables WE-S and WE-M.
3. Install the cuvette wash head on the
cuvette wash elevator and secure with
thumbscrew. [2]
4. Install tubing on nozzles #1 through #8 if
removed during removal process.
5. Install the cuvette wash head cover. [1]
screws.
2. Install rear closeout [2] and secure with
four (4) screws [3].
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

R6.02 Sensor, Photo Multiple Use Version - 96666-109_1146_1
List/Part Numbers
R6.02 Sensor, Photo Multiple Use

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
5. Remove two (2) lower screws from the rear
closeout and loosen the top two (2) screws [3]
securing the rear closeout [2] and remove the
closeout.
Remove
Cuvette
1. Remove the cuvette wash head cover. [1]
Washer
2. Remove all tubing from nozzles #1 through #8.
Assembly
Note
It is not necessary to remove tubing from
the nozzles unless the cuvette wash head
is being replaced with the elevator.

cuvette wash head to the cuvette wash elevator
and remove the wash head.
4. Disconnect cables WE-S and WE-M from the
cuvette wash elevator.
5. Support the elevator while removing the four (4)
hex screws [3] that secure the elevator to the
processing module upper mounting plate.
6. Lower the elevator and remove to the rear of the
module.
Remove
Photo
1. Disconnect the cable from sensor. [1]
Sensor
2. Remove the screw securing the sensor [2] and
remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Secure the sensor [2] with one (1) screw.
Sensor
2. Connect the cable [1] to the sensor.
Install
Cuvette
1. Place the elevator into position on the
Washer
underside of the mounting plate and
Assembly
secure four (4) hex screws. [3]
2. Connect cables WE-S and WE-M.
3. Install the cuvette wash head on the
cuvette wash elevator and secure with
thumbscrew. [2]
4. Install tubing on nozzles #1 through #8 if
removed during removal process.
5. Install the cuvette wash head cover. [1]
screws.
2. Install rear closeout [2] and secure with
four (4) screws [3].
four (4) screws.
four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

R6.04 Spring, Cuvette Wash Version - 96666-109_1147_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89378-02 Spring,Cuv Wash,cam following
R6.04 Spring, Cuvette Wash

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Remove
Cuvette Note
Wash Spring Spring can be accessed from the rear of the
processing module with out removal of Cuvette
Wash Assembly.
1. Remove the screw securing each spring

mounting disk [1] (top and bottom) and remove
the disks.
2. Remove the spring [2] from the mounting disks.
Replacement
Install
Cuvette
1. Place the spring [2] on the mounting disks.
Wash
2. Secure each mounting disk [1] (top and
Spring
bottom) with one (1) screw.

four (4) screws.
R6.07 Nozzle, #1, #4, & #5 Version - 96666-109_1150_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93256-01 Nozzle, #1, #4 & #5
7-93256-02 Nozzle, #1, #4 & #5
R6.07 Nozzle, #1, #4, & #5

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Remove the cuvette wash head
cover.
Remove
Nozzle, #1, #4, Note:
1. Remove the incoming and waste Video only shows the removal of nozzle 1. However, same
& #5
tubing [1] from the nozzle. instructions apply to removal of nozzles 4 and 5.
2. Remove the screw [2] securing
the nozzle [3] to the mounting
plate.
3. Lift the nozzle straight up.
Note
Replacement
Install
Nozzle, Note:
1. Place the nozzle [3] on the mounting Video only shows the removal of nozzle 1. However, same
#1, #4, &
plate and secure with one (1) screw. [2] instructions apply to removal of nozzles 4 and 5.
#5
2. Install the incoming and waste tubing [1]
on the nozzle.
3. Install the cuvette wash head cover.
Note

procedure.
R6.08 Nozzle, # 2 & 3, Wash Solution Version - 96666-109_1151_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93257-01 Nozzle, #2 & #3, wash solution
7-93257-02 Nozzle, #2 & #3, wash solution
R6.08 Nozzle, # 2 & 3, Wash Solution

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
cover.
Remove Nozzle, # 2
& 3, Wash Solution
1. Remove the incoming and
waste tubing [1] from the
nozzle.
plate.
Replacement
Install
Nozzle, # 2
1. Place the nozzle [3] on the mounting
& 3, Wash
plate and secure with one (1) screw. [2]
Solution
on the nozzle.
R6.10 Nozzle, #6, Blank Version - 96666-109_1154_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93258-01 Nozzle, #6, Blank
R6.10 Nozzle, #6, Blank

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
cover.
Remove
Nozzle, #6,
1. Remove the incoming and waste
Blank
tubing [1] from the nozzle.
plate.
Note
Replacement
Install
Nozzle,
#6, Blank
on the nozzle.
Note
procedure.
R6.11 Nozzle, #7, Suction Version - 96666-109_1155_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93259-01 Nozzle, #7, Suction
R6.11 Nozzle, #7, Suction

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
cover.
Remove
Nozzle, #7,
1. Remove the vacuum tubing [1]
Suction
from the nozzle.
plate.
Note
Replacement
Install
Nozzle,
#7,
Suction
2. Install the vacuum tubing [1] on the
nozzle.
Note
procedure.
R6.12 Nozzle, #8, Dryer Version - 96666-109_1156_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89271-03 Nozzle, dry
R6.12 Nozzle, #8, Dryer

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
cover.
Remove
Nozzle, #8,
1. Remove the vacuum tubing [1] from
Dryer
the nozzle.
securing the nozzle [3] to the
mounting plate.
Note
Replacement
Install
Nozzle,
#8, Dryer
plate and secure with two (2) screws. [2]
2. Install the vacuum tubing [1] on the
nozzle.
Note

procedure.
R6.13 Cuvette drying tip Version - 96666-109_1157_2
List/Part Numbers
09D51-02 Cuvette Drying Tip
7-93428-01 Cuvette Dry Tip 1
R6.13 Cuvette drying tip

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Remove
Cuvette
1. Remove the cuvette washer
Washer
cover [1] by unscrewing the
Assembly
thumbscrew [2].
and Dryer
Tip 2. Loosen the black knurled knob [3] to
the left of the cuvette washer until
the cuvette washer assembly [4] can
be lifted from the mounting plate [5].
Caution
Use gloves during this step.
Residual oil interferes with
the proper drying function of
the tip.
3. Lift the cuvette washer assembly up
and rotate it so that the white dryer Note
tip is easily accessed. Video contains no audio sound.
Note
The cuvette washer nozzles
are all attached to a black
nozzle mounting plate. There
is no need to remove any of
the screws securing the wash
nozzles to the mounting plate.
4. Remove the dryer tip [1] by pulling it

off of the metal nozzle [2]. Discard
the old tip.
Replacement
Install dryer
tip and
1. Gently install the new dryer tip. The
cuvette
wide side of the dryer tip faces the
washer
nozzles.
Note
The dryer tip and the Reaction
Cuvettes are both rectangular.
Install the dryer tip so that it fits
into the cuvette.
2. Position the bottom of the dryer tip

61mm from the underside of the
cuvette washer assembly [1].
3. Position the cuvette washer
assembly [2] on the alignment pins [3] (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
and tighten the black knurled
knob [4]. Note
R6.14 Knob, Cuvette Head Mount Version - 96666-109_1158_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93260-01 Knob, Cuvette Head Mount
R6.14 Knob, Cuvette Head Mount

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Knob
person.
Replacement

R7.01 ICT Assembly Version - 96666-109_1159_1
List/Part Numbers
7-203684-01 ICT Assembly O.W.
7-93261-01 ICT Assembly
7-93261-02 ICT Assembly
R7.01 ICT Assembly

may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
ICT Module
1. Loosen the one (1) thumbscrew securing the ICT
head cover [1] and remove the cover.
2. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing the head
top plate [2] and remove the plate.
3. Loosen the retaining screw and lift the ICT
module [3] from the head.
4. Disconnect the tubing [4] and the pre-amp cable [5]
from the ICT module.
Remove
ICT Water
1. Loosen the allen set screw securing the ICT water
Jacket
jacket in the ICT housing.
mounting plate to the module head mounting plate.
3. Lift the ICT water jacket with tubing from the ICT
housing.
4. Lay the ICT water jacket with tubing and cover
mounting plate to the side, out of the way.
Remove
ICT
1. Disconnect the following cables from the ICT
Assembly
assembly:
(Old Style)
ISEAS from connector ISEAS
ISEAA from connector ISEAM
ISEAE from connector ISEEM.
2. Disconnect the ICT holding spring [1] from the ICT

assembly [3].
3. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the ICT
assembly to the frame and lift the assembly [3]
straight up and out of the processing module.
Note
The new style ICT assembly has the spring
mounting post incorporated into the ICT
assembly. The new ICT assembly is
downward compatible and does not require
the removal of the spring mounting post from
the instrument frame for installation. The old
style ICT assembly is not upward compatible
since there will not be a spring mounting
post on the newer instruments.The new style
ICT assembly will be installed in the c8000
module starting with serial number c800567.
Remove
ICT Note
Assembly The new style ICT assembly has the spring
(New Style) mounting post incorporated into the ICT assembly.
The new ICT assembly is downward compatible and
does not require the removal of the spring mounting
post from the instrument frame for installation. The
old style ICT assembly is not upward compatible
since there will not be a spring mounting post on
the newer instruments. The new style ICT assembly
will be installed in the c8000 module starting with
serial number c800567.

assembly:


straight up out of the processing module.
Replacement

Install
ICT
1. Place the ICT assembly [3] into position over the
Assembly
guide pins in the frame and secure with four (4)
(Old
screws [2].
Style)
2. Install the ICT holding spring [1] between the ICT
assembly and the standoff on the frame.
3. Connect the following cables:
ISEAS to connector ISEAS

ISEAA to connector ISEAM
ISEAE to connector ISEEM.
Note
The new style ICT assembly has the
spring mounting post incorporated into
the ICT assembly. The new ICT
assembly is downward compatible and
does not require the removal of the
spring mounting post from the
instrument frame for installation. The old
style ICT assembly is not upward
compatible since there will not be a
spring mounting post on the newer
instruments. The new style ICT
assembly will be installed in the c8000
module starting with serial number
c800567.
Install
ICT Note
Assembly The new style ICT assembly has the spring mounting
(New post incorporated into the ICT assembly. The new ICT
Style) assembly is downward compatible and does not
require the removal of the spring mounting post from
the instrument frame for installation. The old style ICT
assembly is not upward compatible since there will
not be a spring mounting post on the newer
instruments.The new style ICT assembly will be
installed in the c8000 module starting with serial
number c800567.

screws [1].

Install
ICT
1. Place the ICT water jacket with tubing into the ICT
Water
housing. Ensure the water jacket is against bottom of
Jacket
the ICT housing.
2. Tighten the allen set screw securing the ICT water
3. Fasten the cover mounting plate to the module head
mounting plate with two (2) screws.
Install
ICT
1. Connect the tubing [4] and the pre-amp cable [5] to
Module
the ICT module [3] and place into the ICT module
head. Then tighten the retaining screw.
2. Secure the head top plate [2] with two (2)
thumbscrews.
3. Secure the ICT head cover [1] with one (1)
thumbscrew.

1. Secure the rear center deck with two (2) screws.
2. Secure the right rear center deck with two (2) screws.
and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
R7.02 Photo Sensor ICT Assembly Version - 96666-109_1160_1
List/Part Numbers
R7.02 Photo Sensor ICT Assembly

may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
processing module).
Remove
ICT Module
1. Loosen the one (1) thumbscrew securing the ICT
head cover [1] and remove the cover.
2. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing the head
top plate [2] and remove the plate.
3. Loosen the retaining screw and lift the ICT
module [3] from the head.
4. Disconnect the tubing [4] and the pre-amp cable [5]
from the ICT module.
Remove
ICT Water
1. Loosen the allen set screw securing the ICT water
Jacket
mounting plate to the module head mounting plate.
3. Lift the ICT water jacket with tubing from the ICT
housing.
4. Lay the ICT water jacket with tubing and cover
mounting plate to the side, out of the way.
Remove
ICT
Assembly
assembly:
(Old Style)
2. Disconnect the ICT holding spring [1] from the ICT

assembly [3].
straight up out of the processing module.
Note
The new style ICT assembly has the spring
mounting post incorporated into the ICT
assembly. The new ICT assembly is
downward compatible and does not require
the removal of the spring mounting post from
the instrument frame for installation. The old
style ICT assembly is not upward compatible
since there will not be a spring mounting
post on the newer instruments. The new
style ICT assembly will be installed in the
c8000 module starting with serial number
c800567.
Remove
ICT Note
Assembly The new style ICT assembly has the spring
(New Style) mounting post incorporated into the ICT assembly.
The new ICT assembly is downward compatible and
does not require the removal of the spring mounting
post from the instrument frame for installation. The
old style ICT assembly is not upward compatible
since there will not be a spring mounting post on
the newer instruments. The new style ICT assembly
will be installed in the c8000 module starting with
serial number c800567.

assembly:


straight up and out of the processing module.
Remove
Sensor(s)
1. Disconnect the sensor (UP, pitch, home) cables. [1]
2. Remove the two (2) cable ties from the ICT
assembly frame by pressing on the sides of the tie
where it passes through the frame of the assembly.
3. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the sensor
mounting plate [3] to the ICT assembly.
4. Remove the screw securing the sensor(s). [4]
Replacement
Install
Sensor(s)
1. Install the sensor(s) [4] on the mounting plate with
one (1) screw.
2. Install the sensor mounting plate [3] to the ICT
assembly and secure with four (4) screws. [2]
3. Install the two (2) cable ties into the ICT assembly
frame to the secure wiring.
4. Connect the sensor cables; [1] up, pitch, home.
Install
ICT
Assembly
(Old
screws [2].
Style)
2. Install the ICT holding spring [1] between the ICT
assembly and the standoff on the frame.
Note
The new style ICT assembly has the
spring mounting post incorporated into
the ICT assembly. The new ICT
assembly is downward compatible and
does not require the removal of the
spring mounting post from the
instrument frame for installation. The old
style ICT assembly is not upward
compatible since there will not be a
spring mounting post on the newer
instruments. The new style ICT
assembly will be installed in the c8000
module starting with serial number
c800567.
Install
ICT Note
Assembly The new style ICT assembly has the spring mounting
(New post incorporated into the ICT assembly. The new ICT
Style) assembly is downward compatible and does not
require the removal of the spring mounting post from
the instrument frame for installation. The old style ICT
assembly is not upward compatible since there will
not be a spring mounting post on the newer
instruments. The new style ICT assembly will be
installed in the c8000 module starting with serial
number c800567.

screws [1].

Install
ICT
1. Place the ICT water jacket with tubing into the ICT
Water
housing. Ensure the water jacket is against bottom of
Jacket
the ICT housing.
2. Tighten the allen set screw securing the ICT water
3. Fasten the cover mounting plate to the module head
mounting plate with two (2) screws.
Install
ICT
1. Connect the tubing [4] and the pre-amp cable [5] to
Module
the ICT module [3] and place into the ICT module
head. Then tighten the retaining screw.
thumbscrews.
3. Secure the ICT head cover [1] with one (1)
thumbscrew.

1. Secure the rear center deck with two (2) screws.
2. Secure the right rear center deck with two (2) screws.
and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-118) • © 2002, 2008• ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
R7.03 Spring, ICT Version - 96666-109_1161_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89372-02 Spring, ICT
R7.03 Spring, ICT

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Preparation
the center rear deck and remove the
deck.
Remove
ICT Spring
1. Disconnect the ICT holding spring [1]
from the ICT assembly and mounting
post.
Replacement
Install
ICT
1. Place the spring [1] on the mounting post
Spring
and connect to the spring mount on the
ICT assembly

1. Secure the rear center deck with two (2)
screws.
R7.05 Stop, mechanical, rotational Version - 96666-109_1162_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93262-01 Stop, mechanical, rotational
R7.05 Stop, mechanical, rotational

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the center rear
Remove
Rotational
1. Remove the ICT spring [1] from the mounting point
Stop
on the ICT assembly, do not remove from the
processing module frame mounting point.
2. Unscrew the mechanical stop(s) [2] from the ICT
assembly.
Replacement
Install
Rotational
1. Screw the mechanical stop(s) [2] into the
Stop
ICT assembly.
2. Connect the ICT spring [1] to the ICT
mounting point.

1. Secure the right rear center deck with
two (2) screws.
2. Secure the rear center deck with two (2)
screws.
R7.13 Cable, ICT pre amp to ICT Version - 96666-109_1167_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89069-02 Cable, ICT pre amp to ICT
2-89069-03 Cable, ICT pre amp to ICT
R7.13 Cable, ICT pre amp to ICT

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
Access
Pre-Amp
Cable
ICT head cover and remove the cover.
head top plate [2] and remove the plate.
3. Loosen the retaining screw [3] and lift the ICT [4]
module from the head.
Remove
Pre-amp
1. Disconnect the pre-amp cable from the ICT
Cable
module.
2. Place the ICT module back in the ICT head.
3. Unscrew the pre-amp cable [1] from the top of
pre-amp module.
4. Cut the wire ties securing the cable and remove
the cable from the processing module.
Replacement

Install
Pre-amp
1. Screw the pre-amp cable [1] to the
Cable
connector on the top of the pre-amp
module.
2. Route the cable to the ICT module and
connect to the module.
3. Secure the cable with wire ties.
Install
ICT
1. Connect the pre-amp cable to the ICT
Module
module [4] and place into the ICT module
head. Then tighten the retaining screw [3].
thumbscrews.
3. Secure the ICT head cover with one (1)
thumbscrew [1].

four (4) screws.
Note
initialization.

S1.01 Sample Carousel Assembly Version - 96666-109_1169_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204566-01 Sample Carousel Assembly, O.W.
7-93266-01 Sample Carousel Assembly
7-93266-02 Sample Carousel Assembly
S1.01 Sample Carousel Assembly

Absorbent Towel
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

The Sample Carousel Assembly with three (3) TED Subsection: System status.
assemblies mounted on the bottom must only be
used with the main power supply (part number
93161) that has a PS-3 12VDC supply installed.
Starting with processing module serial number
c800224, the Sample Carousel Assembly only has
two (2) TED assemblies.
Note
See compatibility chart 2.5 Power supplies.

Offline status.
2. Remove the sample carousel cover.
3. Remove the samples from the sample carousel and
store in a proper location.
Preparation
processing module).
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Sample
1. Disconnect cables [1] IS BCRP, ISS, ISUC, ISTS,
Carousel
and ISM.
Assembly
sample carousel.
3. Lift the sample carousel assembly [3] straight up
until the drain tubing [4] is accessible.
4. Remove the drain tubing. [4]
5. Lift the sample carousel assembly out of the
processing module.
Note
When setting the sample carousel assembly
down, use caution not to damage the fans or
the sensors on the underside of the sample
carousel assembly.
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Place sample carousel assembly [3] into the
Carousel
processing module and install the drain tubing. [4]
Assembly
2. Lower the sample carousel assembly straight down
and secure it to the mount with three (3) screws. [2]
Note
Verify that the ground strap to the thermostat
is secured to the sample carousel base.
3. Connect cables [1] IS BCRP, ISS, ISUC, ISTS, and

ISM to the sample carousel assembly.

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
4. Perform P-135 Sample Carousel BCR Alignment.
5. Verify the mini fan is turning and that air flow is
toward the BCR window.
Note
8. Install the sample carousel and sample carousel

cover.
2 3251 - Sample Carousel Bar Code Reader
Test
S1.02 Bar Code Reader, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1170_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93267-01 BCR, sample carousel
7-93267-02 BCR, sample carousel
S1.02 Bar Code Reader, Sample Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

or Offline status.
3. Remove the samples from the sample
carousel and store in a proper location.
Preparation
2. Remove the screw securing the left front
Note
enough service loop to set the deck
aside.
Remove Sample
Carousel ID Bar
1. Disconnect the bar code reader connector [1]
Code Reader
and cut any wire ties holding the BCR cable.
bar code reader [2] to the mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Secure the bar code reader [2] to the mounting
Carousel ID
bracket with two (2) screws [3].
Bar Code
2. Connect the bar code reader connector [1] and
Reader
secure the BCR cable with wire ties.

Note and shutdown.

Note
placed behind the sample carousel bar
code reader. If the cables are placed in
front of the bar code reader, read errors
occur.
Test
S1.03 Hinge, Cover Latch Version - 96666-109_1171_1
List/Part Numbers
S1.03 Hinge, Cover Latch

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Cover
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the hinge
Latch Hinge
assembly [2] to the sample carousel assembly.
latch [3] to hinge.
Replacement
Install
Cover
1. Secure the latch [3] to the hinge with two (2)
Latch
screws. [4]
Hinge
2. Secure the hinge assembly [2] to the sample
carousel assembly with two (2) screws [1].
Note and shutdown.
2. Secure the sample carousel cover.

Startup procedure.
S1.04 Photo Sensor, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1172_1
List/Part Numbers
S1.04 Photo Sensor, Sample Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Note
This procedure is for the three (3) sensors on the sample carousel assembly.
Removal

Offline status.
3. Remove the samples from the sample carousel
and store in a proper location.
Preparation
processing module).
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Sample
Carousel
and ISM.
Assembly
sample carousel.
4. Remove the drain tubing [4].
processing module.
Note
down, use caution not to damage the fans
or the sensors on the underside of the
sample carousel assembly.
Remove
Photo
1. Disconnect the cable [1] from the sensor (PITCH,
Multiple Use
POSI, or HOME).
Sensor
2. Remove the sensor:
For the PITCH sensor [4], remove the

two (2) screws securing the sensor bracket,
remove the screw [5] securing the sensor,
and remove the sensor.
For POSI [3], or HOME [2] sensors, remove
the screw [5] securing the sensor to the
mounting and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Install
Photo
1. Install the sensor:
Multiple
Use For POSI [3], or HOME [2] sensors, secure
Sensor the sensor to mounting with one (1) screw [5].
For the PITCH sensor [4], secure the sensor
to the sensor bracket with one (1) screw [5],
and secure the bracket to the carousel
assembly with two (2) screws.
2. Connect the cable [1] to the sensor (PITCH, POSI,

or HOME).
Install
Sample
Carousel
processing module and install the drain tubing [4].
Assembly
and secure it to the mount with three (3) screws [2].
Note

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
Note

cover.
Test
S1.05 Cover Detector, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1173_1
List/Part Numbers
S1.05 Cover Detector, Sample Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Detector
1. Disconnect connector CVR [1].
Cover
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the mounting
bracket [2] to the sample carousel base.
detector [3] to the mounting bracket.
Replacement
Install
Detector
1. Secure the detector [3] to the bracket with two (2)
Cover
screws.
2. Secure the mounting bracket [2] to the sample
carousel base with two (2) screws.
3. Connect connector CVR [1].
Note and shutdown.
Note

Startup procedure.
S1.06 TED, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1174_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89403-02 TED, Crsl Sampler, includes fan
S1.06 TED, Sample Carousel

Absorbent Towel
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Sample Carousel Assemblies starting with c 8000 Subsection: System status.
serial number c800224 only have two (2) TED
assemblies. One of the TED assemblies was
replaced with a foam insert (7-93535-01).
Note
See compatibility chart 2.5 Power supplies.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Sample
Carousel
and ISM.
Assembly
sample carousel.
5. Lift the sample carousel assembly [3] out of the
processing module.
Note
down, use caution not to damage the fans or
the sensors on the underside of the sample
carousel assembly.
Remove
Sample
1. Disconnect connectors [3] UC and FAN for the
Carousel
selected TED and cut any wire ties securing the
TED
TED cables to the sample carousel cable bundle.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] (inside the sample
carousel housing) securing the TED [1] to the
sample carousel base and remove the TED.
Replacement
Install
Sample
1. Apply a thin coat of thermal grease on the heat
Carousel
transfer surface [4] of the TED.
TED
2. Install the TED [1] to the base of the sample
carousel and secure with two (2) screws [2] on the
inside of the sample carousel housing. Coat the
screw heads with silicone seal.
3. Connect connectors [3] UC and FAN for the selected
TED and secure the TED cables to the sample
carousel cable bundle.
Install
Sample
Carousel
Assembly
Note


Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
Note

cover.
Test
S1.07 Latch, cover, sample crsl Version - 96666-109_1176_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204938-01 Latch, Cover, OW
7-93268-01 Latch, cover
S1.07 Latch, cover, sample crsl

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Cover
Latch
latch [2] to the hinge.
2. Remove the latch.
Replacement
Install
Cover
1. Secure the latch [2] to the hinge with two (2)
Latch
screws [1].
Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
S1.08 Bar Code Reader Fan, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1177_1
List/Part Numbers
7-202550-01 Fan, Mini, R1, R2, BCRs, 16
S1.08 Bar Code Reader Fan, Sample Carousel

Absorbent Towel
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Sample
Carousel
and ISM.
Assembly
sample carousel.
4. Remove the drain tubing. [4]
processing module.
Note
Remove
BCR Mini
1. Disconnect the cable FAN. [1]
Fan
2. Release the carousel cable bundle from the cable
clamp and cut the wire ties securing the mini BCR
fan cable to the carousel cable bundle
bracket [3] to the carousel base plate.
bracket. [4]
5. Remove four (4) counter sunk bolts / nuts [7]
securing the fan [5] to the bracket.
Replacement
Install
BCR Mini
1. Place the fan [5] onto the brackets and secure with
Fan
four (4) counter sunk bolts / nuts [7].
Note
Ensure proper orientation of the fan.
2. Secure the filter bracket [4] to the fan bracket [3]

with two (2) screws [6].
3. Secure the fan bracket [3] to the carousel base plate
4. Connect the cable FAN. [1]
5. Secure the mini BCR fan cable to the sample
carousel cable bundle with wire ties and secure the
carousel cable bundle with the cable clamp.
Install
Sample
Carousel
processing module and install the drain tubing. [4]
Assembly
and secure it to the mount with three (3) screws. [2]
Note

Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
Note

cover.
Test
S1.09 Filter, Sample Carousel Bar Code Reader Version - 96666-109_1178_1
List/Part Numbers
S1.09 Filter, Sample Carousel Bar Code Reader

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
BCR Mini
1. Pull straight up on the filter to remove it from the
Fan Filter
bracket.
Replacement
Install
BCR Mini
1. Place the filter into the bracket and slide it to the
Fan Filter
bottom of the slot.
and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
Note
S1.10 Temperature Detector, Sample Carousel Version - 96666-109_1179_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89549-02 Temperature detector, C/C crsl
S1.10 Temperature Detector, Sample Carousel

Absorbent Towel
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
3. Remove the samples from the sample carousel
and store in a proper location.
Preparation
processing module).
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
Sample
Carousel
and ISM.
Assembly
sample carousel.
processing module.
Note
Remove
Temp
1. Disconnect the connector TEMP [1].
Detector
2. Release the carousel cable bundle from the cable
clamp and cut the wire ties securing the
temperature detector cable to the carousel cable
bundle
3. Lift the insulation [2] from the side of the carousel
housing to expose the detector.
4. Gently pull the detector [3] out of the housing.
Replacement
Install
Temp
1. Coat the detector [3] with a thin layer of thermal
Detector
compound and gently push the detector into the side
of housing.
2. Place the insulation [2] over the detector.
3. Connect TEMP [1].
4. Secure the temperature detector cable to the sample
carousel cable bundle with wire ties and secure the
carousel cable bundle with the cable clamp.
Install
Sample
Carousel
Assembly
Note


Note and shutdown.

Startup procedure.
Note

cover.
Test
T0.01 Tbg, ICT valve NC to ICT joint Version - 96666-109_1181_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93269-01 Tbg, ICT valve NC-ICT Module
T0.01 Tbg, ICT valve NC to ICT joint

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.02 Tbg, ICT syringe to ICT syringe valve Version - 96666-109_1182_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89415-02 Tbg ICT Syr-ICT Syr Vlv
T0.02 Tbg, ICT syringe to ICT syringe valve

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.03 Tbg, ICT valve NO to waste Version - 96666-109_1183_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93270-01 Tbg, ICT valve NO-waste
T0.03 Tbg, ICT valve NO to waste

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.04 Tbg, ICT waste to 1mL syringe Version - 96666-109_1184_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93271-01 Tbg, ICT waste to-1ml syr
T0.04 Tbg, ICT waste to 1mL syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.05 Tbg, ICT 1mL syringe to high conc. T fitting Version - 96666-109_1185_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93272-01 Tbg, ICT 1ml syr-HC T fitting
T0.05 Tbg, ICT 1mL syringe to high conc. T fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.06 Tbg, ICT reference bottle to 1mL syringe Version - 96666-109_1187_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93273-01 Tbg, Iref bottle-1ml syr
T0.06 Tbg, ICT reference bottle to 1mL syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.07 Tbg, ICT reference pump to warming tube Version - 96666-109_1188_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93274-01 Tbg, Iref pmp-warming tube
T0.07 Tbg, ICT reference pump to warming tube

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.08 Tbg, ICT reference cup to ICT reference pump Version - 96666-109_1189_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93275-01 Tbg, Iref cup-Iref pmp
T0.08 Tbg, ICT reference cup to ICT reference pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.09 Tbg, ICT reference pump to waste cup Version - 96666-109_1190_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93276-01 Tbg, Iref pmp-waste cup
T0.09 Tbg, ICT reference pump to waste cup

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T0.10 Tbg, ICT reference cup to warming tube Version - 96666-109_1191_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89533-02 Tbg, ICT MCC pot- warming tube
T0.10 Tbg, ICT reference cup to warming tube

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.01 Tbg, DI manifold to 1mL ACD syringe Version - 96666-109_1192_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93277-01 Tbg, DI manifold-1ml ACD syr
T1.01 Tbg, DI manifold to 1mL ACD syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.02 Tbg, DI manifold to 1mL ALK syringe Version - 96666-109_1193_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93278-01 Tbg, DI manifold-1ml ALK syr
T1.02 Tbg, DI manifold to 1mL ALK syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.03 Tbg, 1mL ACD syringe to small syringe Version - 96666-109_1194_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93279-01 Tbg, 1ml ACD syr-small syr
T1.03 Tbg, 1mL ACD syringe to small syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.04 Tbg, 1mL ALK syringe to small syringe Version - 96666-109_1196_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93281-01 Tbg, ACD bottle-valve ACD1
T1.04 Tbg, 1mL ALK syringe to small syringe

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.05 Tbg, ACD bottle to valve ACD1 Version - 96666-109_1195_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93280-01 Tbg, 1ml ALK syr-small syr
7-93281-02 Tbg, ACD bottle-valve ACD1
T1.05 Tbg, ACD bottle to valve ACD1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.06 Tbg, small syringe to valve ACD1 & ALK1 Version - 96666-109_1198_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93282-01 Tbg, small syr-valve ACD1,ALK1
T1.06 Tbg, small syringe to valve ACD1 & ALK1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.08 Tbg, ALK bottle to valve ALK1 Version - 96666-109_1199_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93284-01 Tbg, ALK bottle to valve
7-93284-02 Tbg, ALK bottle to valve
T1.08 Tbg, ALK bottle to valve ALK1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.09 Tbg, ACD1 valve NO to ACD2 valve COM Version - 96666-109_1200_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93285-01 Tbg, ACD1 vlv NO-ACD2 vlv COM
T1.09 Tbg, ACD1 valve NO to ACD2 valve COM

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.10 Tbg, ACD2 valve NC to ACD/ALK manifold Version - 96666-109_1201_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93286-01 Tbg, ADC2 vlv NC-ACD/ALK man
T1.10 Tbg, ACD2 valve NC to ACD/ALK manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.11 Tbg, ALK 1 valve NO to ALK2 valve COM Version - 96666-109_1202_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93287-01 Tbg, ALK1 vlv NO-ALK2 vlv COM
T1.11 Tbg, ALK 1 valve NO to ALK2 valve COM

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.12 Tbg, ALK2 valve NC to ACD/ALK manifold Version - 96666-109_1203_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93288-01 Tbg, ALK2 vlv NC-ACD/ALK man
T1.12 Tbg, ALK2 valve NC to ACD/ALK manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.13 Tbg, ALK2 valve NO to low conc. waste tank Version - 96666-109_1204_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93289-01 Tbg, ALK2 vlv NO-LC waste tnk
T1.13 Tbg, ALK2 valve NO to low conc. waste tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.14 Tbg, ACD2 valve NO to low conc. waste tank Version - 96666-109_1205_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93290-01 Tbg, ACD2 vlv NO-LC waste tnk
T1.14 Tbg, ACD2 valve NO to low conc. waste tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.15 Tbg, ACD/ALK manifold to ALK nozzle Version - 96666-109_1206_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93291-01 Tbg, ACD/ALK man-ALK noz
T1.15 Tbg, ACD/ALK manifold to ALK nozzle

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T1.16 Tbg, ACD/ALK manifold to ACD nozzle Version - 96666-109_1207_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93292-01 Tbg, ACD/ALK man-ACD noz
T1.16 Tbg, ACD/ALK manifold to ACD nozzle

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.01 Tbg, DI tank to cuvette wash pump Version - 96666-109_1209_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93293-01 Tbg, DI tnk-Cuv wash pump
T2.01 Tbg, DI tank to cuvette wash pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.02 Tbg, cuvette wash pump to wash valve COM Version - 96666-109_1210_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93294-01 Tbg, Cuv wash pump-vlv COM
T2.02 Tbg, cuvette wash pump to wash valve COM

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.03 Tbg, wash valve NC to wash manifold Version - 96666-109_1211_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93295-01 Tbg, Wash vlv NC-wash man
T2.03 Tbg, wash valve NC to wash manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.04 Tbg, wash manifold to high conc. nozzle Version - 96666-109_1212_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93293-01 Tbg, DI tnk-Cuv wash pump
7-93296-01 Tbg, wash man-HC noz
T2.04 Tbg, wash manifold to high conc. nozzle

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.05 Tbg, wash manifold to water nozzle #4 Version - 96666-109_1213_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93297-01 Tbg, wash man-water noz, 4
T2.05 Tbg, wash manifold to water nozzle #4

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.06 Tbg, wash manifold to water nozzle #5 Version - 96666-109_1214_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93298-01 Tbg, wash man-water noz, 5
T2.06 Tbg, wash manifold to water nozzle #5

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.07 Tbg, wash manifold to water blank nozzle #6 Version - 96666-109_1215_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93299-01 Tbg, wash man-water blk noz
T2.07 Tbg, wash manifold to water blank nozzle #6

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.08 Tbg, wash valve NO to Y fitting Version - 96666-109_1216_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93300-01 Tbg, wash vlv NO-Y fitting
T2.08 Tbg, wash valve NO to Y fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.09 Tbg, Y fitting to R1 supply Version - 96666-109_1217_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93301-01 Tbg, Y fitting-R1 supply
T2.09 Tbg, Y fitting to R1 supply

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.10 Tbg, Y fitting to R2 supply Version - 96666-109_1218_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93302-01 Tbg, Y fitting-R2 supply
T2.10 Tbg, Y fitting to R2 supply

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.11 Y-Fitting Cuvette Wash Valve to Supply Centers Version - 96666-109_1220_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89183-02 Fitting Y, Vac pmp&cuv wsh pmp
T2.11 Y-Fitting Cuvette Wash Valve to Supply Centers

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.12 Tbg, water tank to Lbow cuvette wash pump line Version - 96666-109_1221_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93303-01 Tbg, water tank to Lbow cuv wat lin
T2.12 Tbg, water tank to Lbow cuvette wash pump line

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T2.13 Fitting, Lbow, DI water to cuvette wash pump line Version - 96666-109_1222_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93304-01 Fitting, Lbow DI cuv wash line
T2.13 Fitting, Lbow, DI water to cuvette wash pump line

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.01 Tbg, DI water manifold to degasser Version - 96666-109_1223_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93305-01 Tbg, DI water man-degasser
T3.01 Tbg, DI water manifold to degasser

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.02 Tbg, degasser to DI manifold Version - 96666-109_1224_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93306-01 Tbg, degasser to DI water man
T3.02 Tbg, degasser to DI manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.03 Tbg, DI Water Manifold to Probe Wash Pump Version - 96666-109_1225_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93307-01 Tbg, DI water man-prob was pmp
T3.03 Tbg, DI Water Manifold to Probe Wash Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.04 Tbg, probe wash pump to valve manifold Version - 96666-109_1226_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93308-01 Tbg, probe wash pmp-vlv man
T3.04 Tbg, probe wash pump to valve manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.05 Tbg, sample valve to sample pump Version - 96666-109_1227_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203787-01 Tbg, sample vlv-sample pmp, new style
7-93309-01 Tbg, smpl vlv-smpl pmp
T3.05 Tbg, sample valve to sample pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.06 Tbg, reagent 1 valve to reagent 1 pump Version - 96666-109_1228_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203788-01 Tbg, reag 1 vlv-reag 1 pmp, new style
7-93310-01 Tbg, reag 1 vlv-reag 1 pmp
T3.06 Tbg, reagent 1 valve to reagent 1 pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.07 Tbg, reagent 2 valve to reagent 2 pump Version - 96666-109_1229_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203789-01 Tbg, reag 2 vlv-reag 2 pmp, new style
7-93311-01 Tbg, reag 2 vlv-reag 2 pmp
T3.07 Tbg, reagent 2 valve to reagent 2 pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.08 Tbg, sample pump to pipettor joint Version - 96666-109_1231_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93312-02 Tbg, smpl pmp to pipet jnt, NS
T3.08 Tbg, sample pump to pipettor joint

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.09 Tbg, reagent 1 pump to pipettor joint Version - 96666-109_1232_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93313-01 Tbg, reag1 pmp to pipet joint
T3.09 Tbg, reagent 1 pump to pipettor joint

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.10 Tbg, reagent 2 pump to pipettor joint Version - 96666-109_1233_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93314-01 Tbg, reag2 pmp to pipet joint
T3.10 Tbg, reagent 2 pump to pipettor joint

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.11 Tbg, sample valve to waste cup Version - 96666-109_1234_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93315-01 Tbg, smpl vlv to waste cup
T3.11 Tbg, sample valve to waste cup

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.12 Tbg, reagent 1 valve to waste cup Version - 96666-109_1235_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93316-01 Tbg, reag1 vlv to waste cup
T3.12 Tbg, reagent 1 valve to waste cup

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T3.13 Tbg, reagent 2 valve to waste cup Version - 96666-109_1236_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93317-01 Tbg, reag2 vlv to waste cup
T3.13 Tbg, reagent 2 valve to waste cup

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T4.01 Tbg, Sample wash cup manifold to sample cup 1 Version - 96666-109_1237_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93318-01 Tbg, s-washcup man-smplcup1
7-93319-01 Tbg, s-washcup man-smplcup2
T4.01 Tbg, Sample wash cup manifold to sample cup 1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T4.02 Tbg, Sample wash cup manifold to sample cup 2 Version - 96666-109_1238_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93320-01 Tbg, R-washcup man-reagcup1
T4.02 Tbg, Sample wash cup manifold to sample cup 2

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T4.03 Tbg, Reagent wash cup manifold to reagent cup 1 Version - 96666-109_1239_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89541-02 Tbg,Sealed tank to drain plug
7-93321-01 Tbg, R-washcup man-reagcup2
T4.03 Tbg, Reagent wash cup manifold to reagent cup 1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T4.04 Tbg, Reagent wash cup manifold to reagent cup 2 Version - 96666-109_1240_2
T4.04 Tbg, Reagent wash cup manifold to reagent cup 2

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T4.05 Tbg, Mixer wash cup manifold to mixer cup 1 Version - 96666-109_1242_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93322-01 Tbg, M-washcup man-mixcup1
7-93323-02 Tbg. M-washcup man-mixcup1
T4.05 Tbg, Mixer wash cup manifold to mixer cup 1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T4.06 Tbg, Mixer wash cup manifold to mixer cup 2 Version - 96666-109_1243_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93322-02 Tbg. M-washcup man mixcup2
7-93323-01 Tbg, M-washcup man-mixcup2
T4.06 Tbg, Mixer wash cup manifold to mixer cup 2

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.01 Tbg, heater to water bath manifold Version - 96666-109_1244_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93324-01 Tbg, heater-waterbath manifold
T5.01 Tbg, heater to water bath manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.02 Tbg, water bath manifold to ICT Version - 96666-109_1245_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93325-01 Tbg, waterbath manifold-ICT
T5.02 Tbg, water bath manifold to ICT

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.03 Tbg, ICT to water bath manifold Version - 96666-109_1246_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93326-01 Tbg, ICT-waterbath
T5.03 Tbg, ICT to water bath manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.04 Tbg. water bath manifold to water bath A Version - 96666-109_1247_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89447-03 Tbg R1center drain-Lwr wst Man
T5.04 Tbg. water bath manifold to water bath A

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.05 Tbg. water bath manifold to water bath B Version - 96666-109_1248_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89435-02 Tbg R Wsh Cup 2A-Lwr Wste Man
T5.05 Tbg. water bath manifold to water bath B

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.06 Tbg, water bath manifold to heater pump Version - 96666-109_1249_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93327-01 Tbg, waterbath man-heater pmp
T5.06 Tbg, water bath manifold to heater pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.07 Tbg. Water Bath Fill Valve to Water Bath Version - 96666-109_1250_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93328-01 Tbg, w.bath fill-vlv,vp2-Lcwas
T5.07 Tbg. Water Bath Fill Valve to Water Bath

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.08 Tbg, water bath out B to manifold Version - 96666-109_1251_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89407-02 Tbg, Wtr bath out B to manifold
T5.08 Tbg, water bath out B to manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T5.09 Tbg, water bath out A to manifold Version - 96666-109_1253_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93329-01 Tbg, wtr bath out A - manifo
T5.09 Tbg, water bath out A to manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T6.02 Tbg, high conc. nozzle to high conc. pump Version - 96666-109_1254_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93330-01 Tbg, HC noz-HC pmp
T6.02 Tbg, high conc. nozzle to high conc. pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T6.03 Tbg. High Conc. Waste Pump to Manifold Version - 96666-109_1255_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89539-02 Tbg,wash cup valves to manifld
T6.03 Tbg. High Conc. Waste Pump to Manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T6.04 Tbg. High Conc. Waste Manifold to Joint Version - 96666-109_1256_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89522-01 Tbg,ext HC wast,6mm ID,12mm OD
T6.04 Tbg. High Conc. Waste Manifold to Joint

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T6.05 Fitting, Tconc. Waste Version - 96666-109_1257_2
T6.05 Fitting, Tconc. Waste

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.01 Tbg, DI water in to regulator Version - 96666-109_1258_1
T7.01 Tbg, DI water in to regulator

Parts
Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit 93331 Tbg, DI water in to regulator
Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

Verification
Verification
1. Verification is performed by an onsite Abbott trained repair person according to their training,
experience, and Abbott approved documentation.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
T7.02 Tbg, regulator to DI tank Version - 96666-109_1259_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93332-01 Tbg, regulator to DI tank
T7.02 Tbg, regulator to DI tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.03 Tbg.water Tank to Degasser Manifold Version - 96666-109_1260_2
T7.03 Tbg.water Tank to Degasser Manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.04 Tbg. DI Manifold to Water Tank Version - 96666-109_1261_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89426-02 Tbg overflow cup-Lower Wst Man
T7.04 Tbg. DI Manifold to Water Tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.05 Tbg, DI tank to water bath fill pump Version - 96666-109_1262_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93333-01 Tbg, DI tank-wat bath fill pmp
T7.05 Tbg, DI tank to water bath fill pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.06 Fitting, T, large and waste tank overflows Version - 96666-109_1265_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89195-02 Fitting,T,LG & wste tank oflow
T7.06 Fitting, T, large and waste tank overflows

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.07 Tbg. Large Mag Pump to Wash Cup Manifold Version - 96666-109_1266_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89531-02 Tbg,T fitting to oflow drain
T7.07 Tbg. Large Mag Pump to Wash Cup Manifold

Absorbent towels
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.08 Tbg. Wash Cup Manifold to Wash Cup Valve Version - 96666-109_1267_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89408-02 Tbg HC pumps-T,W Cup Vlv-Manif
T7.08 Tbg. Wash Cup Manifold to Wash Cup Valve

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.09 Tbg, wash cup valves to manifold Version - 96666-109_1268_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89539-02 Tbg,wash cup valves to manifld
T7.09 Tbg, wash cup valves to manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.10 Tbg, DI tank overflow to T fitting Version - 96666-109_1269_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93334-01 Tbg, DI tank ovflow - T fitting
T7.10 Tbg, DI tank overflow to T fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.11 Tbg, low conc. tank overflow to T fitting Version - 96666-109_1270_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93335-01 Tbg, LC tank ovflow-Tfitting
T7.11 Tbg, low conc. tank overflow to T fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.12 Plug, service drains, wmu tanks Version - 96666-109_1271_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89093-02 Plug, Service Drains, WMU Tanks
2-89093-03 Plug, Service Drains, WMU Tanks (RoHS)
T7.12 Plug, service drains, wmu tanks

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.13 Tbg, overflow out to T fitting Version - 96666-109_1272_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93336-01 Tbg, ovflow out-Tfitting
T7.13 Tbg, overflow out to T fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.14 Tbg, low conc. waste tank to panel Version - 96666-109_1273_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93337-01 Tbg, LC waste tank to panel
T7.14 Tbg, low conc. waste tank to panel

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.15 Tbg. Water Tank to Large Mag Pump Version - 96666-109_1274_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89546-02 Tbg,RECIRC,MANIFOLD to Elbow
T7.15 Tbg. Water Tank to Large Mag Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.16 Tbg, wash cup return manifold to DI tank Version - 96666-109_1276_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93338-01 Tbg, wcup ret man-DI tank
T7.16 Tbg, wash cup return manifold to DI tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.17 Tbg. Small Mag Pump to Water Bath Fill Valve Version - 96666-109_1277_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89504-02 Tbg,Small mag pump to valve
T7.17 Tbg. Small Mag Pump to Water Bath Fill Valve

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.18 Fitting, Small Mag Pump to Tank Version - 96666-109_1278_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89192-02 Fitting,L,probe rtn to lg tank
T7.18 Fitting, Small Mag Pump to Tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.19 Fitting, T, refrigerator drain Version - 96666-109_1279_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93339-01 Fitting, refrig drain T
T7.19 Fitting, T, refrigerator drain

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.20 Tbg, DI tank maintenance to plug Version - 96666-109_1280_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93340-01 Tbg, DI tank maint to plug
T7.20 Tbg, DI tank maintenance to plug

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T7.21 Plug, tubing, DI tank maintenance Version - 96666-109_1281_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93341-01 Plug, tbg, DI tank maint
T7.21 Plug, tubing, DI tank maintenance

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.01 Tbg, ALK nozzle to vacuum manifold Version - 96666-109_1282_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93342-01 Tbg, ALK noz to vac man
T8.01 Tbg, ALK nozzle to vacuum manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.02 Tbg, ACD nozzle to vacuum manifold Version - 96666-109_1283_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93343-01 Tbg, ACD noz to vac man
T8.02 Tbg, ACD nozzle to vacuum manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.03 Tbg, water nozzle #4 to vacuum manifold Version - 96666-109_1284_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93344-01 Tbg, water noz 4-vac man
T8.03 Tbg, water nozzle #4 to vacuum manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.04 Tbg, water nozzle #5 to vacuum manifold Version - 96666-109_1285_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93345-01 Tbg, water noz 5-vac man
T8.04 Tbg, water nozzle #5 to vacuum manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.05 Tbg, water blank nozzle #6 to vacuum manifold Version - 96666-109_1287_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93346-01 Tbg, water blk noz-vac man
T8.05 Tbg, water blank nozzle #6 to vacuum manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.07 Tbg, aspiration nozzle #7 to vacuum valve Version - 96666-109_1288_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93347-01 Tbg, asp noz to vac vlv
T8.07 Tbg, aspiration nozzle #7 to vacuum valve

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.08 Tbg, dry nozzle #8 to vacuum valve Version - 96666-109_1289_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93348-01 Tbg, dry noz#8 to vac vlv
T8.08 Tbg, dry nozzle #8 to vacuum valve

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.09 Tbg, vacuum valve to vacuum pump #1 Version - 96666-109_1290_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93349-01 Tbg, vac valve to vac pmp 1
T8.09 Tbg, vacuum valve to vacuum pump #1

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.10 Tbg, vacuum manifold to vacuum pump #2 Version - 96666-109_1291_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93350-01 Tbg, vac manifold to vac pmp 2
T8.10 Tbg, vacuum manifold to vacuum pump #2

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.11 Tbg, vacuum pump #1 to low conc. waste tank Version - 96666-109_1292_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93351-01 Tbg, vac pmp 1 to LC wast tank
T8.11 Tbg, vacuum pump #1 to low conc. waste tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T8.12 Tbg, w.bath fill-valve, vp2-Lcwas Version - 96666-109_1293_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93328-01 Tbg, w.bath fill-vlv,vp2-Lcwas
T8.12 Tbg, w.bath fill-valve, vp2-Lcwas

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.01 Tbg, reagent supply center 1 - low conc. waste manifold Version - 96666-109_1294_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93352-01 Tbg, reag sup 1-LC wast man
T9.01 Tbg, reagent supply center 1 - low conc. waste manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.02 Tbg. Reagent Wash Cup Y-Fitting to Waste Manifold Version - 96666-109_1295_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89506-02 Tbg,R2drain,sealed tank-valve
T9.02 Tbg. Reagent Wash Cup Y-Fitting to Waste Manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.03 Tbg, Water Bath Overflow to Waste Manifold Version - 96666-109_1296_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89516-02 Tbg,water input to sealed tank
T9.03 Tbg, Water Bath Overflow to Waste Manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.04 Tbg, waste cup to low conc. waste manifold Version - 96666-109_1298_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93353-01 Tbg, waste cup-LC wast man
T9.04 Tbg, waste cup to low conc. waste manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.06 Tbg, sample cup waste Version - 96666-109_1299_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89459-02 Tbg S Wsh Pool B to Up Wst Man
T9.06 Tbg, sample cup waste

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.07 Tbg. Sample Carousel Drain to Waste Manifold Version - 96666-109_1300_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89420-02 Tbg Lrg Resvr out-Bell Pmp A
T9.07 Tbg. Sample Carousel Drain to Waste Manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.08 Tbg, Mixer Y fitting to low conc. waste manifold Version - 96666-109_1301_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93355-01 Tbg, Mix Y fit to LC wast man
T9.08 Tbg, Mixer Y fitting to low conc. waste manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.09 Tbg, low conc. upper waste manifold Version - 96666-109_1302_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93356-01 Tbg, LC upper waste man
7-93356-02 Manifold, Low Conc Waste, Upper (RoHS)
T9.09 Tbg, low conc. upper waste manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
appropriate place.
Option 11).
and the bridge.
8. Remove the sample probe and the Reagent
Probes #1 and #2.
covers.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration
Pump
Remove
Reagent
1. Remove the two (2) mounting screws [3] located
Supply Center
#2
of the reagent supply center.
4. Clamp the inlet tubing [2] and remove from
bottom of the supply center
5. Disconnect the plugs [5] R2CS, R2CM, and
BCRP2 from the connector plate on the supply
center. Access to the plugs can be reached from
the rear of the processing module by the optics.
module.
Note
bench, place it on the side. Setting
supply center the on bottom damages the
photo sensor.
Remove
Tubing, Low
1. Mark the drain tubing according to the manifold
Conc. Upper
fitting to which it is connected.
Waste Manifold
2. Remove the tubing from the manifold (8 places).
clamp [3] on the left side of the manifold and
remove the clamp.
4. Loosen the lower screw [4] on the clamp [5] (on
the right side of the manifold) and remove the
upper screw on the clamp.
5. Remove the manifold [6] from the processing
module.
Replacement
Install Tubing,
Low Conc. Upper
1. Secure the waste manifold [6] in the
Waste Manifold
processing module with the clamps [3] [5] on
the left and right side of the manifold.
2. Connect the tubing to the manifold (8 places).
Install Reagent
Supply Center #2
the supply center aligns with guide pins on
the frame.
2. Secure the supply center in place with
four (4) screws (2 screws in front, [3] 2
screws at the rear of supply center).
3. Connect the cold air ducts [4] to the bottom of
supply center.
plugs [5] to the connectors on the side of the
supply center.
supply center.
remove the clamp from the tubing.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Prepare for
Operation
4. Install the sample and the reagent probes.
5. Install the top front, top rear covers, and the
bridge.
Note

Icon.
T9.10 Tbg. Low conc. lower waste manifold Version - 96666-109_1303_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93357-01 Tbg, LC lower waste man
7-93357-02 Manifold, Low Conc Waste Lower (RoHS)
T9.10 Tbg. Low conc. lower waste manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
1. Turn off the incoming water source.
2. Select the Fluidics/Wash category from the
Diagnostics screen under the system icon.
3. Perform 1175 Wash Cup Test.
Note
This relieves the water pressure in the
incoming line.

Remove Water
Management
1. Remove the waste tubing, overflow tubing, and
Unit Cover
the incoming water line from the water
connection panel.
2. Remove the six (6) screws securing the WMU
cover to the processing module and remove the
cover.
Remove Tubing,
Low Conc.
1. Loosen the two (2) screw [1] securing the
Lower Waste
clamping bracket [2] to the metal hanger.
2. Swing the clamping bracket toward the rear of
Note
This allows the waste manifold to move
up and out of the L.C. waste tank cover.
3. Remove the two (2) screws (toward the front of

the processing module) securing the manifold
bracket [3] and remove the bracket.
4. Disconnect the tubing [4] from the manifold [5]
and remove the tubing from the processing
module.
Replacement
Install Tubing,
Low Conc.
1. Connect the tubing [4] to the manifold. [5]
Lower Waste
2. Secure the manifold clamp [3] (toward the front
of the processing module) with two (2) screws.
Note
Ensure that the upper manifold is inserted
in the lower manifold
3. Lower the waste manifold into the waste tank

cover.
4. Swing the clamping bracket [2] toward the front
of the processing module and secure the
manifold by tightening the two (2) screws [1]
securing the clamping bracket to the metal
hanger.
Install Water
Management
1. Secure the WMU cover to the processing module
Unit Cover
with six (6) screws.
2. Connect the waste tubing, overflow tubing, and
the incoming water tubing.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Turn on the incoming water source.
Note

4. Select the Daily category from the Maintenance
5. Perform 6070 Daily Maintenance.
6. Check for leaks.
screws.
T9.11 Tbg, Reagent Wash Cup Drains to Y-Fitting Version - 96666-109_1304_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93306-01 Tbg, degasser to DI water man
T9.11 Tbg, Reagent Wash Cup Drains to Y-Fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.12 Tbg, Mixer Wash Cup Drain to Y-fitting Version - 96666-109_1305_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89544-02 Tbg,Opn Tnk, S Csl, Mix Cup 1, 2A
T9.12 Tbg, Mixer Wash Cup Drain to Y-fitting

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.14 Fitting, Y, reagent supply center 2 Version - 96666-109_1307_2
List/Part Numbers
7-93359-01 Fitting, Y, reag sup 2
T9.14 Fitting, Y, reagent supply center 2

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.15 Tbg, Water Bath Drain to Motor Valve Version - 96666-109_1309_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89541-02 Tbg,Sealed tank to drain plug
T9.15 Tbg, Water Bath Drain to Motor Valve

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

T9.16 Tbg, Motor Valve to Waste Manifold Version - 96666-109_1310_2
List/Part Numbers
2-89410-02 Tbg Degasser-Degasser Man
T9.16 Tbg, Motor Valve to Waste Manifold

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

status.
or Offline status.
Remove
Tubing
person.
Replacement

V4.13 BD,BCR T Version - 96728-111_296_1
List/Part Numbers
7-79085-01 Bd, BCR T
V4.13 BD,BCR T

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Electrostatic Discharge
Removal

Preparation
2. Remove the load queue cover.
3. Disconnect the sample handler LUI
cable.
4. Remove the carrier access windows.
5. Remove the processing queue cover.
Remove
BCR T
Board
processing queue cover support bracket.
2. Remove the seven (7) screws securing
the BCR T board to the bracket (77454).
3. Remove the BCR T board.
Replacement

Replace Board
1. Install the BCR T board to the bracket (77454)
using seven (7) screws.
2. Install the processing queue cover support
bracket using two (2) screws.
Note
Install BCR T Board jumpers for the
appropriate module.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the processing queue cover.
2. Install the carrier access windows.
3. Install the load queue cover. Connect the
sample handler LUI cable.

errors.
2 3315 - Sample Handler Test
V4.16 BCR, PQ,ASM Version - 96728-111_300_1
List/Part Numbers
7-77441-03 BCR, PQ ASM
V4.16 BCR, PQ,ASM

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Class 2 Laser Radiation
Removal

System status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the processing
module.
2. Remove the load queue cover.
3. Disconnect the sample handler
LUI cable.
4. Remove the carrier access
windows.
5. Remove the processing queue
cover.
Remove Center For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
Internal Cover ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
(captive) on the left internal cover.
2. Tilt up and slide the cover to the
left.
Remove Processing
Queue Bar Code
1. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews
Reader/Antenna
securing the bar code reader
Assembly
cover to the frame.
2. Remove the cover from the frame
to allow access to the processing
queue bar code reader/antenna
assembly.
3. Disconnect the bar code reader
cable W112 from the bar code
reader.
4. Remove the assembly from the
module.
Replacement
Install Processing Queue Bar Code

Reader/Antenna Assembly
1. Connect the bar code reader cable W112 to the bar code
reader.
2. Place the bar code reader cover on the frame and tighten the
Note
Verify that the cables are not crimped by the cover when
installing.
Install Center Internal Cover

1. Tilt the cover down and align the screw holes.
2. Replace the two (2) screws connecting the cover to the frame.

1. Install the processing queue cover.
2. Install the carrier access windows.
3. Install the load queue cover. Connect the sample handler LUI
cable.

errors.
2 3315 - Sample Handler Test
W1.01 RSH Bar Code Reader (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1363_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77327-01 Barcode Reader SID
W1.01 RSH Bar Code Reader

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

1. The processing module and sample
status.
handler must be in Stopped or Offline
status.
Preparation
2. Open the left RSH cover.
Remove RSH
Bar Code
1. Disconnect cable W631 BCR from the
Reader
bar code reader [1].
2. Remove the two (2) screws (metric)
securing the bar code reader to the
bracket [2].
Note
Keep the two (2) metric screws
separate from other screws.
Replacement
Install
RSH Bar
1. Attach the bar code reader to the bracket
Code
with the two (2) metric screws with the bar
Reader
code reader cable positioned down [2].
2. Attach W631 BCR to the bar code
reader [1], and verify that connector is fully
engaged before tightening screws.
Close
Cover
1. Close the RSH cover.
Note
initialization.
2 3222 - RSH Bar Code Calibration
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-105) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i2000, and i2000SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000,
i8000, c8000, ci8200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
W1.02 RSH LUI Panel (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1362_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86122-01 LUI Panel, RSH
W1.02 RSH LUI Panel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module and sample handler must
System status.
be in Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the left RSH end cap by loosening the
two (2) screws on the inside of the end cap and
sliding the cap forward.
3. Open the left RSH cover.
Remove
RSH LUI
1. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws securing
Panel
the keypad to the frame [1].
2. Pull the keypad forward [2].
3. Disconnect cable W630 SHK from P1 of the
keypad [3].
Replacement
Install
RSH LUI
1. Connect cable W630 SHK to P1 of the
Panel
keypad [3].
2. Postion the keypad in the frame [2] and
secure to the frame with two (2)
screws [1].
3. Attach the left RSH end cap.
Close
Cover
1. Close the left RSH cover.

Note
initialization.
1 3710 - Keypad Test
W1.03 Cover, Low Conc. Waste Tank Version - 96666-109_1313_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93361-01 Cover, Low Conc Waste Tank
7-93532-01 Low Conc. Cap Assy., C8B
W1.03 Cover, Low Conc. Waste Tank
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

c 8000 serial number c 800204 and above Subsection: System status.
have the float switch incorporated into the
cover. The molded cover can be used on any
c 8000 LC waste tank.

or Offline status.
Preparation
Note
incoming line.
Remove Water
Management Unit
1. Remove the waste tubing, overflow tubing,
Cover
and the incoming water line from the water
connection panel.
cover to the processing module and remove
the cover.
Remove Tubing
from Low
1. Remove the tubing [1] from the vacuum
Concentration
pumps to the L.C. waste tank by pulling the
Waste Tank
tubing off of the fittings on top of the L.C.
waste tank.
2. Disconnect the tubing [2] from the wash
solution valves to the L.C. waste tank by
unscrewing the fittings from the connectors on
the top of the waste tank.
3. Remove the lower waste manifold [3] from the
L.C. waste tank by first loosing the two (2)
screws securing the clamping bracket to the
metal hanger.
4. Swing the clamping bracket toward the rear
Note
This allows the waste manifold to be
moved up and out of the L.C. waste
tank cover.
Remove Low
Concentration
1. Disconnect the FSDT (float switch drain tank)
Waste Tank
plug [1] from the connector and then remove
Cover
the connector from the connector panel.
2. Pull on the latching tabs [1] (on the top of the
waste tank), lift up on the waste tank cover,
float switch [2] to the waste tank cover and
remove the float switch.
Note
This step is only required if replacing
with a cover that the float switch is not
molded into the cover.

o-ring cover [3] and remove the o-ring from
the waste tank cover.
Replacement
Install Low
Concentration
1. Place an o-ring in waste tank cover and secure
Waste Tank
with o-ring cover [3] and four screws. [5]
Cover
2. Place the float switch [2] in the waste tank cover
3. Place the waste tank cover on the top of the
waste tank and ensure that it is secured by the
latching tabs. [1]
Install Tubing
to Low
1. Lower the waste manifold [3] into the waste tank
Concentration
cover. Swing the clamping bracket toward the
Waste Tank
front of the processing module and secure the
manifold by tightening the two (2) screws
hanger.
2. Connect the tubing [2] coming from the wash
solution valves by screwing the fittings to the
connectors on the cover of the L.C. waste tank.
3. Connect the tubing [1] from the vacuum pumps
to the barbed fittings on the cover of the L.C.
waste tank.
Install Water
Management
1. Secure the WMU cover to the processing
Unit Cover
module with six (6) screws.
Prepare for
Operation
Note

5. Check for leaks.
screws.
W1.04 Cover Interlock Sensor Boards (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1359_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86220-01 Board, Cover Interlock Sensor
7-86220-02 Board, Cover Interlock Sensor (RoHS)
7-91799-01 Board, SIB Cover Interlock Sensor
7-91799-02 Board, SIB Cover Interlock Sensor (RoHS)
W1.04 Cover Interlock Sensor Boards
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH right end cap by loosening the
Remove
Interlock
1. Disconnect cable from the SIB cover interlock
Sensor
sensor board to the sensor interface board
Boards
J13 [1].
2. Push down on the lower tab of the plastic clip
and slide the SIB cover interlock sensor board
out of the clip [2].
Note
The first interlock sensor board is also
pulled along [3].
3. Disconnect the SIB cover interlock sensor

board [4] from the interlock sensor board [3].
4. Continue sliding the interlock sensor boards out
of the channel, disconnecting the boards at each
junction [5].
5. At the final interlock sensor board, remove the
cover sensor terminator board [6].
Replacement
Install
Interlock Note
Sensor All interlock sensor boards should be replaced at
Boards the same time (interlock sensor board, cover
sensor terminator board, and the SIB cover
interlock sensor board).
1. Connect the cover sensor terminator board to a

cover interlock sensor board [6].
2. Slide the boards into the channel, connecting
additional interlock sensor boards until all boards
are inserted [5].
Note
Verify the sensor SW1 is facing up when
inserting the interlock sensor board into the
channel.
3. Connect the SIB cover interlock sensor board to

the final interlock sensor board [3].
4. Slide the SIB cover interlock sensor board into the
plastic clip [2].
5. Attach the cable from the SIB cover interlock
sensor board to J13 of the sensor interface
board [1].
1. Install the RSH right end cap.
and shutdown.
Note
on prior to turning on the processing module
W1.05 Sensor Interface Board (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1358_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86260-01 Board, Sensor Interface, RSH
7-86260-02 Board, Sensor Interface, RSH (RoHS)
W1.05 Sensor Interface Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Sensor
1. Disconnect the following cables from the sensor
Interface
interface board [1]:
Board
W500 SIB Power Cable from J1
W510 P2 SIB Signal Cable 1 from J2
W540 SIB BCR from J4-4
W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000), W572
(ci8200) P6 SIB to transport sensor from
J6
W610 P7 Mod1 SIB/CP Sensor from J7
(only on integrated system)
W630-W631 P9 SIB SHK/BCR from J9
the SIB cover interlock sensor board cable
from J13
W640 P20 SIB-UDB SFI from J14
2. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws securing

the sensor interface board to the structure [2].
3. Remove the sensor interface board from the
structure.
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Attach the sensor interface board to the
Interface
structure using the two (2) screws
Board
removed earlier [2].
2. Connect the following cables to the sensor

W510 P2 SIB Signal Cable 1 from
J2
W520 P3 SIB Signal Cable 2 from
J3
W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000),
W572 (ci8200) P6 SIB to transport
sensor from J6
W610 P7 Mod1 SIB/CP Sensor
from J7
W612 P8 Mod2 SIB/CP Sensor
from J8 (only on integrated system)
W630-W631 P9 SIB SHK/BCR from
J9
the SIB cover interlock sensor
board cable from J13
1. Attach the RSH right end cap.
Note
initialization.
2 5507 - RSH Indicator Lights Test
5 3401 - Section/Bay Sensors Test
6 3252 - RSH Bar Code Reader Test
W1.06 Switch, float, lg tank, short Version - 96666-109_1316_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89392-02 Switch,Float,lg tank,short
W1.06 Switch, float, lg tank, short

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This part is used only on a WMU (933602) with the Subsection: System status.
square internal water tank made of clear plastic.
c 8000 serial number c800203 and below.

Offline status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening the
two (2) phillips screws on the inside of the end cap
and sliding the end cap forward.
3. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the left side
Remove
Level High
1. Disconnect the FSLH (float switch level high)
Float
plug [1] from the connector and remove the
Switch
connector from the connector panel. This is the
right center connector on the panel when viewed
from the left side of the processing module.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the float
switch [2] in the water tank and lift from the water
tank. This float switch is located to the left front rear
of the water tank as viewed from the left side of the
processing module.
Replacement
Install Level
High Float
1. Place the float switch [2] in the water tank and
Switch
2. Insert the FSLH (float switch level high) connector
in the connector panel and connect the FSLH
plug. [1]
Prepare for
Operation
Note

W1.06B Carrier Positioner Board (RSH) (c8000 and c16000) Version - 96781-104_4833_1
List/Part Numbers
7-86545-01 Board, Carrier Positioner
7-86545-02 Board, Carrier Positioner (RoHS)
W1.06B Carrier Positioner Board (c8000 and c16000)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module and sample handler
System status.
must be in Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation
Open Covers
1. Open RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
2. Open the processing module front cover.
3. Manually move the carrier transport away from
the carrier positioner.
Remove Motor
Cover
1. Lift and remove the motor cover [1] over the
carrier positioner board.
Remove
Carrier
1. Disconnect cable W610 P2 CP Sensor from
Positioner
carrier positioner board P2 and disconnect the
Board
cable from P1 [1].
2. Remove the screw securing the carrier
positioner board to the carrier positioner [2].
3. Remove board from the carrier positioner.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier positioner board on the
Positioner
carrier positioner and attach with a
Board
screw [2].
2. Connect cable W610 CP Sensor to P2 of
the carrier positioner board and connect
the CP Encoder Sensor cable to P1 [1].
Install
Motor
1. Install the motor cover [1] over the carrier
Cover
positioner board.
Close/Install
Covers
1. Close the processing module front cover.
2. Close RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
Note
initialization.
2 1119 - Transport Calibration
W1.07 Switch, float, lg tank, long Version - 96666-109_1317_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89391-02 Switch,Float,lg tank,long
W1.07 Switch, float, lg tank, long

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This part is used only on a WMU (93360) with Subsection: System status.
the square internal water tank made of clear
plastic. c 8000 serial number c800203 and
below.

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.
two (2) phillips screws on the inside of the end
cap and sliding the end cap forward.
Remove Water
Management
Unit Cover
connection panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
1. Access the service drain located next to the
Unit
water connection panel toward the left side of
2. Clamp [1] the service drain tubing [2] and then
remove the plug [3] in the end of the tubing and
place in a container and remove the clamp.
Note
The processing module drain tubing can
be used to drain the WMU by placing the
service drain inside of the drain tubing. If
a container is used it must be able to
hold a minimum of five (5) liters of water.

WMU assembly, replace the plug in the service
drain.
Remove
Tubing from
1. Remove the tubing [1] from the vacuum pumps
Low
to the L.C. waste tank by pulling the tubing off of
Concentration
the fittings on top of the L.C. waste tank.
Waste Tank
2. Disconnect the tubing [2] from the wash solution
valves to the L.C. waste tank by unscrewing the
fittings from the connectors on the top of the
waste tank.
metal hanger.
Note
moved up and out of the L.C. waste tank
cover.
Disconnect
Tubing from
1. At the degasser manifold, disconnect the two (2)
Degasser
tubes [1] to the degasser.
Manifold
2. From the two (2) connectors on top of the
degasser manifold, unscrew the tubing [2] to the
wash solution pump.
3. At the degasser manifold, disconnect the
tubing [3] to the internal probe wash pump.
Note
This is the connection on the back of the
manifold (toward the front of the
processing module).
4. Disconnect the tubing [4] at the elbow behind

the degasser manifold, (this tubing connects to
the cuvette wash pump).
Disconnect
Cable
Connections
connector panel:
POWP - Probe Outside Wash Pump

BWSP - Bath Water Supply Pump
RPWV - Reagent Probe Wash Valve
SPWV - Sample Probe Wash Valve
WSCV - Water Supply Control Valve
STWV - Stirrer Wash Valve
BWSV - Bath Water Supply Valve
FSDT - Float Switch Drain Tank
FSLH - Float Switch Level High
FSLL - Float Switch Level Low
FSUL - Float Switch Upper Limit
Remove Water
Management
1. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the refrigerator
Unit
drain at the T connection below the L.C. waste
tank.
WMU to the processing module frame.
3. Slide the WMU to the rear of the processing
module to allow access to the tubing [3]
connected to the wash cup manifolds STR, R, &
S.
4. Disconnect the wash cup manifold tubing [3] by
unscrewing the fitting.
5. Continue sliding the WMU to the rear and open
the tubing clamp [4] located on the WMU toward
the front of the processing module (on the left).
6. Disconnect the tubing [5] coming from the water
bath to the water bath fill valve (above the small
pump at the back of the WMU).
7. Slide the water management unit out the rear of
Remove Level
Low Float
1. Remove the FSLL (float switch level low)
Switch
connector from the connector [1] panel (right
bottom connector on the panel when viewed
from the left side of the processing module).
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the float
switch [2] in the water tank and lift from the
water tank (to the right rear of the water tank
when viewed from the left side of the processing
module).
Replacement
Install Level
Low Float
1. Place the float switch [2] in the water tank and
Switch
2. Insert the FSLL (float switch level low)
connector [1] in the connector panel.
Install Water
Management
1. Slide the WMU into the rear of the processing
Unit
module far enough to allow the connection of the
tubing [5] coming from the water bath to the
water bath fill valve.
2. Connect the wash cup tubing [3] to the wash
cup manifolds STR, R, & S.
3. Place the tubing going to the degasser manifold
back in the clamp [4] on side of the WMU.
4. Slide the WMU all the way into the processing
module and secure with two (2) screws [2] to the
5. Connect the tubing [1] from the refrigerator drain
to the T connection below the L.C. waste tank.
Connect Cable
Connections
1. Connect the following plugs to the connector
panel:

Connect
Tubing to
1. Connect the tubing [4] from the cuvette wash
Degasser
pump to the elbow behind the degasser
Manifold
manifold.
2. Connect the tubing [3] coming from the internal
probe wash pump to the degasser manifold.
Note
This is the connection on the backside of
the manifold (toward the front of the
processing module).
3. Connect the tubing [2] from the wash solution

pump to the degasser manifold by screwing the
fittings into the connectors on top of the
degasser manifold.
4. Connect the tubing [1] from the degasser to the
degasser manifold. Ensure the tubing clamps
are tight.
Install Tubing
to Low
Concentration
Waste Tank
hanger.
waste tank.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note
The processing module may require a
second power on if the internal water tank
does not completely fill during the first
power on sequence.

W1.07B Carrier Positioner Encoder Sensor (RSH) (c8000 and c16000) Version - 96781-104_4834_1
List/Part Numbers
7-86576-01 Sensor, Carrier Positioner Encoder
W1.07B Carrier Positioner Encoder Sensor (c8000 and c16000)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Open the processing module cover.
3. Open the RSH covers near the carrier
positioner.
Remove
Carrier
Positioner
the carrier positioner.
Carriage
2. Move the carrier positioner carriage so that the
screws [1] on the far right end of the carrier
positioner are accessible.
3. Unscrew the two (2) non-captive screws [1].
4. Move the carrier transport to the far right end of
the RSH so that the back of the carrier
transport does not interfere with the carrier
positioner carriage.
5. Slide the carrier positioner carriage to the far
left until it is clear of the channel and lift out [2].
Remove Motor
Cover
Remove
Carrier
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from the carrier
Positioner
positioner board at P2. [1]
Drive
2. Disconnect the carrier positioner motor at the
motor cable connection.
3. Loosen the captive screw at the left end of the
carrier positioner [2].
4. Remove carrier positioner drive by sliding it to
the right and partially into the opening in the
frame to fully disengage the drive from the
channel [3].
Remove
Carrier
1. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws [1]
Positioner
securing the carrier positioner encoder sensor
Encoder
to the carrier positioner drive [2].
Sensor
2. Remove the sensor cable from the channels on
the bottom of the carrier positioner on each
end [3].
3. Disconnect P1 CP Encoder Sensor cable from
the carrier positioner encoder sensor [4].
Replacement

Install
Carrier Note
Positioner Verity that the label on the sensor cable does not
Encoder interfere with carrier positioner travel. If it interferes,
Sensor tape the label closely to the cable or remove the
label.
1. Connect P1 CP Encoder Sensor to the carrier

positioner encoder sensor board [4].
2. Postion the sensor cable into the channels on the
bottom of the carrier positioner and press into
place [3].
Note
Proper routing of the carrier positioner cable is
critical to the carrier positioner
performance [3]. No slack should exist in the
cable on the sensor end or in the middle
section of the carrier positioner. Verify that the
carrier positioner and the drive screw
assembly do not come in contact with the
sensor cable.
3. Insert the two (2) non-captive screws [1].

4. Press and hold the sensor [2] to the right and firmly
against the mounting block.
5. Hold the sensor [2] as you tighten the two (2)
screws. [1]
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier positioner drive assembly into the
Positioner
frame opening of the channel and slide it to the left
Drive
until it is fully inserted [3].
2. Tighten the screw on the left end of the carrier
positioner to secure the positioner to the frame [2].
3. Connect cables CP Sensor to P2 [1] of the carrier
positioner board and to the carrier positioner drive
motor.
Install
Motor
1. Install the motor cover [1] over the carrier positioner
Cover
board.
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the left end of the carrier positioner carriage to
Positioner
the right into the channel until it is fully inserted [2].
Carriage
2. Insert and tighten the two (2) non-captive screws on
the right end of the carrier positioner [1].
Close
Covers
1. Close the RSH and processing module covers.

1.
Power ON the processing module.
Note and shutdown.
The system control center power must be on
W1.08 Indicator Light (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1355_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91840-01 Indicator, Priority Light Status
7-91840-02 Indicator, Priority Light Status (RoHS)
7-91845-01 Indicator, Tray Bay
7-91845-02 Indicator, Tray Bay (RoHS)
W1.08 Indicator Light
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Lower
1. Loosen the two (2) quarter-turn captive
Cover
screws [1] securing the lower cover to the frame
Remove
Indicator
1. Disconnect the light cable from the board [1].
Light
2. Squeeze the side tabs of the desired light while
removing the light [2].
Replacement
Install
Indicator
1. Slide the light into the opening until the
Light
tabs snap into place [2].
2. Connect the light cable to the board [1].
Install
Lower
1. Position the lower cover on the instrument
Cover
and tighten the two (2) quarter-turn screws
to attach the cover to the frame [1].

Note
initialization.
W1.09 Carrier/Tray Sensor (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1354_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91863-01 Sensor, Tray
7-91863-02 RSH Tray Sensor (RoHS)
W1.09 Carrier/Tray Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Lower
1. Loosen the two (2) quarter-turn captive screws [1]
Cover
securing the lower cover to the frame and remove
the cover.
Disconnect
Carrier or
1. Disconnect the tray sensor cable of the desired
Tray Sensor
sensor from the appropriate board (unit detect
board (UDB) or priority light sensor board (PLSB)).
Remove
Sensor
1. Remove the desired sensor.
If a carrier sensor, go to Remove Priority

Section Carrier Sensor.
If a tray sensor, go to Remove Tray
Sensor.
Access
Priority
1. Locate the priority section partition to the left of
Section
the sensor.
Carrier
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the partition
Sensor
to the bay [1] and remove the partition.
3. Repeat 2, for the partition to the right of the
sensor.
Note
This releases the plate covering the priority
section sensor.
Note
Under the plate are loose components (a
button, a spring, and a sensor). Take care
not to lose these components.
Remove
Priority
1. Remove the plate covering the sensor [2].
Section
2. Remove the sensor from the section [1].
Carrier
Sensor
Remove
Tray Sensor
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the plate to
the bay [1].
Note
This releases the plate covering the tray
sensor.
Note
Under the plate are loose components) a
button, a spring, and a sensor). In addition,
once the plate is removed, the tray door is
no longer secured. Take care not to lose
these components.
2. Remove the plate covering the sensor [2].

3. Remove the sensor from the bay [3].
Replacement
Install
Sensor
1. Install sensor.
If a carrier sensor, go to Install

Priority Section Carrier Sensor.
If a tray sensor, go to Install Tray
Sensor.
Install
Priority
1. Install the sensor in the section. [1]
Section
Carrier Note
Sensor Verify sensor is properly
oriented [1].
2. Install the plate covering the sensor [2].
Install
Priority
1. Install the priority section partition to the
Section
left of the sensor. Install the two (2)
Carrier
screws securing the partition [1]
Sensor
2. Repeat 1 for the partition to the right of
the sensor.
Install Tray
Sensor
1. Install the sensor in the bay [3].
Note
Verify sensor is properly
oriented [3].
2. Install the plate covering the sensor [2].
3. Install the two (2) screws securing the
plate to the bay [1].
Connect
Carrier or
1. Connect the tray sensor cable to the
Tray Sensor
UDB or PLSB.
Install Lower
Cover
1. Position the lower cover on the
instrument and tighten the two (2)
quarter-turn screws to attach the cover to
the frame [1].
Note
W1.10 Priority Load Sensor Board, Unit Detect Boards (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1353_3
List/Part Numbers
7-95460-01 Board, Tray UDB
7-95460-02 Board, Tray Unit Detect (RoHS)
7-95465-01 Board, Priority Load Sensor
7-95465-02 Board, Priority Load Sensor (RoHS)
W1.10 Priority Load Sensor Board, Unit Detect Boards (RSH)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal

System status.
handler must be in Stopped or
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH right end cap by
loosening the two (2) screws on the
inside of the end cap and sliding the
cap forward.
Remove Lower Cover

1. Loosen the two (2) quarter-turn
captive screws securing the lower
cover to the frame and remove the
cover.
Remove the Priority Light
Sensor Board (PLSB) and
1. Disconnect cable W640 P20 UDB
Unit Detect Boards (UDB)
SFI from J1N of the UDB board on
the right of the instrument [2].
2. Disconnect all carrier present sensor
cables and all indicator light cables
from the UDB and PLSB [3].
3. Slide the boards out of the channel,
disconnecting each board at the
junction between boards [4].
Replacement
Install the Priority Light

Sensor Board (PLSB)
1. Slide the PLSB into the channel.
and Unit Detect Boards
2. Set the bay switch SW2 on each
(UDB)
UDB to the correct setting for the
bay.
Note
The switch setting matches
the bay number. The priority
bay is bay 1. (Example: the
switch setting for bay 2 is
2. [5].)
3. Connect the next UDB to the PLSB

and continue sliding in and
connecting until all UDB are
inserted [4].
4. Connect all carrier present sensor
cables and indicator light cables to
the PLSB and UDB [3].
5. Connect W640 P20 UDB SFI to J1N
of the UDB on the right of the
instrument [2].
Install Lower Cover
1. Position the lower cover on the
instrument and tighten the two (2)
quarter-turn screws to attach the
cover to the frame.
Prepare for Operation For information on the startup procedure, refer to the
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. Install the RSH right end cap.
and shutdown.
Note
The system control center
power must be on prior to
turning on the processing
module to ensure proper
initialization.
W1.10 Valve, 12 volt common WMU Version - 96666-109_1321_1
List/Part Numbers
W1.10 Valve, 12 volt common WMU

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This part is used as a wash cup valve only on a Subsection: System status.
WMU (93360) with the square internal water tank
made of clear plastic. c 8000 serial number
c800203 and below. All water management units
use this valve for water bath fill.

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.
processing module).
Remove Water
Management
Unit Cover
connection panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
Note
a container is used it must be able to hold
a minimum of five (5) liters of water.

drain.
Remove
Tubing from
Low
Concentration
Waste Tank
waste tank.
metal hanger.
Note
cover.
Disconnect
Tubing from
Degasser
Manifold
wash solution pump.
Note
processing module).

Disconnect
Cable
Connections
connector panel:

Remove Water
Management
Unit
tank.
S.
the front of the processing module (on your left).
bath to the water bath fill valve located above
the small pump at the back of the WMU.
Remove Water
Bath Fill Valve
1. Remove the tubing from the NO [2, 3] and the
common ports on the valve.
2. Remove the connector BWSV (bath water supply
valve) from the connector panel and cut the wire
ties securing the cable bundle.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the valve to
the mounting bracket. [4]
4. Remove the three (3) fittings from the valve.
5. Proceed to Install Water Bath Fill Valve.
Remove Wash
Cup Valve Note
This procedure is used only on a WMU (93360)
with the square internal water tank made of clear
plastic. c 8000 serial number c800203 and
below.
1. Disconnect plug RPWV, SPWV, or STWV

depending on which one of the three (3) valves
that you are removing.
2. Remove connector [1] RPWV, SPWV, or STWV
depending on which one of the three (3) valves
that you are removing. Cut the wire ties securing
the cable bundle.
3. Clamp the tubing [2] going to the wash cup from
the wash cup manifold for the valve you are
replacing and disconnect the tubing from the
manifold.
valve to the mounting bracket.
5. Remove the tubing [4] from the common and NC
valve ports.
6. Remove the wash cup manifold and needle
valve from the valve fitting.
7. Remove the fittings from the valve.
8. Proceed to Install Wash Cup Valve.
Replacement
Install Wash
Cup Valve
1. Place pipe sealant tape on the threads of the
fittings and install the three (3) fittings in the
valve.
wash cup manifold [5] and needle valve and
install on the wash cup valve.
3. Connect the tubing [4] to the common and NC
valve ports and secure the valve to the mounting
4. Connect the tubing to the wash cup manifold [2]
for the valve you replaced and remove the
clamps from the tubing.
5. Insert connector [1] RPWV, SPWV, or STWV
depending on which valve was removed and
secure the cable bundle with wire ties.
6. Connect plug RPWV, SPWV, or STWV.
7. Proceed to Install Water Management Unit
Cover.
Install Water
Bath Fill Valve
fittings and install the three (3) fittings in the
valve. (D)
2. Secure the valve to the mounting bracket with
two (2) screws. [4]
3. Insert BWSV (bath water supply valve) in the
connector panel and secure the cable bundle
with cable ties.
4. Connect the tubing to the NO [3] and
common [2] ports of the valve, ensure the tubing
clamp on the common port is secure.
Install Water
Management
Unit
Connect Cable
Connections
panel:

Connect
Tubing to
Degasser
Manifold
manifold.
Note
processing module).

degasser manifold.
are tight.
Install Tubing
to Low
Concentration
Waste Tank
hanger.
waste tank.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note
power on sequence.

W1.11 Sensor Interface Board Fuses (RSH) Version - 96781-104_917_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96275-01 Fuse, 4.0A nano
7-96276-01 Fuse, 1.5A Nano
W1.11 Sensor Interface Board Fuses
Tools/Materials Fine Needle Nose Pliers or Tweezers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH right end cap by loosening
the two (2) screws on the inside of the end cap
and sliding the cap forward.
Remove
Sensor
1. Disconnect the following cables from the
Interface Board
sensor interface board [1]:

W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000), W572
(ci8200) P6 SIB to transport sensor from
J6
the SIB cover interlock sensor board
cable from J13
2. Remove the two (2) non-captive screws

securing the sensor interface board to the
structure [2].
3. Remove the sensor interface board from the
structure.
Remove
Sensor
1. Lay the SIB flat and locate the desired fuse.
Interface Board
(Go to Fuse location on Sensor Interface Board
Fuse
(SIB) for fuse locations).
2. Use fine point needle nose pliers or tweezers
to grip the fuse.
Note
The fuse holder [1] is easily damaged if
the wrong tool is used to remove the
fuse.
3. Pull the fuse straight out of the fuse holder.
Replacement

Install
Sensor
1. Use fine point needle nose pliers or tweezers
Interface
to grip the fuse.
Board Fuse
2. Position the fuse directly over, and aligned with
the fuse holder.
3. Insert the fuse into the fuse holder.
Note
The fuse holder [1] is easily damaged if
the fuse is not properly aligned with the
fuse holder, or the fuse is not inserted
in a straight motion.
Install
Sensor
1. Attach the sensor interface board to the
Interface
structure using the two (2) screws removed
Board
earlier [2].
2. Connect the following cables to the sensor

W573 (i 2000 SR), W571 (c 8000),
W572 (ci8200) P6 SIB to transport
sensor from J6
the SIB cover interlock sensor board
cable from J13

1. Attach the RSH right end cap.
Note
Fuse location on Sensor Interface Board (SIB)
Fuse Function Rating Part #
+5VDC Carrier Positioner

F1 1.5A 96276
+5VDC Carrier Transport
F2 1.5A 96276
+5 VDC Low Voltage Regulator
F3 4.0A 96275
+5 VDC Input DC/DC
F4 4.0A 96275
+5 VDC Unregluated PLSB and UDB
F5 4.0A 96275
+3.3 VDC FPGA
F6 1.0A Not Replaceable
+5 VDC Bar Code/Sample Handler Keypad
F7 1.5A 96276
+3.3 VDC FPGA
+5 VDC Regulated PLSB and UDB
F9 1.5A 96276
+3.3 VDC Door Interlock Sensors
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-104) • Copyright 2002, 2004 • ARCHITECT, i 2000, and i 2000 SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
W1.11 Valve, needle, wash cup adjust Version - 96666-109_1322_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93436-01 Valve, needle, wash pool c8
7-93436-02 Valve, needle, wash pool, c8 (RoHS)
W1.11 Valve, needle, wash cup adjust

Absorbent towels
Note
This procedure is for one of the three needle valves. The procedure is the same for all three valves.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
incoming line.

Remove Water
Management
Unit Cover
connection panel.
cover.
Remove Needle
Valve, Wash
1. Clamp the tubing [1] to the wash cup manifold
Cup Adjust
for the appropriate valve.
2. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the wash cup
manifold.
3. Unscrew the wash cup manifold [2] from the
valve.
4. Unscrew the needle valve [3] from the 12 volt
valve [4] fitting.
Note
On WMU 93529 c 8000 serial number
c800204 and above the valve unscrews
from the upper manifold of the valve
assembly.
Replacement
Install Needle
Valve, Wash
Cup Adjust
fittings on the needle valve. [3]
2. Screw the needle valve [3] into the 12 volt
valve [4] fitting on the NC port.
Note
Do not use a wrench on valve or
manifold, finger tighten only.
3. Once the needle valve is tight, and with the

manifold fitting in the up position, screw the
wash cup manifold [2] on the needle valve -
finger tighten only.
4. Connect the tubing [1] to the wash cup manifold
and remove the clamp from tubing.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note

W1.12 Manifold, Wash Cup Valve NO Version - 96666-109_1323_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93365-01 Manifold, Wash Cup Valve NO
W1.12 Manifold, Wash Cup Valve NO

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This part is used only on a WMU (93360) with the Subsection: System status.
square internal water tank made of clear plastic.
c 8000 serial number c800203 and below.

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
1. Remove the waste tubing, overflow tubing, and the
Management
incoming water line from the water connection
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
1. Access the service drain located next to the water
Unit
connection panel toward the left side of the
processing module.
Note
The processing module drain tubing can be
used to drain the WMU by placing the
service drain inside of the drain tubing. If a
container is used it must be able to hold a
minimum of five (5) liters of water.

drain.
Remove
Wash Cup
Manifold
manifold to the base of the WMU.
Valve NO
2. Remove the tubing [2] from the manifold. [3]
Replacement
Install Wash
Cup Manifold
1. Connect the tubing [2] to the manifold [3],
Valve NO
ensure that the tubing clamp [4] on the tubing
coming from the water tank is secure.
2. Secure the manifold to the base of the WMU
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note
second power on if the internal water
tank does not completely fill during the
first power on sequence.

W1.13 Pump, mag, small, inc water tank Version - 96666-109_1324_1
List/Part Numbers
2-89296-02 Pump,mag,small,inc water tank
W1.13 Pump, mag, small, inc water tank

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

Remove Water
Management
Unit Cover
connection panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
Note
a container is used it must be able to
hold a minimum of five (5) liters of water.

drain.
Remove
Tubing from
Low
Concentration
Waste Tank
waste tank.
metal hanger.
Note
cover.
Disconnect
Tubing from
Degasser
Manifold
wash solution pump.
Note
processing module).

Disconnect
Cable
Connections
connector panel:

Remove Water
Management
Unit
tank.
S. Disconnect the tubing by unscrewing the
fitting.
the front of the processing module (on the left).
bath to the water bath fill valve (above the small
pump at the back of the WMU).
Remove Small
Mag Pump,
1. Remove the connector BWSP [1] (bath water
Water Bath Fill
supply pump) from the connector panel and
remove the screw securing the ground wire
connection. [2]
2. Remove the ground wire connection.
3. Disconnect the tubing [3] from the pump.
pump [4] to the base of the WMU and remove
the pump.
Replacement
Install Small
Mag Pump,
1. Secure the pump [4] to the WMU base with
Water Bath Fill
two (2) screws.
2. Connect the tubing [3] to the pump and ensure
that the tubing clamps are tight.
3. Insert the connector [1] BWSP (bath water
supply pump) in the connector panel and secure
the ground wire [2] with one (1) screw.
Install Water
Management
Unit
module frame.
Connect Cable
Connections
panel:

Connect
Tubing to
Degasser
Manifold
manifold.
Note
processing module).

degasser manifold.
are tight.
Install Tubing
to Low
Concentration
Waste Tank
hanger.
waste tank.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note
power on sequence.

W1.14 Flow restrictor, incoming Version - 96666-109_1325_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93366-01 Flow restrictor, incoming
W1.14 Flow restrictor, incoming

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
Management
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
processing module.
Note

drain.
Remove
Tubing
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the drain
Connection
fitting. [2]
Panel
overflow fitting. [4]
3. Loosen the screws [5] on the clamping block [6]
next to the incoming water fitting.
4. Unscrew the incoming water fitting. [7]
5. Remove the two (2) screws [8] securing the tubing
connection panel to base of the WMU.
6. Rotate the tubing connection panel [11] until you
can access the screws [9] securing the incoming
on/off valve [10] and remove the two (2) screws [9]
securing the valve to the panel and remove the
panel.
Remove
Flow
1. Remove the tubing from the fitting on the output of
Restrictor,
the flow restrictor. [1]
Incoming
2. Unscrew the fitting from the output of the flow
Water
restrictor. [3]
3. Unscrew the flow restrictor [3] from the fitting [2]
between the on/off valve and the flow restrictor.
Replacement
Install Flow
Restrictor,
Incoming Water
flow restrictor [3] and screw the flow restrictor
into the fitting [2] on the on/off valve.
fitting for the output of the flow restrictor. [1]
3. Screw the fitting into the flow restrictor. [3]
4. Connect the tubing [1] to the fitting on the
output of the flow restrictor and tighten the
tubing clamp.
Install Tubing
Connection
1. Secure the on/off valve [10] to the back of the
Panel
tubing connection panel with two (2) screws. [9]
2. Secure the tubing connection panel [11] to the
base of the WMU with two (2) screws. [8]
3. Place pipe sealant on the incoming water
fitting [7] and screw into the on/off valve.
4. Place the clamping block [6] next to the
incoming water fitting and tighten the
screws. [5]
5. Secure the drain fitting [2] with two (2)
screws. [1]
6. Secure the overflow fitting [4] to the tubing
connection panel with two (2) screws. [3]
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note

W1.15 Valve, Incoming On/Off Version - 96666-109_1326_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93367-01 Valve, Incoming On/Off
W1.15 Valve, Incoming On/Off

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
Management
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
processing module.
Note

drain.
Remove
Tubing
Connection
fitting. [2]
Panel
next to the incoming water fitting. [7]
connection panel [11] to base of the WMU.
6. Rotate the tubing connection panel until you can
access the screws [9] securing the incoming on/off
valve [10] and remove the two (2) screws securing
the valve to the panel and remove the panel.
Remove
Incoming
1. Cut the wire ties on the wires from the valve [2] to
ON/OFF
the connector panel. [1]
Valve
2. Disconnect plug WSCV (water supply control
valve) from the connector.
3. Remove the jack [5] WSCV (water supply control
valve) from the connector panel.
4. Remove the tubing [3] from the fitting on the
output of the flow restrictor. [4]
5. Unscrew the fitting [4] from the output of the on/off
valve [2] to the remove valve.
Replacement
Install Incoming
ON/OFF Valve
fitting [4] for the output On/Off valve [2] and
screw the fitting into the valve.
2. Connect the tubing [3] to the fitting [4] on the
output of the flow restrictor and tighten the
tubing clamp.
3. Insert the WSCV jack [5] in the connector
panel. [1]
4. Connect plug WSCV (water supply control
valve) to the connector and secure the wires
between the valve and the connector panel.
Install Tubing
Connection
Panel
tubing connection panel with two (2) screws. [9]
2. Secure the tubing connection panel [11] to the
base of the WMU with two (2) screws. [8]
screws. [5]
5. Secure the drain fitting [2] with two (2)
screws. [1]
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note

W1.16 Pump, mag. Wash cups Version - 96666-109_1327_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93368-01 Pump, mag, wash cups
W1.16 Pump, mag. Wash cups

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
Management
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
processing module.
Note

drain.
Remove
Tubing
Connection
fitting. [2]
Panel
next to the incoming water fitting. [7]
connection panel [11] to base of the WMU.
6. Rotate the tubing connection panel until you can
access the screws [9] securing the incoming on/off
valve [10] and remove the two (2) screws securing
the valve to the panel and remove the panel.
Remove
Mag. Pump
1. Cut the wire ties on the wires from the pump to the
Wash Pool
connector panel. [1]
2. Disconnect plug POWP (probe outside wash pump)
from the connector.
3. Remove jack [2] POWP (probe outside wash
pump) from the connector panel.
4. Unscrew the tubing connectors [3] [4] from the
pump. [5]
5. Remove the four (4) screws [6] securing the pump
to the WMU base and remove the pump. [5]
Replacement
Install Mag.
Pump Wash
1. Place the pump [5] in position and secure to the
Pool
WMU base with four (4) screws. [6]
2. Screw the tubing connections [3] [4] onto the
pump.
3. Insert the POWP (probe outside wash pump)
jack [2] in the connector panel [1] and connect
plug POWP (probe outside wash pump) to the
connector.
4. Secure the wires from the pump to the
connector panel with wire ties.
Install Tubing
Connection
Panel
tubing connection panel [9] with two (2) screws.
2. Secure the tubing connection panel to the base
of the WMU with two (2) screws. [8]
screws. [1]
5. Secure the drain fitting with two (2) screws. [2]
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note

W1.17 Manifold, Degasser - Wash Sol. Pump Version - 96666-109_1328_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93369-01 Manifold, degasser-wash sol.pu
W1.17 Manifold, Degasser - Wash Sol. Pump

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
Management
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
processing module.
Note

drain.
Remove
Degasser
Manifold
tubes [1] from the degasser.
wash solution pump.
3. At the degasser manifold, disconnect the tubing [3]
to the internal probe wash pump.
Note
manifold (toward the front of the processing
module).
4. Disconnect the tubing [5] on the side of the

manifold from the bottom of the water tank.
5. Remove tubing [4] from the top of the manifold that
is going to the top of the water tank.
6. Remove the two (2) screws securing the manifold
to the WMU base and remove the manifold.
Replacement
Install
Degasser
1. Place the manifold on the WMU base and secure
Manifold
2. Connect tubing [5] to side of the manifold that is
coming from the bottom of the water tank.
3. Connect the tubing [4] to the top of the manifold that
is coming from the top of the water tank.
Note
manifold (toward the front of the processing
module).

5. Connect the tubing [2] from the wash solution pump
to the degasser manifold by screwing the fittings into
the connectors on top of the degasser manifold.
degasser manifold. Ensure the tubing clamps are
tight.
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note
The processing module may require a second
power on if the internal water tank does not
completely fill during the first power on
sequence.

Startup procedure.
W1.18 Fitting, Overflow and Waste Drain Version - 96666-109_1329_1
W1.18 Fitting, Overflow and Waste Drain

Parts
Tools/Materials Not Assessed 89207 Ftg,exterior drain hose to WMU
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Removal
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of the Abbott trained repair person.
Replacement
1.
Verification
Verification
2. Check for leaks.
W1.19 Manifold, wash cup Version - 96666-109_1331_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93370-01 Manifold, wash cup
W1.19 Manifold, wash cup

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note
incoming line.

Remove Water
Management
Unit Cover
connection panel.
cover to the processing module and remove
the cover.
Remove
Manifold
1. Clamp the tubing [1] to the wash cup manifold
for the appropriate valve.
2. Disconnect the tubing [1] from the wash cup
manifold.
3. Unscrew the wash cup manifold [2] from the
valve.
Replacement
Install Manifold
1. Place pipe sealant tape on the manifold fittings.
2. Screw the wash cup manifold [2] on the needle
valve [3] - finger tighten only.
3. Connect the tubing [1] to the wash cup manifold
and remove the clamp from tubing.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note

W1.26 Float Switch Assembly Version - 96666-109_929_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93530-01 Float Switch Assy., C8B
W1.26 Float Switch Assembly

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This part is used only on a WMU (93529) with Subsection: System status.
the molded internal water tank made of white
plastic. c 8000 serial number c800204 and above.

Offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
Management
the incoming water line from the water connection
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
processing module.
Note

drain.
Remove
Tubing from
1. Remove the tubing [1] from the vacuum pumps to
Low
the L.C. waste tank by pulling the tubing off of the
Concentration
fittings on top of the L.C. waste tank.
Waste Tank
waste tank.
L.C. waste tank by first loosing the two (2) screws
hanger.
Note
cover.
Disconnect
Tubing from
Degasser
Manifold
wash solution pump.
Note
processing module).
4. Disconnect the tubing [4] at the elbow behind the

degasser manifold (this tubing connects to the
cuvette wash pump).
Disconnect
Cable
1. Disconnect the following plugs from the connector
Connections
panel:

Remove
Water
Management
Unit
tank.
S.
the front of the processing module on your left.
bath to the water bath fill valve located above the
small pump at the back of the WMU.
Remove Float
Switch
1. Remove the FSLL (float switch level low)
Assembly
connector, FSLH (float switch level high)
connector, and FSUL (float switch upper limit)
connector from the connector [1] panel (the right
connector on the panel when viewed from the left
side of the processing module).
2. Remove the three (3) screws securing the float
switch assembly [2] to the water tank and lift from
the water tank.
Replacement
Install Float
Switch
1. Place the float switch assembly [2] on the water
Assembly
tank and secure with three (3) screws.
2. Insert the FSLL (float switch level low)
connector, FSLH (float switch level high)
connector, and FSUL (float switch upper limit)
connector in the connector panel [1].
Install Water
Management
Unit
module frame.
Connect Cable
Connections
panel:

Connect
Tubing to
Degasser
Manifold
manifold.
Note
processing module).

degasser manifold.
are tight.
Install Tubing
to Low
Concentration
Waste Tank
hanger.
waste tank.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note
power on sequence.

W1.27 Valve Assembly, C8B Version - 96666-109_916_1
List/Part Numbers
7-93531-01 Valve Assy., C8B WMU
W1.27 Valve Assembly, C8B

Absorbent towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Removal

This part is used only on a WMU (93529) with the System status.
molded internal water tank made of white plastic.
c 8000 serial number c800204 and above.

offline status.
Preparation
Option 11).
Note
incoming line.

processing module).
Remove
Water
Management
Unit Cover
panel.
cover.
Drain Water
Management
Unit
processing module.
Note

drain.
Remove
Needle
1. Clamp the tubing [1] to the wash cup manifolds
Valve, Wash
and disconnect the tubing.
Cup Adjust
2. Unscrew the wash cup manifold [2] from the valve.
3. Unscrew the needle valve [3] from the upper
manifold of the valve assembly.
Remove
Valve
1. Disconnect plugs RPWV, SPWV, and STWV for
Assembly
the three (3) valves.
2. Remove connectors RPWV, SPWV, and STWV
from the connector plate.
3. Cut the wire ties securing the cable bundle.
4. Disconnect the tubing from the upper manifold of
the valve assembly.
Note
Located on the right side of the manifold as
viewed from the rear of the processing
module.
5. Remove the four (4) 5mm hex screws [1] from the

mounting plate above the upper manifold.
6. Rotate valve assembly [2] toward the back of the
module and remove it from the tubing on the lower
manifold [3].
Replacement
Install Valve
Assembly
1. Insert barbed fittings on bottom of valve
assembly into the tubing on the lower manifold.
2. Rotate the valve assembly into position under
the upper mounting plate and secure with the
four (4) 5mm hex screws.
3. Connect tubing from was cup pump to upper
manifold of valve assembly.
Note
Located on the right side of the manifold
as viewed from the rear of the
processing module.
4. Ensure that tubing clamp is tight.

5. Install connectors [1] RPWV, SPWV, and STWV
into connector plate. Secure The cables with
wire ties.
6. Connect plugs RPWV, SPWV, and STWV for
the three (3) valves.
Install Needle
Valve, Wash
Cup Adjust
fittings on the needle valves. [3]
2. Screw the needle valves [3] into the upper
manifold of the valve assembly.
Note
Do not use a wrench on valves or
manifolds, finger tighten only.
3. Once the needle valve is tight, and with the

manifold fitting in the up position, screw the
wash cups manifold [2] on the needle valves -
finger tighten only.
4. Connect the tubing [1] to the wash cup
manifolds and remove the clamp from tubing.
Install Water
Management
Unit Cover
Prepare for
Operation
Note
Note

W2.01B Carrier Positioner Carriage (RSH) (c8000 and c16000) Version - 96781-104_4835_1
List/Part Numbers
7-86578-01 Assy, Carrier Positioner Carriage
W2.01B Carrier Positioner Carriage (c8000 and c16000)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
3. Open the RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
Remove
Carrier
1. Manually move the carrier transport away from the
Positioner
carrier positioner, so that the back of the carrier
Carriage
Note
The ci8200 has two carrier positioners.

4. Slide the carrier positioner carriage to the far left
until it is clear of the channel and lift it out [2].
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the left end of the carrier positioner
Positioner
carriage to the right into the channel until
Carriage
it is fully inserted [2].
2. Insert and tighten the two (2) non-captive
screws on the right end of the carrier
positioner [1].
Close
Covers
1. Close the RSH and processing module
covers.
Note
W2.02B Carrier Positioner Drive (RSH) (c8000 and c16000) Version - 96781-104_4836_1
List/Part Numbers
7-86579-01 Assy, Carrier Positioner Drive
W2.02B Carrier Positioner Drive (c8000 and c16000)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
3. Open the RSH covers near the desired carrier
positioner.
Remove
Carrier
1. Manually move the carrier transport away from the
Positioner
carrier positioner, so that the back of the carrier
Carriage
Note
The ci8200 has two carrier positioners.

4. Slide the carrier positioner carriage to the far left
until it is clear of the channel and lift it out [2].
Remove
Motor Cover
Remove
Carrier
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from the carrier
Positioner
positioner board at P2. [1]
Drive
2. Disconnect the carrier positioner motor at the
motor cable connection.
3. Loosen the captive screw at the left end of the
carrier positioner [2].
4. Remove carrier positioner drive by sliding it to the
right and partially into the opening in the frame to
fully disengage the drive from the channel [3].
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier positioner drive assembly
Positioner
into the frame opening of the channel and
Drive
slide it to the left until it is fully inserted [3].
2. Tighten the screw on the left end of the
carrier positioner to secure the positioner to
the frame [2].
3. Connect cables CP Sensor to P2 [1] of the
carrier positioner board and to the carrier
positioner drive motor.
Install
Motor
1. Replace the motor cover [1] over the carrier
Cover
positioner board.
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the left end of the carrier positioner
Positioner
carriage to the right into the channel until it
Carriage
is fully inserted [2].
2. Insert and tighten the two (2) non-captive
screws on the right end of the carrier
positioner [1].
Close
Covers
covers.
Note
initialization.
W2.03 Carrier Transport Pulley Assembly (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1349_2
List/Part Numbers
7-90594-01 Belt Tension Cap
7-90607-01 Assy, Carrier Transport Pulley
W2.03 Carrier Transport Pulley Assembly

14237-015 Lubricant with Teflon
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
2. Open the left RSH top cover.
two (2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap
the left end of the RSH.
Release Belt
Tension
1. Loosen clamp locking screw. [1]
2. Tighten the bolt on the belt tension
assembly. [2]
3. Remove the belt from the belt tension
pulley. [3]
Remove Carrier
Transport Pulley
Assembly
plate to the end of the x-axis belt tension
bracket.
Note
There is a spring on the block behind
the plate that exerts pressure on the
plate as it is being removed.
2. Remove the plate.

3. Slide the carrier transport pulley assembly [2]
(including the spring [3] at the end of the
assembly) out of the channel.
Replacement
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Slide the spring [3] into opening at end of
Pulley
belt tension bracket.
Assembly
2. Slide the carrier transport pulley
assembly [2] into the channel, exerting
pressure to compress the spring [3].
Note
The block on the assembly must
not bind and must move freely in
the channel.
3. Place the plate on the end of the

channel.
4. Tighten the two (2) screws [1] securing
the plate to the x-axis belt tension
bracket.
Apply Belt
Tension
1. Ensure that the belt tension disk [1] is
loose.
2. Fully tighten the bolt. [2]
3. Remove the belt from around both
pulleys.
4. Apply a small bead of lubricant (14237-
015) [4] around the gear and interior
flange surfaces of both pulleys.
5. Wrap the belt around the x-axis motor
pulley.
6. Wrap the belt around the belt tension
pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the
bolt [2] on the end of the belt tension
assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH
keypad cable guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with
rib on slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by
tightening the clamping screw [1] on the
back of the assembly.
1. Install RSH left end cap and tighten the
two screws [1].
2. Close the RSH top left cover.
Note
W2.04B Carrier Transport Bearing Assembly (RSH) (c8000 and c16000) Version - 96781-104_4837_1
List/Part Numbers
7-90619-01 Assy, Carrier Transport Bearing
7-91832-01 Bearing and Wiper Kit, Carrier Transport
7-91833-01 Wiper Pads
W2.04B Carrier Transport Bearing Assembly (c8000 and c16000)

Carrier Calibration Tool (76347)
Flashlight
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove Left
Top Cover
2.
Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs into
the removal position [1].
3. Rotate the cover back until hinges are
disengaged and remove cover [2] from the
instrument.
Move Carrier
Transport to
1. Manually move the carrier transport as far to the
Left Side of
left as possible.
RSH.
Caution
Failure to move the carrier transport to the
extreme left end of the RSH results in
damage to the carrier transport sensors.
Release Belt
Tension
2. Tighten the bolt on the belt tension assembly. [2]
3. Remove the belt from the belt tension pulley. [3]
Remove
Carrier
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the carrier
Transport
transport guard [1] to the carrier transport.
Guard
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out of the
RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
1. Disconnect the following connectors from the
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
P2 Transport Motor [2]
Note
The transport motor cable is W571
on a c 8000 standalone RSH and
W572 on a ci8200.
Remove
Carrier
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws securing the
Transport
carrier transport to the carrier transport
bearing. [3]
2. Lift the carrier transport up and guide it out
through the left side of the RSH, being careful
not to damage the carrier transport sensors
located at the bottom and back of the assembly.
Disconnect
Flex Cable
1. At the left side of the carrier bearing assembly,
loosen the captive screw [1] securing the flex
cable to the assembly.
Release Belt
1. At the right side of the carrier transport bearing,
loosen the captive screw securing the belt [1].
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it to
the front.
Note
Use needle nose pliers to pull the belt
directly toward you. Wiggle the belt as
you pull it straight out of the clamp.
3. At the left side of the carrier transport bearing,

4. Remove the belt.
5. Go to Remove Carrier Transport Pulley
Assembly.
Remove Belt
Tension
1. Move the carrier transport to the right of the
Bracket
priority bay.
2. Disconnect W631 BCR from the bar code
reader.
3. Disconnect W630 SHK P1 from the RSH
keypad.
4. Remove the bar code and keypad cables from
the cable guides.
Note
Do not pull on the belt tension bracket
until all screws are removed.
5. At the end of the bracket, remove the four

screws holding the belt tension bracket to the
sample handler. [2]
6. From the back of the bracket, remove the screw
at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument is a
c 8000 or ci8200, remove the screw from the
inside of the top front of the bracket. [1]
7. To prevent damage to the pins on the belt
tension bracket, carefully pull the bracket straight
off the sample handler.
Note
The pins are located on the bottom.
8. Check the x-axis belt tension bracket and verify

that both pins are still in place on the bracket.
If the pins are in place, go to Release

Belt.
If the pins are not, remove the pin from
the mating surface on the sample handler.
Remove
Carrier
Transport
plate to the end of the x-axis belt tension
Pulley
bracket.
Assembly
Note
There is a spring on the block behind the
plate that exerts pressure on the plate as
it is being removed.

Remove
Carrier
1. Slide the carrier transport bearing to the left end
Transport
of the RSH.
Bearing
2. Remove the carrier transport bearing assembly
Assembly
from the RSH.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Using 14237-015 Lubricant, lubricate the felt
Transport
wipers on the top and bottom of the carrier
Bearing
transport bearing.
Assembly
2. While compressing the carrier transport bearing
springs, carefully guide the carrier transport into
the appropriate slot.
Note
As the carrier bearing is installed, use care
to ensure that the felt pads [1] are
compressed as they come in contact with
the bearing rails.
Install Belt
Tension
1. Pull bar code and keypad (LUI) cable W630 SHK
Bracket
and W631 BCR out the end of the sample
handler.
2. Attach the belt tension bracket to the left end of
the sample handler.
3. Secure the bracket with four (4) screws [2].
4. Install a screw at the rear of the bracket (top
rail) [1], at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument is a
c 8000 or ci 8200, install the screw in the inside of
the top front of the bracket. [1]
5. Route the cables through the cable guides.
6. Connect W630 SHK P1 to the RSH keypad.
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the spring [3] into opening at end of belt
Transport
tension bracket.
Pulley
2. Slide the carrier transport pulley assembly [2] into
Assembly
the channel, exerting pressure to compress the
spring [3].
Note
The block on the assembly must not bind
and must move freely in the channel.
3. Place the plate on the end of the channel.

4. Tighten the two (2) screws [1] securing the plate
to the x-axis belt tension bracket.
Route
Carrier
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed one end
Transport
of the new carrier transport belt into the
Belt
opening [2] (with the belt teeth facing up).
2. Continue feeding the belt until it appears on the
right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt did
not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap the
belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
5. Route the belt to the right side of the carrier
transport bearing.
6. At the left end of the sample handler, wrap the
belt around the belt tension pulley.
7. Route the belt to the left side of the carrier
transport bearing.
Attach
Carrier
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt with the
Transport
right end of the carrier transport belt clamp [1].
Belt
2. Push the belt fully into the clamp until the belt
touches the rear stop [2].
3. Measure the distance between the front edge of
the belt and the clamp. The distance [3] should
be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4] into
the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the tool.
6. Loosen the screw 1/4-turn to remove the tool.
7. Tighten the screw 1/4- turn.
Note
The belt will be firmly attached, but the
screw should not be completely tight.
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of the

belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
1. Ensure that the belt tension disk [1] is loose.
3. Remove the belt from around both pulleys.
4. Apply a small bead of lubricant (14237-015) [4]
around the gear and interior flange surfaces of
both pulleys.
5. Wrap the belt around the x-axis motor pulley.
6. Wrap the belt around the belt tension pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2] on the
end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad cable
guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with rib on
slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening the
clamping screw [1] on the back of the assembly.
Connect
Flex Cable
1. At the left end of the carrier bearing assembly,
attach the flex cable
Install
Carrier
1. Guide the carrier transport through the left side of
Transport
the RSH and place on the carrier transport
bearing, being careful not to damage the carrier
transport sensors.
2. Tighten the three (3) captive screws securing the
carrier transport to the carrier transport bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
1. Connect the following connectors to the carrier
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
on a c 8000 standalone RSH and
W572 on a ci 8200.
2. Press down on the cable clamps, to latch the

cable to the carrier transport. Pull on the cable
connectors to ensure that they are latched.
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier transport guard on the carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
2. Tighten the captive screw securing the carrier
Install RSH
Top Cover
1. Place the RSH cover into position on the hinge [2].
2. Push the four (4) cover hinge tabs into the
attached position [1].
Note and shutdown.
W2.05 Tray Platform Module Assembly (RSH) Version - 96781-104_918_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203436-01 Assy, Tray Platform - Grey
7-91499-01 Assy, Tray Platform Module
W2.05 Tray Platform Module Assembly
Time Required 20-60 min

Carrier calibration tool (76347)
Note
The time to complete this procedure is dependent on the tray bay being removed. The RSH tray bays are nested together. To
remove a bay, the bays to its left (including the priority bay) must also be removed.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening
the two (2) screws [1] on the inside of the
end cap and sliding the end cap forward.
Remove All RSH

Top Covers
2. Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs
into the removal position [1].
instrument.
4. Repeat the steps above for each of the
remaining top covers.
Note
If the bay to be replaced is on the left
module of a ci8200, only the covers
on that module needs to be remove.
Remove Interlock
Sensor Boards
1. At the right end of the sample handler,
release the interlock sensor boards by
pulling the latch tab down [2].
2. Disconnect the small connector board [4].
3. Pull interlock sensor board [3] out of the top
cover rail.
4. As the board is removed, disconnect the
first sensor board from the next board in the
series.
5. Repeat the process until all boards have
been removed.
Note
There are three (3) boards in a
i 2000 SR, four (4) in a c 8000 and
seven (7) in a ci8200
Move Carrier
Transport to Left
1. Manually move the carrier transport as far to
Side of RSH.
the left as possible.
Caution
Failure to move the carrier transport
to the extreme left end of the RSH
results in damage to the carrier
transport sensors.
Release Belt
Tension
2. Install the tension release bolt [2].
3. Tighten the bolt [2] to release the tension.
pulley. [3]
Remove Carrier
Transport Guard
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the
carrier transport guard [1] to the carrier
transport.
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out of
the RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
1. Disconnect the following connectors from
the carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
The transport motor cable is
W571 on a c 8000 standalone
RSH, W572 on a ci8200, and
W573 on an i 2000 SR
standalone.
Remove Carrier
Transport
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws
securing the carrier transport to the carrier
transport bearing. [3]
through the left side of the RSH, being
careful not to damage the carrier transport
sensors located at the bottom and back of
the assembly.
Release Belt
1. At the left side of the old style carrier
transport bearing, loosen the captive screw
securing the belt [1].
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it
to the front. Use needle nose pliers to pull
the belt directly toward you. Wiggle the belt
as you pull it straight out of the clamp.
Remove Belt
Tension Bracket
1. Move the carrier transport bearing assembly
to the right of the priority bay.
2. Disconnect the W631 BCR from the bar
code reader.
3. Disconnect W630 SHK P1 from the RSH
keypad.
4. Remove the bar code and keypad cables
from the cable guides.
Note
Do not pull on the belt tension
bracket until all screws are removed.

screws holding the belt tension bracket to
the sample handler. [2]
6. From the back of the bracket, remove the
screw at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument
is a c 8000 or ci8200, remove the screw
from the inside of the top front of the
bracket. [1]
tension bracket, carefully pull the bracket
straight off the sample handler.
Note
Remove Partition
Screws at Top Note
Cover Rail If on a ci8200, the tray platform to be
replaced is on the RSH section attached to
the left process module. Only remove the
screws on the along its bays.
1. Remove the eight (8) screws [1] securing

the priority bay partitions to the rail.
2. At all routine bays, remove the screws [2]
securing the partitions to the rail.
Remove Cover
Support Brackets
1. At each cover support bracket [1], remove
two (2) mounting screws [2] [3].
Note
If care is taken, it is not required to
remove the rear screw [3] on the
brackets.
Remove c 8000
Priority Bay
1. At the left end of the priority bay, remove
Closeout (c 8000
the c 8000 priority bay closeout [1] by
and ci8200 only)
removing the indicated screws.
Remove RSH
Access Cover
1. Remove the two (2) screws [3] at the top of
the front plastic cover.
Remove the
Cover Lower Rail Note
The cover lower rail on a ci8200 is in two
pieces. If the bay to be replaced is within
the left module on ci8200, it is not
necessary to remove the screw in the next
step.
1. At the right end of the cover lower rail on a

c 8000 or i 2000 SR, remove the screw
holding the rail to the motor bracket.
2. Over the tray platform module being
replaced, remove the cover top rail.
Remove Lower
Cover(s)
1. Loosen the two (2) 1/4-turn captive
screws [1] securing the lower cover to the
frame and remove the cover(s).
Disconnect
Connectors to Note
Priority Light Latches should be firmly pressed in before
Sensor and Unit attempting to disconnect cables from the
Detect Boards priority light sensor board and the unit
detect boards.
1. If the tray platform module to be replaced

contains bays 2 and 3, carefully disconnect
both the switch and light connectors on the
priority light sensor board.
2. At the tray platform module to be replaced
and the module to its left, disconnect all the
light and switch connectors at the UDB
board.
Note
A tray platform module contains a
pair of routine bays 2 & 3, 4 & 5, and
etc.
Remove Priority
Bay Screw Cover
1. At the left side of the priority bay, locate the
cover over the screws.
2. Remove the cover by lifting and pulling the
tab to the left [1].
Remove Carrier
Sensor Cover
1. At the back of the two right partitions on the
priority bay, remove the rear screws.
2. Slide the partition back and lift it out.
3. Under the sensor plate [2] is a button [3], a
spring (under button) [4], and a sensor. [5]
Do not lose these components during
priority bay transfer.
4. Under the partitions, lift and remove the
small plate [2] that covers the carrier
sensor [1] on the far right side.
Note
Loose components (a button, a
spring, and a sensor) are under the
plate. Take care not to lose these
components.
Loosen Priority
Bay
1. Completely remove the six (6) screws [3]
securing the bay to the frame.
Note
The bay sits on pins that align its
position on the RSH. If the screws
are not fully removed the screws and
pins make removal and installation
difficult.
2. Do not remove the priority platform

assembly.
Remove Required
Tray Platform
1. The carrier transport section align sensor is
Modules
engaged with the notches at the rear of the
bays. Ensure that the carrier transport is
moved away from the bays to be replaced.
2. At the left bay within the tray platform
module to be replaced, remove the two (2)
screws securing the bay cover plate [1].
Note
A tray platform module contains a
pair of bays 2 & 3, 4 & 5, and etc.
3. Lift and remove the cover plate [3].
Note
A tray detect button is under the
cover plate. Under the button is a
spring and sensor. Do not lose these
components.
4. Repeat the above for right bay in tray

platform module.
5. Remove the three (3) screws [5] under each
plate.
6. If the tray platform assembly being replaced
does not contain bays 2 and 3, repeat the
process above for tray platform module to its
left.
7. To remove the platform module, lift the left
assembly slightly to clear the mating edge.
8. Lift and remove the defective tray platform
module.
Replacement
Install Tray
Module Assembly
1. Ensure the carrier transport, is moved away
form the tray platform module being installed.
2. Place the tray platform module in the open
position on the extrusion.
3. Lift the platform assembly to the left and
place the left edge of the new assembly
under it.
Note
The tray platform is aligned to the
extrusion by guide pins.
4. Position the assembly as required to ensure

that the part is aligned with the guide pins
and seated flush on the extrusion.
Secure the Tray

Platform Modules
1. Ensure the tray platform assemblies are
seated squarely on the extrusion.
2. Install the three (6) screws [5] to secure the
assembly to the extrusion.
Note
If tray platform assembly to the left is
loose, repeat the process.
3. Ensure that the sensor, spring and button for

each bay is properly seated.
4. Ensure that the door release latches are
properly seated.
5. Install the cover plate [3] with two (2)
screws [1].
6. Repeat the above for the each of the bays.
Secure Priority
Bay
1. The priority bay sets on pins that align its
position on the extrusion. Adjust the
assembly as required, to ensure the bay is
squarely seated and aligned.
2. Install the six (6) screws and secure the bay
to the frame. [3]
Install Screw
Access Covers
1. Slide the screw access cover into the left
side of the priority bay [3].
Connect Priority
Light Sensor and
1. At the UDB and priority light sensor boards,
Unit Detect
reconnect the sensor and LED connections.
Boards
Install Lower
Cover
1. Position the lower cover on the instrument
and tighten the two (2) 1/4-turn screws to
attach the cover to the frame [1].
Install Lower
Cover Rail
1. Lay the cover lower rail along the top of the
bays.
2. Install the lower cover rail.
For an i 2000 SR or a c 8000, secure

the rail to the motor bracket with a
screw.
For a ci8200 align the pins at the right
end with the corresponding holes on
the mounted rail.
Install Partition
Screws at Lower
1. Install the eight (8) screws [1] securing the
Cover Rail
priority bay partitions to the rail.
2. At all routine bays, install the screws [2]
securing the partitions to the rail.
Install Cover
Support Brackets
1. At each cover support bracket [1], install
mounting screw [2].
Install RSH
Access Cover
1. Install the top two (2) screws [3] at the top of
Install c 8000
Priority Bay
1. At the left end of the priority bay, install the
Closeout (c 8000
c 8000 priority bay closeout [1] using the
and ci8200 only)
indicated screws.
Install Belt
Tension Bracket
1. Pull bar code and keypad (LUI) cable
W540 BKPL-SIB BCR out and away from
the bracket area.
2. Attach the belt tension bracket to the left end
of the c 8000 sample handler.
4. Install screws at the rear of the bracket [1].
5. Route the cable through the cable guides.
6. Connect the cables W630 to the RSH LUI
keypad and the bar code reader.
Install Interlock
Sensor Boards Note
All interlock sensor boards should be
replaced at the same time (interlock sensor
board, cover sensor terminator board, and
the SIB cover interlock sensor board).
1. Connect the cover sensor terminator board

to a cover interlock sensor board [6].
2. Slide the boards into the channel, connecting
additional interlock sensor boards until all
boards are inserted [5].
Note
Verify the sensor SW1 is facing up
when inserting the interlock sensor
board into the channel.
3. Connect the SIB cover interlock sensor

board [4] to the final interlock sensor
board [3].
4. Slide the SIB cover interlock sensor board
into the plastic clip [2].
5. Attach the cable from the SIB cover interlock
sensor board to J13 of the sensor interface
board [1].
Route Carrier
Transport Belt
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed
one end of the new carrier transport belt into
the opening [2] (with the belt teeth facing
up).
2. Continue feeding the belt until it appears on
the right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt
did not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap
the belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
transport bearing.
6. At the left end of the sample handler, wrap
the belt around the belt tension pulley.
transport bearing
Attach Carrier
Transport Belt
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt
with the right end of the carrier transport belt
clamp [1].
2. Push the belt fully into the clamp until the
belt touches the rear stop [2].
3. Measure the distance between the front
edge of the belt and the clamp. The distance
[3] should be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4]
into the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the
tool.
6. Loosen the screw 1/4-turn to remove the
tool.
Note
The belt will be firmly attached, but
the screw should not be completely
tight.
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of

the belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
015) [4] around the gear and interior flange
surfaces of both pulleys.
pulley.
pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2]
on the end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad
cable guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with rib
on slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening
the clamping screw [1] on the back of the
assembly.
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Guide the carrier transport through the left
side of the RSH and place on the carrier
transport bearing, being careful not to
damage the carrier transport sensors.
2. Tighten the three (3) captive screws securing
the carrier transport to the carrier transport
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
1. Connect the following connectors to the
carrier transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
standalone.
Install Carrier
Transport Guard
1. Place the carrier transport guard on the
carrier transport.
2. Tighten the captive screw securing the
transport.
Install All RSH
Top Covers
1. With the cover at a 45 degree angle, insert
the top cover [2] hinge into the its rear
mount.
2. Raise the cover and release the spring
latches to secure the hinge.
Install Caps/Close
Covers
1. Install and secure the RSH left end cap by
tightening the two screws [1].
2. Install and secure the RSH right end cap by
covers.
Note and shutdown.
initialization.
2 P-01 Routine Bay Partition Alignment
6 3323 - RSH Section Test
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-105) • © 2002, 2008• ARCHITECT, i2000, and i2000SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000,
W2.06 Priority Platform Module (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1347_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203440-01 Assy, Priority Platform Module - Gray
7-91516-01 Assy, Priority Platform Module
W2.06 Priority Platform Module

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove All
RSH Top
Covers
2. Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs into
the removal position [1].
instrument.
Note
If the bay to be replaced is on the left
module of a ci8200, only the covers on
that module needs to be remove.
Remove RSH
Bar Code
1. Disconnect cable W631 BCR from the bar
Reader
code reader [1].
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the bar
code reader to the bracket [2], setting the
screws aside.
Note
Keep the two (2) screws apart from
other screws as they are metric.
Disconnect
Priority Tray Note
Sensors and Latches should be firmly pressed in before
Indicator Lights attempting to disconnect cables from the
priority light sensor board and the unit detect
boards.
1. Loosen the two (2) 1/4-turn captive screws
securing the lower cover to the frame and
remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the carrier sensor cables from the
priority light sensor board (PLSB).
3. Disconnect the indicator light cables from the
PLSB.
Free Bay
Partitions
1. Remove the eight (8) screws [1] securing the
priority bay partitions to the top rail.
2. At each of the three (3) standard bays to the
right, remove the three (3) screws [2] securing
the partitions to the rail.
Move Carrier
Transport to
1. Manually move the carrier transport as far to
Left Side of
the left as possible.
RSH.
Caution
Failure to move the carrier transport to
the extreme left end of the RSH results
in damage to the carrier transport
sensors.
Release Belt
Tension
2. Install the belt tension release bolt [2].
pulley. [3]
Remove
Carrier
Transport
Guard
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out of
the RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
standalone.
Remove
Carrier
1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws securing
Transport
bearing. [3]
through the left side of the RSH, being careful
not to damage the carrier transport sensors
located at the bottom and back of the
assembly.
Remove
Carrier
1. At the left side of the old style carrier transport
Transport Belt
bearing, loosen the captive screw securing the
Left End
belt [1].
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it to
the front.
Note
Use needle nose pliers to pull the belt
directly toward you. Wiggle the belt as
you pull it straight out of the clamp.
Remove Belt
Tension
1. Move the carrier transport bearing assembly to
Bracket
the right of the priority bay.
2. Disconnect cable W540 BKPL-SIB BCR at the
keypad (LUI) panel.
3. Remove the bar code and keypad cables from
the cable guides.
Note
Do not pull on the belt tension bracket
until all screws are removed.
4. From the back of the bracket, remove the

screw at the top rail [1], or, if the instrument is
a c 8000 or ci8200, remove the screw from the
inside of the top front of the bracket. [1]
screws holding the belt tension bracket to the
sample handler. [2]
tension bracket, carefully pull the bracket
straight off the sample handler.
Note
7. Remove the top two (2) screws [3] at the top of

Remove
Priority Bay
1. At the left side of the priority bay, locate the
Screw Cover
cover over the screws. [1]
2. Remove the cover by lifting and pulling the tab
to the left [1].
Remove
Carrier Sensor
1. At the back of the two right partitions on the
Cover
priority bay, remove the rear screws.
2. Slide the partition back and lift it out.
3. Under the partitions, lift and remove the small
plate [2] that covers the carrier sensor [1] on
the far right side.
Note
Loose components (a button, a spring,
and a sensor) are under the plate. Take
care not to lose these components.
Remove
c 8000 Filler
(c 8000 and
c 8000 filler to the right of the keypad and
ci8200 only)
remove the filler.
Remove
Priority Bay
1. Remove the six (6) screws [3] securing the bay
to the frame.
2. To secure button, spring and sensor, reinstall
small plates. Use tape to hold the plate to the
assembly.
3. While holding the top rail up, lift and remove
the priority bay.
Replacement
Place Priority
Bay on Sample Note
Handler The priority bay sits on pins that align its
1. Adjust the assembly, as required, to ensure the

bay is squarely seated and aligned.
2. Lift the rail above the partitions and place the
priority bay on the sample handler frame.
Remove
Carrier Sensor
1. Remove the screw at the rear of the two right
Cover
partitions.
2. Remove the small cover plate [2] that covers
the carrier sensor. [1]
Remove
Priority Bay
1. Locate the cover over the screws (left side of
Screw Cover
the priority bay).
2. Remove the cover by lifting and pulling the tab
to the left [1].
Secure Priority
Bay Note
The priority bay sits on pins that align its
1. Adjust the assembly as required, to ensure the

bay is squarely seated and aligned.
2. Install the six (6) screws and secure the bay to
the frame. [3]
Install Carrier
Sensor Cover
1. Install the small cover plate over the sensor.
Note
Verify that the loose components under
the plate are all present.
2. Install the two (2) partitions and secure with

two (2) screws.
Install Screw
Access Covers
1. Slide the screw access cover into the left side
of the priority bay [3].
Secure
Partitions to
1. Secure the eight (8) priority bay partitions to
Rail
the rail with screws. [1]
2. At the three standard bays to the right, install
the three (3) screws securing the three
partitions to the rail. [2]
Install Belt
Tension
1. Pull bar code and keypad (LUI) cable
Bracket
W540 BKPL-SIB BCR out and away from the
bracket area.
2. Attach the belt tension bracket to the left end of
the c 8000 sample handler.
4. Install screws at the rear of the bracket [1].
5. Route the cable through the cable guides.
6. Connect the cables W630 to the RSH LUI
Keypad and the bar code reader.
7. Install the two (2) screws [3] at the top of the
front plastic cover.
Route Carrier
Transport Belt
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed one
end of the new carrier transport belt into the
right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt
did not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap
the belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
transport bearing.
transport bearing.
Attach Carrier
Transport Belt
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt with
the right end of the carrier transport belt
clamp [1].
3. Measure the distance between the front edge
of the belt and the clamp. The distance [3]
should be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4]
into the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the
tool.
Note
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of

the belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
both pulleys.
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2] on
the end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad
cable guide.
slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening
the clamping screw [1] on the back of the
assembly.
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Guide the carrier transport through the left side
of the RSH and place on the carrier transport
transport sensors.
2. Tighten the three (3) captive screws securing
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
standalone.
Install Carrier
Transport
Guard
transport.
Install c 8000
Filler (c 8000
1. Using three (3) screws, secure the c 8000 filler
and ci8200
to the left side of the priority bar.
only)
Install RSH Bar

Code Reader
1. Attach the bar code reader to the bracket with
the two (2) metric screws.
Note
Verify that the bar code reader cable is
positioned down.
2. Attach W631 BCR to the bar code reader [1],

and verify that connector is fully engaged
before tightening screws.
Connect
Priority Tray
1. Connect all carrier sensor cables to the PLSB.
Sensors and
2. Connect the indicator light cables to the PLSB.
Indicator Lights
3. Tighten the two (2) quarter-turn captive screws
securing the lower cover to the frame and
remove the cover.
Install RSH
Top Cover
1. With the cover at a 45 degree angle, insert the
top cover [2] hinge into the its rear mount.
2. Raise the cover and release the spring latches
to secure the hinge.
Note and shutdown.
W2.07 Carrier Transport Drive Motor (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1346_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91809-01 Motor, Carrier Transport Drive
7-96173-01 Motor, RSH Carrier Belt Drive
W2.07 Carrier Transport Drive Motor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
two (2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap and
sliding the end cap forward.
3. Remove the right side processing module cover.
Remove
Right Side
1. On the right side of the system, open the top
Cover
covers and loosen the right side cover top 1/4-turn
screws.
2. Left the side cover at the bottom [1] as loosen the
two side screws [2].
Release
Belt
Tension
2. Tighten the bolt on the belt tension assembly. [2]
Remove
Carrier Note
Transport To prevent damage to the carrier transport belt,
Drive Motor verify that tension is released and that the belt is
removed from the carrier transport pulley prior to
removing the belt from the carrier transport drive
motor.
1. At the right end of the RSH, slide the carrier

transport belt off the carrier transport drive
motor [1].
2. Disconnect the carrier transport drive motor
cable [2].
3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the motor to
the RSH [3].
4. Remove the motor from the RSH.
Replacement

Install
Carrier
1. At the right end of the RSH, install the
Transport
carrier transport drive motor on the
Drive Motor
mounting bracket.
2. Install the four (4) screws to secure the
motor to the mounting bracket [3].
3. Connect the carrier transport drive motor
cable [2].
4. Slide the carrier transport belt onto the
carrier transport drive motor [1].
Apply Belt
Tension
1. Ensure that the belt tension disk [1] is
loose.
3. Remove the belt from around both
pulleys.
015) [4] around the gear and interior
flange surfaces of both pulleys.
pulley.
pulley [3].
7. Set the belt tension by removing the
bolt [2] on the end of the belt tension
assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH
keypad cable guide.
9. Rotate the clamp [1] to align notch with
rib on slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by
tightening the clamping screw [1] on the
back of the assembly.
Install
Caps/Close
1. Install and secure the RSH left end cap
Covers
by tightening the two screws [1].
2. Install and secure the RSH right end cap
by tightening the two screws [1].
covers.
1. Install the right side processing module
cover.
Note
To prevent cross threading the
bracket, raise and lower the
cover [1] as you tighten the
screws [2].
Note
W2.08 Carrier Transport (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1345_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201431-01 Sensor Shield, Carrier Transport
7-92947-01 Assy, Carrier Transport
7-92947-02 Assy, Carrier Transport with Sensor Guard
EE-SX3070L RSH CARR. TRANSPORT SNSR EE SX3070, LSP
HOA014901L RSH CARR.TRANSPORT SNSR HOA0149-001, LSP
W2.08 Carrier Transport

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
4. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening the two
(2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap and
left as possible.
Caution
extreme left end of the RSH results in
damage to the carrier transport sensors.
Remove
Carrier
Transport
Guard
RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
on a c 8000 standalone RSH, W572
on a ci8200, and W573 on an
i 2000 SR standalone.
Remove
Carrier
Transport
2. Lift the carrier transport up and guide it out through
the left side of the RSH, being careful not to
damage the carrier transport sensors located at the
bottom and back of the assembly.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport sensors.
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
2. Press down on the cable clamps, to latch the

cable to the carrier transport.
3. Pull on the cable connectors to ensure that they
are latched.
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
Install End
Cap/Close
Covers
Note and shutdown.
W2.09 Bay Door (RSH) Version - 96781-104_919_3
List/Part Numbers
7-203438-01 Door, RSH Bay, Grey
7-91504-01 Door, RSH Bay
7-91504-02 Door, RSH Bay, Beige
W2.09 Bay Door

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
Remove
Bay Door
1. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the bay
door to the tray via the screw plate.
2. Remove the screw plate.
3. Remove the bay door by lifting straight up.
Note
Loose components (a button, a spring, a
sensor, and two door release arms with
springs) are under the plate. Take care not
to lose these components.
Replacement
Install
Bay Door
1. At the bottom right corner of the door is a coiled
spring. As the door is installed, insert the end of
the spring into the small hole in the right side of
the tray platform.
2. At the each side of the bay door area are two door
release arms, align the door as required to align
the bottom edge with the notches in the release
arms.
3. Verify that the loose components under the plate
are all present.
4. Verify that the bay door is correctly positioned.
5. Install the screw plate.
6. Tighten the two (2) screws [2] securing the screw
plate to the platform.

Note and shutdown.
on prior to turning on the processing module
1 G143 - RSH Bay Door Operational Check Ensure that when the RSH Bay Door is in the Door operates according to above verification.
down position it returns fully to the closed and
locked position with no external assistance.
Test this operation 5 times by inserting a
carrier tray and removing it and observing that
the door returns and locks after each
insertion/removal.
W3.01 Flex Cable Assembly (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1344_3
List/Part Numbers
7-201396-01 Velcro Strips, RSH Flex Chain
7-35003533-01 ASSY, CABLE, FLEX W572 ci82k/ci162k plus RSHx
7-94129-01 Cable Flex i4000SR, W574
7-95420-01 Assy, Flex Chain i2kSR W573
7-95420-02 Assy, Flex Chain i2kSR W573
7-95420-03 Assy, Flex Chain, i2000SR W573
7-95421-01 Flex Chain ci82k W572
7-95421-02 Flex Chain ci82k W572
7-95421-03 Flex Chain ci8200 W572
7-95528-01 IGUS Chain, c8k
7-95528-02 Flex Chain c8000 W571
7-95528-03 Flex Chain c8000 or c16000 W571
W3.01 Flex Cable Assembly
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH left end cap by loosening the two
(2) screws [1] on the inside of the end cap and
4. Open RSH covers near the carrier transport.
Remove
Flex Cable
Assembly
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
2. Loosen the captive screw securing the flex cable

assembly to the carrier transport bearing [3].
3. Remove the non-captive screw from the right end
of the cable. [4]
4. Remove the Transport Motor Cable P2 from the
bracket at the right rear of the RSH.
5. Disconnect the Xport Sensor Cable P1 from
connector J6 on the sensor interface board (SIB).
6. Slide the flex cable assembly out of the RSH,
being careful not to damage the carrier transport
sensors.
Note
The flex cable is designed to flex only in
one direction. If the cable is to be
reinstalled, use care to ensure that the cable
is not bent in the opposite direction. The
resulting kink in the cable can develop
during use and damage the section align
sensor on the carrier transport.
Replacement
Install Flex
Cable Note
Assembly The flex cable is designed to flex only in one
direction. If the cable is to be reinstalled, use care
to ensure that the cable is not bent in the opposite
direction. The resulting kink in the cable can
develop during use and damage the section align
sensor on the carrier transport.
1. Slide the flex cable assembly into the RSH, being

careful not to damage the carrier transport sensors.
2. Attach non-captive screw to the right end of the
cable. [4]
3. Tighten the captive screw securing the flex cable
assembly to the carrier transport bearing [3].
transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
The transport motor cable is W571 on
a c 8000 standalone RSH, W572 on a
ci8200, and W573 on an i 2000 SR
standalone.
5. Connect the Transport Motor Cable P2 to the

bracket.
6. Connect the Xport Sensor Cable P1 to J6 on the
SIB.
Install
Caps/Close
Covers
2. Install and secure the RSH right end cap by
3. Close the RSH covers near the carrier transprot.

Note and shutdown.
W3.02 Carrier Transport Belt (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1343_2
List/Part Numbers
7-35003533-01 ASSY, CABLE, FLEX W572 ci82k/ci162k plus RSHx
7-35003534-01 BELT, TIMING, AT5, ci8200/ci16200 plus RSH EXTENSION
7-95424-01 Belt, Carrier Transport, i2kSR
7-95425-01 Belt, Carrier Transport, c8K
7-95426-01 Belt, Carrier Transport ci82k
7-95427-01 Belt, X-Position, i4000SR
7-96557-01 Spring, RSH Belt Tension
W3.02 Carrier Transport Belt
Standard Tool Kit

Tools/Materials
Flashlight
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
3. Open the RSH covers.
left as possible.
Note
extreme left end of the RSH may result in
damage to carrier transport sensors.
Release
Belt
Tension
Replace
Belt
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the plate
Tension
to the end of the x-axis belt tension bracket.
Spring
Note
There is a spring on the block behind the
plate that exerts pressure on the plate as it
is being removed.

4. Install a new belt tension spring.
5. Slide in the carrier transport pulley assembly.
6. Install the plate using the two screws [1].
Remove
Carrier
Transport
Guard
RSH.
Disconnect
Connectors
carrier transport:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
Remove
Carrier
Transport
2. Lift the carrier transport up and guide it out through
the left side of the RSH, being careful not to
damage the carrier transport sensors located at the
bottom and back of the assembly.
Release
Belt
1. At the right side of the carrier transport bearing,
2. Remove the belt from the clamp by sliding it to the
front. Use needle nose pliers to pull the belt
directly toward you. Wiggle the belt as you pull it
straight out of the clamp.
3. At the left side of the carrier transport bearing,
4. Remove the belt.
Replacement
Route
Carrier
1. At the left end of the sample handler feed one
Transport
end of the new carrier transport belt into the
Belt
right end.
3. Use a flashlight to visually verify that the belt did
not twist.
4. At the right end of the sample handler, wrap the
belt around the x-axis motor capstan.
transport bearing.
transport bearing.
Attach
Carrier
1. Align the mark on the right end of the belt with
Transport
the right end of the carrier transport belt
Belt
clamp [1].
3. Measure the distance between the front edge of
the belt and the clamp. The distance [3] should
be at least 0.5" (13 mm).
4. Insert the carrier calibration alignment tool [4] into
the opening under the clamping screw.
5. Tighten the screw until tension is felt on the tool.
Note
8. Repeat the process above for the left end of the

belt.
Apply Belt
Tension
both pulleys.
7. Set the belt tension by removing the bolt [2] on
the end of the belt tension assembly.
8. Store the bolt by placing it into RSH keypad cable
guide.
slider block.
10. Lock the belt tension assembly by tightening the
clamping screw [1] on the back of the assembly.
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport sensors.
bearing. [3]
Connect
Connectors
transport [1]:
P1 Xport Sensor [1]
Note
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
Connect
Flex Cable
1. Tighten the captive screw securing the flex cable
to the carrier transport bearing.
Install
Caps/Close
1. Install the RSH left end cap.
Covers
2. Close all RSH and processing module covers.

Note and shutdown.
W3.03 Carrier Transport Guard (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1342_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86141-01 Cover, Carrier Transport
W3.03 Carrier Transport Guard

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
status.
Preparation
1. Open RSH covers near the carrier
transport.
2. Open the processing module cover.
Remove Carrier
Transport
Guard
transport.
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and
out of the RSH.
Replacement
Install
Carrier
1. Place the carrier transport guard on the
Transport
carrier transport.
Guard
2. Tighten the captive screw securing the
transport.
Close
Covers
covers.

Note
initialization.
open/close freely.
W3.04 RSH Cover (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1340_4
List/Part Numbers
7-91561-01 Cover, Top, RSH
7-91561-02 Cover, Top, RSH, XYLEX
W3.04 RSH Cover

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Preparation
1. Open the desired RSH cover.
Remove
RSH Cover
1. Push each of the four (4) cover hinge tabs
into the removal position [1].
2. Rotate the cover back until the hinges are
disengaged and remove the cover from the
instrument [2].
Replacement
Install
RSH
1. Place the RSH cover into position on the
Cover
hinge [2].
2. Push the four (4) cover hinge tabs into the
attached position [1].
Note
initialization.
W3.05 SIB carrier transport cable (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1339_2
List/Part Numbers
7-86403-01 Cable, Car. Transport Arm W575
7-86403-02 Cable, Carrier Transport Arm Sensor W575
W3.05 SIB carrier transport cable

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
status.
Preparation
3. Open the RSH cover closest to the
carrier transport.
Remove Carrier
Transport Guard
transport.
2. Lift the carrier transport guard up and out
of the RSH.
Remove SIB
Carrier Transport
1. Disconnect the end of the SIB carrier
Cable
transport cable from the carrier transport
flex board [1].
2. Disconnect the end of the SIB carrier
transport cable from the rail guide [2].
3. Slide the cable to the right until the cable
guard is out of the channel.
4. Lift the cable and remove it from the
channel in the rail guide [3].
5. Unwind the SIB carrier transport cable
Replacement
Install SIB
Carrier
1. Wind the SIB carrier transport cable around the
Transport
post.
Cable
Note
The connectors at both ends of the cable
are identical. Verify that the end with the
cable guard close to the connector is
installed in the rail guide [3].
2. Connect the end of the SIB carrier transport
cable to the rail guide [2].
3. Connect the end of the SIB carrier transport
cable to the carrier transport flex board [1].
Install
Carrier
Transport
transport.
Guard
Close
Covers

Operation instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and
Note shutdown.
W4.01 c 8000 Card Cage (RSH) Version - 96781-104_920_2
List/Part Numbers
7-202436-01 Stand Alone RSH Short Panel Card Cage
7-86580-01 Card Cage, RSH no cables
W4.01 c 8000 Card Cage

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the RSH end cap by loosing the two (2)
Phillips screws on the inside of the end cap and
3. Remove the right side cover from the processing
module.
Disconnect
Cables
1. Disconnect the following connectors from the back
of the card cage mother board:
J 679
J 678
J 680
J 603
J 703
J 701
J 702
J 41
J 42
J 48
J 600
2. Remove the cables from the cable clamps on the

card cage mounting plate and move out of the way.
Open Card
Cage Front
1. Open the card cage front cover by loosening the
Cover
bottom captive screw and lifting the cover straight
up.
Note
Do not pull out on the bottom of the cover.
The cover is not hinged.
Remove
Card Cage
1. In the upper slot, remove the motor driver card.
Circuit
2. In the bottom left slot, remove the indexer board.
Boards
3. In the bottom right slot, remove the CPU board.
Remove
Card Cage
1. Loosen the top screw on each side of the card
cage mounting plate.
2. Remove the lower three (3) screws from each side
of the mounting plate.
Note
Early manufactured instruments do not have
the bottom two screws on each side of the
mounting plate.
3. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the card

cage mounting plate to the RSH (located between
transport motor and the processing module).
4. Lift the card cage and mounting plate up and off of
the top two (2) screws and remove the card cage
Replacement
Install
Card Cage
1. Place the card cage and mounting plate on
top of the two (2) screws on the processing
module.
2. Install the two (2) screws that secure the card
cage mounting plate to the RSH (located
between transport motor and the processing
module).
3. Install the lower three (3) screws on each side
of the mounting plate and tighten the top
screws.
Note
Early manufactured instruments do not
have the bottom two screws on each
side of the mounting plate.
Open Card
Cage
1. Open the card cage front cover by loosening
Front
the bottom captive screw and lifting the cover
Cover
straight up.
Note
Do Not pull out on the bottom of the
cover. The cover is not hinged.
Install
Card Cage
1. In the upper slot, install the motor driver card.
Circuit
2. In the bottom left slot, install the indexer
Boards
board.
3. In the bottom right slot, install the CPU board.
Install
Card Cage
1. Install card cage front cover and tighten the
Circuit
bottom captive screw.
Boards
Connect
Cables
1. Connect the following plugs to the connectors
on the back of the card cage mother board:
J 679
J 678
J 680
J 603
J 703
J 701
J 702
J 41
J 42
J 48
J 600
2. Route the cables in the cable clamps and

secure them to the mounting plate.
Note
Cables must not extend below the card
cage to prevent interference with the
right side cover.
Install
Cover and
1. Install the right side cover on the processing
End Cap
module.
2. Install the RSH end cap by sliding the cap to
the rear and engaging the three (3) screws on
the inside of the end cap.
3. Tighten the two (2) Phillips screws.

Note

3 3317 - RSH Test
RSH Service and Support Manual (Version 96770-105) • © 2002, 2008• ARCHITECT, i2000, and i2000SR, are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000,
W4.02 LUI, Panel c 8000 (RSH) Version - 96781-104_1338_2
W4.02 Processing Module Keypad

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Open the right RSH cover and manually move
the carrier transport assembly to the left.
Remove
c 8000 LUI
1. Remove the two (2) screws located under the
Panel
window closeout that secures the LUI mount to
the window closeout.
2. Lift up on the LUI mount to gain access to the
LUI plug and disconnect the plug from the LUI
panel.
3. Loosen the two (2) captive screws located on the
rear of the LUI mount and remove the LUI panel.
Replacement
Install
c 8000
1. Place the LUI panel in the LUI mount and
LUI
secure with the two (2) captive screws
Panel
located on the rear of the mount.
2. Connect the LUI plug to the LUI panel.
3. Install the LUI mount to the window
closeout with two (2)screws located
underneath the window closeout.
1. Close the right RSH cover.
Note
initialization.

P-01 Routine Bay Partition Alignment Version - 96782-103_835_1

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-01 Routine Bay Partition Alignment
Purpose To improve the quality of tray insertion by adjusting the gap between the RSH standard bay Module RSH
partitions.
Materials Partition Align Tool (94193) Time 15
Required min
Preparation
1. The power condition can be either ON or OFF.
2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, or Ready state.
3. Open the top bay door above the bay (on the right side of the RSH).
Verify Bay Partition

Alignment Note
This procedure must first be performed on the extreme right bay.
1. In the tray insertion guide area [1], insert the partition align tool [2] between the left and
right partitions and insert the tool.
2. Verify that as the tool is inserted, it slides into the tray insertion guide smoothly and that
it cannot be moved left and right.
Note
At reference point [3], there is a slight resistance.
If the specification is met, go to Verify Partition Spring Operation.

If the specification is not met, go to Align Bay Partition.
Align Bay Partition

1. Align the bay partition:
If the tool fit is too tight:
Loosen the top screw [4] on the right partition.

Push the partition firmly to the right.
Tighten the screw.
If the tool fit is too loose:
Loosen the top screw [4] on the left partition.

Move the partition to the right as required to achieve a smooth insertion of
the tool.
Tighten the screw.
2. Go to Verify Bay Partition Alignment.

Verify Partition Spring
Operation
1. Insert a sample carrier tray into the bay.
2. Press the tray back toward the processing module and verify that the springs at the rear
of the partitions push the tray forward.
If the springs push the tray forward, go to Align Remaining Partitions.

If the tray does not spring forward, clean the tray guides and repeat the check.
If the tray still does not spring forward, go to Verify Bay Partition Alignment.
Align Remaining
Partitions Note
Once the right partition is properly aligned, it is a reference for the next bay and should
not be adjusted.
1. Repeat Verify Bay Partition Alignment until all left partitions on all bays meet the
specification.
P-11 ARCHITECT ARM Installation and Verification Version - 96756-111_309_3

P-11 ARCHITECT ARM Installation and Verification
This procedure provides instructions for the installation and verification of the ARCHITECT
Purpose ARCHITECT ARM. Module ARM
Standard Tool Kit 1.5 hrs

Materials ARCHITECT ARM (LN 8C95-88, -89 or -90) Time
Required
Preparation
1. Verify the power switch on the ARCHITECT ARM
is in the OFF position.
Connect the
Water Source to
1. Connect the white connector of the 10 ft (3.05 m)
ARCHITECT ARM
polyethylene tubing (white tubing - in shipping box)
Module
to the deionized water source in the laboratory.
2. Flush the DI water line to a drain for two minutes.
3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the water
inlet port. [3]
Note
Connector [2] is not used during normal
ARCHITECT ARM operation. It is used only
during decontamination.
Waste Tubing
Connections
1. Connect the white connector of the other 10 ft
(3.05 m) polyethylene tubing (white tubing - in
shipping box) to the waste 1 (pressurized) drain
port. [4]
2. Connect the right-angled quick disconnect fitting of

the polyvinyl chloride (clear tubing - in shipping
box) tubing to the waste 2 (gravity) port. [5]
3. Connect the waste lines.
If connecting the two waste lines to a floor

drain, continue with Step4.
If connecting the two waste lines to the

waste pump, go to P-12 External Waste
Pump Installation and Verification. Return to
this procedure when completed.
4. Ensure the two waste tubing lines run downhill to

the drain.
If the lab has a floor drain, run both lengths

of waste tubing to the floor drain.
To prevent accidental flooding caused by

tubing movement, it is recommended that
the waste 1 pressurized drain tubing be
fastened to the drain.
Route the waste 2 gravity drain tubing

downward.
Note
The waste 2 drain must be
atmospherically vented.
Caution
Verify waste connections are properly
installed.
5. Perform procedure P-56 ARCHITECT ARM
Decontamination, then continue with installation.
Connect
ARCHITECT ARM
1. Locate the 20 ft (6.09 m) polyurethane tubing with
Buffer Output to
gray disconnects on each end (92484 Tubing,
Processing
ARCHITECT ARM to Instrument).
Module Buffer
Inlet 2. Connect one end of the tubing to the wash buffer
outlet port [1].
3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the buffer

inlet port on the rear of the processing module.
Note
Refer to procedure P10 for use of the ARM
with IA multimodule systems. (i4000,
i4000SR, i6000, i8000)
RS-232
Connection
1. Connect the RS-232 serial cable from the
ARCHITECT ARM to the SCC.
i2000 or i2000SR - connect the provided

RS-232 serial cable from the port on the
ACHITECT ARM [6] to:
Edgeport - Port 2 on the serial

expansion
DIGI - connect directly to P5.
i1000SR - use the DB25-DB9 cable

supplied with the i1000SR ARM Adapter Kit.
Connect the cable from the DB25 port on
the ARCHITECT ARM to the DB9 connector
labeled ARM on outside of the SCC
Interface Panel. (If the DB25-DB9 cable is
not long enough, use the long cable
supplied with the ARM, then use the DB25 -
DB9 cable as an adapter.)
Note
Installation instructions for the ARM
Adapter Kit are found in the
Installation section ofthe i1000SR
Service and Support Manual.
Connect Power
Note
The ARCHITECT ARM module can be connected
to the same utility service as the ARCHITECT
system, but on a different branch circuit or fuse.
1. Install the appropriate fuse (fuses are taped to

power cords) in the ARCHITECT ARM power entry
module. [1]
2. Install the power cord into the power entry
module. [4]
3. Connect the ARCHITECT ARM module to a
properly grounded electrical outlet using the
appropriate power cord (2 versions - in shipping
box).
Calibrate Level
Sense
1. Turn the ARCHITECT ARM power on at the power
entry module.
2. Press the Stop key. [1]
The red indicator beneath the Stop key

illuminates. [2]
3. Connect the buffer pickup assembly sensor cable

to the console. [3]
Note
Allow the assembly to hang freely.
4. Press the Bottle Load key. [4]
The amber indicator beneath the Bottle Load key

flashes. [5]
Load
Concentrated
1. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from
Wash Buffer
the new concentrated wash buffer cubitainer.
Container
2. Place the buffer pickup assembly into the
cubitainer and tighten the fitting.
Note It may be necessary to disconnect the pickup

assembly cable and tubing connectors [2], [1] to
get into the container. This will not affect sensor
calibration. Reconnect the cable and tubing when
the assembly is in place.
3. On the keypad, press the Bottle Load [5] key. The
following occurs:
The Stop indicator light [6] is no longer

illuminated.
The amber Bottle Load indicator [7]

illuminates briefly while the sensor
automatically recalibrates to full.
The Flush indicator [8] illuminates briefly.
The green Start indicator [9] illuminates

steadily.
Note
The Start indicator [9] flashes green
when buffer is flowing to the wash
buffer reservoir.
Configure System
Software
1. Log in as FSE.
2. Select System and Configuration.
3. With the System Settings radio button selected,

select Reagents - Supplies.
4. Select F6 - Configure.
5. Under IA Supply Options, change Wash Buffer

Transfer from Manual to Automatic.
6. Select Done.
7. Verify on the System Snapshot screen that ARM

displays.
Fill Buffer
Reservoir
1. If buffer transfer does not automatically begin for
this first fill, select F2-Update Supplies (from the
Supply Status screen).
2. In the Wash Buffer field, select Add Buffer.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the buffer reservoir on the processing

module is filling, then press the ARM STOP key if
the instrument is new. Complete the fill after
instrument decontamination.
Note
If the ARM is a replacement for an existing
instrument, let the buffer reservoir fill
completely.
Verification
1. Once the ARCHITECT ARM shuts down, verify
that the buffer reservoir is full.
2. Visually inspect the area around the
ARCHITECT ARM and the buffer valve on the
processing module for leaks.
3. Visually verify that the wash buffer reservoir on the
processing module is full.
P-12 External Waste Pump Installation and Verification Version - 201985-104_678_1

P-12 External Waste Pump Installation and Verification
Purpose To provide instructions for the installation and verification of the external waste pump. Module Waste Pump
Materials Required None Time 1.5 hrs
Preparation
1. Verify that the power switch on the external
waste pump is in the OFF position.
Position Waste
Pump
1. Place the waste pump as close to the back
of the processing module as possible.
Connect Waste
Pump to Back of
1. Cut a piece of the waste tubing long enough
Processing Module
to run from the back of the processing
module to one of the four (4) inlet ports of
the waste pump. [2]
2. Install one end of the tubing to the
processing module waste port. [1]
Note
Use a cable tie or clamp to secure
the tubing to the barb fitting.
3. Install a quick connect fitting (14603) to the

other end of the tubing (secure the tubing to
the barb fitting with a cable tie or clamp). [3]
4. Connect this fitting to one of the four (4)
inlet ports of the waste pump. [2]
Note
This tubing must be below the level
of the waste port of the processing
module.
Connect Waste
Pump Outlet to
1. Cut enough of the remaining tubing to run
Drain
from the waste pump outlet to the drain.
2. Install a quick connect fitting to one end of
the tubing (secure the tubing to the barb
fitting with a cable tie or clamp).
3. Connect this fitting to the waste pump
outlet. [1]
4. Run the other end of the tubing to the drain.
Note
This tubing should not be over 30'
(9.1m) long or run higher than 8'
(2.4m).
Assemble Tube to
Pipe Thread Note
Connector Perform this Action only if connecting
ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Visual Verification.
1. Cut the existing tube to pipe thread

connector off of the polyethylene tubing
(white tubing from the ARCHITECT ARM
Waste 1 connector).
Note
Verify that the tubing is cut squarely
and remove any burrs.
2. Make a mark [1] on the tubing [2] 0.75

inches (1.9 cm) from the end of the tube.
3. Loosen the nut portion [3] of the connector
(92526-shipped in the pump box) until three
threads are visible.
4. Moisten the end of the tube with water.
5. Push the tube straight through the hole in
the nut on the connector until it bottoms on
the shoulder in the connector. [4]
6. Tighten nut [3] by hand.
Note
Additional tightening should not be
necessary, but 1/4 additional turn
may be added if desired. Over
tightening the nut results in stripped
threads and a fitting that does not
function properly.
Note
A proper assembly does not show
the insertion mark extending beyond
the nut. If the insertion mark is
visible, repeat Step1 -Step6.
7. Assemble the pipe thread pump connector

(92527, shipped in the pump box) to the
assembled connector. [5]
Connect Connector
to Waste Pump Note
Perform this Action only if connecting
ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
1. Connect the connector to one of the four

input connectors on the External Waste
Pump. [2]
Connect Polyvinyl
Chloride (clear Note
tubing from Waste Perform this Action only if connecting
2 connector) to ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
Waste Pump connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
1. Assemble the 3/8 inch barb pump connector

(92529 in pump box) to the clear tubing
(ARCHITECT ARM waste 2).
2. Secure the connector with a hose clamp
(14331-010 in pump box).
3. Connect the connector to one of the four
input connectors on the external waste
pump [2].
Note
Verify the waste tubing line runs
downhill to the pump connector.
Perform Visual
Verification
1. Verify that there are not any male quick
disconnect fittings installed without being
tubed up.
Note
Any unused inlet fittings left
connected to sump pump leak when
the pump is in use.
Verify Waste Pump Switch Positions:

Manual Setting
1. Move the toggle switch to the ON (to the
left) position to verify that the pump starts. ON (left) - Pump is in a manual control mode. The
2. If the pump comes on, move the toggle pump remains on until the operator turns the pump
switch to the AUTO (to the right) position off.
immediately. The pump starts only when the AUTO (right) - Pump turns on as internal floats are
float sensors are tripped. triggered.
OFF (middle)
Note
The pump is designed to run wet. Running
the pump for an extended time without fluid
causes early failure.
Verify Waste Pump

Automatic Setting
1. Perform three flushes on the system
consecutively (maintenance procedure 2130
Flush Fluids) and verify that the pump turns
on and pumps the waste fluid to the drain.
P-13 Tubing Connector Inspection Version - 201985-104_680_1

P-13 Tubing Connector Inspection
Purpose To provide information for use in visual inspection of tubing connectors. Module i2000, i2000SR
Materials Required None Time 5 min
Background
Tubing connectors connect tubing segments to pump ports and pipettor probes. The connectors consist of three parts: tubing, a
translucent plastic ferrule, and a black rubber seal. Small defects in the interface between the components can result in leaks or
other fluidics problems. The cross sectional view below shows how the ferrule and seal work together to create a pressure fitting.
Check for
Bad Seal
1. Closely inspect the translucent ferrule for proper
Seating
seating.
Proper seating [2] - seal is fully inserted in

the ferrule.
Improper seating [1] - seal is not fully
inserted in the ferrule.
Check for
Seal Face
1. Check for any defects at the end of the seal. [1]
Defect
The seal should extend evenly beyond the tubing
and ferrule. [2]
Note
Nicks, cuts, flats or other defects can
prevent proper closure against the pump
port face.
Check for
Extended
1. Verify that the tube does not extend beyond the
Tube
ferrule or seal.
Note
The tubing is relatively non-compressible
and does not close effectively against the
pump port face.
Check for
Recessed
1. Verify that the tube extends so that it is even with
Tube
the end of the ferrule.
Note
In this condition, the seal conforms to the
surface, but rolls and flexes under pressure
because it does not properly support the
sealing face.
Check for
Bad Tubing
1. Verify the tubing is cut squarely.
End Cut
Note
A tube end that is not cut squarely creates
the same situation as a tube that does not
extend far enough or a tube that extends
too far. At some point around the edge of
the tube face, the seal is either
unsupported or does not reach the pump
port.
Check for
Deformed
1. Check for burrs and tears on the tubing end.
Tubing End
Note
Ragged cuts are often the result of using a
dull blade to cut the tubing.
Replacement
1. If any of these conditions are present, replace the
tubing assembly where the damaged tubing
connector is found.
P-15 1Step/2Step Service Test Version - 201985-104_682_2

P-15 1 Step/2 Step Service Test
Electrical and mechanical verification of system prior to control run. i2000, 2000SR
Purpose Module
1 Step/2 Step Service Kit (7-78220-01 Kit) 30 min

Materials Required Time
Log On
Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User the system to operator level of access. To do this,
name field. perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password
field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot
screen lists FSE.
Perform 6200
CLI Terminal
1. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6200 CLI
Simulator
Terminal Simulator.
2. Enter the following command in the User Input
window install_assay D:\Service\941_004.iae
P, and then select Continue.
P, and then select Continue.
P, and then select Continue. (i2000SR only)
5. Enter Q in the User Input window.
6. Select Done.
Order Calibration
1. Order a calibration for 1 Step assay and 2 Step
assay.
2. Order a calibration for 2 Step/STAT assay
using a different carrier than the one used
above. (i2000SR only)
Order Patients
1. Order the following Load list:
1 Step Test - 10 replicates

2 Step/STAT Test - 10 replicates
(i2000SR only)
2 Step/STAT Test - 10 replicates
(i2000SR)
Prepare and load

1 Step /2 Step
1. Fill 1 Step/2 Step reagent bottles 2/3 to 3/4 full
reagent bottles
with tap water.
2. Load reagent bottles into the reagent carousel.
Run Tests
1. Print the Order List Report.
2. Load the samples into the sample carriers.
3. Load the sample carriers.
4. Initialize the processing module, if the status is
not Running.
5. Initialize the sample handler, if the status is not
Running.
Verify Acceptable
Performance
1. Verify that no mechanical errors occur during
the test.
Note
Calibrations will fail and no results are
reported. This procedure only verifies
mechanical functionality.
Remove
1 Step/2 Step
1. Remove the reagent bottles. Discard the tap
Reagent Bottles
water.
2. Rinse the bottles and allow them to air dry.
3. Store in kit for reuse.
Perform 6114
Install/Delete
1. Delete the 1 Step Test, 2 Step Test, and
Assays
2 Step/STAT Test (i2000SR only). The assay
numbers to delete are:
941
942
943 (i2000SR only)
P-17 Manual Bootcode Download Version - 201985-104_671_1

P-17 Manual Bootcode Download
Purpose Provides method for field service to update the boot code for the SH module controller or the PM Module i2000/SH,
module controller as an alternative to using diagnostic procedure 6008 Controller Configuration. i2000SR/SH
Materials Cables, Debug Kit (7-92394-01) Time 20 min
Required
Access
HyperTerminal Debug Cable Connectors
1. Using the debug cables, connect the 9-pin end of the
Windows
cable to the appropriate card cage connector for the
module to be configured (see Debug Cable
Connectors).
2. Connect the 25-pin end of the debug cable to the
corresponding DIGI cable connector debug cable.
Note
Null-modem is required for use of debug cable
with c8000 RSH card cage.
3. From the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE (refer to

P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
4. Select System, then Task Manager.
5. Select New Task and type explorer or select it from
the list.
6. Click OK.
Note
Explorer opens.
7. Minimize the Task Manager window.

8. Locate the Terminals folder in the C:\ drive and
double-click it to open it.
9. Return to the Terminals folder and double-click on
either the iahv.ht (for processing module) or ish.ht
(for SH) to open the desired HyperTerminal window.
iahv.ht communicates with port P7

ish.ht communicates with port P8.
10. Arrange/resize the windows so both are visible.

11. In the HyperTerminal window, press Enter once to
display the prompt (ex., 1> for the processing module
or >0 for the sample handler).
Note
If the prompt does not display, reset the
respective controller board by simultaneously
pressing the two square switches on the
controller board for 1-2 seconds. Use the
HyperTerminal window to monitor the
controller board boot process. If the display
does not occur, check the debug cable
connections. If an error is reported, the
controller board is defective and should be
replaced.
Download
Bootcode
1. Switch (ALT+TAB) to select the Snapshot screen.
Terminal Simulator.
3. Set the terminal to control the appropriate module by
using one the following commands, and then select
Continue:
set_module 0 for the SH

set_module 1 if the i System module is
module 1 (stand alone)
set_module 2, 3, or 4 if the i System module
is module 2, 3 or 4. Verify that the prompt
returns with the correct module number.
4. Enter the following CLI command and then select

Continue.
boot_file rom.hex
The system accepts the command and returns

the module prompt (ex. 1>).
5. Enter Q in the user input window.

6. Select Done.
Reset the
Controller Controller Board Locations
1. Reset the respective Controller Board by
Board
simultaneously pressing the two square switches on
the Controller Board for 1-2 seconds (see Controller
Board Locations).
2. Watch the IAHV or SSH HyperTerminal window and
verify that the rom.hex information [1] is being
downloaded to the Controller.
WARNING
Do not reset or power down the Controller
Board while the bootcode is being updated!
This causes permanent loss of the
Controller Board flash memory contents.
Note
After the Controller Board downloads the
bootcode it reboots itself.
3. Once the reboot has occurred and the i System or

SH module is at the Stopped state, go to Verify
Correct Controller Bootcode Version.
Verify Correct
Controller
Bootcode
Terminal Simulator.
Version
2. Type ish_ver or module_ver as appropriate and then
select Continue.
3. On the line CPU Board Boot Code, confirm that the
boot code version on the first portion of the line
matches the boot code version on the second portion
of the line.
Note
If versions do not match, boot code download
was not successful. Repeat this procedure or
replace the controller board.
P-18 Waste Pump Decontamination Version - 201985-104_644_1

P-18 Waste Pump Decontamination
Purpose This procedure is used to decontaminate the waste pump for service or return. Module Waste Pump
Materials Required 0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite, gloves, disposable towels Time 20 min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Electronics No service of electronics is performed at this time.

Outside Surface Decontamination Only
surfaces
Inside Tub For the purpose of checking floats, gloves are required. If failure analysis / or return to the vendor is
required the steps to decontaminate the tub are:
Empty tub and rinse bottom half of tub with 0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite, allow to air dry, then rinse
with water.
Squirt 0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite on bottom of top housing, allow to air dry, then rinse with water.
Air dry or dry with disposable towels as required.
P-23 Vacuum System Troubleshooting Information Version - 201985-104_650_1

P-23 Vacuum System Troubleshooting Information
Purpose To aid in troubleshooting errors and observed problems related to the vacuum system. Module i2000,
i2000SR
Materials Fittings kit, ARM (7-78175-01) Time 2.0 -
Required Decon kit, ARM (7-78172-01) 3.0 hrs
Vacuum Gauge capable of measuring vacuum in the 0-30" mercury range (example: Fluke PV350
available through the CELL-DYN product line)
6" piece of TYGON tubing with an inner diameter of 3/8"
Note
Follow the suggestions in the ARCHITECT Advisor database prior to performing this procedure.
The following scenarios could indicate a faulty vacuum system:
Error codes, observed problems:
Wash Aspiration errors, error codes 3700-3799.

Vacuum errors, error codes 5300-5349.
Failing 3175 Vacuum System Test, Error 2200, Procedure failed.
Generic assay precision issues.
This procedure focuses on three main categories of vacuum problems:
Vacuum pump is faulty

Vacuum system is leaking.
Vacuum system is blocked/clogged.
Action Steps
Reference
Assemble
Vacuum 1. Locate the decontamination manifold [1]
System from the Decontamination Kit.
Troubleshooting 2. Remove the gray quick-disconnect fitting
Manifold from one of the tubing ends. [2]
3. Locate the white female quick-disconnect
from the ARM Fittings Kit (78175).
4. Install the white female quick-disconnect
to the open tubing end on the
decontamination manifold. [4]
Determine
Vacuum Gauge 1. Determine the vacuum gauge used.
If using a Fluke PV350, go to

Connect Fluke PV350.
If using another vacuum gauge,
go to Connect Standard Vacuum
Gauge to Manifold.
Connect Fluke
PV350 Note
This action is only required when using a
Fluke PV350 Pressure Vacuum Module.
1. Unscrew the gray female quick-

disconnect fitting from the manifold. [1]
2. Install the Fluke PV350 to the middle of
the decontamination manifold where the
gray female quick-disconnect fitting was
previously removed. [2]
Note
This troubleshooting aid can be
hooked up between the vacuum
pump and vacuum filter, vacuum
filter and vacuum accumulator, or
directly to the vacuum pump.
3. Connect the Fluke PV350 to a

multimeter.
4. Set the multimeter to the mV scale (the
Fluke PV350 outputs 0-100mV,
1mv/Unit).
5. Power ON the multimeter.
6. Set up the Fluke PV350 for in Hg [3] and
English. [4]
7. Use the adjustment feature on the Fluke
PV350 and adjust [5] the reading on the
Fluke PV350 to read 0 mV.
Note
Verify that the Fluke PV350 has a
good battery, otherwise it may not
read correctly.
8. Go to Preparation.
Connect
Standard Note
Vacuum Gauge This action is only required when using a
to Manifold standard vacuum gauge.
1. Locate the decontamination tubing from

the ARM Decontamination Kit
(78172). [3]
2. Remove the white male quick-disconnect
from the decontamination tubing.
3. Connect the gray male quick-disconnect
to the gray female quick-disconnect on
the middle of the decontamination
manifold. [4]
4. Connect the other end of the
decontamination tubing to the vacuum
gauge. [5]
Note
This troubleshooting aid can be
hooked up between the vacuum
pump and vacuum filter, vacuum
filter and vacuum accumulator, or
directly to the vacuum pump.
Note
Depending on the vacuum gauge
you are using, other adapters or
clamps may be necessary to
obtain an appropriately sealed
connection.
Preparation
1. Log on as FSE.
Open the Pump

Rack 1. Remove the rear panels on the
processing module.
2. Open the pump rack.
Perform
Vacuum Pump 1. Locate the quick-disconnects connecting
Test the vacuum pump to the vacuum filter.
2. Disconnect the vacuum pump tubing from
the vacuum filter.
3. Connect one end of the vacuum
troubleshooting aid to the vacuum pump
tubing end [1] and leave the other end of
the vacuum aid disconnected.
Note
The quick-disconnect fitting stays
shut when nothing is connected to
it.
4. Perform diagnostics procedure 6200 CLI

Terminal Simulator.
Note
See CLI Commands.
5. In the User Input field, type the command
SET_MODULE x (where "x" is the
required module (1 or 2)), followed by
Continue.
6. In the User Input field, type the command
DIO 25 SET 1, followed by Continue.
7. Listen for the vacuum pump to turn on.
8. Watch the vacuum gauge, and verify that
a vacuum of approximately 20-23"
mercury is achieved (this typically takes
less than 5 seconds).
9. Once the vacuum has stabilized at its
maximum value, type the command DIO
25 SET 0 in the User Input field, followed
by Continue.
the vacuum is bleeding off smoothly (this
typically takes less than 5 seconds).
If the specification is met, continue

with Perform Vacuum Accumulator
Leak Test.
If the specification is not met,
either a bad pump, or a bad
tubing/fitting to the pump is
indicated. Replace components as
required.
Perform
Vacuum 1. Locate the quick-disconnect at the
Accumulator vacuum filter.
Leak Test 2. Connect the free end of the vacuum
troubleshooting aid to the vacuum filter
side [2].
3. At the SCC, in the User Input field, type
the command DIO 25 SET 1, followed by
Continue.
mercury is achieved.
25 SET 0 in the User Input field, followed
by Continue.
7. Watch the vacuum gauge again, and
verify that a vacuum of >18" mercury is
maintained for >60 seconds.
If the test passes, go to Check for

Blockage.
If this test fails, go to Verify
Vacuum Tubing Fits Tightly.
Note
If the test still fails after
performing Verify Vacuum
Tubing Fits Tightly, there
may be a leak at the
vacuum accumulator,
vacuum filter, vacuum
tubing and/or vacuum
vessels. Go to Prepare
Vacuum Tube Plugging Aid.
Verify Vacuum
Tubing Fits 1. Rotate the tubing carefully at the
Tightly connection point to the fitting. If it rotates
easily, remove the tubing from the fitting,
trim off the edge with a box cutter knife,
and reattach the tubing. Verify that the
tubing has a tight fit.
2. Repeat this activity for all the tube
connection points.
3. Go to Perform Vacuum Accumulator
Leak Test.
Prepare
Vacuum Tube Note
Plugging Aid This action is only required for the
Vacuum Vessel Leak test.
Note
This describes one example on how to
plug/seal a tubing end.
1. Locate the black T-fitting [1] from the

ARM Fitting Kit.
2. Locate a piece of tubing about 6"
(~ 15cm) long, with an inside diameter of
3/8" (1cm).
3. Loop the tubing around the two thicker
ends of the T-fitting. [2]
Note
The thinner end of the T-fitting can
now be plugged into an open end
of a vacuum tubing [3] to seal it
off.
Perform
Vacuum Vessel Note
Leak Test This step is only required when the
Vacuum Accumulator Leak test fails.
Note
Begin this test with the vacuum vessel
beside Wash Zone 1.
1. Remove the vacuum tubing [1] (the thick

reinforced tubing) from the vacuum
vessel.
Note
The reinforced vacuum tubing is
usually very hard to get off due to
salt build up and a tight fit. Use
tap water on the tubing connection
to help loosen up the salt build up
around the connection point, prior
to rotating and pulling off the
tubing.
2. Plug/seal the tubing end, using the

plugging aid described in Prepare
Vacuum Tube Plugging Aid, or similar.
3. At the SCC, in the User Input field, type
the command DIO 25 SET 1, followed by
Continue.
Note
See CLI Commands for
information regarding CLI
commands.

mercury is achieved.
25 SET 0 in the User Input field,
followed by Continue.
7. Watch the vacuum gauge again, and
verify that a vacuum of > 18" mercury is
maintained for > 60 seconds.
8. Remove the plugging aid/clamp from the
vacuum tubing end.
9. Reconnect the vacuum tubing to the
vacuum vessel.
If the specification is met (the

vacuum is maintained), the
isolated vacuum vessel is leaking.
Replace the vacuum vessel and/or
solenoid DC driver board, as
appropriate.
If the specification is not met (the
vacuum is not maintained), repeat
Step1 through Step9 for the other
two vacuum vessels, until the
leaking vacuum vessel is located.
Note
If the test fails even after
you have tested all vacuum
vessels, the vacuum tubing
from the vacuum vessels to
the vacuum accumulator
may be leaking.
Replace
Tubing/Connect 1. Replace all the vacuum tubing.
Filter 2. Disconnect the troubleshooting aid from
the vacuum pump and the vacuum filter.
3. Connect the vacuum filter to the vacuum
pump tubing.
Check for
Blockage 1. Visually inspect the areas around the
vacuum tubing connection points, and
vacuum filter, for possible blockage/clogs.
Areas to inspect:
Vacuum tubing to vacuum vessel

connection points.
Vacuum tubing to vacuum
accumulator connection points.
Vacuum filter.
2. Clear any blockage as appropriate.
Check Vacuum
Vessel(s) 1. At the SCC, select Quit, followed by
Operation Done to exit 6200 CLI Terminal
Simulator.
2. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids, and verify
that the pipettors are being properly
washed at the active wash cups, without
flooding or splashing.
3. Perform 1251 Residual Volume WZ 1,
and verify that the RVs do not contain
any fluid.
4. Perform 1252 Residual Volume WZ 2,
and verify that the RVs do not contain
any fluid.
Close Pump
Rack 1. Close the pump rack.
2. Replace the rear panels on the
Processing Module.
Verification
1. Perform diagnostic procedure 3175
Vacuum System Test.
2. Perform procedure P-24 Precision Run.
3. Log off as FSE.
P-24 Precision Run Version - 201985-104_652_4

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-24 Precision Run
Purpose The precision verification is used to verify that the instrument is functioning properly prior to releasing the system to Module i2000,
the customer. i2000SR
The procedure consists of calibrating and running specific assays with multiple replicates to test the pipetting, wash
system, and optical precision of the instrument. The acceptance criterion is listed in the assay package insert and
will determine if the instrument has passed or failed the verification.
Materials Time 90 min

Required TSH (1 set or reagents)
B-hCG (1 set or reagents)
Trigger/Pre-Trigger (1 Bottle each)
Wash Buffer (The wash buffer bottle should be full)
TSH Calibrators (1 box of Calibrator)
B-hCG Calibrators (1 box of Calibrator)
TSH Controls (1 Bottle of low Control)
B-hCG Controls (1 Bottle of low Control)
Assay Disk (1)
Sample Carriers ( Set of at least 4 sequentially numbered carriers)
RV/Sample Cups ( 1 bag each)
Load Bulk
Solutions
1. Verify that all bulk solutions are loaded and have been updated in the
and
supplies screen.
Reagents
2. Load the appropriate reagents. (TSH, B-hCG)
Verify TSB
Status
1. Verify that all required Technical Service Bulletins have been
completed.
Install 6114
Install/Delete
1. Logon as FSE.
Assays
2. Select System Diagnostics.
3. Select the radio button (5) for module 5 (SCC).
4. Select Utilities tab, then select 6114 Install/Delete Assays.
5. Select F5 Perform, then OK followed by Install.
6. Select i2000, Proceed, All Groups.
Note
Enter the appropriate number for the following assays: TSH, B-
hCG (the numbers should be separated by a comma).
Example: 3,11
7. Select Continue, Return to Previous Menu, Return to Main Menu,

Exit, and Done.
Configure
Single
1. At the snapshot screen select SYSTEM,
Analyte
CONFIGURATION. Select QC-Cal settings, QC-Single Analyte.
Control
2. Select TSH and then select Configure F6.
Precision
File Note
Use the arrow button to scroll down if needed.
3. Click on the Drop Down Menu Box next to Lot no:
4. Select NEW LOT and type Service Precision.
Note
Enter the information contained in table below in the New Level
Screen.
5. Select Add Level then select Done.
6. Deselect the previously entered assay.
7. Repeat steps 2-5 for B-hCG.
Perform Run
Initialization
1. Select the SSH and the i2000 processing module on the Snapshot
on
screen.
Processing
2. Select F8-Run.
Module and
Sample Note
Handler To save time, while the processing module is performing the run
initialization, enter calibration and control orders.
Order
Calibration
Note
Gather two consecutively numbered carriers. Consecutively numbered
carriers are required for six point calibration assays.
1. Select ORDERS, CALIBRATION ORDER

2. Type in the Carrier Bar Code ID Number (C) and an unused Position
Number (P).
3. Select Assay TSH, and B-hCG, then select F2-ADD ORDER.
Note
4. Select Exit.
Print the
Order List
1. Print the Order List to determine the minimum sample volume required
and Load
per calibrator.
Calibrators
2. Select Orders from the Snapshot screen.
into the
3. Select Order Status and then select Print F4.
Sample
4. Select Order List Report and then select Done.
Carrier
5. Pipette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups and load in the
correct C/P(carrier/position) per the Order List Report.
Note
The Order List provides the correct amount of calibrator to be
dispensed into each sample cup.
6. Place the Carrier onto the sample loader.
Verify
Calibration
1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and
then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for TSH, BhCG are listed as Active.
Order
Precision
1. Select ORDERS, CONTROL ORDER then select SINGLE ANALYTE. Note
Run
2. Type in the Carrier Bar Code ID Number (C) and an unused Position The Precision Control was created earlier
Number (P) during the Configure Single Analyte Control
3. Select Assay(TSH), Lot(Service Precision), and Level(FSRPrec 1). Activity.
Note
4. Select F5 ASSAY OPTIONS.
Note
In the number of replicates, UNDILUTED box enter 10.
5. Select Done and then select F2 ADD ORDER.

6. Repeat steps 3-6 for TSH. This will create a total of 20 samples for
each assay.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for twice for B-hGC. This will create a total of 20
samples for each assay.
Note
Carrier and position will be automatically assigned when each
order is added.
8. Once all orders have been placed, print the Order List.
9. Select Orders from the Snapshot screen.
10. Select Order Status and then select Print F4.
11. Select Order List Report and then select Done.
Load Low
Controls into
1. Pipette the correct amount of low control for each assay and place the
Carriers
cups in the correct carrier positions, as per the printed Order List.
Note
The Order List provides the correct amount of control to be
dispensed into each sample cup.
2. Place the Carriers into the sample handler.

3. If the modules are not in the Run mode select the SSH and i2000 and
then select F8-Run.
Print QC
Summary
1. Select QC Summary from the Snapshot screen.
Report
2. Select the appropriate module number radio button.
3. Select (highlight) the assays that were run for Service Precision (level-
FSRprec 1).Select Print F4.
4. Verify that the Selected Items radio button is selected. Select QC
Summary Report, then select Done.
Confirm
Precision
1. Confirm the precision results are acceptable using the Total %CV
Data Results
value listed in the appropriate assay package insert.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-28 Power Supply Verification Version - 201985-104_657_1

P-28 Power Supply Verification
Purpose Use to verify the operation of the power supply after repair or replacement. Module i2000, i2000SR
Materials Required Multimeter Time 15 min.
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Verify Voltage
and Frequency
1. Verify the voltage [1] and the frequency [2] connectors are set
Settings
to the correct values.
Note
Failure to perform this step causes damage and/or
incorrect operation of the module.
Connect Power
Cord
1. Connect line cord to the power supply and to the power
outlet.
Power ON
Processing Note
Module The system control center power must be ON with the
Snapshot screen displayed prior to turning on the processing
module for proper initialization.
1. Power ON the Processing Module.
Verify LED
1. Verify the 36v OK and Boost OK LEDs are lit.
2. Verify the +5v, ±12v, 24v, and Boost OK LEDs are lit.
1. Verify the voltage at the test points.
Verify Voltage
Test Points
Verify PM State
1. Verify that the processing module goes to the Stopped state
Test All Off

Switch
1. Power OFF the processing module using the All Off switch in
the front of the module.
Install Panel
1. Replace the back panel of the power supply.
2. Push the back panel downward to lock it to the power supply
chassis.
3. Align the back panel to the four screw slots.
4. Replace the four (4) screws securing the back panel to the
power supply chassis.
Power ON
System
2. Perform Startup procedure.
Verify Vacuum
Pump and
1. Verify that the vacuum pump turns on during startup.
Refrigerator
2. Verify that the refrigerator is running by opening the top cover
and verifying that cold air is blowing from the cooler duct.
3. Verify that the heater card LEDs indicate that the heaters are
powered and heating.
Verify Ion Fan

(i2000 only)
1. Verify that the ion fan is running and that the ion probe LED
in the hopper is lit.
Verify LED
Function
1. Verify the 36v LEDs are lit.
2. Verify the +5v, +/-12v, and 24v LEDs are lit.
3. Verify that the PM goes to the Ready or Warming state.
Temperature
Test
1. Perform 3520 Temperature Status.
P-37 Card Cage Fan Filter Cleaning Procedure Version - 201985-104_713_1

P-37 Card Cage Fan Filter Cleaning Procedure
Purpose This procedure is used to clean the card cage fan filter. Module i2000, i2000SR
Materials Required Spare Filter from customer's accessory kit Time 5 min
Preparation
1. To perform this procedure you must have a clean dry filter available to put in place of the filter
to be cleaned.
Remove Card
Cage Fan Filter
1. Locate card cage fan filter located under the bottom of the instrument, below the card cage on
the right side, near the front of the instrument.
2. Remove the filter by grasping the ring on the filter, pushing the filter back, and pulling down.
Clean Filter
1. Clean the filter.
If a vacuum source is available, vacuum the normally exposed side of the filter to
remove the dust/lint buildup.
If a vacuum source is not available, locate a large sink and flush water from the back
side until it is clean. Let filter dry for five (5) hours (minimum) before using it in an
instrument.
Install Cleaned
Filter
1. Insert a new or cleaned and dry filter at an approximately 45 degree angle under the card cage,
push up to level, and let it slide forward into place.
P-40 RV Loader Board #6 Calibration Version - 96756-111_262_1

P-40 RV Loader Board #6 Calibration
Purpose Provides calibration instructions and troubleshooting information for Sensor Board #6 used on Module i2000,
the RV Loader assembly. i2000SR
Materials Compressed air Time 15 min
Required
Links
Calibration
Calibration Troubleshooting
Calibration
Preparation
1. Turn ON the power to the processing module.
Note
Calibration may be done prior to
initialization, or in the Offline or Stopped
mode.
Prepare for
Calibration Note
Calibration should be performed during system
installation and repeated yearly after sensor
cleaning (during preventative maintenance).
Note
Sensor life is related to the time the power is
on and the amount of dust that builds up.
1. With processing module power ON, remove

the RV transport shield (A1.11 SHIELD, RV
TRANSPORT).
2. Remove all RVs from the RV Transfer
Assembly.
Note
Remove any RV that may be present at
the insertion point in the process path.
3. Clean the two (2) sensors (load and Insert
points) located near the process path end of
the RV transport.
4. Clean the drop point sensor located at the
right end of the RV transport near the RV
wheel.
Initiate
Calibration Note Calibration Board Location
Do not allow bright light to fall on the sensors
(can cause calibration errors).
1. Locate the calibration switch under sensor

board #6 (located behind the cable connector).
Note
The calibration switch has a normal
position (toward the RV loader wheel)
and a calibrate position (toward the
process path).
2. Ensure that the power LED is ON and all

sensor LEDs are OFF.
3. Move the calibration switch [1] to the calibrate
position (toward the process path) and observe
the three sensor LEDs. [2]
Note
Sensor LEDs are OFF as the board
begins self calibration [3].
Note
Each sensor LED lights as its channel
completes the calibration cycle [4, 5].
The complete sequence should take Calibration LED Sequences
less than one minute.
4. Verify that the yellow cal LED and all green

sensor LEDs are ON [6].
If the calibration is successful, go to

Return to Normal Operation.
If any other combination displays (failed
calibration), go to Calibration
Troubleshooting.
Note
Calibration LED Sequences
represents a calibration phase,
but typical calibrations may occur
too rapidly to see the individual
steps.
Return to
Normal
1. Move the calibration switch back to the normal
Operation
position.
2. Verify that the cal LED and all sensor LEDs
(1, 2, and 3) turn OFF.
3. If any LED other than Pwr remains on, repeat
the calibration process. Go to Calibration
Troubleshooting if a second failure occurs.
Verification
For information on the startup procedure, refer to the
1. Change the status of the Processing Module ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
and Sample Handler from Stopped to Ready instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
by performing P-248 Startup and Shutdown.
2. Log on as FSE.
3. Perform 3140 RV Load/Unload Test.
Calibration Troubleshooting
Calibration
Overview Calibration Failure
1. The calibration was not successful if:
The yellow cal LED did not come ON within

one minute of starting the cycle. [1, 3]
The yellow cal LED is ON and one or more
green sensor LEDs are OFF. [2]
Verify
Sensor Normal Use
1. Remove the RV transport shield (A1.11 SHIELD, RV
Operation
TRANSPORT).
2. Remove the RVs nearest the process path (insertion
point).
3. Verify that the sensors are blocked from stray light,
that there are no obstructions in the sense path or
bits of dirt on the lenses.
Note
The sensor number can be matched to
function with the following listing:
Sensor 1 = Drop Point
Sensor 2 = Load Point
Sensor 3 = Insert Point
4. Move the calibration switch to the normal operation

position (toward the RV loader wheel) and verify that
the three sensor LEDs are OFF.
5. Check the channel operation by alternately blocking
and opening the sensor path with an RV.
6. If the sensor LED for that channel goes ON when
blocked and OFF when open, the sensor channel
function is working.
Repeat
Calibration
1. Attempt a second calibration.
If the second calibration procedure passes,

place the calibration switch back in the
normal position and go to Verification.
If the second calibration attempt fails again on
the same channel, install a new sensor board
#6.
Note
If the calibration fails, but the channel
sensor check passes, the board will
work satisfactorily for a period of time,
but a replacement should be ordered.
There is no further calibration range
available on this channel and it will
begin to produce erratic results as the
LED ages.
P-42 UPS Installation Version - 96756-111_255_1

P-42 UPS Installation
Purpose Follow this procedure to install a TOSHIBA 1400XL Plus Series Uninterruptible Power System Module i2000,
(UPS) on the ARCHITECT i System. i2000SR
Materials Multimeter Time 20 min
Required
Preparation
1. Use the ramp provided to remove the UPS from its
pallet.
2. Place the UPS between the SCC cart and the
process module.
Note
All of the cabling from the SCC, HUB and
modem reach the UPS along with the
power cords from the process module(s) if
placed next to the SCC cart. A power strip
(not included) may be required to
accommodate all peripherals devices.
Measure Site
Power
1. Measure the voltage at the laboratory power
receptacle.
Note
The voltage measured depends on the
standard for the region and the quality of
distribution within the site. Typically, voltage
is 208 VAC, 220 VAC, 230 VAC or 240
VAC. A UPS should not be used to
compensate for poor site wiring and poor
distribution.
2. If the voltage measured is 208 VAC go to Check

UPS Bypass circuit section below.
Prepare for
Input Power
1. Verify that the UPS is disconnected from the site
Configuration
power receptacle.
2. Turn off all circuit breakers on the rear of the UPS.
Caution
Potential shock hazard. The UPS contains
internal batteries that will supply a high
voltage with power off and disconnected.
3. Remove the two (2) front screws and the two (2)
rear screws that secure the top cover, and remove
the cover.
4. Remove the eight (8) screws that secure the left
side cover and remove the cover.
Input Power
Configuration
1. At the internal batteries, use insulated pliers to
disconnect the negative (black) wire [1].
Caution
The batteries have high voltage.
2. Use tape to insulate the battery wire to prevent it

from grounding out.
3. Bleed off the stored voltage in the DC capacitors
(upper right corner) by connecting a volt ohm
meter to the red and black wires of the DC
capacitors. [2]
4. Continue to hold the meter leads until the voltage
decreases close to zero.
5. Remove the transformer input red wire labeled
208v from the MOV circuit board. [3]
6. From the chassis wall [4], find the wire labeled
with the value nearest the measured site VAC
power reading.
7. Cut the tie wrap on the chassis wall and route the
wire to the MOV circuit board. [3]
8. Replace the 208v wire with the appropriate 220,
230 or 240 wire and place it on the MOV circuit
board. [3]
9. Tighten the nut to secure the wire.
10. Use a tie wrap to secure the protective wrap
around the cover that protects the red wire labeled
208V.
11. Sleeve and tie-wrap all voltage selection wires
(that are not being used) to the chassis mount [4]
so they are not loose inside the UPS.
Note
It is normal for a spark to occur in Step12.
12. Using insulated pliers, reconnect the battery

lead [1]
13. Replace all covers.
Set UPS
Voltage
1. At the rear of the UPS, use the switches located at
Output
the communication port [1], to match the output
Power
selection to the input selection setting.
Selection
Check UPS
Bypass
1. Turn ON (up) the 30 amp input breaker. [1]
Circuit
2. The Line [11] and Bypass [12] LED indicators
illuminate after 30 seconds.
Note
If the green LEDs and the yellow alarm
LED do not illuminate, refer to the supplied
user manual.
3. Switch ON the output circuit breaker. [2]

4. Verify that the AC voltage output of the UPS is
approximately 208 VAC.
Note
If the UPS goes into the By-Pass mode, the
FSR may have to re-jumper the instrument
power supply to match the wall receptacle
VAC. Go to Set Power Configuration on
Processing Module.
Turn On
UPS
1. At the front of the UPS, press the ON switch. [8]
2. Verify that at least three battery charge [5] LEDs
(green) illuminate.
Note
Below is a description of the front panel
switches and LEDs
OVERLOAD [1] - (yellow) Indicates that the

UPS is overloaded.
LOAD [2] - (green) Indicates the relative
amount of output load.
BYPASS [3] - (yellow) Indicates UPS is Off
(inverter is bypassed) and output voltage is
from site power.
INVERTER [4] - (green) Indicates when
UPS is ON (inverter is operational).
BATTERY [5] - (green) Indicates relative
percent of battery charge. When site power
is off, the green LEDs indicates amount of
battery charge and relative battery time
remaining.
LINE [6] - (green) Indicates site power and
input breakers are On.
ALARM [7] - (yellow) with audible signal.
Indicates site power is Off or UPS has a
fault. Reset audible signal by pressing
BYPASS switch.
INVERTOR ON [8] - Turns ON inverter.
After a delay of approximately five (5)
seconds the BYPASS indicator extinguishes
and the INVERTER illuminates.
INVERTOR OFF [9] - Output power
supplied by the UPS Battery backup is now
available.
Connect
UPS Power
1. Set each module power configuration to 208 VAC
Outputs
(±10%).
2. Plug the ARCHITECT power cable into the
appropriate UPS rear panel receptacle.
i2000SR - 20 amp
c8000 - 20 amp
ci8200 - 20 amp for each module.
i2000 - 30 amp
i4000, i6000 and i8000 require a UPS for
each module.
3. Turn ON the appropriate 220 VAC circuit breaker.

4. Plug the SCC, monitor, HUB, and modem
assemblies in the 110 VAC receptacles.
5. Turn ON all appropriate breakers
Note
A power strip is required If external waste
pump(s) are used.
Note
Do not plug the printer into the UPS
(excessive current draw and electrical
noise).
Perform
Startup
1. Power ON the SCC and its associated
components.
Note
The SCC must be powered ON before the
process modules.
2. Power ON theprocessing module(s).

and sample handler from stopped to ready,
perform the startup procedure.
4. Verify that the UPS alarm and overload LEDs are
not ON.
5. A yellow label is shipped with user manual. For
future use, take this label and apply it to the UPS
right side panel.
Verification
Note
Note: Verify that the Inverter LED (D) is ON If not
press Inverter ON switch (I) switch.
1. Turn OFF the Input breaker to the UPS for

approximately three (3) minutes (simulates loss of
power).
2. Verify that the battery back-up of the UPS
supports the instrument under test.
3. After the test has successfully passed turn the
input breaker back to ON.
4. Verify that there were no errors as a result of the
instrument running on UPS power.
Note
When the Inverter switch is pressed to ON
mode, the green LEDs on the load level
indicator will come on.
5. At the UPS front cover, press the Inverter OFF

switch.
6. Verify that the UPS switches to BYPASS mode
(the BYPASS LED illuminates).
7. An operation manual comes with the UPS when
shipped. Keep this manual at the customer site
with the UPS (if possible, tape the manual to the
top of the UPS). Troubleshooting information for
the UPS is contained in this manual.
8. To switch back to UPS inverter, press the Inverter
ON switch on the keypad.
P-56 ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination Version - 96756-111_244_2

P-56 ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination
Purpose This procedure is used to decontaminate the ARCHITECT ARM module. Perform this protocol on Module ARCHITECT
an annual basis. ARM
Materials ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination Kit C/N: 7-78172-02 (This kit contains a Decon Manifold, a Time 45 min
Required Decon Jumper Tube, and the tubing and fittings required to replace tubing removed during the
decontamination procedure.)
0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
2 Empty cubitainers or other suitable 5L substitutes
1 to 3 Multimodule tubing kits: 7-96485-01 for each added module of an i4000, i4000SR, i6000 or
i8000 instrument.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Prerequisite
1. Verify that the ARCHITECT ARM cubitainer is
empty or near empty.
Note
Use another 5L or larger container if an
empty cubitainer is not available. Two 5L
or larger containers will be required.
Note
Concentrate remaining in the cubitainer
is discarded after decontamination.
2. Dilute the bleach (10% sodium hypochlorite)

with water at a 1:20 ratio (one part bleach to 20
parts water to make the 0.5% solution).
Caution
Full strength bleach cannot be used for
decontamination.
Disconnect
Tubing for
1. Press the STOP key.
Decontamination
The red indicator beneath the STOP key
illuminates.
2. Disconnect the buffer outlet tube from the ARM

to the instrument. Discard the tube and any
multimodule manifold tubing except for a first
time decontamination.
3. Disconnect and discard the water inlet supply

tubing. Discard this tubing except for first time
decontamination.
Connection Legend:
Diluted Wash Buffer Outlet [1]
Decontamination Port 1 [2]
Water Inlet [3]
Waste1 (pressurized) [4]
Waste 2 (gravity) [5]
RS232 Port [6]
Disconnect
Cables and
1. Disconnect the sensor cable.
Tubing
2. Disconnect the concentrate wash buffer inlet
tubing from the ARCHITECT ARM console.
Connection Legend:
1-Sensor Cable
2-Concentrated Wash Buffer Inlet
3-Decontamination Port 2
Prepare
Cubitainer
1. Fill an empty cubitainer or other suitable
container with 5L (1.32 gal) of 0.5% sodium
hypochlorite solution.
2. Remove the empty cubitainer from the

ARCHITECT ARM and set it on the floor next
to the container with decontamination solution.
The process will empty one container and fill
the other.
3. Place the pickup tube assembly from the empty

container and place it in the decontamination
cubitainer. The tube must be nearly vertical in
the container.
Connect Decon
Manifold
1. Lift the filled decontamination cubitainer into
position on the ARCHITECT ARM.
Note
Verify that the white bracket is
positioned against the pickup tube
assembly, so that the pickup tube is
properly positioned to pickup bleach
solution from the cubitainer as the
cubitainer is emptied.
2. Connect one end of the decon manifold to

Decon Port #2 [2] and the other end to the
concentrated wash buffer inlet port. [1]
Note
Both ports are located on top of the
ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Connect the concentrated wash buffer inlet

tubing to the center of the decon manifold.
4. Connect the sensor cable to the

ARCHITECT ARM.
Connect Decon
Jumper Tube
1. Connect the decon jumper tube to the diluted
wash buffer outlet port [1] and to Decon Port #1
[2].
Note
Both fittings are located on the back of
the ARCHITECT ARM.
Connection Legend:
Diluted Wash Buffer Outlet [1]
Decontamination Port 1 [2]
Water Inlet [3]
Waste1 (pressurized) [4]
Waste 2 (gravity) [5]
RS232 Port [6]
Perform
Decontamination
1. Press the DECONTAMINATION and START
keys at the same time (these keys are next to
each other).
The ARCHITECT ARM begins pumping

the bleach solution through the fluidics
system and into the drain.
The first decontamination indicator
flashes.
When bleach reaches the drain, and the
system is filled (about three (3) minutes),
the ARCHITECT ARM stops pumping
and incubates (approximately 15
minutes).
2. When the amber LED illuminates, connect the

new water inlet tubing.
3. Remove the concentrated wash buffer inlet
tubing from the decon manifold.
4. Disconnect the electrical connection of the
concentrate sensor assembly.
5. Remove the decontamination cubitainer and
any remaining bleach solution from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
6. Discard any remaining bleach solution and the
cubitainer, if used. Rinse any other container in
deionized water to remove the bleach. Rinse
the pickup tubing assembly and flush the
interior tubing with deionized water.
7. Press the DECONTAMINATION key.
The ARCHITECT ARM pumps water

through the fluidics and into the drain
(flushes the bleach).
The first decontamination indicator turns
off as the second decontamination
indicator flashes.
When water reaches the drain, and the
system is flushed (about 15 minutes),
the ARCHITECT ARM stops pumping
and the amber light illuminates.
8. Press the STOP key.
Discard and
Replace Used
1. Disconnect both the decon jumper tubing and
Items
decon manifold. Discard all items.
2. Connect the new buffer outlet tubing (reconnect
original tubing for first time decontamination)
from the ARM to the instrument. Use
multimodule tubing kits 7-96485-01 as
necessary for reconnecting to multimodule
systems.
3. Remove the concentrate sensor assembly from
the Decontamination Kit.
4. Connect the electrical connection of concentrate
sensor assembly to the ARCHITECT ARM.
Caution
Do not insert the concentrate sensor
assembly into the cubitainer at this time.
Refill and Verify

Operation
1. Press the BOTTLE LOAD key (next to the
STOP key). The bottle load indicator flashes.
2. While the bottle load indicator flashes,
disconnect the sensor assembly from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from
the new container of concentrated wash buffer.
4. Place the concentrated wash buffer tubing
assembly into the cubitainer.
5. Twist the fitting to tighten.
6. Place the container into position on the
ARCHITECT ARM and verify that the white
bracket is near the tubing assembly.
7. Reconnect the sensor cable and supply tubing
quick-disconnect fitting to the
ARCHITECT ARM.
8. Verify that the instrument wash buffer reservoir
is filled without error when requested through
the Supply Status screen on the SCC.
Note
The sensor automatically recalibrates
during this process.
P-69 Top Cover Switch Verification Version - 96756-111_242_1

P-69 Top Cover Switch Verification
Purpose This procedure is used to verify proper operation of the top cover switch to prevent error Module i2000,
messages. i2000SR
Materials None Time 15 min
Required
Verify Top Cover

Switch
1. Verify that the system is in Running status, that the top covers are closed and not bypassed
in the System configuration.
2. Push up and down lightly on the top covers to verify that the switches do not open and
cause an error to occur.
3. If the switch disengages, examine the switch and adjust it to ensure positive engagement
with the top cover.
P-70 Setting LAS LLS Gain Software Parameter (i2000) Version - 96756-111_241_1

P-70 Setting LAS LLS Gain Software Parameter (i2000)
Purpose This procedure is used to verify proper operation of the top cover switch to prevent error Module i2000
messages.
Materials None Time 15
Required min
Log On as
FSE
1. Select Log On F2 from the Snapshot screen.
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name
field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password
field.
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Open Windows
NT Explorer
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the System
menu.
2. From the drop down menu, select Task
Manager.
3. Select the New Task button from the Windows
NT Task Manager window.
4. Type Explorer in the Create New Task window.
5. Click on OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Windows NT
Explorer opens.
Open the
LAS.CAL File
1. In Windows NT Explorer, double -click on the
C:\IPLS\IAHV\SYSTEM.
2. Locate the file LAS.CAL, and double-click on it
to open the file.
Note
If the file does not open automatically,
select either WORDPAD or NOTEPAD
from the Open With scroll-down menu,
followed by OK.
Set the LAS

LLS Gain
1. Locate the column labeled Output Gain. [1]
Software
2. Use LAS LLS Output Gain to determine the gain
Parameter
required (dependent on the distance between the
sample probe and the antenna board, at the
aspiration position).
3. Edit the gain value (from the table) for the
sample pipettor at the LAS track location.
4. Record the gain value for the sample pipettor at
the LAS track location in the column to the right.
5. Save the changes by selecting File, followed by
Save.
6. Power OFF the Processing Module.
7. Reboot the SCC computer by simultaneously
pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
8. Wait for the SCC computer to reboot.
9. On the SCC, verify that all modules return to
Stopped status.
LAS LLS Output Gain
Distance Between Probe and Board LLS Gain Value
Inches mm General Track (92940) Hitachi Track (90870)
0.630 16 18 16
0.669 17 20 19
0.709 18 22 22
0.748 19 23 25
0.787 20 25 28
0.827 21 27 30
0.866 22 29 33
0.906 23 30 36
0.945 24 32 39
0.984 25 34 42
1.024 26 35 44
1.063 27 Not Determined 47

P-101 Reaction Carousel Alignment Version - 96721-108_684_1

P-101 Reaction Carousel Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align (mechanically) the reaction carousel after removal or Module c8000
replacement.
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 20
Required Cuvette Alignment Tool (LN 2J93-01) min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Ready status.
2. Log on as FSE.
Preparation
1. Remove the top front cover, the top rear cover, and
the bridge.
Align
Reaction
1. Select the Modules category from the Diagnostics
Carousel
2. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
3. Select 1. Reaction Carousel
4. Select 2. Rotate Reaction Carousel and rotate the
segments until segment 45-30 is located at the
front of the processing module.
5. Remove the cuvette segment 45-30 and replace it
with the Cuvette Alignment Tool.
6. Select L4 Exit and then 1. Home to position the
cuvette alignment tool in front of the light beam.
7. From the rear of the processing module, looking
straight down through the cuvette segment at the
light path [1], verify that the light beam is centered
through the cuvette spacing tabs [2].
If the light beam is centered, go to Step 10.

If the light beam is not centered, go to
Step 8.
8. Select 3. Align and move the reaction carousel

CCW or CW.
9. Select L4 to exit.
10. Select 2. Rotate Reaction Carousel and move the
Cuvette Alignment Tool to the front of the
processing module.
11. Remove the alignment tool and replace it with the
cuvette segment.
12. Exit 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Note
If any adjustment is made to the reaction
carousel, all robotic positions must be
checked to assure alignment.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the top front and top rear covers and the
bridge.
2. Log ON as operator.
P-102 Reagent Center #1 Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96721-108_737_2

P-102 Reagent Center #1 Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed temperature of reagent supply center #1. Module c8000
Materials Required Standard Tool Kit Time 30 min
External Thermometer (LN8C94-88)
Insulated Cup
Ice
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution

1. Verify that the processing module has been
System status.
ON for at least 30 minutes prior to testing.
or Ready status.
Preparation
1. Remove the screw securing the right front
Remove Reagent
Supply Center #1
1. Gently pull the sensor from the front of the
Temperature
reagent supply center housing.
Detector
Note
Do not disconnect the temperature
detector from the connector.
Determine
Temperature of
1. Fill an insulated cup half full of water.
Reagent Grade
2. Attach the removed temperature detector to
Type II Water
the external thermometer probe with a
rubber band and place the probes into the
water.
3. Add ice to cool the water to 5°C ±3°C.
Note
This is the testing temperature for the
detector.
4. Wait for the readings to stabilize.
Determine For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

Temperature of refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Reagent Supply Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection:
Center #1 System diagnostics.
3. Read the temperature status of reagent
supply center #1.
Verify Correct
Temperature
1. Verify that the reagent supply center #1
Reading
temperature is within ±0.2°C of the reading
of the external thermometer in the water.
If it is correct, go to Prepare for

Operation.
If it is incorrect, continue with Remove
Pump Door.
Remove Pump
Door
the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
of the front right access panel. [2]
2. Loosen the two (2) screws [3] at the bottom
of the panel, and remove the access
panel. [2]
Remove Card
Cage Front
1. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews securing
Cover
the card cage front cover and remove the
cover.
Adjust VR1
2. On the AC/DC controller board, turn VR1
(potentiometer) clockwise to raise the
displayed temperature and counter-clockwise
to lower the displayed temperature.
Note
Update the screen after each
movement of VR1 to see the current
reading.
3. Continue adjustment until the displayed

temperature is within ±0.2C of the actual
temperature.
Install Card Cage

Cover
1. Install the card cage cover and secure with
four (4) thumbscrews.
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
processing module with four (4)
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
Prepare for
Operation
1. Remove probes from the water.
2. Remove rubber band from probes.
3. Place the temperature detector back into
4. Replace all covers and close all doors.

Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed temperature of Reagent Supply Center #2. Module c8000
External thermometer (LN8C94-88)
Insulated Cup
Ice
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Preparation For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

System status.
or Ready status.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Remove
Temperature
1. Locate temperature detector through the
Detector
access panel removed in the previous step.
Reagent Supply
The temperature detector is located on the
Center #2
front right side of the supply center.
3. Cut any wire ties to allow access to
temperature detector
Note
Determine
Temperature of
Reagent Grade
Type II Water
the external thermometer probe with a rubber
band and place the probes into the water
3. Add ice to cool the water to 5°C ±3°C. This is
the temperature that the detector must be
tested at.
4. Wait for readings to stabilize.
Determine For further information on performing diagnostic

Temperature of procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Reagent Supply Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Center #2 Subsection: System diagnostics.
2. Perform 3525 Temperature Status
supply center #2.
Compare
Temperature
1. Reagent supply center #2 temperature must
Readings
be within ±0.2°C of the reading of the
external thermometer in the water.
If it is correct, go to Install
Temperature Detector Reagent Supply
Center #2.
If not correct, continue with Remove
Pump Door.
Remove Pump
Door
the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
panel. [2]
Remove Card
Cage Front
Cover
cover.
Adjust VR2
Note
reading.

temperature.
Install Card
Cage Cover
Install Front
Right Access
1. Secure the front right access panel to the
Panel
processing module with four (4) screws.
Install Pump
Door
Install
Temperature
Detector
Reagent Supply
3. Gently insert the temperature detector in the
Center #2
right front of the reagent supply center
housing.
Install Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
Prepare for
Operation
P-104 Sample Carousel Temperature Detector Version - 96721-108_751_2
Adjustment
P-104 Sample Carousel Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed temperature of Sample Carousel. Module c8000
Insulated Cup
Ice
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Prerequisite 1. Verify that the processing For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
module has been ON for at least Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
30 minutes prior to testing.
in Stopped or Ready status.
Preparation 1. Remove the screw securing the
left front deck and remove the
deck.
Note
It is not necessary to
disconnect the cables on
the left front deck. There
is enough service loop to
set the deck aside.
Remove 1. Remove the temperature

Sample detector from the sample
Carousel carousel assembly.
Temperature Note
Detector Do not disconnect the
temperature detector from
the connector.
Determine 1. Fill an insulated cup half full of

Temperature of water.
Water 2. Attach the removed temperature
detector to the external
thermometer probe with a rubber
band and place the probes into
the water.
3. Add ice to cool the water to 10°C
±5°C. This is the temperature
that the detector must be tested
at.
Determine 1. Select the As Needed category For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to
Temperature of from the Maintenance screen the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
Sample under the system icon. Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
Carousel 2. Perform 3525 Temperature
Status.
3. Read the temperature status of
the sample carousel.
Compare 1. Sample carousel temperature
Temperature must be within ±0.2°C of the
Readings reading of the external
thermometer in the water.
 If it is correct, go to
Prepare for Operation.
 If not correct, continue
with Remove Pump Door.
Remove Pump 1. Remove the two (2) screws
Door securing the pump center (center
front) door and remove the door.
Remove Front 1. Remove the two (2) screws [1]
Right Access from the top of the front right
Panel access panel. [2]
2. Loosen the two (2) screws [3] at
the bottom of the panel, and
remove the access panel. [2]
Remove Card 1. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews

Cage Front securing the card cage front
Cover cover and remove the cover.
Adjust VR3 1. Disconnect the MECH LED
cables from the SMC board and
the AC/DC controller board.
2. On the AC/DC controller board,
turn VR3 (potentiometer)
clockwise to raise the displayed
temperature and counter-
clockwise to lower the displayed
temperature.
Note
Update the screen after
each movement of the
potentiometer to see the
current reading.
3. Continue adjustment until the
displayed temperature is within
±0.2C of the actual temperature.
Install Card 1. Install the card cage cover and

Cage Cover secure with four (4)
thumbscrews.
Install Front 1. Secure the front right access
Right Access panel to the processing module
Panel with four (4) screws.
Install Pump 1. Install the pump center (center

Door front) door with two (2) screws.
Install Sample 1. Remove probes from the water.
Carousel 2. Remove rubber band from
Temperature probes.
Detector 3. Install temperature detector into
the sample carousel assembly.
Prepare for 1. Install left front deck cover and

Operation secure with one (1) screw.
Note
Ensure that the cables to
the switches are placed
behind the sample
carousel bar code reader.
If the cables are placed in
front of the bar code
reader, read errors occur.
2. Close all doors.
P-105 Internal Instrument Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96721-108_740_2

P-105 Internal Instrument Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed Internal c 8000 processing module Module c8000
Temperature.
Required External thermometer (LN8C94-88) min
50mL beaker
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution

System status.
or Ready status.
Remove
Temperature
Detector for Water
Bath Heater
2. Loosen the screw on the clamp [2] securing
Assembly
the detector [1] at the base of the heater
assembly and slide the detector to the left
to remove.
3. Do not disconnect the temperature detector
from the connector.
Determine
Temperature of
1. Fill a beaker with 50mL of room
Water
temperature water.
the external thermometer probe with a
rubber band and place the probes into the
water.
Determine Internal For further information on performing diagnostic

c 8000 Processing procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Module Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Temperature Subsection: System diagnostics.
icon.
3. Read the status of the instrument internal
temperature.
Compare
Temperature
1. Internal Instrument temperature must be
Readings
within ±0.2°C of the reading of the external
thermometer in the water.

Operation.
Pump Door.
Remove Pump
Door
remove the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
panel. [2]
Remove Card
Cage Front Cover
cover.
Adjust VR4
SMC board and the AC/DC controller
board.
2. On AC/DC controller board, turn VR4
displayed temperature and counter-
clockwise to lower the displayed
temperature.
Note
movement of the potentiometer to
see the current reading.

temperature.
Install Temperature
Detector for Water
1. Slide the detector [1] in the clamp [2] on
Bath Heater
the base of the heater assembly and
Assembly
tighten the screw on the clamp to secure
the detector.
Install Card Cage
Cover
Install Front Right

Access Panel
Install Pump Door
Prepare for
Operation
3. Place the temperature detector back in the
clamp and secure the clamp.
P-106 Water Bath Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96721-108_730_2

P-106 Water Bath Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed Water Bath Temperature. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Prerequisite
or Ready status.
Perform 3526 For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

Check Water refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
Bath 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System
Temperature diagnostics.
2. Perform 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature.
Note
Allows for correct positioning of the
temperature probe in the water bath.
Place Probe
in Water Bath
1. Place the probe from the external
thermometer into the water bath in the
position specified by 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature.
2. Wait at least 1 minute for readings to
stabilize.
Read status
of Water Bath
1. Using 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature
Temperature
read the status of the water bath temperature.
2. The reading should be within ±0.1°C of the
reading on the external thermometer.

Operation.
If the difference is more than ±0.1°C
go to Remove Pump Door.
Remove
Pump Door
the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
panel. [2]
Remove Card
Cage Front
Cover
card cage front cover and remove the cover.
Adjust VR5
Note
movement of the potentiometer to see
the current reading.

temperature.
Install Card
Cage Cover
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
Install Pump
Door
Prepare for
Operation
1. Complete 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature and remove the external
thermometer probe.
3. Close all doors.
P-107 Reagent Supply Center #1 Bar Code Reader Alignment Version - 96721-108_742_1

P-107 Reagent Supply Center #1 Bar Code Reader Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the 2D Bar Code Reader for Reagent Supply Center #1. Module c8000
2D Bar Code Reader Alignment tool 93489
I-400 Bar Code Programing Labels 95097
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution

System status.
Ready status.
2. Log on as FSE.
Preparation
1. Remove the one (1) screw securing the right rear
2. Remove Reagent Supply Center #1 cover.
3. Remove reagent segments and store in
appropriate refrigerator.
Place 2D
bar code
1. Select the Modules category from the
reader in
blink mode.
3. Select 7 Reagent Supply Center #1.
4. Place the Set Defaults bar code on the bar code
programming label set in front of the 2D bar code
reader.
5. Select 5 BCR Read and touch L1 to scan label
and to put the reader into blink mode.
Note
In the blink mode the laser beam is on
continuously.
Place R1
BarCode
1. Place R1 Bar Code Alignment Tool over bar code
Alignment
window [1] and center hub [2] of supply center.
Tool.
Bar Code
Beam
1. The bar code beam should be centered on the
Observation.
vertical lines on the outer [1] and the inner
plate [2] of the alignment tool [3]. The beam
should also be evenly spaced on the horizontal
lines on the outer plate [1].
Align 2D
Reader.
1. Use the three (3) screws [2] on the base of the
2D bar code reader mounting bracket to center
the beam vertical.
2. Use the three (3) screws [1] on the side of the 2D
bar code reader mounting bracket to center the
beam horizontally.
3. Once the beam is adjusted correctly, scan the
bar codes on the label set in the correct order.
Note
This turns the blink mode off.
4. Remove the bar code alignment tool and exit bar

code read by selecting L4.
A1
Alignment
1. Place reagent segments into the reagent supply
center.
2. Exit bar code read by selecting L4.
3. Select 4 BCR Position A1.
4. Place the "Set Defaults" bar code on the bar
code programming label set in front of the 2D
barcode reader.
5. Select 5 BCR Read and touch L1 to scan label
and to put the reader into blink mode.
6. Place a blank reagent cartridge with a vertical
line drawn on the center of the end facing the
reader into position A1,
cartridge in position A1.
8. If it requires alignment, select 3 Align Outside.
Then step CW or CCW until beam is centered.
D1
Alignment
1. Place the D (center) reagent segment into the
reagent supply center.
2. Select 9 BCR Position D1.
3. Place a blank reagent cartridge with a vertical
line drawn on the center of the end facing the
reader into position D1.
cartridge in position D1.
5. If it requires adjustment select 8 Align Inside.
Then step CW or CCW until beam is centered.
6. Once the beam is adjusted correctly, scan the
bar codes on the label set in the correct order.
Note
Test Bar
Code
1. Using 1101 Robotics Test Tool ensure that the
Reader
bar code reader is able to read reagent labels.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the right rear deck and secure with one (1)
screw.
2. Install Reagent Supply Center #1 cover.
3. Log on as Operator.
P-108 Reagent Supply Center #2 Bar Code Reader Alignment Version - 96721-108_743_1

P-108 Reagent Supply Center #2 Bar Code Reader Alignment
Perform this procedure to align the 2D Bar Code Reader for Reagent Supply Center #2. c8000
Purpose Module
Standard Tool Kit 45 min

Materials Required 2D Bar Code Reader Alignment tool 93489 Time
I-400 Bar Code Programing Labels 95097
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution

1. The processing module must be in Stopped or Ready
status.
2. Log on as FSE.
Preparation
1. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews securing the reaction
carousel rear cover and remove cover.
2. Do not power OFF the processing module.
Remove 2D
BCR
1. Remove the one (1) screw [3] securing the lamp terminal
block and remove terminal block from bar code reader
bracket [2].
Note
Removal of lamp wires from terminal block should
not be necessary.
2. Remove the three (3) screws securing the BCR mounting

bracket [2] to the standoffs.
3. Lift the BCR assembly off the standoffs.
4. Do not disconnect the BCR plug [1] from the BCR.
Note
There should be enough of a service loop in the
cable to allow the bar code reader assembly to be
placed on the rear closeout.
Note
It is recommended that a padding be placed
between the reader assembly and the rear
closeout to prevent damage.
Place 2D
bar code
reader in
blink mode.
3. Select 8 Reagent Supply Center #2.
4. Place the "Set Defaults" bar code on the bar code
programming label set in front of the 2D bar code reader.
5. Select 5 BCR Read and touch L1 to scan the label and
to put the reader into blink mode.
Note
In blink mode, the laser beam is on continuously.
Install R2
bar code
1. Remove mirror assembly from bar code reader mounting
alignment
bracket and install bar code alignment tool [1] on
tool one
mounting bracket with one of the screws removed from
the mirror mount.
2. The bar code beam should align with the vertical line on
the alignment tool. To adjust the vertical alignment
loosen the two (2) screws [3] on the top of the mounting
bracket and rotate reader left or right until centered and
tighten screws.
3. Once the vertical alignment is correct verify that the
beam is evenly spaced horizontally on the alignment tool.
If not loosen the four (4) screws on the side of the reader
assembly and rotate reader horizontally until centered.
Once alignment is correct tighten the screws on the side
of the reader assembly.
4. When vertical and horizontal alignments are correct,
remove alignment tool one and install mirror assembly.
Install R2
bar code
1. Install the R2 bar code alignment tool two on the top of
alignment
the reader mounting bracket using screws removed
tool two
during removal of the reader assembly.
2. The bar code beam should be vertically aligned with the
vertical lines on the inner plate [1] and the outer plate [2].
3. If beam is not aligned with both vertical lines loosen the
screw [3] in top of the mirror and rotate the mirror to align
the beam. If beam alignment can still not be achieved,
loosen the two (2) screws [4] on the mirror mounting
bracket and move mirror toward the alignment tool or
away from the tool.
4. Once alignment has been achieved, tighten screws and
then remove alignment tool.
5. Scan the bar codes on the label set in the correct order.
Note
6. Exit bar code read by selecting L4.
Install 2D
reader
1. Place 2D reader assembly [2] onto the three (3) standoffs
and secure.
2. Reinstall lamp terminal block.
Segment
read
1. Select 3 BCR Position A1.
2. Observe the bar code reader beam through the bar code
window from behind the module as it reads the reagent
segments. The beam should be centered in the center of
the segment bar code label.
3. If it is not aligned correctly small corrections can be made
to the bar code home position.
4. If the beam is still not centered on the segment bar code
label return to Install R2 Bar Code Alignment Tool one.
Test Bar
Code
1. Using 1101 Robotics Test Tool ensure that the bar code
Reader
reader is able to read reagent labels.
Prepare for
operation
1. Exit 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
thumbscrews.
3. Log On as Operator.
P-109 Sample Wash Cup Position Alignment Version - 96721-108_744_1

P-109 Sample Wash Cup Position Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align (mechanically) the Sample Wash Cup to Sample Probe. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer

to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
Stopped or Ready status.
2. Log On as FSE.
Verify
Sample
1. Manually move the sample pipettor
Pipettor
through the sample wash cup to ensure
Sample
that probe passes through the cup without
Wash Cup
contacting the cup.
Perform 1124
Wash Cup
1. Select the Fluidics / Wash category from
Alignment
the Diagnostics screen under the system
icon.
2. Perform 1124 Wash Cup Alignment.
Note
sample probe for alignment of the
wash cup.
Adjust
Sample
1. Loosen the screws on the base of the
Wash Cup
sample wash cup and center the wash cup
under the sample probe.
Note
Ensure that the probe does not
contact the wash cup.
2. Tighten the screws on base of sample

wash cup once wash cup is in position.
Perform 1120 For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer

Sample to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
Pipettor Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
Calibration
icon.
2. Perform 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration.
P-110 Degasser Cannister Draining Version - 96721-108_745_1

P-110 Degasser Cannister Draining
Perform this procedure to remove fluid from the degasser unit canister. c8000
Purpose Module
Standard Tool Kit. 1.0 hr

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite
For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System
1. The processing module must be in Stopped or Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Offline status. Subsection: System status.
Preparation
processing module).
2. Remove the left and right rear covers.
Remove
Degasser
remove the brace.
2. Disconnect the drain tubing [1] from the refrigerator.
way.
5. Disconnect the cables DEGA and DEG from the
degasser.
6. Remove the two (2) screws securing the degasser
assembly to the processing module frame.
7. Remove the degasser by sliding it out of the rear of
Remove
Canister
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing [2] from the front of
the canister.
canister bracket to the front of the degasser unit.
4. Slide the canister out of the degasser unit.
Empty
Canister
1. Use a marker to make a line across the canister
Fluid
and canister lid. [1]
Note
This aids in the lid alignment during
reassembly.
2. Pry open the canister lid [2] using a thin flat head

screw driver.
Note
Be careful to not damage the canister or
canister lid.
3. Empty the fluid from the canister. [3]
Close
Canister
1. Use the mark to align the lid and canister [1].
Lid
2. Press down on the lid until it is closed and seated
completely [2] on the canister.
Install
Canister
1. Slide the canister into the degasser unit.
3. Connect the vacuum tubing [2] to the front of the
canister.
canister bracket to the front of the degasser unit.
Install
Degasser
degasser.
the clamps
4. Connect the drain tubing [1] to the refrigerator.
6. Secure the refrigerator tubing to the degasser
frame with one tie-wrap.
Prepare for
Operation
Note

sample handler from Stopped to Ready, perform
5. Check for leaks.
6. Install the left and right rear covers.
Verification
1. Verification is performed during Replacement. No
further verification is required.
P-111 Reagent Wash Cup (R1 and R2) Alignment Version - 96721-108_746_2

P-111 Reagent Wash Cup (R1 and R2) Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align (mechanically) the Reagent Wash Cups to Reagent Probes. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System
diagnostics.
2. Log On as FSE.
Verify Reagent
Pipettor Does Not
1. Manually move the reagent pipettor
Contact Reagent
through the reagent wash cup to ensure
Wash Cup
that the probe passes through the cup
without contacting the cup.
Perform 1124
Wash Cup
1. Select the Fluidics / Wash category
Alignment
system icon.
2. Perform 1124 Wash Cup Alignment.
Note
Allows for correct positioning of
the reagent probe for alignment of
the wash cup.
Adjust Reagent
Wash Cup
1. Loosen the screws on the base of the
reagent wash cup and center the cup
under the reagent probe.
Note
Ensure that the probe does not
2. Adjust as needed.
3. Tighten the screws on the base of the
reagent wash cup once the wash cup is
in position.
Calibrate Pipettor For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System
diagnostics.
icon.
2. Perform 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration or
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration.
Laboratories. c4000, ci4100i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-112 Serial Number Correction for c8000 with QC Preservation Version - 96721-108_747_1

P-112 Serial Number Correction for c8000 with QC Preservation
This procedure allows correction of a serial number on the c8000 without loss of QC data. c8000
Purpose Module
SetQC_Assay Module1SerialNumber ToDEFAULT.bat (file) 30

Materials SetQC_AssayModule1SerialNumberToDEFAULT.sql (file) Time min
Required
Note
Copy the two files from C:\WWCS\Architect\Schematics\c8_files to a floppy disk or a USB
flash drive. Place both files in the same folder.
Verify Module For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT

status System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
1. The processing module must be in the Ready or Offline
status.
Log On As
FSE Note
1. Select F2 - Log on from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. return the system to operator level of access.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen
lists FSE.
Create a
System
1. From the Snapshot screen, select:
Backup
System
Diagnostics
Module 5
Utilities
6009 Log Utilities
Perform
2. Follow the on-line instructions for copying the

database.
3. Select option 2, Copy Database to CD.
4. When complete, label the CD with the instrument serial
number(s) and the date backup was made.
1. From the Snapshot screen, click QC-Cal, then Levey-

Jennings graph.
2. Choose an assay from the c8000 module (1) that
contains data.
3. Click ALT and Print Screen to print graph.
Print Levey-
Jennings
Graph
Open Task
#1 in Task
1. From the Snapshot screen, select System, Task
Manager
Manager, New task.
2. Type CMD, then OK.
Open Task
#2 in Task
1. Select New task.
Manager
2. Type EXPLORER, then OK.
Note
These two windows can be minimized, but must
be kept open.
Insert Media
1. Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive or connect
USB Flash Drive to any open SCC USB port.
Edit Incorrect
Serial Note
Number No data is lost by following this procedure.
1. From the Snapshot screen, select System,

Configuration, Modules.
2. Click F6 Configure.
3. Type in the correct serial number, click Done.
4. Click OK when the following popup message displays:
The system will now reboot for the changes to take

effect. Warning: All previous control information
will be lost.
Note
Only the ARCHITECT software shuts down; the
SCC does not reboot.
1. Using the EXPLORER window, locate the script file

SetQC_Assay Module1SerialNumber
ToDEFAULT.bat on the floppy disk or USB Flash
drive.
2. Double click on the file.
Note
The script executes very quickly.
3. This action writes the following file to the floppy drive or

USB Flash Drive: SetQC_AssayModule1
SerialNumberToDEFAULT.log.
If using a USB flash drive, the files are located
Run Script in Removable Drive F.
File If using a floppy disk, the files are located on
drive A:.
Confirm
Script File
1. To confirm completion of task, locate the file
Written
SetQC_AssayModule1SerialNumberToDEFAULT.log.
Note
The file is located in the same folder as the
script files.
2. Double click on the file. (The file displays in Notepad.)

3. Verify that the file contains the text 1 row affected.
4. Close Notepad.
Shutdown
and Restart
1. From the Shutdown screen, press Ctrl+Alt+Del.
SCC
2. Click Shutdown the computer.
3. Click OK.
4. When the SCC powers off, remove the floppy disk or
USB flash drive from the SCC.
5. Power on the SCC.
6. Wait until the software displays the Snapshot screen.
Confirm New
Serial
1. From Snapshot screen, click System, Configuration,
Number
Modules.
2. Confirm that the corrected serial number displays in
the Module configuration screen.
Confirm
Levey-
1. Print the Levey-Jennings graph printed in Print Levey-
Jennings
Jennings Graph.
Data
Remains on
System
P-113 Mixer (1 and 2) Wash Cup Position Alignment Version - 96721-108_748_1

P-113 Mixer (1 and 2) Wash Cup Position Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align (mechanically) the Mixer Wash Cups to the mixers. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
2. Log On as FSE.
Verify Mixer
Pipettor
1. Manually move the mixer through the
Position
mixer cup to ensure that the mixer
does not contact the mixer wash cup.
Perform
1123 Mixer
Alignment
from the Diagnostics screen under
the system icon.
2. Perform 1123 Mixer Alignment.
Note
Allows for correct positioning of
the mixer for alignment of the
wash cup.
Adjust
Mixer Cup
1. Loosen the screws at the base of the
wash cup and position the wash cup
so that it is centered under the mixer.
Note
Ensure that the mixers do not
2. Once the cup is in the correct

position, tighten the screws at the
base of the wash cup.
3. When adjustment is correct, exit 1123
Mixer Alignment.
P-114 Optics Check Version - 96721-108_749_2

P-114 Optics Check
This procedure checks the A/D mean and range with the shutter open and the shutter closed for all c8000
Purpose sixteen wavelengths. Module
Not Assessed 5 min

Materials Time
Required
Log On
Note
1. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
field. return the system to operator level of access. To
2. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the
field. SCC.
Note
3. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Perform 1008
and Print
1. Select System, Diagnostics, and
Summary
Optics/Temperature.
Report
2. Select 1008 Optics Total Test and F5 Perform.
3. Follow the on screen instructions and perform
3. Optics Shutter Test.
4. When the instruction field displays Select the report
type to create, select Summary.
5. Select 4. Exit.
6. When the instructions field displays Procedure
completed. Select Done (to exit, DO NOT select
Done, select Print (prints the four page summary
report).
7. After the summary report prints, select Done (exits
the procedure).
Evaluate
Results
1. Use the report and evaluate the results.
Note
The summary report provides mean results,
acceptance criteria, and a pass or fail status
for all sixteen wavelengths.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, 2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
P-115 Bulk Solution Weight Sensor Adjustment Version - 96721-108_775_1

P-115 Bulk Solution Weight Sensor Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the bulk solution weigh sensors for minimum volume in the bulk Module c8000
solutions after a repair or replacement.
Required 1 empty ICT Reference (large) bottle min
1 empty alkaline or acid (small) bottle
1 metric ruler
Absorbent Towels
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Preparation
or Ready status.
2. Open the card cage (right front) door and the
supply (left front) door.
3. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference
bottle, alkaline wash bottle, and acid wash
bottle. Wrap each tube with an absorbent
towel.
4. Remove the ICT reference bottle, alkaline
wash bottle, and acid wash bottle from the
Fill Bulk Solution

Bottles
1. Fill the empty ICT reference solution bottle
with 15mm of water. (165mL +/- 10mL).
2. Fill the empty alkaline or acid bottle with
14mm of water (67mL +/- 5mL).
Remove Pump
Door
the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
panel. [2]
Remove Card
Cage Front
Cover
cover.
Access MECH
LED Board
1. Verify that the MECH LED board is visible
from the front left side of the processing
module.
Place bottles on
platform and
1. Place the test bottle on the appropriate
verify LEDs are
platform.
ON
Note
Do not place the intake tubing in the
bottle.
2. Verify the LED on the MECH LED Board is

ON.
ICT reference = Empty Sensor MCC

Warning
Alkaline = Empty Sensor B14 Warning
Acid = Empty Sensor B3 Warning

Verify Weight
Sensor
1. Pipette 11mL of water from the empty ICT
Specification
reference solution bottle.This should lower
the height of the water by 1mm (14mm).
2. Pipette 5mL of water from the empty alkaline
or acid bottle. This should lower the height of
the water by 1mm (13).
3. Verify the LED on the MECH LED board is
OFF.
Note
The specification is for the ICT
reference solution LED to be on for
15mm and off at 14mm. The LED for
alkaline or acid to be on at 14mm and
off 13mm.
If a weight sensor is in specification,

go to Prepare for Operation.
If a weight sensor is not in
specification, go to Adjust Weight
Sensors.
Adjust Weight
Sensors
1. Loosen the nut [1] on the flag adjustment
and turn the screw [2] CW if the LED is OFF
at the upper water volume or CCW if the
LED is ON at the lower water volume.
2. Tighten nut [2] and retest.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Place the ICT reference bottle, alkaline wash
bottle, and acid wash bottle on the weight
sensor platforms.
2. Install the tubing in the ICT reference bottle,
3. Replace all cover(s) and close all doors.
P-117 +5VDC (PS1) Adjustment Version - 96721-108_731_2

Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust +5VDC (PS1) in the Main Power Supply. Module c8000
Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING

2. Log on as FSE.
Preparation
Remove
Pump Door
remove the door.
Remove
Front Right
Access
Panel
access panel. [2]
Remove
Card Cage
1. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews
Front Cover
securing the card cage front cover and
remove the cover.
Measure
+5VDC on
1. Verify that voltage between TP3(+ lead)
DAQ Board
and TP4(- lead) on the DAQ board is
+5.05VDC (±0.05).
If the voltage is correct go to

Install Card Cage Cover.
If the voltage is incorrect, got to
Remove Filter Plate.
Remove
Filter Plate
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1]
securing the filter plate [2] to the front of
the main power supply and remove the
filter plate.
Adjust PS1
+5VDC
1. Locate the +5VDC potentiometer on
PS1. [1]
2. Rotate the PS1 potentiometer until the
voltage is +5.05VDC (±0.05VDC).
Note
Rotate the potentiometer
clockwise to increase the voltage,
counter clockwise to decrease the
voltage.
Note
Do not put excessive pressure on
the potentiometer, This can cause
failure of the device.
Install Filter
Plate
screws. [1]
Install Card
Cage
1. Install the card cage cover and secure
Cover
with four (4) thumbscrews.
Install Front
Right
1. Secure the front right access panel to
Access
Panel
screws.
Install
Pump Door
procedure.
Verification For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to

1. Select the Fuses / Motors category
system icon.
2. Perform 5712 Voltages Test.

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING

2. Log on as FSE.
Preparation
1. Open the pump center (center front)
door.
Remove Front
Middle
Access Panel
panel [3] and loosen the two (2) bottom
screws. [2]
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
sense-AC/DC panel [2] and swing the
panel out.
Remove Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Loosen the three (3) screws securing
Panel Cover
the fluid sense-AC/DC panel cover and
remove the cover.
Measure
+12VDC on
1. Locate AC/DC 2 (CN2) and verify that
AC/DC Driver
the voltage between pin #1(+ lead) and
Board
pin #2(- lead) is +12VDC (±0.3VDC).
If the voltage is correct, go to

Install Fluid Sense-AC/DC Panel
Cover.
If the voltage is incorrect, go to
Open Card Cage Door.
Open Card
Cage Door
Remove
Pump Door
the pump center (center front) door and
remove the door.
Remove Front
Right Access
Panel
access panel. [2]
Remove Filter
Plate
1. Remove the three (3) screws [1]
securing the filter plate [2] to the front
of the main power supply and remove
the filter plate.
Adjust PS2
+12VDC
1. Locate the +12VDC potentiometer on
PS2. [1]
2. Rotate the PS2 potentiometer until the
voltage is +12VDC (±0.3VDC).
Note
clockwise to increase the
voltage, counter clockwise to
decrease the voltage.
Note
Do not put excessive pressure
on the potentiometer, This can
cause failure of the device.
Install Filter
Plate
screws. [1]
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
Install Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel Cover
screws.
Close Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel
Install Front
Middle
Access
Panels
Close Covers
1. Close the access cover(s) and panel(s).
1.
Close the door(s).
procedure.
Verification For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to

1. Select the Fuses / Motors category
system icon.

Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING

Serial number c800224 and above do not have Subsection: System status.
supply.

Ready status.
Preparation
Measure
+12VDC
1. Locate the connector unit cooler (right side of
(PS3) at Unit
main power supply) and verify that the voltage
Cooler
between pins #1(+ lead) and pin #4(- lead) is
+12VDC (±0.6VDC).
Note
This voltage is only present when the
sample carousel is cooling.
If the voltage is correct, go to Close

Covers.
If the voltage is incorrect, go to Access
+12VDC (PS3) Power Supply.
Access
+12VDC
1. Remove the four (4) screws securing the main
(PS3) Power
power supply fan mounting plate to the power
Supply
supply. [1]
connector and disconnect the fan power
connector. [2]
Adjust PS3
+12VDC
1. Locate the +12VDC potentiometer on PS3. [1]
2. Rotate the PS3 potentiometer until the voltage is
+12VDC (±0.06VDC).
Note
Rotate potentiometer clockwise to increase
voltage, counter clockwise to decrease
voltage.
Note
Do not put excessive pressure on the
potentiometer, This can cause failure of the
device.
Install Main
Power Supply
1. Connect the fan power connector. [2]
Fan
2. Place the fan in power supply [3], and secure the
mounting plate to the power supply with four (4)
screws. [1]
Close Covers
four (4) screws.
P-120 DC, Lamp Power Supply Adjustment Version - 96721-108_798_3

P-120 DC, Lamp Power Supply Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust DC Lamp Power Supply in the Main Power Supply. Module c8000
Multimeter
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING

status.
2. Log on as FSE.
Preparation
1. Remove the reaction carousel rear cover.
Measure
DC Lamp
1. Locate the Lamp terminal block [1].
Volts
2. Remove the plastic terminal cover [2] and
verify that the voltage between the two (2)
screws [3] of the terminal block is +11.4 -
11.5VDC.
If the voltage is correct, go to Close

Covers.
If the voltage is incorrect, go to

Access DC, Lamp Power Supply.
Access DC,
Lamp
Power
DC supply to the main power supply.
Supply
2. Slide the DC power supply to the rear of
the main power supply far enough to
access the potentiometer.
Adjust DC
Lamp
1. Locate the lamp power potentiometer. [1].
Voltage
2. Rotate the potentiometer until the voltage
is within specification (+11.4 - 11.5VDC).
Note
Rotate the potentiometer clockwise
to increase the voltage, counter
clockwise to decrease the voltage.
Install and
Secure DC
1. Slide the DC power supply into the main
Power
power supply instrument.
Supply
2. Secure the DC supply with three (3)
screws.
Close
Covers
four (4) screws.
2. Install the terminal cover.
3. Install the reaction carousel rear cover.
Verification For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer

to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
1. Select the Fuses / Motors category from
the Diagnostics screen under the system
icon.
3. Log on as Operator.
P-124 LLS Voltage Adjustment Version - 96721-108_800_1

P-124 LLS Voltage Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust voltages on the LLS board. Module c8000
Multimeter

Remove Front
Middle
Access Panel
panel [3] and loosen the two (2)
bottom screws. [2]
Open Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Remove the screw [1] securing the
Panel
fluid sense-AC/DC panel [2] and swing
the panel out.
Remove Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Loosen the three (3) screws on the
Panel Cover
fluid sense-AC/DC panel cover and
remove the cover.
Measure and
Correct
1. Measure voltages from TP2 (ground) to
Voltage
each of the following test points.
Note
The ground test point for
instruments with serial numbers
less than c800063 may be
labeled TP0 instead of TP2.
2. If the measured voltage varies more
than ±0.02VDC (from the
specification), locate the appropriate
potentiometer.
3. Rotate the potentiometer until the
voltage is within specification.
Note
clockwise to increase the
voltage, counter clockwise to
decrease the voltage.
Install Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
Panel Cover
screws.
Close Fluid
Sense-AC/DC
1. Close the fluid sense-AC/DC panel
Panel
Install Front
Middle
Access
Panels
Close Door(s)
1. Close door(s).
Perform 3625 For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to

Pipettors LLS the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
Test Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
from the Diagnostics screen under
the system icon.
2. Perform 3625 Pipettors LLS Test
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-116) • Copyright 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. c16000, i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-126 ICT Alignment Version - 96721-108_766_2

P-126 ICT Alignment
Perform this procedure to align the ICT probe positions. c8000

Purpose Module
Standard Tool Kit 30 min

Materials Required Alignment tool #1 & #2 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825 Time
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool (LN 2J93-01)
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
ICT Front/Back-Left/Right Alignment

System status.
Ready status.
Verify ICT For further information on performing diagnostic

Probe procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Centered Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Over Subsection: System diagnostics.
Cuvette
3. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test Tool
select 1. Reaction carousel.
a. 1. Home
b. 0. Exit

select 9 ICT.
a. L1 Home
b. L2 Reaction Carousel cuvette
5. Verify that the probe is centered over cuvette cell

#92.
If properly centered, go to Step6.

If not properly centered, go to Adjust ICT
Head.
6. Select L4 Exit to return to the 1101 Robotics Test

Tool main menu.
7. Go to ICT Cuvette Down Position Adjustment.
Adjust ICT
Head
1. If the ICT probe is not centered over cuvette
cell#92 [3] in a front to back relationship [1].
Loosen the two (2) screws [2] under the water
jacket tubing at the bottom of the head section.
2. Make slight front to back [1] movements of the ICT
head to get the proper front to back position.
3. Tighten the two (2) screws [2].
4. Verify that the probe is centered clockwise or
counterclockwise over the cuvette cell.
If properly centered, go to ICT Cuvette Down

Position Adjustment.
If not properly centered, go to Step5.
5. Adjust the position of the ICT head using 1101

Robotics Test Tool, and selecting L1 Rotate. Then
position the probe using L1 CW (clockwise) and L2
CCW (counterclockwise)
6. Once the position is correct select L4 Exit three (3)
times to return to the 1101 Robotics Test Tool main
menu.
7. Once the proper ICT head alignment at the cuvette
is verified, go to ICT Cuvette Down Position
Adjustment.
ICT Cuvette Down Position Adjustment
Prepare
Reaction
1. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics
Carousel
Test Tool select 1. Reaction
carousel.
a. 1. Home
2. Remove cuvette segment 150-136 and
install Cuvette Segment Robocal
Alignment Tool in position 150-136.
3. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the 1101
Robotics Test Tool screen and touch
L2 five (5) times.
Note
This places the Cuvette
Segment Robocal Alignment
Tool under the ICT head.
4. Press L4 and select 0. Exit in the

options to return to the main menu in
the 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Install
Alignment
1. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics
Tool
Test Tool select 9 ICT.
a. L1 Home
b. L2 Reaction Carousel cuvette
c. L2 Down stepup/stepdown
2. Place Alignment Tool 1 [1] between

the bottom surface [2] of the ICT head
mounting plate and the top surface of
the Cuvette Segment Robocal
Alignment Tool
Note
The Alignment Tool must be
placed on top of the Cuvette (If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Tool for proper height Note
measurement. Video contains no audio sound.
Check ICT
Cuvette
1. Verify that the low limit surface of the
Down
tool fits under the plate [2] and the
Position
high limit does not fit under the
plate [2].
If the down position meets the

specification, got to Step2.
If the down position does not
meet the specification, go to
Adjust ICT Cuvette Down
Position.
2. Select L4 Up/Exit (moves the ICT

probe out of the cuvette).
3. Go to ICT Reference Solution Cup
Alignment.
Adjust ICT
Cuvette
1. Adjust the height of the ICT using
Down
1101 Robotics Test Tool
Position
L1 Step up
L2 Step down
2. Go to Check ICT Cuvette Down

Position.
ICT Reference Solution Cup Alignment
Verify Probe
Over
1. Select L3 ICT reference solution
Reference
cup in the 1101 Robotics Test Tool
Solution Cup
screen.
2. Observe the probe position in
relation to the solution cup and
verify that it is centered over the
circle [1] formed by the sensor
probe [2] and the edge of the cup.
If the probe is centered over

the circle, go to Verify Probe
Down Position.
If the probe is not centered
over the circle, go to Adjust
Probe Over Reference
Solution Cup.
Adjust Probe
Over
Reference
2.
Select L1 Rotate.
Solution Cup
3. Position the probe using L1 CW
(clockwise) and L2 CCW
(counterclockwise).
Note
Additional adjustment is
made by loosening the two
(2) mounting screws for the
reference solution cup and
manually adjusting the cup.
4. Go to Verify Probe Over Reference

Solution Cup.
Verify Probe
Down
1. Move the ICT probe to the down
Position
position in the reference solution
cup [1] using 1101 Robotics Test
Tool and selecting L2 Down-step
up/step down.
2. Insert alignment tool #2 [2] between
the bottom surface of the ICT
mounting plate [3] and the top
surface of the clear plastic mounting
plate (for the reference solution
cup [1]).
3. Verify that the low limit surface of
the tool fits under the plate [3] and
the high limit does not fit under the
plate [3].
If the down position is within Note

specification, go to Exit 1101 Video contains no audio sound.
Robotics Test Tool
Procedure.
If the down position is out of
specification, go to Adjust
Probe Down Position.
Adjust Probe
Down
1. Adjust the height of the ICT using
Position
1101 Robotics Test Tool.
a. L1 Step up
b. L2 Step down
2. Perform Verify Probe Down

Position.
Exit 1101
Robotics Test
1. Move the ICT probe out of the ICT
Tool
reference solution cup by selecting
Procedure
L4 Up/Exit.
2. Select L4 Exit twice to return to
main menu of 1101 Robotics Test
Tool.
3. From the main menu of 1101
Robotics Test Tool select 1.
Reaction carousel.
a. 1. Home
4. Remove Cuvette Segment Robocal

Alignment Tool in position 150-136
and install cuvette segment
removed earlier into position150-
136.
5. Select 0. Exit twice to exit the 1101
Robotics Test Tool procedure.
Close
Cover/Doors
1. Install the center rear deck and
2. Run an ICT Calibration.
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-116) • Copyright 2002, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-127 Water Bath Heater Adjustment Version - 96721-108_794_2

P-127 Water Bath Heater Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the actual temperature after a repair or replacement of the heater Module c8000
bath heater components.
Required External thermometer (LN8C94-88) min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Caution

System status.
2. The processing module must be in Ready
status.
Place For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

Temperature refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
Probe 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System
diagnostics.
icon.
Temperature.
Note
Allows insertion of the temperature
probe into the water bath in the
correct position.
3. Place the probe, from the external

thermometer, into the water bath in the
position specified by procedure 3526
Check Water Bath Temperature.
Verify Correct
Temperature
1. Allow the temperature reading to stabilize
Reading
(at least one minute).
2. Verify that the reading on the external
thermometer is 37°C (±0.1°C).
If the specification is met, go to

If the specification is not met, go to
Remove Cover(s).
Remove
Cover(s)
heater control cover and remove the cover.
Adjust Water
Bath
1. Adjust potentiometer VR1 on the controller
Temperature
board to set the water bath temperature.
Clockwise to raise to raise the bath

temperature.
Counter-clockwise to lower the bath
temperature.
2. Allow the temperature to stabilize (10

minutes).
3. Go to Verify Correct Temperature Reading.
Adjust Water
1. Set SW1 switch 1 and 2 to the ON
Bath
Temperature position.
New Style 2. Pressing SW3 will increase temperature
TBC and pressing SW4 will decrease
temperature.
Note: Approximate change per pressing of

a switch is 0.02 degrees C.
3. When 37 degrees C (±0.1 C) is acheived,

set switch 1 and 2 to the OFF position on
SW1.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install cover(s).
Temperature.
P-128 Mixer Alignment Version - 96721-108_793_2

P-128 Mixer Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the mixers. Module c8000

Alignment tool #3 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the

Diagnostics screen under the system
icon.

Robotics Test Tool select 1. Reaction
carousel.
a. 1. Home
b. 0. Exit

Robotics Test Tool select 6. Mixer.
a. L1 Mixer 1
b. L2 Wash Cup
c. L4 Exit
d. L2 Mixer 2
e. L2 Wash cup
5. Verify that the mixers are centered

over the mixer wash cups.
If they are centered, go to

Step 6.
If they are not centered use the

software controls in 1101
Robotics Test Tool to center
the mixers. Select L1 Rotate
for the Mixer needing
adjustment and select CW
(clockwise) or CCW
(counterclockwise) to position
the mixer correctly. Enter L4
Exit once position is correct.
6. Select L3 Cuvette for each of the

mixers.
7. Verify that mixers are centered over

the cuvette cells.
If they are centered, go to

Verify Mixer Height.
If they are not centered use the

software controls in 1101
Robotics Test Tool to center
the mixers. Select L1 Rotate
for the Mixer needing
adjustment and select CW
(clockwise) or CCW
(counterclockwise) to position
the mixer correctly. Enter L4
Exit once position is correct.
VIDEO -
Verify Mixer Note
Height
Verify Mixer
Height
1. Return to the main menu of 1101
Robotics Test Tool and select 1.
Reaction carousel.
a. 1. Home
2. Remove cuvette segment 150-136

and install Cuvette Segment Robocal
3. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the

1101 Robotics Test Tool screen and
touch L2 eight (8) times.
Note
Tool under mixer #2.
4. Enter L2 one more time to move the

Robocal Alignment tool under mixer
#1.
5. Place the low limit surface of

alignment tool #3 [1] under the mixer
blade [2].
6. Verify that the low limit surface of the

alignment fits under the mixer blade
and the high limit does not pass
beneath the blade.
If specification is met, go to
If specification is not met, go to

Adjust Mixer Height.
Adjust
Mixer
1. Loosen locking nut [2] and mounting
Height
screws [4].
2. Rotate the brass support shaft [1] CW

(clockwise) or CCW
(counterclockwise) to set proper
height.
Note
Lower part of the brass support
shaft [3] does not turn.
3. Once the correct height has been set,

tighten the locking nut [2] and
mounting screws [4].
4. Select L4 Exit and then 1. Home to

home the reaction carousel.

and install cuvette segment removed
earlier into position150-136.

Prepare for
Operation
1. Close cover(s) and door(s).
P-131 Cuvette Washer Alignment Version - 96721-108_792_3

P-131 Cuvette Washer Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the cuvette washer. Module c8000
Metric Ruler
Alignment tool #3 from the Robotics Alignment Tool Assembly 89825
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the

Diagnostics screen under the system
icon.
Robotics Test Tool select 1. Reaction
carousel.
a. 1. Home
b. 0. Exit
4. Remove cuvette washer cover [1] by

loosening the cover screw [2].
5. Remove the cuvette wash nozzle
assembly [4] from the cuvette wash
elevator [5] by loosening the black
knurled knob [3].
Verify Dry
Tip Position
1. Verify that the dry tip is 61.5mm
±0.5 mm [1] from the bottom of the tip
to the underside surface of the nozzle
mounting plate.
Install
Nozzle
1. Install the cuvette wash nozzle
Assembly
assembly back on the cuvette wash
elevator and secure with the black
knurled knob.
Verify Tip
Rectangular
Orientation
Robotics Test Tool select 10. Wash
Station.
a. L2 Step Down
2. Using the black knurled knob, raise

and lower the cuvette washer.
3. Verify that the top of the dry tip
nozzle does not move as the washer
moves in and out of the cuvette.
Verify Nozzle Gap.
Adjust Tip Rectangular
Orientation.
Adjust Tip
Rectangular
1. Manually adjust the dry tip to ensure
Orientation
it is properly centered in the cuvette
cells.
2. Repeat Verify Tip Rectangular
Orientation.
Verify
Nozzle Gap
1. With the cuvette wash in the down
position, verify the gap between the
bottom black plastic section of the
nozzle surrounding the nozzle
mounting post and the raised portion
of the mounting post near the nozzle
mounting plate is 1.5mm [2].
Verify Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.
Adjust Nozzle Gap.
Adjust
Nozzle Gap
1. Manually move the dry tip (up or
down on the nozzle shaft) to meet the
1.5mm specification.
Verify
Nozzle
1. Select L1 up to move the cuvette
Centering
washer to the up position, visually
Over
verify that all the washer nozzles are
Cuvette
centered over the cuvette cells.
Verify Nozzle Centering
Entering Cuvette.
Adjust Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.
Adjust
Nozzle
1. Adjust screws [2] on top of nozzle
Centering
mounting plate for horizontal and
Over
left/right adjustment.
Cuvette
2. Go to Verify Nozzle Centering Over
Cuvette.
Verify
Nozzle
1. Select L2 Step Down to move
Centering
washer to the down position,
Entering
manually move the nozzle assembly
Cuvette
up and down, and verify that the
nozzles are centered when entering
the cuvettes.
Verify Nozzle Entry.
Adjust Nozzle Centering
Entering Cuvette.
Adjust
Nozzle
1. Adjust screws [2] on top of nozzle
Centering
mounting plate as required to ensure
Entering
nozzles are centered.
Cuvette
2. Go to Verify Nozzle Entry.
Verify
Nozzle
1. While slowly lifting up on the washer
Entry
assembly by hand, verify that the dry
nozzle enters the cells smoothly, and
without any deviation to the left or to
the right.
Verify Final Alignment.
Adjust Nozzle Entry.
Adjust
Nozzle
Entry
top of the dry nozzle and move the
nozzle [1] in the desired direction.
2. Go to Verify Final Alignment.
Verify Final
Alignment
1. When the adjustment is complete,
tighten the nozzle and recheck all
nozzles on the cuvette washer to
verify final alignment.
2. Select L1 Up to position cuvette
washer in the up position and then
select L4 Exit to return to main
screen of 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
Robotics Test Tool, select 1. Reaction
carousel.
a. 1. Home
4. Remove cuvette segment 150-136

and install Cuvette Segment Robocal
5. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the
1101 Robotics Test Tool screen and
touch L2 six (6) times.
Note
Tool under the cuvette washer.
6. Place the low limit surface of the

alignment tool #3 [1] under nozzle #1
and verify height. Then move
alignment tool #3 [1] under nozzle #5
and verify height.
7. With the height set properly, the low
limit surface of the alignment tool
#3 [1] should fit under the nozzle and
the high limit should not pass beneath
the blade.
Adjust Nozzle Level and
Height.
Note
Adjust
Nozzle
1. If the height is not set properly adjust
Level and
the screws [3] on the linear slide for
Height
horizontal level and height alignment.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Select 1. Home to home the reaction
carousel.
and install cuvette segment removed
earlier into position150-136.
P-132 Sample Pipettor Head Horizontal Alignment Version - 96721-108_791_1

P-132 Sample Pipettor Head Horizontal Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure for horizontal alignment (manually) of the sample pipettor head. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Ready status.
Preparation
1. Remove the Sample Pipettor Cover from the
pipettor head.
Verify
Front/Back
Centering
select 5. Sample pipettor.
a. 2. Position
b. 8. Horizontal Alignment Check.
4. Perform the Horizontal Alignment Check.
Note
This procedure instructs you to install the
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool
5. The Horizontal Alignment Check provides check
points during the procedure for visual verification
that the sample probe is centered front to back over
the Cuvette.
a. If specification is met, go to Exit 1101

Robotics Test Tool
b. If specification is not met, go to Adjust
Front/Back Centering.
Adjust
Front/Back
1. Slightly loosen the mounting screws [1], and center
Centering
the sample probe over the alignment target on the
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool by
moving the sample pipettor head [2] horizontally.
Note
Do not rotate the sample pipettor head
during this procedure. It is possible to rotate
the pipettor head to a position that it causes
it to fail pipettor calibration.
2. Once the sample probe is centered tighten the

3. Go to Verify Front/Back Centering.
Exit 1101
Robotics
1. Select 0. Exit to return to the main menu.
Test Tool
3. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the 1101 Robotics
Test Tool screen and touch L2 and repeat until
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool is located
at the front position of the reaction carousel.
4. Remove Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool
and replace with cuvette segment removed earlier.
5. Select L4 Exit and Select 0 twice to exit 1101
Robotics Test Tool.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the sample pipettor cover.
3. Perform 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration.
Note
Procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration
automatically sets the right to left centering.
P-133 Reagent Pipettor Head Horizontal Alignment Version - 96721-108_790_1

P-133 Reagent Pipettor Head Horizontal Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure for horizontal alignment (manually) of the reagent pipettor heads. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Ready status.
Preparation
1. Remove the Reagent Pipettor Cover from the
pipettor head being tested.
Verify
Front/Back
Centering
select 3. R1 pipettor or 4. R2 pipettor.
a. 2. Position
b. 7. Horizontal Alignment Check.
4. Perform the Horizontal Alignment Check.
Note
This procedure instructs you to install the
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool.
5. The Horizontal Alignment Check provides check
points during the procedure for visual verification
that the reagent probe is centered front to back
over the Cuvette.
If specification is met, go to Exit 1101

Robotics Test Tool.
If specification is not met, go to Adjust
Front/Back Centering.
Adjust
Front/Back
1. Slightly loosen the mounting screws [1], and center
Centering
the reagent probe over the alignment target on the
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool by
moving the reagent pipettor head [2] horizontally.
Note
Do not rotate the reagent pipettor head
during this procedure. It is possible to rotate
the pipettor head to a position that it causes
it to fail pipettor calibration.
2. Once the reagent probe is centered tighten the

3. Go to Verify Front/Back Centering.
Exit 1101
Robotics
1. Select 0. Exit to return to the main menu.
Test Tool
3. Select 2. Rotate Carousel in the 1101 Robotics
Test Tool screen and touch L2 and repeat until
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool is located
at the front position of the reaction carousel.
4. Remove Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool
and replace with cuvette segment removed earlier.
5. Select L4 Exit and Select 0 twice to exit 1101
Robotics Test Tool.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the reagent pipettor cover.
3. Perform 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, or 1122 R2
Pipettor Calibration.
Note
Procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration or
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration automatically
sets the right to left centering.
P-135 Sample Carousel BCR Alignment Version - 96721-108_789_1
P-135 Sample Carousel BCR Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to align the sample carousel bar code reader. Module c8000
Sample Tube with Blank Label
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Ready status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
3. Remove the samples from the
sample carousel and store in a
proper location.
Preparation 1. Remove the screw securing the left
Note
It is not necessary to
disconnect the cables on the
left front deck. There is
enough service loop to set the
deck aside.
Align Sample 1. Place a sample tube with a blank

Bar Code label in a outer position of the
Reader. sample carousel. The label must be
facing to the outside of the sample
carousel.
2. Select the Bar Code Readers
category from the Diagnostics
3. Perform 3251 Sample Carousel Bar
Code Test to position the sample
tube into the bar code read position
and to scan a bar code with the
reader.
4. Scan the blank label on the sample
tube and observe the bar code beam
on the label.
5. If the beam is not centered on the
tube, loosen the two (2) screws [1]
on the mounting plate and then
rotate the bar code reader to align
beam.
6. Tighten screws [1] if loosened to
adjust reader.
Prepare for 1. Secure the left front deck with

Operation one (1) screw.
Note
Ensure that the cables to the
switches are placed behind
the sample carousel bar code
reader. If the cables are
placed in front of the bar code
reader, read errors occur.
2. Exit 3251 Sample Carousel Bar
Code Test.
3. Place sample(s) into sample
carousel if removed earlier.
4. Place sample carousel cover on.
P-136 Pre-service Decontamination Version - 96721-108_788_1

P-136 Pre-service Decontamination
Purpose Perform this procedure for pre-service decontamination prior to relocation, servicing, Module c8000
upgrades/retrofits, or preventive maintenance of the c 8000 system.
Required Lint-free tissue min
Distilled or reagent grade type II water
Approved tuberculocidal disinfectant
0.1% sodium hypochlorite solution
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Note
Pre-service decontamination should be completed prior to relocation or return of the c 8000 processing module and service,
upgrades, retrofit, or preventive maintenance.
Remove Samples
1. Verify all patient samples have been removed from processing module.
2. If the c 8000 system is being relocated or returned, remove all reagents and solutions
Decontaminate
c 8000 system Note
Decontaminate the touchscreen monitor, keyboard, covers, doors, and accessible
components in the upper and lower deck areas.
1. Wipe the surfaces with a detergent solution to remove any soiling.

2. Apply the disinfectant solution or 0.1% sodium hypochlorite solution.
Note
Scrub, if needed, to dislodge material.
3. Allow the solution to stand for 10 minutes (minimum).

4. Wipe the surface with water to remove any residual detergent solution.
P-137 Reaction Carousel Lubrication Version - 96721-108_787_2

P-137 Reaction Carousel Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Reaction Carousel during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
Lubricating Grease 94851
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Caution
Hot Surface
Lubricate Reaction
Carousel
1. Lubricate the reaction carousel at the
indicated location(s).
P-138 Reagent Supply Center #1 Lubrication Version - 96721-108_786_1

P-138 Reagent Supply Center #1 Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Reagent Supply Center #1 during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
Required Lubricating Grease 94851 min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Reagent
Supply Center #1
1. Lubricate the reagent supply center #1
at the indicated location(s).
P-139 Reagent Supply Center #2 Lubrication Version - 96721-108_774_1

P-139 Reagent Supply Center #2 Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Reagent Supply Center #2 during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Reagent
Supply Center #2
1. Lubricate the reagent supply center #2
at the indicated location(s).
P-140 Sample Carousel Lubrication Version - 96721-108_784_1

P-140 Sample Carousel Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Sample Carousel during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Sample
Carousel
1. Lubricate the sample carousel at the
P-141 Mixer Elevator Lubrication Version - 96721-108_795_1

P-141 Mixer Elevator Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Mixer Elevator. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Mixer
Elevator
1. Lubricate the mixer elevator at the indicated
location(s).
P-142 Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Lubrication Version - 96721-108_782_1

P-142 Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Sample/Reagent Syringe Drives during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate
Sample/Reagent Syringe
1. Lubricate the sample/reagent syringe
Drive
drive at the indicated location(s).
P-143 Cuvette Wash Elevator Lubrication Version - 96721-108_781_1

P-143 Cuvette Wash Elevator Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Cuvette Wash Elevator during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 10 min
Required Lubricating Grease 94851
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Cuvette
Wash Elevator
1. Lubricate the cuvette wash elevator at
the indicated location(s).
P-144 ICT Elevator Lubrication Version - 96721-108_780_2

P-144 ICT Elevator Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the ICT Elevator during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate ICT
Elevator
1. Lubricate the ICT elevator at the indicated
location(s).
P-145 H.C. Waste Pump Lubrication Version - 96721-108_779_1

P-145 H.C. Waste Pump Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the H.C. Waste Pump during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate H.C.
Waste Pump
1. Lubricate the H.C. waste pump at the
P-146 Inner Probe Wash Pump Lubrication Version - 96721-108_778_2

P-146 Inner Probe Wash Pump Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Inner Probe Wash Pump during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Inner Probe

Wash Pump
1. Lubricate the inner probe wash pump at
the indicated location(s).
P-147 Cuvette Wash Pump Lubrication Version - 96721-108_777_1

P-147 Cuvette Wash Pump Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Cuvette Wash Pump during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Cuvette
Wash Pump
1. Lubricate the cuvette wash pump at the
P-148 ICT Aspiration Pump Lubrication Version - 96721-108_776_2

P-148 ICT Aspiration Pump Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the ICT Aspiration Pump during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate ICT
Aspiration Pump
1. Lubricate the ICT aspiration pump at the
P-149 ICT Reference Solution Pump Lubrication Version - 96721-108_805_1

P-149 ICT Reference Solution Pump Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the ICT Reference Solution Pump during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate ICT
Reference Solution
1. Lubricate the ICT reference solution
Pump
pump at the indicated location(s).
P-150 Wash Solution Pump Lubrication Version - 96721-108_783_1

P-150 Wash Solution Pump Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the Wash Solution Pump during preventive maintenance. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Waste
Solution Pump
1. Lubricate the waste solution pump at the
P-151 Clean Waste Cup/Water Bath Overflow Version - 96721-108_785_1

P-151 Clean Waste Cup/Water Bath Overflow
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the waste cup/water bath overflow area of the processing module Module c8000
during planned maintenance.
Required 1% Alkaline wash solution min
gauze
cotton swabs
Reagent grade type II water
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Ready status.
Note
To change the status of
the processing module to
Ready, perform the
Startup procedure.
Remove
Decks
1. Loosen the two (2) screws
securing the right center front
2. Loosen the three (3) screws
securing the center front deck
Clean Waste
Cup/Water
1. Remove tube #11 from the
Bath Overflow
waste cup/water bath overflow
cover.
holding the waste cup/water bath
cover bracket and lay to the
side.
3. Pour 20mL of 1% alkaline wash
solution into waste cup and ICT
waste cup.
4. Moisten gauze with 1% alkaline
wash solution and wipe waste
cup/water bath overflow cover.
5. Moisten gauze with reagent
grade type II water and wipe
waste cup/water bath overflow
cover.
6. Moisten gauze with reagent
grade type II water and wipe
tubing connectors.
7. Pour 100ml of reagent grade
type II water into waste cup and
ICT waste cup.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install waste cup/water bath
cover bracket with two (2)
screws.
2. Install tube #11 into waste
cup/water bath overflow cover.
Install Decks
1. Secure the center front deck
with three (3) screws.
2. Secure the right center front
deck with two (2) screws.
Change Water For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the
Bath ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and
1. Select the As Needed category
diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
from the Maintenance screen
under the system icon.
2. Perform 2134 Change Water
Bath.
P-152 Clean Water Bath Lens Version - 96721-108_816_1

P-152 Clean Water Bath Lens
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the Water Bath Lens during planned maintenance. Module c8000
1% Alkaline Wash Solution
Cotton Swabs
Reagent Grade Type II Water
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System
1. The processing module must
startup, pause, and shutdown.
be in Ready status.
Note
To change the status of
the processing module
to Ready, perform the
Startup procedure.
Preparation
securing the left rear deck and
remove the deck.
2. Loosen the two (2)
thumbscrews securing the
reaction carousel rear cover
3. Select the Modules category
from the Diagnostics screen
4. Perform 1101 Robotics Test
Tool; select 11. Water bath
exchange, then select
L2. Empty to drain the water
bath.
5. Remove the cuvette segment
in front of the light path to
allow access to the water bath
lens.
Clean
Water Bath
1. Moisten a cotton swab with 1%
Lens
alkaline wash solution and
clean both lens surfaces.
2. Moisten a cotton swab with
reagent grade type II water
and remove all of the alkaline
solution from the lens.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install Cuvette segment.
2. Select L4 Exit in the 1101
Robotics Test Tool screen and
then select 0. Exit to exit 1101
Robotics Test Tool.
3. Secure the reaction carousel
rear cover with two (2)
thumbscrews.
4. Secure the left rear deck with
two (2) screws.
5. Select the As Needed
category from the For further
Maintenance screen under the information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT
system icon. System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
6. Perform 2134 Change Water Subsection: System diagnostics.
Bath.
P-153 Clean Water Bath Version - 96721-108_815_1

P-153 Clean Water Bath
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the Water Bath Lens during planned maintenance. Module c8000
Gauze
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
1. The processing module must be in Ready
status.
Note
To change the status of the
processing module to Ready, perform
Preparation
2. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool; select 11.
Water bath exchange, then select L2
Empty to drain the water bath.
3. Select L4 Exit in the 1101 Robotics Test
Tool screen to return to the main menu
screen.
4. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test
Tool select 1. Reaction carousel and then
select 2. Rotate reaction carousel.
5. Remove cuvette segment located at front of
reaction carousel.
Select L2 1 cuvette segment (moves
another cuvette segment into position
and remove segment.
Continue rotating reaction carousel
using L2 and removing cuvette
segments until all cuvette segments
have been removed.
Clean
Water Bath
1. Moisten a gauze with 1% alkaline wash
solution and clean the entire water bath
surface.
2. Moisten a gauze with reagent grade type II
water and remove all of the alkaline solution
from the water bath surface.
Prepare for For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer

Operation to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10:
1. Install all Cuvette segments removed earlier
using L2 1 cuvette segment in the 1101
Robotics Test Tool screen to rotate the
reaction carousel.
2. Select L4 Exit and then 0. Exit twice in the
1101 Robotics Test Tool screen to exit
procedure.
P-154 Clean Degasser Membrane Version - 96721-108_814_1

P-154 Clean Degasser Membrane
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the degasser membrane prior to long storage. Module c8000
0.5% Sodium Hypochlorite (300mL)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Ready status.
Note
This procedure is ONLY used if the
degasser is stored for a long term. DO NOT
use this procedure for troubleshooting a
problem with the degasser.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the processing module (use the main
circuit breaker located at the rear of the processing
module).
2. Remove the left rear cover.
Remove
Degasser
remove the brace.
2. Disconnect the drain tubing [1] from the refrigerator.
way.
5. Disconnect the cables DGS and DEG from the
degasser.
6. Remove the two (2) screws securing the degasser
assembly to the processing module frame.
7. Remove the degasser by sliding it out of the rear of
Clean
Degasser
1. Flush degasser with 0.5% hypochlorite solution.
Membrane
Allow solution to stand in tubing for 30 minutes.
2. Purge degasser with air.
3. Flush degasser with reagent grade type II water.
Install
Degasser
2. Connect the DGS and DEG cables to the degasser.
the clamps.
4. Reconnect the drain tubing [1] to the refrigerator.
6. Secure the refrigerator tubing to the degasser
frame with one tie-wrap.
P-155 Demonstration Mode Version - 96721-108_813_1
P-155 Demonstration Mode
Purpose To prepare the c 8000 processing module for Demonstration Mode (does not require waste Module c8000
or water connections).
Required min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite 1. The processing module must be in Stopped or For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT
Ready status. System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
Preparation 1. Power OFF the processing module (use the main
circuit breaker located at the rear of the
processing module).
Set S1-1 ON 1. On the SMC Board (M1.03 Bd., SMC) move S1-1
to the ON position.
Note
The switch is located on the outer center
edge of the SMC Board (For switch location
reference SMC Board).
Remove 1. Remove Pressure Monitor Board (M1.10 Bd.,
Pressure Monitor Pressure Monitor).
Bd.
Disconnect 1. Disconnect sample (G1.10 Syringe, sample) and
Syringe Tubing reagent (G2.10 Syringe, reagent) tubing from the
top of the syringes.
Note
The c 8000 processing module continues to
fluid sense and aspirate in this mode.
Disconnect 1. Disconnect the 100VAC from the front of the
Reagent reagent refrigerator.
Refrigerator. Note
The connector is located behind the fluid
sense-AC/DC panel (D3.01 Refrigerator,
NS, c8).
Remove 1. Remove the fuse (K2.02 Fuse, 500ma 250V,
Degasser Fuse degasser) from the degasser to turn the degasser
off.
Disconnect 1. Disconnect ISCU (S1.01 Sample Carousel
Sample Carousel Assembly) from the connector panel on the side of
cooling the sample carousel to turn TEDs off.
Remove Heater 1. Disconnect the thermal fuse going to the water
Fuse. bath heater.
Note
This is the thermal fuse located next to the
heater element (N2.02 Fuse, Thermal,
Heater Unit).
Remove Cuvette 1. Remove the cuvette wipers (N1.03 Cuvette Wiper)
Wipers if the processing module is used in Demonstration
Mode for an extended period.
Prepare for 1. Power ON the processing module. For information on the startup procedure, refer to
Operation Note the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
The system control center power must be Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
on prior to turning on the processing System startup, pause, and shutdown.
2. The system should give a message for the
missing pressure monitor board and for the fact
that it is in demonstration mode. Clear the
messages and proceed.
Note
Samples and reagents require the use of
saline or tap water for the fluid sense to
work correctly. Use only clean sample
tubes with no gel at the bottom.
P-156 DAQ +15/-15VDC Check Version - 96721-108_812_3

P-156 DAQ +15/-15VDC Check
Purpose Perform this procedure to measure the +15/-15 VDC on the DAQ Board. Module c8000
Multimeter
may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Preparation
1. Open the card cage (right front)
door.
Remove
Pump Door
securing the pump center (center
front) door and remove the door.
Remove
Front Right
Access Panel
from the top of the front right
access panel [2].
2. Loosen the two (2) screws [3] at
the bottom of the panel, and
remove the access panel [2].
Remove
Card Cage
1. Loosen the four (4) thumbscrews
Front Cover
securing the card cage front
Measure
+15/-15VDC
1. Verify that voltage between
on DAQ
TP48 (+ lead) and TP50 (- lead)
Board
on the DAQ board is
+15VDC (±0.75).
If the voltage is correct go

to Install Card Cage Cover.
If the voltage is incorrect,

replace DC Power Supply
(L1.08 Power Supply, DC,
Lamp).
2. Verify that voltage between

TP49 (+ lead) and TP50 (- lead)
on the DAQ board is -
15VDC (±0.75).
If the voltage is correct go

to Install Card Cage Cover.
If the voltage is incorrect,

replace DC Power Supply
(L1.08 Power Supply, DC,
Lamp).
Install Card
Cage Cover
1. Install the card cage cover and
secure with four (4) thumbscrews.
Install Front
Right Access
1. Secure the front right access
Panel
panel [2] to the processing
module with four (4)
screws. [1] [3]
Install Pump
Door
1. Install the pump center (center
front) door with two (2) screws.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and
1. Select the Fuses / Motors
category from the Diagnostics
P-157 Top Cover Counterbalance Adjustment Version - 96721-108_811_1

P-157 Top Cover Counterbalance Adjustment
Purpose Sets the correct tension on the counterbalances on the top covers Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Top Cover
Test.
1. Move the front top cover and the rear top cover to
the half way open position and release cover.
2. If the counterbalances are set correctly the top
covers should not move down. If covers move
down preform counterbalance adjustment.
Counter
balance
1. Remove the front top cover or the rear top cover
adjustment
that requires adjustment.
2. While holding the nut [1] on the counterbalance
turn the bolt [2] clockwise two (2) turns. Repeat for
the other counterbalance on the top cover.
3. Replace top cover removed and retest.
P-159 Performance Verification Test (PVT) Version - 96721-108_810_7

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
P-159 Performance Verification Test (PVT)
To verify and ensure that the instrument is functioning properly prior to releasing the system to the customer. c8000
Purpose The PVT consists of calibrating and running specific assays with multiple replicates to test the pipetting, wash system, optical and ICT precision of the Module (126)
instrument. The acceptance criteria, listed at the end of the procedure, determines if the instrument has passed or failed the test. The performance verification
test (PVT) is performed at the end of a new system installation.
Note
Toshiba manufacturing requires all new systems to pass the PVT acceptance criteria prior to shipping, Performing the PVT during system installation
verifies that issues have not occurred as a result of shipping and/or the installation process. The acceptance criteria utilizes a minimum and maximum
range instead of %CV. This is because the PVT is run with level II control and the established precision for control material can differ depending on the
control manufacturer. The photometric and ICT assays utilized by the PVT test washing, pipetting precision, reagent dispense accuracy, mixing, noise,
and reagent cross contamination. AST (rate down), LDH (rate up), and TP (end up) are the photometric assays. AST was chosen because it could
contaminate LDH if there is an issue with the reagent probe wash. TP was chosen because it has a very small sample volume of 3.2 µL (test for
sample precision). Electrolytes are used to verify the ICT module. The PVT must be run using 20 separate sample cups. Ordering the tests on 20
separate sample cups allows verification of the sample probe wash. The PVT must be run on the sample carousel and not the RSH. Toshiba performs
the PVT on the sample carousel because the RSH is not installed during manufacturing. So the installation PVT is a factory retest of the c8000 module
and not the RSH. (The M&D 3317 RSH Test verifies the RSH mechanical operation and the integration process ensures that the entire system,
including the RSH, is functioning correctly before the system is released to the customer.) Another reason that the PVT must be run on the sample
carousel is that a probe wash occurs when the RSH moves from one carrier to another. The extra wash is not desirable since we are testing for
carryover.
See Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required. 90

Materials Time min
Required
While performing this procedure, if you are exposed to reagents, calibrators or controls, the following statements may apply:
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required
Materials Quantity Needed
AST 1 Cartridge of R1 and R2

LDH 1 Cartridge of R1 and R2
Total Protein (TP) 1 Cartridge of R1
ICT Reference Solution 1 Bottle
ICT Sample Diluent 1 Cartridge of R1
ICT Calibrator 1 bottle of each Calibrator (L and H)
ICT Module 1 Module
ICT Cleaning Fluid 1 Bottle
Acid Wash Solution 1 Bottle
Alkaline Wash Solution 1 Bottle
Water Bath Additive 1 Cartridge of R2
Multi-constituent Calibrators 1 Bottle for each Calibrator level
Liquid Control, Level I I 2 Bottles
1. Prepare the following solutions:

Prepare
Solutions
1. Load the following solutions:
Load
Solutions
Update
System
1. Update the system supply status.
Supply
Status
Verify
Completion
1. Verify completion of all Technical Service Bulletins
of TSBs
(TSBs) and ensure that the Call Management System
(CMS) reflects current instrument status.
Perform
Maintenance
1. Verify completion of all appropriate maintenance (daily,
Procedures
weekly, and monthly) and corresponding instrument log
entries.
Log On As
FSE Note
1. Select F2 - Log on from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to operator level of access. To do
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Load PVT
Assays
1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select
Calibration order.
If Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP and AST are listed

in Assay box, go to Assay Edits.
If the assays are not listed, continue to Step2.
2. Select System from the menu bar, and then select

Diagnostics.
3. Select the Module 5 button (SCC).
4. Page down and select Utilities.
5. Select the 6114 Install/Delete Assays option and select

F5 - Perform.
6. Select Install.
7. Place the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM into the

CD drive and select Proceed to continue.
Note
The new LDH (2P56) assay file is only available
on the cSystem Assay Disk Version 13.00 or
higher. The file and installation instructions to
create a CD are available on the GSS website:
http://gssweb.add.abbott.com/architect/205042.asp
8. Enter a 1 for the All groups option and select

Continue.
9. Follow the on screen instructions and select the options

to install Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, TP, AST and LDH, and
select Continue.
10. After the assays load, select the page down button in
the Instructions box until you reach the end of the assay
list.
11. Enter the option to Return to the main menu and select
Continue.
12. Select Exit and then select Done.
Assay Edits
Configuration.
2. Select the QC-Cal settings button and then select

Calibrator Set in the QC-Cal categories window.
3. Select MCC from the Calibrator sets window.
5. Select the lot number list button and then select New
Lot.
6. Enter the calibrator lot number in the Lot number data

entry box.
7. Enter the number of levels (2) and expiration date of the

Cal Set.
8. Highlight the TP row and select Define Data.
9. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for

each calibrator level. (Refer to the MCC value sheet for
TP calibrator concentrations.)
10. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set

window.
11. Select Done to create the calibrator set.
Configuration.
13. Select the Assay Settings button and select Assay

Parameters in the Assay categories window.
14. Select TP in the Assays list.
16. Configure the Assay availability box to Enabled.
17. Select Done.
18. Select LDH from Assay list.
19. Select F6-Configure.
20. Select the Reagent / Sample button in the middle of the

General page.
21. Select UNDILUTED default dilution button.
22. Select Done.
Load And
Scan Note
Reagents If the customer is not going to be running electrolytes
and the option is turned off in the system configuration,
electrolytes do not have to be run as part of the PVT.
1. Place the reagent R1 cartridges and R2 cartridges in the

reagent carousel positions.
Note
The reagents must be loaded in the following
order:
R1 Carousel:
ICT Sample Diluent

LDH - R1 Reagent Cartridge
Total Protein - R1 Reagent Cartridge
AST - R1 Reagent Cartridge
R2 Carousel:
LDH - R2 Reagent Cartridge

AST - R2 Reagent Cartridge
2. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select

Reagent status and F5 - Scan.
3. Verify the reagent cartridges read correctly and are in
the order above.
Create a
Calibration
Order
Calibration order.
2. Select the Carrier button on the Calibration order
screen.
3. Enter the RSH carrier ID in the C: data entry box. (The
Carrier ID includes a letter and a number.)
4. Enter 1 for carrier position in the P: data entry box.
5. Select Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP, and AST from the
Assays list and then select F2 - Add order.
Print the
Order List
1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order
Report
status.
2. Select F4 - Print and then select Order List Report.
3. Select Done to print the report.
Load the
Calibrators
1. Determine the minimum sample volume required (from
into the
the Order List Report).
Sample
2. Pippette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups
Carrier
and load in the correct carrier/position (from the Order
List Report).
3. Place the Carrier into position 1 in the Priority Bay.
Start the
Calibration
1. Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select
Snapshot.
2. Verify that the RSH and c8000 are in the Ready state.
3. Select the c8000 module and then select F8 - Run.
4. When the c8000 enters the Running status, select the
RSH module and then select F8 - Run.
Verify
Calibration
1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the
menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP,
and AST are listed as Active.
Create a
Patient
1. Select Results from the menu bar, and then select
Order
Results review.
Note
If necessary, delete any results listed in the
Results review screen.
2. Remove any sample cups from positions 1-20 on the

sample carousel.
Patient order.
4. Verify that Single patient is selected.
5. Select the Carousel button.
6. Enter a 1 for the cup position in the P: data entry box.
7. Enter a number in the SID data entry box.
assays list and then select F3 - Add order.
Note
After selecting F3 - Add order, the cup position in
the P: data entry box automatically increments.
9. Enter another number in the SID data entry box.

assays list and select F3 - Add order.
11. Repeat Step7 and Step8 until you have created a
patient order for Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP, and AST for
positions 1 -20 on the sample carousel.
Load Level
II Controls
1. Pipette 125 µL of Level II Control into 20 sample cups
into
and place them into positions 1-20 on the sample
Positions 1-
carousel.
20 on the
Sample Note
Carousel If necessary, allow the control material to thaw for
30 minutes and then gently tilt until mixed.
2. Replace the sample carousel cover.
Note
The Order status stays in Pending if the sample
carousel cover is not detected.
Start the
Run
Snapshot.
2. Verify that the c8000 is in the Ready state.
3. Select the c8000 module and F8 - Run.
Print Results
1. When the run completes, select Results from the menu
bar and then select Results review.
2. Select Assay in the Results review screen.
3. Select F - 4 Print and then select the Results List
Report option.
Record and
Evaluate
1. Enter the processing module serial number and software
Results
configuration on the form below.
2. Enter the PVT test results into the PVT Test Results
table.
3. Calculate and record the difference.
4. Use the PVT Test Acceptance Criteria to determine if
the PVT passed or failed.
5. Enter the results into the PVT Test Results table. See
below.
6. Sign and date the form.
Delete PVT
Results and
1. Delete patient results, exceptions and PVT assays from
Assays
Note
You cannot delete the assays if there are pending
orders. Delete any pending orders prior to trying
to delete the PVT assays.
2. Select System from menu bar and the select

Diagnostics.
3. Select the Module 5 button (SCC) option on the
diagnostics screen.
5. Select 6114 Install/Delete Assays option and select F-5
Perform.
6. Select OK to perform the procedure.
7. Select Delete.
8. Enter the assay numbers of the assays that are to be
deleted (e. g. 1101, 1102, 1103, 1023, 1048, 1014).
9. Select Done to return the Diagnostics screen.
Remove the
Reagent
1. Remove the reagents from the reagent carousel.
Kits
2. Select Reagents from menu bar, and then select
Reagent status.
3. Select F5 � Scan.
Processing Module SN: __________________________
Software Configuration: __________________________
PVT Test Results
Assay Highest Result Lowest Result Difference (High-Low) Acceptance Criteria Pass or Fail
AST 9 U/L
LDH 19 U/L
TP 0.22 g/dL
Na-C 3.4 mmol/L
K-C 0.24 mmol/L
Cl-C 3.0 mmol/L
PVT Test Acceptance Criteria
Name of Test Assays Number of Replicates Acceptance Criteria (less than or equal to)
AST 20 9*
LDH 20 19*
TP 20 0.22*
Assay Within Run Precision Test Na-C 20 3.4*
K-C 20 0.24*
Cl-C 20 3.0*
*The difference between the highest and the lowest result in the run of 20 replicates.
Printed Name: ______________________________________
Signature: _______________________________________
Date: ____________
c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-116) • © 2002, 2011 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000 and ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000,
i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-160 Clean Water Bath Float Switch Version - 96721-108_809_1

P-160 Clean Water Bath Float Switch
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the water bath float switch. Module c8000
Gauze
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Preparation
1. Remove the three (3) screws
securing the center front deck and
remove the deck.
2. Select the Modules category from
the Diagnostics screen under the
system icon.
3. Perform 1101 Robotics Test Tool;
select 11. Water bath exchange,
then select L2 Empty to drain the
water bath.
For further
information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Subsection: System diagnostics.
Remove
Float
Switch,
securing the float switch mounting
Water Bath
bracket to the water bath and lift the
mounting bracket out of the water
bath.
Clean Float
Switch
1. Moisten a gauze with 1% alkaline
wash solution and clean the float
switch.
2. Moisten a gauze with reagent grade
type II water and remove all of the
alkaline solution from the float
switch.
Install Float
Switch,
1. Place the float switch mounting
Water Bath
bracket into position on the water
bath and secure with two (2)
screws.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Secure the center front deck with
three (3) screws.
2. Select L4 Exit in the 1101 Robotics
Test Toolscreen and then select 0.
Exit to exit 1101 Robotics Test
Tool.
Verification For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and
1. Select the As Needed category
from the Maintenance screen
P-161 Clean Filter Main Power Supply Version - 96721-108_808_1

P-161 Clean Filter Main Power Supply
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the main power supply. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

status.
Preparation
the pump center (center front) door.
Remove
Pump Door
remove the door.
Remove
Front Right
Access Panel
access panel. [2]
Remove Air
Filter, Main
1. Remove the filter cover and the filter. [1]
Power
Supply
Clean Air
Filter, Main
1. Rinse the filter with tap water until the
Power
filter appears clean.
Supply
2. Dry the filter.
Install Air
Filter, Main
1. Install the filter and the filter cover.
Power
Supply
Install Front
Right Access
Panel
Install Pump
Door
procedure.
Verification
1. None required.
P-162 Clean Filter Refrigerator Version - 96721-108_796_1

P-162 Clean Filter Refrigerator
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the refrigerator. Module c8000

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Preparation
Remove
Front Middle
Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
panel out.
Remove
Refrigerator
1. Loosen the two (2) wing nuts [1] above
Air Filter
the filter and slide the filter grating up and
out of the bracket.
2. Remove the filter [2] from the grating.
Clean
Refrigerator
Air Filter
2. Dry the filter.
Install
Refrigerator
1. Place the filter [2] in place, move the
Air Filter
bracket over the grating and tighten the
wing nuts [1].
Close Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
Install Front
Middle
Access
Panels
door.
P-163 Clean Filter SMD/SH Power Supply Version - 96721-108_806_1

P-163 Clean Filter SMD/SH Power Supply
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the SMD/SH power supply. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

Remove
Front Middle
Access
Panel
Open Fluid
Sense-
AC/DC
Panel
panel out.
Remove Air
Filter
1. Pull the filter guard off of the front of the
SMD/SH power supply and remove the
filter.
Clean Air
Filter
2. Dry the filter.
Install Air
Filter
1. Place the filter in the filter guard and
push the filter guard on the front of the
Close Fluid
sense-
AC/DC
Panel
Close Front
Middle
Access
Panel
1. Close door(s).
Verification None required
P-164 Clean R1/R2/Sample Carousel BCR Filters Version - 96721-108_817_1

P-164 Clean R1/R2/Sample Carousel BCR Filters
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the R1 and R2 bar code filters. Module c8000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Links
Clean R1 Carousel BCR Filter

Clean Sample Carousel BCR Filter
Caution

Preparation
1. Remove the screw securing the right rear
Remove
Mini BCR
Fan Filter
Clean Mini
BCR Fan
Filter
2. Dry the filter.
Install Mini
BCR Fan
Filter
screw.
Verification
1. Visual verification is performed during
Replacement. No further verification is
required.
Caution

Preparation
remove the cover.
Remove
Mini BCR
Fan Filter
Clean Mini
BCR Fan
Filter
2. Dry the filter.
Install Mini
BCR Fan
Filter
window.
Verification
1. Visual verification is performed during
Replacement. No further verification is
required.
Clean Sample Carousel BCR Filter
Caution

Ready status.
Preparation
remove the deck.
Note
Remove
BCR Mini
1. Pull straight up on the filter to remove it from the
Fan Filter
bracket.
Clean BCR
Mini Fan
1. Rinse the filter with tap water until the filter appears
Filter
clean.
2. Dry the filter.
Install BCR
Mini Fan
1. Place the filter into the bracket and slide it to the
Filter
bottom of the slot.
and shutdown.
Startup procedure.
Note
Verification
1. Visual verification is performed during Replacement.
No further verification is required.
P-165 Clean Wash Cups Version - 96721-108_804_1

P-165 Clean Wash Cups
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the wash cups. Module c8000
Materials Required 1% Alkaline Wash Solution Time 20 min
Cotton Swabs
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Clean
Wash Cups
1. Moisten a cotton swab with 1%
Alkaline Wash Solution.
2. Wipe all exposed surfaces on
the inside of the Wash Cup.
3. Moisten a cotton swab with DI
water.
4. Wipe all exposed sides of the
Wash Cup.
Note
Repeat procedure for all
Wash Cups.
P-168 Sample and Reagent Pipettor Lubrication Version - 96721-108_803_2

P-168 Sample and Reagent Pipettor Lubrication
Purpose Perform this procedure to lubricate the sample and reagent pipettor during preventive Module c8000
maintenance.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Lubricate Sample and

Reagent Pipettors
1. Lubricate the sample and the reagent
pipettors at the indicated location(s).
Note
The sample pipettor does not
have a locking solenoid.
P-169 Clean Filter RSH Card Cage Filters Version - 96721-108_802_1

P-169 Clean Filter RSH Card Cage Filters
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the filter on the standalone c 8000 sample handler card cage. Module c8000
Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard

1. The processing module must be in Stopped or Ready
status.
Remove
Cover
2. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the right side
Remove Air
Filter
1. Remove the two filters.
Clean RSH
Card Cage
1. Rinse the filters with tap water until the filters appear
Filter
clean.
2. Dry the filters.
Install Air
Filters
1. Install the two filters.
Install
Cover
1. Install the right side cover and secure with four (4)
screws.
2. Install RSH right end cap and secure with two (2)
phillips screws on the inside of the end cap.
P-170 c8000 PM Log Interpretation Version - 96721-108_4388_1

P-170 c8000 PM Log Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpet PM Log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
Materials Required Floppy, CD, or modem for retrieval Time N/A
C System PM Log Entry Status Word
The Status Word is the information/data that defines the c8000�s PM result of an aspiration, wash, or dispense operation. The
status words are generated by the PM PCB and sent to the c8000 CPU and the SCC. These status words contain the necessary PM
information for the c8000 CPU and the SCC to analyze what happened during an aspirate, dispense, or wash operation. The status
words contain algorithm results, algorithm details, and sample identification information.
Although the PM log includes dispense operation data, this procedure will only focus on the wash and aspiration operations.
PM Log Entry Example
11.26.2008
15:26:21|1|0|WSH|20|0|0|0|0|2.3308117|46.4935596|45.1390309|2.2030260|2.2081374|40.0122674|43.4369250|0|
0|0|0
11.26.2008 15:26:23|1|137380|ASP|10|0|0|0|0|-0.3286508|-0.5442666|-0.6958510|-0.8000653|-0.7791571|
-0.6889905|-0.5824894|-0.4727213|
-0.5984972|1.9611238|0.2126756|0.2009147|1.6748620|24b|0|1.4989100|1.4793100|0|0|13.00
11.26.2008
15:26:24|1|137380|DIS|30|0|0|0|0|2.0777524|2.2590657|2.4485462|2.6099314|2.7330938|2.7219863|2.6573015|2.5
570075|2.5249918|0.0000000|0|0|0|59678|0|0|0|0|0|5.00
Note
The PM log entries are referred to as a Record/Status Word.
All PM logs contain:

Internal Probe Wash Record/Status Word data (denoted by WSH)
Aspiration Record/Status Word data (denoted by ASP)
Dispense Record/Status Word data (denoted by DIS)
Internal Probe Wash Record/Status Word Data Description and Troubleshooting
Result Result Beginning Steady

Date & Location Rep Result Pre-Wash Positive Peak Negative Peak Unusued
Designator Detail Detail Wash State
Time Byte ID Status Pressure Pressures Pressures Fields
#1 #2 Pressure Pressure
03.22.2009 1 0 WSH 20 0 0 2.3308117 46.4935596 45.1390309 2.203026 2.2081374 40.012267 43.436925 0 0 0 0

07:59:37
Wash Status
Interpretation Probable Cause and Corrective Action(s)
Word
Result Status 20 = Pass Wash code 22 due to :

21 = Wash failed, try again
22 = Wash Failed. System Halted due to extremely high Crimped wash pump or sample arm tubing
pressure Clogged sample probe/damaged probe tip
Aspirated fibrin clot
Wash cup flow rate not in spec. Perform M&D
1175 Wash Cup Test
Incorrect syringe seal installed. Ensure ICT probe
seal is not installed in the sample syringe.
Result Detail Any value other than 0 denotes a wash failure Same as above
#1
Result Detail Any value other than 0 denotes a wash or sensor failure
#2 If value = 1 or 9; indicates the wash overpressure
was activated due to a damaged probe or clot
If value = 8, c, 4 or 5; indicates PM PCB could
not communicate with the pressure sensor. Most
likely due to failed PM sensor or PM board.
Pre-Wash Pressure must remain between -4.6 and +4.6 psi Failures are usually due to:
Pressure
Clots
Bent Probe tips
Erratic pressure sensor
Obstructed Sample/reagent syringe
manifold/tubing (obstruction in reagent line ports
can affect pressure in sample line)
Beginning Wash pressure generated by the wash Pump. Must be A failure reflects a substantial loss in pressure due to:
Wash greater than or equal to 27 psi.
Pressure Bad Wash pump (bellows or poppets)
Tubing (wash pump, syringe, probe) not
connected or loose
Loose or failed syringe
Low input water pressure into the instrument
Damaged degasser
Steady State Pressure must remain between 27 and 70 psi Failures are usually due to:
Pressure
Loose or crimped tubing
Clots
Bad wash pump (bellows or poppets). Ensure
wash pump O-rings are present
Incorrect syringe seal installed. Ensure ICT probe
seal is not installed in the sample syringe.
Aspiration Record/Status Word Data Description and Troubleshooting:
Date & Time Location Byte (1=RSH, 2=LSH) Rep ID Operation Indicator Result byte Result Detail #1 Result Detail #2 not used not used
11.26.2008 1 137380 ASP 10 0 0 0 0

15:26:23
Average Aspiration Pressure area 1 thru area 8
-0.3286508 -0.5442666 -0.695851 -0.8000653 -0.7791571 -0.6889905 -0.5824894 -0.4727213
total average asp. avg. Aspiration front average aspiration end not avg. End of wash not LLS detect Min and not not Sample Aspiration
pressure Pressure pressure used Pressure used Max voltage used used volume
0.5984972 1.9611238 0.2126756 0.1385 1.674862 18f 1.49891 1.47931 0 0 13.00
Aspiration
Interpretation Probable Cause and Corrective Action(s)
Status Word
Aspiration Denotes if the aspiration was successful or failed. Code 12 due to:
Result Byte Code 10 = passed
Code 11 = clot detected probe is washed, aspiration Clotted Sample
continues( no action required) Damaged sample probe Code 13; troubleshoot
Code 12= Extreme Clot/high pressure. Sample arm LLS error
operation is halted
Code 13 = LLS or crash sensor errors detected.
Aspiration Any value other than 0 denotes a failure. If value is 8,a,2,c,or e occurs :
Result Detail Values of 8, a, 2, c, or e indicate a clot occurred during
#1 aspiration. Check for clotted sample
Value of 1 indicates a small amount of air was detected. Damaged Probe (should also see values 11 or 12
However an error will not be flagged by the instrument in the Aspiration Result byte field)
If value is 1:
Check for loose tubing connections
Aspiration Denotes end of wash pressure. Value is usually 0. Troubleshoot generated error
Result Detail A value of 10 indicates a pressure failure and an
#2 instrument error will be generated.
Can see values of 1, 2, 3 or 8 in this field but these
values will not cause an instrument error.
Average These are eight different pressure values calculated and
Aspiration used by the PM PCB to determine if air or clots are
Pressure Area present in the sample. The PM PCB divides each
1 thru Area 8 aspiration waveform into eight different sections and
performs digital filtering to recreate an average pressure
for each section. The eight points allow the users of the
log to recreate the aspiration waveform (when plotted).
This is probably the most useful feature of the PM
log because it allows the user to evaluate each
aspiration that has occurred. The more negative the
values, the thicker the sample.
Total Average Value used to determine if a clot occurred. This value is Check for clotted sample
Aspiration always negative and greater -5 psi, however thicker
Pressure samples of large volumes will cause this value to be
more negative.
Average Pressure must be less than 1.0 for volumes less than If failure occurs:
aspiration end 4ul and less than 2.0 for aspiration volumes greater than
Pressure 4ul. Check for clotted sample
Average end Indicates if a clot was cleared from the probe. Pressure
of wash must be between -6 and +7 or an error will occur.
Pressure
ARCHITECT c8000 Service and Support Manual (Version 96750-120) • © 2002, 2009 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. c4000, ci4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT�ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-171 Reaction Carousel Motor Coupling Lubrication Version - 96721-108_4423_2

P-171 Reaction Carousel Motor Coupling Lubrication
Perform this procedure to lubricate the Reaction Carousel Motor Coupling. Module c8000
Purpose
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
1. The processing module must be in Stopped,

Offline, or Ready status.
Preparation 2. Loosen the four (4) screws securing the left rear
Lubricate
Reaction
1. Spread a thin layer of grease around the springs
Carousel Motor
of the coupling. [1]
Coupling
Prepare For
Operation
1. Install the left rear cover and secure with the four
(4) screws.
2. Install the right rear cover and secure with the
four (4) screws.
Verification
1. After repair is complete, verify per released
Note
If the system/instrument produces results,
P-172 c8000 Optics Total Test and Photometer/ICT DAQ Data Version - 96721-108_4427_1

P-172 c8000 Optics Total Test and Photometer/ICT DAQ Data
Provide the field the procedure algorithm for the c8000 M&D 1008 Optics Total Test and M&D 1002 Module SCC
Photometer/ICT DAQ Data. It also contains possible causes and corrective actions to resolve certain
Purpose conditions that may cause these M&D procedures to fail.
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time N/A

Required
M&D 1008 Optics Total Test
The Optics Total Test Procedure will test the variability in the optics reads throughout a 30-33 read test. These reads can be taken
with the lamp on or off, and the shutter opened or closed. The specifications for the range of AD reads are as follows. Shutter
opened ≤100 and shutter closed ≤15. The mean specifications for shutter opened is ≥10000. A quick test option is also provided,
which will allow the user to take one read on a single Total Protein sample and compare the mABS to the specification of ≥0.3.
Possible Failures &

Option Description
Corrective Action
Options
to Run
1. A menu is displayed to allow a FSE or lower access level operator to select which test
to run:
Quick Test
Optics Dark Current Test
Optics Shutter Test
Exit
Quick
Test Possible Failures:
1. The Quick Test does the following:
The 0% transmittance is taken and cuvette 2 is washed. mABS is <0.3
The R1 pipettor will dispense 200ul of water from the internal water supply into
cuvette 2. Wavelength reads are taken on cuvette 2. Cuvette 2 is washed again. Corrective Action:
The operator is instructed to pipette 160-250ul of Total Protein reagent into Clean/replace
cuvette 2. Wavelength reads are taken on cuvette 2. Cuvette 2 is again washed. cuvette #2
The mABS at 340nm is calculated and compared to the pass condition of an Replace optics
absorbance greater than or equal to 0.3. The absorbance value and the
pass/fail condition are sent to the results window and printed report.
The procedure will return to the main menu.
Note
If procedure fails, perform Daily Maintenance and repeat test. If still
failing go to Corrective Actions.
Optics
Dark Possible Failures:
1. The Optics Dark Current Test does the following:
Current
The operator is instructed to turn the power off and disconnect the lamp. The Dark Current Mean
Test
operator will then power on the instrument, and the procedure will wait for a >10000
connection to be established to the instrument before continuing.
Thirty static wavelength reads for all sixteen wavelengths are taken on cuvette or
1 every second. Dark current range
The mean and range are calculated for each wavelength. These values are ≥15
sent to the results window.
If the operator is logged in as Field Service or greater, a menu is displayed Corrective Action:
allowing them to select the type of report to generate from the following options:
Check for stray light
Detail or Summary. If the operator selects Detail, all reads for all wavelengths
Electrical noise.
are printed to the report along with the mean, range, and pass/fail information. If
Ensure optics is
the operator selects Summary or is logged in less than Field Service, the
properly grounded.
mean, range, and pass/fail information is printed to the report for every
wavelength. Note
The procedure will return to the main menu. The ground
wire is
Note
installed with
If procedure fails, repeat test. If still failing, go to Corrective Actions.
the screw that
is placed in
the pre-amp
cable cover
paint-masked
screw hole.
Replace Optics
Optics
Shutter Possible Failures:
1. The Optics Shutter Test does the following:
Test
Thirty static wavelength reads with the shutter opened for all sixteen Mean Shutter
wavelengths are taken through the water bath every second. opened result is
Thirty static wavelength reads with the shutter closed for all sixteen <10000
wavelengths are taken through the water bath every second.
The mean and range are calculated for each wavelength and cuvette. These Corrective Action:
values are sent to the results window. Verify lamp voltage
If the operator is logged in as Field Service or greater, a menu is displayed Replace Shutter
allowing them to select the type of report to generate form the following options: Replace DAQ Bd
Detail or Summary. If the operator selects Detail, all reads for all wavelengths Replace lamp PS
are printed to the report along with the mean, range, and pass/fail information. If
the operator selects Summary or is logged in less than Field service, the mean,
range, and pass/fail information is printed to the report for every wavelength. Possible Failures:
The procedure will return to the main menu.
Mean Shutter
Note opened result is
Shutter Closed mean and range values should be comparable to values >10000
obtained for Dark Current Reads.
Corrective Action:
Replace shutter
Possible Failures:
Range Shutter
Opened result is
>100
Corrective Action:
Clean/Decontaminate
the Water Bath
Look for other
source of
contamination (i.e.
shredding guide
roller)
Optics not properly
grounded
Possible Failures:
Range Shutter
closed result is >15
Corrective Action:
Electrical noise (DAQ
bd. or optics)
Optics not properly
grounded.
Exit
1. Any cuvettes used during the procedure are washed.
2. If a cuvette segment was removed, the operator is instructed to replace it.
M&D 1002 Photometer/ICT DAQ Data
The Photometer/ICT DAQ Data procedure provides DAQ data for 16 wavelengths and 16 ICT channels. The procedure takes and
sets the optics gains and is performed to check for lamp degradation. The wavelength range used on the c8000 System is 340 to
804. When the M&D is selected, a menu is displayed to allow the user to select Auto Gain, A/D number, A/D range and Exit.
The procedure reads and displays the Auto Gain, A/D number and A/D range for the instrument. It will also periodically update the
A/D number and range. The Auto Gain option will display auto gains for each wavelength in the results screen. The A/D Number
option will display the A/D number for each wavelength and each ICT and DAQ channel in the results screen. Numbers will update.
The A/D range option will display the A/D range for each wavelength and each ICT and DAQ channel in the result screen. Numbers
will update. The specifications for the Auto Gain, A/D number, A/D range are as follows: Auto gain range is typically 1-4, A/D number
(A/D read) is 35,000-65,000 and the A/D range is usually less than 100.
Note
Although auto gain range is typically 1-4, 2.6 is the maximum acceptable gain.
Option Description Possible Failures & Corrective Action
Options
to Run
1. 1A menu is displayed to allow a FSE or lower access level operator
to select which test to run:
Auto Gain
A/D Number
A/D Range
Exit
Auto
Gain Possible Failures:
1. The Auto Gain does the following:
The reaction carousel homes and the instrument takes and Gain is greater than 2.6
sets the optics gain.
The reaction carousel moves cuvette 38 to the optics position Corrective Action:
and takes gain readings for each wavelength. Replace Lamp
Each wavelength is printed in the results screen. Clean the water bath and water bath
Exit will return to the M&D 1002 main screen lenses
The procedure will return to the main menu. Dirty or defective Heat Absorbing Filter
Note Replace the DAQ Bd
Displayed gain values are 1.0, 1.6, 2.6 and 4.0 Replace Optics
DC Lamp PS
A/D
Number Possible Failures:
1. The A/D Number does the following:
If A/D is selected, the instrument takes readings for each A/D Reading not within specification
wavelength and each ICT and DAQ channel.
The A/D number for each wavelength and each ICT and DAQ Corrective Action:
channel is printed in the result screen. Numbers will update. Replace DAQ Bd
If L4, Exit is selected, the numbers will stop updating and
screen will return to M&D 1002 main screen.
A/D
Range Possible Failures:
1. The A/D Range does the following:
If A/D Range is selected, the instrument takes readings for Range is greater than 100
each wavelength and each ICT and DAQ channel.
The A/D range is printed out for each wavelength and each Corrective Action:
ICT and DAQ channel in the result screen. Numbers will Clean/Decontaminate the Water Bath
update. Look for other source of water bath
If L4, Exit is selected, the numbers will stop updating and contamination (i.e. shredding guide
screen will return to M&D 1002 main screen. roller)
Perform P-101 Reaction Carousel
Alignment.
Electrical noise (DAQ or optics)
Exit
1. Procedure will terminate.
2. Reaction carousel returns to home position.
P-173 Water Bath Clean with Alkaline Solution Version - 96721-108_4963_3

P-173 Water Bath Clean with Alkaline Solution
This procedure utilizes Alkaline Wash Solution to clean the water bath incubator and water bath Module c8000
heater circulation system.
Purpose
Debris in the water bath can pass through the light path and generate errors:
6512 Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, bichromatic check

6513 Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, bichromatic check
Performing this procedure can reduce the occurrence of error codes 6512 and 6513.
Materials Gauze or tissue (absorbent paper) Time 45
Required LN09D31-20 Alkaline Wash Solution min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Preparation
1. The processing module must be in the Stopped
status.
Remove All ARCHITECT Systems Operations Manual

Cuvette
1. From the Snapshot screen, select System,
Segments and
Diagnostics, Modules, 1101 Robotics Test Tool
Manually Clean
and Perform [F5].
2. From the main menu of 1101 Robotics Test Tool,
select Reaction Carousel, Rotate Reaction
Carousel..
3. Select L2 1 cuvette segment to rotate the reaction
carousel and remove each cuvette segment.
Note
Inspect each cuvette for damage and replace
as needed. Use gloves to avoid touching the
surface of the cuvettes. Residual oil from
ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical
reads.
4. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A wash solution

and clean the inside and outside of each cuvette.
5. Fill a clean, residue-free container with enough
purified water to completely submerge the cuvette
segment.
6. Rinse the cuvette segment in the container of water
to remove Detergent A wash solution. Drain any
excess water from the cuvettes.
7. Dry the top of the cuvette segment, especially the
slotted edges, to remove any remaining water.
Add Alkaline
Wash Solution to
1. Add 100mL of undiluted Alkaline Wash Solution
the Water Bath
(LN09D31-20) directly into the water bath incubator.
2. Allow the system to circulate for 20 minutes.
Drain and Refill

the Water Bath
page down and select Water bath exchange, then
select Empty to drain the water bath.
2. Use Gauze moistened with DI water to carefully
wipe any residue from the water bath incubator and
lens.
Note
Be careful to not damage the cuvette wipers.
3. Select L1 Fill to fill the bath.

4. Drain and refill the water bath a minimum of five
consecutive times or until no residual is seen.
select Reaction Carousel and Rotate Reaction
Carousel.
6. Select L2 1 cuvette segment to rotate the reaction
carousel and reinstall the cuvette segments.
7. Exit 1101 Robotics Test Tool and return to the
snapshot screen.
Perform Optics
Check
1. Select System, Diagnostics, and
Optics/Temperature.
2. Select 1008 Optics Total Test and F5 Perform.
3. Follow the on screen instructions and perform option
3. Optics Shutter Test.
4. When the instruction field displays Select the report
type to create, select Summary.
5. Select Exit.
6. When the instructions field displays �Procedure
completed. Select Done to exit�, DO NOT select
Done, select Print (prints the four page summary
report).
7. After the summary report prints, select Done (exits
the procedure).
8. Use the report and evaluate the results. A passing
mean and range with the shutter open indicates a
clean water bath.
Note
The summary report provides mean results,
acceptance criteria, and a pass or fail status
for all sixteen wavelengths.
Verification
1. After repair is complete, ensure appropriate Quality
Control is in specification and calibrate as
necessary.
P-174 DAQ Firmware Recovery Procedure Version - 96721-108_5199_1

P-174 - DAQ Firmware Recovery Procedure
Purpose This procedure is for recovering the DAQ firmware of the working flash memory (flash memory-1) Module c8000
by using programmed spare memory (write protected flash memory-2).
Materials Time
Required Standard Tool Kit Procedure:
15 min.
Verification:
30 min.
Total: 45
Min.
Caution
Prerequisite The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
STOPPED or READY status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation
Note
The view of the card cage is that of
a c16000.
2. Use the Removal & Replacement

procedure for the DAQ board to
access the DAQ board. Do not
remove the board from the card
cage.
Procedure for
1. Set the DIP Switch S2-3 on the
DAQ Board,
Toshiba part DAQ board to ON (Default setting
number PM10- is 5 & 6 ON all others off.)
53540*A GR 1 2. Power On the module and observe
and older (7- the four LEDS located above the
93181-04) S2 switch bank. The LEDS will
blink sequentially from the upper to
the lower one time. When the lower
LED turns on immediately set the
DIP Switch S2-3 to OFF. (Do not
power off instrument).
3. The SCC will display a popup
message stating: "0556 Update of
DAQ firmware required. Do not
perform any module activity until
completed (up to 20 minutes)."
Select OK.
CAUTION: DO NOT INTERRUPT
THIS PROCESS!
4. WAIT until another popup
message: "0553 Update of
module DAQ firmware
complete..." is displayed. Select
OK and cycle power to the module
as directed.
5. The module should go to the
STOPPED status with no errors.
Procedure for
DAQ Board, 1. Set the DIP Switches S2-5 and S2-
Toshiba part 6 on the DAQ board to ON (Default
number setting is all OFF.)
BSM10-6494 2. Power On the module and observe
and newer. (7- the four LEDS located above the
93181-05 S2 switch bank. The LEDS will
blink sequentially from the upper to
the lower one time. When the lower
LED turns on immediately set the
DIP Switches S2-5 and S2-6 to
OFF. (Do not power off instrument).
3. The SCC will display a popup
message stating: "0556 Update of
DAQ firmware required. Do not
perform any module activity until
completed (up to 20 minutes)."
Select OK. CAUTION: DO NOT
INTERRUPT THIS PROCESS!
4. WAIT until another popup
message: "0553 Update of
module DAQ firmware
complete..." is displayed. Select
OK and cycle power to the module
as directed.
5. The module should go to the
STOPPED status with no errors.
Load Robotic
Position Data 1. With the module at the Ready or
From CPU Stopped state, log on as FSE and
select System, Diagnostics,
Module 1, Modules and perform
6001 Save/Restore DAQ Data.
2. First perform Option 3 Clear Data
from the DAQ board. Then, cycle
power to c8000 module.
3. Once back to the Stopped status,
perform Option 2 Load robotics
alignment data from CPU board
to DAQ board. Then, cycle power
to c8000 module.
Verification Check all Robotic Positions using M&D

1101 Robotics Test Tools.
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 201980-110) • © 2006, 2012 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200
are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure Version - 96756-111_341_2

P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to document how to log on and log off as FSE. Log off is documented Module SCC
so that the system can be returned to normal operation after service or support.
Materials FSE Date Code List Time 1
Required min
Log On as FSE
Select
Log
1. Select Log on F2 from the
On
Snapshot screen.
Log
On Note
1. Enter FSE in all capital letters Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to operator
in the User name field. level of access. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
2. Enter the FSE logon date code
in the password field.
Note
Enter the date code in
reverse order.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the Operator listed
on the Snapshot screen lists
FSE.
Log Off as FSE
Select Log
On Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
system to operator level of access.
Note
The User Name field is selected and
populated with the name FSE.
Log On as
Operator
1. Press Delete to delete the FSE name.
Note
The password field disappears.
2. Select Done.
3. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup
screen after Operator:.
P-202 Modem Setup for Support Version - 96756-111_340_2

P-202 Modem Setup for Support
Purpose Setup your system as the remote system for using PCANYWHERE to modem into Module SCC/Modem
ARCHITECT systems.
Materials PCANYWHERE Version 10.0 or higher Time 10 min
Required
Install
PCANYWHERE
1. Install per manufacturers instructions.
Start
PCANYWHERE
1. Select Start.
2. Select Programs.
3. Select Symantec PCANYWHERE.
Add Remote
Icon
1. Select the Remotes button. [1]
2. From the list of icons displayed, Double-click
the Add Remote icon. [2]
The PCANYWHERE Remote Properties: New

Remote window displays.
Select Modem
1. Verify the displayed modem is correct. If it is not
correct, check the correct modem.
2. Select OK.
The new remote icon displays with the name

field highlighted.
Naming
ARCHITECT
1. Type in the name of your Remote Item (name of
Icon
the account or generic as ARCHITECT). [1]
2. Press Enter.
The new remote icon displays.
P-203 SCC Diagnostic Software (Virtual PC-Check) Version - 96756-111_339_2

P-203 SCC Diagnostic Software (Virtual PC-Check)
Purpose Instructions for using the SCC Diagnostic Software disk on the ARCHITECT SCC. Module SCC
Materials Required Diagnostic Software, SCC (99058) Time Variable
The SCC Diagnostic Software (Virtual PC-Check) is on any ARCHITECT SCC platform.
Refer to the appropriate product code R&R and verification procedures or ISAs for the replacement and verification of SCC
components.
DO NOT REMOVE the PC-Check disk while running the program, unless requested by the program to insert a data disk. In that
case, replace the program diskette immediately afterward.
DO NOT ABORT during hard drive testing. This causes loss of system data.
Normally, the screen display provides all information necessary to determine the nature of any fault detected.
Prerequisite
1. Exit the ARCHITECT application and Windows operating system.
Note
The PC-Check program is self-bootable and runs independently of the PC's operating
system.
2. Verify that the SCC has a working system core, a functioning central processor unit, a floppy disk
drive, and enough memory to load the program.
3. Complete processing or delete all pending test orders
4. Release all patient results
5. Archive all patient results
6. Release all QC results
7. Resolve all Exceptions and process Reruns, if necessary.
Create New
Backup
1. Create a new system backup.
Note
Use in the event of a catastrophic failure. Some tests may be destructive if the SCC power
is interrupted during the testing process.
2. Perform diagnostic procedure 6004 (option 2) to copy the system backup to a CD.
Start PC-
Check
1. Insert the PC-Check disk.
2. Perform a system shutdown and restart.
If the system boots to the PC-Check disk, go to Select Desired Diagnostic.

If the system does not boot to the PC-Check disk, access the BIOS setup function and
verify that the floppy drive (removable device) is set up as the first boot device. Then,
reboot with the PC-Check disk in the drive.
Select
Desired Note
Diagnostic Refer to PC-Check Main Menu before completing this Action.
1. At the PC-Check main menu, select the desired diagnostic test.
Note
For most issues, the option Perform Basic Testing is sufficient to determine the cause of a
problem.
Note
Passed/Failed results are displayed during this test option. Sufficient information should be
given to determine which component is failing. Use this information to make component
replacement decisions.
2. Select Exit (Write Reports) to exit PC-Check.

3. Replace the component(s) that failed according to the appropriate removal and replacement
procedure
4. Perform the test option again for the indicated failure and verify a Passed result.
If the problem is resolved by component replacement, go to Verify Replaced Component.
Verify
Replaced
1. Perform the appropriate verification procedure(s) as instructed in the removal and replacement
Component
procedure or ISA for the specific replaced component(s).
PC-Check Main Menu
Menu Item Description
System Displays overview of system information, including motherboard, BIOS, processor, memory, cache, drives, video,
Configuration audio, network, buses and ports.
IDE Bus Scans IDE bus, accesses the devices found and checks and displays the configuration.
Information
Perform Performs a set group of tests (see PC-Check Test Groups) on the processor, motherboard, memory, cache, all
Basic Testing drives, video adapter, printer functionality, speaker, keyboard and mouse. Interaction is required to test the mouse,
keyboard and speaker. Passed/failed results are displayed. Note that several tests are not a part of the customized
Abbott menu and will be displayed as `Not Run'. Other tests indicate `Absent' if specific hardware is not in the SCC.
Note
DO NOT attempt to run Basic Testing unless the appropriate amount of time can be allocated to complete all
tests. ABORTING during hard drive testing will cause data loss and require that the base configuration and
ARCHITECT application be reloaded on the hard drive. Approximate completion time is 20 minutes
(completion time may vary depending on the platform type). For Platform D, two tests, Motherboard Real-
time Clock Chip and CMOS RAM/Clock tests always show as FAILED due to an inherent incompatibility with
the software. Disregard the FAILED results for these two tests when using the diagnostic software on a
Platform D SCC.
Note
The default SCC keyboard type is Windows 104 key. The user determines appropriate selection. The printer
port is LPT1. Selecting Generic for the printer type works in most cases.
Perform Performs memory inversion test, a hard drive read-write test and hard drive mechanics stress test. Approximate
Advanced completion time is 20 minutes (completion time may vary depending on the platform type).
Testing
Display Test Displays test results.
Results
Print Test Allows for printing of test results printed.
Results
About Virtual Lists PC-Check version and which components of PC-Check are active on this customized disk.
PC-CHECK
Exit (Write Exits PC-Check. Does not write/save Results Summary.
Reports
PC-Check Test Groups
Group Test Basic Advanced
Processor Core
X
Processor Coprocessor Core
X
Processor
Processor Known Design Faults
X
Processor MMX Extensions
X
Motherboard DMA Controller
X
Motherboard System Timer
X
Motherboard Interrupt Controller
X
Motherboard
Motherboard Keyboard Controller
X
Motherboard PCI Bus
X
Motherboard Real-Time Clock Chip
X
Memory Inversion Tree
X
Memory Progressive Inversion
X
Memory
Memory Chaotic Addressing
X
Memory Block Rotation
X
Cache Memory Inversion Tree
X
Cache Memory Progressive Inversion
X
Cache Memory
Cache Memory Chaotic Addressing
X
Cache Memory Block Rotation
X
Hard Drive Read
X
Hard Drive Non-Destructive Write
X
Hard Drive
Hard Drive Mechanics Stress
X
Hard Drive Internal Cache
X
Video Adapter Text Memory
X
Video Adapter
Video Adapter Super VGA Memory
X
Printer Printer Test
X
Speaker Speaker Test
X
Keyboard Keyboard
X
Mouse Mouse
X
Laboratories. c4000, c4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure Version - 96756-111_338_2

P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure
This procedure documents retrieval of current logs, copying the database to CD, copying archived logs SCC
Purpose to CD, and retrieval of a Memory Dump file. If requested by Abbott personnel, the logs may be cleared Module
from the system.
Retrieve current logs: This option copies the following logs to the D drive and floppy or CD if
selected: Assay Activity, Assay Calibration, Assay Parameter, Assay QC Result Data, Liquid
Level Sense, Maintenance History, Permanent Message History, Pressure Monitoring, Quality
Control, Result, Scripting, Temporary, Temporary Message History, Sample Activity, Dr. Watson,
Host, LAS, ARM, Arch, Unhandled, Application Event, CDRecord, Monitorlog, Printed Reports.
In addition, the iSystem copies: Power On Self Test, PM Trace, Wash Aspirate
Monitoring.
In addition, the cSystem copies: Optics
In addition, the i1000SR copies: Regeant
Copy database to the CD: This option compresses and copies the database to the D drive and
CD.
Copy archive logs to CD: This option copies up to 5 previously retrieved compressed logs from
the D drive to a CD.
Retrieve memory dump file: (FSE only) This option compresses and copies a memory dump file
to a CD.
Refer to the tables below for additional information regarding each option.
Materials vary depending on the option selected. Required materials may include CD, or Floppies Variable
Materials Time
Required
Prerequisites P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure

1. The system should be powered ON.
2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, Warming, or
Ready state.
Access 6009
Log Utilities
1. Select the System icon, then select Diagnostics from the drop-
Procedure
down menu.
2. Select the radio button for module 5.
3. Select the Utilities category.
Retrieve Logs
Note
1. Select 6009 Log Utilities procedure. Logs should not be cleared unless
2. Select Perform F5. A confirmation popup displays. specifically requested by in-house
3. Select OK to perform the procedure. The diagnostic perform Abbott personnel.
dialog window displays. A description of the procedure displays
on the instruction window.
4. Select Proceed to continue the log retrieval procedure.
5. Select the appropriate option. Refer to the tables below for
additional information.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
7. When the procedure is complete, select Done.
File Transfer
(Optional)
1. Perform P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure to transfer the
logs via modem.
Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action
Not enough free space on A temporary copy of the files is copied to the C: drive before copying them to
C: drive to create the CD. There is not enough space on the C: drive to copy the temporary files.
Perform the
temporary image files One of the following could have occurred:
appropriate
drive recovery
Non-ARCHITECT software was installed on the SCC. procedure
The C: hard drive contains bad sectors. Replace the
hard drive
No CD recorder detected
The CD drive is not a read/write drive. Perform the
The Gearworks drivers are corrupted. appropriate
CD drive hardware failure drive recovery
procedure
Replace the
CD drive
Unknown error The COPY2CD_2 program was executed but did not respond.
Perform the
The COPY2CD_2 program has been moved or is corrupted. appropriate
drive recovery
procedure
Retrieve Current Logs Option
This option captures logs for troubleshooting or software investigation. The table below details each log and describes when that log
is used. The log name has the following format: date_24time_serial#_logname.xxx (where x-axes is the extension of the log file). The
files may be copied to a floppy disk, CDR/CDRW disk or hard drive. If floppy disk is selected the logs are compressed and saved to
1 or more floppies. If CD is selected the files are recorded uncompressed to a blank or appendable CDR or CDRW disk. If hard
drive is selected the files are saved uncompressed to D:\Logs. In addition, all logs are saved in an archive file (refer to Copy Archive
Logs to the C Drive option for additional information).
Capture Log Module

Log Log Name Steps Log Format Capacity
When Specific
Application eventapp.txt Records the Format-specific for the application event 9900 or 9077 No
Event application error errors
event error occurred and
information. the SCC has
shut down.
Dr. Watson
errors
Arch arch Records Format-specific for architecture errors Architect No
architect exception
exception error errors
information.
ARM debugcom7.log Records all Format-specific for ARM communication ARM Issues
debugcom7.log.bak communication event. No
between the
SCC and ARM.
Assay assayactivity Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Lockstep 24000 per Lockstep or
Activity assay Count | Lockstep Time | Test ID | module Timing errors Yes
performance Mechanism ID | Duration | Event | Error for i System or
activities Code c System
associated with
performing tests
Assay assaycal Records for the Assay ID | Assay Status | Reagent Master 600 Cal or Result
Calibration last 600 Lot | Calibrator Lot | Calibration Type | Issues for No
attempted Completion Date | Completion Time | i System and c
calibrations. Module ID | Module SN | Operator ID | System
Curve Exception String | Curve Type |
Calibration Summary | Curve Parameters |
RMSE | Adjuster Ratios | Linear XFRM
Slope | Linear XFRM Intercept
Assay assayparameter Records a copy Formatted as an assay parameter report A copy of When you No
Parameter of the assay in assay numerical order. the assay need to review
parameters for parameter or verify the
each assay report for assay
installed. every parameter for
assay an i System
installed. and c System.
Assay QC ReleasedQC.csv CVS format log Control Name | SID | Control Level | Stored >Control No
Result Log that contains all Control Lot Number | Control Comment | QC Issues for the i
stored QC Assay Name | Assay Number | Module | results System and c
results currently Serial Number | Cal Lot | Cal Date and currently System
in the database. Time | Reagent Master Lot | Reagent in the
Serial Number | Date Time Completed | database.
Carrier | Position | Result | Units | Min
Range| Max Range | Dilution | Flags |
Read Values | Absorbance Cuvette | Mv
Cuvette | Operator ID | System Serial
Number
CDRecord CDRecord.log Captures a copy N/A N/A Problems No
of the log reading or
associated with writing to a
the CD CD-ROM.
recording
software.
Dr. Watson user.dmp Records Dr. Format-specific for Dr. Watson events. Dr. Watson
drwtsn32.log Watson event errors No
information.
Host debugcom5.log Records all See RS-232 Manual for format Host Issues
debugcom5.log.bak communication information. No
between the
SCC and Host.
LAS debugcom6.log Records Date/Time of Event | Communication 1000 LAS Issues
debugcom6.log.bak transferred Direction | Event No
between system
and LAS
Liquid Level lls Records for fluid Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Test ID | 10,000 Level Sense
Sense aspirate events Assay ID | Pipetting Context | Pipetting per Issues for Yes
including Step Number | Well Name | Level Sense module i System and c
aspirate and Category | Level Sense Event | Step System
wickoff. Number
Maintenance maintenancehistory Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Maintenance
History maintenance Completion Status | Frequency | Operator or Diagnostic No
performed. One ID | Event Procedure
log is Issues for
maintained for i System and c
all modules. System
Monitorlog Monitorlog.txt Fan and Date, Time, Error N/A When you No
(Note: only temperature need to review
valid on monitor errors from the
SCC information from intel monitor
platform C the intel monitor software.
and higher) software.
Optics optics Records the Replicate ID | Assay ID | Dilution ID | 10,000 Need to view
optics reads for Sample ID | Test Completion Date | Test per absorbance Yes
a c8000 Completion Time | Module ID | Cuvette | module data for
module. Concentration | 16 wavelengths with 33 wavelengths
reads other than
primary and
secondary for
c System
Permanent messagehistory Records for the Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Error 12000 Hardware or
Message last 12000 error Category | Message Text Software No
History codes logged in issues for
the message i System and c
history category. System
Power On post Last record for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Event Bootup Issues
Self Test each i System Generated for i System or Yes
processing sample
module, SCC or handler
sample handler
power on
sequence.
Captures
processing
module, SCC,
or sample
handler bootup
execution or
error messages.
Pressure pm Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Test ID | 10,000 Pressure
Monitor pressure Assay Number | Protocol | Step Number | per Monitoring Yes
monitoring Well Name | Pipetting volume | PM Status module Issues for
results of fluid | Front End Pressure | Aspirate Pressure | i System and c
aspirate events. Back End Pressure | Aspirate Error Sum | System
Actual Theoretical Ratio | Pressure Error |
Stuff
Printed *.rtf An RTF version Formatted as the specific report One RTF To obtain a No
Reports of each report version of copy of the
type. each printed report.
report
type
printed.
Quality qc Event recorded Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Operator 5000 QC event
Control any time a user ID | Assay Name | Control Name | Control details for No
performs the Lot Number | Control Level Name | Detail i System and c
following: | Event System
includes or
excludes a QC
point, edits
configuration
parameters,
changes
Westgard rules,
recalibrates
reagent lot,
edits QC lot
default.
Reagent reagent Records the Reagent Carrier Detected I Reagent 4000 Reagent Yes
Activity reagent Carrier Load Complete I Reagent Carrier carrier load
activities Unload Complete I Carrier Removed I and unload
associated with Reagent Carrier Load I Reagent Carrier issues for
loading and Unload I Reagent Carrier Error I Create c1000
unloading Reagent Pack I Delete Reagent Pack I
reagent carriers Report Mixing Status I Reagent Pack Last
Aspiration I Disposition Reagent Pack I
Carousel Window I Request Carousel I
Request Carousel Response I Release
Carousel I Reagent Pack Unload Time I
Carrier Inventory I Aliquot Created I
Reagent Pack Available
Result result Records for the Replicate ID | Assay ID | Assay Status | 11200 Result, LLS,
last 11,200 Dilution ID | Sample ID | Sample Type | and PM Issues No
attempted tests Patient ID | Test Order Date | Test Order for i System
run on the Time | Test Initiation Date | Test Initiation and c System
system. Time | Test Completion Date | Test
Completion Time | Assay Calibration Date
| Assay Calibration Time | Module ID |
Module SN | Operator ID | Dark Subreads
| Signal Subreads | Dark Count | Signal
Count | Corrected Count | Std Bak | Ave
Bak | Std For | Ave For | Shape |
Exception String | Result | Reported
Result | Reported Result Units | Result
Flags | Reagent Master Lot | Result
Interpretation | Dilution Protocol | Result
Details | Result Comment
Sample sampleactivity Records all Format-specific for each significant event. 1200 Sample
Activity significant Handler Issues Yes
sample
management
events.
Scripting Script Records script Format is specific for the maintenance or 10,000 Need exists to
commands and diagnostic procedure. review specific No
responses from errors that
a maintenance occurred when
or diagnostic running the
procedure. maintenance
or diagnostic
procedure
Temporary temporary_*.log Records the log No
data into a
temporary log
as a backup.
Temporary tempmessage Records for the Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Error 200 Bar code read
Message last 200 Category | Message Text errors or Host No
History messages communication
logged in the errors for
temporary i System and c
category (ie. System
Bar code read
errors, host
communication
errors)
Trace trace Hardware Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Ticks | 10,000 Hardware
interactions to Event per issues for Yes
and from module i System or
hardware sample
devices (ie. handler
Temperature
controller, OMS
boards)
Unhandled unhandled Records Format-specific for software error Non-specific No
software error software errors
information.
Wash wam Records for Date/Current_Time | Module_ID | 3200 Wash Aspirate
Aspirate wash aspiration Zone_Number | St1test# | St1Max | Issues for Yes
Mechanism results of wash St1Delta | St2test# | St2Max | St2Delta | i System
aspirate events. St3test# | St3Max | St3Delta
Copy Database to CD Option
This option backs up the database to the C: drive, compresses the database and records it to a CD. Once copied, the compressed
file is deleted from the C: drive. This option may be required when requested for software investigation.
Copy Archive Logs to CD Option
This option allows the user to copy previously retrieved logs from the hard drive to a CD. When the Retrieve Current Logs option is
selected, copies of the logs are compressed into one file and stored in D:\LOGS\ARCHIVEDLOGS. The file is named with the
following format: date_24time_serial#_[1-5}.zip. Up to five compressed archived logs are saved on the hard drive with 1 being the
newest and 5 being the oldest. The user is able to copy one or more archive files to a CD at a time.
Retrieve Memory Dump File Option (FSE only)
This option compresses and records the memory dump file to a CD. The memory dump file is used to gather data (debug
information) on the utilization of system memory for the SCC.
reserved.
P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen Version - 96756-111_337_3

P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
Purpose To calibrate the touchscreen on the SCC. Module SCC

Access Explorer
1. Select the System icon.
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer opens.
Calibrate
Touchscreen
1. Using Explorer, scroll down and select Control Panel.
2. Double-click ELO Touchscreen to open it.
3. Select Align.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to calibrate the touchscreen.
5. Select OK to complete the calibration.
Note
For some touchscreen monitors, better touchscreen response is achieved by
performing the touchscreen calibration twice.
Verify Touchscreen
Calibration
1. Move through at least four screens, using the touchscreen, to verify touchscreen
operation.
reserved.
P-206 Printer Configuration Version - 96756-111_305_2

P-206 Printer Configuration
To configure the printer during installation, or when a new printer is installed. SCC/Printer
Purpose Module
None 15 min
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
screen. system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse
order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the
Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down
menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer
opens.
Rename
Architect Note
Printer to If this is a new printer and no Architect
Printer Product Printer is listed, go to Load Printer Driver.
Name
1. Using Explorer, select the Printers folder.
Note
The printers folder is located in the
C:\Control Panel directory.
2. Right-click Architect Printer (highlights

printer name) and select Rename from the
drop down menu (selects printer name for
editing).
Note
If a menu doesn't display when you
right-click the name, select File,
Rename from the menu bar.
3. Enter the printer product name (example

OKI B4350).
4. Press Enter to rename the printer.
Load Printer
Driver Note
If this is a new printer and the printer
driver is already listed in the printers
directory, skip this Action.
1. Insert the printer driver CD into the CD-

ROM drive.
Note
If the CD starts automatically, stop
that action. Exit the opening screen
from the CD and return to the
desktop.
2. Access the Printers folder and double-

click Add Printer.
3. Select Next (starts the Add Printer
Wizard).
4. Select the Local printer radio button.
5. Select Next.
6. Select LPT1 (connection port).
7. Select Next.
8. Select Have Disk.
9. Select Browse and locate the desired
printer driver file on the CD-ROM.
Note
Refer to the appropriate ISA for the
appropriate printer driver file name.
10. Select the driver and select Open.

11. Select OK, then Next several times until
the Completing the Add Printer Wizard
pop-up displays.
Note
Do not change any of the settings
on these screens.
12. Select Finish.
Note
The Wizard loads the new driver.
13. Remove the printer driver CD from the CD-
ROM drive.
Rename
Printer to
1. Right-click the name of the newly added
Architect
printer (highlights printer name) and select
Printer
Rename from the drop down menu
(selects printer name for editing).
Note
Rename from the menu bar.
2. Enter Architect Printer as the new name.

3. Press Enter to rename the printer.
Set Paper
Size
1. Right-click Architect Printer and scroll
down to Printing Preferences.
Note
Properties from the menu bar.
2. Select the Paper/Quality tab.

3. Select the Advanced button.
4. Select the desired paper size.
5. Select OK.
6. Go to Set Architect Printer as Default.
Set Architect
Printer as
1. Right-click Architect Printer (highlights
Default
printer name) and select Set as Default
Printer.
Note
right-click the highlighted item,
select File, Set as Default Printer
from the menu bar.
2. Verify that Set as Default Printer is

checked in the menu that displays.
3. Repeat this step to verify that when you
right-click the Architect Printer, a
checkmark displays in front of Set as
Default Printer.
4. Go to ARCHITECT Print Screen
Verification.
ARCHITECT
Print Screen Note
1. From any ARCHITECT screen, press If this print test fails, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs
Verification
Alt+Print Screen and verify that the for information on Properties and Document Defaults for
screen prints. the printer.
ARCHITECT
Report Print Note
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the If this print test fails, verify that the printer is selected as
Test
Results icon. the default printer. If it continues to fail, refer to current
2. From the dropdown menu, select Results ARCHITECT ISAs for information on Properties and
Review. Document Defaults for the printer.
3. Select Print F4.
4. Select Results List Report.
5. Select Done to print.
Log Off as
FSE
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot
screen.
Note
The User Name field displays and is
Note
3. Select Done.
Note
Prior to leaving the site, FSE is
required to return the system to
operator level of access.
P-207 ARCHITECT Print Test Version - 96756-111_354_2

P-207 ARCHITECT Print Test
Purpose Verify printer is configured correctly. Module SCC/Printer

Verify
ARCHITECT Note
1. From any ARCHITECT screen, If this print test fails, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs for information
Print Screen
select the Alt+Print Screen keys on Properties and Document Defaults for the printer.
and verify that the screen
prints.
Verify
ARCHITECT Note
1. From the Snapshot screen, If this print test fails, verify that the printer is selected as the default
Prints
select the Results icon. printer. If it continues to fail, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs for
Report
2. From the dropdown menu, information on Properties and Document Defaults for the printer.
select Results Review.
3. Select Print F4.
4. Select Results List Report.
5. Select Done to print.
6. Verify that the report header
prints.
P-209 Use of Debug Cables for Troubleshooting (SCC Platform B or C) Version - 96756-111_293_2

P-209 Use of Debug Cables for Troubleshooting (SCC Platform B or C)
Purpose To provide instructions on how to use debug cables to troubleshoot system start up issues. This Module SCC,
procedure is especially useful when a processing module or sample handler remains in an OFFLINE i2000
status after adequate time for system start up has been allowed. SR,
i2000,
SH
Materials 7-92394-01 Cables, Debug Kit Time 15
Required min
Prerequisite
1. The processing module and sample handler must be in a Stopped status.
Preparation
1. Connect one debug cable from the top connector on the front of the card cage to
connector P8 on the SCC DIGI board cable.
Note
This cable is for the processing module.
2. Connect one debug cable from the bottom connector on the front of the card cage to
connector P7 on the SCC DIGI board cable.
Note
This cable is for the sample handler.
Prepare Software
1. Power down the processing module.
2. Log on as FSE (P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
3. Select System and then select Task Manager.
4. Select New Task.
5. Enter Explorer and then select OK.
6. Navigate to C:\TERMINALS.
7. Double-click on SSH.HT.
The sample handler hyperterminal window displays.
8. Double-click on IAHV.HT.
The processing module hyperterminal window displays.

Observe System Status
During Start Up
1. Power on the processing module.
Note
After power is applied, data displays in the processing module and sample
handler hyperterminal windows.
2. Allow the start up process to proceed until an error occurs or until the processing
module and sample handler are in a Stopped status.
3. Review the data generated during the start up process for errors or other problems.
reserved.
P-210 Modem Test Version - 96756-111_292_2

P-210 Modem Test
Purpose To be performed on installation of a system SCC, or modem. Module SCC/Modem

Verify System
is Ready
1. Verify system power is ON.
2. Verify modem is connected and ON.
3. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify status is Waiting.
Modem Into
System
1. Contact Country Support to dial in using PCANYWHERE Version 10.0 (or higher), or use a
separate computer equipped with PCANYWHERE (the FSR laptop) and a modem connection to
dial into the SCC.
Verify Remote
User
1. Remote user verifies that they are able to connect to the SCC and see the ARCHITECT user
Connection
interface.
2. Remote user verifies that they can move through at least four different screens without losing
connection.
3. Close remote user connection.
Verify System
is Ready
1. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify the status has returned to Waiting.
P-211 System Date, Time, and Time Zone Version - 96756-111_291_2

P-211 System Date, Time, and Time Zone
Purpose Set the date, time, and time zone and enable or disable daylight savings time. Module SCC
Log On as
FSE Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. the system to operator level of access. To do this,
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Set Date,
Time, and
Time Zone
2. Select Configuration from the dropdown menu.
3. Select the System settings radio button.
4. Select the System control center category.
5. Select Configure F6.
6. Enter the System date and System time.
7. Select the desired time zone.
Note
Place a check in the Automatically adjust
clock for daylight saving changes checkbox
to select automatic adjustment for Daylight
Savings Time.
8. Select Done.
Verify
Settings
1. Access the Snapshot screen.
2. Verify the date and time are correct.
P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup Version - 96756-111_290_2

P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup
Purpose This procedure is used to configure PCANYWHERE to manual startup (no modem installed), Module SCC/Modem
reconfigure automatic startup after a modem is installed, and restart PCANYWHERE.
Materials None Time 15 min
Required
Log On
Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
screen. system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
User name field.
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse
order.
4. Select Done.
Access
Explorer
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-
down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer
opens.
Access Control
Panel
1. Using Explorer, scroll down and select
Control Panel.
2. Select it to display the icons on the right
side of the screen.
Access
Services
1. Scroll down the Explorer window to find
the Administrative Tools icon.
2. Double-click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3. Double-click the Services icon.
4. Verify that the Services window opens.
5. Scroll down to find PCANYWHERE Host
Service and double-click the icon to
select it.
PCANYWHERE
Settings
1. View the Service status and the
Startup type.
The Startup type [1] indicates

PCANYWHERE status during power ON.
Automatic indicates
PCANYWHERE starts
automatically at power ON.
Manual indicates the user must
start PCANYWHERE in the
Services Control panel
The Service status [2] indicates if the

service is or is not active.
Started in the status field

indicates that the PCANYWHERE
service is running.
Stopped indicates that the
PCANYWHERE service is not
running.
Disable
PCANYWHERE Note
Perform this procedure if a modem is
not installed on the SCC.
1. Set to Manual Startup:
From the services window, select

PCANYWHERE Host Service
from the list.
Set the Startup type to
Manual. [1]
Select OK to save the setting.
2. Stop the service:
If the Service status indicates

Started, select Stop to stop the
PCANYWHERE Host Service. [2]
A message displays indicating that
the system is attempting to stop
the PCANYWHERE service.
3. Select OK to save the setting.

4. Close the Services window.
5. Restart the SCC and verify that
PCANYWHERE does not start
automatically.
Verify/Configure to Automatic Startup and Start the Service
This is only required if PCANYWHERE does not go to the waiting mode when the SCC is restarted. This may occur if the service
setting for PCANYWHERE was changed from Automatic to Manual start.
Note
Verify that a modem is connected, turned on, and the telephone line is functional.
Verify/Configure to
Automatic Startup
1. In the Services window, with PCANYWHERE Host Service selected, double-click.
2. Select the Automatic Startup type.
Start Service
1. If the Service status lists Started, verify the modem is operational according to P-
210 Modem Test.
2. If the Service status lists Stopped, select Start to start PCANYWHERE Host
Service. A message displays attempting to startup PCANYWHERE and then puts it
in Waiting.
Note
If an error message is received select OK.
3. Select OK to save the setting.

4. Close the Services window.
5. Restart the SCC.
Verify
PCANYWHERE
1. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify the status is Waiting.
Starts Automatically
Verification
1. Verify modem operation using P-210 Modem Test.
P-213 Modem Connection to an SCC Version - 96756-111_289_2

P-213 Modem Connection to an SCC
Purpose This procedure documents how to use PCANYWHERE to modem into an ARCHITECT Module SCC/Modem
SCC.
Materials None Time N/A
Required
Contact
Customer
1. Contact the customer and obtain permission to
modem into their system.
2. Inform them why you are modeming in and what
activities you expect to perform while connected
to their system.
3. Ask the customer to verify that the modem is on
and connected to a telephone line.
Verify
PCANYWHERE
1. Have the customer press Alt+Tab to locate the
Status
PCANYWHERE icon.
Note
If the icon is not available, then
PCANYWHERE is not open or is not in a
waiting status.
2. Have the customer verify that the

PCANYWHERE dialog indicates
PCANYWHERE in a waiting status.
If PCANYWHERE is waiting, go to Open

PCANYWHERE.
If PCANYWHERE is not waiting, ask the
customer to restart the SCC, or refer to
P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup.
The customer may have closed

PCANYWHERE accidentally
PCANYWHERE has been changed
from Autostart to Manual start.
Open
PCANYWHERE
1. Start PCANYWHERE.
2. Select the Remotes button. [1]
3. Double-click the ARCHITECT icon. [2]
Note
If you work with pre-configured accounts,
double-click the account icon and the
computer automatically dials the number.
Enter Modem
Number
1. Enter the modem number for the ARCHITECT
SCC. [1]
Be sure to enter any necessary access codes

(for outside line, etc.)
2. Select OK.
Log In
1. Enter FSE in the Username field.
2. Enter fse in the Password field.
3. Enter SCC in the Domain field.
Note
The PCANYWHERE file manager window
displays.
Once connected to an SCC, an image of

the SCC screen displays on your system.
You can perform:
All on-screen operations.

Most keyboard operations.
Note
Response to mouse clicks and keyboard
entries is slower than when you are
working directly on an SCC. Also, the
colors used in the ARCHITECT software
are not correctly presented in the
PCANYWHERE screen image. This does
not impact available functionality.
Complete
Modem
1. Refer to the functions and activities listed under
Activities
Accessing Different Applications on the SCC to
complete the call.
If file transfer is required, refer to P-221

Modem File Transfer Procedure.
Close Call
1. If you logged onto the system as FSE at any
time during your call, log off at this time (refer to
P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure.)
2. Select the End Remote Control Session
icon. [1]
3. Contact the customer to let them know that you
have completed your modem activities.
4. Document your activities according to local
country call management procedures.
Accessing Different Applications on the SCC
Note
The ALT+TAB key combination cannot be used to move between applications from a remote computer. Use Windows NT
Task Manager to switch between programs, end programs, or launch new programs on the SCC.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
name field. Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Launch
Task
1. Select the System icon on the SCC image.
Manager
menu.
Switch
Programs
1. Open Task manager.
2. Select the program you want to use.
3. Select the Switch To button. [1]
Close
Application
2. Select the program you want to end.
3. Select End Task. [1]
4. Select Wait in the next dialog.
Note
If the same dialog displays and the
application did not quit, select End
Task in the dialog.
Open
Programs
2. Select the New Task button. [1]
If you know the name and the path of

the application you want to start, you
can type it in the dialog box. [2]
If you want to select the application by
browsing, select Browse [3] and find
the program in the Browse window.
3. Select OK.
4. Minimize the Task manager window.
P-214 Database Restore Version - 96756-111_288_3

P-214 Database Restore
Purpose If the system has database errors or will not boot up, perform this procedure to restore the Module SCC
database from the system software.
Required min
Restore from Utilities
Log On
as FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site,
FSE is required to return the
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. system to operator level of
access. To do this, perform
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. Log Off as FSE, or restart
Note the SCC.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Restore
Database
1. Select the System icon, then select Utilities. Module Calibration - System
calibration files, robo.cal and
2. Select the Backup Software radio button. sample handler.cal files.
3. Select a backup from the available backup list. System Configuration -

Default host and system
4. Select [F5] Restore and restore the: parameters.
Module Calibration Database - System
database file, Architect.bak.
System Configuration Contains M&D procedures,
assay files, assay
Database
calibrations, results, module
5. The system restarts and the module calibration, system configuration, and and SCC configuration.
database are restored.
6. For i1000SR, after restoring a system backup, force the system to unload all
the reagents from the carousel and then reload them.
This may be done one of two ways:
1. Through the user interface, from Snapshot screen, select Reagents >
Select all > F7 Unload. Once the processing module is set to Ready
and the RSH to Running, the reagents will automatically unload. Then,
remove and reinsert the carriers to reload them.
OR
2. While the processing module and RSH are in Stopped or Ready

status, fully open and close the reagent carousel cover, which will
cause all the reagents to go to BCR Fail status. Once the processing
module is set to Ready and the RSH to Running, the reagents will
automatically unload. Then, remove and reinsert the carriers to reload
them.
Restore at Boot Up (cannot start ARCHITECT Software)
Access
Restore
1. When the system software starts to bootup and
Window
you get a screen that has the ARCHITECT logo,
press Alt+Shift.
2. Verify that a restore window displays.
Restore
Database
1. Select the desired backup file (the file to restore)
to highlight it.
2. Select the Create database button.
3. Select Done.
Verification
1. Verify the ARCHITECT application starts correctly.
2. Perform startup on the processing module and the
sample handler.
3. Update Inventory.
reserved.
P-215 PM Log Interpretation Version - 96756-111_287_2

P-215 PM Log Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpret PM log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
Example of PM Log:
The above sample represents only some of the potential errors. More than one error can occur, such as the 0X0150, because they
are or'd (combined) together. The 0X00150 shows a communications error and clot (0X0010) and two shape errors (0X0020).
PM
Definition Probable Cause and Corrective Action
Status
0X0001 Invalid Syringe PMIB is telling Syringe to cut on/off too early.
Try PMIB, LLS Board, Software protocol, experiment protocol
0X0002 Air Only No liquid was picked up during aspiration. Also known as front end pulse error.
Aspirated
Check LLS to see if it is triggering above the liquid
Check for droplets on side of container (condensation, splashing)
Is the container empty?
Check for connection tightness, and then start with sensor
0X0010 Clot Detected Clot Score Exceeded 1000. A clot was sucked in during aspiration.
Bad Samples. Check sample, especially if whole blood, for chunky bits (clots). Replace if clumpy.
Try a new probe then a sensor. Be sure to flush using CLI command for the pipettor (OMS XX
JGXXXX) before running PM again.
0X0020 Shape Error Shape Error. Air was aspirated after liquid was sampled. Shape score in log exceeds 180
Sample fluid not homogenous (usually blood samples)

Probe hitting side of container. Check Robo Cal
Erratic LLS. Check LLS log for consistent liquid found position
Can be loose robot components (mount screws or Z-Motion Slop)
0X0040 Start /Stop

0X0100 Communications Suspect when you get multiple different errors on the same pipettor. Can be combined with another
Error number.
0X0500 Communications The system may not see all the data.
Error
Broken or open connections on PMIB board. LLS/PMIB Connector wires broken. Check
connections or replace PMIB
Replace LLS Board
It has been observed that the PM/LLS components sometimes work fine except in certain
combinations with a particular pipettor. Try swapping the whole set of parts between a working
pipettor and the one in question.
0X0200 Over Pressure Overpressure detected.

Detected For overpressure, either the probe or sensor is clogged or the probe hit the bottom of the container and
sealed off without z-crashing.
0X0400 Under Pressure Under pressure detected.

Detected For under pressure, check for liquid in container
General If you get a large number of errors on a single pipettor regardless of sample size, the probable causes
are:
Sensor (erratic, not linear any more, leaking)

PMIB
Connections
LLS Board
P-216 WAM Log Interpretation Version - 96756-111_286_2

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces
results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-216 WAM Log Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpret WAM log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
A guideline to use for the WAM Station Delta at each probe position is that it should be at least 1250 units (1.25 C (33.6 F) degrees).
The WAM Log record structure (each line of data) is:
Date Current_Time Module_ID Zone_Number St1test# St1Max St1Delta St2test# St2Max St2Delta St3test# St3Max St3Delta
06/10/1998 17:36:43 |1 |2 | 25 | 27274 | 34 |0 | 27649 | 852 |0 28808 | 2651
St1, St2, St3 means station 1, 2, 3 in that order.
Note
In the logfile, it is all squeezed together to conserve disk space and looks like:
06/10/1998 17:36:43|1|2|25|27274|34|0|27649|852|0|28808|2651
Note
Aspirations occur twice per lockstep - this means two lines of data for each lockstep.
Note
If no RV is present at a probe position, data is reported, but is very low. This occurs as an RV enters and moves through a wash zone.
At the first lockstep when an RV enters a wash zone, the data for Probe 1 looks normal, while the data for probe 2 and 3 is low. At
lockstep 2, the data for probe 1 and 2 should look normal, while the data for 3 is low. At lockstep 3, the data for all three probes should
look normal. (This assumes that there are at least three (3) RVs in the process path.)
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-217 Disable Keyboard Locale Hot Keys Version - 96756-111_275_2

P-217 Disable Keyboard Locale Hot Keys
Purpose This procedure documents how to disable the hot keys for local languages. Module SCC
Note
If locale hot keys are enabled when Alt+Shift keys are selected by the operator, the operating
system switches from US (standard) keyboard mapping to other keyboards (such as German,
French, Spanish, and Italian).

Required min
Log On as
FSE Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. the system to operator level of access. To do
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Disable
Keyboard
1. Use Explorer to navigate to the Control Panel folder.
Locale Hot
2. Double-click on Control Panel.
Keys
3. Double-click on Keyboard.
4. Select the Input Locales tab.
5. Select Change Key Sequence button.
6. De-select Enable Key Sequence check box.
7. Select OK.
8. Select Apply.
9. Select OK.
10. Close Explorer.
Log Off as
FSE Note
the system to operator level of access.
Note
The User Name field displays and is populated
with the name FSE.
Note
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup screen after
Operator:.
Verification
1. Press Alt+Shift on the keyboard.
Note
It is important that you only press Alt+Shift
once. If Alt+Shift is pressed more than once,
the keyboard mapping is not correctly set for
the verification.
2. Select the Orders icon.

3. Select Patient order from the drop-down menu.
4. Go to the SID field and press y on the keyboard.
Note
If "z" displays, repeat the procedure.
P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C) Version - 96756-111_276_1

P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C)
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the system software (SCC Platform C) is suspect (incorrect Module SCC
shutdown of the SCC is a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the C: drive. This
procedure includes making a backup of the database, rewriting the C: drive, reconfiguring the SCC, and
restoring the database.
Materials ARCHITECT System Software Configuration Media Time 30
Required min
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or
Offline status.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Verify
Current Note
1. Select the System icon, then Utilities. If this cannot be performed, go directly to
Backup
2. Select Backup software from the Utilities screen. Insert CD and Restart SCC.
3. Verify that a current backup displays in the Available
Backups field.
Insert CD
and Restart
1. Insert the ARCHITECT System Software
SCC
Configuration Media in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select Shutdown [F3] from the Snapshot screen.
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del keys simultaneously.
5. When the Confirm exit window displays, select
Shutdown and restart the computer and then select
OK.
Note
When the SCC restarts, a WARNING! You are
about to install ... message displays.
6. Press any key to pass the WARNING screen.
Note
The R:\> prompt displays.
Rewrite C:
Drive Note
1. At the R:\> prompt, type 2 (Software Restore for C:) The ARCHITECT Software Configuration CD
REWRITE platform... "C", Drive C: and press Enter. is a service tool and should be taken from the
2. Press Enter to pass the WARNING! screen. site when the service engineer leaves.
Note
The system starts rewriting and the C: drive is
rewritten with a clean installation of the operating
system, application programs, and default system
files.
3. When prompted to insert the next media, remove Disk 1

of 2, insert Disk 2 of 2, and select Enter (continues the
process).
4. When the rewriting process is complete and the R:\>
prompt displays, remove Disk 2 of 2 from the CD-ROM
drive.
5. Reboot the computer by simultaneously pressing the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
Note
The system restarts. When the System Settings
Change window displays, the version splash
screen displays 2.01 rather than 2.02 because
the changes made between software version
2.01 and 2.02 affect only the c8000 module
firmware.
6. When the "Do you want to restart your computer

now?" displays, select Yes.
Note
This reboot ensures all of the hardware is
recognized before continuing.
Note
If the display graphics mode is not correct, select
Shutdown [F3] to shutdown and then restart the
SCC to correct the condition.
Configure
First Module Note
When the SCC reboots, the Configure first module
window displays.
1. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number

keypad.
2. Enter the FSE logon code.
3. Select the first processing module type from the list.
Note
If installing a ci8200, the first processing module
is c8000.
4. Enter the Serial No. of the first module being installed.

5. Select OK to shutdown and restart the SCC.
Note
After the SCC reboots a new database is
created. This may take up to 20 minutes. When
complete, the Snapshot screen displays.
6. When 0537 Improper shutdown on SCC error

message displays, select OK.
Note
If a modem is not installed, the software displays
a Dr. Watson error. Perform procedure P-212
PCANYWHERE Startup to set the service to
manual.
Verify
Software
1. When the Snapshot screen displays, log on as FSE (P-
Version
201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
2. Select the System icon, then Utilities.
3. Select Software install and verify software version 2.02
displays.
Restart SCC
and Locate
1. From the Utilities screen, select Backup software.
Backups
2. Verify that the last backups display in the Available
Backups field.
3. Locate the backup that you want to restore.
Restore
Database
1. Select the database backup that you wish to restore.
2. Select Restore, and restore the:
Module Calibration - System calibration files,

robo.cal and ish.cal files.
System Configuration - Default host and system
parameters.
Database - System database file, icw.odb.
Contains M&D procedures, assay files, assay
calibrations, results, module and SCC
configuration.
3. The system restarts and the module calibration, system

configuration, and database are restored.
Log On as
FSE Note
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Calibrate Perform P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen.

Touchscreen
Configure Perform P-206 Printer Configuration.
Printer
Identify and
Perform Note
1. Determine if the software version installed requires any Reinstalling software on the C: drive erases
Required
upgrades. any upgrades performed after the installation
Upgrades
of the latest software version using the
Compare the TSB sticker on the SCC and the Software Configuration CD-ROM. It is
processing module to the latest version of the necessary to reinstall those upgrades.
TSB/ISA listing.
Use Explorer to view the folders on the D: drive.
If a Change or Upgrade folder exists, and has
content, an upgrade has been performed.
2. Perform any required upgrades per the instructions

documented in the TSB or ISA.
Startup
Processing
1. Perform startup on the processing module(s) and
Module(s)
sample handler.
and Update
Inventory
Perform
Control Run
1. Using the reagents that shipped to the site, calibrate
and run at least two (2) sets of 10 (total of 20) replicates
of each level of control for one Two Step Assay
Protocol.
2. Verify that each of the results are within the ranges
published.
3. Print the QC report and verify that the CVs are under
10%. (Refer to P-24 Precision Run)
Note
Use all positive results for the calculation.
P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification Version - 96756-111_294_2

P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification
Purpose This procedure verifies that Ethernet communication has been established between the SCC and the Module SCC
processing module(s) or sample handler.
Required min
Power ON SCC
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot
screen.
Power ON the
Module(s)
2. Verify that the status of the attached module(s) goes from Offline to Stopped.
Note
During data transfer, the corresponding LED on the Ethernet hub blinks rapidly.
Perform Startup
1. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
P-220 LLS Log File Interpretation Version - 96756-111_253_2

P-220 LLS Log File Interpretation
Purpose Use to interpret LLS log data after performing procedure P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure. Module SCC
LLS Log Field Definitions
Log excerpt showing how LLS should have increasing steps going into a container:
Regular LLS Log segment without errors:
LLS Status Codes

Readouts generated by the LLS X Status command:
Note
Works better if LLS X CLR_STATUS is run first, where X is the LLS system number, 0 (sample), 1 (R1), or 2 (R2).
Liquid Sensed, first time after replacing the cpu, or LLS board
0909
Liquid sensed, normal readout
0101
Lost contact during aspiration
0505
Self test readout, never saw liquid
0808
Shifted 0101 readout, may have crashed the probe
1011
Positively crashed the probe
1010
Theta Ground (only shows up during robo cal)
0606
P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure Version - 96756-111_281_1

P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure
Purpose Use to transfer files to and from an ARCHITECT SCC. This allows you to retrieve system logs, Module Modem
verify system files, or download updated files to the customer SCC.
Materials None Time N/A
Required
Access SCC
PCANYWHERE
1. Select the File Transfer icon. [1]
File Manager
Locate File(s)
1. Locate the file(s) you want to transfer on the
remote system or on the host system.
Transfer File(s)
1. Open the folder to which you want the file(s)
transferred.
2. Select the file(s) you want to transfer.
3. Select the Transfer icon. [1]
Note
The folder D:\Service\Temporary is on
every SCC as a temporary folder for files
that you want to transfer. The folder is a
temporary storage location; once file
transfer is complete and the files are
used appropriately, delete the files in this
folder. Reference:
Verify Transfer
The remote system (your PC) is on the left-hand
1. Verify that the file(s) that you transferred side of the screen. [2]
displays in the receiving folder. The host system (SCC) is on the right hand side
2. Complete the call according to P-213 Modem of the screen. [3]
Connection to an SCC.
P-223 Override Processing Module Cover Interlocks Version - 96756-111_280_2

P-223 Override Processing Module Cover Interlocks
Purpose Module SCC

This procedure is used to override
the following covers:
front processing module cover

(c4000, i1000SR, i2000SR,
i2000)
rear processing module cover
(i2000SR, i2000)
R1, R2, and sample carousel
(c8000, c16000)
reagent supply center, reagent
supply center maintenance (Y)
(c4000)
Materials Required None Time NA
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. to return the system to operator level of
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. access. To do this, perform Log Off as
FSE, or restart the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen lists
FSE.
Override
cover
1. Select System from the Snapshot screen.
interlocks
2. Select Configuration, and then Modules.
3. Select the desired processing module, and then select On for
Override interlocks.
Note
Results are not reported when the cover interlocks are
overridden.
WARNING
The automatic reagent carousel scan is not
performed if you open and close the reagent
carousel covers. If any reagents or segments are
removed or changed you must request a manual
reagent scan.
Change
override
1. Select System from the Snapshot screen.
cover
2. Select Configuration, and then Modules.
interlocks
3. Select the desired processing module, and then select Off for
to Off
Override interlocks.
Note
Prior to leaving the site ensure that the override cover
interlocks is configured to Off as results are not reported
when the covers are overridden.
reserved.
P-224 External Modem DIP Switch Verification (US) Version - 96756-111_279_1

P-224 External Modem DIP Switch Verification (US)
Purpose Verify Dip Switch settings for the US Robotics modem are set to default. Module Modem
Use this table to verify that the dip switch settings are at default for the US robotics modem.
Note
If a DIP switch is ON, it is down. If a DIP switch is OFF, it is up.
Default
Switch Function
Setting
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Override
1 OFF OFF - Normal DTR operations: computer must provide DTR signal for the modem to accept
commands; dropping DTR terminates a call
ON - Modem ignores DTR (Override)
Verbal/Numeric Result Codes
2 OFF OFF - Verbal (word) results

ON - Numeric results
Result Code Display
3 ON OFF - Suppresses result codes

ON - Enables result codes
Command Mode Local Echo Suppression
4 OFF OFF - Displays keyboard commands

ON - Suppresses echo
Auto Answer Suppression
5 ON OFF - Modem answers on first ring, or higher if specified in NVRAM

ON - Disables auto answer
Carrier Detect (CD) Override

6 OFF OFF - Modem sends CD signal when it connects with another modem, drops CD on disconnect
ON - CD always ON (Override)
Power-on and ATZ Reset Software Defaults
7 OFF OFF - Loads YO-Y4 configuration from user-defined nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
ON - Loads F0-Generic template from read only memory (ROM)
AT Command Set Recognition
8 ON OFF - Disables command recognition (Dumb Mode)

ON - Enables recognition (Smart mode)
P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions Version - 96756-111_214_5

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results, ENSURE appropriate
Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions
This procedure is used to reduce the frequency of the invalid bar code read errors by editing the transition field of the appropriate bar code SCC
Purpose calibration file to a value correct for the bar code type, presentation, or number of characters being used. Module
Example Sample Tubes with customer bar code labels, pretreatment tubes or other tubes with special labels. 15
Materials Time min
Required
Prerequisites
1. Power ON the system.
2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, Warming, or Ready state.
Preparation
1. Obtain a variety of sample bar codes to be used.
Note
Some sites use a variety of bar code types and number of characters. To ensure that the
file is set properly to read all tubes, it is advised to determine the minimum number of
characters used.
2. Find out the bar code type (symbology) that is used.
Log On as
FSE
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen.
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field.
4. Select Done.
Determine
Number of
1. At the Snapshot screen, select Orders and then Patient order.
Characters
2. Select the SID field.
3. Using the SCC bar code scanner, scan the bar code label on a tube.
4. Count the number of characters entered into the field.
5. Repeat the process for the next tube.
6. Of the labels scanned, determine the minimum number of characters.
Perform
3253 Bar
1. Perform 3253 Bar Code Configuration, Transition Value option (System, Diagnostics, SCC Option,
Code
Utilities), and go to Shutdown and Restart SCC.
Configuration
Manually Set
Number of Note Bar Code Transitions
Transitions The following steps are an optional method to manually enter transition values to the BCR.Cal
(Optional) File. This is required for values greater than those shown in the Bar Code Transitions table. Use
minimum value that gives reliable results.
1. Using Bar Code Transitions, locate the bar code symbology and the number of characters.
2. Determine the recommended number of transitions.
Note
Barcode types serve as examples. Special labels may use transition settings closest to
those shown on the table for the example type. All settings are verified prior to use by
performing the appropriate test listed at the end of this procedure. Both tube and empty
positions are checked. Transitions as high as 120 would be acceptable.
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Open Bar
Code Cal
1. Navigate in Explorer on the left side to the desired folder for the type of sample handler.
File
RSH and/or LSH (Sample Carousel) = C:\IPLS\RSH\System
iRSH (c4000, i1000SR, ci4100) = C:\IPLS\iRSH\System
SSH = C:\IPLS\ISH\System
LAS = C:\IPLS\LASB\System
2. In the right field, select and double-click on BCR.CAL.
3. If the Open With pop up screen displays, select NOTEPAD.
Edit
Transition
1. In the BCR.CAL file, locate the value for the transition value number under the Value column.
Value
2. Change the number to the new value determined above.
3. Edit only the numerical value. DO NOT edit or delete any of the characters.
Note
The information for the Microscan MS3 barcode reader is not used at this time. This
information will only be present on instruments at v5.00 software or higher. If an error
occurs during the editing process go to Restore Default File.
Save File
1. At the top of the screen, select FILE then SAVE.
Restore
Default File Note
This action is only required if there was an error in editing the BCR.CAL file.
1. Navigate in Explorer on the left side to the desired folder for the type of sample handler.
Note
Example: For the RSH you would navigate to C:\IPLS\RSH.
2. In the right field, select and double-click on the default directory and select BCR.CAL.
3. From the menu, select EDIT then COPY.
4. Navigate in Explorer to the appropriate sample handler system directory.
5. From the menu, select EDIT then Paste.
6. Go to Open Bar Code Cal File.
Shutdown For information on the startup procedure,

and Restart refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
1. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown to shutdown and restart the computer and processing
SCC Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
modules.
Subsection: System startup, pause, and
2. Go to Perform Diagnostic Procedure Bar Code Reader Test.
shutdown.
Perform For further information on performing
Diagnostic diagnostic procedures, refer to the
1. Perform the appropriate Maintenance and Diagnostic procedure
Procedure ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Bar Code SSH - 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test Section 10: Troubleshooting and
Reader Test RSH - 3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test diagnostics, Subsection: System
iRSH (c4000, i1000SR, ci4100) - 3230 Bar Code Reader Test diagnostics.
LAS - 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Reader Test
LSH / Sample Carousel - 3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test
Note
Use at least 10 bar coded tubes from the site when performing Maintenance and
Diagnostics.
2. Verify that all the bar coded tubes used scan correctly.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in
various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-227 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform B or C) Version - 96756-111_326_2

P-227 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform B or C)
Purpose This procedure documents how to test the host serial port. Module SCC
Materials Required Loop Back connector (shipped with the SCC) Time 10 min
Preparation
2. The processing module must be in the
Stopped, Warming, or Ready state.
Attach P3 port on DIGI board cable = Com 5

Loopback
1. Detach the LIS serial cable from the P3 serial
Connector to
port on the DIGI board cable.
Serial Port
2. Attach the loop back connector to the P3
serial port on the DIGI board cable.
Log On as FSE
Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User the system to operator level of access. To do this,
name field. perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Turn Off Host

Bidirectional
Communications
2. Select Configuration from the drop-down
menu.
3. Select Host-Release Mode from the list box.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button to
Off in the Communications section.
Note
Record the current setting (On or On
with Query). You need this information
when you turn the host communications
back on.
6. Select Done.
7. Select F1 - Exit to return to the Snapshot
screen.
Access Hyper
Terminal
menu.
3. Select New Task from the Windows NT
Security window.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Hyper Terminal
opens.
Open New
Terminal
1. Type Host in the name field from the
Connection Description dialog window.
2. Select OK.
3. Select Com 5 from the Connect Using list box
in the Connect to dialog window.
4. Select OK.
Verification
1. Select OK from the Com 5 properties window.
2. Type 12345.
If the numbers display on the screen

the serial port is working properly.
If no numbers display on the screen the
serial port is not working.
Close New
Terminal
1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the
upper right corner of the window.
2. Select Yes to disconnect the terminal.
3. Select No so the session is not saved.
Turn On Host
Bidirectional
Communications
menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button to
On or On with Query in the Communications
section.
6. Select Done.
screen.
Log Off as FSE

Note
the system to operator level of access.
Note
The User Name field displays and is
Note
3. Select Done.
Remove Loop
Back Connector
1. Remove the loop back connector from the P3
serial port on the DIGI board cable.
2. Attach the LIS cable to the P3 connector.
reserved.
P-228 SCC Bar Code Scanner Verification Version - 96756-111_327_1

P-228 SCC Bar Code Scanner Verification
Purpose This procedure is used to verify bar code scanner functionality. Module Bar Code Scanner
Materials Required Bar Code Labels Time 3 min
Verify SCC BCR Functionality

1. From the Snapshot screen, select the Orders icon.
2. From the drop-down menu, select Patient orders.
3. Select the SID field.
4. Place the SCC bar code scanner over the bar code label.
5. Verify that the number from the label displays in the SID field.
P-230 D: Drive Recovery Procedure Version - 96756-111_328_2

P-230 D: Drive Recovery Procedure
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the D: drive is suspect (incorrect shutdown of the SCC is Module SCC
a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the D: drive.
Materials ARCHITECT System Software Configuration Media Time 20
Required min
Insert CD and
Restart SCC
1. Insert the ARCHITECT System Software Configuration
Media in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select Shutdown [F3] from the Snapshot screen.
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del keys simultaneously.
5. When the Confirm exit window displays, select Shutdown
and restart the computer and then select OK.
Note
When the SCC restarts, a WARNING! You are
about to install ... message displays.
6. Press any key to pass the WARNING screen.
Note
The R:\> prompt displays.
Rewrite D: Drive
Note
1. At the R:\> prompt type 3 (Software Restore for D:) The ARCHITECT Software
REWRITE platform... , Drive D: and press Enter. Configuration CD is a service tool and
2. Press Enter to pass the WARNING! screen. should be taken from the site when
the service engineer leaves.
Note
The system starts rewriting and the D: drive.
3. When the rewriting process is complete and the R:\> prompt

displays, remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
4. Reboot the computer by simultaneously pressing the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
Note
The system restarts. Wait until the System Settings
Change window is displayed.
5. Select Shutdown [F3] and then select OK to confirm the
shutdown request.
6. When the "Do you want to restart your computer now?"
displays, select Yes.
Note
This reboot ensures all of the hardware is recognized
before continuing.
Identify and
Perform Any Note
Required Reinstalling software on the D: drive erases any upgrade
Upgrades information saved in the Change or Upgrade folder on the D
Drive. The TSB sticker can be used to obtain information on
required upgrades.
1. Determine if any upgrades affect the information just

installed on the D Drive.
Compare the TSB sticker on the SCC and the

processing module to the latest version of the
TSB/ISA listing.
2. Perform any required upgrades that affect the D: Drive per

the instructions documented in the TSB or ISA.
Backup
Database
1. When the Snapshot screen displays, select the System
icon, then Utilities.
2. Select Create backup [F4] (performs database backup).
3. Verify that the backup occurs without error.
Startup the
Processing
1. Perform startup on the processing module(s) and sample
Module(s) and
handler.
Update Inventory
P-231 Software Error Information Version - 96756-111_329_2

P-231 Software Error Information
Purpose Checklist for gathering software error information. This information should be gathered and documented in Module SCC
the call management system, when a software error occurs. This checklist should be completed for any
software error, which reoccurs several times or requires onsite service.
Required min
List
Description Information Required Information
Here
Describe the error in detail (list all actions taken, all system responses). If possible, print a
screen image of the error as not all errors are logged in the message history and
temporary message.
List all related error messages (message history and temporary message). How often
does this error occur?
Error Description
Did the error occur while printing a report? If so, which one?
Did the error occur while printing a screen image (Alt + Print Screen)?
Did the error occur while accessing the SCC?
Did the error occur while creating patient test orders, calibrators test orders, or controls
test orders?
What keystrokes were being selected when the lockup or error occurred?
Check for Hidden Error A hidden error message may be present. Hold down the Alt+Tab keys and look for the
Messages following Icon.
Use the Tab key to tab to this icon and deselect the Alt key. If an error message
is present, it should display.
What was the status of the Processing Module at the time of error?
Status and Peripheral

Devices What was the status of the Sample Handler at the time of error?
Can the operator use the touchscreen? Keyboard? Mouse?
Does the SCC respond to STOP on the touchscreen or keypad?
What is the module configuration (i2000, i4000, i2000SR, c8000, etc.)?
What is the Software Version and when was it installed? (System, Utilities, Software
Install)
Were there any power issues at the time of the lockup? Does the customer have a UPS?
Is it correctly plugged into the backup outlet? (P-42 UPS Installation)
If the system is configured for a Host interface, what was the system doing at the time?
Was it querying the host or downloading tests from the host?
System Configuration & If the system is configured for a Host interface, was it releasing patient, QC, or exception
Activities results to the host?
If the system is configured for a Host interface, was it scanning patients or controls? Was
it running bar coded controls?
If the system is configured for automatic wash buffer transfer using the
ARCHITECT ARM, was an automatic or a manual transfer in progress?
If the system is configured for automatic wash buffer transfer using the
ARCHITECT ARM, was a Host transfer occurring at the same time as the transfer or
ARCHITECT ARM request?
Log Collection Perform Diagnostic Procedure 6009, Log Utilities (System, Diagnostics, Module 5, Utilities,
6009 Log Utilities, Option 1, Retrieve Current Logs, Select Log Destination - Floppy, CD,
or Hard drive.)
Note
Up to five (5) sets of logs can be stored to the Hard drive. The logs can be copied
to a CD at a later time using 6009, Option 3, Copy Archived Logs to CD. The logs
can also be sent via modem at a later time.
Database Collection (if Collect the Database for the following issues:
needed)
Reagent Issues (mismatches, read errors, etc.)
Assay Configuration Issues (such as Retest rules)
Search Function Issues
Tests not transitioning properly in Order Status Screen or Results Review Screen
(tests staying in Scheduled, Pending Transmission)
Copy the Database to a CD using 6009, Log Utilities, Option 2, Copy Database to CD
Rebooted the SCC?
Recovery - What Rebooted the Processing Module?
procedure was used to
recover from the error? Restored a backup database?
Reinstalled software? (P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C))
reserved.
P-232 Delete Reagent Kit Version - 96756-111_330_2

P-232 Delete Reagent Kit
Purpose This procedure documents deletion of a reagent kit from the system. Module SCC
Log On as FSE
Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to
Snapshot screen. operator level of access. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
2. Enter FSE in all capital the SCC.
letters in the User name
field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date
code in the password field.
Note
Enter the date code in
reverse order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator
listed on the Snapshot
screen lists FSE.
Access
Reagent
1. Select the Reagent icon
History Screen
from the Snapshot screen.
2. Select Reagent history from
the drop down menu.
Delete Reagent
Kit Note
1. Select the desired reagent To delete an assay instead of a reagent kit, perform diagnostic
kit. procedure 6114 Install/Delete Assays.
2. Select Delete - F6.
3. Repeat Step1 and Step2 to
delete additional kits.
4. Verify deletion of the
selected reagent kit(s).
P-233 Verify and Configure BIOS (Platform C) Version - 96756-111_332_1

P-233 Configure SCC Computer BIOS
Purpose This procedure is used to configure the SCC computer BIOS. Module SCC
Platform C
Select Language
1. Power ON the SCC.
2. Press [F2] repeatedly to enter Setup.
3. On the Setup main screen verify that the BIOS Version displayed
is: HV84510A.86A.0040P11.
4. On the Setup main screen, use the arrow keys to select the
Language Option, followed by [Enter].
5. Use the arrow keys to select English, followed by [Enter].
Select Plug and Play Option and Set Up

Peripheral Configuration
1. Use the arrow keys to change the screen to the Advanced menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the options below followed by [Enter].
Verify the following settings:
Peripheral Configuration.
Serial Port A - Enabled
Serial Port B - Enabled
Parallel Port - Enabled
Audio Device - Enabled
Lan Device - Enabled
Legacy USB Support - Disabled
3. Press [Enter], followed by [Esc] to return to the Advanced menu.
Set Up Power Management

1. Use the arrow keys to select the Power menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the options below followed by enter
and verify the following settings:
After Power Failure - Stay Off
Wake on LAN - Stay Off
Wake on PME - Stay Off
Wake on Modem Ring - Stay Off
3. Press the Esc key to return to the menu.
Set Up Boot Sequence

1. Use the arrow keys to select the Boot menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the options below followed by [Enter].
Verify the following settings:
Quiet Boot - Disabled
Intel Rapid BIOS BOOT - Enabled
Boot Device Priority
First Boot Device: Removable Devices
Second Boot Device: ATAPI CD-ROM.
Third Boot Device: Hard Drive
Fourth Boot Device: Disabled
Exit and Save BIOS Settings

1. Press F10 and Yes to save and exit.
Note
To avoid system instability, press F10 even if no parameters
are changed. The SCC reboots.
2. Verify that the system restarts without errors.
Platform D
Access BIOS
Configuration
1. Cycle power to the SCC. As the SCC begins to boot up, immediately press F2
repeatedly to enter the Setup screen.
2. At the Main screen, verify the BIOS Version indicated is:
BF86510A.86A.0046.P10
BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408
BF86510A.86A.0077.P25.0508040031
Verify and/or Edit

BIOS Parameters
1. Cycle power to the SCC. As the SCC begins to boot up, immediately press F2
repeatedly to enter the Setup screen.
Note
The BIOS is installed by the vendor and may vary due to different motherboard
configurations.
2. Manually change the specific BIOS parameters as noted in the table below.
Note
To view /change a setting, use the following instructions:
1. Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and highlight the parameter to be
viewed/changed.Press Enter.
2. Highlight the desired option/parameter in the pop-up and press Enter to select it.
The new value should then be displayed.
3. Use the cursor keys to move to the next parameter.
4. Press Esc as necessary to return to the menu bar.
Save BIOS Settings

and Exit
1. After the BIOS settings have been changed and verified, press F10 and OK to Save and
Exit the BIOS setup.
Note
Even if no parameters are changed, it is important to press F10 to save the current BIOS
setup or it may become unstable. The SCC will reboot.
Platform E
Verify and/or
Edit BIOS 1. Cycle power to the SCC. As the SCC begins to boot up, immediately press F2 repeatedly to enter
Parameters the Setup screen.
2. The BIOS is installed by the vendor and may vary due to different motherboard configurations.
3. Manually change the specific BIOS parameters as noted in the table below.
Note
To view /change a setting, use the following instructions:
1. Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and highlight the parameter to be viewed/changed.
Press Enter.
2. Highlight the desired option/parameter in the pop-up and press Enter to select it. The new
value should then be displayed.
3. Use the cursor keys to move to the next parameter.
Save BIOS
Settings and
1. After the BIOS settings have been changed and verified, press F10 and OK to Save and Exit the
Exit
BIOS setup. (Even if no parameters are changed, it is important to press F10 to save the current
BIOS setup or it may become unstable. The SCC will reboot.
P-234 System Serialization Version - 96756-111_333_2

P-234 System Serialization
To configure serial numbers in the system software at installation. SCC

Purpose Module
None 15 min
Locate Serial
Number
1. Architect System No. - Completed by the SCC vendor.
Configuration
2. SCC Serial Number - Completed by the SCC vendor.
Information
Note
The first character of the SCC Serial Number is an alpha
character. It identifies the hardware used in the SCC so that the
correct replacement parts and Hard Drive Images can be
installed.
3. SH Serial Number:
RSH (c8000, i2000SR, ci8200) - Displayed under the right side end
cap of the RSH (Example: RSH02001).
RSH (i1000SR) - Uses the same 5 digit serial number as the

processing module (Example: RSHxxxxx).
RSH (c4000, ci4100) - Uses the same 5 digit serial number as the
c4000 processing module (Example: RSH01065).
Standard Sample Handler (i2000) - Created by the SCC Vendor (the

Architect System No. preceded by the letters SH (Example: SH02001).
4. PM Serial Number:
c4000 - c4000 for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM serial

number preceded by c4; Example: c401065).
c8000 - c8xxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM serial

number preceded by c8; Example: c801065).
i1000SR - i1SRxxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM

serial number preceded by i1SR; Example: i1SR01065).
i2000 - i2xxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM serial

number preceded by i2; Example: i201065).
i2000SR - iSRxxxxx for production systems (the ARCHITECT PM
serial number preceded by iSR; Example: iSR01065).
Note
For multi-module systems, module 1 is on the left.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. is required to return the
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. system to operator level of
access. To do this, perform
Note
Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
4. Select Done.
Architect
System
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the System tab.
Number and
2. Select Configuration.
SCC Serial
3. Select the System Settings radio button.
Number
4. Select the System Control Center category.
Configuration
6. Enter the following serial numbers:
Architect system no.
Note
If replacing the SCC, do not edit the Architect system
no. This number remains the same for the system as
long as it is at the current site.
SCC serial no.
Note
The system number and SCC serial number are located
on the SCC (Platform D - on the front; Platform B or C -
located on the top of the case). The SCC Serial no. field
only accepts eleven charaters. Do not use the alpha
charcter (D) that precedes the eleven character numeric
SCC serial number.
7. Select Done.
Note
After editing the serial number, shutdown and restart the SCC to
transfer the edits to the database.
Sample
Handler Serial Note
Number This activity is not required for LAS configurations.
Configuration
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the System tab.
3. Select the System settings radio button.
4. Select the Sample Handler category.
6. Enter the sample handler serial number.
7. Select Done.
Note
After editing the serial number, shutdown and restart the SCC to
Processing
Module Serial
Number
Configuration
3. Select the System Settings radio button.
4. Select the Modules category.
6. Select the desired processing module from the dropdown menu.
7. Enter the processing module serial number.
8. Select Done.
9. After editing the serial number, shutdown and restart the SCC to
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center
displays the Snapshot screen.
Enter Serial
Numbers in
1. Enter the serial numbers for the PM(s), SCC, and SH into call
Call
management.
Management
2. Enter the Architect System No. into Call Management as the location
code for each of the serial numbers.
3. Document the installation per approved country procedures.
reserved.
P-237 System Time Zone Version - 96756-111_336_1

P-237 System Time Zone
Purpose Set the local time zone for the ARCHITECT instrument location. Module SCC
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Click on OK.
Access the
Control
1. Scroll down to Control Panel.
Panel
2. Click on Control Panel to display the icons on the
right side of the screen.
Access the
Date/Time
1. Double-click on Date/Time.
Properties
2. Verify that the Date/Time Properties window
Window
displays.
Select Time
Zone
1. Select the Time Zone tab.
2. Select the local time zone from the dropdown
menu.
Note
DO NOT edit the date, time, and daylight
savings time options in this window (Date &
Time tab). Make those changes in the user
interface screen (system/configuration/system
settings/system control center).
Apply the
Settings
1. Click on Apply.
2. Click on OK.
3. Restart the SCC to apply the settings.
P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform C and D) Version - 96756-111_252_2

P-238 Hard Drive Recovery Options (Platform C and D)
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the system software is suspect (incorrect shutdown of the Module SCC
SCC is a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the C: drive. This procedure includes
making a backup of the database, rewriting the C: drive, reconfiguring the SCC, and restoring the
database.
Materials ARCHITECT Software Configuration Media Time 30
Required Freshly Formatted Floppy min
ARCHITECT System Software
Note
If you are reinstalling V2.20 software and TSB 126-028 ARCHITECT c8000 Pressure Monitoring Update was previously
installed on the system, you must reinstall the SystemParameters.ini file contained in TSB 126-028. (Reinstallation of V2.20
software writes over the SystemParameters.ini file installed according to TSB 126-028. Refer to the latest revision of TSB 126-
028 for more information.
Links
ARCHITECT System Software Setup Options Description

[Option 1] Full Installation/Software Version Upgrade
[Option 2] Restore C: Drive only (after drive replaced); Restore C: Drive on Platform C or D SCC; Reload Base
Configuration/ARCHITECT; System Software and Restore from Backup CD
[Option 3] Restore D: Drive only (after drive replaced); Restore D: Drive on Platform C or D SCC
[Option 4] Reformat D:
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform C
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform D
Acquire Backup from Old D: drive
Restore Backup from Old D: Drive
ARCHITECT System Software Setup Options Description
Option Description Reference
[Option 1] Full Installation/Software Version When to Use:

Upgrade [Option 1]
New installations and upgrades from 2.11 to 2.20

When replacing hard drive in Platform D SCC (after Base
Configuration)
When replacing both hard drives of a Platform C SCC (after
Base Configuration)
What it does:
Performs complete installation of ARCHITECT application

software C: drive components
Partitions and formats the D: drive (if not formatted) and installs
D: drive software components
If D: drive is formatted and has ARCHITECT components

installed, this option does not disturb existing backups or
folders on the D: drive EXCEPT it will always reinstall
(overwrite) the M&D files and the DisableCBT.exe and
EnableCBT.exe files in the Service/CBT folder
[Option 2] Restore C: Drive only (after drive When to use:

replaced); Restore C: Drive on Platform C or D [Option 2]
SCC; Reload Base Configuration/ARCHITECT;
When replacing C: drive only on Platform C SCC (after Base
System Software and Restore from Backup CD
Configuration)
When reloading Windows (Base Configuration) due to corrupt (or
suspected corrupt) file system (Note: Create new backup first, if
possible.)
When restoring corrupt (or suspected corrupt) ARCHITECT
software on Platform C or D SCC
When restoring system information from a back up CD
What it does:
Will reinstall Windows 2000 (Base Configuration) and

ARCHITECT application software C: drive components.
Does nothing to the D: drive
[Option 3] Restore D: Drive only (after drive When to use:

replaced); Restore D: Drive on Platform C or D [Option 3]
SCC
When D: drive only is replaced on Platform C
When reloading D: drive software components, except CBT, and
reformatting of the drive is not desired
What it does:
If D: drive has been replaced:
Will partition and format a new D: drive (if not already

formatted) and install all ARCHITECT application
software components (CBT and M&D files)
If reloading D: drive software components:
Will not reformat the D: drive

Will recreate any missing folders or files
Will not disturb existing backups or existing folders
Will always reinstall (overwrite) the M&D files (.mde) and
the DisableCBT.exe and EnableCBT.exe files in the
Service/CBT folder
[Option 4] Reformat D:
Note
This will cause all backup data to be destroyed.
When to use:
When reloading D: drive software components, except CBT
What it does:
Will always partition and format the D: drive and install all D:
drive ARCHITECT application software components (including
the M&D files)
Will erase existing backup folders and backup files
[Option 1]
Full Installation/Software Version Upgrade, Reload Only ARCHITECT Software on Platform C or D SCC
Purpose On c8000 or ci8200 system with Platform C or D SCC: Module c8000 or ci8200 System Control Center
(SCC) - Platform C or D
When reloading/restoring only ARCHITECT software
on Platform C or D SCC
Materials ARCHITECT System Software (201738) Time Not Assessed

Required
ARCHITECT System Software CD
ARCHITECT CBT CD
ARCHITECT Windows 2000 Base Configuration CD (99036)

Blank CD-R compact disc - optional
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or Offline status.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. required to return the system to
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. operator level of access. To do
this, perform Log Off as FSE, or
Note
restart the SCC.
4. Select Done.
Determine
SCC Status
1. Verify that the SCC is operational.
If the SCC is operational and if database corruption is not

suspected, go to Copy Backup Folder from D: Drive to CD.
If the Architect Software is not functional, go to Verify SCC
Boots to Snapshot Screen.
Copy
Backup Note
Folder from Perform these steps to copy the database on a CD (in the event of a
D: Drive to catastrophic failure during the procedure). These steps may only be
CD performed if the ARCHITECT software and CD drive writer are
working properly.
1. Perform diagnostic 6004 Option 1, Copy Backup software from D:

drive to CD.
2. When complete, remove and retain the CD (label as desired).
Verify SCC
Boots to
1. Verify that the SCC boots up to the Snapshot screen:
Snapshot
Screen If the SCC boots up to the Snapshot screen, go to Option A.
If the system does not boot up the ARCHITECT software, go
to Option B.
Option A
1. Insert the System Software CD.
2. From the Snapshot screen, select System, Utilities, Software
install.
Note
If a new backup was not made above, make one before
continuing (unless corruption is suspected).
3. Select Install [F3] and insert the CD as prompted.

4. Select OK.
5. At the Setup menu, go to Reinstall ARCHITECT Software.
Option B
1. While at the power up/shutdown or Abbott logo screen, press
Ctrl+Alt+Delete and select Task Manager.
2. Enter FSE in the Username filed and enter the FSE password.
3. Select New Task and type or select Explorer.
4. Select OK.
5. Close the Task Manager.
6. Insert the System Software CD.
7. In Explorer, open the folders for the CD drive (E:) and double-click
on Setup.exe (launches the Architect software installation
application).
Reinstall
ARCHITECT
1. At the Setup menu, select Full Installation/Software Version
Software
Upgrade, Begin.
2. At the prompt Select OK to remove and reinstall or Cancel to
continue installing other components, select OK.
Note
The system removes the previous copy of ARCHITECT
software, reinstalls the ARCHITECT software, and restores the
database from the system backup on the D: drive (the backup
contains patient database, assay calibrations, QC data,
iSystem robotics calibrations, etc.).
Note
Do not touch the keyboard, mouse or touchscreen during the
installation process (approximately 20-30 minutes). The
application installs completely without user intervention. This
system performs several reboots.
3. Depending on the status of the system prior to reinstalling the

software, the system displays the Snapshot screen, or the
Configure first module screen.
If the Snapshot sreen displays, go to Restore Backup.

If the Configure first module screen displays, go to Step4.
4. When the Configure first module screen displays, close any

PCANYWHERE error messages (if present), and remove the CD.
5. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number pad and enter the
FSE logon code.
6. Select c8000 from the Type pull down menu and enter the Serial
No. and select Done.
7. Select OK to the shutdown request.
Note
The Snapshot screen displays.
Restore
Backup
1. At the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE.
2. Select System, Utilities.
If a backup is available, select the desired backup (latest date)

from the Available backups.
If a backup is not available, go to Configure SCC (if Backup
not available).
3. Select Restore [F5].

4. Verify that Module Calibration, System Configuration, and
Database are checked.
5. Select Done, OK (to proceed with the restore).
Note
The system restarts and the Module Calibration, System
Configuration, and Database are restored.
Configure
SCC (if
1. If a backup is not available, refer the appropriate new SCC
Backup not
installation and modules procedure in the latest version of the
available)
software installation TSB and perform all the steps in the configure
scc and modules action item of the system configuration section.
[Option 2]
Restore C Drive (after drive replaced); Restore C: Drive on Platform C or D SCC; Reload Base Configuration/ARCHITECT;
System Software and Restore from Backup
Purpose On c8000 or ci8200 system: Module c8000 or ci8200 System Control

Center (SCC) - Platform C or D
When replacing hard drive on Platform D SCC
When replacing C: drive on Platform C SCC
When restoring/reloading BOTH Windows 2000 (Base
Configuration) and ARCHITECT Software on Platform C or D SCC

Required
ARCHITECT CBT CD

Determine
Option
1. Select the appropriate option:
If replacing hard drive on Platform D SCC,

go to Replace Hard Drive on Platform D
SCC:
If replacing C: hard drive on Platform C
SCC, go to Replace Hard Drive on
Platform C SCC
If reinstalling base configuration, system
software and restoring from a back up, go
to Install Base Configuration, System
Software, and Restoring from a Back Up
Replace Hard
Drive on
1. Create a new system backup. Type appropriate
Platform D
comment in Comment field.
SCC
2. Perform Diagnostic 6004 Option 1 - Copy backup
software from D: drive to CD. When complete,
remove the CD and label it.
3. Perform a system shutdown and turn SCC power
OFF.
4. Replace the hard drive per the appropriate R&R
procedure but do not install software as may be
directed by that procedure.
5. Use the Verify/Edit BIOS procedure in the
Appendix to access the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
Select Advanced then Drive Configuration verify
that the newly installed drive is present (SATA
Port-0 shows the hard drive nomenclature). Exit
the BIOS utility, discarding changes.
6. Go to Choose Option.
Replace Hard
Drive on
1. Create a new system backup. Type appropriate
Platform C
comment in Comment field.
SCC
2. Optional - Perform 6004 Option 1 - Copy
backup software from D: drive to CD.
3. When complete, remove the CD and label it.
4. Perform a system shutdown and turn SCC power
OFF.
5. Replace the C: hard drive. (Q1.04 Hard Drive,
System,CPU (Platform C))
Note
Do not install software as may be directed
by that procedure.
Verify System
Identifies Hard
1. Use the Verify/Edit BIOS procedure in the
Drive
Appendix to access the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
2. Select Advanced then IDE Configuration and
verify that both the newly installed C: drive and
the D: drive are present (Primary IDE Master and
Slave shows the hard drive nomenclature).
3. Exit the BIOS utility, discarding changes.
Install Base
Configuration, QUESTION
1. Create a new system backup (if possible). Type
System
appropriate comment in Comment field.
Software, and
2. Optional step - Perform 6004 Option 1 - Copy
Restoring from
backup software from D: drive to CD. This
a Back Up
creates a safe backup that can be used in the
event of a catastrophic system failure. When
complete, remove the CD and label it.
Choose
Option
1. Choose the appropriate option:
If hard drive was replaced on Platform D

or if the C: drive was replaced on Platform
C, a boot error or a message to insert boot
media displays when the SCC is turned on
(due to lack of installed software on the
new hard drive).
Insert the Base Configuration CD

and press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
The system reboots to the Base
Configuration CD.
If reinstalling base configuration, system

software and restoring from a back up:
While the SCC is on, insert the

Windows 2000 Base Configuration
CD then perform a system
shutdown and restart or cycle
power.
At the prompt Press any key to
boot from CD press any key within
four seconds.
Perform Base
Configuration
1. Select Yes to the message "WARNING! THIS
WILL ERASE ALL DATA ON THE C: DRIVE.".
Note
A message may display indicating, The
computer must be rebooted to
automatically reassign the drive letters..
If the message displays, select OK to
reboot.
2. After the reboot, press any key (within four

seconds) as directed to boot from the CD.
Note
The Base Configuration program partitions
and formats the C: drive (and D: drive if
unformatted), then copy the installation
files.
Note
Do not touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen and do not respond to any
messages or prompts during this process
until the following message displays
(approximately 5 minutes).
3. When the screen [1] confirming copying of the

installation files, do the following (if present):
disconnect the printer

turn OFF the modem
disconnect the secondary network cable
and the ABBOTTLINK adapter.
Note
DO NOT disconnect the serial
expansion device (external serial
adapter).
4. Select OK.
5. When the system starts to reboot and the screen
goes blank remove the Base Configuration CD.
The Windows Setup begins. (If the CD was not
removed, when the Press any key to boot from
CD prompt displays, DO NOT press a key. Allow
the setup process to begin then remove the Base
Configuration CD.)
Perform Base
Configuration
1. During the Setup process, which takes
approximately 30-40 minutes, the system loads
Windows 2000 and needed drivers.
Note
DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen and do not respond to any
prompts until the screen [1] confirming the
installation is complete displays
(approximately 30-40 minutes).
Note
If a Platform D SCC is loaded with V1.00
Base Configuration, when the V2.10 is
installed, go to Platform D SCC with V1.00
Base Configuration.
2. When the screen [1] confirming the installation

displays, do the following (if present):
connect the printer

turn ON the modem
connect the secondary network cable and
ABBOTTLINK adapter.
3. Select OK.
Note
The system displays the Windows
desktop.
4. If there is an indication that the BIOS was

updated, but that the custom BIOS parameters
have not been edited, perform Verify/Configure
BIOS Parameters - Platform D at this time.
5. Once the BIOS parameters are edited and
verified, go to Delete CBT Folder.
Platform D
SCC with Note
V1.00 Base If a Platform D SCC is loaded with V1.00 Base
Configuration Configuration when the V2.10 is installed, the
BIOS firmware is updated. A popup message
displays indicating that the update is proceeding,
during which a series of tones sound. After the
BIOS update, the following message may display
(this is normal).
1. If this message displays, press F4.

2. At the Main screen, verify the BIOS Version is
HV84510A.86A.0040.P113.
3. Manually change the specific BIOS parameters.
Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to
and highlight the desired parameter and
press Enter.
Highlight the desired option/parameter in
the pop-up and press Enter to select it.
(The new value displays.)
Use the cursor keys to move to the next
parameter.
4. Press Esc as necessary to return to the menu

bar.
5. After the changing and verifying the BIOS
settings, press F10 and Yes to Save and Exit the
BIOS setup.
Note
Even if no parameters are changed, it is
important to press F10 to save the current
BIOS setup or it may become unstable.
6. The SCC reboots.
Delete CBT
Folder Note
Since the Windows link to the CBT is lost during
this procedure, delete the existing CBT folder and
reinstall the CBT.
1. From the Windows Desktop, open Windows

Explorer (Start, Programs, Accessories, Windows
Explorer).
2. Locate and delete the CBT folder on the D: drive
(D:\CBT), if present.
Note
This is necessary to allow a proper
reinstallation of the CBT.
3. If prompted to delete specific files, select Yes to

all.
4. Close Explorer.
Note
Since the previous version of the CBT
must be deleted and replaced with a
newer version, all customer CBT
passwords and saved data for the CBT
are lost.
Install CBT
1. Insert the CBT CD (90118-104).
2. Select Start, Run.
3. In the Run window, type e:\setup.exe and press
Enter.
Note
The CBT InstallShield displays.
4. Select Restart when prompted.

Note
The system reboots.
5. Select Next at the InstallShield Wizard screen.

6. At the Destination Folder window, select Browse
and type d:\CBT as the path for the CBT to be
installed.
7. Select OK then Next in the subsequent three
prompts.
8. When the installation is complete, select Finish.
Note
The SCC reboots and returns to the
Windows desktop.
9. Remove the CBT CD.
Install
ARCHITECT
1. At the Windows Desktop, insert the ARCHITECT
Software
System Software CD.
Note
The application should starts automatically.
If not, select Start, Programs, Accessories,
then Windows Explorer. In Explorer, open
the folder for the CD (E:\) and double-click
on Setup.exe to launch the Architect
software installation application.
2. At the Software Setup menu, select Full

Installation/Software Version Upgrade, Begin.
Note
If the prompt Select OK to remove and
reinstall (current software revision) or
Cancel to continue installing other
components displays, select OK.
Note
DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen during the installation
process. The application installs
completely without user intervention. This
process takes approximately 20-30
minutes and performs several reboots.
3. At the Configure first module window, close any

PCANYWHERE error messages (if present) and
remove the System Software CD.
4. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number
pad and enter the FSE logon code.
5. Select i2000SR (or c8000 if ci8200 system) from
the Type pull down menu and enter the Serial
No., and select Done.
6. Select OK to the shutdown request.
Note
After the reboot, the system creates a new
database, then the Snapshot screen
displays.
Install M&D
Procedures
1. Log on as FSE.
2. Perform 6115 (select System, Diagnostics,
Module 5, Utilities) to install all the M&D
procedures from the hard drive.
Copy Backup
Database to
D: Drive
If the hard drive was replaced on a
Platform D, or if Base Configuration and
ARCHITECT software were reloaded on
any system and a backup is available on
CD:
perform 6004 Option 2, Copy

Backup software from CD to D:
Drive.
Copy the most recent backup to the
D: drive and follow instructions to
cycle power to the SCC.
Go to Restore Backup.
If C: drive was replaced on a Platform C

SCC, go to Restore Backup.
If hard drive was replaced on a Platform
D, or if Base Configuration and
ARCHITECT software were reloaded on
any system, but no system backup is
available, perform all the Action items in
the System Configuration section of the
appropriate software installation TSB,
using the procedure for a New SCC
Installation, then go to Restore Backup to
Restore Local Keyboard below. (See
Note.)
Restore
Backup
3. Select the desired backup (latest date) from the
Available backups.
5. Verify that the items listed are checked.
Module Calibration
System Configuration
Database
6. Select Done, OK to proceed with the restore.
Note
The system restarts and the Module
Calibration, System Configuration, and
Database is restored.
Configure
SCC and
1. If a backup is not available, refer the appropriate
Modules (if
New SCC installation procedure in the latest
Backup not
version of the system software installation TSB
available)
and perform all the steps in the Configure SCC
and Modules action item of the System
Configuration section.
[Option 3]
Restore D Drive (after drive replaced); Restore D: Drive on Platform C or D SCC
Purpose On c8000 or ci8200 system: Module c8000 or ci8200 System Control Center
(SCC) - Platform C or D
When replacing D: drive on Platform C SCC
When restoring/reloading ARCHITECT software D: drive
components on Platform C or D SCC

Required
ARCHITECT CBT CD

Action Steps
Reference
Preliminary
1. This procedure is only for systems currently running V2.20 software.
2. Read the entire procedure before starting to perform it.
3. Refer to SCC Platform Descriptions in the Appendix for information regarding SCC platforms.
Determine
Option
If replacing the D: hard drive in a Platform C SCC
if the suspect drive is not accessible, proceed directly to Replace D: Hard Drive.
If the D: drive is operational, open Windows Explorer and copy any files found in the
Upgrades folder to floppy disc(s). Later, these files will be copied to the new D: drive
for future use as needed. Go to Replace D: Hard Drive.
If reinstalling/restoring D: drive software components, open Windows Explorer and copy any
files found in the Upgrades folder to floppy disc(s). Later, these files will be copied to the
new D: drive for future use as needed.
2. Go to Install ARCHITECT Software (Reloading Software).
Replace D:
Hard Drive
1. Use the appropriate hard drive replacement procedure (Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform
C) or Q1.09 Hard Drive, System,CPU (Platform D)), but do not install software as directed by that
procedure.
2. Use the Verify/Edit BIOS procedure in the Appendix to access the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
3. Select Advanced, IDE Configuration and verify that both the C: drive and newly installed D: drive
are present (Primary IDE Master and Slave will show hard drive nomenclatures).
4. Exit the BIOS utility, discarding changes.
Install
ARCHITECT Note
Software (D: This option partitions and formats the new D: drive (if not already formatted). It installs all D: drive
Drive components except the CBT (it creates a CBT folder.)
Replaced)
1. From the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE.
2. Select System, Utilities, Software install.
Note
Disregard the request to create a new backup.
3. Select Install [F3].

4. Insert the V2.20 software CD when requested.
5. Select OK.
Note
The application shuts down.
6. At the ARCHITECT System Software V2.20 Setup window, select the Restore D Drive only (After
Drive Replaced).
7. Select Begin.
Note
The application installs without user intervention. DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or
touchscreen until the snapshot screen displays (approximately 5 minutes).
8. At the Snapshot screen, remove the CD.
If corruption is not suspected, go to Install CBT.

If corruption is suspected, go to Install M&D Procedures.
Install
ARCHITECT Note
Software Use these steps if reloading D: drive software components.
(Reloading Note
Software) This option reformats the D: drive, erasing any existing system backups and backup folders. It
recreates all the D: drive components except the CBT, but creates a CBT folder.
1. From the Snapshot screen, log on as FSE.

2. Select System, Utilities then Software install. Disregard the request to create a new backup.
3. Select Install (F3). As directed, insert the V2.20 software CD then select OK. The application will
shut down.
4. At the ARCHITECT System Software V2.20 Setup window, select the fourth option, Reformat D
(This will cause all backup data to be destroyed) then select Begin. The application will start then
present the following popup, WARNING! THIS WILL ERASE ALL DATA ON THE D: DRIVE.
5. Select Yes to proceed.
Note
The application will format the D: drive and reload all the D: drive components. without user
intervention. DO NOT touch the keyboard, mouse or touchscreen until the snapshot screen
displays (approximately 5-10 minutes).
6. At the Snapshot screen, remove the CD.
If corruption is not suspected, go to Install CBT.

If corruption is suspected, go to Install M&D Procedures.
Install M&D
Procedures
1. Log on as FSE and perform diagnostic procedure 6115 (select System, Diagnostics, Module 5,
Utilities).
2. Install All the M&D procedures from the hard drive.
Install CBT
1. From the Snapshot screen, shutdown the ARCHITECT application.
2. When the power on/shutdown screen displays, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete and select Task Manager.
3. Enter FSE as username and enter the FSE password.
4. Type Explorer or select it from the pull down list and select OK.
5. Minimize the Task Manager.
6. In Explorer, locate and delete the entire CBT folder on the D: drive (D:\CBT). (Allows a proper
reinstallation of the CBT.)
If the message This may cause some programs not to work displays, select Yes.
If prompted to delete specific files, select Yes.
7. Insert the CBT CD.

8. Reopen the Task Manager and select New Task.
9. In the Open field, type e:\setup.exe<spc>/z"forceinstall" (<spc> equals one space and quote
symbols (" ") are required)
10. Select OK and minimize the Task Manager. (forces the CBT InstallShield to run).
Note
If the CBT was previously loaded on this SCC, the following prompt may display, This will
remove the ARCHITECT System CBT V2.00 from your computer. Are you sure that
you wish to continue?. Select Yes. Select Finish at the Maintenance Complete window.
Reopen the Task Manager and select New Task. Again, in the command line, type
e:\setup.exe<spc>/z"forceinstall" and select OK to begin the installation. Close the Task
Manager.
11. Select Next at the InstallShield Wizard screen.

12. Select OK at the Command line switched use to force the install onto SCC system. message.
13. At the Choose Destination Location window, change the destination folder by selecting Browse
and entering d:\CBT as the path for the CBT to be installed.
14. Select OK, Next for the next three prompts.
15. When the InstallShield Wizard is complete, select Finish.
Note
The SCC returns to the power on/shutdown screen.
16. Remove the CBT CD.
Copy
Upgrade
1. In Explorer, verify the upgrade files are in the Upgrade folder on the D: drive.
Files to D:
Drive If they are in the folder, go to Step2
If they are not in the folder, and the Upgrade files were saved to floppy disk(s), copy the
files from the floppy disk(s) back to the Upgrades folder in the D: drive.
2. Close Explorer and perform a shutdown and restart.
Create New
Backup
1. Create a new system backup.
2. Type an appropriate comment in the Comment field.
Disable CBT
if not
1. If it is determined that the CBT should be disabled, perform P-225 Disable or Enable CBT.
Purchased
by Customer
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform C
Purpose Module
Verify/Edit
BIOS Settings BIOS Parameters (version HV84510A.86A.0040.P113)
1. Turn SCC power ON (or cycle power) and
(Platform C)
immediately press F2 repeatedly to enter the
BIOS Setup application.
Note
The first Setup screen is the Main menu.

HV84510A.86A.0040.P113.
(Refer to BIOS Parameters (version
HV84510A.86A.0040.P113).)
Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to

and highlight the desired parameter and
press Enter.
parameter.
4. Press Esc as necessary to return to the menu

bar.
5. After the changing and verifying the BIOS
settings, press F10 and Yes to Save and Exit
the BIOS setup. The SCC reboots.
Note
important to press F10 to save the
current BIOS setup or it may become
unstable.
Verify/Edit BIOS Parameters - Platform D
Verify/Edit
BIOS BIOS Version BF86510A.86A.0046.P10 or
1. Turn SCC power ON (or cycle power) and BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408
Settings
immediately press F2 repeatedly to enter the BIOS
(Platform D)
Setup application.
Note
The first Setup screen is the Main menu.

BF86510A.86A.0046.P10 or
BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408.
(Refer to BIOS Version BF86510A.86A.0046.P10
or BF86510A.86A.0061.P17.0404211558408.)
Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and

highlight the desired parameter and press
Enter.
parameter.

5. After the changing and verifying the BIOS settings,
press F10 and OK to Save and Exit the BIOS
setup. The SCC reboots.
Note
important to press F10 to save the current
BIOS setup or it may become unstable.
Acquire Backup from Old D: drive
Prerequisite
Remove SCC
Cover Platform C
1. At the back of the SCC chassis, remove the
screws from the cover.

screws
Platform D - Three (3) screws
2. Remove the SCC cover.
Platform A (PII), B (PIII), C - Lift the

back of the cover to a 45 degree angle
(approximately), then pull it out from the
CPU chassis (while maintaining the same
angle).
Platform D - Pull the cover straight back,
approximately 1" (2 cm), then lift and
Platform D
remove the cover.
3. Determine the SCC platform.
If the SCC is Platform D, go to Attach

Old D: Drive Externally - Platform D.
If the SCC is Platform B or C, go to
Attach Old D: Drive Externally - Platform
B or C.
Attach Old D:
Drive Externally Note
- Platform D These steps are for use on Platform D SCC.
1. Remove the existing disk drive. (Q1.09 Hard

Drive, System,CPU (Platform D).
2. Attach the serial ATA cable from the old SCC to
the SATA 1 connector on the motherboard
adjacent to the existing SATA cable connector
(SATA 0).
3. Connect the old D: drive to the other end of the
ATA cable.
Note
There is no need to set the master/slave
jumper for the serial ATA type drive.
4. Attach a spare PC power connector to the

drive.
Note
It may be necessary to disconnect the
CD-ROM drive cable to access these
connectors.
5. Verify the drive case is insulated from any

power source and power ON the SCC.
6. Immediately begin pressing F2 to enter the
BIOS setup screen.
7. In the Drive configuration menu, verify that the
externally mounted drive is present in the list of
devices.
8. Exit the BIOS setup without saving changes.
Note
The system will reboot.
9. Go to Copy Old Backup to New D: Drive.
Attach Old D:
Drive Externally Note
- Platform B or These steps are for use on Platform B or C
SCC.
C
1. Remove the existing disk drive. (Q1.04 Hard

Drive, System,CPU (Platform C).
2. Verify that the master/slave jumper is set to
slave as indicated on the hard drive labeling.
3. Attach one of the open IDE cable connectors to
the old D: drive (externally mounted).
4. Attach a spare PC power connector to the
drive.
Note
It may be necessary to disconnect the
CD-ROM drive cable to access these
connectors.
5. Verify the drive case is insulated from any

power source and power ON the SCC.
6. Immediately begin pressing F2 to enter the
BIOS setup screen.
7. In the IDE configuration menu, verify that the
externally mounted drive is present in the list of
devices.
Note
It should show as a second hard drive.
8. Exit the BIOS setup without saving changes.
Note
The system will reboot.
Copy Old
Backup to New
1. Open Windows Explorer and locate the
D: Drive
externally attached hard drive.
2. Locate the backup folder in the E:, F: or G:
drive (depending on SCC platform).
3. Copy the entire E:\backup, F:\backup or
G:\backup folder to the current (installed) D:
drive.
4. If a backup folder does not exist in the current
D: drive, create one.
5. Select Yes to overwrite the current folder if
asked.
6. Verify that the backup folder was copied to the
D: drive.
Cycle SCC
Power
1. Perform a system shutdown.
2. Disconnect the externally mounted drive and
cable and install the cover.
3. Turn SCC power ON.
Note
If power is not cycled to the SCC, the
system does not recognize the backup
folder and files that were copied to the D:
drive.
Restore Backup
to C: Drive
Available backups.
5. Verify that the three items listed below are
checked and select Done then OK to proceed
with the restore.
Module Calibration
Database
6. The system will restart and the Module

Calibration, System Configuration, and
Database will be restored.
Restore Backup from Old D: Drive
Purpose Module
Prerequisite
Remove
SCC Cover Platform C
1. At the back of the SCC chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.

screws
Platform D - Three (3) screws
2. Remove the SCC cover.
Platform A (PII), B (PIII), C - Lift the back

of the cover to a 45 degree angle
(approximately), then pull it out from the
CPU chassis (while maintaining the same
angle).
Platform D - Pull the cover straight back,
approximately 1" (2 cm), then lift and remove
Platform D
the cover.
3. Determine the SCC platform.
If the SCC is Platform D, go to Attach Old D:

Drive Externally - Platform D.
If the SCC is Platform B or C, go to Attach
Old D: Drive Externally - Platform B or C.
Attach Old
D: Drive Note
Externally - These steps are for use on Platform D SCC.
Platform D
1. Remove the existing disk drive. (Q1.09 Hard Drive,
System,CPU (Platform D).
2. With SCC power OFF, remove the SCC cover.
3. Externally mount the old D: drive. Using the serial
ATA cable from the old SCC, attach it to the SATA
1 connector on the motherboard adjacent to the
existing SATA cable connector (SATA 0). There is
no need set the master/slave jumper for the serial
ATA type drive.
4. Attach a spare PC power connection to the drive. It
may be necessary to disconnect the CD-ROM drive
cable to access these connectors.
5. Ensure the drive case is insulated from any power
source and turn SCC power ON. Immediately begin
pressing F2 to enter the BIOS setup screen. In the
IDE configuration menu, verify that the externally
mounted drive is present in the list of devices.
6. Exit the BIOS setup without saving changes. The
system will reboot. Proceed to the Copy Old
Backup Folder New D: Drive action item below.
Copy Old
Backup
1. Open Windows Explorer and locate the backup
Folder to
folder in the old drive (externally attached) which
New D:
will show up as E:\backup, F:\backup or G:\backup
Drive
depending on a) how the external drive is attached
and b) the type of SCC platform in use.
2. Copy (drag) the entire E:\backup, F:\backup or
G:\backup folder to the new (installed) D: drive.
3. Refresh the view (press F5) and verify that the
backup folder was copied to the D: drive. (It may be
necessary to close and reopen Explorer to refresh
the view.)
4. Perform a system shutdown. Disconnect the
externally mounted drive and cable and install the
cover.
5. Turn SCC power ON.
Note
If power is not cycled to the SCC, the
system will not recognize the backup folder
and files that were just copied to the D:
drive.
Restore
Backup to
C: Drive
Available backups.
5. Verify that the three items listed below are checked
and select Done then OK to proceed with the
restore.
Module Calibration
Database
6. The system will restart and the Module Calibration,

System Configuration, and Database will be
restored.
reserved.
P-244 WINMSD Report Version - 96756-111_218_2

P-244 WINMSD Report
Purpose This procedure recalls Windows NT historical information that shows whether NT device drivers have Module SCC
been reconfigured since they were set up.
Materials Floppy or modem for retrieval Time 5
Required min
Access System
Diagnostics Window
2. Select New Task.
3. The Create New Task dialog displays.
4. Type winmsd in the Open: field and select OK.
The Windows NT Diagnostics window displays
Create and Save the

System Information
1. Select File, Save Report.
File
The Create Report dialog displays.
2. Select the radio buttons for All Tabs (Scope),

Complete (Detail Level), and File (Destination).
3. Select OK.
The Save WinMSD Report dialog displays.
4. Leave msdrpt.txt as the File name and select

the D: drive at the root level (no subdirectory) as
the location.
5. Select Save.
The file is save to the D: drive for us to retrieve

when drive is sent back.
6. Close the Windows NT Diagnostics window by
clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the
window.
7. Close Task Manager by clicking on the X in the
P-245 Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer Version - 96756-111_219_2

P-245 Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer
This procedure documents how to stop the onboard reagent stability timer. The procedure is only SCC
Purpose required when: Module
a repair significantly affects the time remaining for onboard stability

a hardware failure prevents a reagent scan from being performed
Note
Normally the onboard stability timer is stopped by removing the reagent kits and
performing a reagent scan (for the i2000/i2000SR).
None 10
Materials Time min
Required
Determine time
remaining for
1. Select the Reagent icon from the Snapshot screen.
onboard stability
2. Select Reagent status from the drop down menu.
3. Select the View All radio button.
4. Print a listing of all the reagents onboard by
pressing ALT+Print Screen.
5. Review the print screen copies with the customer
and determine which reagent kits to remove from
the module.
Log On as FSE
Note
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name return the system to operator level of access.
field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password the SCC.
field.
4. Select Done.
screen lists FSE.
Remove Reagent
Kits from Module
1. Remove all the reagent kits from the module.
If i2000/i2000SR, go to Remove Reagent

Kits from Module (i2000/i2000SR).
If i1000SR, go to Remove Reagent Kits from
Module (i1000SR).
Remove Reagent
Kits from Module
1. Remove all the reagent kits from the module and
(i2000/i2000SR)
store them in the refrigerator.
Note
Be sure to store all the bottles for each
reagent kit together so that there will not be
any loading errors when the reagents are
loaded on the module again.
2. Go to Stop Reagent Onboard Stability Timer.
Remove Reagent
Kits from Module
(i1000SR)
3. Select the reagent kits to be removed.
4. Select F7-Unload.
Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability
1. Stop the reagent onboard stability timer.
Timer
If i2000/i2000SR, go to Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability Timer (i2000/i2000SR).
If i1000SR, go to Stop Reagent Onboard
Stability Timer (i1000SR).
Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability Note
Timer The Remove - F8 function key is only available at
(i2000/i2000SR) the FSE access level.

4. Select Remove - F8.
5. Verify removal of the selected reagent kits selected
from the reagent status screen.
Stop Reagent
Onboard Stability Note
Timer (i1000SR) The onboard stablity tracking timer stops when the
reagent carrier is unloaded from the reagent
carousel and removed from the RSH.

4. Select Remove - F8.
5. Verify removal of the selected reagent kits selected
from the reagent status screen.
Note
The Remove - F8 function key is only
available at the FSE access level.
P-246 Verify and Configure BIOS (Platform D) Version - 96756-111_220_1

P-246 Verify and Configure BIOS (Platform D)
Purpose This procedure is used to configure and verify installation of the SCC computer BIOS. Module SCC
Verify
BIOS BIOS Setup Parameters
1. Power ON the SCC.
Settings
2. As the SCC boots up, press F2 repeatedly to enter the
Setup screen.
3. At the Main screen, verify the BIOS Version indicated
is:
BF86510A.86A.0046.P10
or
BF86510A.86A.0061 .P17.0404211558408
4. Verify the specific BIOS parameters meet the

specification in BIOS Setup Parameters.
If the settings meet the specification, go to

Reboot SCC.
If the settings do not meet the specification, go
to Change BIOS Settings.
Change
BIOS
1. Use the cursor (arrow) keys to move to and highlight
Settings
the parameter to be viewed/changed.
2. Press Enter.
3. Highlight the desired option/parameter in the pop-up
and press Enter to select it.
Note
The new value displays.
Note
parameter.

Reboot
SCC
1. When the BIOS settings are verified, press F10 and
OK to Save and Exit the BIOS setup. (Even if the
parameters are not changed, it is important to press
F10 to save the current BIOS setup or it may become
unstable.)
Note
The SCC reboots.
P-247 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform E) Version - 96756-111_221_1

P-247 Host Serial Port Loop Back Test (SCC platform E)
This procedure documents how to test the host serial port for the SCC platform E. SCC
Purpose Module
Loop Back connector (LN08B93-01) 10 min

Preparation
2. The processing module status must be
Stopped, Warming, or Ready.
Attach Loop Back

Connector
1. Attach the loop back connector.
If the SCC has an external multiport

serial adapter, go to Attach Loop Back
Connector (SCC with external multiport
adapter).
If the SCC does not have an external
multiport serial adapter, go to Attach
Loop Back Connector (SCC without
external multiport adapter).
Attach Loop Back

Connector (SCC with
1. Detach the LIS serial cable from Port 3 on
external multiport
the external mulitport serial adapter.
adapter)
2. Attach the loop back connector to Port 3 on
the external mulitport serial adapter.
3. Continue with Log On As FSE.
Attach Loop Back

Connector (SCC
1. Detach the LIS serial cable.
without external
multiport adapter) ARCHITECT instruments (except
i1000SR) - Detach the LIS cable from
the serial port (back of SCC).
i1000SR - Detach the LIS serial cable
from the SCC interface panel.
2. Attach the loop back connector.

ARCHITECT instruments (except
i1000SR) - Attach the laptop cable,
with the loopback connector, to the LIS
serial port (back of the SCC).
i1000SR - Attach the loop back
connector to the LIS port on the SCC
interface panel.
Log On As FSE
Note
1. Select F2 - Log On from the Snapshot Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
screen. return the system to operator level of access.
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
name field. the SCC.
password field.
Note
4. Select Done.
Turn Off Host Bi-

directional
Communications
menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button Off
in the Communications section.
6. Record the current setting (On or On with
Query).
Note
This information is necessary when
turning on the host communication.
7. Select Done.
screen.
Access Hyper Terminal

menu.
3. Select New Task from the Windows Task
Manager window.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Hyper Terminal
opens.
Open New Terminal

1. Type Host in the name field from the
Connection Description dialog window.
2. Select OK.
3. Select Com 5 from the Connect Using list
box in the Connect to dialog window.
4. Select OK.
Verification
1. Select OK from the Com 5 properties
window.
2. Type 12345.
3. Verify that the numbers display on the screen
the serial port.
Note
If no numbers display on the screen,
the serial port is not working.
Close New Terminal

1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the
2. Select Yes (disconnects the terminal).
3. Select No (do not save the session).
Turn On Host Bi-

directional
Communication
menu.
5. Select the Bi-directional Host radio button On
or On with Query in the Communications
section.
6. Select Done.
screen.
Log Off As FSE

Note
2. The User Name field displays and is return the system to operator level of access.
Note
4. Select Done.
Attach LIS Cable

1. Attach the LIS cable:
If the SCC has an external multiport

adapter, go to Attach LIS Cable (SCC
with external multiport adapter).
If the SCC does not have an external
multiport adapter, go to Attach LIS
Cable (SCC without external multiport
adapter).
Attach LIS Cable (SCC

with external multiport
1. Remove the loop back connector from Port 3
adapter)
on the external mulitport serial adapter.
2. Attach the LIS cable to Port 3 on the external
mulitport serial adapter.
Attach LIS Cable (SCC

without external
1. Detach the loop back connector.
multiport adapter)
i1000SR) - Detach the loop back
connector from the serial port (back of
SCC).
i1000SR - Detach the loop back
connector from the SCC interface
panel.
2. Attach the LIS serial cable.

i1000SR) - Attach the LIS cable to the
LIS serial port (back of the SCC).
i1000SR - Attach the LIS serial cable
to the LIS port on the SCC interface
panel.
P-248 Startup and Shutdown Version - 96756-111_234_3

P-248 Startup and Shutdown
Purpose Identify the recommended steps for a successful startup and shutdown. Module SCC
Startup
Power ON
UPS and
1. Power ON the UPS.
Peripherals
2. Power ON the peripherals (modem, printer, monitor, etc.).
3. Verify that power to the processing module(s) is OFF.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must be OFF prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system components.
Power ON
SCC
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot screen.
Power ON
Modules
2. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
Shutdown
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or Offline status.
Perform SCC Shutdown

1. Access the Snapshot screen by selecting Overview and then Snapshot.
2. Select Shutdown F3.
4. When the screen turns blue, and a message about shutting down the SCC displays,
press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously. Select Shutdown the computer, then
OK.
Note
Wait while the software applications shut down. A message displays informing
you that Shutdown is complete and you can turn off the power.
Note
You can choose to restart the SCC at this point.
5. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the central processing unit (CPU) for
10 seconds to power OFF the SCC.
Shut Down Processing

Module(s) and
1. Power OFF the processing module(s) and all peripherals.
Peripherals
P-249 c8000 Reaction Carousel Home and Trigger Sensor Alignment Version - 96721-108_5218_1

P-249 - c8000 Reaction Carousel Home and Trigger Sensor Alignment
Purpose Perform this procedure to correctly align the reaction carousel and trigger Module c8000
sensor.
Materials Time
Required Standard Tool Kit Procedure: 45 min.
Verification: 30 min.
Cuvette Segment Robocal Alignment Tool (LN 2593-01)
Total: 1 Hr. 45 Min.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Prerequisite The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
STOPPED or READY status. Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the c8000
processing module (use the
main circuit breaker located at
the rear of the processing
module).
2. Loosen the two (2) captive
screws securing the rear
reaction carousel cover and
remove the cover.
securing the front reaction
carousel cover and remove
cover.
Position
Rollers 1. Rotate the reaction carousel by
hand to confirm that all three
rollers always turn in both
directions.
2. Check that the rollers can be
rotated by hand with some
friction.
3. When the above conditions are
met the rollers are adjusted
correctly.
4. If not adjusted correctly, adjust
the position of the roller [1] by
loosening the screws holding
the mount to the frame and
applying pressure so that the
roller pushes on the reaction
carousel gear and retighten the
mounting screws. Confirm the
3 rollers turn.
5. Replace the front reaction
carousel cover and secure with
two (2) screws.
6. Replace the rear reaction
carousel cover and secure.
Power On
1. Power ON the processing
module.
2. Allow the processing module to
come to Stopped.
3. Select the c8000, then Start-
up to place the module in
Ready.
Light Beam Alignment
CLI Terminal
Simulator Note:
If the reaction carousel or
motor has been replaced,
alignment of the pitch and
home flags must be performed
first, see Reaction Carousel
Home Alignment.
Note:
Changes made with this
procedure will require all
robotic positions be checked or
aligned.

be in STOPPED or READY
status.
2. Log in as FSE using password.
3. Select SYSTEM and then
Diagnostics.
4. Select module 5.
5. Select Utilities.
6. Select 6200 CLI Terminal
Simulator then Perform.
7. Select Proceed to access the
terminal.
Positioning
Cuvette Note:
Segment CLI commands will be used to
Alignment position the Robotics Test Tool
Tool to allow visual alignment of the
light beam in relationship to the
reaction carousel.
1. In the CLI Terminal Simulator,

enter RC H and press
Continue (the reaction
carousel will home.)
2. Enter RC CCWREL 50 and
press Continue (Cuvette
segment # 31-45 will move to
the front.)
3. Replace Cuvette segment #
31-45 with the Cuvette
Segment Alignment Tool.
Note:
Top center front deck
cover will need to be
removed to access
Cuvette segment.
4. Enter RC H and press

Continue. (The reaction
carousel will home and the
Cuvette Segment Alignment
Tool will be positioned in the
light path.)
Alignment of
Light Beam 1. From the rear of the
processing module, looking
straight down through the
Cuvette segment at the light
path verify that the light beam
is centered through the
Cuvette spacing tabs.
Note:
Remove the rear top
cover and the mixer
head cover to aid in the
observation of the light
beam. The beam must
be observed from
directly above the light
beam. The circled
dotted line in the picture
demonstrates the light
beam centered between
the Cuvette spacing
tabs.
2. If adjustment is required; enter

RC H and press Continue.
Note:
One or two step
changes can be made
from the home position.
3. To move the carousel one step

clockwise, enter RC CWSTEP
and press Continue.
4. To move the reaction carousel
one step counter clockwise,
enter RC CCWSTEP and press
Continue.
5. Reposition the Cuvette
segment alignment Tool in the
light path and check beam
position using the Action"
Positioning Cuvette Segment
Alignment tool". If adjustment
is still required, repeat steps 3-
5 until light beam is centered.
6. After the light beam is centered
between the cuvette spacing
tabs enter RC H and press
Continue. Then Enter RC
CCWREL 50 and press
Continue.
7. The Cuvette Segment
Alignment Tool should be
position at the front. Remove
the Tool and reinstall Cuvette
segment.
8. Enter (Q) to Quit and exit CLI
Terminal Simulator.
Note:
If any changes are
made to the home
position all robotics
positions will need to be
checked.
9. Reinstall mixer head cover and

rear top cover.
10. Reinstall top center front deck
cover.
11. Reinstall reaction carousel
front and rear covers.
Reaction Carousel Home Alignment
Prerequisite
Note:
This procedure should only be
required if reaction carousel or
motor assembly has been
replaced.
Note:
Changes made with this
procedure will require all
robotic positions be checked or
aligned.
be in STOPPED or READY
status.
2. Power OFF the c8000
processing module.
Preparation
1. Remove the right and left rear

covers.
2. Loosen the two (2) captive
screws securing the rear
reaction carousel cover and
remove the cover.
3. Locate the reaction carousel
motor and inspect the pitch
flag and motor coupler for
cracks or damage. If cracks
are found the coupler or motor
assembly will need to be
replaced.
Reaction
Carousel 1. Manually move the reaction
Home carousel so that the home flag
Alignment is centered in the home
sensor.
Note:
The home flag is located
in front of Cuvette # 70
2. Observe the position of the

pitch flag on the motor
assembly. The edge of the flag
should be just crossing the
center of the sensor in a
counter clockwise direction.
3. If pitch flag is not in the correct
position loosen the two (2) set
screws in the pitch flag and
retighten set screws. Do not
use excessive force when
retightening or the flag can be
damaged.
4. Power ON the processing
module.
5. Allow the processing module to
come to Stopped.
6. Select the c8000 and then
Start-up to place the module in
Ready. The reaction carousel
will move to the Home position
at this time. This position will
be at the "0" position plus the
robotics offset. This offset will
be set during the pipettor
alignment M & Ds.
7. Install the Right and Left Rear
Covers.
8. Reinstall the Rear Reaction
Carousel Cover.
9. With the Reaction Carousel
Home Procedure complete,
perform action "Alignment of
Light Beam."
Trigger Sensor Alignment
Run Optics
Trigger 1. The processing module must
Sensor be in READY status.
Check 2. Log in as FSE using password.
3. Select SYSTEM, Diagnostics,
Optics/Temperature.
4. Perform 1001 Optics Trigger
Sensor Check.
5. The value must be +200 +/- 50
(not +/- 500). If the reading is
within this range no further
action is require. If not within
+200 +/- 50 perform action
"Adjustment of Sensor."
Adjustment
of Sensor 1. The processing module must
be in READY status.
2. Remove Mixer Deck that is
located over the Trigger
Sensor.
3. Loosen screw holding the
trigger sensor and reposition
trigger sensor and retighten the
screw.
4. Select SYSTEM, Diagnostics,
Optics/Temperature.
5. Perform 1001 Optics Trigger
Sensor Check.
6. The value must be +200 +/- 50
(not +/- 500). If the reading is
within this range no further
action is required. If not within
+200 +/- 50 repeat step 3.
7. Replace the Mixer Deck cover.
Post Alignments
Verification
1. Any alignments or adjustment
in the above procedures will
require that all robotics
positions are checked using
M&D 1101 Robotics Test Tool.
2. Perform 1008 Optics Total
Test.
P-301 PQ BCR Reset Procedure Version - 96721-108_890_1

P-301 PQ BCR Reset Procedure
Purpose Resets the processing queue bar code reader. Module SSH
Reset BCR
Power T Note
1. Verify the BCR Power T board GREEN LED Continuous pressure (holding in) the BCR Power T
Board
is ON. board reset button is not necessary.
Note Note
Normally the LED is ON. It may be easier to dismount the BCR to view the BCR
Power T LEDs.
If the LED is not ON, remove the
processing queue skin to gain access
to the BCR T Board.
2. Press the RESET button on the BCR Power

T board twice within two (2) seconds.
Note
The BCR GREEN (Rdy) and the
GREEN (Gd/ Rd) LEDs pulses on and
off for ~1.5sec.s.
If LEDs do
not pulse -
1. If the LEDs do not pulse on and off, shut
Identify cause
down system power and replace the BCR
of failure
power T board (V4.13 BD,BCR T).
2. If the LEDs still do not pulse on and off, shut
down system power and replace the bar
code reader (V4.16 BCR, PQ,ASM).
3. If the bar code reader still fails to initialize,
shut down system power and replace the
sample handler controller board (CPU board)
(M1.06 BD,CONTROLLER).
Perform
Sample
1. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown on the
Handler
sample handler.
Startup
2. Verify that the Sample Handler initializes
properly.
Verify Correct
PQ BCR Note
1. Select the Modules category from the For further information on performing diagnostic
Operation
diagnostic screen under the system icon. procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System
2. Select the Sample Handler radio button. Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and
3. Perform diagnostic procedure 3315 Sample diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
Handler Test.

Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed temperature of Reagent Supply Center #2. Module c16000
Insulated Cup
Ice
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Preparation For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

System status.
or Ready status.
Remove Panel
Above ICT
Aspiration Pump
sample pipettor connector panel to the
processing module.
Remove
Temperature
1. Locate temperature detector through the
Detector
access panel removed in the previous step.
Reagent Supply
The temperature detector is located on the
Center #2
front right side of the supply center.
3. Cut any wire ties to allow access to
temperature detector
Note
Determine
Temperature of
Reagent Grade
Type II Water
the external thermometer probe with a rubber
band and place the probes into the water
3. Add ice to cool the water to 5°C ±3°C. This is
the temperature that the detector must be
tested at.
4. Wait for readings to stabilize.
Determine For further information on performing diagnostic

Temperature of procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Reagent Supply Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
Maintenance screen under the System icon.
Center #2 Subsection: System diagnostics.
2. Perform 3525 Temperature Status
supply center #2.
Compare
Temperature
1. Reagent supply center #2 temperature must
Readings
be within ±0.2°C of the reading of the
external thermometer in the water.
If it is correct, go to Install
Temperature Detector Reagent Supply
Center #2.
Left Rear Cover.
Remove Left
Rear Cover
Open Card Cage

Cover
card cage cover and open the cover.
Adjust VR2
SMC board, SM AC/DC board, and the
AC/DC controller board.
Note
reading.

temperature is within ±0.2°C of the actual
temperature.
Close Card
Cage Cover
1. Connect the MECH LED cables to the SMC,
SM AC/DC and AC/DC board.
2. Close the card cage cover and secure using
Install Left Rear

Cover
1. Install left rear cover.
Install
Temperature
Detector
Reagent Supply
3. Gently insert the temperature detector in the
Center #2
right front of the reagent supply center
housing.
Install Panel
Above ICT
1. Install the sample pipettor connector panel.
Aspiration Pump
ICT aspiration pump with four (4) screws.
Prepare for
Operation
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 201980-105) • © 2006, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-505 Water Bath Temperature Detector Adjustment Version - 96721-108_729_1

P-505 Water Bath Temperature Detector Adjustment
Purpose Perform this procedure to adjust the displayed Water Bath Temperature. Module c16000
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Prerequisite
or Ready status.
Perform 3526 For further information on performing diagnostic procedures,

Check Water refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section
Bath 10: Troubleshooting and diagnostics, Subsection: System
Maintenance screen under the System icon.
Temperature diagnostics.
Temperature.
Note
temperature probe in the water bath.
Position
Probe in
1. Position the probe from the external
Water Bath
thermometer into the water bath in the
position specified by 3526 Check Water Bath
Temperature.
2. Wait at least 1 minute for readings to
stabilize.
Read status
of Water Bath
1. Using 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature
Temperature
read the status of the water bath temperature.
2. The reading should be within ±0.1°C of the
reading on the external thermometer.

Operation.
If the difference is more than ±0.1°C
go to Remove Left Rear Cover.
Remove Left
Rear Cover
Open Card
Cage Cover
card cage cover and open the cover.
Adjust VR5
Note
movement of the potentiometer to see
the current reading.

temperature is within ±0.1°C of the actual
temperature.
Close Card
Cage Cover
1. Close the card cage cover and secure with
Install Left
Rear Cover
1. Install the left rear cover.
Prepare for
Operation
Temperature and remove the external
thermometer probe.
3. Close all doors.
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 201980-105) • © 2006, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-547 Performance Verification Test (PVT) Version - 201985-104_727_7

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces
results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-547 Performance Verification Test (PVT)
Describes the tests and acceptance criteria for verifying the system performance of the c16000 analyzer at Module c16000
the time of installation.
Purpose
Required Also, see Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Chemical Hazard
Materials/Equipment/Chemicals Required
Materials Quantity Needed
AST (LN7D81) 2 Cartridge of R1 and R2

LDH (2P56) 2 Cartridge of R1 and R2
Total Protein (TP), (LN7D73) 2 Cartridge of R1
ICT Reference Solution (LN1E49) 1 Bottle
ICT Sample Diluent (2P32) 1 Cartridge of R1
ICT Calibrator (LN1E46) 1 bottle of each Calibrator (L and H).
ICT Module (LN9D28) 1 Module
ICT Cleaning Fluid (LN1E50) 1 Bottle
Acid Wash Solution (2J42) 1 Bottle
Alkaline Wash Solution (LN9D31) 1 Bottle
Water Bath Additive (LN9D29) 1 Cartridge of R2
Multi-constituent Calibrators (LN1E65) 1 Bottle for each Calibrator level
Liquid Control, Level I I 2 Bottles
1. Prepare the solutions listed below.

Prepare
Solution
Load
Solutions
1. Load the solutions listed below and update the system
supply status.
Verify
Completion
1. Verify that all Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) are
of TSBs
competed.
Perform
Maintenance
1. Verify completion of all appropriate maintenance (daily,
Procedures
weekly, and monthly) and corresponding instrument log
entries.
Load PVT
Assays from
1. Log on as FSE.
Assay CD
(for A-line)
Calibration order.
If Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP and AST are listed in
the Assays box, go to Edit A - Line LDH Assay.
If the assays are not listed, continue to step 3.
Diagnostics.
4. Select the Module 5 button (SCC).
F-5 Perform. Select OK.
7. Select Install.
8. Install the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM into the
CD drive and select Proceed to continue.
9. Enter a 1 for the All groups option and select Continue.
10. Follow the on screen instructions and select the options
to install Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, TP, AST, LDH and select
Continue.
Note
The new LDH (2P56) assay file will not be
available on a cSystem Assay Disk until Version
13.00 or higher. Until then, the file and installation
instructions to create a LDH CD are available on
the GSS website at the following link:
http://gssweb.add.abbott.com/architect/205042.asp.
11. After the assays have loaded, select the page down
button in the Instructions box until you reach the end of
the assay list.
12. Enter the option to Return to the main menu and select
Continue.
13. Select Exit and then select Done.
Edit A - Line
LDH Assay
Configuration
2. Select Assay settings.
3. Select LDH from the Assays list, and then select F6 -
Configure.
4. On the Configure assay parameters, General page,
select the Reagent/Sample button in the middle of the
page.
5. Select the UNDILUTED default dilution button.
6. Select Done to save the settings.
F-5 Perform. Select OK.
Load PVT
Assays from Note
Assays CD These assays (AST-B, LDH-B and TP-B are loaded on
(B-line) the B-line (inner carousel) on the R1 & R2 Reagent
Supply Centers and must be imported from the disk
provided.
1. From the Snapshot screen, select System from the menu

bar, then Configuration.
2. On the Configuration screen, select the Assay settings
view.
3. Select F3-Import on the Configuration screen.
4. Insert the disk with the assays into the drive. Select OK.
The import assay window displays a list of the files on
the disk.
5. Select all the PVT assays and then select the Import
button. The selected assay files are copied to the system,
and the import assay window displays the status of the
imported files.
6. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
7. Remove the disk from the drive.
Edit B - Line
LDH Assay
Configuration
2. Select Assay settings.
3. Select LDb from the Assays list, and then select F6 -
Configure.
4. On the Configure assay parameters, General page, edit
the Secondary wavelength to 404.
5. Edit the Last required read to 26.
6. Edit the Sample blank type to Self.
7. Edit the Main Read times to 21 - 26.
8. Edit the Color correction to 4 - 6.
9. Edit the Blank Read times to 10 - 16.
10. Select the Calibration button at the top of the page, and
then edit the Factor to 11180.
11. Select Done to save the settings.
Create PVT
Panel for all
1. From the Snapshot screen, select System from the menu
Assays
bar, then Configuration.
2. On the Configuration screen, select the Assay settings
view.
3. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on
the Configuration screen.
4. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure panel definitions
window displays.
5. Enter PVT in the New panel name data entry box. Select
the Patient panel check box. Select the PVT assays from
the Assays list.
Create PVT
Panel for all
1. Select Add to create the panel. The panel name displays
Assays
in the Panels list.
(continued)
2. Select Done to save.
Create MCC
Calibrator
Set and
Configuration.
Enable
2. Select the QC-Cal settings button and then select
Assay
Calibrator Set in the QC-Cal categories window.
3. Select MCC from the Calibrator sets window.
4. Select F6 - Conf igure.
5. Select the lot number list button and then select New
Lot.
6. Enter the calibrator lot number in the Lot number data
entry box.
7. Enter the number of levels (2) and expiration date of the
Cal Set.
8. Highlight the TP and TP-B row and select Define Data.
9. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for
each calibrator level. (Refer to the MCC value sheet for
TP calibrator concentrations.)
10. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set
window.
11. Select Done to create the calibrator set.
Configuration.
13. Select the Assay Settings button and select Assay
Parameters in the Assay categories window.
14. Select TP in the Assays list.
16. Configure the Assay availability box to Enabled.
17. Select Done.
18. Repeat steps 14-17 for TP-B.
Configure
Reagents
1. From the System Configuration screen, select Assay
for B-line
settings from the Configure: options.
2. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list.
3. Select the reagent (e.g. ASTB) from the Reagents
screen.
4. Select F6/Configure. The Configure reagent screen
displays.
5. Enter the Lot number (select New Lot), Serial number,
Expiration date, R1 cartridge size, and R2 cartridge size
(only if an R2 assay). Select Add kit and then Done.
6. Repeat for additional assays that need to be configured
for the B-line.
Load and
Scan Note R1 Outer Carousel:
Reagents If the customer is not going to be running electrolytes
and the option is turned off in the system configuration, 1. ICT Sample Diluent
for A-line
electrolytes do not have to be run as part of the PVT. 2. LDH - R1 Reagent Cartridge
3. Total Protein - R1 Reagent Cartridge
1. Install the reagent R1 cartridges and R2 cartridges in the
outer reagent carousel positions. The reagents must be 4. AST - R1 Reagent Cartridge
loaded in the following order: ICT Sample Diluent, LDH,
Total Protein and AST.
2. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select R2 Outer Carousel
Reagent status and F4 Scan.
3. Verify the reagent cartridges read correctly and are in 1. LDH - R2 Reagent Cartridge
the order above. 2. AST - R2 Reagent Cartridge
Load and
Assign
1. From the Reagent status screen, select F6 - Assign
Location for
location. The Assign location window displays.
Non-bar
2. Select ASTB reagent from the Reagent kits table.
Coded B-
3. Select Location D from Reagent supply center 1 option,
line
and then enter the desired location in the data entry box.
Reagents
(ASTB:D4, LDHB:D5, TPB:D6)
4. Select Location D from Reagent supply center 2 option,
and then enter the desired location in the data entry box.
Load and
Assign
1. Select Add. The assigned location(s) display in the
Location for
Reagents kit table.
Non-bar
2. Continue assigning each reagent location, repeating
Coded B-
steps 2-5, until all reagent locations for the B-line
line
reagents have been assigned.
Reagents
3. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen. All
(continued)
reagents display on the screen with an OK Reagent
status ready to be loaded and calibrated.
4. Remove the bar code labels off the reagents assigned to
the B-line (inner carousels) of R1 & R2 reagent supply
centers and load the reagents in the assigned positions.
Create a
Calibration
Order
Calibration order.
2. Select the Carrier button on the Calibration order screen.
3. Enter the RSH carrier ID in the C: data entry box. (The

Carrier ID includes a letter and a number.)
4. Enter 1 for carrier position in the P: data entry box.
5. Select Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP, AST, AST-B, LDH-B,
and TP-B from the Assays list and then select F2-Add
order.
Print the
Order List
1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order
Report
status.
2. Select F4-Print and then select the Order List Report
option.
Load the
Calibrators
1. Determine the minimum sample volume required per the
into the
Order List Report.
Sample
2. Pipette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups
Carrier
and load in the correct C/P (carrier/position) per the
Order List Report.
3. Install the Carrier into position 1 in the Priority Bay.
Start the
Calibration
Snapshot.
2. Ensure that the RSH and c16000 are in the Ready state.
3. Select the c16000 module and then select F8-Run.
4. When the c16000 enters the Running status, select the
RSH module and then select F8-RUN.
Verify
Calibration
1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the
menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for Na-C, K-C, Cl-C, LDH, TP,
AST, AST-B, LDH-B, and TP-B are listed as Active.
Create a
Patient
1. Select Results from the menu bar, and then select
Order
Results review.
2. If necessary, delete any results listed in the Results
review screen.
3. Remove any sample cups from positions 1-20 on the
Sample Carousel.
4. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient
order. Ensure that Single patient is selected.
5. Select the Carousel button.
6. Enter a 1 for the cup position in the P: data entry box.
7. Enter a number in the SID data entry box.
8. Select PVT Panel from the assays list and then select
F3-Add order. (After selecting F3-Add order, the cup
position in the P: data entry box will automatically
increment.)
9. Enter another number in the SID data entry box.
10. Select PVT Panel from the assays list and select F3-Add
order.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 until you have created a
patient order for PVT Panel for positions 1-20 on the
Sample Carousel.
Load Level
II Controls
1. Pipette 125µl of Level II Control into 20 sample cups and
into
place them into positions 1-20 on the Sample Carousel.
Positions 1-
20 on the Note
Sample If necessary, allow the control material to thaw for
Carousel 30 minutes and then gently tilt until mixed.
2. Replace the Sample Carousel cover.
Note
The Order status will stay in Pending if the
Sample Carousel cover is not detected.
Start the
Run
Snapshot.
2. Ensure that the c16000 is in the Ready state.
3. Select the c16000 module and then select F8-Run.
Print Results
1. When the run has completed, select Results from the
menu bar and then select Results review.
2. Select Assay in the Results review screen.
3. Select F-4 Print and then select the Results List Report
option.
Record and
Evaluate
1. Enter the processing module serial number and software
Results
configuration on the form below.
2. Enter the PVT test results into the PVT Test Results
table.
3. Calculate and record the difference.
4. Use the PVT Test Acceptance Criteria to determine if the
PVT passed or failed.
5. Enter the results into the PVT Test Results table. See
below.
6. Sign and date.
Delete PVT
Results and
1. Delete patient results, exceptions and PVT assays from
Assays
Note
You cannot delete the assays if there are pending
orders. Delete any pending orders prior to trying to
delete the PVT assays.

Diagnostics.
3. Select the Module 5 button (SCC) option on the
Diagnostics screen.
F-5 Perform.
6. Select OK to perform the procedure.
7. Select Delete.
8. Enter the assay numbers of the assays that are to be
deleted (e.g. 2500, 2501 and 2502).
9. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen.
Delete
Reagent
1. Access the Configuration screen -Assay settings - Assay
Kits
parameters view.
2. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list
on the Configuration screen.
3. Select the reagent associated with the kit from the
Reagents list, and then select F6-Configure. The
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window
displays.
4. Select the desired kit (Lot Number, Serial Number and
Expiration Date displayed) from the Configured kits list,
and then select Delete kit.
5. Select Done to delete the kit.
Delete
Reagents
1. Access the Configuration screen -Assay settings - Assay
parameters view.
2. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list
on the Configuration screen.
3. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and
then select F7-Delete. A confirmation message displays.
4. Select OK to delete the reagent.
Processing Module SN: ________________________________
Software Configuration: ________________________________
PVT Test Results
Assay Highest Result Lowest Result Difference (High-Low) Acceptance Criteria Pass or Fail
less than or equal to 9 U/L

AST/
AST-B
less than or equal to 19 U/L
LDH
less than or equal to 0.22 g/dL
TP
less than or equal to 3.4 mmol/L
Na-C
K-C
Cl-C
PVT Test Acceptance Criteria
Name of Test Assays Number of Replicates Acceptance Criteria (less than or equal to)
AST/AST-B 20 9*
LDH/LDH-B 20 19*
TP/TP-B 20 0.22*
Na-C 20 3.4*
Assay Within Run Precision Test K-C 20 0.24*
Cl-C 20 3.0*
*The difference between the highest and the lowest result in the run of 20 replicates.
Name: ______________________________________ Name: _______________________________________ Date: ____________

Printed Name Signature
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 201980-106) • © 2006, 2011 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park,
IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-677 Clean ICT Reference Cup and LLS Electrodes Version - 201985-104_5490_2

P-677 Clean ICT Reference Cup and LLS Electrodes
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Purpose Perform this procedure to clean the ICT Modules C4000

reference cup and electrodes. C8000
C16000
Materials Required Standard Tool Kit Time 10 minutes
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite The processing module must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Stopped or Offline status. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation Remove instrument-specific deck covers.
VIDEO
Clean ICT Note
Reference Video contains no audio sound.
Cup and
Electrodes
Clean ICT
Reference
1. Remove screw [1] securing the ICT
Cup and
Reference LLS electrodes to the ICT
Electrodes
reference cup.
2. Lift up on ICT Reference LLS

electrodes [2] to remove.
3. Clean inside reference cup with

cotton tip swab.
4. Rinse ICT Reference LLS electrodes

with purified water.
5. Gently wipe the ICT Reference LLS

electrodes using a lint free tissue
moistened with purified water.
Note
Ensure when cleaning not to
adjust spacing of electrodes.
Adjusting the spacing could
adversely affect level sensing
function of electrodes.
6. Reseat the electrodes onto the

reference cup and secure with
screw.
1. Install the rear right cover.
handler from Stopped to Read,
Verification
1. Perform Maintenance/As Needed:
a. 2131 Flush ICT Cup

b. 6063 Flush ICT Module
2. After repair is complete, ensure

appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate necessary.
ARCHITECT c16000 Service and Support Manual (Version 204733-102) • © 2015 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. c4000, ci4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
5.3 CLI Commands
Command Locator
Group Command
HOME V1 V2
ISH_COMP_INIT V1
LASB_COMP_INIT V1
MOD_COMP_INIT V1
Motor Commands
OMS V1 V2
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX V1 V2
VACUUM V1
Temperature Commands TCB V1
DIO V1 V2
DIVERT V1
DIO/EIEIO Commands
EIEIO V1 READ
Solenoid Commands SOL V1 V2 Value
ASPIRATE V1 V2 V3 V4
DISPENSE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
FLUSH_PIPETTER V1
FLUSH_TRIGGER1
FLUSH_TRIGGER2
FLUSH_WASHER V1
GET_LLS_DATA V1
LLS V1 V2 value
Fluidics/Pipettors/Wash Zones/LLS Commands PASSIVE_WASH V1 V2

PROBE_MOVE V1 V2
PROBE_RAISE V1
TRIGGER1_DISPENSE V1
WASHER_ASPIRATE V1
WASHER_DISPENSE V1 V2 V3
WASHER_MOVE V1 V2
CMIA_READ V1
OPTICS V1
Optics Commands READ V1 V2
SHUTTER_MOVE V1
DISPERSION V1
REAGENT_RING_MOVE V1 V2 V3
Reagent Carousel Commands
SET_REAGENT_BOTTLE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
PROC_PATH V1
PROC_PATH_MOVE V1 V2
Process Path Commands
BOOT_DIAGS
CLEAR_LOG V1
Software Commands
GET_LOG V1 V2
Introduction
This document contains general commands for use with the ARCHITECT system. Use these commands when diagnosing
hardware issues. Maintenance and diagnostic procedures use a series of these commands (in a short program) and are the
preferred method of diagnostics. There are cases, however, when using individual CLI commands is necessary.
Commands are classified as either high level or low level commands. Low level commands are singular commands that go directly
to software drivers and hardware controllers. High level commands are implemented in software by using one or more low level
commands. Caution must be used when mixing low level commands in a sequence with high level commands, since the high level
commands may produce unexpected side-effects on low level software drivers and hardware controllers. Also, modules must be
reinitialized after using CLI commands.
CLI commands can be entered in several areas. For software v.1.50 and above, maintenance and diagnostic procedure 6200
produces an interactive window for the user to enter the commands and produces responses with the appropriate commands.
Commands may also be entered into the SCC Hyperterminal windows or, for some low level commands only, in the individual
module Hyperterminal (ISH/IAHV) window when debug cables are installed.
Command Format
The basic command format is:
COMMAND V# V# V#
where "COMMAND" is a specific function to be performed and each "V#" is a variable that specifies the parameter required to
perform the function. Commands are not case sensitive.
Example Description
1>HOME The set module is 1 or processing module, the command is HOME, the first value 1 designates motor 1 (outer
10 reagent carousel), and the second value 0, designates the step number that is set as home.
2>SOL 3 The set module is 2 or processing module 2; the command is SOL, which directs the command to a solenoid,
SET 1 specifically solenoid 3, and the syringe valve on the R2 pipettor. The value SET 1 turns the valve on, SET 0 would
turn it off.
Prerequisite Commands
Prerequisite commands are entered to direct the next command at a specific part of the instrument. At power on, default values are
established for these values. However, when issuing commands from CLI, the state of the system should not be assumed.
Example Description
SET_MODULE V1 V1 =
0 = returns 0>, which is sample handler
1 = returns 1>, which is module 1
SET_PROTOCOL V1 ROUTINE_TYPE = Reagent 1 pipettor

STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) = Reagent 2 pipettor at process path position 48
STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) = Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and outer reagent ring
ROUTINE_TYPE = Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and inner reagent ring
ROUTINE_TYPE = Sample pipettor
STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) = STAT pipettor
SET_SAMPLE V1 V1 =
ISH = sample handler configuration
LAS = LAS configuration
SET_TEST_TYPE V1 V1 =
ROUTINE_TYPE = default
STAT_TYPE = valid only on i 2000 SR
V1 = Assay protocol, Table 5-2
Table 5-1: Assay Protocol Name

V1, Protocol Name SET_TEST_TYPE status Protocol location
REAGENT1 ROUTINE_TYPE Reagent 1 pipettor
REAGENT1 STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) Reagent 2 pipettor at process path position 48
REAGENT2 STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and outer reagent ring
REAGENT3 ROUTINE_TYPE Reagent 2 pipettor at process path location 71 and inner reagent ring
SAMPLE ROUTINE_TYPE Sample pipettor
SAMPLE STAT_TYPE (i 2000 SR only) STAT pipettor
Motor Commands
HOME V1 V2
Purpose This command initializes the position of the specified motor by homing it and establishing the specified step
number as the home step number.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (for processing module motors - Table 5-2)
SET_MODULE 0 (for sample handler motors - Table 5-3)

V1= motor number, Table 5-2 and Table 5-3
V2= step number.
Example Description
1>HOME 0 0 Homes the process path motor and 0 is the home step
Table 5-2: V1 Process Module Motors

Motor # Description Motor # Description
0 Process Path Motor 16 R2 Pipettor -Theta Axis
1 Outer Reagent Carousel 17 R2 Pipettor - Z Axis
2 Inner Reagent Carousel 18 R2 Syringe
3 Dispersion Motor 19 WZ1 Aspirate Probes
4 Sample Pipettor-Theta Axis 20 RV Orienter

5 Sample Pipettor- Z Axis 21 RV Transport
6 Sample Syringe 22 STAT Syringe*
7 WZ1 Switch Diverter 23 STAT Pipetter Z Motor*
8 R1 Pipettor -Theta Axis 24 R1 Wash Cup Buffer Pump
9 R1 Pipettor- Z Axis 25 R2 Wash Cup Buffer Pump
10 R1 Syringe 26 Sample Probe Buffer Pump
11 WZ2 Aspirate Probes 27 R1 Probe Buffer Pump
12 Trigger Pump 28 R2 Probe Buffer Pump
13 Pre-Trigger Pump 29 STAT Probe Buffer Pump*
14 Shutter 30 WZ1 Dispense Pump
15 STAT Pipetter Theta Motor* 31 WZ2 Dispense Pump
Note
Asterisk (*) indicates i 2000 SR only.
Table 5-3: V1 Standard Sample Handler Motors

Motor # Description
0 Load Queue Inner Lane Conveyer Belt
1 Load Transfer Solenoid Mechanism
2 Unload Transfer Solenoid Mechanism
3 Unload Inner Lane Pusher Mechanism

4 Load Queue Outer Lane Conveyer Belt
5 Unload Outer Lane Pusher Mechanism
6 Processing Queue Conveyer Belt Module #1*
7 Star Wheel Motor Module #1*
7 LAS Carousel (i 2000
Note
* - Module numbering for this table is physically from right to left.
ISH_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This command is only valid on systems equipped with a standard sample handler. This high level command
initialized the specified standard sample handler component by homing all of its associated motors, initializing the
state of the gates, etc. This command places the assembly in a known state so it is ready to accept all other high
level commands. The actual initialization performed depends on the component specified.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 0
V1 = component name, Table 5-4.
Example Description
0>ISH_COMP_INIT CONVEYOR1 Initializes the processing queue and associated hardware at processing module #1.
Table 5-4: V1, Standard Sample Handler Components

Component Description
CONVEYOR1 Processing queue at module #1
LOAD_XFER Load transfer mechanism
LOADQ_LANE1 Inner load queue lane on a two lane system, or the only lane on single lane system
LOADQ_LANE2 Outer load queue lane on a dual lane system

STAR_WHEEL1 Star Wheel indexer at module #1
UNLOAD_PUSHER1 Inner unload queue lane pusher mechanism
UNLOAD_PUSHER2 Outer unload queue lane pusher mechanism
UNLOAD_XFER Unload transfer mechanism
LASB_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This command is only valid on systems equipped with the LAS Carousel. This high level command initializes the
specified LAS Carousel component by homing all of its associated motors, etc. This command places the
assembly in a known state so it is ready to accept all other high level commands. The actual initialization
performed depends on the component specified.
V1 = component name, Table 5-5.
Example Description
0>LASB_COMP_INIT LASB_CAROUSEL Initializes the LAS Carousel
Table 5-5: V1, LAS Components

Component Description
LASB_BARCODE_READER LAS Bar Code Reader
LASB_CAROUSEL LAS Carousel
MOD_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This high level command allows you to initialize the specified component by homing all its associated motors,
initializing the state of the valves, etc. This command places the component in a known state so it is ready to
accept all other high level commands. This command is only used by a processing module.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number)
V1 = Component, Table 5-6
Example Description
1>MOD_COMP_INIT ITV1 Initializes vortexer #1.
1>MOD_COMP_INIT PROCESS_PATH Initializes the process path.

Table 5-6: V1, Components
Example Description
BARCODE_READER Reagent bar code reader
CMIA_READER CMIA reader
DISPERSION_MECH Microparticle dispersion mechanism
ITV1 In-Track Vortexer #1
LOAD_DIVERTER Load Diverter
PROCESS_PATH Process Path Carousel
RGNT_CAROUSEL 1 Outer Reagent Carousel
RGNT_CAROUSEL 2 Inner Reagent Carousel
RGNT_PIPETTER1_FLUIDICS Reagent Pipettor #1 Fluidics (syr & pmp)
RGNT_PIPETTER1_THETA Reagent Pipettor #1 Theta Axis
RGNT_PIPETTER1_Z Reagent Pipettor #1 Z Axis
RGNT_PIPETTER2_FLUIDICS Reagent Pipettor #2 Fluidics (syr & pmp)
RGNT_PIPETTER2_THETA Reagent Pipettor #2 Theta Axis
RGNT_PIPETTER2_Z Reagent Pipettor #2 Z Axis
RV_LOADER RV Loader
RV_UNLOADER RV Unloader
SAMPLE_PIPETTER_FLUIDICS Sample Pipettor Fluidics (syr & pmp)
SAMPLE_PIPETTER_THETA Sample Pipettor Theta Axis
SAMPLE_PIPETTER_Z Sample Pipettor Z Axis
SHUTTER CMIA Shutter Mechanism
STAT_DIVERTER STAT diverter
STAT_PIPETTER_FLUIDICS STAT Pipetter Fluidics (syringe and pump
STAT_PIPETTER_THETA STAT Pipetter Theta Axis
STAT_PIPETTER_Z STAT Pipetter Z Axis
SYSTEM_VACUUM System vacuum
TRIGGER1 Pre-rigger Dispenser
TRIGGER2 Trigger Dispenser
WASH_ZONE2 Wash Zone #1 Fluidics
WASH_ZONE2_ASP Wash Zone #1 Aspirate Mechanism
WASH_ZONE2_SWITCH Wash Zone #1 Diverter Switch
WASH_ZONE3 Wash Zone #2 Fluidics

WASH_ZONE2_ASP Wash Zone #2 Aspirate Mechanism
OMS V1 V2
Purpose Low level Oregon Micro System (OMS) commands are used to move a motor or obtain data from it.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (for processing module motors - Table 5-2)
SET_MODULE 0 (for sample handler motors - Table 5-3)
V1= motor number, Table 5-2 and Table 5-3
V2 = any single OMS command, Table 5-7
Example Description
1>OMS 5 MR4000 moves the sample Pipettor z motor 4000 steps down
1>OMS 26 JG40000 runs the sample buffer pump at flush velocity
0>OMS 6 ST stops sample queue conveyor motor
Table 5-7: V2 OMS Commands

Commands Description Example
JG velocity Move motor at velocity (steps/sec) forward or backward indefinitely. Range is 0>OMS 6 JG4000
between 0 and 128000. Runs process queue 4000
steps/minute.
MA step Move to absolute step number. 1>OMS 5 MA3000

number Moves the process path one RV
position.
MR number Move number of steps from current position (can be plus or minus) 1>OMS 0 MR536
steps Moves the process path one RV
position.
RE Return current encoder position (Motors 0,1,2,and 3 only). 1>OMS 1 RE

Returns position of Outer Reagent
Carousel.
RP Return the current absolute position. 1>OMS 5 RP

Reports the sample z motor
position.
ST Stop motor using deceleration values set in mot.dat file 1>OMS 5 ST

Stops sample z motor.
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX V1 V2
Purpose This high level command only applies to systems with a standard sample handler. This command indexes the Star
Wheel associated with the specified processing module to the next engagement or aspirate position. Within each
sample carrier location, there are actually two positions. The engage position is one in which you move to safely
engage a carrier without affecting a trailing carrier. The aspirate position is the location at which the sample in a
carrier location is aligned for aspiration by the sample probe. At the aspirate position, bar code data can be read
and displayed.
Prerequisite None
V1 = Module (specifies which processing module 1-4)
V2 = index position (ENGAGE or ASPIRATE)
Example Description
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX 1 Moves the star wheel on module 1 to the engage position.

ENGAGE
STAR_WHEEL_INDEX 1 Moves the star wheel on module 1 to the aspirate position. bar code data can be read and
ASPIRATE displayed in this position.
VACUUM V1
Purpose This command turns the vacuum pump on or off.
V1 = Command, ON or OFF.
Example Description
1>VACUUM ON Turns the vacuum pump on in module 1.
Temperature Commands
TCB V1
Purpose This command allows for low level control over the functions on the Temperature Controller Board.
V1 = Command, Table 5-8
Example Description
1>TCB READ 17 On module 1, reads channel 17, Pre-Trigger Heater in degrees C. Returns 37000 = 37.0 C.
1>TCB CHAN_STATUS 12 On module 1, shows status of Process Path Zone 5.
1>TCB CHAN_CTRL 21 1 On module 1, turns on Wash Zone1 Buffer Heater.

Table 5-8: V1 Command
Example Description Command Output
CHAN_CTRL Enable or Disable the control and None

channel value alarms for a specified channel. See
Table 5-9, "Temperature Channel
Descriptions" for channel
descriptions.
value = 1 (Enable)
value = 0 (Disable)
CHAN_STATUS Returns channel status information. Returns thirteen columns with information about a given channel. The
channel See Table 5-9, "Temperature information appears on a single line (32 lines when all channels are
Channel Descriptions" for channel specified), with each column separated by a space. See Table 5-10,
descriptions. "CHAN_STATUS Column Descriptions" for column descriptions.
READ channel Read temperature on specified Integer temperature(s) in thousands of a degree (6 chars per value, 4
channel. See Table 5-9, values per line when all channels are read, each separated by a space,
"Temperature Channel e.g. 37.000 C = 37000).
Descriptions" for channel
descriptions.
Table 5-9: Temperature Channel Descriptions

Channel # Temperature Channel Descriptions
4 Process Path Zone 1
6 Wash Zone 1, Position 1- WAM
7 Reagent Cooler Temperature
10 Wash zone 1, Position 2 - WAM
16 Trigger Heater
17 Pre-Trigger Heater
21 Wash Zone 1, Buffer Heater
24 Wash Zone 2, Buffer Heater
28 Ambient Temperature
32 All Channels
Table 5-10: CHAN_STATUS Column Descriptions
Column # Description Reference
1 channel number 0-31
2 channel type 0=reference,1=monitor, 2=control, 3=WAM
3 on/off state 0=channel off, 1=channel on
4 temperature Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
5 high alarm limit Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
6 low alarm limit Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
7 alarm on/off state 0=channel off, 1=channel on
8 alarm pending 0=no alarm pending, 1=alarm pending
9 alarm count number of samples which had alarm conditions
10 set point the PID temperature set point
11 heater ticks the current heater tick count (0-960)
12 heater on ticks output of PID determines how many ticks the heater needs to be on (0-960)
13 heater period ticks the number of ticks in the heater update period (960)
DIO/EIEIO Commands
DIO V1 V2
Purpose This is a low level I/O command to read, set, or clear I/O bits on the CPU and optics board. Note that the
SET_MODULE command indicates the module that the CLI command accesses. If the SET_MODULE is set to
the sample handler, bits 48-95 are not accessible and an error results. Processing module bits are in Table 5-12,
"V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for Processing Module", 0-23 are read only, 24-47 are read/write, 48-94 are read only.
Standard sample handler bits are in Table 5-13, "V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for the Standard Sample Handler", 0-
23 are read only, 24-30 are read/write. Only the read only (input) bits are able to generate inputs.
V1 = bit, Table 5-12 for Assay Module, Table 5-13 for Sample handler.
V2 = command, Table 5-11
Example Description
0>DIO 27 SET 1 Load transfer arm opens.
0>DIO 30 READ Reads condition of Load Lane 1 Solenoid.
Table 5-11: V2, Commands

Commands Description
READ Return the current value of the solenoid.
Returns:
0 = off
1 = on
SET value Set solenoid to value.

Value:
0 = off
1 = on
Table 5-12: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for Processing Module

Bit # Input/Output Description Active Logic If Active Notes
0 Input AC failed 1 No AC input
1 Input Over Voltage 1 AC input too high
2 Input Under Voltage 1 AC input too low
3 Input Over Temperature 1 Power Supply hot
4 Input STAT Diverter Sensor 0 Diverter is extended i 2000 SR
8 Input RV Load Diverter Shutter Sensor 0 Shutter is activated
9 Input Wash Zone Bypass Sensor 0 Diverter is extended
13 Input SPI Comm Error 1 SPI command not recognized
14 Input RV Loader Sensor Calibration X Response Signal
16 Input Module ID (LSB) X 0=Module 1 or 3; 1=Module 2 or 4
17 Input Power Board Fault 1 Fault condition on power board
18 Input Module ID (MSB) X 0=Module 1 or 3; 1=Module 2 or 4
19 Input Buffer Full 0 Buffer level full
20 Input Buffer Low 0 Buffer level is < low level
21 Input Buffer Empty 0 Buffer level is practically empty
22 Input Vacuum low 1 Vacuum too low
23 Input Liquid in Vacuum 0 Drain valve FAILED
24 Output Power Supply All OFF 0 Power OFF
25 Output Vacuum Pump on/off 1 Vacuum pump ON
27 Output Heater OFF 0 AC power to heaters is disabled
31 Output SPI Decode 0 X Bit 0 of SPI Address (LSB)
32 Output SPI Decode 1 X Bit 1 of SPI Address
33 Output SPI Decode 2 X Bit 2 of SPI Address
34 Output SPI Decode 3 X Bit 3 of SPI Address (MSB)
48 Input Trigger FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home

49 Input Pre-Trigger FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
50 Input R1 Wash Cup FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
51 Input R2 Wash Cup FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
52 Input Sample Probe FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
53 Input R1 Probe FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
54 Input R2 Probe FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
55 Input STAT Buffer Pump Verification 1 Pump is home i 2000 SR
56 Input Wash Zone 1 FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
57 Input Wash Zone 2 FMI Pump Verification 1 Pump is home
62 Input RV at end of Transport 0 RV present
63 Input RV at RV Transport Drop Point 0 RV present
64 Input RV in place in staging lane 0 RV present
65 Input Hopper level low 1 Not enough RVs in Hopper
66 Input RV Load Diverter Sensor 0 Diverter is extended
68 Input RV Unload Solenoid Sensor 0 Unloader is Active
69 Input Front Lid 1 Lid is Open
70 Input Rear Lid 1 Lid is Open
71 Input Vacuum Accumulator Liquid Detect 1 Excess liquid in Accumulator
72 Input Reagent Access Lid 1 Lid is Open
73 Input Waste Chute 1 Waste container not present
84 Input Hopper Sensor (12 Volt) 0 Hopper is empty i 2000 SR
85 Input Assay Module Backplane +12v fuse 0 Fuse Blown
86 Input Assay Module Backplane -12v fuse 1 Fuse Blown
87 Input Assay Module Backplane +5v fuse 0 Fuse Blown
91 Input Air in Transfer Pump fluid line 0 Air is in the fluid line
92 Input Trigger Level Low 0 Level low
94 Input Pre-trigger Level Low 0 Level low
95 Input Over temperature from Motor Drivers 1 Driver board in Power Cage too HOT
Table 5-13: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for the Standard Sample Handler
Bit # Input/Output Description Active Logic If Active
0 Input Carrier Present Lane 1 0 Carrier Present
1 Input Carrier Present at gate for unload transfer 0 Carrier Present
2 Input Carrier Present at BCR Module 1* 0 Carrier Present

3 Input Carrier Present Lane 2 0 Carrier Present
4 Input Carrier Present BCR Module 2* 0 Carrier Present
7 Input LUI Stop 0 Key Pressed
8 Input LUI Load 0 Key Pressed
9 Input LUI Pause 0 Key Pressed
10 Input LUI Reverse 0 Key Pressed
11 Input PQ Access Door Sensor Module 2* 0 Window Closed
15 Input Carrier Present at Unload Queue 0 Carrier Present at Sensor
16 Input Overtemperature from Motor drivers 1 Driver board in Power Cage too HOT
17 Input Power Board Fault 1 Fault condition on power board
18 Input Assay Module Backplane +12V fuse 0 Fuse blown
19 Input Assay Module Backplane -12V fuse 1 Fuse blown
20 Input Assay Module Backplane +5V fuse 0 Fuse blown
24 Output LUI Load LED 1 LED on
25 Output LUI Load 2 LED 1 LED on
26 Output LUI Load 1 LED 1 LED on
27 Output Transfer 1 Solenoid actuator 1 Arm extended
28 Output Transfer 2 Solenoid actuator 1 Arm extended
29 Output Unload Transfer Gate Solenoid actuator 1 Gate retracted
30 Output Load Lane 1 Solenoid 1 Gate open
Note
* - Module numbering for this table is physically from right to left
Table 5-14: V1, DIO Bit Identifiers for the LAS Carousel
Bit # Input/Output Description Active Logic If Active
2 Input LAS Carousel Position Sensor 0 Position Detected
7 Input LUI Stop 0 Key Pressed
8 Input LUI Load 0 Key Pressed
9 Input LUI Pause 0 Key Pressed
10 Input LUI Advance 0 Key Pressed

14 Input Window Sensor 1 Window Closed
24 Output LUI Ready LED 1 LED on
DIVERT V1
Purpose This command cycles the diverter mechanism to divert an RV along the process path carousel. The diverter
solenoid extends, holds, and retracts using timing data specified in a system file.
V1 = Location, either LOAD or STAT (i 2000 SR only)
Example Description
1>DIVERT LOAD Places an RV in the outer lane at the load diverter for the next test.
1>DIVERT STAT Places an RV in the outer lane at the STAT diverter for the next test.
EIEIO V1 READ
Purpose EIEIO stands for Enhanced Indexer Extra I/O. This low level command is to read the condition of switches on the
standard sample handler.
V1 = bit, Table 5-15
Example Description
0>EIEIO 1 READ Read the status of carrier present at gate switch.
Table 5-15: V1, Bit Identifiers

Bit # Description Active Logic If Active
1 Carrier Present at load queue BCR 0 Carrier Present
2 Unload Queue #1 full 0 Carrier Present
3 Load queue gate lane #1 1 Gate Closed
4 Module #1 sample queue full* 0 Carrier Present
5 Unload queue gate 1 Gate Closed
6 Load transfer 1 Arm extended
7 Unload transfer 1 Arm extended
8 Indexer Fault/Ready LEDs 1 Ready LED is ON

16 Unload queue #2 full 0 Carrier Present
17 Module #2 sample Queue full* 0 Carrier Present
18 Load queue gate lane #2 1 Gate Closed
24 Indexer Fault/Ready LEDs 1 Ready LED is ON
Note
* - Module numbering for this table is physically from right to left
Solenoid Commands
SOL V1 V2 Value
Purpose This is a low level command that can actuate, retract, or read the control state of a solenoid on the processing
module. This command supplies access to the solenoid control on the Solenoid/DC Driver Board. The
SET_MODULE command indicates the module that the CLI command accesses. This command does not apply to
the sample handler, which uses DIO command to control solenoids.
V1 = solenoid, Table 5-17 for Process Module Solenoids.
V2 = command, Table 5-16.
Example Description
1>SOL 1 SET 1 Actuates solenoid 1, R1 syringe valve.
Table 5-16: V2, Commands

Commands Description
READ Return the current value of the solenoid.

Returns:
0 = off
1 = on
SET value Set solenoid to value.

Value:
0 = off
1 = on
Table 5-17: V1, Solenoid Identifiers

Solenoid Active
Description If Active Notes
# Logic
0 Sample Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
1 R1 Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
2 R2 Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
3 R1 Wash Cup Valve 1 Opens valve
4 R2 Wash Cup Valve 1 Opens valve
5 STAT Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve i 2000 SR only
9 Wash Zone #1, Dispense Valve #1 1 Opens valve
12 Wash Zone #1, Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
16 Wash Zone #2, Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
17 Trigger Dispense Valve 1 Opens valve
18 Trigger Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
19 Pre-Trigger Dispense Valve 1 Opens valve
20 Pre-Trigger Waste Valve 1 Opens valve
24 Transfer Pump Enable 0 Start pump
25 Transfer Pump Direction 1 Pump into onboard reservoir
30 Wash Zone #1, Vacuum Vessel 1 Apply vacuum
31 Wash Zone #2, Vacuum Vessel 1 Apply vacuum
32 RV Load Diverter Shutter 1 No longer contends with RV Load Diverter
34 STAT Diverter 1 Diverts and opens shutter i 2000 SR only
35 Wash Zone #1, Drain Vacuum Vessel 1 Allow vacuum vessel to drain
37 Wash Zone #2, Drain Vacuum Vessel 1 Allow vacuum vessel to drain
38 Reagent Pipettors, Vacuum Vessel 1 Apply vacuum
39 Reagent Pipettors, Drain Vacuum 1 Allow vacuum vessel to drain

Vessel
41 Buffamatic Valve 1 Allows buffer to be transferred
42 RV Load Diverter 1 Divert from staging lane to processing

lane
43 Waste- Main Liquid Air Separator 1 Drain liquid waste
Fluidics/Pipettors/Wash Zones/LLS Commands

ASPIRATE V1 V2 V3 V4
Purpose This command is used to aspirate the specified volume of liquid from the specified well.
Prerequisite SET MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number)
SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE (only for specific wells on the i 2000 SR, refer to the prerequisite commands
section)
SET_PROTOCOL SAMPLE (or other well, refer to the prerequisite commands section)
V1 = Volume (uL) of liquid to be aspirated (10 - 1200uL)
V2 = Name of the well where the aspiration is to be performed, Table 5-18
V3 = Number of steps to raise the probe before performing a wick-off (0 = no wick-off)
V4 = Depth of probe in liquid while aspirating (z steps)
Example Description
1>SET_PROTOCOL Get 50 uL from the sample cup with no wick-off and go 53 steps into the liquid.
SAMPLE
1>ASPIRATE 50 SAMPLE
0 53
1>SET_TEST_TYPE Get 50 uL from the sample cup at the STAT pipettor with no wick-off and go 53 steps into the liquid.
STAT_TYPE (Valid only for i 2000 SR).
1>SET_PROTOCOL
SAMPLE
1>ASPIRATE 50 SAMPLE
0 53
Note
The Well Names below can have different meanings based on the current protocol setting.
Table 5-18: V2, Well Designations

Well Name Description
RV Reaction Vessel into which the sample and primary assay reagents are dispensed.
WASH_CUP Location where probe washing is executed. Each pipettor has its own wash cup associated with it.
WASTE_CUP Location at which probe liquid waste is dispensed. Each pipettor has its own waste cup associated
with it.
REAGENT_1 The outer reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where the primary assay reagent has
been positioned.
REAGENT_2 The inner reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where the microparticle primary assay
reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_3 The reagent bottle location on the inner reagent carousel where the conjugate primary assay reagent
has been positioned.
REAGENT_4 The outer reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment
assay reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_5 The inner reagent bottle location on the outer reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment
assay reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_6 The reagent bottle location on the inner reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment assay
reagent has been positioned.
SAMPLE The location where the sample or STAT Pipettor aspirates sample.
PRETREAT_START Location at which pretreatment reagents and sample are dispensed to initiate a pretreatment step.
PRETREAT_COMPLETE Location at which the pretreatment step has been completed. The pretreated sample is aspirated from
the PRETREAT_COMPLETE location and placed in the RV location to continue normal assay
processing.
PREDILUTE Location into which a multi-RV dilution is initiated,
PREDILUTE_PRETREAT Location into which a pretreatment and predilution are done concurrently.
DISPENSE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
Purpose This command dispenses the specified volume (uL) into the specified well.
section)
V1 = Volume (uL) of liquid to be aspirated (10 - 1200uL)
V2 = Name of the well where the aspiration is to be performed, Table 5-18
V3 = Number of steps to raise the probe before performing a wick-off (0 = no wick-off)
V4 = Number of steps from the bottom of the specified well to start dispense ( 0)
V5 = Number of steps to raise the boom while performing dispense (0 = do not move)
Example Description
1>SET_PROTOCOL Put 50uL of liquid from the sample pipettor in a RV in processing position 1, 0 wick-off, 400 steps above
SAMPLE bottom, no z travel.
1>DISPENSE 50 RV 0
400 0
1>SET_TEST_TYPE Put 50uL of liquid from the STAT pipettor in an RV in processing position 45, 0 wick-off, 400 steps
STAT_TYPE above bottom, no z travel. (Valid only for i 2000 SR).
1>SET_PROTOCOL
SAMPLE
1>DISPENSE 50 RV 0
400 0
FLUSH_PIPETTER V1
Note
Pipetter is not the Abbott standard spelling, but it is the CLI command.
Purpose This is a high level command that is used to flush a default volume (uL) of buffer through a pipettor, repeatedly
cycling the associated syringe during the buffer flush. This command is allowed on any pipettor. Part of this
command moves the pipettor to the waste cup. Probe crash may occur if module is not in Ready state.
VACUUM ON
V1 = Pipettor (sample = 1, R1 = 2, R2 = 3, STAT = 4 (i 2000 SR only))
Example Description
1>FLUSH_PIPETTER 1 Flush Sample Pipettor
FLUSH_TRIGGER1
Purpose The FLUSH_TRIGGER1 command dispenses to waste the amount of pre-trigger specified by a system file which
defines a default flush.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_TRIGGER1 Flushes pre-trigger
FLUSH_TRIGGER2
Purpose The FLUSH_TRIGGER2 command dispenses to waste the amount of trigger specified by a system file which
defines a default flush.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_TRIGGER2 Flushes trigger
FLUSH_WASHER V1
Purpose The FLUSH_WASHER command dispenses to waste the amount of buffer specified by a system file which defines
a default flush.

V1 = wash zone, 2 = wash zone 1, 3 = wash zone 2.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_WASHER 2 Flushes wash zone 1 on the set module.
2>FLUSH_WASHER 3 Flushes wash zone 2 on the set module.
GET_LLS_DATA V1
Purpose This command retrieves the Liquid Level Sense (LLS) data log from the LLS monitoring hardware. The command
is executed after issuing a LLS ENABLE command. A string of data is output. The values are useful in
troubleshooting LLS errors.
The output consists of 32 values separated by a space. The first line of values of the output are: Minimum,
Average, Maximum, (Maximum-Minimum), (Maximum-Average), (Average-Minimum), Mode, Noise Reading, ADA
Count, and FNF count. The Mode value should be a value 0 through 15. The noise reading is calculated by the
FPGA. For good performance, the noise level value is expected to be less than 1/3 of the threshold value. The
ADA count is the Air During Aspiration count, the value of which will increment if the LLS is enabled and the
probe looses contact with the fluid before the LLS is disabled. The FNF count 0 is the Fluid Not Found counter,
the value of which will increment if the LLS is enabled and then disabled before the LLS detects fluid.
Values 13-31 of the output are data points collected by the 12 bit A/D converter. A value of 2000 to 4095 is output
if the probe is in liquid or near an LLS antenna. The last data value output is one of two special end of data
markers: 65535 = normal end of data, 65534 = overflow of 8K data buffer.
V1 = Pipettor, 0 = sample, 1 = R1, 2 = R2, 3 = STAT.
Example Description
Sequence: Output:
LLS 0 ENABLE
LLS 0 DISABLE 00300 00330 00400 00100 00070 00030 00000 00000 00000 00000
GET_LLS_DATA 0
00333 00333 00335 00335 00333 00333 00336 00331 00332 00334
00333 00327 00323 00327 00325 00328 00334 00337 00337 0334
00336 65534
LLS V1 V2 value
Purpose This is a low level Liquid Level Sense board command set.
V1 = Identifies which Pipettor board to address. Table 5-19

V2 = any level sense command from Table 5-20
Example Description
1>LLS 0 ENABLE Enables LLS mode on sample Pipettor
1>LLS 1 CLR_STATUS Clears the LLS/Event register on the R1 Pipettor.
Table 5-19: V1, Pipettor Board Mechanism

Identification
Pipettor Board # Description
0 Sample Pipettor
1 R1 Pipettor
2 R2 Pipettor
3 STAT Pipettor (i 2000 SR only)
Table 5-20: V2, Level Sense Command

Command Description
ENABLE Enable level sense mode.
DISABLE Disable current mode.
STATUS Retrieve contents of LLS Status/Events register
CLR_STATUS Clears the LLS/Event register.
LLS_LIMIT Enable or disable Z-axis limits interrupt generation to indexer board upon level sense. value: 0 = disable, 1 =
value enable.
Z_LIMIT value Enable or disable Z-axis limit sensor detection and interrupt generation to indexer board upon probe crash.
value: 0 = off, 1 = on.
PASSIVE_WASH V1 V2
Purpose This command is used to perform a passive wash on the sample or STAT probe (i 2000 SR only). This command
positions the probe at the wash or waste cup as specified and dispense the diluent for the volume requested.
SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE (only on i 2000 SR to wash the STAT pipettor)
V1 = Pump volume to use for each wash cycle (100 uL increments).
V2 = Well, either WASH_CUP or WASTE_CUP.
Example Description
1>PASSIVE_WASH 500 WASH_CUP Pumps 500 uL through the sample probe to the center of the cup.
1>PASSIVE_WASH 300 WASTE_CUP Pumps 300 uL through the sample probe to the outer circle of the cup.
1>SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE Pumps 500 uL through the STAT probe to the center of the cup.
1>PASSIVE_WASH 500 WASH_CUP
PROBE_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This command moves the probe arm to align the probe over the specified well at the specified offset from the
calibrated well location. The theta axis may be offset from this fixed position by use of the offset parameter. The
Pipettor that moves is indirectly specified by use of the SET_MODULE and SET_PROTOCOL commands. This
command first moves the probe to the Z-CLEAR position, then moves in the theta axis to the well. The probe is
left at the Z-CLEAR position above the target well.
section)
V1 = Well name, Table 5-18.
V2 = toffset is the number of steps to offset the Theta Boom Arm from the center of the well. 0 = no offset.
Example Description
1>PROBE_MOVE WASH_CUP 10 Moves the probe 10 steps from its wash cup.
1>SET_TEST_TYPE STAT_TYPE Moves the STAT probe 10 steps from its wash cup.
1>SET_PROTOCOL SAMPLE
1>PROB_MOVE WASH_CUP
PROBE_RAISE V1
Purpose This command positions the Z-axis of the specified boom at the height specified by the height parameter. This
command does not change the theta axis of the boom. The probe that moves is indirectly specified by use of the
SET_MODULE and SET_PROTOCOL commands.
section)
V1 = Height, Table 5-21
Example Description
1>PROBE_RAISE Z_ABOVE_WASH Puts probe above the wash cup.
Table 5-21: V1 Height

Height Description
Z_ABOVE_RV Probe at the top of the RV
Z_ABOVE_WASH Probe at the top if the wash cup.
Z_CLEAR Probe clears everything in process area.
Purpose This command dispenses the amount of pre-trigger solution specified by the volume parameter into the RV in the
current process path carousel location.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number).
V1 = volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL)
Example Description
1>TRIGGER1_DISPENSE 500 Dispenses 500 uL of pre-trigger into a RV.
Purpose This command dispenses the amount to trigger solution specified by the volume parameter into the RV in the
current process path carousel location.
V1 = volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL)
Example Description
1>TRIGGER2_DISPENSE 500 Dispenses 500 uL of trigger into a RV.
WASHER_ASPIRATE V1
Purpose This command aspirates the fluid out of the RVs in the process path that are currently aligned with the wash
zone. Due to the nature of the mechanism, the aspirate is exercised across all positions with aspirate probes in
the wash zone. For Wash Zone 2, this also includes the liquid waste aspirate position. This command includes the
steps to lower the probes, turn on the vacuum, and raise the probes.
VACUUM ON
V1 = Wash Zone, 2 is Wash Zone 1, 3 is Wash Zone 2.
Example Description
1>WASHER_ASPIRATE 2 Aspirates fluid present in RVs under Wash Zone 1.
WASHER_DISPENSE V1 V2 V3
Purpose This command dispenses a volume of fluid into the RV in the process path that is currently aligned with the
specified wash zone dispense nozzle.
V2 = Station, identifies a specific dispense position on a wash station (1, 2, or 3).
V3 = Volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL).
Example Description
1>WASHER_DISPENSE 2 3 500 Dispenses 500uL of fluid from probe 3 on Wash Zone 1.
WASHER_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This command moves the washer probe assembly to the specified position.
V2 = Position, specifies the calibrated washer position to move to. See Table 5-22.
Example Description
1>WASHER_MOVE 2 START Moves wash zone 1 probes to the aspiration start level.
Table 5-22: V2 Position

Position Description
BOTTOM Wash probes at aspiration stop level (RV bottom).
PARK Wash probes above RV.

START Wash probes at aspiration start level.
Optics Commands
CMIA_READ V1
Purpose This command performs a complete CMIA assay read. This command includes moving the shutter, turning on the
PMT, background read, Trigger dispense, signal read, and turning off the PMT. The Trigger dispense volume may
be set to 0 to inhibit the Trigger dispense during read.
V1 = Volume of Trigger dispensed in uL (must be in increments of 100 uL and 0).
Example Description
1>CMIA_READ 500 Dispenses 500 uL of trigger and reads signal.
1>CMIA_READ 0 Dispenses no trigger and reads signal.
OPTICS V1
Purpose This command allows for low level control over the functions on the CMIA optics reader board.
V1 = Command. See Table 5-23.
Example Description
1>OPTICS PMT 1 Turns on high voltage to optics for optics read.
Table 5-23: V1 Commands

Command Description
PMT value Turn the PMT high voltage on/off. value: 0 = off, 1 = on
START Start a read sequence. Clears the read counter and the latch. This command should be issued first to start a read
sequence.
STATUS Retrieve board status:
Returns the following:
PMT high voltage status, where 0 is off, 1 is on.

Mode status where, I = ISA clock mode, N = normal mode, F = Factory test mode.
Blue LED value, with range of -32768 to +32767
Pass LED status, where 0 is off, 1 is on.
READ V1 V2
Purpose This command executes an optics read by taking the specified number of subreads at the specified read interval.
Then the command returns the subread count values at the conclusion of execution. Prior to executing this
command, separate commands should be issued to close the shutter and turn on the PMT high voltage.
V1 = Interval, time interval between subreads (integer number of msec) (50-3000).
V2 = Numreads, number of subreads to take (1-200).
Example Description
1>READ 100 Reads 5 subreads at every 100 msec. Returns 8 characters/ value, each separated by a single space. For
5 example:
01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567
SHUTTER_MOVE V1
Purpose This command moves the shutter to a specified station.
V1 = Station, see Table 5-24.
Example Description
1>SHUTTER_MOVE CLOSE Moves shutter up around RV.
Table 5-24: V1 Station

STATION DESCRIPTION
CLOSE Shutter closed (RV captured).
OPEN Shutter opened.
EXTEND Shutter extended further open for removal.
Note
May need to be manually re-inserted into process path slots.
Reagent Carousel Commands
DISPERSION V1
Purpose This command can activate or deactivate the dispersion of micro-particles on the reagent carousel. Once
dispersion is activated, it continues indefinitely until deactivated.
V1 = Command, ON = activate, OFF = deactivate.
Example Description
1>DISPERSION ON Activates dispersion ring on reagent carousel.
REAGENT_RING_MOVE V1 V2 V3
Purpose This command allows movement of a specified reagent carousel ring to a specified location, at a specified station.
V1 = Reagent ring ID, 1 = outer, 2 = middle, 3 = inner.
V2 = Locnum, Carousel location number (0 = deadwedge, or 1-25).
V3 = Station, See Table 5-25.
Example Description
1>REAGENT_RING_MOVE 2 7 BARCODE Moves the middle reagent rings position 7 to the reagent bar code reader station.

Station Description
BARCODE Reagent pack bar code reader.
PIPE1 Pipetting station (R1 access).
PIPE2 Pipetting station (R2 access - valid for only ring 1 on the i 2000; valid for rings 1-3 on the i 2000 SR).
LOAD Center of the reagent bottle access area.
SET_REAGENT_BOTTLE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
Purpose This command identifies which type of reagent bottle is currently loaded into the specified reagent ring and
reagent carousel location. This information is needed in order to establish the necessary data (i.e. HVR table, Top
of bottle, Bottom of bottle) for a subsequent ASPIRATE command out of one of the reagent wells.
V1 = Reagent ring ID, 1 = outer, 2 = middle, 3 = inner.

V2 = Carousel location number (1-25).
V3 = Reagent bottle type, Table 5-26.
V4 = Current fill volume of reagent in bottle (real number in mL 0.0)
V5 = Non-usable volume of reagent in bottle (real number in mL 0.0)
Example Description
1>SET_REAGENT_BOTTLE Tell the instrument that there is a Medium sized reagent bottle on the inner carousel at position 7,
3 7 B 15.0 1.5 with 15 mL of reagent in it, with a dead volume of 1.5 mL.
Table 5-26: V3 Reagent bottle type

Reagent bottle type Description
A Small Reagent Bottle (25 mL capacity),
B Medium Reagent Bottle (32-mL capacity).
C Large Reagent Bottle (60-mL capacity).
Process Path Commands
PROC_PATH V1
Purpose This command moves the process path carousel V1 positions relative to its current position in the counter
clockwise direction.
V1 = The number of carousel locations to move (1-112).
Example Description
1>PROC_PATH 6 Moves the process path 6 positions counter clockwise.
PROC_PATH_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This command moves the process carousel location specified by V1 to the location specified by V2. The process
path only moves in the counter clockwise direction.
Prerequisite: SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number).
V1 = Carousel location number (1-112)

V2 = Station, see Table 5-27.
Example Description
1>PROC_PATH_MOVE 4 ACCESS Moves the #4 position counter clockwise to the access door.

Process Path
Position
Station Description Notes
i 2000 i 2000 SR
ACCESS Access port to processing lane 28 28
CMIA CMIA optical read and trigger addition station 98 98
ITV1 Vortexing station 3 3
ITV2 Vortexing station n/a 49 i 2000 SR

only
ITV3 Vortexing station 72 72
ITV4 Vortexing and pre-trigger addition station 94 94
PRETREAT Pre-Treated Sample pipetting station 24 24
REAGENT1 Reagent 1 pipetting station 2 2
RV_LOAD RV load position (Bypass for position 1) 1 1
RV_STAT RV STAT position n/a 47 i 2000 SR

only
RV_UNLOAD RV unload position 109 109
RV_XFER Point where RVs are loaded from the RV Loader onto the inner 46 45
process path
SAMPLE Sample pipetting station at position 1 1 1
STAT_SAMPLE Sample pipetting station at STAT position n/a 47 i 2000 SR

only
TEMP_PROBE1 Temperature probe insertion position 1 11 80
TEMP_PROBE2 Temperature probe insertion position 2 11 80
WASH2_1 Wash Station 2 Position 1 64 64

WASH2_BP Wash Station 2 Bypass 60 60
WASTE Liquid waste aspiration 100 100
Software Commands
BOOT_DIAGS
Purpose This command is used to execute a sequence of boot diagnostics and initializations on the following
subassemblies:
CPU Board
Motor Indexer Boards
Solenoid / DC Motor Driver Board (Assay Module only)
Optics / Digital I/O Board (Assay Module only)
LLS /PM Boards (Assay Module only)
Temperature Controller Board (Assay Module only)
Reagent Bar Code Reader (Assay Module only)
Load Queue Bar Code Reader (Sample Handler only)
Sample Queue Bar Code Reader (Sample Handler only)
Each subassembly on the associated module is tested and reinitialized. The results of each test are reported in
the command output, as PASS or FAIL. Note that this command may require up to one minute to complete its
execution. Also note that this command leaves all subassemblies in their bootup initialization state. All tested
subassemblies may require further initialization prior to use.
Example Description
1>BOOT_DIAGS After about one minute, a list of subassemblies, with a PASS or FAIL associated with it, is printed.
CLEAR_LOG V1
Purpose This command clears all entries from the specified log.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number - only required for logs specific to a
processing module or sample handler)
V1 = Log, See Table 5-28.
Example Description
1>CLEAR_LOG LLS Clears all entries from the LLS log.
Table 5-28: V1 Log

Log Description
ASSAY Assay activity log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
CAL Assay calibration log. One assay calibration log is maintained for the entire system. All assay calibrations for all
modules are contained in one log.
HISTORY Permanent message history log. One message history log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how
many modules are configured.
LAS Lab Automation System log. One LAS log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many modules are
configured.
LLS Liquid Level Sense log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
MAINT Maintenance History log. One maintenance history log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many
modules are configured.
OPTICS Logs the optics read for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
QC QC log. One QC log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many modules are configured.
PM Pressure Monitoring log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
POST Power On Self Test log for a module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
RESULT Result log. One result log is maintained for the entire system. All test patient, control, and calibrator test results for all
modules are contained in one log.
SAMPLE Sample log to record all the significant events associated with sample management.
SCRIPT Contains detailed information from performance of M&D procedures. Information includes some screen text and all
CLI commands and responses to CLI commands within M&D procedures.
TEMP Temporary Message log. Logs the most recent events that have been generated.
TRACE Trace log for a module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
WAM Wash Aspirate Mechanism log. One WAM log is maintained for each module.
GET_LOG V1 V2
Purpose This command extracts the data from the specified log into a text file. The log is placed in the file specified by the
file parameter.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (or any other applicable processing module number - only required for logs specific to a
processing module or sample handler).
V1 = Log, See Table 5-28.
V2 = File, name of file on the SCC (including path) into which the assay log is to be placed.
Example Description
1>GET_LOG LLS A:\LLS.LOG Copies the LLS log to the floppy disk in drive A:\ to a file called LLS.LOG.
1>GET_LOG HISTORY Copies the HISTORY log to the location LOGS\00001HIS.LOG on the D:\
D:\LOGS\00001HIS.LOG drive.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-119) • © 2002, 2009 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
Field Updates are distributed in ISA EDOC-022 current version. See History Report for change listing. Developed by GSS ePublishing. Abbott Service and Support Information • Copyright 2015 • Abbott Laboratories, Abbott
Park, IL 60064. All rights reserved. Trademark references listed in the ISA and TSB databases. Procedure Database control number DA-S00787 current version.

M & D Search Criteria Revision Date --- 2/2/2012
UsedOn: Procedure Number:
c16000
c4000 Description:
c8000
i1000SR Scope:
i2000

User: Type: Software Category:
Version:
ADMIN Diagnostics 2.6/3.1x As Needed
CSC Maintenance 3.0 Bar Code Readers
FSE 4.0x Carousels
Operator 5.0x Daily
5.1x Fluidics Wash

2571 Record(s) returned.
= Click to sort
UsedOn Software Procedure User Type // Module Category Status Scope Option Time Special Tools
Description Module// Number
Version
c16000 5.0x 1000 Absorbance Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure takes wavelength None 5
Reads c16000 or 4 Temperature Ready reads on an operator selectable
number of water blanks and dye
samples. The operator also selects
the number of read cycles, the
delay between read cycles, and
the primary and/or secondary
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
c16000 5.0x 1001 Optics Trigger FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure shall test the None 5
Sensor Check c16000 or 4 Temperature Ready trigger sensor and shall display
and report the trigger sensor
value.
value.
value.
value.
c16000 5.0x 1002 Photometer and CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure shall provide DAQ L1 Auto Gain 5
ICT DAQ Data c16000 or 4 Temperature Ready data for 16 wavelenghts and 16 L2 A/D
ICT channels. L3 A/D range
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
c16000 5.0x 1003 Change Lamp Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure shall provide the None 15
c16000 or 4 Ready user instructions for changing the
source lamp.
source lamp.
source lamp.
source lamp.
c16000 5.0x 1008 Optics Total Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure will test the 1 Quick test 10-30 depending on
Test c16000 or 4 Temperature Ready variability in the optics reads 2 Optics dark current option chosen
throughout a 30 or 33 read test. 3 Optics shutter test
4 Exit
4 Exit
4 Exit
4 Exit
c16000 5.0x 1009 Beam Height FSE Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Stopped, This procedure provides optics None Time - variable Cuvette Segment Alignment tool
Alignment c16000 Temperature Ready, reads to assist the Service (LN 08L73-01)
Warming Engineer to align the light beam
height in the cuvette.
Alignment c16000 Temperature Ready reads to assist the Service (LN 08L73-01)
Engineer to align the light beam
c16000 5.0x 1010 Cuvette Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure shall check the None 3
Integrity Test c16000 or 4 Temperature Ready condition of all 165 cuvette pairs,
pass, fail or has no blank
readings. All cuvettes are checked
against the cuvette blank limit
value (7225). Note: If the
processing module has not
completed a cuvette wash in the
run mode after a power on there
will be no blank readings.
c16000 5.0x 1101 Robotics Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure shall allow the user 0 Exit 15 Cuvette Segment Alignment Tool
Tool c16000 or 4 Ready to manipulate all of the carousels 1 Reaction carousel (LN 08L73-01)
and pipettors, reagent supply 2 Sample carousel
centers and wash station, ICT and 3 R1 pipettor
mixers and water bath. 4 R2 pipettor
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
c16000 5.0x 1119 Transport Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, Aligns the carrier transport to the 5 min none
Calibration RSH Ready, bays and carrier positioner. In
Warming addition the carrier positioner’s
back lash and pitch are calculated.
c16000 5.0x 1120 Sample Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure determines the None 10 Cuvette segment alignment tool
Calibration c16000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in (LN 8L73-01)
relation to the home position of the Tap water or saline
sample pipettor Lint-free tissue
RSH:
Carrier calibration tool (LN 3E13-
01)
LAS
Pipettor calibration tool
SH bar code tool
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
c16000 5.0x 1121 R1 Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure determines the None 10 Cuvette Segment alignment Tool
relation to the home position of the
pipettor.
pipettor.
pipettor.
c16000 8.0x 1121 R1 Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure determines the None 10 Cuvette Segment
Calibration c16000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in alignment Tool (LN 08L73-
relation to the home position of the 01)
pipettor. R1 outer segment, 12
position with pipettor cal
target
R1 inner segment, 20
position, with pipettor cal
target
Lint-free tissue
Water
pipettor.
pipettor.
pipettor.
Calibration c16000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in alignment Tool (LN 08L73-
position, with pipettor
calibration target
calibration target
Lint-free tissue
Water
c16000 5.0x 1123 Mixer Alignment FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, This procedure shall enable the L1 Mixer 1 10
c16000 or 4 Wash Ready user to position the mixers over L2 Mixer 2
the. Wash Cups and Cuvettes to L4 Exit
visually inspect the alignment. This
procedure shall enable the users
to align and or calibrate the mixers
c16000 5.0x 1124 Wash Cup FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, This procedure shall enable the L1 Sample 10
Alignment c16000 or 4 Wash Ready user to visually align the pipettor L2 R1
probes over the wash cups by L3 R2
controlling the movement of the L4 Exit
pipettor probes using the LUI
buttons.
buttons.
buttons.
buttons.
c16000 5.0x 1125 ICT Alignment FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, ICT Stopped, This procedure is used as a tool L1 Home 10
c16000 or 4 Ready for inspecting the alignment of the L2 Reaction carousel
ICT probe with respect to the cuvette
cuvette position and the Reference L3 ICT Reference
Solution Cup position. Solution Cup
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
c16000 5.0x 1127 Crash Sensor FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, This procedure shall allow the user 1 Sample pipettor 15
Alignment c16000 or 4 Ready to align the crash sensor for either 2 R1 outer pipettor
the sample probe, the R1 probe, 3 R2 outer pipettor
or the R2 probe. 4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
c16000 5.0x 1151 Probe Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, This procedure shall move each of 1 Sample pipettor 10
Alignment Test c16000 or 4 Ready the pipettors over each of its 2 R1 pipettor
respective positions and allow the 3 R2 pipettor
user to visually inspect the 4 All
alignment of the pipettor over each 5Exit
position.
position.
position.
position.
c16000 5.0x 1161 Probe Move Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, This procedure shall move the Sample 2
c16000 or 4 Ready sample and reagent pipettors to a R1
position conducive for changing R2
the pipettor probe. The procedure
shall return the pipettor back to the
home position after the particular
probe has been changed.
c16000 5.0x 1162 Carrier FSE Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (RSH only) 5 min none
Transport Move RSH Ready, This procedure moves the carrier
Warming transport to the maintenance
location.
location.
location.
location.
c16000 5.0x 1175 Wash Cup Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready This procedure is used as a tool 1 Sample Wash Cup 20
c16000 or 4 Wash for measuring the water flow from 2 Reagent
the sample, reagent, and mixer 3 Mixer
wash cups. 4 Exit
wash cups. 4 Exit
wash cups. 4 Exit
c16000 8.0x 1175 Wash Cup Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready This procedure is used as a tool 1 Sample Wash Cup 20 100 mL graduated cylinder
c16000 or 4 Wash for measuring the water flow from 2 Reagent Waste container
wash cups. 4 Exit
c16000 7.0x 1260 Cuvette Washer FSE Diagnostics// 1, Fluidics Ready This procedure is used to None 10 min Container capable of holding
Test c16000 Wash troubleshoot the cuvette washer. 1000mL
Water (deionized or tap)
c16000 5.0x 2030 S.Pipettor CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, The S Pipettor Precision/Accuracy None 10
Precision/Accuracy c16000 or 4 Ready procedure will test the precision
and accuracy of the pipettor using
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
c16000 5.0x 2031 R1 Pipettor CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, The S Pipettor Precision/Accuracy None 10
Precision /Accuracy c16000 or 4 Ready procedure will test the precision
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
c16000 5.0x 2040 Sample Pipettor CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, The Sample Pipettor Gravimetric None 10 Gravimetric Balance
Gravimetric c16000 or 4 Ready procedure will test the precision Saline
and accuracy of the pipettor using Sample cups
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
c16000 5.0x 2041 R1 Pipettor CSC Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, The R1 Pipettor Gravimetric None 10
Gravimetric c16000 or 4 Ready procedure will test the precision
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
c16000 5.0x 2043 Sample Pipettor Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, The Sample Pipettor Check None 10 Calibrated pipette capable of
Check c16000 or 4 Ready procedure will test the precision dispensing 20uL
and accuracy of the pipettor using Saline
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
c16000 5.0x 2044 R1 Pipettor Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Precision Stopped, The R1 Pipettor Check procedure None 10
Check c16000 or 4 Ready will test the precision and
accuracy of the pipettor using
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
c16000 5.0x 2129 Add Water Bath Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure adds the Water None 5
Additive c16000 or 4 Bath Additive to the Water Bath.
c16000 5.0x 2131 Flush ICT Cup Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure drains and refills None 3
c16000 or 4 the ICT Reference solution from
ICT Reference Solution Cup.
c16000 5.0x 2132 Flush Water Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure flushes all water None 3
Lines c16000 or 4 lines.
c16000 5.0x 2134 Change Water Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure drains the water None 5
Bath c16000 or 4 from the water bath, refills it, and
then adds on water bath additive.
c16000 5.0x 2155 Flush Bulk Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure primes the ICT None 2
Solutions c16000 or 4 Reference solution, the Alkaline
Wash and the Acid Wash
solutions for the c 16000
instruments with the installed ICT
module and primes only the
Alkaline Wash and Acid Wash
solutions for the instruments
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
c16000 5.0x 2181 Internal FSE Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides None 180 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
Decontamination c16000 or 4 Ready instructions to perform the internal Cotton swabs
decontamination of the c 16000 Phillips screw driver
processing module. Water Bath Additive
Water bath filter (7-
202500-101)
c8000 decon. accessory
kit (7-93510-01)
Water Bath Filter 7-
202500-101
kit (7-93510-01)
202500-101
kit (7-93510-01)
202500-101
kit (7-93510-01)
c16000 7.0x 2183 Clean Wash Operator Maintenance// 1, As Needed Ready This procedure is performed to None 40 min 2.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Cups c16000 clean and decontaminate the Lint free tissues
pipettor and mixer wash cups. 25 mL syringe
Note: Cotton tip applicator
FSE logon allows the FSE to clean Water (deionized or tap)
the waste cup and water bath
overflow in addition to the wash
cups.
cups.
c16000 5.0x 3010 Reaction Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Carousels Stopped, This procedure shall enable the None 2
Carousel Home/Move c16000 or 4 Ready user to test the reaction carousel
by homing and moving the
assembly.
assembly.
assembly.
assembly.
c16000 5.0x 3011 Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Carousels Stopped, This procedure shall enable the 1 Reagent supply 2
Reagent/Sample c16000 or 4 Ready user to home the Reagent Supply center 1
Carousel Home Centers 1, 2 and the Sample 2 Reagent supply
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
c16000 5.0x 3126 Mixer Vibration Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Reaction Stopped, This procedure shall allow the user Mixer1 3
Test c16000 or 4 Mechanisms Ready to test the vibration level of the Mixer 2
mixer blades on the c 16000 Exit
c16000 5.0x 3206 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure will verify operation Rgt 1 10
Code Readers Test c16000 or 4 Readers Ready of the reagent supply center bar
code readers at any position on Rgt 2
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
c16000 5.0x 3222 RSH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics // 0 Bar Code Ready, (RSH only) 5 min Sample Carrier
Calibration RSH Readers Warming Calibration positions for Sample ID SH bar code tool (06E69-01)
bar codes are defined for the RSH
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
c16000 5.0x 3251 Sample Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure will verify operation None 3
Carousel Bar Code c16000 or 4 Readers Ready of the sample carousel bar code
Reader Test readers at any position on the
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
c16000 5.0x 3252 RSH Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Ready, This procedure moves a carrier 5 min SH bar code tool (LN6E69-01) or
Reader Test RSH Readers Warming from a bay and section to the bar bar coded sample tubes (optional)
code reader where the carrier and Sample Carrier
sample tubes are read.
c16000 5.0x 3253 Bar Code FSE Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the Code 39 large 3 min none
Configuration SCC Ready, configuration of additional bar code intercharacter
Warming parameters. gap
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
c16000 5.0x 3317 RSH Test Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Ready, (RSH only). 5 min Sample carrier
RSH Warming One sample carrier moves from Tap water (c System only)
the RSH bay 1, section 1 to the
bar code reader. The carrier is
then moved to the aspiration
point(s) and the probe(s) move
down into each tube. All other
carriers move from the RSH bays
to the carrier positioner(s) and
back to the original bay.
c16000 5.0x 3319 Carrier Probe CSC Diagnostics // 0 Modules Ready, The carrier filled with sample tubes c 16000 5 min Sample carrier
Alignment Test RSH Warming moves to the appropriate carrier Carrier positioner Sample tubes(5)
positioner. At the i 2000 SR Saline
routine and STAT aspiration Pocket 1
locations, each position in the Pocket 2
carrier is moved to the aspiration Done Testing
point. The pipettor probe is moved
CI16200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
CI16200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
CI16200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
CI16200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
c16000 5.0x 3323 RSH Section Operator Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Ready, This procedure tests the ability of Enter a bay and 5 min Sample carrier
test RSH Sensors Warming the RSH carrier transport to pick sectionLocate the first
up a carrier from a specific carrier detectedEnd
location and return it to that testing
location.
location.
location.
location.
c16000 5.0x 3400 Interlock Sensor Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Solenoids/ Stopped, All interlock sensors for the c 16000 10 min none
Test c16000 or 4 Sensors Ready, processing module and the
Warming sample handler are checked during R1 Reagent
this procedure. The user is asked supply center
to open and close covers to cover
facilitate testing. R2 Reagent
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
c16000 5.0x 3401 Section/Bay Operator Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests the Test all 5 min Sample carriers
Sensors Test RSH Sensors Ready, carrier/tray sensors for priority and sections/bays Sample trays
Warming routine bays. Test selected
section or bay
< td>
section or bay
< td>
section or bay
< td>
section or bay
< td>
c16000 5.0x 3525 Temperature Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure displays the None 3
Status c16000 or 4 Ready current and average temperatures
of the water bath, reagent supply
cneters, sample carousel and the
instrument.
instrument.
instrument.
instrument.
c16000 5.0x 3526 Check Water Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure compares the None 5 Thermometer(LN 8C94-88)
Bath Temperature c16000 or 4 Ready instrument water bath temperature
read to the measured water bath
temperature and calculates the
difference.
difference.
difference.
difference.
c16000 5.0x 3610 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready, This procedure tests the ability to 3 min Tap water or saline
LLS Test c16000 or 4 Wash Warming detect liquid at sample pipettor sample cups
aspiration point. RSH:
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
c16000 5.0x 3625 Pipettors LLS Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Stopped, This procedure tests the liquid 1 R1 Pipettor LLS 5
Test c16000 or 4 Wash Ready level sensing (LLS) system for the 2 R2 pipettor LLS
Sample, R1 and R2 reagent 3 Sample pipettor LLS
pipettors. 4 All pipettors
5 Exit
5 Exit
5 Exit
5 Exit
c16000 5.0x 3710 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (SSH and RSH)Sample Handler 1 min none
RSH Ready, keypad function is tested during
Warming this procedure. The user is asked
to perform operations to facilitate
testing.
testing.
testing.
testing.
c16000 5.0x 3720 Keypad Test Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, Processing module keypad None 5
c16000 or 4 Ready function is tested during this
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
c16000 5.0x 3805 Pressure FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fluidics Ready This procedure will test the None 15
Monitor Test c16000 or 4 Wash pressure monitor board and
pressure monitor transducer for
communications and consistancy.
c16000 5.0x 4080 Module Operator Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 5 min none
Initialization c16000 or 4 Ready, perform a processing module
Warming initialization with the processing
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
c16000 5.0x 4090 Sample Handler Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 2 min none
Initialization RSH Ready, perform a sample handler
Warming initialization with the sample
handler doors/covers open.
c16000 5.0x 5140 Pumps/Valves FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Syringes/ Stopped, This procedure shall allow the user Pumps 10
Test c16000 or 4 Pumps Ready to turn on and off the pumps and Valves
valves on the c 16000 Exit
Sub Option
Sub Option
Sub Option
Sub Option
c16000 5.0x 5142 Wash Station FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure will move the wash L1 Down 10
Up/Down c16000 or 4 Motors Ready station nozzles up and down and L2 Step down
allow for alignment check. L4 Exit
c16000 5.0x 5405 Crash Sensor Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, This procedure tests the crash 1 Sample pipettor 3
Test c16000 or 4 Ready sensor for Sample, R1 and R2 2 R1 outer pipettor
pipettors. 3 R2 outer pipettor
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
c16000 5.0x 5500 SH Motor Test Operator Diagnostics// 0 Fuses/ Stopped, (SSH only) Load queue 1 min none
RSH Motors Ready, To home the following standard Load transfer
Warming SH motors: load queue, unload Processing
queue, load transfer, unload queue 1
transfer, sample queue, and Star Star wheel 1
Wheel. Unload transfer
Unload queue
Home all
End testing
Additional options are

available in a multi-
module system.
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
c16000 5.0x 5501 RSH Motor Operator Diagnostics // 0 Fuses/ Stopped, (RSH only) Carrier 5 min none
Test RSH Motors Ready, To home the following RSH transport X
Warming motors: carrier transport X, carrier Carrier
transport theta, carrier transport Z, transport theta
and carrier positioner. Carrier
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
c16000 5.0x 5506 RSH Sensor Operator Diagnostics // 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, (RSH only) Carrier 10 min Carrier
Test RSH Sensors Ready, This procedure tests the carrier transport theta Carrier tray
Warming transport and carrier positioner align
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
c16000 5.0x 5507 RSH Indicator Operator Diagnostics // 0 Modules Stopped, (RSH only) 1 min None
Lights Test RSH Ready, This procedure tests the RSH
Warming indicator lights.
c16000 5.0x 5712 Voltages Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure will test the None 2
c16000 or 4 Motors Ready voltages of +5V, -15V, +15V,
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
c16000 5.0x 6000 Retrieve Test FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the total number of 1 min none
Counts SCC Ready, tests initiated and tests completed
Warming for the selected processing
module. Test counts may be
cleared during this procedure.
c16000 5.0x 6001 Save/Restore FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure will allow the user 1 Save robotics 5
DAQ Data c16000 or 4 Ready to save and load DAQ data to and alignment data from the
from the DAQ board and CPU DAQ board to the CPU
board. board.
2 Load robotics
alignment data from the
CPU board to the DAQ
board.
3 Clear all data from
the DAQ board and
load robotics alignment
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
c16000 8.0x 6001 Save/Restore FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure will allow the user
1 Save robotics 5
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
c16000 5.0x 6004 Copy Backup Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Copies system software backup to Copy Backup Variable Blank or appendable CDR/CDRW
Software SCC Ready, a CD or replace a backup on the software from or
Warming SCC with one on a CD. (x): drive to CD CDR/CDRW containing
Note: Performing this procedure Copy Backup compressed backup software
does not backup the system software from
software. CD to (x): drive
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
c16000 8.0x 6007 SCC Utilities Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the user to Touch screen variable none
SCC Ready, perform the following functions: calibration
Warming USB utilities
Calibrate the touch screen Check/Repair
monitor ARCHITECT
View the USB drive(s) database
Eject the USB drive(s) Clear CLI Port
Check and repair the (i2000SR LAS
ARCHITECT database only)
Clear the CLI port Abbottlink
(i2000SR LAS only) utilites
Initiate AbbottLink (AbbottLink
connector utilities consolidated
(AbbottLink consolidated configuration
configuration only) only)
Backup utilities
If logged on as FSE, in addition to
the above operations you will be
able to view backup drives and
look for missing backup files.
c16000 5.0x 6008 Controller Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, To configure the PM and SH 1 min none
Configuration SCC Ready, controller board after replacement.
Warming Bootcode is downloaded to the SH
or PM CPU. This procedure
configures the module so new
boot code will be downloaded into
memory during the next power
cycle.
Note: A power cycle must be
performed for changes to take
effect.
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
c16000 5.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs, copy the Retrieve and Time variable Materials vary depending on the
SCC Ready, database to CD, copy archived Copy Current option selected. Required
Warming logs to CD and retrieve a Memory Logs to Disk materials may include:
Dump file. If requested by Abbott and/or Hard CDR or CDRW disks
personnel, the logs may be Drive Floppy/Floppies
cleared from the system. Copy database
to CD
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Copy Archived
to Disk and/or Hard Drive: Logs from Hard
This option will copy the following Drive to CD
logs to the D drive and Floppy or Retrieve
CD if selected. Memory Dump
Sample Handler logs: SH Trace, File (FSE only)
Sample Activity, Power On Self
test
Processing Module Logs: Assay
Activity, Assay Calibration, Assay
Parameter, Assay QC Reuslt Data,
Liquid Level Sense, Maintenance
History, Permanent Message
History, Pressure Monitoring,
Quality Control, Result, Scripting,
Temporary Message History, Dr.
Watson, Host, LAS, ARM, Arch,
Unhandled, Application Event,
Temporary, CDRecord, Monitor log
(only valid on SCC platform C and
higher), Printed Reports
In addition, the i System copies:
Power On Self Test, PM Trace,
Wash Aspirate Monitoring.
In addition, the c System
copies:Optics
Note: An AchivedLogModem.zip
file is generated when logs are
copied to the hard drive. This file
contains all of the logs except the
Optics log. This file is smaller and
should be used when transferring
logs via a modem.
Copy database to the CD:This

option will compress and copy the
database to the D drive and CD.
Copy Archive Logs from Hard

Drive to CD:This option will copy
up to 5 previously retrieved
compressed logs from the D drive
to a CD.
Retrieve memory dump file:

(FSE only)
This option will compress and copy
a memory dump file to a CD.
Refer to P-204 Log Retrieval
Procedure software (version 2.02
or higher) for additional
information.
to CD
test
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
c16000 7.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs and Retrieve and Time variable Materials vary depending on the
SCC Ready, memeory dump file, copy the Copy Current option selected. Required
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to Disk materials may include:
archived logs to CD. and/or Hard CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the Drive Floppy/Floppies
memory dump can be retrieved Copy database
without current logs. If requested to CD
by Abbott personnel, the logs may Copy Archived
be cleared from the system. Logs from Hard
Drive to CD
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Retrieve
to Disk and/or Hard Drive: Memory Dump
This option will copy the following File (FSE only)
logs to the D drive and Floppy or
CD if selected.
Sample Handler logs: SH Trace,
test
Activity, Assay Calibration, Liquid
Level Sense, Maintenance History,
Permanent Message History,
Pressure Monitoring, Quality
Control, Result, Scripting,
higher), Mini-Memory Dump,
Assay QC Result Data, Remote
SW Status, remote SW History,
Printed reports,
In addition:
i System copies: Power On Self
Test, PM Trace, Wash Aspirate
Monitoring.
i1000SR copies:Reagent
c System copies:Optics, Photo
data
c4000 copies: Lamp monitoring
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to USB materials may include:
archived logs to CD. drive, CD CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the and/or Hard USB drive
memory dump can be retrieved Drive
without current logs. If requested Copy database
by Abbott personnel, the logs may to CD
be cleared from the system. Copy Archived
Logs from Hard
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Drive to CD
to USB drive, CD and/or Hard Retrieve
Drive: Memory Dump
This option will copy logs to the D File (FSE only)
drive and USB drive or CD if
selected. In addition a compresses
archive file containing the logs is
saved. Up to 5 archived files can
be saved.
For a complete list of logs refer to
logs via a modem.
Copy Database to the CD: This

database to a CD.

Drive to CD: This option will copy
to a CD.
Retrieve Memory Dump File:

(FSE only)
Procedure for additional
information.
c16000 5.0x 6011 Clean Reagent Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3
Supply Centers c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for ensuring that
reagent supply centers are free of
debris and deposits.
c16000 5.0x 6013 Clean Sample Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3
Carousel/Area c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the
sample carousel and making sure
the assembly is free of debris and
deposits.
deposits.
deposits.
deposits.
c16000 5.0x 6016 Check Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 2
Dispense c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for ensuring that the
Components sample and reagent dispense
components are functioning
properly.
properly.
properly.
properly.
c16000 5.0x 6018 Clean Cuvette Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 5
Wash Nozzles c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the
cuvette washer nozzles.
c16000 5.0x 6019 Check ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Weekly Ready This procedure provides None 2
Components c16000 or 4 instructions for checking the ICT
probe and tubing for the presence
of leaks and bubbles. Ensure the 1
mL syringe connections on ICT
aspiration and ICT reference pump
do not leak.
do not leak.
do not leak.
do not leak.
c16000 5.0x 6021 Clean Mixers Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3
c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the mixers
and ensuring that no protein build-
up is observed.
up is observed.
up is observed.
up is observed.
c16000 5.0x 6023 Clean Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3
Sample/Reagent c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the
Probes exterior of the sample and reagent
probes.
probes.
probes.
c16000 8.0x 6023 Clean Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3 Nozzle cleaning wire
Sample/Reagent c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the Detergent A
Probes exterior of the sample and reagent Cotton Swabs
probes. Deionized water
c16000 5.0x 6024 Check 1 ml Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Daily Stopped, This procedure provides None 2
Syringes c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for checking the 1 ml
syringes on the wash solution
pump to ensure that the syringe
connections and the plunger
interior do not show evidence of
leakage.
leakage.
leakage.
leakage.
c16000 5.0x 6025 Check Wash Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 2
Solution Trays c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for checking the
presence of liquid of evidence of
leakage in the wash solution trays.
c16000 5.0x 6026 Check Syringes Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3
and Valves c16000 or 4 Ready instructions to check the sample
and reagent syringes and solenoid
valve connections for leakage.
c16000 5.0x 6028 Check DI Water Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Daily Stopped, This procedure provides logging None 2
Purity c16000 or 4 Ready capability for checking the purity of
the DI water system.
c16000 5.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints one of the 2 min None
Information SCC state following:
A complete list of all

assays currently installed
on the system and their
version number. The list
contains the assay
number, assay name and
version.
Calibration bar code labels
A range of numeric SID
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels
c16000 8.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints one of the Show installed 2 min None
Information SCC state following: assay
information
A complete list of all Print IA
assays currently installed calibration bar
on the system and their code labels
version number. The list Print CC
contains the assay calibration bar
number, assay name and code labels
version. Print a range
Calibration bar code labels of numbered
A range of numeric SID bar code labels
bar code labels
c16000 5.0x 6038 External Operator Maintenance// 5 As Needed Stopped, This procedure gives instructions Supply and 5 min 0.1% Sodium hypochlorite
Decontamination SCC Ready, for decontaminating the external pump center Lint free tissue or gauze
Warming surfaces of the ARCHITECT Sample
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
c16000 5.0x 6052 Wash Cuvettes Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes all None 10
c16000 or 4 cuvettes with Acid and Alkaline
Wash solutions and fills the
cuvettes with water.
c16000 5.0x 6053 Probe Water Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes the probes None 10
Wash c16000 or 4 on the sample pipettor, R1 reagent
pipettor, and R2 reagent pipettor
with water.
with water.
with water.
with water.
c16000 5.0x 6054 Probe Acid Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes the probes None 10
with Acid Wash solution.
c16000 5.0x 6055 Detergent B Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes the probes None 10
Probe Wash c16000 or 4 on the sample pipettor, R1 reagent
with Detergent B wash solution.
c16000 5.0x 6056 Wash Cuvettes Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Weekly Ready This procedure washes all None 25
with Detergent c16000 or 4 cuvettes with Detergent A Wash
Solution.
Solution.
Solution.
Solution.
c16000 8.0x 6057 Detergent A Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready This procedure washes the probes None 5 min Detergent A
Probe Wash c16000 on the sample pipettor, R1 reagent
with detergent A.
c16000 8.0x 6058 Clean R2 Probe Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready This procedure washes the R2 None 8 min ICT Cleaning Fluid
c16000 reagent pipettor probes with ICT
Cleaning Fluid to remove internal
protein build-up.
NOTE: Since this is an as-needed
maintenance procedure, the
frequency at which it should be
performed must be determined.
Each laboratory should determine
when 3,000 tests of R2 reagents
containing elevated amounts of
serum protein (greater than or
equal to 20% w/w) are run, or
when R2 reagent carryover is
observed.
For additional information refer to
the ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual.
c16000 5.0x 6062 Wash ICT With Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes the ICT None 3
Cleaning Fluid c16000 or 4 with ICT cleaning fluid
c16000 5.0x 6063 Flush ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure flushes the ICT None 2
Module c16000 or 4 with ICT Reference solution.
c16000 5.0x 6070 Daily Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Daily Ready This procedure performs the None 15
Maintenance c16000 or 4 following functions:
-Flushes sample/reagent lines and
reagent supply center 1 and 2
-Changes water in water bath
-Adds water bath additive to water
bath
-Washes ICT unit with ICT
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
-Drains and fills ICT reference
solution cup.
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
c16000 8.0x 6070 Daily Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Daily Ready This procedure performs the None 15 ICT Cleaning Fluid
Maintenance c16000 or 4 following functions: ICT sample diluent
-Flushes sample/reagent lines and Water Bath Additive
reagent supply center 1 and 2 Detergent A
-Changes water in water bath 0.5% Acid Wash
-Adds water bath additive to water Purified water*
bath Cotton swabs*
cleaning fluid *Required only for systems with
-Washes ICT unit with ICT whole blood applications.
Reference solution.
solution cup.
-Inspect the sample and reagent
syringes for bubbles and leaks
-Replace sample wash solutions
-Clean sample probe exterior
(whole blood only)
-Verify that a backup has been
performed in the last thirty (30)
days.
-Check the database integrity
c16000 8.0x 6100 Na Hypochlorite Operator Maintenance// 5 As Needed Stopped, Procedure to calculate the volume None 1min None
Calculator SCC Ready, of sodium (Na) hypochlorite
Warming required to make a specific volume
of sodium hypochlorite solution.
c16000 5.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min ARCHITECT i System System
Assays SCC Ready, or selected assays. The procedure Assay CD-ROM
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups
assays Specific assay or ARCHITECT c System Assay
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups or
assays Specific assay ARCHITECT c System Assay CD-
NOTE: Prior to installing a new or group (These ROM
updated assay file, refer to the options will or
assay CDROM or e-assay depend on the e-assay file
customer information for any assay CD)
special instructions. When Return to main
installing an e-assay file from menu
Abbott mail, the customer
information may be viewed during
the installation procedure.
c16000 5.0x 6115 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min D:\
Procedures SCC Ready, or selected procedures. The Single SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Warming procedure is also used to delete Multiple directory
selected procedures. Procedures All System Software
may be installed using one of the Configuration CD-ROM
following Delete: Floppy disk associated
Single with a TSB or ISA
D:\ Multiple ARCHITECT System
SERVICE\PROCEDURES\ Maintenance and
directory Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
Configuration CD-ROM
Floppy disk associated
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
selected procedures. All System Software CD-ROM
USB drive associated with
Delete: a TSB or ISA
Single
Multiple
c16000 5.0x 6116 Update 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to update Install media options: 2 min ARCHITECT System Maintenance
Procedure SCC Ready, diagnostic procedure 6115 Floppy disk and Diagnostics CD-ROM,
Warming Install/Delete Procedure. Cd or
Procedures may be installed using Hard Drive Floppy disk associated with a TSB
one of the following: or ISA.
ARCHITECT System Maintenance
and Diagnostics CD-ROM
D:\ SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
directory
Floppy disk associated with a TSB
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
c16000 8.0x 6116 Update 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to update Install media options: 2 min D:\
Procedure SCC Ready, diagnostic procedure 6115 USB drive SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Warming Install/Delete Procedure. CD directory
Hard Drive System Software CD-ROM
a TSB or ISA
c16000 7.0x 6117 Remove Trig ADMIN Diagnostics// 1, Utilities Stopped, The procedure removes all Trig None <2 min None
Cuvette SmartWash c16000 Ready cuvette SmartWash settings from
all clinical chemistry assays
except Lipase.
except Lipase.
c16000 5.0x 6200 CLI Terminal FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Ready, This procedure allows service to Time variable None
Simulator SCC Warming issue CLI commands through an
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
c16000 7.0x 6220 User-Defined ADMIN Diagnostics// 5, Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows you to Create/Edit Time variable Materials vary depending on the
Maintenence SCC Ready, create, edit, import, export, print Export option selected:
Warming and view user-defined, text-based Import CD-R or unformatted CD-RW
maintenance procedures. View/Print Floppy disk
USB flash drive
USB flash drive
c16000 5.0x 6300 Clean ICT Drain Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3
Tip c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the tip of
the ICT aspiration drain tubing.
c16000 8.0x 6300 Clean ICT Drain Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3 Lint-free tissue
Tip c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the tip of Deionized water
c16000 5.0x 6301 Sample Syringe Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure will provide None 10
Maintenance c16000 or 4 Ready reference and maintenance
logging capabilitiy for replacing the
sample syringe seal tips 1 and 2
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
c16000 5.0x 6302 Wash Syringe Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure will provide None 10
wash solution syringe seal tips 1
and 2 and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
c16000 8.0x 6302 Wash Syringe Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Ready This procedure will provide None 15 Phillips screwdriver
Maintenance c16000 or 4 reference and maintenance Slotted screwdriver
logging capabilitiy for replacing the 10 mm Wrench
wash solution syringe seal tips 1 Absorbent towel
and 2 and o-rings. Cotton Swabs
Sample/wash solution
syringe o-ring (LN 09D52-
02)
syringe seal tip #1 (LN
09D37-02)
09D38-02)
c16000 5.0x 6303 Reagent Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure will provide None 10
Syringe Maintenance c16000 or 4 Ready reference and maintenance
reagent syringe seal tips 1 and 2
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
c16000 5.0x 6304 Change 1 ml Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 15
Syringes c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for changing the wash
solution, ICT reference solution
and ICT aspiration 1 ml syringes.
c16000 5.0x 6305 Change ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 5
Asp Check Valve c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for changing the ICT
aspiration pump check valve.
c16000 8.0x 6305 Change ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 5 Absorbent towel
Asp Check Valve c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for changing the ICT ICT aspiration pump check
aspiration pump check valve. valve
c16000 5.0x 6306 Check ICT Ref Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides checking None 3
Check Valves c16000 or 4 Ready the ICT reference solution check
valve.
valve.
valve.
c16000 8.0x 6306 Check ICT Ref Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides checking None 3 Clamp or large hemostats
Check Valves c16000 or 4 Ready the ICT reference solution check Absorbent towel
valve. Beaker large enough to
accommodate 1 mL
syringes with check valves
Deionized water
c16000 5.0x 6307 Check/Clean Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 10
HC Waste Sensor c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for checking and
cleaning the high-concentration
waste sensor.
waste sensor.
waste sensor.
c16000 8.0x 6307 Check/Clean Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Quarterly Stopped, This procedure provides None 10 Absorbent towel
HC Waste Sensor c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for checking and Beaker large enough to
cleaning the high-concentration accommodate high
waste sensor. concentration waste
sensor
0.5% sodium hypochlorite
c16000 5.0x 6308 Check HC Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Weekly Stopped, This procedure provides None 2
Waste Pump Tubing c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for checking the high-
concentration waste pump tubing.
c16000 5.0x 6309 Change ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides None 10
Module c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for changing the ICT
module.
module.
module.
c16000 5.0x 6310 Clean Cuvettes Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides None 20
- Manual c16000 or 4 Ready instructions for manually cleaning
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes.
c16000 5.0x 6311 RSH Cleaning Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, (RSH only) Tray bays 5 min 0.1% sodium hypochlorite
RSH Ready, This procedure provides Priority DI water
Warming instructions for cleaning the sections cotton swabs
following RSH components (RSH Carrier Lint free tissue
only): transport
Tray bays RSH covers
Priority sections Carrier
Carrier transport arm and guard positioner(s)
RSH covers All
Carrier positioner Exit
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
c16000 5.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the MAC address of None 1
Address SCC Ready, the secondary network interface
Warming card installed in an SCC. This is
used when setting up the
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
c16000 7.0x 6500 MAC Hardware Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Any Determines the MAC address of None 1
Address SCC state the secondary network interface
card installed in an SCC. This is
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
value.
value.
value.
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
source lamp.
source lamp.
source lamp.
4 Exit
4 Exit
4 Exit
c4000 6.0x 1009 Beam Height FSE Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Stopped, This procedure provides optics None Time - variable c4000 Cuvette Height Alignment
Alignment c4000 Temperature Ready, reads to assist the Service tool (7-205777-01)
Alignment c4000 Temperature Ready, reads to assist the Service tool (7-205777-01)
Alignment c4000 Temperature Ready reads to assist the Service tool (7-205777-01)
Integrity Test c4000 or 4 Temperature Ready condition of all 99 cuvettes, pass,
fail or has no blank readings. All
cuvettes are checked against the
cuvette blank limit value (7225).
Note: If the processing module
has not completed a cuvette wash
in the run mode after a power on
there will be no blank readings.
Tool c4000 or 4 Ready to manipulate all of the carousels 1 Reaction carousel (LN 02P86-01)
and pipettors, reagent supply 2 R1 pipettor
center and wash station, ICT and 3 R2 pipettor
mixers and water bath. 4 Sample pipettor
5 Mixers
6 R1 carousel
7 R2 carousel
8 ICT
9 Wash station
10 Water bath
Sub Option
5 Mixers
6 R1 carousel
7 R2 carousel
8 ICT
9 Wash station
10 Water bath
Sub Option
5 Mixers
6 R1 carousel
7 R2 carousel
8 ICT
9 Wash station
10 Water bath
Sub Option
c4000 6.0x 1114 Carrier Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, To align the carrier transport to the 12 min Sample carriers
Transport Calibration RSH Ready, reagent carousel latch actuator (stand Carrier calibration tool
Warming and a sample carrier to the alone) (01P16-01)
load/unload area. 20 min Cotton swab or lint-free
(ci4100) tissue
Deionized water
(ci4100) tissue
Deionized water
(ci4100) tissue
Deionized water
c4000 6.0x 1120 Sample Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure determines the All 12 Cuvette segment alignment tool
Calibration c4000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in Sample (LN 02P86-01)
relation to the home position of the handler Tap water or saline
sample pipettor Processing Lint-free tissue
module RSH:
Reaction Carrier calibration tool (LN 01P16-
carousel 01)
Wash cup
module RSH:
carousel 01)
Wash cup
module RSH:
carousel 01)
Wash cup
Calibration c4000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in alignment Tool (LN 02P86-
pipettor. Reagent outer and inner
segments with pipettor cal
targets
lint-free tissue
Deionized water
targets
lint-free tissue
Deionized water
targets
lint-free tissue
Deionized water
targets
lint-free tissue
Deionized water
targets
lint-free tissue
Deionized water
targets
lint-free tissue
Deionized water
the Wash Cups and Cuvettes to L4 Exit
buttons.
buttons.
buttons.
c4000 6.0x 1125 ICT Alignment FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, ICT Stopped, This procedure is used as a tool L1 Home 10 Metric ruler
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 Exit
position.
position.
position.
c4000 6.0x 1161 Probe Move Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Pipettors Stopped, This procedure shall move the Sample Variable
wash cups. 4 Exit
wash cups. 4 Exit
c4000 or 4 Wash for measuring the water flow from 2 Reagent Waste container
wash cups. 4 Exit
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
202500-101
kit (7-93510-01)
202500-101
kit (7-93510-01)
202500-101
kit (7-93510-01)
cups.
cups.
assembly.
assembly.
assembly.
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
c4000 6.0x 3206 Reagent Bar Operator Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Bar Code Stopped, This procedure will verify operation Rgt 1 5 Bar coded reagent cartridges
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
c4000 6.0x 3230 Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Stopped, The bar code reader is tested 1-4 min Sample carriers
Reader Test RSH Readers Ready, during this procedure. Only the SH bar code tool (06E69-
Warming first 20 characters of each bar 01) or bar coded sample
code label are displayed. tubes (optional)
c4000 6.0x 3240 Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Stopped, This procedure calibrates positions 2 min Sample carrier
Calibration RSH Readers Ready, for bar coded sample tubes and SH bar code tool (06E69-
Warming reagent bottles. 01)
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
c4000 6.0x 3310 RSH Test Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, The operation of the RSH and bar Carrier test 5-10 min Sample carriers
RSH Ready, code reader are tested during this Lights test 5 bar coded sample tubes
Warming procedure. Carrier
transport
motion test
transport
motion test
transport
motion test
c4000 6.0x 3312 Carrier FSE Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, The carrier transport is moved to 1 min none
Transport Move RSH Ready, the maintenance location during
Warming this procedure.
c4000 6.0x 3330 RSH Alignment FSE Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, This procedure allows the user to Initialize carrier 5-15 min Sample carriers
Test RSH Ready, visually check the carrier transport transport Sample cups/tubes
Warming alignment at various RSH Check sample
positions, to include the carrier at RSH
load/unload area, and aspiration section(s)
area. Check sample
carrier at
aspiration area
area. Check sample
carrier at
aspiration area
area. Check sample
carrier at
aspiration area
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
instrument.
instrument.
instrument.
difference.
difference.
difference.
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
5 Exit
5 Exit
5 Exit
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
c4000 6.0x 4120 RSH Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 1 min none
center cover open.
center cover open.
center cover open.
Sub Option
Sub Option
Sub Option
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
4 R1 inner pipettor
5 R2 inner pipettor
6 All
7 Exit
c4000 6.0x 5550 RSH Motor Operator Diagnostics// 0 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure tests the motors Carrier 2 min none
Test RSH Motors Ready, associated with the carrier transport:
Warming transport, reagent bottle rotator, Carrier
and the reagent carousel access transport Z-
door. axis
Carrier
transport theta-
axis
Carrier
transport X-
axis
Home all
Bottle rotator
Reagent
access door
door. axis
Carrier
transport theta-
axis
Carrier
transport X-
axis
Home all
Bottle rotator
Reagent
access door
door. axis
Carrier
transport theta-
axis
Carrier
transport X-
axis
Home all
Bottle rotator
Reagent
access door
c4000 6.0x 5555 RSH Sensor Operator Diagnostics// 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests the sensors Rail guide 5 min Sample carrier
Tests RSH Sensors Ready, associated with the carrier Load/unload
Warming transport, and load/unload area. area
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
monitor ARCHITECT
Backup utilities
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
to CD
test
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
Drive to CD
CD if selected.
test
Printed reports,
In addition:
Monitoring.
data
logs via a modem.


to a CD.
(FSE only)
information.
Warming database to CD, and copy Logs to USB materials may include:
archived logs to CD. drive, CD CDR or CDRW disks
If logged on as FSE a copy of the and/or Hard USB drive
memory dump can be retrieved Drive
without current logs. If requested Copy database
by Abbott personnel, the logs may to CD
be cleared from the system. Copy Archived
Logs from Hard
Retrieve and Copy Current logs Drive to CD
to USB drive, CD and/or Hard Retrieve
Drive: Memory Dump
This option will copy logs to the D File (FSE only)
drive and USB drive or CD if
selected. In addition a compresses
archive file containing the logs is
saved. Up to 5 archived files can
be saved.
For a complete list of logs refer to
logs via a modem.

database to a CD.

to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
c4000 6.0x 6016 Check Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 2 Slotted screwdriver
properly.
properly.
properly.
c4000 6.0x 6018 Clean Cuvette Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 5 Nozzle cleaning wire
do not leak.
do not leak.
do not leak.
up is observed.
up is observed.
up is observed.
probes.
probes.
leakage.
leakage.
leakage.
c4000 6.0x 6027 Clean Reagent Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready This procedure provides None Variable Lint-free towel
Supply Center c4000 instructions for cleaning up spills
and ensuring the reagent supply
center is free of debris and
deposits.
deposits.
deposits.

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels
information
bar code labels
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
with water.
with water.
with water.
c4000 6.0x 6054 Probe Acid Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes the probes None 5 0.5% Acid Wash Solution
c4000 6.0x 6055 Detergent B Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Ready This procedure washes the probes None 5 10% Detergent B Solution
Solution.
Solution.
Solution.
with detergent A.
protein build-up.
observed.
Operations Manual.
c4000 6.0x 6064 Clean Reaction Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides None 20 minutes Lint-free tissue
Carousel c4000 Ready instructions for cleaning the Purified water
reaction carousel to remove any
debris.
debris.
debris.
-Flushes sample/reagent lines
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
-Flushes sample/reagent lines
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
bath Cotton swabs*
Reference solution.
solution cup.
(whole blood only)
days.
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
c4000 8.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min Assay CD-ROM
Assays SCC Ready, or selected assays. The procedure or
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups ARCHITECT c System Assay CD-
assays Specific assay ROM
NOTE: Prior to installing a new or group (These or
updated assay file, refer to the options will e-assay file
assay CDROM or e-assay depend on the
the installation procedure
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
Single
Multiple
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
a TSB or ISA
except Lipase.
except Lipase.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
USB flash drive
USB flash drive
c4000 6.0x 6300 Clean ICT Drain Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 1-2 Lint-free tissue Deionized water
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
02)
09D37-02)
09D38-02)
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
valve.
valve.
accommodate 1 mL
Deionized water
waste sensor.
waste sensor.
sensor
c4000 6.0x 6309 Change ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides None 10 ICT module
module.
c4000 7.0x 6309 Change ICT Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides None 10 ICT module
module.
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes.
c4000 6.0x 6400 RSH Cleaning Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, This procedure provides RSH sections 5 min 0.1% sodium hypochlorite
RSH Ready, instructions for cleaning the Transport arm Deionized water
Warming following RSH components: Bar code Cotton swabs
reader Lint-free tissues
RSH sections Aspiration area
Carrier transport arm All
Bar code reader
Aspiration area
Bar code reader
Aspiration area
Bar code reader
Aspiration area
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
wavelengths.
value.
value.
value.
value.
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
source lamp.
source lamp.
source lamp.
source lamp.
4 Exit
4 Exit
4 Exit
4 Exit
c8000 8.0x 1009 Beam Height FSE Diagnostics // 1 Optics/ Stopped, This procedure provides optics None Time-variable c8000 Cuvette segment alignment
Alignment c8000 Temperature Ready reads to assist the Service tool (LN 2J93-01)
c8000 2.11 1011 Light Path FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure will align the light None 10 Cuvette segment robocal
Alignment c8000 or 4 Temperature Ready, path in the Reaction Carousel alignment tool (LN 2J93-01)
Warming home position.
c8000 2.2x 1011 Light Path FSE Diagnostics // 1, 2, 3, Optics/ Stopped, This procedure will align the light None 10 Cuvette segment robocal
Alignment c8000 or 4 Temperature Ready, path in the Reaction Carousel alignment tool (LN 2J93-01)
Warming home position.
c8000 5.0x 1101 Robotics Test FSE Diagnostics// 1, 2, 3, Modules Stopped, This procedure shall allow the user 0 Exit 15 Cuvette Segment Robocal
Tool c8000 or 4 Ready to manipulate all of the carousels 1 Reaction carousel Alignment Tool (LN 2J93-01)
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
5 Sample pipettor
6 Mixer
7 Reagent supply
center 1
8 Reagent supply
center 2
9 ICT
10 Wash station
11 Water bath
exchange
Sub Option
Calibration c8000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in (LN 2J93-01)
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
RSH:
01)
LAS
SH bar code tool
pipettor.
pipettor.
pipettor.
Calibration c8000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in alignment Tool (LN 2J93-
position with pipettor cal
target
position, with pipettor cal
target
Lint-free tissue
Water
pipettor.
pipettor.
pipettor.
Calibration c8000 or 4 Ready position of calibration targets in alignment Tool (LN 2J93-
pipettor. R2 outer segment,12
calibration target
R2 segment, 14 position,
with pipettor calibration
target
Lint-free tissue
Water
buttons.
buttons.
buttons.
buttons.
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
L4 Exit
Alignment c8000 or 4 Ready to align the crash sensor for either 2 R1 pipettor
the sample probe, the R1 probe, 3 R2 pipettor
or the R2 probe. 4 Exit
position.
position.
position.
position.
location.
location.
location.
location.
wash cups. 4 Exit
wash cups. 4 Exit
wash cups. 4 Exit
c8000 or 4 Wash for measuring the water flow from 2 Reagent 90 mm tubing
the sample, reagent, and mixer 3 Mixer Waste container
wash cups. 4 Exit
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
Orange G dye.
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline.
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline. Sample cups
RSH
Sample carrier
LAS
Sample tube
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
saline
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
without the ICT mod
Pump Poppet Valve Set (c
system) (LN 09D36-02) for
the high concentration
waste bellows pump
kit (7-93510-01)
waste bellows pump
kit (7-93510-01)
waste bellows pump
kit (7-93510-01)
waste bellows pump
kit (7-93510-01)
cups.
cups.
assembly.
assembly.
assembly.
assembly.
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
Carousel. center 2
3 Sample carousel
4 Exit
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
the supply center.
Exit
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
bar code reader.
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
carousel.
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
RSH Warming One sample carrier moves from
the RSH bay 1, section 1 to the Tap water (c System only)
Alignment Test RSH Warming moves to the appropriate carrier Carrier positioner Sample tubes (5)
CI8200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
CI8200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
CI8200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
CI8200
down into the tube.
Carrier positioner
Module 1,
pocket 1
Module 1,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 1
Module 2,
pocket 2
Module 2,
pocket 3
Module 2,
pocket 4
Done testing
location.
location.
location.
location.
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
supply center
cover
Sample
carousel cover
RSH covers
All
Exit
section or bay
< td>
section or bay
< td>
section or bay
< td>
section or bay
< td>
instrument.
instrument.
instrument.
instrument.
difference.
difference.
difference.
difference.
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
Sample carrier
LAS:
Sample tube
SH bar code tool
5 Exit
5 Exit
5 Exit
5 Exit
testing.
testing.
testing.
testing.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
Sub Option
Sub Option
Sub Option
Sub Option
Test c8000 or 4 Ready sensor for Sample, R1 and R2 2 R1 pipettor
pipettors. 3 R2 pipettor
4 All
5 Exit
4 All
5 Exit
4 All
5 Exit
4 All
5 Exit
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
Unload queue
Home all
End testing

module system.
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
transport Z
Carrier
positioner
Home all
End Testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
sensors. Carrier
transport Z
align
Carrier
positioner
carrier detect
Rail guide
Section carrier
detect
Section align
Tray section
carrier
Carrier
positioner
encoder
Test all
End testing
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
+12V, +11.5 and +24V.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
board. board.
2 Load robotics
board.
the DAQ board and
data from the CPU
board to the DAQ
board.
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
x= backup drive
monitor ARCHITECT
Backup utilities
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
cycle.
effect.
to CD
test
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
to CD
test
copies:Optics
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
Drive to CD
CD if selected.
test
Printed reports,
In addition:
Monitoring.
data
logs via a modem.


to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
c8000 8.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, If requested by Abbott personnel, Retrieve and Time variable Materials vary depending on the
SCC Ready, the logs may be cleared from the Copy Current option selected. Required
Warming system. Logs to USB materials may include:
drive, CD CDR or CDRW disks
Retrieve and Copy Current logs and/or Hard USB drive
to USB drive, CD and/or Hard Drive
Drive: Copy database
This option will copy logs to the D to CD
drive and USB drive or CD if Copy Archived
selected. In addition a compresses Logs from Hard
archive file containing the logs is Drive to CD
saved. Up to 5 archived files can Retrieve
be saved. Memory Dump
For a complete list of logs refer to File (FSE only)
logs via a modem.

database to a CD.

to a CD.

(FSE only)
information.
deposits.
deposits.
deposits.
deposits.
properly.
properly.
properly.
properly.
mL syringe connections on the ICT
aspiration and ICT reference
pumps do not leak.
pumps do not leak.
pumps do not leak.
pumps do not leak.
up is observed.
up is observed.
up is observed.
up is observed.
probes.
probes.
probes.
leakage.
leakage.
leakage.
leakage.

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels

contains the assay
version.
bar code labels
information
bar code labels
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
modules. handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
with water.
with water.
with water.
with water.
Solution.
Solution.
Solution.
Solution.
with detergent A.
protein build-up.
observed.
Operations Manual.
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
bath
cleaning fluid
Reference solution.
solution cup.
bath Cotton swabs*
Reference solution.
solution cup.
(whole blood only)
days.
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
group (These CD-ROM
options will
depend on the
assay CD)
Return to main
menu
c8000 8.0x 6114 Install/Delete ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used to install all Install: 2 min Assay CD-ROM
Assays SCC Ready, or selected assays. The procedure or
Warming is also used to delete selected All groups ARCHITECT c System Assay CD-
assays Specific assay ROM
NOTE: Prior to installing a new or group (These or
updated assay file, refer to the options will e-assay file
assay CDROM or e-assay depend on the
the installation procedure.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
System Software
with a TSB or ISA
ARCHITECT System
Maintenance and
Diagnostics CD-ROM.
Single
Multiple
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
directory
or ISA.
a TSB or ISA
except Lipase.
except Lipase.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
M/D interface.
USB flash drive
USB flash drive
c8000 8.0x 6300 Clean ICT Drain Operator Maintenance// 1, 2, 3, Monthly Stopped, This procedure provides None 3 Lint-free tissue
Tip c8000 or 4 Ready instructions for cleaning the tip of Deionized water
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
and 2 and o-rings.
02)
09D37-02)
09D38-02)
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
and o-rings.
valve.
valve.
valve.
accommodate 1 mL
Deionized water
waste sensor.
waste sensor.
waste sensor.
sensor
FSE logon
Allows the FSE to convert a
bellows type high concentration
waste pump to a peristaltic high
FSE logon
FSE logon
FSE logon
module.
module.
module.
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes.
the cuvettes
the cuvettes
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
only): transport
RSH covers All
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
AbbottLink system.
i1000SR 5.0x 1005 Optics Test CSC Diagnostics // 1,2 Optics/ Stopped, CMIA Reader is tested with low none 5
i1000SR Temperature Ready, level commands. Twenty sets of
Warming reads are taken at 3 different delay
times. If any reads are zero the
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
test fails.
i1000SR 5.0x 1022 Optics Operator Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Ready, Note 2 min None
Background i1000sr Temperature Warming Verify that the covers are
closed and that the
sensors are not bypassed
prior to running this
procedure.
Three background readings are

taken during this procedure. One
with no RV in position, the second
with an empty RV and the third
with Pre-Trigger solution in the
RV.
Normalization and linearity
parameters are not used during
this procedure. Raw counts must
be between 3 RLU - 500 RLU.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
closed and that the
procedure.

RV.
i1000SR 5.0x 1032 Shutter Test Operator Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Stopped, The shutter moves to two positions Open and 1 min None
i1000sr Temperature Ready, during this procedure, Closed and check sensors
Warming Open to verify correct operation. test
Close and
check sensors
test
Open/close
repeatedly test
Close and
check sensors
test
Open/close
repeatedly test
Close and
check sensors
test
Open/close
repeatedly test
Close and
check sensors
test
Open/close
repeatedly test
Close and
check sensors
test
Open/close
repeatedly test
i1000SR 5.0x 1047 Optics FSE Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Ready, To verify the optics CMIA reader is 15 min Optics Verifier Solution (LN06F75-
Verification i1000SR Temperature Warming working as expected. 60)
Normalization and linearity factors
are verified by taking five reads
from the three levels of optics
normalization solution and
comparing the reads to the
standard. The three reads taken
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
attomoles. Background levels are
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
are 376, 1,504, and 94,000
also verified.
i1000SR 5.0x 1109 Wash Cup Pre- FSE Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, To set the pipettor probe position 3 min Lint-free tissues
alignment i1000SR Ready, at the wash cup required for Deionized water
Warming flushing the system. This
procedure is used during i1000SR
installation.
installation.
installation.
installation.
installation.
i1000SR 5.0x 1110 Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, Pipettor probe positioning is set for 10 min Cotton swab or lint-free
Calibration i1000SR Ready, all positions required for aspirating tissue
Warming and dispensing specimens and Deionized water
reagents during processing. Sample carrier
Probe straightness is determined. Carrier calibration tool
(01P16-01)
(01P16-01)
(01P16-01)
(01P16-01)
(01P16-01)
i1000SR 4.0x, 1114 Carrier Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, To align the carrier transport to the 12 min Sample carriers
5.0x, Transport Calibration RSH Ready, reagent carousel latch actuator (standalone) Carrier calibration tool
5.1x, Warming and a sample carrier to the 20 min (01P16-01)
6.0x load/unload area. (ci4100) Cotton swab or lint-free
tissue
Deionized water
i1000SR 5.0x 1152 Probe Operator Diagnostics// 1 Pipettors Ready, Probe straightness and/or Probe 3 min none
Straightness/Align i1000SR Warming alignment are tested during this straightness
Test procedure. Probe straightness Probe
measures the difference at 2 alignment
positions of the probe and
compares the position to the
previous pipettor calibration. Probe
alignment moves the probe to
positions allowing visual
observation of the probe position
in the wash cup and process path.
i1000SR 5.0x 1165 Pipettor Move Operator Diagnostics// 1 Pipettors Stopped, The pipettor is moved to the wash Wash cup 1 min none
i1000SR Ready, cup to remove the pipettor probe Process path
Warming or toward the rear of the process
path for accessing processing
center components during this
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
i1000SR 5.0x 1246 Visual Particle CSC Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, Microparticles are dispensed into 20 min Microparticle bottle from reagent kit
Capture Check i1000SR Wash Warming 15 RVs during this procedure. The (once the microparticle bottle is
microparticles are washed so that used for this procedure the kit is
5 RVs are washed with only probe no longer used)
1, 5 RVs with only probe 2 and 5
RVs with only probe 3. RVs are
moved to the RV access door for
removal and visual inspection.
i1000SR 5.0x 1254 Residual FSE Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, Fifteen numbered and weighed 15 min Gravimetric Balance
Volume i1000SR Wash Warming RVs are loaded by the user during
this procedure. Wash Buffer is
dispensed into then aspirated out
of the RVs. After aspiration the
user removes and reweighs the
RVs to determine residual
volume.The difference between
the weights for each RV is
determined. This average
difference should be <9 µL (mg)
and a S.D. <2 µL (mg).
Visual inspection: (No special

tools required)
The fluid remaining in the RVs
may be used as a qualitative
visual indication of Wash Zone
function. The final RV should have
approximately 2 drops in the
bottom and no evidence of
splashing in the RV.

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)

tools required)
i1000SR 5.0x 2052 WZ Aspiration Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, Wash zone aspiration is tested 10 min none
Test i1000SR Wash Warming during this procedure. The wash
zone dispenses and aspirates
buffer from 14 RVs. The operator
is instructed to remove the RVs
and determine if the RV is half full
of buffer.
of buffer.
of buffer.
of buffer.
of buffer.
i1000SR 8.0x 2057 WZ Valve FSE Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Fluidics Ready, The pressure is measured in the none 12 min none
Pressure Check i1000SR Wash Warming wash zone manifold tubing to test
for highly restictive valves.
i1000SR 5.0x 2060 Pipettor CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 15 min Gravimetric balance
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming precision and accuracy of the WZ probe maintenance
pipettor by gravimetric water bottle
measurement. Fifteen RVs are
weighed empty and weighed again
after 50 µL of buffer is dispensed.
The operator then calculates the
difference. The final result must be
between 46 µL (mg) and 51 µL
(mg) and the CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
The fluid in the RVs may be used
as a qualitative visual indication of
Pipettor function. The final volume
should be approximately 50 µL.
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming precision and accuracy of the Tap water
pipettor by gravimetric Sample cup
measurement. Liquid is aspirated Sample carrier
and dispensed into 20 pre-
weighed RVs. 50 µL of tap water
or saline is aspirated and
dispensed into the first 15 RVs.
1000 µL of buffer is dispensed into
the last 5 RVs (bypassing the
syringe). RVs are weighed empty
and weighed again after liquid is
dispensed. The operator then
calculates the difference.
For the first 15 RVs, The final

result must be between 46 µL (mg)
and 51 µL (mg) and the CV must
be less than or equal to 1.0%.
For the last 5 RVs, each result

must be greater than or equal to
900 µL (mg).
Visual inspection: Perform

diagnostic procedure 2070 Pipettor
Check.


900 µL (mg).

Check.


900 µL (mg).

Check.


900 µL (mg).

Check.
i1000SR 5.0x 2062 Pre-Trigger CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 15 min Gravimetric balance
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming precision and accuracy of Pre-
Trigger by gravimetric
after 100 µL of Pre-Trigger is
calculates the difference. The final
be 1.0%.

tools required)
Pre-Trigger function. The final
volume should be approximately
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
be 1.0%.

tools required)
100 µL.
i1000SR 5.0x 2063 Trigger CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 15 min Gravimetric balance
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming precision and accuracy of Trigger
by gravimetric measurement.
Fifteen RVs are weighed empty
and weighed again after 300 µL of
Trigger is dispensed. The operator
then calculates the difference. The
final result must be between 285
µL (mg) and 315 µL (mg) and the
CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
Trigger function. The final volume
CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
CV must be 1.0%.

tools required)
i1000SR 5.0x 2065 Wash Zone CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the dispensing 15 min Gravimetric balance
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming precision and accuracy of the
wash zone by gravimetric
after 400 µL of buffer is
result must be between 360 µL
(mg) and 440 µL (mg) and the CV
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
Wash Zone function. The final
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.

tools required)
400 µL.
must be 2.0%.
tools required)
400 µL.
i1000SR 5.0x 2070 Pipettor Check Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, The pipettor aspirates and 50 10 min Saline or tap water
i1000SR Warming dispenses either a single 50 µL or 250 Sample carriers
5 dispenses of 50uL of saline into Sample cups
5 RVs. The user is instructed to Calibrated manual pipettor
use a calibrated pipettor to (capable of pipetting 50 µL
dispense 50 µL or 250uL of saline or 250 µL)
into an empty RV to be used as a
reference. The user removes the
RVs from the RV access door and
compares the amount of saline
dispensed by the sample pipettor
to the reference.
5 dispenses of 50 µL of liquid into Sample cups
5 RVs. The sample pipettor also Calibrated manual pipettor
dispenses 1000 µL of buffer from (capable of pipetting 50 µL
the pump (bypassing the syringe) or 250 µL and 900µL)
into 5 RVs. The user is instructed
to use a calibrated pipettor to
dispense 50 µL or 250 µL of saline
or tap water into an empty RV and
900 µL of saline or tap water into a
second RV to be used as a
compares the amount of liquid
dispensed by the pipettor to the
reference.
reference.
reference.
reference.
i1000SR 5.0x 2072 Pre-Trigger Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, Either a single 100 µL dispense or 10 min Saline or tap water
Check i1000SR Warming 3 dispenses of 100 µL of Pre- Calibrated manual pipettor
Trigger is dispensed into 5 RVs. (capable of pipetting 100
The user is instructed to use a µL or 300 µL)
calibrated pipettor to dispense 100
µL or 300 µL of saline or tap water
compares the amount of Pre-
Trigger dispensed by the Pre-
Trigger /Trigger manifold to the
reference.
reference.
reference.
reference.
reference.
i1000SR 5.0x 2073 Trigger Check Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, Either a single 300 µL dispense or 10 min Saline or tap water
i1000SR Warming 3 dispenses of 300 µL of Trigger is Calibrated manual pipettor
dispensed into 5 Rvs. The user is (capable of pipetting 300
instructed to use a calibrated µL or 900 µL)
pipettor to dispense 300 µL or 900
µL of saline or tap water into an
empty RV to be used as a
compares the amount of Trigger
dispensed by the Pre-Trigger
/Trigger manifold to the reference.
i1000SR 5.0x 2075 Wash Zone Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, Either a single 400 µL dispense or 10 min Saline or tap water
Check i1000SR Warming 3 dispenses of 400 µL of buffer is Calibrated manual pipettor
dispensed into 15 RVs (5 RVs per (capable of pipetting 400
wash zone nozzle). The user is µL or 1200 µL)
instructed to use a calibrated
pipettor to dispense 400 µL or
1200 µL of saline or tap water into
an empty RV to be used as a
compares the amount of buffer
dispensed by wash zone to the
reference.
reference.
reference.
reference.
reference.
i1000SR 5.0x 2136 Air Flush Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, Wash buffer, Trigger and Pre- Wash Buffer 5 min Wash buffer transfer tubing
i1000SR Warming trigger tubing are flushed with air Trigger Empty wash buffer reservoir
during this procedure Pre-trigger
Wash buffer
input tubing
End testing
Wash buffer
input tubing
End testing
Wash buffer
input tubing
End testing
Wash buffer
input tubing
End testing
Wash buffer
input tubing
End testing
i1000SR 5.0x 2137 Flush Fluids Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, This procedure flushes the tubings Operator Logon: 3 min none
i1000SR Warming with wash buffer, trigger and pre- No Options
trigger solutions. CSC Logon:
The following amounts are flushed: Select:
Buffer: minimum 75 mL
Pre-Trigger: 14 mL Pipettor
Trigger: 14 mL Wash zone
Pre-trigger
Note Trigger
Performing this All
procedure does not Exit
reset the clock for the
automatic flush.
Note
To flush wash buffer,
inventory status must
be greater than 25%
Pre-trigger
Note Trigger
Performing this All
automatic flush.
Note
be greater than 25%
Pre-trigger
Note Trigger
Performing this All
automatic flush.
Note
be greater than 25%
Pre-trigger
Note Trigger
Performing this All
automatic flush.
Note
be greater than 25%
Pre-trigger
Note Trigger
Performing this All
automatic flush.
Note
be greater than 25%
i1000SR 5.0x 2138 Long Term Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Ready, All pumps are flushed with air, 30 min 4 Liter container of
Shutdown i1000SR Warming then water, then air, and all RVs deionized water
are removed. The pressure monitor Empty 4 Liter container
will be left dry. Wash buffer reservoir
Wash buffer transfer
tubing
Deionized water
tubing
Deionized water
tubing
Deionized water
tubing
Deionized water
tubing
Deionized water
i1000SR 5.0x 2160 Prime Wash Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, 100 µL Wash Buffer dispenses 1 min none
Zone i1000SR Warming through the valves into 3 RVs in
the Wash Zone during this
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
i1000SR 5.0x 2162 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, 300 µL Pre-Trigger and 100 µL 1 min none
Trigger and Trigger i1000SR Warming Trigger Solutions dispense into
two RVs at the valves in the pre-
trigger/trigger manifold.
i1000SR 7.0x 2162 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, 200 µL Pre-Trigger and Trigger 1 min none
Trigger and Trigger i1000SR Warming Solutions dispense into two RVs at
the valves in the pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
i1000SR 8.0x 2162 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, 200 µL Pre-Trigger and Trigger 1 min none
Trigger and Trigger i1000SR Warming Solutions dispense into two RVs at
the valves in the pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
i1000SR 5.0x 2182 ARM FSE Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, The ARCHITECT ARM accessory 45 min ARM decontamination kit (7-
Decontamination // Ready, is decontaminated during this 78172-01) 0.5% Sodium
SCC Warming procedure hypochlorite
ARM Concentrated wash buffer
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
(LN06C54)
i1000SR 7.0x 2190 Internal Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, The Wash Buffer fluidics system is 90 min Absorbent tissues/towels
Decontamination i1000SR Warming decontaminated during this Bleach preparation
procedure. container with 5L 0.5%
sodium hypochlorite
Sodium hypochlorite is pumped solution
into the buffer fluidics and allowed Buffer filter
to remain for 10 minutes. After 10 Concentrated Wash Buffer
minutes the sodium hypochlorite is (1L bottle)
pumped out as waste and buffer is Internal Decon Extension
pumped through the system to Tubing/Cable Kit
clear the fluidic tubing. Probe Conditioning
Solution
Reagent carrier
Wash buffer preparation
container
tubing
i1000SR 8.0x 2190 Internal Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, The Wash Buffer fluidics system is 90 min Absorbent tissues/towels
sodium hypochlorite
Solution
Reagent carrier
container
tubing
i1000SR 5.0x 2190 Internal Operator Maintenance// 1 Monthly Ready, The Wash Buffer fluidics system is 90 min Absorbent tissues/towels
sodium hypochlorite
Solution
Reagent carrier
container
tubing
sodium hypochlorite
Solution
Reagent carrier
container
tubing
sodium hypochlorite
Solution
Reagent carrier
container
tubing
i1000SR 5.0x 3002 Reagent Operator Diagnostics// 1 Carousels Stopped, The reagent carousel is moved Carriers 10 min Reagent carriers
Carousel Test i1000SR Ready, and checked for step loss during currently
Warming this procedure. loaded in
reagent
carousel
Single reagent
carousel
position
All reagent
carousel
positions
Exit
reagent
carousel
Single reagent
carousel
position
All reagent
carousel
positions
Exit
reagent
carousel
Single reagent
carousel
position
All reagent
carousel
positions
Exit
reagent
carousel
Single reagent
carousel
position
All reagent
carousel
positions
Exit
reagent
carousel
Single reagent
carousel
position
All reagent
carousel
positions
Exit
i1000SR 5.0x 3120 Vortexer Test Operator Diagnostics// 1 Reaction Stopped, Vortexer function is tested. The Vortexer # 1 2 min none
i1000SR Mechanisms Ready, vortexers are tested at eight Vortexer # 2
Warming different speeds in up and down All
positions.
Speeds tested (RPMs):
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions.
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions.
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions.
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
positions.
1502; 1755; 2016; 2264; 2520;
2765; 3034; 3289
i1000SR 5.0x 3122 Vortexer Splash CSC Diagnostics// 1 Reaction Stopped, This procedure tests splashing of Vortexer # 1 5 min Dye diluted with buffer
i1000SR Mechanisms Ready, the vortexer. Vortexer # 2
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
i1000SR 8.0x 3145 RV CSC Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Reaction Ready, All 23 RVS (reaction vessels)are 20 min none
Load/Unload Test i1000SR Mechanisms Warming unloaded. The operator has the
option to have the system load 23
new RVs or leave the process
path empty.
i1000SR 5.0x 3155 Diverter Test Operator Diagnostics// 1 Reaction Stopped, The wash zone inlet, wash zone RV unload 2 min none
i1000SR Mechanisms Ready, outlet, and RV unload diverters are Wash zone
Warming tested during this procedure. inlet
Diverters are moved 10 times. Wash zone
outlet
All
outlet
All
outlet
All
outlet
All
outlet
All
i1000SR 5.0x 3180 Vacuum Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Ready, Operation of the vacuum system, Wash zone 5-10 min none
System Test i1000SR Warming vacuum accumulator and drain Individual wash
valves is tested during this zone positions
procedure. Wash cup
Vacuum
system integrity
Turn vacuum
On or Off
Run all tests
sequentially
procedure. Wash cup
Vacuum
system integrity
Turn vacuum
On or Off
Run all tests
sequentially
procedure. Wash cup
Vacuum
system integrity
Turn vacuum
On or Off
Run all tests
sequentially
procedure. Wash cup
Vacuum
system integrity
Turn vacuum
On or Off
Run all tests
sequentially
procedure. Wash cup
Vacuum
system integrity
Turn vacuum
On or Off
Run all tests
sequentially
i1000SR 5.0x 3190 Waste Sensors Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, The waste pump pressure switch, Waste pump Variable Tap water
Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, liquid waste container full sensor, pressure switch
Warming and solid waste container present Liquid waste
switch are tested during this container full
procedure. sensor
Solid waste
container
present sensor
procedure. sensor
Solid waste
container
present sensor
procedure. sensor
Solid waste
container
present sensor
procedure. sensor
Solid waste
container
present sensor
procedure. sensor
Solid waste
container
present sensor
i1000SR 5.0x 3230 Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Stopped, The bar code reader is tested 1-4 min Sample carriers
Reagent carriers
Reagent kit bottles (100
test kits only)
Reagent carriers
test kits only)
Reagent carriers
test kits only)
Reagent carriers
test kits only)
Reagent carriers
test kits only)
i1000SR 5.0x 3240 Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Stopped, This procedure calibrates positions 2 min Sample carrier
i1000SR 5.0x 3253 Bar Code FSE Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows the Code 39 large 3 min none
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
i1000SR 5.0x 3310 RSH Test Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, The operation of the RSH and bar Carrier test 5-10 min Sample carriers
Warming procedure. Carrier Reagent carriers
transport Reagent kit bottles (100
motion test test kits only)
i1000SR 5.0x 3312 Carrier FSE Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, The carrier transport is moved to 1 min none
i1000SR 5.0x 3330 RSH Alignment FSE Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, This procedure allows the user to Initialize carrier 5-15 min Sample carriers
Test RSH Ready, visually check the carrier transport transport Reagent carriers
Warming alignment at various RSH Check sample Sample cups/tubes
load/unload area, aspiration area, section(s)
and reagent carousel. Check sample
carrier at
aspiration area
Check reagent
carrier at RSH
section(s)
Check reagent
carrier
placement on
carousel
carrier at
aspiration area
Check reagent
carrier at RSH
section(s)
Check reagent
carrier
placement on
carousel
carrier at
aspiration area
Check reagent
carrier at RSH
section(s)
Check reagent
carrier
placement on
carousel
carrier at
aspiration area
Check reagent
carrier at RSH
section(s)
Check reagent
carrier
placement on
carousel
carrier at
aspiration area
Check reagent
carrier at RSH
section(s)
Check reagent
carrier
placement on
carousel
i1000SR 5.0x 3405 Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, The sensors for the processing Reagent 5 min none
Interlock/Carousel i1000SR Sensors Ready, center cover and reagent carousel carousel home
Sensor Test Warming cover are tested during this Reagent carrier
procedure. latch
Reagent carrier
detect
Reagent
carousel cover
interlock
Reagent
carousel cover
integrity
Processing
center cover
interlock
procedure. latch
Reagent carrier
detect
Reagent
carousel cover
interlock
Reagent
carousel cover
integrity
Processing
center cover
interlock
procedure. latch
Reagent carrier
detect
Reagent
carousel cover
interlock
Reagent
carousel cover
integrity
Processing
center cover
interlock
procedure. latch
Reagent carrier
detect
Reagent
carousel cover
interlock
Reagent
carousel cover
integrity
Processing
center cover
interlock
procedure. latch
Reagent carrier
detect
Reagent
carousel cover
interlock
Reagent
carousel cover
integrity
Processing
center cover
interlock
i1000SR 5.0x 3420 Level Sensors Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, Wash buffer, Pre-trigger and Wash buffer 1-2 min none
Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, Trigger Level Sensors are checked Pre-trigger
Warming during this procedure. Trigger
All
All
All
All
All
i1000SR 5.0x 3535 Temperature Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, RVs containing buffer are 75 min External thermometer
Check - Manual i1000SR Warming equilibrated in each of the 3 (LN08C94-88)
process path zones during this WZ probe maintenance
procedure. Tap water in the WZ water bottle (LN 6E68)
probe maintenance water bottle is
loaded on the reagent carousel by
the RSH. When instructed, the
user inserts a thermometer probe
to measure the temperature.
Process path temperature must be
between 36.4° C-37.6° C and
reagent cooler temperature must
be between .0° C-12.0° C.
i1000SR 5.0x 3540 Temperature Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, Temperatures in the Processing Process path 1 min none
Status i1000SR Ready, Module are read and their status Trigger & pre-
Warming displayed. trigger
Normal temperature Ranges: Wash zone
Process path: 36.4° C-37.6° C Reagent cooler
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6° C Ambient
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C All
Reagent cooler: 2.0° C-12.0° C
Note
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
pass or fail. The value
is for informational
use only.
Note
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only.
Note
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
use only. The ambient
temperature value is
not available for the
ci4100 system.
Note
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
ci4100 system.
Note
Ambient temperature
does not have a
range and will not
ci4100 system.
i1000SR 5.0x 3630 LLS Test Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, The ability of the pipettor probe to RV2 8 min Sample cups
i1000SR Wash Warming detect liquid at the RV2, sample, Sample Sample tubes
and reagent carousel inner, Reagent One - three reagent
middle, and outer locations is carousel: bottles (100 test kit)
tested during this procedure. Inner reagent
carousel
Middle reagent
carousel
Outer reagent
carousel
All locations
carousel
Middle reagent
carousel
Outer reagent
carousel
All locations
carousel
Middle reagent
carousel
Outer reagent
carousel
All locations
carousel
Middle reagent
carousel
Outer reagent
carousel
All locations
carousel
If logged on as FSE and the Middle reagent
Reagent carousel option is carousel
selected, the procedure will allow Outer reagent
the FSE to specify the reagent carousel
bottle location to test. All locations
i1000SR 5.0x 3810 Pressure Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, The pipettor board and pressure 2 min none
Monitoring Test i1000SR Wash Warming monitor of the pipettor are tested
during this procedure.
i1000SR 5.0x 3850 PC Board Test FSE Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, The power supply, motor driver 1 min none
i1000SR Sensors Ready, boards, and DC driver I/O boards
Warming are tested for power interrupt error
conditions during this procedure.
i1000SR 5.0x 4100 Buffer Run Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, This procedure allows the 60 min 2 Reagent kits (3 bottles
i1000SR Warming simulation of running assays using per kit) - bottles must be
wash buffer instead of reagents to empty
troubleshoot system failures. 5 Sample carriers
2 Reagent carriers
Note: You can enter the number Sample cups/tubes
of tests to be run when logged on
as FSE.
2 Reagent carriers
as FSE.
2 Reagent carriers
as FSE.
2 Reagent carriers
as FSE.
2 Reagent carriers
as FSE.
i1000SR 5.0x 4110 Module Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 1 min none
Initialization i1000SR Ready, perform a processing module
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
center covers open.
i1000SR 5.0x 4120 RSH Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, This procedures allows you to 1 min none
center cover open.
center cover open.
center cover open.
center cover open.
center cover open.
i1000SR 5.0x 4150 Functional Area Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Stopped, This procedure provides the ability RV loading Variable none
Tests i1000SR Ready, to exercise and test the Process path:
Warming functionality of various areas of Process path
the processing center and reagent only
carousel. The following functional Process path
area options are: complete
Wash zone Z-
RV loading axis only
Process path Reagent
Reagent carousel carousel:
Pipettor Dispersion
All areas Reagent
carousel
complete
Pipettor:
Z-axis only
Simulated
assay
movement
All areas
Wash zone Z-
Pipettor Dispersion
All areas Reagent
carousel
complete
Pipettor:
Z-axis only
Simulated
assay
movement
All areas
Wash zone Z-
Pipettor Dispersion
All areas Reagent
carousel
complete
Pipettor:
Z-axis only
Simulated
assay
movement
All areas
Wash zone Z-
Pipettor Dispersion
All areas Reagent
carousel
complete
Pipettor:
Z-axis only
Simulated
assay
movement
All areas
Wash zone Z-
Pipettor Dispersion
All areas Reagent
carousel
complete
Pipettor:
Z-axis only
Simulated
assay
movement
All areas
i1000SR 5.1x 5145 Wash cup Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, To verify the wash cup valves are None 3 min
valves Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, correctly connected.
Warming
Warming
Warming
Warming
i1000SR 5.0x 5150 Motor Tests Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedures tests the homing Pipettor and 2 min none
i1000SR Motors Ready, of the pipettor, syringe, process syringe:
Warming path, and reagent carousel motors. Pipettor Z axis
Pipettor theta
axis
Pipettor syringe
Home all
Process path:
Process path
RV loader
Wash zone
Home all
Reagent
carousel:
Reagent
carousel
Reagent
access door
Home all
Pipettor theta
axis
Pipettor syringe
Home all
Process path:
Process path
RV loader
Wash zone
Home all
Reagent
carousel:
Reagent
carousel
Reagent
access door
Home all
Pipettor theta
axis
Pipettor syringe
Home all
Process path:
Process path
RV loader
Wash zone
Home all
Reagent
carousel:
Reagent
carousel
Reagent
access door
Home all
Pipettor theta
axis
Pipettor syringe
Home all
Process path:
Process path
RV loader
Wash zone
Home all
Reagent
carousel:
Reagent
carousel
Reagent
access door
Home all
Pipettor theta
axis
Pipettor syringe
Home all
Process path:
Process path
RV loader
Wash zone
Home all
Reagent
carousel:
Reagent
carousel
Reagent
access door
Home all
i1000SR 5.0x 5160 Pump Motor Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure tests the homing of Pre-trigger 2 min none
Tests i1000SR Motors Ready, the pre-trigger, trigger, wash Trigger
Warming buffer, and wash zone pump Buffer
motors. Wash zone
Home all
motors. Wash zone
Home all
motors. Wash zone
Home all
motors. Wash zone
Home all
motors. Wash zone
Home all
i1000SR 5.0x 5165 Valve Tests Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests the wash Wash zone: 1-2 min none
i1000SR Sensors Ready, zone, pre-trigger, trigger, vacuum, WZ dispense
Warming pipettor syringe, wash cup drain, valve 1 (V1)
and liquid waste valves. WZ dispense
valve 2 (V2)
WZ dispense
valve 3 (V3)
WZ bypass
valve 4 (V4)
WZ aspirate
valve
All
Pre-
trigger/trigger:
Pre-trigger
dispense valve
(V1)
Pre-trigger
bypass valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense valve
(V3)
Trigger bypass
valve (V4)
All
Wash cup:
Wash cup
upper valve
Wash cup
outer drain
valve
Wash cup
inner drain
valve
All
Other:
Pipettor syringe
valve
Reagent cooler
condensate
valve
Buffer inlet
valve
Accumulator
drain valve
Vacuum filter
valve
All
i1000SR 5.1x 5165 Valve Tests Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests the wash Wash zone: 1-2 min none
i1000SR Sensors Ready, zone, pre-trigger, trigger, vacuum, WZ dispense
Warming pipettor syringe, wash cup drain, valve 1 (V1)
and liquid waste valves. WZ dispense
valve 2 (V2)
WZ dispense
valve 3 (V3)
WZ bypass
valve 4 (V4)
WZ aspirate
valve

c8000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

c8000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARCHITECT c8000 System Service and Support Manual

Manual Revision Number

Front Matter Content Control Number

All other Revision History is located in the table below:

REVISION DATE SECTIONS REVISED/ADDED TSBs INCORPORATED ISAs INCORPORATED

96750-127 JAN/2014 c8000 Revision 96750-127 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-126 MAY/2013 c8000 Revision 96750-126 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-125 JAN/2013 c8000 Revision 96750-125 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-124 JUN/2012 c8000 Revision 96750-124 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-123 MAY/2011 c8000 Revision 96750-123 Change Listing N/A 126-104

96750-122 OCT/2010 c8000 Revision 96750-122 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-121 MAR/2010 c8000 Revision 96750-121 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-120 SEP/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-120 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-119 AUG/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-119 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-117 FEB/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-117 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-116 JAN/2008 c8000 Revision 96750-116 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-115 JULY/2007 c8000 Revision 96750-115 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-114 MAR/2007 c8000 Revision 96750-114 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-113 FEB/2007 c8000 Revision 96750-113 Change Listing N/A 126-071A

96750-112 MAY/2006 c8000 Revision 96750-112 Change Listing N/A 126-055

96750-111 MAR/2006 c8000 Revision 96750-111 Change Listing N/A 126-035

96750-110 OCT/2005 c8000 Revision 96750-110 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-109 AUG/2005 c8000 Revision 96750-109 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-108 MAR/2005 c8000 Revision 96750-108 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-107 JAN/2005 c8000 Revision 96750-107 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-106 FEB/2004 c8000 Revision 96750-106 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-105 OCT/2003 c8000 Revision 96750-105 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-104 APR/2003 c8000 Revision 96750-104 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-103 DEC/2002 c8000 Revision 96750-103 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-102 DEC/2002 c8000 Revision 96750-102 Change Listing N/A N/A

96750-101 SEP/2002 ALL (NEW PUBLICATION) N/A N/A

(Document Control Number 204670-102)

the copyright notice appears on all copies;

ALL GLOBAL Change "the one (1) screw" to "the screw"

ALL GLOBAL Change "LN7D36-01" to "(2-94851-02)"

Frnt Title Change to "Document Control Number 96750-102"

Frnt Title Change to "Document Control Number 96662-102"

1 Change to "Document Control Number 96663-102"

1 1.1 In "Introduction", change "...harm to an (operator or service personnel). Warnings..." to "...harm to

1 1.1 Replace existing content with RSH 1.1 content

2 Change to "Document Control Number 96664-102"

2 In "AC/DC Controller", add "S1 & S2 Switch Settings" table

2 In "SMC", add "S1 Switch Settings" table

4 Change to "Document Control Number 96666-102"

4 C2 Change to "Document Control Number 96668-102"

4 D1 Change to "Document Control Number 96670-102"

4 D2 Change to "Document Control Number 96671-102"

4 D3 Change to "Document Control Number 96672-102"

4 E2 Change to "Document Control Number 96673-102"

4 E3 Change to "Document Control Number 96674-102"

4 E4 Change to "Document Control Number 96675-102"

4 E5 Change to "Document Control Number 96676-102"

4 E6 Change to "Document Control Number 96677-102"

4 E7 Change to "Document Control Number 96678-102"

4 F1 Change to "Document Control Number 96681-102"

4 G1 Change to "Document Control Number 96682-102"

4 G2 Change to "Document Control Number 96683-102"

4 L1 Change to "Document Control Number 96689-102"

4 L2 Change to "Document Control Number 96690-102"

4 M1 Change to "Document Control Number 96692-102"

4 M2 Change to "Document Control Number 96693-102"

4 M4 Change to "Document Control Number 96695-102"

4 N1 Change to "Document Control Number 96697-102"

4 N1.06 Add callouts to "Remove/Install Float Switch, Water Bath"